Kitchen & Bath 2015-16 Cabinet Specifications Guide

Great design. Greater capacity.

TOCTABLE OF CONTENTS

2015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

IND Index by Product Description

100 Specifications

200 Door Styles and Finishes

300 Wall Cabinets

400 Base Cabinets

500 Tall Cabinets

600 Vanity Cabinets

700 Other Room Cabinetry

800 Moldings, Valances, Accents

900 Accessories

1000 Fillers, Panels, Columns

1100 Modifications

1200 Replacement Parts

DISC Discontinued

IN Index by Product Code

Table of Contents

IND.12015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

641⁄2" High, Utility, FH Door(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UFH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.4

A

Acrylic Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPOLISH . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPRAYADH . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Aluminum Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Front . . TFRS . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13-15

Aluminum Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTFRS . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13-15

Aluminum Door Insert Option, Horizontal Reeded Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THRZ. . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13-15

Aluminum Door Insert Option, Horizontal Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTHRZ . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13-15

Aluminum Door Insert Option, Vertical Reeded Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TVRT . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13-15

Aluminum Door Insert Option, Vertical Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTVRT . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13-15

Angle Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.31

Angle Base, 135° Corner Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFH_CIA . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.32

Angle Base, 135° Corner Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFH_COA . . . . . . . . . . . 400.32

Angle Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.12

Angle Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.28

Angle Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAC24. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.28

Angle Wall, 135° Corner Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W_CIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.29

Angle Wall, 135° Corner Outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W_COA . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.29

Appliance Cut-Out Mod, Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOCM . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.47

Appliance Cut-Out Mod, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.47

Appliance Cut-Out Mod, Triple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.47

Appliance Garage, Diagonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.17

Appliance Garage, Tambour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.13

Appliance Panel, Decorative, Compactor . . . . . . . . DCFP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Decorative, Dish Drawer . . . . . . . DDFPSD. . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Decorative, Dishwasher . . . . . . . . DDFP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Decorative, Refrigerator. . . . . . . . DRFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.21

Appliance Panel, Plain, Compactor . . . . . . . . . . . . CFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Plain, Dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . DFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Plain, Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . RFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Raised, Compactor . . . . . . . . . . . RCFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Raised, Dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . RDFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliance Panel, Raised, Refrigerator. . . . . . . . . . . RRFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20

Appliqué, Keystone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.5

Appliqué, Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROSSQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.28

Asymmetrical Corner Base w/Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . ACB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24

Asymmetrical Corner Base w/Super Susan . . . . . . . ASSCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24

Asymmetrical Corner Wall Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . ACW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20

Automated Drive Kit for Waste Basket Cabinets . . AUTODRV . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

B

Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.4

Base Door Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-DORG . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.5

Base Door Organizer, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDORG. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.44

Base Hutch Molding, Arts & Crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . ACBHM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Base Hutch Molding, Astragal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASTBHM . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Base Hutch Molding, Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBHM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Base Hutch Molding, Coliseum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSBHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Base Hutch Molding, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Base Hutch Molding, Rook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RBHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Base Hutch Molding, Santorini. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Base Hutch Molding, Thermofoil, Small & Large . . FBHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10

Base Oven Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.21

Base Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . BSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12

Base w/Mixer Shelf, FH Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFH_MX . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11

Base w/Pantry, FH Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11

Base w/Pots & Pans Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_PP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9

Base w/Pots & Pans Storage, Bottom Drawer . . . . . SBD_PP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9

Base w/Pull-Out Chopping Block & Roll-Out Trays . . RBCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.22

Base w/Pull-Out Ironing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_IB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.4

Base w/Pull-Out Pantry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFHKPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12

Base w/Pull-Out Recycling Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.23

Base w/Pull-Out Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12

Base w/Pull-Out Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_POT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11

Base w/Pull-Out Tray Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12

Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . B_WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.23

Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s), Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_WBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.23

Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s), FH Door . . . . BFH_WB . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.23

Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s), FH Door, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFH_WBS . . . . . . . . . . . 400.23

Base w/Roll-Out Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.8

Base w/Tiered Cutlery Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_TCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.10

Base w/Tiered Cutlery Divider, Pots & Pans Storage . . B_TCDPP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9

Base w/Tiered Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_HSOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9

Base w/Tiered Storage, FH Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFH_H2SOS. . . . . . . . . . . 400.9

Base w/Tiered Storage, Pots & Pans Storage, FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFH_PP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9

Base w/Tray Divider, FH Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12

Base w/Tray Dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12

Base w/Wicker Baskets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_WI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11

Base, FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.6

Bin Lids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIN_LID . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.39

Bin Replacement Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.39

Bin Storage in Drawers, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.38

Bin Storage in Roll-Out Trays, Installed. . . . . . . . . . IBINDDSOS . . . . . . . . . 1100.38

Blind Corner Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.27

Blind Corner Base Pull-Out Storage Kit . . . . . . . . . KIT-BBCPO . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8

Blind Corner Base Pull-Out Storage Restrictor Unit . . BBCPORESTRICT 400.29, 900.8

Blind Corner Base w/Full Access Trays . . . . . . . . . . BFHBC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.28

Blind Corner Base w/Pull-Out Storage . . . . . . . . . . BBCPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.29

Blind Corner Base w/Pull-Out Storage, FH Door . . . BFHBCPO . . . . . . . . . . . 400.29

Blind Corner Base, FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFHBBC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.27

Blind Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.14

Blind Overlay Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOP. . . . 300.14-15 ,400.27,30

Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

Bookcase/Open Cabinet w/Frame, Base . . . . . . . . . BODF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.13

Bookcase/Open Cabinet w/Frame, Tall . . . . . . . . . . USF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.13

Bookcase/Open Cabinet w/Frame, Wall . . . . . . . . . BKF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.12

Bookcase/Open Cabinet, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.11

Bookcase/Open Cabinet, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . US. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.11

Bookcase/Open Cabinet, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.10

Box Column Filler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.14

Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTPEC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.17

Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTPEC2. . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.17

Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTPEC2. . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.17

Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VTPEC2. . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.17

Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WTPEC2 . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.17

Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Base . . . . BTPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.16

Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Desk Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTPEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.16

Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Tall . . . . . UTPEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.16

IND.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Vanity Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VTPEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.16

Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Wall . . . . WTPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.16

Box Column Filler, Fluted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.15

Box Only Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.35

Box Only w/Drawer Fronts Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BWDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.35

Bread Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Bread Board Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MBBG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Bread Box Accessory, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42

Break-Off Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8

Broom Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-BROOMHLDR . . . . . . 900.4

Bulldog Clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BULLDOG . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

Bumper Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BP-FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

Bumper Pads Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23

Bumper Pads Not Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOBUMP. . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23

Butcher Block Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.36

C

Cabinet Care Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Capital w/Spool Assembly, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAPSPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26

Capital, Estate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPTLESTS . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26

Capital, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TPB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26

Charging Station Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCCSM. . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.45

Chimney Component, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHSDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.45

Chimney Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.45

Chimney Component, Wainscot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHCWC . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.45

Chopping Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHOBLOK . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Columns, Empire Square, Base, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Columns, Empire Square, Base, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.8

Columns, Empire Square, Base, Thermofoil, Plain . . BSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.13

Columns, Empire Square, Base, Wood, Plain/Fluted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.33

Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain. . . . . . . . . . . DSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.8

Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Thermofoil, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.13

Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Wood, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.33

Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.8

Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Thermofoil, Plain . . USQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.13

Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Wood, Plain/Fluted USQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.33

Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.8

Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Thermofoil, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.13

Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Wood, Plain/Fluted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.33

Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WSQC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WSQC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.8

Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Thermofoil, Plain. . WSQC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.13

Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Wood, Plain/Fluted . . WSQC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.33

Container Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONHOLDER. . . . . . . . . 900.13

Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.13

Cooktop Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.22

Corbels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBL-__ . . . . . . . . . . 800.31-32

Corbels for Wood Hoods, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . CBL_I . . . . . . . . . . . 300.38-43

Counter Support Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.32

Counter Wall w/FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.10

Counter Wall w/Full-Height Metal Tambour. . . . . . FHTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.13

Counter Wall w/One Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.10

Counter Wall w/Tambour Appliance Garage . . . . . WAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.13

Counter Wall w/Three Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.11

Counter Wall w/Two Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.11

Counter Wall w/Vertical Lift Door Appliance Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVLDAG . . . . . . . . . . . 300.12

Crown Molding Mounting Strip, Finished . . . . . . . CRNMTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Crown Molding Mounting Strip, Unfinished . . . . . CRNMTSUF . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Crown Molding, Arts & Crafts Small Stepped . . . . ACSTPCRN . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Classic Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Classic, Decorative. . . . . . . . . . . . CDCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Crown Molding, Cove, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCVM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Crown Molding, Crescent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRESCRN . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXCRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Marquis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRQCRN . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Pillowed Large. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WCRN_P . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Pillowed, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . DCM_P . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Crown Molding, Premium Veneer, Cove . . . . . . . . CCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6

Crown Molding, Premium Veneer, Straight/Shaker . . SHKV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6

Crown Molding, Renaissance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Shaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMCRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Stepped Cove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STPCRN. . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Molding, Thermofoil, Large . . . . . . . . . . . . FLCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9

Crown Molding, Thermofoil, Medium . . . . . . . . . . FCCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9

Crown Molding, Thermofoil, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . FSMCRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9

Crown Molding, Wide Cove Large. . . . . . . . . . . . . WCVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15

Crown Specialty Molding, Cairo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.18

Crown Specialty Molding, Palladian . . . . . . . . . . . . PALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.18

Crown Specialty Molding, Persia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.18

Crown Specialty Molding, Thermofoil, Inside Cove . . FCOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9

Crown Specialty Molding, Thermofoil, Soffit . . . . . FSFM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9

Cutlery Divider Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.11

Cutting Board Door Rack Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DMCBK. . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.5

Cutting Board Door Rack, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . DMCBM . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.8

D

Decorative Door Insert Option, Art Glass, Front . . . LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.10

Decorative Door Insert Option, Art Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.10

Decorative Door Insert Option, Broad Stripe Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Broad Stripe Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBRD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Clear Beveled Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.10

Decorative Door Insert Option, Clear Beveled Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.10

Decorative Door Insert Option, Cross Reeded Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Cross Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Epic Mirror, Front . . EPC. . . . . . . . 600.14, 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Epic Mirror, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PEPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

IND.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Decorative Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Front . . FRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Glacier Glass, Front . . GLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Glacier Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PGLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Gunmetal Mirror, Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GNM. . . . . . . 600.14, 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Gunmetal Mirror, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PGNM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Matrix Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Matrix Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Horizontal Reeded Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Horizontal Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PNHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Vertical Reeded Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Vertical Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PNVR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Patina Mirror, Front . . PTN. . . . . . . . 600.14, 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Patina Mirror, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PPTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Prepared for Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.10

Decorative Door Insert Option, Prepared for Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PNON . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.10

Decorative Door Insert Option, Rain Glass, Front . . RIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Rain Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Horizontal Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HRZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Horizontal Glass, Peninsula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PHRZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Vertical Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Vertical Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Seedy Glass, Front . . . SDY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Seedy Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSDY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Standard Mirror, Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Standard Mirror, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Water Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Insert Option, Water Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.11

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Front, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . . . . SDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . BDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PADB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . PSDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . PBDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Front, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . . . . SDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . BDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PADA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . PSDA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . PBDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.13

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Front, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.16

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . . . . SDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.16

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . BDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.16

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PADE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.16

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . PSDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.16

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . PBDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.16

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Front, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.14

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . . . . SDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.14

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.14

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.14

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . PSDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.14

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . PBDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.14

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Front, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.15

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . . . . SDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.15

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . BDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.15

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.15

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . . . . . . PSDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.15

Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . . . . . . . . . PBDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.15

Decorative Door Option, Clear Glass, Front . . . . . . DG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.12

Decorative Door Option, Clear Glass, Peninsula . . . PDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.12

Deluxe Panel, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DBP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.18

Deluxe Panel, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.19

Deluxe Panel, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.18

Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.6

Desk Base w/Pull-Out Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.7

Desk Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container . . . . . . . . . D_WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.7

Desk Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D_WBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.7

Desk Drawer Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.5

Desk Drawer, Pencil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.6

Desk Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.9

Diagonal Corner Counter Wall w/Tambour Garage . . DWAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.17

Diagonal Corner Counter Wall w/Tambour Garage & Adj Lazy Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDWAGW . . . . . . . . . . . 300.17

Diagonal Corner Stacked Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.16

Diagonal Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.16

Diagonal Corner Wall w/Adjustable Lazy Susan . . . LSDWW . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.17

Diagonal Front Corner Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26

Diagonal Front Corner Base w/Lazy Susan, FH Door. . LDCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26

IND.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Diagonal Front Corner Base, FH Door . . . . . . . . . . DBFH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26

Diagonal Front Corner Base, FH Door, Fixed Shelf . . FDSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26

Diagonal Front Sink Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26

Diagonal Sink Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.25

Diagonal Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.11

Diagonal Vanity Base, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . AHVDCB . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.11

Dishwasher Base Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.20

Door, Square Foot Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23

Double Angle Base w/FH Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.31

Double Angle Vanity Base w/FH Doors. . . . . . . . . . VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.11

Double Angle Vanity Base w/FH Doors, Adult Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AHVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.11

Double Angle Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAC13. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.28

Drawer Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DB. . . . . . . . . 400.14-17, 700.5

Drawer Base w/Glass Front Display . . . . . . . . . . . . BD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.17

Drawer Base w/Tiered Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DBT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9

Drawer Base, Four Drawers w/Tiered Cutlery Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DB_TCD . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.17

Drawer Base, Three Drawers w/Bread Board . . . . . DB_BB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.16

Drawer Base, Three Drawers w/Glass Front Display . . DB_IG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.17

Drawer Base, Three Drawers w/Tiered Cutlery Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DB_TCD . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.16

Drawer Base, Two Drawers w/Pegboard . . . . . . . . DB_PEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.15

Drawer Divider System, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I__DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.41

Drawer Downgrade to Full Extension . . . . . . . . . . . DRWFXD. . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6

Drawer Front, Square Foot Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAWERFRONT. . . . . . . 200.23

Drawer Organizer Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOT . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.12-13

Drawer Organizer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.40

Drawer Organizer, Cutlery Divider Insert . . . . . . . . DOBCUT . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14

Drawer Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close FX . . . DRWHD . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6

Drawer, Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD_D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.14

Drill Template, Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRILLTEMP . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

E

Easy Reach Square Corner Base w/Shelf. . . . . . . . . SCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24

Easy Reach Square Corner Base w/Super Susan . . . SSCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24

Easy Reach Square Corner Drawer Base. . . . . . . . . DBSCB . . . . . . . 400.25, DISC.4

Easy Reach Square Corner Drawer Base Installation Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DBSCBIS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

Easy Reach Square Corner Drawer Base, Drawer Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DBSCB_DW. . . . . . . . . . 1200.8

Easy Reach Square Corner Sink Front. . . . . . . . . . . SCSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.25

Easy Reach Square Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20

Easy Reach Square Corner Wall, Open Display . . . . WODSCW. . . . . . . . . . . 300.20

Edge Banding Material, Acrylic/Thermofoil . . . . . . . FEBND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Edge Banding Material, Premium Veneer . . . . . . . . EEBND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Edge Banding Material, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EBND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Edge Cap Moldings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.20

End Panel w/Filler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.12

End Panel w/Fluted Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.13

End Panel, 3⁄4" Thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.11

End Panel, Peninsula, 3⁄4" Thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.11

End Treatment, Finished End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26

End Treatment, Matching End Mod, FH Door . . . . FHME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.27

Extend End Panel Back Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.28

Extend End Panel Down Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.29

F

Fast Caps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8

Feet, Aluminum, Decorative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.3

Feet, Decorative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.38

File Drawer Base, Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.8

File Drawer Base, Single. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DFDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.8

File Drawer Hardware, Legal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-LEGAL. . . . . . . . . . . 900.14

File Drawer Hardware, Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-LETTER . . . . . . . . . . 900.14

Filler, 0° Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BZF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.5

Filler, 45° Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.5

Filler, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Filler, Corner, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Filler, Corner, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Filler, Corner, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Filler, Corner, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Filler, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Fluted, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Fluted, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Fluted, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Fluted, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Fluted, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

FIller, Inside Corner Angle, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . DACFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UACFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . VACFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WACFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . DACFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UACFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . VACFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . WACFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7

Filler, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Vanity Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Filler, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

Finish Material, Quart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QTFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Finished Back Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26

Finished Bottom Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26

Finished Top Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26

Floor Mod, Add Intermediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.31

Floor Mod, Move Intermediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.31

Frame & Door Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36

Frieze Molding, Hamlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Frieze Molding, Pergola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Frieze Molding, Wisteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WISTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

G

Glass Door Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

Grocery Bag Storage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GBSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.5

Grocery Bag Storage Unit, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . GBSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.8

Guide Kit, Full Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UXDSL_PI . . . . . . . . . . 1200.11

Guide Kit, Heavy Duty Quiet Close . . . . . . . . . . . . USMR_HDKIT . . . . . . . 1200.11

Guide Kit, Quiet Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USMR_KIT. . . . . . . . . . 1200.11

H

Hamper Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHAMPBAG . . . . . . . . . . 900.8

Hamper Kit, Tilt-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-HAMP__TH . . . . . . . . 900.8

Hardware, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW-__ . . . . . . . . . . 900.19-26

Heat Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.10

Hinge Bore/Prep, Left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23

Hinge Bore/Prep, None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23

Hinge Bore/Prep, Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23

Hinge Caps, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HNG-FR-CAP. . . . . . . . 1200.10

Hinge Dowels, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.10

Hinge Downgrade Mod, Non-Quiet Close . . . . . . . HNGNSC. . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.5

IND.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Hinge Kit, Bi-fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HNG-BIFOLD . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinge Kit, Bi-fold, Automated Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-WBFLS. . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinge Kit, Lift and Stay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HNG-WLS . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinge Kit, Lift and Stay, Automated Drive . . . . . . . KIT-WLSS . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinge Kit, Vertical Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HNG-WVL . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinge Kit, Vertical Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-WVLDAG . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinge Kit, Vertical Lift, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . KIT-WVLS . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinge Restrictor Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESTCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

Hinges/Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HNG-FR-_ . . . . . . . . . . 1200.10

I

Insert Molding, Astragal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Insert Molding, Aztec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AZTC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Insert Molding, Bambusa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Insert Molding, Bellflower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLFLW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Insert Molding, Cane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Insert Molding, Deco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Insert Molding, Deluxe Egg & Dart. . . . . . . . . . . . . DXEGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Insert Molding, Dentil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Insert Molding, Egg & Dart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Insert Molding, Lillian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

Insert Molding, Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

Intivo Drawer Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTDRWW. . . . . . . . . . . 1100.7

Intivo Drawer Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close . . INTDRWHD . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6

Intivo Drawer/Roll-Out Tray Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTCOVERW . . . . . . . . 1200.12

Intivo Internal Organizer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-WDOT. . . . . . . . . . . DISC.7

Intivo Roll-Out Tray Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTSOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.7

Intivo Roll-Out Tray Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTSOSHD. . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6

Invert Face of Tall Cabinet Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UINV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36

Ironing Board Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IB_COVER . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Ironing Board Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-B__IB. . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Island Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.36

Island End Shelf Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.35

K

Key Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMCKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.4

Knife Drawer Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.12

L

Lazy Susan Kit, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WOODLSK . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8

Leg Leveler, Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEGLEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5

Leg Leveler, Leg Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEGTOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5

Leg Leveler, Toe Kick Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEGCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5

Leg, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRNLEG. . . . . . . . . . 800.34-37

Light Valance Prep Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.30

Lighting Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.3

Locking Clips for Guide Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LKO__. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.11

M

Magnetic Latch/Catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAGNETSET-SILVER . . . 1200.6

Mantel Component, Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHMDX. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.47

Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . . . . . . RHDAVF . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.48

Mantel Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.47

Matching Finished Interior Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26

Message Center Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.45

Message Center Wall Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.8

Metal Trim Kit for Mantel Component, Deluxe . . . RHMDXMT . . . . . . . . . . 300.47

Metal Trim Kit for Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHDAVFMT. . . . . . . . . . 300.48

Metal Trim Kit for Mantel Component, Plain . . . . . RHMMT . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.47

Metal Trim Kit for Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRHMDXMT . . . . . . . . . 300.52

Metal Trim Kit for Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRHDAVFMT . . . . . . . . . 300.53

Metal Trim Kit for Peninsula Mantel Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRHMMT. . . . . . . . . . . . 300.52

Metal Trim Kit for Wood Hood, Deluxe w/Columns & Corbels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLMHOOD_MT. . . . 300.38-43

Metal Trim Kit for Wood Hood, Deluxe, Style A or B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHDX_MT . . . . . . . . 300.34-35

Metal Trim Kits, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMT_ . . 300.34-35,38-43,47-48,52-53

Microwave Base w/Drawer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BW_D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.21

Microwave Panels, Replacement, Wall . . . . . . . . . . RWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Microwave Shelf Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.19

Microwave Shelf, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.19

Microwave, Built-In Counter Wall w/Drawer . . . . . BMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.18

Microwave, Built-In Wall w/Lift and Stay Door . . . . BMLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.18

Microwave/Oven Panels, Replacement, Base . . . . . RBMOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Mirror/Hardware, Bi-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BVMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Mirror/Hardware, Tri-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TVMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Mirror/Medicine Cabinet, Bi-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . BV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13

Mirror/Medicine Cabinet, Tri-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13

Mixer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-BFH__MX . . . . . . . . . 900.7

Modify Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.4

Modify Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.4

Modify Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.4

Mullion Door, Canterbury, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.23

Mullion Door, Canterbury, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . PMCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.23

Mullion Door, Chi, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XMUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.22

Mullion Door, Chi, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PXMUL . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.22

Mullion Door, Deco, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DMUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Mullion Door, Deco, Peninsula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDMUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Mullion Door, Eclipse, Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.21

Mullion Door, Eclipse, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMUL . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.21

Mullion Door, Mission, Glass Lower Panel, Front . . MK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.20

Mullion Door, Mission, Glass Lower Panel, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.20

Mullion Door, Mission, Wood Lower Panel, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.20

Mullion Door, Mission, Wood Lower Panel, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.20

Mullion Door, Polaris, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.24

Mullion Door, Polaris, Peninsula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMPOL . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.24

Mullion Door, Prairie, Expanded Profile, Front . . . . MAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.19

Mullion Door, Prairie, Expanded Profile, Peninsula PMAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.19

Mullion Door, Prairie, Std Profile, Front . . . . . . . . . MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.19

Mullion Door, Prairie, Std Profile, Peninsula . . . . . . PMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.19

Mullion Door, Traditional, Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.18

Mullion Door, Traditional, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . PMUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.18

Mullion Door, Transom Light, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . MTSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.25

Mullion Door, Transom Light, Peninsula. . . . . . . . . PMTSM . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.25

O

Omit Shelf Hole Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.34

Onlay Applied to Solid Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.28

Onlays, Carved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.27

Onlays, Carved, Installed on Plain Mantels . . . . . . . CRV_I . . . . . . . . . . . .300.47,52

Oven Panel Installation Hardware, Cam . . . . . . . . . CAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Oven Panel Installation Hardware, Cam Post . . . . . CAMPOST. . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Oven Panels, Replacement, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Oven Shelf Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.10

Oven/Appliance, 641⁄2" High & Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.10-11

IND.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Overlay Filler, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Overlay Filler, Corner, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Overlay Filler, Corner, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Overlay Filler, Corner, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . CVFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Overlay Filler, Corner, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

Overlay Filler, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Fluted, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BFFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Fluted, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DFFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Fluted, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UFFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Fluted, Vanity Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . VFFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Fluted, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WFFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

Overlay Filler, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4

P

Panels, Veneered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.8-9

Partition Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-TDWPART . . . . . . . . 900.10

Partition Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDWPART . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42

Peg Board Drawer Organization Mod . . . . . . . . . . IPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.41

Pegboard Drawer Organizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . PEGKIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14

Pegboard, Replacement Post Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PEGPOSTKIT . . . . . . . . . 900.14

Pegboard, Rubber Peg Feet/Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . PEGFOOT . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14

Peninsula Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.5

Peninsula Base Blind Corner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBBC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.30

Peninsula Base Blind Corner, FH Doors . . . . . . . . . PBFHBBC. . . . . . . . . . . . 400.30

Peninsula Base w/FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.7

Peninsula Blind Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.15

Peninsula Chimney Component, Deluxe . . . . . . . . PRHSDX . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.50

Peninsula Chimney Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . PRHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.50

Peninsula Chimney Component, Wainscot. . . . . . . PRHCWC. . . . . . . . . . . . 300.50

Peninsula Diagonal Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.16

Peninsula End Shelf Unit, Radius Top, Base . . . . . . PBWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33

Peninsula End Shelf Unit, Square Top, Base . . . . . . PBWN_ST . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33

Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . PRHMDX. . . . . . . . . . . . 300.52

Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRHDAVF . . . . . . . . . . . 300.53

Peninsula Mantel Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . PRHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.52

Peninsula Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Wall . . . . . . PWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.31

Peninsula Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Wall . . . . . . PWN_ST . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.31

Peninsula Square Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20

Peninsula Transition Component, Angled Deluxe . . PRHTDXAF . . . . . . . . . . 300.51

Peninsula Transition Component, Angled Plain . . . PRHTR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.51

Peninsula Transition Component, Angled Wainscot . . PRHTWC . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.51

Peninsula Transition Component, Straight Deluxe . PRHTDX . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.51

Peninsula Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.6

Pipe Chase Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.35

Plywood Construction Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLYBOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.5

Pots & Pans Storage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-__PP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.7

Power Supply, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POWER . . . . 300.21-23 ,1200.9

Profile Solid Stock Moldings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.21

PSA Skins/Sheet Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

Pull-Out Kit, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-BPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9

Pull-Out Kit, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9

Pull-Out Kit, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-__WPS . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9

Pull-Out Spice Rack Kit, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-BSCR. . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Pull-Out Spice Rack Kit, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-WSRC . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6

Pull-Out Spice Rack, Plain/Fluted, Base . . . . . . . . . . BSCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.4

Pull-Out Spice Rack, Plain/Fluted, Wall . . . . . . . . . . WSRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.4

Pull-Out Storage Cabinet, 641⁄2" High & Tall . . . . . UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.9

Pull-Out Storage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-SUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6

Pull-Out Table Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-__POT . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8

Pull-Out Work Surface for OCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-OCK . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8

Q

Quiet Close Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HNG-FR-SFT . . . . . . . . 1200.10

R

Range Front, Drop-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DORF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.21

Range Hood by Broan, Stainless Steel, Ceiling Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSHPCG . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.63

Range Hood by Broan, Stainless Steel, Wall Mount . . SSHSV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.63

Range Hood, Vent-A-Hood® Stainless Steel . . . . . . PRH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.60

Recycling Center Canvas Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CANVAS-RC . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Recycling Center Triangular Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSK-25QRC. . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Recycling Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-BRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.7

Replacement Fillers & Overlay Fillers for Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPFLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5

Roll-Out Tray Downgrade to Full Extension . . . . . . SOSFXD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6

Roll-Out Tray Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.18

Roll-Out Tray Kit, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.18

Roll-Out Tray Organizer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.40

Roll-Out Tray Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPACER. . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.12

Roll-Out Tray Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close . . SOSHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6

Roll-Out Tray, 31⁄2" Height Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . DSOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.7

Roll-Out Tray, 61⁄2" Height Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . DDSOS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.37

Roll-Out Tray, Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.37

Rosettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.28

S

Shallow Top Drawer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHDWR. . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36

Shelf Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

Shelf Edge Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.46

Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33

Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.13

Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.30

Shelf End Unit, Square Top & Bottom, Wall . . . . . . WN_STB . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.30

Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . BWN_ST . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33

Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UWN_ST . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.13

Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WN_ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.30

Shelf Kit, Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKWTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15

Shelf Kit, Glass, Diagonal Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKDWTG. . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15

Shelf Kit, Matching Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.17

Shelf Kit, Melamine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.16

Shelf Kit, Peninsula, Matching Finish . . . . . . . . . . . PSKF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.17

Shelf Kit, Peninsula, Melamine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.16

Shelf Mod, Add-A-Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.46

Shelf Mod, Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.46

Shelves, Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLTS . . . . . . . . 300.31, 900.15

Side Panel, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.10

Sink Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.18

Sink Base Apron Overlay Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBAOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5

Sink Base or Base Door Organizer Kit. . . . . . . . . . . SBDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.5

Sink Base or Base Door Organizer, Installed . . . . . . SBDOM. . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.44

Sink Base w/FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.19

Sink Base w/Sink Mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SB_SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.18

Sink Base w/Sink Mat & Door Organizers. . . . . . . . SB_SMDORG. . . . . . . . . 400.18

Sink Base w/Tilt-Down Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SB_TDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.19

Sink Base, Apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.20

Sink Base, Functional Bottom Drawer . . . . . . . . . . SBD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.19

Sink Caddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-CADDY . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6

IND.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sink Caddy, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICADDY . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.44

Sink Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.20

Sink Mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINKMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6

Sink/Granite Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6

Slab Drawer Front Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36

Smart Storage Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B_SMART . . . . . . . . . . . 400.10

Spice Door Rack, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.26

Spice Drawer Cabinet, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.13

Spice Drawer Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.11

Spice Drawers, Horizontal, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.26

Spice Drawers, Vertical, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.26

Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out Kit, Base, Plain/Fluted . . . KIT-BSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9

Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out Kit, Wall, Plain/Fluted . . . KIT-WSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9

Spice Rack Kit, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.5

Split Post Molding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26

Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26

Spray Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPRAYFINISH. . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Square Corner Base w/Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24

Square Corner Base w/Super Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . SSCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24

Square Corner Drawer Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DBSCB . . . . . . . 400.25, DISC.4

Square Corner Drawer Base Installation Strip . . . . . DBSCBIS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6

Square Corner Drawer Base, Drawer Replacement DBSCB_DW. . . . . . . . . . 1200.8

Square Corner Sink Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.25

Square Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20

Square Corner Wall, Open Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . WODSCW. . . . . . . . . . . 300.20

Stacked Wall Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.9

Starter Molding, Acrylic & Textured Melamine . . . . STARTMLD . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Starter Molding, Premium Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTMLD . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6

Starter Molding, Thermofoil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTMLD . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9

Starter Molding, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTMLD . . . . . . . . . . 800.18

Sub-Zero Refrigerator Appliance Panels . . . . . . . . . SZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.22-23

T

Tall w/Drawers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UC_DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.6

Tall w/Pantry Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.8

Tall w/Roll-Out Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.7

Tall w/Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.5

Tambour Door and Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMBDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8

Tiered Cutlery Divider Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-TCD . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.11

Tiered Cutlery Divider, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ITCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.43

Tilt-Down Tray Kit, Stainless Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6

Tilt-Down Tray, Stainless Steel, Installed. . . . . . . . . ISST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42

Toe Kick Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TKC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Toe Kick Drawer Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTIPON . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5

Toe Kick Drawer Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CGLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5

Toe Kick Drawer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TKD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.33

Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Acrylic & Textured Melamine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TKF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Premium Veneer . . . TKV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.7

Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Stainless Steel . . . . . TKSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.3

Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . TK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Thermofoil . . . . . . . TKF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10

Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Acrylic & Textured Melamine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TKHCF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Premium Veneer. . . . . TKHCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.7

Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Stainless Steel. . . . . . . TKHCSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.3

Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Wood. . . . . . . . . . . . . TKHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Thermofoil . . . . . . . . . TKHCF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10

Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Arch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AVALMLD . . . . . . . . .800.12,25

Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Mission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAVALMLD . . . . . . .800.12,25

Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Provincial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRVVALMLD . . . . . . .800.12,25

Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Roman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAVALMLD . . . . . . . .800.12,25

Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Scallop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALMLD . . . . . . . . . .800.12,25

Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Acrylic & Textured Melamine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOEMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.5

Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Premium Veneer . . . . . . . TOEMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.7

Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Profile Solid Stock . . . . . . PSS_MLD. . . . . . . . . . . . 800.24

Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Thermofoil . . . . . . . . . . . TOEMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.11

Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOEMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.24

Toe Kick Shipped Loose Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32

Toe Space Added Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32

Toe Space Added to Side or Back Mod . . . . . . . . . RTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.33

Toe Space Leg Leveler System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSLLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32

Toe Space Removed Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32

Touch-Up Crayon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Touch-Up Kit, Specialty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RKPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Touch-Up Kit, Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Touch-Up Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TUPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Transition Angle Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.31

Transition Component, Angled Deluxe . . . . . . . . . RHTDXAF . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46

Transition Component, Angled Plain . . . . . . . . . . . RHTR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46

Transition Component, Angled Wainscot. . . . . . . . RHTWC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46

Transition Component, Straight Deluxe . . . . . . . . . RHTDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46

Tray Divider Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-TDW . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.10

Tray Divider Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42

Trim Molding, Angled Outside Corner Molding . . . AOCMD . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Arts & Crafts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Batten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Decorative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Inside Cove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Outside Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Premium Veneer, Batten . . . . . . . . . BATV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6

Trim Molding, Scribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Shoe, Large. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Shoe, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22

Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Batten . . . . . . . . . . . . . FBAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10

Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Outside Corner. . . . . . . FCMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10

Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Scribe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10

Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Shoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10

Two Drawer/Drawer Front Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36

U

Under Cabinet Molding, Arts & Crafts Concave Light Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Under Cabinet Molding, Arts & Crafts Stepped Cove Light Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACSTPLV. . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Under Cabinet Molding, Astragal Light Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASTLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Under Cabinet Molding, Astragal Light Valance, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASTLVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Under Cabinet Molding, Decorative Light Valance . . DLV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Under Cabinet Molding, Flush Bottom. . . . . . . . . . FBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Acrylic & Textured Melamine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4

Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Premium Veneer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6

Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Thermofoil . . LVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9

Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Wood. . . . LVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

IND.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

INDINDEX BY DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Under Cabinet Molding, Pillowed Decorative Light Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLV_P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Under Cabinet Molding, Round Profile . . . . . . . . . RND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19

Univeral Access Toe Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UA9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.33

Universal Shelving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHELF-__. . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15

Universal Shelving Peninsula Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . PEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15

V

Valance Mod, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV__. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.30

Valance, Arch, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AVAL . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30

Valance, Deluxe Arch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAVF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.29

Valance, Mission Arch, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . MAVAL . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30

Valance, Provincial, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . PRVVAL. . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30

Valance, Roman, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . RAVAL . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30

Valance, Scallop, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . VAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30

Valance, Straight, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . SVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30

Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VB. . . . . . . . . . . . 600.4, DISC.5

Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container . . . . . . . . V_WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5

Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Adult Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AHV_WB. . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5

Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V_WBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5

Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Automated Drive, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . AHV_WBS. . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5

Vanity Base, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AHVB . . . . . . . . . 600.4, DISC.5

Vanity Drawer Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5

Vanity Drawer Base, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . AHVDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5

Vanity Linen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VLCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.12

Vanity Linen w/Hamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VLCDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.12

Vanity Sink Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.7

Vanity Sink Base, Adult Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AHVSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.7

Vanity Sink Base, FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FVSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.6

Vanity Sink Base, FH Door(s), Adult Height . . . . . . AHFVSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.6

Vanity Sink Combination, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.10

Vanity Sink Combination, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.8-9

Vanity Sink Combination, Single, Adult Height . . . AHCVSB . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.10

Vanity Sink Combination, Single, Adult Height . . . AHVSDB . . . . . . . . . . . 600.8-9

Vanity Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VWC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13

Vanity Wall w/Open Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13

Vanity Wall w/Standard Mirror, Specialty Mirror Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VWCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.14

Varnish Top Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

Vent-A-Hood® Back Venting Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . RHBVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.62

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHLNR. . . . . . . . . . . 300.57-58

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units, Island/Peninsula . . RHLNRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.59

Vent-A-Hood® Combination Transition . . . . . . . . . RHTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . 300.61

Vent-A-Hood® Roof Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHRJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.62

Vent-A-Hood® Wall Louver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHWL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.62

W

Wainscot Interior Back of Cabinet Mod . . . . . . . . . WCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.34

Wainscot Plywood Panel, Beaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . VBPNL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.9

Wall Organizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.4

Wall Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . WSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.27

Wall w/Bi-Fold Lift Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WBFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.23

Wall w/Bi-Fold Lift Doors, Automated Drive . . . . . . WBFLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.23

Wall w/Lift and Stay Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.22

Wall w/Lift and Stay Door, Automated Drive . . . . . WLSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.22

Wall w/Organizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.4

Wall w/Plate Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.8

Wall w/Pull-Out Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.27

Wall w/Vertical Lift Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.21

Wall w/Vertical Lift Door, Automated Drive . . . . . . WVLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.21

Wall, 13" & 24" Deep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.4-5,7

Waste Basket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSK-WB_QT . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Waste Basket Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT-__WB . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.7

White Melamine Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WHTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.5

Wicker Basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSK-B_WI . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7

Wine Cubes, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BWC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.13

Wine Cubes, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WWC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.24

Wine Glass Holder, Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.4

Wine Storage, Crossmate, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.13

Wine Storage, Crossmate, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WCWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.25

Wood Hood Deluxe w/Columns & Corbels, Styles A-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLMHOOD_ . . . . . . 300.36-43

Wood Hood, Deluxe, Style A or B . . . . . . . . . . . . . RHDX_ . . . . . . . . . . 300.32-35

Wood Tops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PNLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.24

Wood Tops, Clipped Corner Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . WTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.24

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

100.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

100.3 Product Overview

100.4 General Cabinet Construction

100.6 Hinge Details, Reveal Information

100.7 Dimensional Specifications

100.10 Drawer Box and Roll-Out Tray Dimensions

100.11 Custom Quote Program

100.14 Product Disclosure – Plywood Information, Certifications & Green Initiatives

100.15 Humidity in the Home

100.16 Cabinet Care and Cleaning

100.18 Warranty Information

In This Section

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

Product Overview

The following information provides a general reference to Design-Craft Cabinets. Please review the detailed areas of construction given throughout Section 100.

Door Style / Pricing InformationDoor styles are arranged in thirteen Price Groups, where Price Group 1 is the lowest price point and Price Group 13 is the highest price point. Refer to Section 200 for pricing details for each door style.

Door and Drawer Front StylingIndividual door pages in Section 200 contain styling details for doors of various widths and drawers of various heights for each door style. These rules cover a majority of cabinet configurations. Please note, narrow drawer fronts, short doors and square corner doors may experience additional styling changes; contact Customer Care for specific details. We reserve the right to change these specifications without notice.

Material and Finish InformationWe offer door styles in wood, premium veneer, textured melamine, thermofoil and acrylic with various finish/color options; refer to Section 200 for details.

Cabinet Case MaterialStandard case material is 3⁄4" thick furniture board with natural maple melamine interior; white melamine (WHTCS) available at no additional charge. Case material may be upgraded to plywood; see PLYBOX modification in Section 1100. Melamine is a paper product saturated with resins making it a highly durable product. Front edges of case are edge banded to complement door color.

Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Construction and Guide SystemsDrawers and roll-out trays are constructed from 5⁄8" thick hardwood sides and 1⁄4" thick plywood captured bottoms with furniture dovetail joints.

Standard guide system for drawers and roll-out trays is Quiet Close concealed undermount system featuring full extension hardware, soft-close operation and 90 lb. weight capacity.

See General Cabinet Construction pages in Section 100 or modification Section 1100 for downgrade and upgrade options/availability.

Heavy Duty Quiet Close guide upgrades (135 lb. weight capacity) are recommended for heavy loads; available on 21" – 24" cabinet depths only. The following chart indicates weight capacity for contents of middle/bottom drawers. An approximate drawer box/front weight has been included in this calculation.

Overall Drawer CapacityLegend: STD Guides = Quiet Close guide system

HD Guides = Heavy Duty Quiet Close guide system

Cabinet Width STD Guides HD Guides24" 67 lbs 112 lbs

27" 65 lbs 110 lbs 30" 62 lbs 107 lbs 33" 60 lbs 105 lbs 36" 58 lbs 103 lbs 39" 56 lbs 101 lbs 42" 54 lbs 99 lbs 45" 52 lbs 97 lbs 48" 50 lbs 95 lbs

Gray metal Intivo drawer and roll-out tray options available, see Section 1100.

Hinge Options110 degree concealed hinges with integrated soft close mechanism are standard; downgrade available. Details of hinges can be found on page 100.6 of this section.

Decorative HardwareDecorative hardware for doors and drawers must be purchased separately; see Section 900 for our selection of decorative hardware.

Shelving Specifications• Shelving is 3⁄4" thick.

• Standard drawer/door base and peninsula base cabinets receive one full-depth shelf; full-height door base and peninsula base cabinets receive two full-depth shelves.

• Wall cabinets receive full-depth shelves. Quantity is dependent on specific cabinet configuration.

Warranty InformationDesign-Craft comes complete with a Lifetime Limited Warranty. Refer to page 100.18 of this section for details.

End Panel ConstructionPlease note that the exteriors of cabinet end panels now receive a neutral, non-matching melamine coating. Exception: For orders specifying (PLYBOX) and white melamine cabinet cases, cabinets will receive white melamine on the interior and exterior of the plywood end panels. All cabinet ends that will be exposed should be upgraded using finished or matching end modifications.

DESIGN NOTE

When planning cabinets directly next to cabinets/structures greater in depth, use a minimum of 11⁄2" wide filler to allow doors to open without interference.

DESIGN NOTE

All cabinets receive non-matching ends.Remember to specify finished ends for all exposed ends of cabinetry.

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

100.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

General Cabinet Construction

Wall Cabinet

1

4

3

3⁄4" thick center partition on cabinets over 36" wide

3⁄4" thick center partition on cabinets over 36" wide

1

5

7

54

6

3

NEW! Wood roll-out trays are now 31⁄2" high with Quiet Close guides.

Optional upgrade to 61⁄2" high wood roll-out trays. Intivo options also available.

61⁄2"

2 Shelf Supports

7

3

9 Door Bumper

Hinge Cover

Base Cabinet

10 Edge Banding of Cabinet End Panels (matching finish modifications not applied):

CabinetFront Edges

Top Edges

Bottom Edges

Wall yes yes yes

Base yes no no

Tall yes yes no

Vanity Base yes no no

10

5

511⁄16"

511⁄16"

31⁄2"

7

8

DESIGN NOTE

Doors shown in drawings are open beyond actual hinge allowance to show interior details.

10

10

10

10

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

General Cabinet Construction

Standard Cabinet Case MaterialsCabinet Case and Shelf Material3⁄4" thick furniture board* core with melamine interior and exterior. Cabinet case edges are edge banded to complement door color.

Cabinet Back Material1⁄4" thick hardboard with melamine interior.

Cabinet Case Interior Color/Melamine

Standard cabinet case interior is natural maple melamine. Cabinet case interior may be modified to white melamine for no additional charge; see WHTCS in Section 1100 for details.

Cabinet Case Upgrade Option

PLYBOX modification upgrades cabinet case material and components to plywood** core. See Section 1100 for complete details.

Matching Finish ModificationsIndividual cabinet components may be upgraded to match the door material and color. All options are applicable to standard furniture board* construction and plywood** construction. See Section 1100 for complete details.Cabinet Interior/Shelves: Matching Finished Interior (FI)End Panels (Exterior): Finished Ends (FE) - option fo finish left, right or both ends. Top (Exterior): Finished top (FCT) Bottom (Exterior): Finished bottom (FCB) Back: Finished back (FFB)–upgrades back to 3⁄4" thick material, exterior finished to match.

NOTE: Components listed as furniture board will be upgraded to plywood** when PLYBOX modification is utilized.

Shelves – 3⁄4" thick furniture board*Standard wall and base cabinets receive 3⁄4" thick full-depth shelving.

Shelf SupportsStandard shelf support is solid metal in silver finish. Slides into pre-drilled holes in end panels for simple shelf adjustability.

HingesQuiet Close 110 degree concealed clip-top six-way adjustable hinges feature smooth and silent closing. Hinges adapt and customize automatically to closing door speed. Quiet Close contains a built-in overload feature; when door is closing too fast, excessive force is diverted to protect the hinge.

Downgrade Option: Concealed clip-top hinges open 107 degrees maximum, Quiet Close is not included. See HNGNSC modification in Section 1100 for details.

NOTE: Cabinets with aluminum doors, blind, diagonal, square corner, angle, transitional and partition cabinets use specialty hinges; see Section 1200 for replacement hinges.

INSTALLATION NOTE: Clip-top hinges offer tool-free attachment of door to cabinet.

Hanger Rail — 1⁄2" thick materialHanger rails are pocket screwed to backs for enhanced structural integrity. Wall cabinets receive plywood** hanger rails, base and vanity base cabinets receive furniture board*.

Stretcher — 3⁄4" thick furniture board*Stretchers are included on base and vanity base cabinets.

Toe KickSub toe kick is 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep x 3⁄4" thick furniture board*. Finished toe kick, flush finished toe kick and decorative valance toe moldings are available, see Section 800.

Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Construction

Four-sided construction featuring dovetail joints. Constructed with 5⁄8" thick hardwood sides and 1⁄4" thick plywood** captured bottom. Clear coat applied.

Intivo upgrade options:

UPDATE: Now available in gray.

• Optional drawer box upgrade (INTDRWG): gray metal sides, 5⁄8" thick gray melamine back and bottom.

• Optional roll-out tray upgrade (INTSOS_): gray metal sides and front, 5⁄8" thick gray melamine back and bottom; 35⁄16" and 81⁄8" heights available.

Guide SystemsStandard guide: Quiet Close

Optional upgrade: Heavy Duty Quiet Close

Optional downgrade: Full Extension

Full Extension guide system (75 lb weight capacity) is an undermount concealed system consisting of ball bearing mechanics, full extension hardware for full access and an easy release mechanism which allows quick removal of drawer box or roll-out tray. When closing drawer or roll-out tray, a ‘positive’ close feature stops it from ‘bouncing’ back open. Available as a downgrade option on 15" – 24" deep cabinets for a reduction in price; not available on Intivo options.

Quiet Close guide system (90 lb weight capacity) includes all the features of Full Extension plus an additional mechanism which controls closure in a smooth, uniform manner preventing slamming; this quiet close operation takes affect approximately 2" from the final closed position. This guide system is the standard system for cabinets up to 36" wide.

Heavy Duty Quiet Close includes all features of Quiet Close, but upgrades weight capacity to 135 lbs. Available on 21"– 24" cabinet depths only. This guide system is the standard system for cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers and roll-out trays.

Drawer FrontsDrawer boxes on cabinets greater than 9" wide include adjustable drawer clips which allow drawer fronts/boxes to be adjusted both in/out and up/down. Adjust drawer fronts prior to installation of decorative hardware.

Door BumperClear push-in bumper provides superior sound dampening.

Edge Banding – See chart on previous page

Warranty Information — Design-Craft Cabinets includes a Lifetime Limited Warranty, see page 100.18 for details.

*Furniture board is a durable, engineered composite material made of densely compressed wood fibers. Furniture board panels provide strength and consistency for long-lasting cabinet construction. We reserve the right to substitute plywood for furniture board when certain finished option combinations are specified.

** We reserve the right to utilize engineered plywood for various parts of cabinetry, to achieve the highest quality finish. Reference Plywood Information on page 100.14.

In keeping with our policy of continued product improvement, we reserve the right to change product specifications without notice.

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

DESIGN NOTE

All cabinets receive non-matching ends. Remember to specify finished ends for all exposed ends of cabinetry.

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

100.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Hinge Details, Reveal Information

Standard Hinge – 110 Degree• Includes built-in Quiet Close

feature.

• Opens 110 degrees (excluding obstructions such as adjacent cabinet doors, decorative hardware, etc.)

• Does not includes Quiet Close feature.

• Opens 107 degrees (excluding obstructions such as adjacent

cabinet doors, decorative hardware, etc.)

Reveal Information

Door

Reveal

1⁄16"

1⁄16"

1⁄16"

1⁄16"

1⁄16"

1⁄16"

1⁄8"

NOTE: Bottom door/drawer of counter wall cabinets have 1⁄4" reveals to allow for clearance with tile countertops or in uneven installations.

Concealed Hinges• Clip-top concealed hinges

are spring-loaded providing a self-closing feature.

• Available in chrome finish only.

• Adjustability:

– Left/Right

– In/Out

– Up/Down

View with Door Closed1⁄16" horizontal and vertical reveal*.* Reveal = distance from edge of door to edge of cabinet box/end panel.

NOTE: Cabinets with aluminum doors, blind, diagonal, square corner, angle, transitional and partition cabinets use specialty hinges, see Section 1200 for replacement hinges.

Downgrade Hinge — 107 Degree

INSTALLATION NOTE: Clip-top hinges offer tool-free attachment of door to cabinet.

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Dimensional Specifications

Vertical Dimensional Details• Cabinet dimensions are based on US measurements not metrics, for example the actual height of a 30" high wall cabinet is 30" and actual height

of a 96" high tall cabinet is 96".

• Toe space dimensions are 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.• Unfinished toe base assembly is shipped separately on cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater.• Dimensions of overall cabinet heights shown with symbols ( , , , , ) coordinate with individual door heights with same symbol.

117⁄8" 147⁄8" 177⁄8" 207⁄8"237⁄8" 267⁄8" 297⁄8"

357⁄8"

6"

417⁄8"

4711⁄16"

5011⁄16"

5311⁄16"

5611⁄16"

5911⁄16"

61⁄2"

411⁄16"

441⁄16"

471⁄16"

501⁄16"

531⁄16"83⁄4"

83⁄4" 513⁄16"

513⁄16"

513⁄16"

297⁄8"

327⁄8"

357⁄8"

387⁄8"

417⁄8"

161⁄2"

341⁄2"

61⁄2"

61⁄2"

61⁄2"

10"

61⁄2"

119⁄16"

119⁄16"

147⁄8"

147⁄8"

61⁄2"

231⁄4"

135⁄8"181⁄4"

W12 W15 W18 W21 W24 W27 W30 W36 W42 CW W2D WDG WAG

SDC

DB BASE SINK BASE 2DB_34 3DB 4DB

41⁄2"

Wall and Base Cabinets, Sections 300 and 400 — Door and Drawer Front Heights

OCA

* Appliance openings may be field or factory modified, see Section 1100 for details.OCC OCK

147⁄8" 177⁄8" 207⁄8" 237⁄8" 267⁄8"

207⁄8" 237⁄8" 267⁄8" 297⁄8" 327⁄8"

213⁄4"*

61⁄2"

147⁄8"

147⁄8"

403⁄8"*

237⁄8"

573⁄4"*

61⁄2"

41⁄2"

Tall Cabinets, Section 500 — Door, Drawer Front and Appliance Panel Heights

237⁄8" 267⁄8" 297⁄8" 327⁄8" 357⁄8"

553⁄8"

493⁄8" 523⁄8" 553⁄8" 583⁄8" 613⁄8"

147⁄8"

147⁄8"

493⁄8" 523⁄8" 553⁄8" 583⁄8" 613⁄8"

119⁄16"

61⁄2"

119⁄16"

UCS, UT, PC, UPS, DUC 24UC2DB 24UC3DB

84" 87" 90" 93" 96"

84" 87" 90" 93" 96"

48" 51" 54" 57" 60"

W33

327⁄8"

W39

387⁄8"

WDC

297⁄8"

327⁄8"

357⁄8"

387⁄8"

417⁄8"

297⁄8"

327⁄8"

357⁄8"

387⁄8"

417⁄8"

297⁄8"

327⁄8"

357⁄8"

387⁄8"

417⁄8"

1711⁄16"

61⁄2"

231⁄4"297⁄8"

BFH SBFH

297⁄8"

WVLDAG

147⁄8" 177⁄8" 207⁄8" 237⁄8" 267⁄8"

281⁄2"

32"135⁄8"

135⁄8"

117⁄8"

117⁄8"

2DB_28 2DB_32

100.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Dimensional Specifications

Vertical Dimensional Details• Cabinet dimensions are based on US measurements not metrics, for example the actual height of a 30" high wall cabinet is 30" and actual height

of a 96" high tall cabinet is 96".

• Toe space dimensions are 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.• Unfinished toe base assembly is shipped separately on cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater.• Dimensions of overall cabinet heights shown with symbols ( , , , , ) coordinate with individual door and opening heights with same symbol.

OCJ

61⁄2"

531⁄4"*641⁄2"

41⁄2"

597⁄8"

UFH, UPS

* Appliance openings may be field or factory cut, see Section 1100 for details.

641⁄2" High Cabinets, Section 500 — Door, Drawer Front and Appliance Panel Heights

Tall Bookcase Cabinets — Opening Height

84" 87" 90" 93" 96"

78" 81" 84" 87" 90"

41⁄2"

Other Room Cabinetry, Section 700

Wall and Base Desk Cabinets — Door and Drawer Front Heights

61⁄2" 61⁄2"

61⁄2"

105⁄8" 141⁄8"

171⁄4" 203⁄4"

281⁄2"32"

213⁄4" 243⁄4" 273⁄4" 303⁄4" 333⁄4"

7"

41⁄2" 41⁄2"

215⁄16"

USDDRB DFDB, DDOB

DD_3

WDO

30" 33" 36" 39" 42"

Valance options available.

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Dimensional Specifications

Vertical Dimensional Details• Cabinet dimensions are based on US measurements not metrics, for example the actual height of a 30" high wall cabinet is 30" and actual height

of a 96" high tall cabinet is 96".

• Toe space dimensions are 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.• Unfinished toe base assembly is shipped separately on cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater.• Dimensions of overall cabinet heights shown with symbols ( , , , , ) coordinate with individual door heights with same symbol.

Vanity Cabinets, Section 600 — Door and Drawer Front Heights

61⁄2" 61⁄2" 61⁄2"

61⁄2"

61⁄2"

41⁄2" 41⁄2"

32"341⁄2"

385⁄8" 415⁄8" 445⁄8" 475⁄8" 505⁄8"

Vanity Drawer/Door Heights

Cabinet Height: 32" 341⁄2"

X1 203⁄4" 231⁄4"X2 105⁄16" 119⁄16"X3 273⁄8" 297⁄8"

X1

X2

X2

X3X2

X2

X1273⁄8"

VB/VSB VDB FVSB VSDB VLCD, VLCDTH

84" 87" 90" 93" 96"

100.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

Drawer Box Height Information• Drawer box heights may be affected by modifications, heights listed are the general rule.

Cabinet Configuration Drawer Box Height Gray Intivo Drawer Box Height

Shallow Top Drawer 21⁄2" 211⁄16"

Standard Top Drawer 41⁄2" 35⁄16"

One Drawer Base 101⁄2" 81⁄8"

Two Drawer Base, 281⁄2" high 81⁄2" 81⁄8"

Two Drawer Base/Tall (32" and 341⁄2" high) 101⁄2" 81⁄8"

Three Drawer Base, 281⁄2" high Top/Middle – 41⁄2", Bottom – 81⁄2" Top/Middle – 35⁄16", Bottom – 81⁄8"

Three Drawer Base/Tall/

Vanity Base (32" and 341⁄2" high)Top – 41⁄2", Middle/Bottom – 81⁄2" Top – 35⁄16", Middle/Bottom – 81⁄8"

Four Drawer Top Three – 41⁄2", Bottom – 61⁄2" Top Three – 35⁄16", Bottom 81⁄8"

Drawer Box and Roll-Out Tray Depth Information• Cabinet depth may be modified in 1⁄4" increments up to 24"

deep.

• Drawer boxes, roll-out trays and guides will be in nearest 3" incremental depth.

EXAMPLE: B30B, MD22.50 - drawer box and guides will be from 21" deep cabinet.

• Exterior cabinet dimensions will be built to depth specified.

Cabinet DepthExterior Drawer Box and

Roll-Out Tray Depth

12"* 9"

15" 12"

18" 15"

21" 18"

24" 21"

*Roll-out trays not available in 12" deep cabinets.

Roll-Out Tray Width Information Single Door

Cabinet Width Exterior Roll-Out Tray Width

9" 61⁄8"

12" 91⁄8"

15" 121⁄8"

18" 151⁄8"

21" 181⁄8"

24" 211⁄8"

Butt Doors, No Center Partition, Full Width Roll-Out Tray

Cabinet Width Exterior Roll-Out Tray Width

24" 201⁄8"

27" 231⁄8"

30" 261⁄8"

33" 291⁄8"

36" 321⁄8"

39" 351⁄8"

42" 381⁄8"

45" 411⁄8"

Butt Doors, Center Partition, Roll-Out Tray on Each Side of Partition

Cabinet Width Exterior Roll-Out Tray Width

39" 165⁄8"

42" 181⁄8"

45" 195⁄8"

48" 211⁄8"

Drawer Box Width Information

Cabinet Width Exterior Drawer Box Width

9" 71⁄8"

12" 101⁄8"

15" 131⁄8"

18" 161⁄8"

21" 191⁄8"

24" 221⁄8"

27" 251⁄8"

30" 281⁄8"

33" 311⁄8"

36" 341⁄8"

39" 371⁄8"

42" 401⁄8"

45" 431⁄8"

48" 461⁄8"

Drawer Box and Roll-Out Tray Dimensions

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Custom Quote Program

Custom Quote ProgramFor a truly custom cabinet design, our Custom Quote Technical Experts are available to answer your technical questions, provide alternatives and quote your custom cabinet allowing you to go beyond our standard offerings and modifications. Please note, that custom quote approval may be limited by engineering capabilities/boundaries.

We also offer an Appliance Panel Service which eliminates the hassle of determining panel dimensions for compactors, dishwashers, refrigerators and wine refrigerators. Simply state desired door style, wood species or material type, finish or color, appliance brand, appliance type and model number on Appliance Panel order form. For a small processing fee our Custom Quote Technical Experts will research the appliance manufacturer’s website and if necessary additional sources to determine the current, correct panel dimensions, reveals and/or door and drawer front sizes. Please note that the Custom Quote will be returned without dimensions included. When placing your order, simply include the Custom Quote number with your order and you will receive the proper size appliance panel. If you choose to submit your own appliance panel dimensions, make sure to completely fill out the dimensions page of the Appliance Panel Request Form with panel and reveal spacing; manufacturer spec sheets will not be accepted.

Custom Quote Quick Tips

• Submit one item per custom quote request form.

• Custom Quote Request Forms should include starting SKU, all construction features, modifications being requested and a sketch if it improves your request explanation. Please do not include pictures (JPEGS), 20/20 software overviews or design layouts.

• Returned Custom Quotes show total list price of quoted item including modifications and finish upcharges.

• If you need a Custom Quote revised, you may submit your Custom Quote with notes for changes via fax or e-mail. Please reference the Custom Quote number and the changes desired.

• For appliance cabinet custom quote requests, please specify location and size of appliance cut-outs; we will not interpret this information from manufacturer specifications.

• Custom Quotes are always a quantity of one. You may order multiple quantities of a Custom Quote number.

• A Custom Quote is good for 6 months from creation date, excluding discontinued or obsolete items.

• If you have questions or concerns on how or what can be custom quoted, call the Custom Quote Department at 1-800-768-0635 prior to filling out a Custom Quote Request Form.

Custom Quote or Appliance Panel Forms

Fill out a Custom Quote or Appliance Panel Order Form in full and send it in via e-mail to quotes@elkay.com or fax to 866-810-4199 for approval and pricing of your custom item.

Custom Quote Request and Appliance Panel Forms can be located in 2020:

• choose appropriate catalog

• scroll to "documentation"

• scroll to "forms and specs"

• scroll to "Custom Quote" or "Appliance Panel" form

Web and mobile based Custom Quote submittal tool also available; go to www.elkay.com/myquote. This tool allows you to enter all custom quote information in one place, upload drawings and references and have mobile access including email confirmation of quote submittal.

Entering a Custom Quote into 20-20

To order a Custom Quote:

• With your design open in 20-20, enter ‘CQ-’ in the quick search bar and choose the SKU that most closely matches the type and size of the cabinet you have custom quoted.

• Drag the CQ-SKU you have chosen onto your plan and place in the appropriate location.

• Right click on the CQ cabinet on your floor plan and choose Attributes from the resulting menu.

• Click Variable tab; then click on Price to display all price groups.

• Scroll down to door style selected in Styles & Pricing and enter the price you received on your returned Custom Quote.

• Click on General tab and add the Custom Quote Number you received from the returned/completed Custom Quote into the Description field.

• Click Apply and OK.

• You may also modify the dimensions of the custom cabinet under the General tab so that it reserves the proper space on your plan.

• Remember to sign your Custom Quote and fax it to Customer Care to complete your order.

100.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Custom Quote Program

Example of Custom Quote Request FormRemember to include starting SKU, all construction features, modifications being requested and sketch (optional).

Date _________________________________________________________

Account Number _________________________________________

Company _____________________________________________________

Phone Number ________________________________________________

Fax Number __________________________________________________

Sales Person __________________________________________________

Job Name_____________________________________________________

Fax directly to Custom Quotes at (866) 810-4199 or email (preferred) to quotes@elkay.com

Door Style________________________________________________

Finish/Color_______________________________________________

________________________________________________________

Start SKU _______________________________________________

Custom Quote Request10501 10th Street Waconia, Minnesota 55387 800-779-0391 Fax 630-645-4434 www.designcraftcabinets.com

Make a sketch of the product you want – include dimensions and modifications with any additional notes.

1. Fill out this form completely; make sure to include account number andproduct information. This will ensure a quick response to your request.

2. PLEASE PRINT LEGIBLY.3. Fax your quote to (866) 810-4199 or email to quotes@elkay.com4. Only one (1) item may be quoted per request form. If you have a

quantity of the same item quoted, you may order the customquoted item as many times as required.

5. Your quote will be processed within 24 hours (excluding weekendsand holidays).

6. All quotes are faxed back unless legible email address isincluded on this form.

7. Approval of Custom Quote requests is made on an order-by-orderbasis. Prior approval of a quote does not represent future commit-

ment for approval, pricing, lead-time or construction methods.

Email Address

Above information must be complete in order to process this quote.

FOR DESIGN-CRAFT PRODUCT ONLY

❑ PLY BOX ❑ Furn Board

❑ Natural Maple Veneer ❑ White Melamine

❑ BP ❑ FP ❑ RP ❑ RR

WOOD SPECIES / OTHER (Please select 1 option)

WOOD

❑ Cherry ❑ Maple

❑ Hickory ❑ Oak

❑ Knotty Alder ❑ QS Oak

PREMIUM VENEER

❑ Anigre ❑ Str-Grain Cherry ❑ Rosewood

❑ Bamboo ❑ Str-Grain Maple ❑ Sycamore

❑ Beech ❑ Str-Grain Red Oak ❑ Wenge

❑ Birdseye Maple ❑ Red Gum ❑ Zebrawood

❑ Black Walnut

THERMOFOIL

❑ Gloss ❑ Matte ❑ Woodgrain

❑ Matte with Accent

❑ Woodgrain with Accent

ACRYLIC

❑ Gloss

June 9, 2015■

XYZ ■

XYZ Cabinets & More

651-555-2424 Brookhill

651-555-2425 Brandywine

Ebony Glaze & HighlightMary

Smith 4DB21

info@xyzcabinets.com

■

■

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Custom Quote Program

Example of Returned Custom QuoteTh

e lis

t pric

e fo

rth

is C

usto

m Q

uote

,is

: eac

h, fo

r the

quan

tity

of o

ne (1

).

* If

eve

ryth

ing

is c

orre

ct a

nd y

ou a

ccep

t the

pric

e, p

leas

e fil

l out

the

follo

win

g:

Cus

tom

er A

ppro

val:

AC

CO

UN

T #

:C

OM

PAN

Y N

AM

E:

PHO

NE

:FA

X:

SAL

ES

/ JO

B:

E-M

AIL

:

FIN

ISH

:D

AT

E:

PRO

DU

CT

MO

DIF

ICA

TIO

NS

DO

OR

& D

RA

WE

R C

OD

ES

NO

TE

S:

PRO

DU

CT

:

SPE

CIE

:

DO

OR

ST

YL

E:

Quo

ted

By:

CC

R:

CQ

Typ

e:

OL

:

Indi

cate

Qua

ntity

:H

inge

Dire

ctio

n:P.

O. #

:A

ppro

val s

igna

ture

s ar

e re

quire

d to

pro

cess

cus

tom

quo

tes.

XY

ZX

YZ

CA

BIN

ETS

& M

OR

E65

1-55

5-24

24M

AR

Y /

SM

ITH

6/16

/201

5D

esig

nCra

ftB

rook

hill

RP

Map

le

Rai

sed

Pan

elM

aple

Bra

ndyw

ine

EB

N G

LZH

GLT

Inte

rior

Map

le4D

B21

PLY

BO

XM

HD

40.

75"H

& 1

8"D

TSR

(ove

rall

hgt-3

6.25

")FI FE

B {O

-H-M

}

See

Not

esS

ee N

otes

See

Not

es

DF

6.25

X 2

0.87

5D

F 6.

25 X

20.

875

DF

6.25

X 2

0.87

5

Rev

isio

n of

CQ

369

886

3702

69

Om

it bo

ttom

dra

wer

. D

rill E

nd P

anel

s in

bot

tom

sec

tion

for S

helf

Hol

es a

nd A

dd O

ne S

helf.

Spe

cial

Siz

e D

oors

and

/or D

raw

ers

and/

or R

ails

and

/or R

evea

ls o

rO

peni

ngs.

Add

full

fixed

floo

r bet

wee

n bo

ttom

dra

wer

and

bot

tom

ope

ning

.

Des

ignC

raft

Cus

tom

Quo

te #

KS

KS

CQ

BC

usto

m q

uote

dep

t. ph

one

num

ber:

800-

768-

0635

Ple

ase

fax

your

sig

ned

quot

e to

Cus

tom

er C

are

at (6

30) 6

45-4

434

19 1

/2"

21"

5 1/

4"

36 1

/4"

18"

11 7

/8"

16 1

/8"

STR

ETC

HE

R

FULL

BO

TTO

M

1-A

DJ.

SH

ELF

100.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Product Disclosure

Plywood InformationPlywood is defined as a flat panel composed of an assembly of two or more layers of wood veneers in combination with a core. The veneers, along with the core, are bonded together to form a finished product. The core may be composed of a range of materials, including veneers, particleboard and medium density fiberboard (MDF).

Design-Craft uses two types of plywood in constructing our cabinets with a plywood upgrade (PLYBOX option): 1. Plywood with all fir crossbands in the core may be used in standard

parts such as shelves, stretchers and hanging rails.

2. Engineered plywood utilizes a MDF crossband beneath the veneer which creates a superior surface for accepting stains and paints. For this reason, Design-Craft uses engineered core plywood on all finished surfaces such as finished ends and finished interior. It’s also manufactured to more exact tolerances which make it ideal for the precision of Design-Craft cabinets.

Environmentally Friendly Both fir core and engineered core plywood supports CARB II standards and contributes to LEED credits, where applicable.

CARB II

California Air Resource Board (CARB) governs regulations for formaldehyde emissions from composite wood products, and has the toughest emission standards in the world.

LEED Credits

LEED certification provides independent, third-party verification that a building project meets the highest green building and performance measures.

Design-Craft uses only CARB II compliant plywood which meets or exceeds the highest standards for air quality.What does this mean to you and your customer?

• You can sell Design-Craft with confidence knowing we use U.S. made plywood.

• Your customer will receive the highest grade materials and know their product meets the highest standards for air quality.

• You will be assured that Design-Craft will continue to source U.S. plywood and be an industry leader in implementing products that improve quality, strength and sustainability.

Certifications and Green InitiativesAre Design-Craft Cabinets KCMA Certified?

• KMCA is a product performance standard for the cabinet industry.

• Design-Craft cabinets are KCMA compliant and certified.

• For more information visit the KCMA website at www.kcma.org

Are Design-Craft Cabinets ESP Certified?• ESP, Environmental Stewardship Program, is a product sustainability

certification for the cabinet industry.

• Design-Craft cabinets are ESP compliant and certified.

• For more information on ESP visit www.greencabinetsource.org.

Are Design-Craft Cabinets LEED® Certified?• Design-Craft is a responsible manufacturer utilizing sustainable

processes that may contribute towards LEED points.

• Buildings can obtain LEED certification by using products that contribute LEED points.

• Visit the U.S. Green Building Council website for more details at http://www.usgbc.org.

Are Design-Craft Cabinets FSC Certified?• There are more than 50 forest certification programs available

worldwide.

• Some of the woods Design-Craft uses are SFI certified rather than FSC.

• SFI values include protection of biodiversity, species at risk and wildlife habitat, sustainable harvest levels, protection of water quality and prompt regeneration.

• Visit the SFI website for more details at http://www.sfiprogram.org.

Are Design-Craft Products Made in the USA?• Design-Craft cabinets are manufactured by Elkay. Like your family,

the Elkay family has values and traditions that endure. For almost a century, Elkay has been an American-owned and operated company, providing thousands of jobs that support our families and communities.

• We proudly source hardwood and plywood domestically.

• All assembly is done in the USA which means your purchase helps create jobs here at home.

Are Design-Craft Cabinets CARB Compliant?• The California Air Resource Board sets and manages standards for

air quality including formaldehyde emissions from composite wood panels.

• Design-Craft is manufactured from CARB compliant and certified materials.

Does Design-Craft use Formaldehyde?• Design-Craft makes a difference with our products by partnering

with suppliers to ensure continued environmental stewardship. We select materials manufactured to meet or surpass current regulatory requirements, including low formaldehyde emissions.

• All of the wood we use complies with CARB formaldehyde emission standards.

Are Design-Craft Cabinets Green?• Our products are KCMA and ESP certified which means our materials

and processes are qualified accordingly.

• Our paint curing ovens utilize the latest in light technology making them 50 percent more efficient than conventional gas ovens.

• All sawdust and wood shavings generated in our manufacturing process are recovered through a filtration system, removing 99.99 percent of dust particles. This eliminates virtually any discharge of wood dust into the atmosphere and it returns warm air back into the factory, conserving energy.

• The air filtration system in our paint department removes 99.97 percent of particulate matter, keeping our air clean inside and out.

• By deploying an innovative technologies in our facilities, we’ve dramatically changed the way wood finishes are prepared for application which helps reduce waste by minimizing disposal of unused material.

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.152015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Humidity in the Home

Humidity in the HomeHealthy Environment

Home maintenance and medical experts advise homeowners to monitor and control indoor humidity levels in order to maintain a safe and healthy home environment. As it turns out, humidity levels that are healthiest for people are also ideal for cabinetry. Indoor relative humidity levels of 40 to 50 percent are ideal; uncontrolled extremes above 80 percent or below 20 percent are likely to cause problems.

Humidity Imbalance

• Wood products absorb moisture and swell or expand with high humidity conditions.

• Wood products release moisture and shrink or contract with low humidity conditions.

• Some expansion or contraction of wood products may be noticeable when cabinetry is moved from one location to another or humidity conditions change.

Wood Species

Panel Size with Nominal

Humidity

(70°F, 45% RH)

Panel Size with Low Humidity

(70°F, 20% RH)

Panel Size with High Humidity

(70°F, 70% RH)

Panel Size Change from

Low to High RH

(70°F, 20% to 70%)

Knotty Alder

24 -0.246 0.283 0.528

Cherry 24 -0.238 0.274 0.512

Maple 24 -0.339 0.390 0.729

Oak 24 -0.354 0.407 0.762

QS Oak 24 -0.152 0.174 0.326

Hickory 24 -0.395 0.454 0.848

• As you can see from this chart, wood’s response to humidity can be dramatic and affect the finish and/or function of cabinetry. What can be done to prevent this?

Steps to Balance Humidity

• Consistently run heating, cooling and humidification systems to provide proper balance.

• Check outside drainage to ensure moisture is properly routed away from the home.

• Conduct an insulation audit to ensure all areas are properly insulated and vapor barriers are properly installed.

• Check with local contractors, HVAC specialists or county extension services for tips on how to achieve balance between adequate ventilation and moisture levels to maintain proper humidity levels in all seasons.

Wood Product and Humidity Considerations

• Expansion and contraction of cabinetry most likely results from improper humidity conditions during site storage, installation or use.

• Raw or finished wood reacts to changes in humidity levels. Our multi-step finishing process slows expansion or contraction, but cannot prevent it. Small lines in the finish may appear at joinery points if cabinetry is exposed to unstable humidity levels.

• Some remodeling or construction activities greatly increase moisture content within a home and can be harmful to cabinetry if precautions are not taken. For example, drywall taping adds a lot of moisture into a home if not properly ventilated.

• Homeowners in humid climates should be especially vigilant about maintaining proper indoor humidity level.

• Regardless of location, products installed in non-air conditioned homes are susceptible to moisture imbalance. Winter and vacation homes should maintain climate control year round.

• Examples of humidity imbalance include swollen doors or drawer fronts, butt doors which no longer close properly, door and drawer front panel expansion or contraction, joint separation especially in mitered doors and bowing of stiles or rails.

• Mitered doors need low, stable moisture.

• Density of wood affects humidity levels. Hardwoods will expand or contract more than softer species.

• Cabinetry stored in unfavorable conditions should be allowed to acclimate to the surrounding environment for a period of time. This minimizes the degree wood doors may swell and bind upon installation. Once doors have been installed in controlled climate conditions they will naturally restore to original dimensions.

Humidity and Warranty

• Our warranty is written with the expectation that product will be stored and installed in a climate controlled environment; the warranty is void if cabinetry is stored or installed in extreme temperatures or humidity levels.

• Trimming swollen doors voids the warranty.

• With proper maintenance of humidity levels, new cabinetry will be a long-lasting, durable and beautiful enhancement to any home.

100.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Cabinet Care and Cleaning

Wood and Premium Veneer Door StylesOnce your cabinets have been installed, wipe down all exteriors and interiors with a damp cloth to remove dust, drying immediately with a dry cloth. Be careful not to scratch the surface when wiping off dust and debris.

• Regular exterior and interior cleaning requires only wiping with a damp cloth and then drying. Remove oil, grease or general soil using a clean cloth dampened with a fresh solution of mild soap and water. Rinse with a clean, damp cloth, then dry thoroughly. It is important to wipe spills immediately. Prolonged exposure to spills, including food, water or other liquids can cause permanent discoloration or damage to your cabinet’s finish.

• Avoid using harsh detergents, strong soap, abrasive cleaners or self-polishing waxes. All of these items can damage the factory-applied protective finish.

• Avoid using your dishcloth to clean or dry cabinet exteriors. It may contain remnants of detergents and grease.

• Immediately dry surfaces where water may have spilled using a clean cloth. Never hang damp towels over cabinetry to dry. Excessive moisture will cause the wood to expand and damage the finish.

Thermofoil (Matte, Wood Grains) Door StylesRegular Care and Cleaning

• Always use a cotton cloth or non-abrasive sponge.

• Wipe with a damp cloth or sponge with mild dish soap or with a 50/50 mix of water and Simple Green® (works well on oily or tacky surfaces).

Cleaning of Stains (Infrequent Care)

• Always use a cotton cloth or non-abrasive sponge.

• Using a damp cloth or sponge with a 50/50 mix of water and Simple Green®, scrub lightly for 10 to 20 strokes. This should remove most stains.

• If stain persists, use a damp cloth or sponge with Buckeye Workout, standard Fantastik (S.C. Johnson), or standard Formula 409 (The Clorox Co.), lightly wipe for 10 to 20 strokes. Buckeye Workout is a commercial cleaner and readily available from a local distributor (to locate call 314-291-1900).Note: Buckeye Workout contains water and propylene glycol phenyl ether.

• If stain persists further, place a cloth or sponge damp with 70% Isopropyl Alcohol on top of the stain for 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, remove the cloth or sponge and wipe. This should remove makeup, ball-point ink, and other stubborn stains. Repeat this step until stain is removed.

Disinfecting Thermofoil Surfaces

Bleach (a 10% mixture) or Quat cleaner can be used as a disinfectant on most thermofoil surfaces. Before using on an entire surface, be sure to test on a non-visual spot.

Cleaners to Avoid

• Any abrasive cleaner.

• Most solvent based cleaners and harsh chemicals such as sink and toilet bowl cleaners.

• Any cleaner in combination with a brush.

• Cleaners containing ammonia.

• Baking Soda.

If a harsh chemical is spilled on a thermofoil surface, wipe it up immediately. Then wash the surface with soapy water and rinse several times.

Product Limitations

Thermofoil products are not intended for use as cutting surfaces; always use a cutting board. Do not place hot pans from a stove directly onto surface. This product is also not intended for use in exterior applications.

• High heat generated from self-cleaning cycles of ovens or ranges may discolor thermofoil cabinetry; we recommend using heat shields or opening your doors and drawers fully when using the self-cleaning cycle.

Acrylic and Thermofoil Gloss FinishesHigh gloss surfaces become more scratch resistant over the first few days after the protective film is removed. This process can be accelerated by lightly polishing the surface immediately after the protective film is removed using ACPOLISH, Novus 1 Polish or Plexus Plastic Cleaner with a clean micro-fiber cloth.

ACPOLISH is located in Section 1200 of this manual. See websites below to order the other care products.

• www.novuspolish.com

• www.plexusplasticcleaner.com

Cleaning

Best results will be achieved using wet micro-fiber cloths or chamois with mild soap and water. Never dry wipe the acrylic finish. Applying ACPOLISH, Novus 1 Polish or Plexus Plastic Cleaner on a weekly basis will maintain the acrylic finish in an optimum condition.

• Avoid harsh household cleaners and abrasives.

• Always check the active ingredients of your cleaners to be sure there are no potentially harmful chemicals. Do not use acetone, chloroform, benzene, ammonia, thinners, caustic soda, toluene, xylene, dichloromethane, amylacetate, glacial acetate acid, butyl alcohol, butyl acetate, cellusolve, cresols/phenols, ethylacetate, chlorinated solvents, halogenated solvents, methyl alcohol, methyl ethyl keytone.

• We are not responsible for any damage done by abrasive cleaning products or procedures.

Other Cleaners to Avoid

• Any abrasive cleaner.

• Paper towels, brushes, scourers or scrapers.

• Most solvent based cleaners and harsh chemicals such as sink & toilet bowl cleaners.

Handling

• Leave protective film in place until the project is complete.

• Do not store panels outside.

• Do not store or transport panels in direct sunlight.

• Avoid sliding the panels on the outer face surface.

Cabinet Care and Cleaning

100SPECIFICATIONS

100.172015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Textured MelamineIn case of persistent or dry stains, it is recommended to use water, soapy water or ethylic alcohol and acetone according to the following table.

StainsCold

Water

Cold water and detergent

for domestic

use

Hot water and

detergent for

domestic use

Alcohol 50%

Acetone

Fruit juice, marmalade, syrup, milk, tea, coffee, liqueurs, wine, soap, inkFats, sauces, dry blood stains, wine and liqueurs, eggsJelly, carbon black, vinyl glue, watercolors, organic wasteVegetable oil, pens, magic markers, foundation make-up, hair sprayNail polish, linseed oil

Clean with a soft cloth using solvents listed in table above. If these cleaning procedures are inadequate or insufficient to remove dirt from the furrows of melamine, it is recommended to use a melamine magic sponge. Wet the sponge with tepid water and squeeze it, delicately clean area. Avoid using abrasive sponges, as they may damage the surface.

Decorative HardwarePeriodically use mild soap and warm water to clean door and drawer hardware.

• After cleaning, dry and buff hardware with a clean, soft cloth.

• Do not use brass and silver polishes. These polishes contain harsh chemicals that can damage the hardware’s surface.

Cabinet Care and Cleaning

DESIGN NOTE

For additional information on care and cleaning, visit DesignCraftCabinets.com.

Art Glass Door InsertsIf your kitchen cabinetry includes doors with art glass inserts, please follow these cleaning guidelines:

• Use a dry, clean soft cloth or paper towel.

• A mild dish soap and water mixture, warm water and damp Mr. Clean® Magic Pad® or non-abrasive glass cleaner may be used.

• Do not to apply too much pressure to the glass surface. Inserts are fragile and can be easily broken with undue pressure.

• If using a spray cleaner, test on the backside of insert to make sure the cleaner does not remove the patina. It is best to use cleaner on the glass surfaces only.

• Avoid spraying cleaner directly on the glass as overspray may cause damage to wood finishes.

• Do not use any type of abrasive cleaner or scotch-brite product for cleaning as this will damage the finish of the insert.

Glass Door InsertsIf your kitchen cabinetry includes doors with glass inserts, please follow these cleaning guidelines:

• Spray an ammonia-free glass cleaner on a clean, soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel.

• Avoid spraying cleaner directly on the glass as overspray may cause damage to wood finishes.

Aluminum Doors• Use soap or mild detergent and warm water to clean aluminum

and glass.

• DO NOT use an abrasive cloth to clean aluminum or glass.

• Avoid spraying cleaner directly on aluminum or glass, apply the soap or mild detergent to a soft damp cloth.

Breadboard CleaningBefore initial use, wipe entire board with mineral oil and allow it to soak into wood.

• After routine use, wipe clean with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly.

• Do not immerse breadboard in water or clean in dishwasher.

100.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

100SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Design-Craft® Cabinets are certified by the Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (KCMA). This assures you that Design-Craft Cabinets comply with the rigorous standards set by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

The manufacturer of Design-Craft Cabinets warrants its cabinetry to be free of defects in material and/or workmanship under normal residential usage to the original purchaser of the cabinetry for as long as they own their home.

These warranties are only applicable to product used in residential applications within the United States and Canada and are not transferable to subsequent owners.

Our obligation under these warranties shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any part or parts that prove defective as determined by our review. These warranties do not cover the cost of installation, removal, subsequent damage, or transportation of the defective product, regardless of who performs the work.

These warranties shall become void if products are misused, abused, mishandled, improperly stored, changed, modified or subjected to extreme temperatures or extreme moisture levels, acts of God or the effects of normal wear and tear. This warranty does not apply to any Acrylic or Thermofoil products that discolor, de-laminate or bubble if installed without the use of properly installed heat shields adjacent to appliances or fixtures, such as ovens or lighting that generate high temperatures. These warranties do not apply to cabinetry ordered and purchased unfinished.

Natural woods vary in color and exhibit color changes as they age. Cabinet colors darken

or lighten over time due to sunlight, smoke, household cleaners and other environmental conditions. Painted product may eventually have visible cracking around the joint areas. These variations are considered the natural characteristics of the material in relation to their environment and are not covered under these warranties. The manufacturer of Design-Craft Cabinets reserves the right to substitute discontinued product with the most similar styling, wood species/material and color available at the time your claim is submitted.

These warranties are the exclusive warranties of the manufacturer of Design-Craft Cabinets and are in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

These warranties give you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state to state.

To obtain performance under these limited warranties, first contact your authorized Design-Craft Cabinets retailer, who will arrange for an inspection. A dated sales receipt as proof of purchase is required to obtain benefits from these warranties. If a retailer is unavailable, please write to: Warranty Department, Design-Craft Cabinets c/o Elkay Wood Products Co. at the address noted at bottom of page, with an explanation of the defect.

These warranties are effective on product manufactured on or after January 3, 2000. The manufacturer’s normal operating procedures and policies apply to the administration of these warranties.

In keeping with our policy of continued product improvement, the manufacturer of Design-Craft Cabinets reserves the right to change product specifications without notice.

D E S I G N - C R A F T C A B I N E T S

Lifetime Limited Warranty

Design-Craft Cabinets c/o Elkay Wood Products Co. • 10501 10th Street • Waconia, Minnesota 55387

Phone: 800-779-0391 • Fax: 630-645-4434

Warranty Information

200DOORS AND FINISHES

200.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

WOOD, PREMIUM VENEER AND MDF

200.3 Wood and MDF Specifications

200.4 Premium Veneer and MDF Specifications (Bella Door Style)

200.5 Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Finish Information

200.11 Finish Select Program

200.13 Finish Charts – Wood and MDF Door Styles

200.18 Finish Charts – Premium Veneer and MDF (Bella Door Style)

ACRYLIC AND TEXTURED MELAMINE

200.21 Acrylic and Textured Melamine Specifications / Color Charts

THERMOFOIL

200.22 Thermofoil Specifications / Color Chart

DOOR STYLES

200.23 Square Foot Door and Drawer Front Pricing

200.24 Pick A Panel for Wood Door Styles

200.25 Door Style Conversion Chart, Complete Door List

200.26 Door Styles Listed Alphabetically

In This Section

200.3OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood and MDF Specifications

Wood and MDF Specifications

CHERRY has a rich color and smooth, flowing grain patterns. Color varies from light pink to dark brown; variations are more prominent with lighter stains. Cherry will darken or mellow with age, a change that is more noticeable with light stains and which usually takes place within the

first six months. Sun exposure greatly accelerates this process. Mineral streaks, pitch pockets, pin knots and sap wood all occur naturally in cherry and are acceptable characteristics.

HICKORY can vary dramatically in color within a single piece of wood, from almost white to a deep, dark brown. Hickory’s bold, prominent grain patterns give it a rustic appearance. Burls, pin knots, mineral streaks and small, sound knots are typical and are not considered defects.

MAPLE has a smooth texture with tight, uniform grain patterns that make it ideal for painting. It is generally creamy white, varying slightly from almost bright white to light pink or reddish brown. Maple contains a natural resin that causes wood to turn amber as it ages.

This change, which is accelerated by exposure to natural light, is more noticeable with lighter stains. Maple may occasionally contain small mineral streaks that form naturally when trees absorb minerals from the soil.

OAK (RED) is characterized by its open grain patterns, which vary from close-knit and vertical, to prominent and arched, with colors ranging from light tan and pink to medium dark red and brown. Oak may contain small mineral streaks and some pin knots.

QUARTERSAWN OAK is quartered and then cut at a 90-degree angle to the growth ring of the tree. This process exposes a beautiful aspect of the grain called "flake." In addition to flake, quartersawn grain pattern is vertical and close-knit. Its color ranges from light tan and pink to

medium dark red and brown. Quartersawn oak is a dense, heavy wood that is very strong and resists shock. This cut of red oak has been used extensively in the production of Mission style furniture. NOTE: For flat panel door styles, the center panel back is consistently ‘Grade A’ red oak; however, cut of material varies using flat sawn, rift sawn and quartersawn veneers.

PAINTED products have certain inherent characteristics that must be expected. Small hairline cracks may appear where wood joints occur in door/drawer fronts. Also, some grain patterns of the wood may be apparent through the painted finish. Lighter painted finishes

should be expected to show a slight color change over time. These characteristics are inherent and will not be considered defective.

Why is this important? We call your attention to these characteristics because the effects of these variations in an entire kitchen may be different from what one visualizes when viewing a small display, a single door or a small sample. Most wood doors and drawer fronts are constructed using different pieces of wood and each piece will accept stain in different ways. These variations in grain and color are inherent in the wood and a natural enhancement to our product.

We feel the beauty of real hardwood is created by the infinite variation of grain texture and color. This is the nature of hardwood and wild or unusual graining will not be considered reason for replacement.

We take care in selecting our doors; however, there is no special emphasis made to select doors to match one another. Contrasting grain or color variations in doors is considered acceptable and will not be considered reason for replacement.

Wood cabinetry is also affected by humidity. Slight shrinking may be caused by humidity changes in the home. We recommend the use of an air conditioner and humidifier to control the humidity of the home.

For further information please contact our Customer Care Department.

KNOTTY ALDER, when finished, is a rich-looking wood that blends well with cherry. It has a very uniform light brown color with a reddish tinge and has a fairly straight-grained, uniform texture. Knotty alder may contain pin knots, open and closed knots of various sizes,

checking and mineral streaks; these are typical and not considered defects. Some knots may be in locations which affect hardware placement.

NOTE: Wood grain direction on drawer fronts and doors specified on door detail pages with following symbol:

MDF (Medium Density Fiberboard) is an engineered wood product made by breaking down hardwood and softwood into wood fibers and combining with resin. Pressure and heat are then used to create a smooth surface with a consistent core. Painted MDF is durable and more

resistant to warping, expansion and contraction than solid hardwoods. Available in paint finishes, see finish charts for availability. Moldings ordered in MDF door styles will be constructed of maple and painted to match your order selection.

200.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Premium Veneer and MDF Specifications

Why is this important? We call your attention to these characteristics because the effects of these variations in an entire kitchen may be different from what one visualizes when viewing a small display, a single door or a small sample. Most premium veneer doors and drawer fronts are constructed using different pieces of veneer and each piece will accept stain in different ways. These variations in grain and color are inherent in the veneer and a natural enhancement to our product.

We feel the beauty of premium veneer is created by the infinite variation of grain texture and color. This is the nature of veneer and wild or unusual graining will not be considered reason for replacement.

We take care in selecting our doors; however, there is no special emphasis made to select doors to match one another. Contrasting grain or color variations in doors is considered acceptable and will not be considered reason for replacement.

Cabinetry is also affected by humidity. Slight shrinking may be caused by humidity changes in the home. We recommend the use of an air conditioner and humidifier to control the humidity of the home.

For further information please contact our Customer Care Department.

Straight-grain European Steamed BEECH veneer is "A" grade with quartersawn face and beech edge banding. Color is wheat to pale pinkish-brown with straight graining and a fine texture.

Caramelized BAMBOO veneer is "A" grade and features a narrow stave face with bamboo edge banding. Bamboo is straight grained and finely textured with nodules randomly interspersed throughout.

Straight-grain CHERRY veneer is "A" grade heartwood with quartersawn/riftsawn face and cherry edge banding. This cut produces a clean and consistent straight-grain appearance. Colors range from light pinkish-brown to dark reddish-brown.

Reconstituted WHITEWOOD veneer is engineered to have a clean and consistent straight-grain appearance featuring a reconstituted face and reconstituted edge banding.

Straight-grain RED OAK veneer is "A" grade heartwood with quartersawn/riftsawn face and red oak edge banding. This cut produces a clean and consistent straight-grain appearance with a coarse texture. Colors range from yellowish-tan to wheat color.

Reconstituted ROSEWOOD veneer features straight grains and has a reconstituted face with reconstituted wenge edge banding. Colors range from brown to dark violet-brown with darker purple-black lines.

Straight-grain Figured English SYCAMORE veneer is "A" grade with quartersawn figured face and English sycamore edge banding. Colors range from white to creamy white. Graining is straight, but can be wavy or curly.

Reconstituted WENGE veneer features straight grain with a coarse texture and has a reconstituted face and reconstituted wenge edge banding. Color is dark brown with fine, almost black veins.

Premium Veneer and MDF Specifications (Bella Door Style)Premium Veneers are applicable to the Bella door style; available in 8 veneers. An engineered core provides a stable, consistent substrate, virtually eliminating warping. Doors and drawer fronts feature veneer on front and back and edge banding. Veneer on doors and drawer fronts is not book matched, grain matched or sequence matched; graining does not line up between doors or doors and drawer fronts. Bella is also available in MDF, see below for description.

Reconstituted HEARTWOOD veneer is engineered to have a clean and consistent straight-grain appearance featuring a reconstituted face and reconstituted edge banding.

Straight-grain MAPLE veneer is "A" grade heartwood with quartersawn/riftsawn face and maple edge banding. This cut produces a clean and consistent straight-grain appearance. Color is creamy white with a fine texture.

MDF (Medium Density Fiberboard) is an engineered wood product made by breaking down hardwood and softwood into wood fibers and combining with resin. Pressure and heat are then used to create a smooth surface with a consistent core. Painted MDF is durable and more resistant to warping, expansion and contraction than solid hardwoods. Available in paint finishes, see finish charts for availability. Moldings ordered in MDF door styles will be constructed of maple and painted to match your order selection.

DISCONTINUED

SPRING 2017

DISCONTINUED

SPRING 2017

200.5OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Finish Information

See finish charts for door style/species/finish availability and pricing. Please view samples for proper representation of all our finishes.

UNFINISHEDApplicable to wood and premium veneer door styles.

Our products and wood finishes undergo stringent quality tests and are KCMA certified and warranted as finished wood cabinetry.

Ordering unfinished cabinetry voids the warranty; no charge replacement policy guidelines apply to the following three exceptions:

• Incorrectly built items

• Shipping damage as noted on Bill of Lading

• Drawer guides and hinges retain standard lifetime limited warranty

Wood will expand and contract with changes in temperature and humidity. Unfinished cabinetry must be stored in a climate-controlled environment and a proper wood finish applied in order to minimize contraction and expansion.

Additional notes for unfinished orders:

Cabinet Case and Shelf Material

Standard cabinet case material is 3⁄4" thick furniture board* core with maple natural melamine interior; white melamine available at no additional charge.

Plywood upgrade is available (PLYBOX); specify maple natural or white. If natural maple is specified, interior will be maple veneer. If white is specified, interior will be white melamine.

Cabinet case edges are edge banded in species matching door; edge banding will be unfinished.

Interior and Shelves

Specify matching finished interior modification to receive finish ready interiors and shelving in wood species matching your order selection. Matching finished interiors are standard in some cases; see individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual for details.

End Panel Construction

Specify finished end modifications on exposed ends of cabinetry to receive finish ready ends in wood species matching your order selection.

Internal Components

Drawer boxes, roll-out trays, lazy susan trays, spice drawer pull-outs and other internal kits will be finished with a clear top coat as is our standard process.

*Furniture board is a durable, engineered composite material made of densely compressed wood fibers. Furniture board panels provide strength and consistency for long-lasting cabinet construction. We reserve the right to substitute plywood for furniture board when certain finished option combinations are specified.

STAIN FINISHESApplicable to wood and premium veneer door styles.

Our stain finishes are protected by an oven-cured top coat providing a seal superior to most manufacturers.

It is important to note that lighter finishes, particularly Champagne, Natural, Sandalwood and Tumbleweed will especially exhibit color variances naturally found in wood due to the transparency of the stain.

Darker finishes such as Espresso, Onyx or Smoke have an overall consistent appearance. Similar to other stain finishes, the wood species selected will alter the appearance of these finishes; the grain, character and tone of the wood will show through the stain. Color variances of wood will be less apparent when darker finishes are chosen.

Peppercorn

Peppercorn is a multi-layered semi-transparent stain finish that combines a light gray base with a hand-wiped charcoal overlay for a warm gray overall color. Due to the semi-transparent nature of the finish, the grain and color of the wood species will be visible and the finish opacity and color will vary based on the character of the wood. The hand-wiped charcoal overlay will "hang-up" in corners, profile edges, and open grain areas of the wood, such as end-grain. Peppercorn is offered on select wood species due to the variable nature of the finish. It is also available with Ebony Glaze in a Highlight only or Glaze with Highlight application. Antique or Legacy distressing also available on select wood species.

Cappuccino

Cappuccino is a multi-step stain that combines a semi-transparent ivory undertone with a hand-wiped charcoal overlay for an overall caramel/gray tone. The charcoal overlay pronounces the grain and character of the wood species and creates an illusion of texture notable on Quartersawn Oak. Cappuccino is offered on select wood species due to the variable nature of the finish. With Burnt Sienna Glaze with Highlight, the overall color appears more caramel in tone. Antique or Legacy distressing options also available on select wood species.

Please see a sample for complete understanding of the rustic-luxe appearance of Peppercorn and Cappuccino. See following pages for further details on our glaze options and Antique and Legacy distressed finishes.

200.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Finish Information

See finish charts for door style/species/finish availability and pricing. Please view samples for proper representation of all our finishes.

PAINT FINISHES*Applicable to wood and MDF door styles.

Classic Paint Finishes

Available on MDF and maple.

Classic enamel adds lustrous color and completely opaque coverage. For the best final result, we begin with a catalyzed base primer fill coat to prepare the surface for even coverage of the catalyzed pigmented enamel. This creates a furniture quality satin finish which protects and seals for long-lasting beauty and durability.

Carriage Black Classic

Available on hickory, MDF, maple, oak and quartersawn oak.

Consistent with our other Classic Paint finishes, Carriage Black Classic finish consists of black enamel, completely opaque in coverage. When applied to oak, hickory and quartersawn oak the grain character and texture are emphasized and apparent. Carriage Black Classic on MDF and maple offers a smooth, classic finish.

* Painted Finishes

Painted finishes for orders in wood door styles are applied to hardwood doors and cabinetry components; however, to achieve the highest quality finished product, we reserve the right to utilize engineered material in combination with hardwood material for various parts of cabinetry. This includes center panels of door and drawer fronts, end panels, back panels and other finished parts. As with any painted wood surface, expansion and contraction with changes in climate will cause hairline cracking in the paint surface at joinery points. This is an acceptable characteristic and will vary based on climatic changes. It is recommended to avoid applications with painted cabinetry where the climate cannot be regulated.

GLAZE APPLICATIONS – Applicable to Stain and Paint* Finishes

Highlight OnlyApplicable to wood and MDF door styles.

This finish technique is achieved by hand brushing glaze on select profiles of doors and drawer fronts to enhance the detail without changing the overall color and appearance of the sealed base stain or paint color. In addition, molding profiles, decorative turnings and wainscot material also receive these brushed highlights. Characteristics inherent in this process include hang-up on profiles/inside corners and defined brush strokes. Intricate moldings, such as carved onlays, as well as smooth surfaces of cabinets and accessories do not include this highlight detail. Examples of smooth surfaces include: end panels, matching finished interiors and flat areas of doors/drawer fronts. Molding and accessories that do not receive highlight detail are noted in Sections 800 and 1000. An oven-cured satin finish top-coat completes the process, providing a durable and beautiful finish.

Glaze with HighlightApplicable to wood, premium veneer and MDF door styles.

This finish technique is achieved by spraying a glaze coat over the sealed base stain or paint color, then wiping it off by hand. This process alters the overall color and appearance of the base finish and is applied to all finished components*. The profile edges of doors, drawer fronts and molding receive hand-brushed detailing creating defined accent lines. Characteristics inherent in this process include uneven hang-up, rag marks in corners and glaze hang-up around natural characteristics in the wood, with defined brush strokes and defined hang-up on profile edges. Molding and accessories that do not receive highlight detail are noted in Section 800 and 1000. An oven-cured satin finish top-coat completes the process, providing a durable and beautiful finish. This finish option adds depth and a patina to the base color and emphasizes profiles and grain patterns in doors, drawer fronts and moldings. As with normal aging, the

patina varies throughout the kitchen and within individual doors or surfaces.

*Components include: doors and drawer fronts, decorative moldings, decorative accessories, all finished ends and matching finished interiors.

200.7OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Finish Information

See finish charts for door style/species/finish availability and pricing. Please view samples for proper representation of all our finishes.

Rasp MarksWorm Holes Chisel Marks

Knife Mark

Legacy Distressing

Dents

Sanded Corners

Antique Distressing

Antique

Antique Distressing is a finish process created by lightly distressing wood for a subtle worn appearance. Antique Distressing characteristics include sanded corners/profiles of doors and drawer fronts, as well as small dings and dents.

Legacy

Legacy Distressing is a finish process created by physically distressing wood for an aged appearance. Legacy Distressing characteristics include sanded corners/profiles, small dings and dents, rasping, worm holes, chisel marks and knife splits. In addition to physical distressing elements, a glazed brush spatter is applied.

All elements of Antique and Legacy Distressing vary by cabinet component; view a sample door for proper representation. Distressing is applied to doors, drawer fronts, all finished end treatments, moldings, decorative legs/feet, plywood panels, wainscot material, deluxe panels, accessories and wood tops**.

Matching finished interiors/shelving of cabinetry do not include Antique or Legacy Distressing; however, the glazed finish is maintained.

*See Antique/Legacy chart on page 200.15 for availability. Distressing is not available on flat center panel door styles or MDF core doors.

**Some moldings/carved accessories are not distressed due to their scale or intricate detail.

DISTRESSING OPTIONS FOR STAIN FINISHESApplicable to wood door styles.

Available in stain finishes with glaze and highlight (GLZHGLT).

Heirloom

Available on maple.

This multi-step painted finish creates the appearance of wear and patina of an heirloom furniture piece. A base enamel paint coat with a glaze and highlight process are combined with random distressing and sanding of pieces at various stages to produce this finish. In addition to hang-up of glaze and unique patina on flat surfaces, Heirloom finished product is sanded through the painted finish to expose natural wood or grain and create the effect of wear with age. After the sanding process, product receives a final clear conversion varnish top-coat that is oven-cured for durability.

As with normal aging, the patina and worn edges vary in severity throughout the kitchen and within individual doors or surfaces. Wear lines vary in thickness and degree. Application characteristics inherent in this process include uneven hang-up on profile edges, rag marks in corners and glaze hang-up around natural characteristics in the wood.

Carriage Black Heirloom

Available on cherry, hickory, knotty alder, maple, oak and quartersawn oak.

Consistent with our other Heirloom Paint finishes, Carriage Black Heirloom finish consists of black enamel paint coat with a glaze process which is lightly distressed and worn through creating the appearance of an heirloom furniture piece. Please note this finish does not receive highlighting. When applied to oak, hickory, cherry and quartersawn oak; the grain character, texture and hue variations are emphasized and apparent. When applied to knotty alder, pin holes and knots are randomly emphasized further enhancing the charm and character of the Heirloom finish. Maple offers a smooth appearance on flat areas of cabinetry/doors while maintaining the characteristics of Heirloom.

Heirloom

Patina on Flat Surfaces

Sand-Through

Visible Fractures at Joints

DISTRESSING OPTION FOR PAINT* FINISHESApplicable to wood door styles.

* Painted Finishes

Painted finishes for orders in wood door styles are applied to hardwood doors and cabinetry components; however, to achieve the highest quality finished product, we reserve the right to utilize engineered material in combination with hardwood material for various parts of cabinetry. This includes center panels of door and drawer fronts, end panels, back panels and other finished parts. As with any painted wood surface, expansion and contraction with changes in climate will cause hairline cracking in the paint surface at joinery points. This is an acceptable characteristic and will vary based on climatic changes. It is recommended to avoid applications with painted cabinetry where the climate cannot be regulated.

Spatter Marks

Glaze Hang-up

200.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Finish Information

See finish charts for door style/species/finish availability and pricing. Please view samples for proper representation of all our finishes.

SPECIALTY FINISHESAppaloosa Collection

Applicable to wood door styles.

Buckskin Appaloosa, Dove Appaloosa, Peppered Appaloosa, Silver Appaloosa

The Appaloosa finish collection features semi-transparent stains in shades of white, gray or brown with glaze detail and distressing. In addition to glaze hang-up and brush spatter, brushed glaze accents are added to enhance the depth of the finish. Dents, softly sanded corners, knife splits, chisel marks and worm holes complete the aged appearance. All physical and finish elements are hand applied and vary in application by piece; no two pieces are identical. Grain patterns of wood and other wood characteristics will show through the multi-layered finish and vary based on the wood species selected. Some wood species will absorb finish differently from stave to stave within a single door/drawer front. All elements vary by cabinet component. The final appearance is a unique timeworn finish that is protected by a satin finish top coat for long lasting beauty and durability. The Appaloosa Collection specialty finishes are applicable to doors, drawer fronts, all finished end treatments and decorative accessories* (moldings, decorative legs/feet). Matching finished interiors include finish elements but do not include physical distressing elements. Back sides of cabinet doors/drawer fronts are not distressed and do not receive brushed glaze accents and spatter elements; this causes the finish to be lighter than the front side.

*Some moldings/carved accessories are not distressed due to their scale or intricate detail.

Vineyard

Applicable to wood door styles.

Vineyard finish consists of a deep red stain enhanced by a black brush glazed finish. This multi-step finish process consists of a semi-opaque base coat followed by brush accents. Unique to this finish, glaze is hand-brushed over exposed finished components.*

Characteristics inherent with this brushed technique include natural accumulation of glaze in corners, profiles and open or end-grain areas of wood. Brush marks/strokes may be apparent and vary based on door style/species selected. The amount of glaze remaining on cabinet components is greater if compared to Glaze and Highlight (GLZHGLT) finishes. In addition, the wood species selected affects the overall depth or degree of this finish. Wood species such as cherry and knotty alder will exhibit deeper tones when compared to maple. Wood species such as oak and quartersawn oak with open grain on flat areas of cabinet components will absorb the glaze material more than the closed grain character of maple. This brushed technique results in a deep multi-layered finish, further emphasized by the selected wood species characteristics. A satin finish oven-cured top-coat completes the process, resulting in a premium quality crafted finish.*Components include: doors and drawer fronts, decorative moldings, decorative accessories, all finished ends and matching finished interiors.

Peppered AppaloosaBuckskin Appaloosa Dove Appaloosa Silver Appaloosa

200.9OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Finish Information

See finish charts for door style/species/finish availability and pricing. Please view samples for proper representation of all our finishes.

Coastal Collection

Applicable to wood and premium veneer door styles.

Semi-Transparent Stain with Dry Brush Accents

Castle Rock with Dry Brush, Cottage White with Dry Brush, Harbor Mist with Dry Brush, Islander with Dry Brush, Seagrass with Dry Brush, White Sand with Dry Brush

This finish process consists of the semi-transparent pigmented stain as described above with the addition of light dry brushed taupe accents to certain finished components and accessories*. These dry brush accents complement the stain and further enhance the wood characteristics, door style details and decorative molding/accessory profiles. The glaze is blotted nearly dry and brushed in a manner that accentuates the various components. Brush strokes will be random and apparent and are considered a desirable aesthetic for these finishes. Dry brushing will vary in thickness, opacity and quantity. Dry brushing on species with open grain, such as oak, will appear darker compared to the closed grain character of maple. Matching finished interior flats of cabinet components do not receive dry brushed accents; however, in the example of a bookcase, if shelving is upgraded to 11⁄2" thick profiled molding, the molding receives dry brushed accents. Back sides of cabinetry doors/drawer fronts do not receive dry brushed accents. A satin finish oven-cured top-coat completes the process and provides a superior sealed product.* Components which receive dry brushed glaze accents include: front side of doors and drawer fronts, decorative moldings, decorative accessories, wainscot material and all finished ends.

Coastal Sheer Collection

Applicable to wood and premium veneer door styles.

Semi-Transparent Stain – Sheer / No Dry Brush Accents

Castle Rock Sheer, Cottage White Sheer, Harbor Mist Sheer, Islander Sheer, Seagrass Sheer, White Sand Sheer

This finish process consists of a semi-transparent pigmented stain evenly applied to all finished cabinet components resulting in a color washed finish with slight visibility to the wood character and tone. Pigmented stains are semi-transparent; meaning the wood color and texture will affect the overall finish and will be slightly apparent. Some of these stains are more transparent than others affecting how much wood grain is visible. Castle Rock, Cottage White and White Sand show some grain, while Harbor Mist, Islander and Seagrass show very little to no grain. Also, the texture of wood species with open grain, such as oak, will be more apparent compared to the closed grain character of maple. A satin finish oven-cured top-coat completes the process and provides a superior sealed product.

Semi-Transparent Stain – Sheer / No Dry Brush Accents

Semi-Transparent Stain with Dry Brush Accents

Brush Marks

200.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Finish Information

Stoney Brooke Collection

Applicable to wood and premium veneer door styles.

The Stoney Brooke Collection evokes a vision of a mountain stream and the natural beauty of rocks that withstand years of weathering, only to emerge more beautiful. Each stone is unique and striking in appearance; nature creates subtle shades and textures of browns and grays.

This finish is achieved by artfully brushing glaze materials onto the stained surface. These materials are thicker than normal glazes and leave behind a subtle texture and textural appearance on top of the stained surface. The varying shades of application create a playful interaction on each piece. When combined with other cabinets or design elements in a project, the overall impression evokes fluid movement and beauty found in nature.

Cabinet interiors and shelves of matching finished interior cabinets receive the complete stain and glaze finish process of the Stoney Brooke Collection. Please note that the back sides of cabinet doors/drawer fronts do not receive glaze material; these areas will be stained the base color but will not receive the textural glazing of other finished components. Glaze is not applied to the inside scoop of raised panel doors intentionally. Characteristics inherent in this process include uneven glaze application with varying amounts of glaze as well as an uneven textural appearance and feel. An oven-cured satin finish top-coat is the final step in this process, providing a durable and beautiful finish.

Boulder

Greystone

Cobblestone

Shale

See finish charts for door style/species/finish availability and pricing. Please view samples for proper representation of all our finishes.

200.11OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Door Styles – Finish Select Program

Finish Select ProgramThe Finish Select Program offers the flexibility to go beyond our standard finish offering on wood/MDF door styles and our premium veneer/MDF door style Bella.

Available Options for Wood Door Styles

• Finish Select allows you to specify existing Design-Craft Stains, Paints, Coastal Sheer colors and Custom Paints on existing Design-Craft wood species/door style combinations that are not currently available as standard.

• Optional specifications include:

– Existing Design-Craft glazes in one of two applications: Highlight Only or Glaze with Highlight

– Dry Brushing

– Distressing options in one of three applications: Heirloom Distressing, Antique Distressing or Legacy Distressing

Available Options for MDF Door Styles

• Finish Select allows you to specify existing Design-Craft Paints and Custom Paints on existing Design-Craft MDF door styles that are not currently available as standard.

• Optional specifications include: – Existing Design-Craft glazes in one of two applications: Highlight Only* or Glaze with Highlight – Dry Brushing

* Not available on Bella/MDF.

Available Options for the Bella Door Style (Premium Veneer)

• Finish Select allows you to specify existing Design-Craft Stains or Coastal Sheer colors on the Bella door style in existing Design-Craft premium veneer species that are not currently available as standard.

• Optional specifications include:

– Existing Design-Craft glazes in Glaze with Highlight* application

– Dry Brushing

*Glaze & Highlight options ordered on Bella-Premium Veneer will not receive highlighting on doors, drawer fronts, premium veneer moldings and accessories.

Three Easy Steps

1. Submit a Finish Select Order Form specifying your finish selections.

For Custom Paint, please submit a color sample; see order form for color sample guidelines. Our color technicians utilize advanced technology to interpret your color sample and create a one-of-a-kind custom paint finish.

2. Review sample.

Samples will be produced based on finish selections or color sample submitted. Sample will be shipped for customer review to ensure color meets expectations, remaining sample will be retained by Design-Craft to confirm match when producing order.

3. When placing cabinet order, reference Finish Select sample order number of approved sample and submit signed Finish Select Agreement form.

The sample order number ensures cabinetry is produced using same color as approved sample.

Additional Considerations

Light SourceColor is affected by light and can appear different in various types of lighting. Please confirm your color match in the light and, if possible, the actual room where your cabinetry will be installed.

SheenDesign-Craft’s finish process is separated into numerous steps, the last being a top-coat with a satin or semi-gloss sheen. It is important to note that color can appear different with different levels of sheen. Lower sheens will cause a color to appear lighter, whereas higher sheens deepen a color’s appearance.

Painted FinishesPainted finishes for orders in wood door styles are applied to hardwood doors, drawer fronts and other cabinetry components; however, to achieve the highest quality finished product, we reserve the right to utilize engineered material in combination with hardwood material for various parts of cabinetry. This includes center panels of door and drawer fronts, end panels, back panels and other finished parts. As with any painted wood surface, expansion and contraction with changes in the climate will cause hairline cracking in the paint surface at joinery points. This is an acceptable characteristic and will vary based on climatic changes. It is recommended to avoid applications with painted cabinetry where the climate cannot be regulated.

Remember to specify finished cabinet end treatments for exposed ends of cabinetry for the Finish Select Program. Please see order forms for sample pricing and further details.

See next page for available finishes and options; specialty finishes such as the Appaloosa Collection, Vineyard and the Stoney Brooke Collection are not available.

200.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood, Premium Veneer and MDF Door Styles – Finish Select Program

Finish Select – Available Options – See previous page for Finish Select Program details.

Remember to specify finished cabinet end treatments for exposed ends of cabinetry for

the Finish Select program.

Please see order forms for sample pricing and further details.

STEP 1 – BASE COLORREQUIRED: Pick one base color.

Stains Upcharge

Amaretto 2%

Brandywine —

Cappuccino 2%

Champagne 2%

Chestnut —

Eagle Rock —

Espresso 2%

Ginger Snap 2%

Hazelnut —

Natural —

Onyx 2%

Pecan —

Peppercorn 2%

Rumberry —

Sandalwood —

Sangria —

Smoke —

Tumbleweed —

Walnut 2%

Stain with Glaze & Highlight Upcharge

Proceed to Step #4.

Harvest Bronze EBN GLZHGLT 15%

Paints Upcharge

Custom Paint* (includes CLSC) 24%

Bliss 8%

Carriage Black 8%

Cayenne 8%

Chai Latte 8%

Divinity 8%

Earl Grey 8%

Frappe 8%

Irish Crème 8%

Macchiato 8%

Morel 8%

Oyster 8%

Saffron 8%

Sage 8%

Sea Salt 8%

White Chocolate 8%

White Icing 8%

Coastal Sheers Upcharge

Castle Rock Sheer 5%

Cottage White Sheer 5%

Harbor Mist Sheer 5%

Islander Sheer 5%

Seagrass Sheer 5%

White Sand Sheer 5%

STEP 2 – GLAZE OPTIONSREQUIRED: Pick no glaze or glaze color.

Paint Only - No Glaze

CLSC – Classic

Proceed to Step 4.

Stain or Coastal Sheer Only - No Glaze

Proceed to Step 4.

Stains, Paints and Coastal Sheer - Glaze Color

Pick one glaze color, proceed to Step 3.

BRN – Burnt Sienna PWT – Pewter*

EBN – Ebony RWU – Raw Umber

MCH – Mocha SBL – Sable

*Available in highlight only for Step 3.

• Step 2 not applicable to Harvest Bronze EBN GLZHGLT.

STEP 3 – GLAZE APPLICATIONREQUIRED IF GLAZE COLOR CHOSEN in Step 2. Pick one glaze application.

Application Upcharge

HGLT - Highlight Only 10%

GLZHGLT* - Glaze with Highlight on Paints

14%

GLZHGLT - Glaze with Highlight on Stains and Coastal Sheers

15%

*Not available on some paint/glaze combinations, see GLZHGLT Restrictions chart below for details. Note: these paint/glaze combinations are available in Highlight Only.

• For orders in Bella door style: – HGLT is not available. – GLZHGLT options will not receive highlighting on doors and drawer fronts.

• Step 3 not applicable to Harvest Bronze EBN GLZHGLT.

• See Glaze Application descriptions on page 200.6.

GLZHGLT Restrictions

Paint Colors

Glaze Colors

EbonyRaw

UmberSable

Custom Paint N/A N/A N/A

Chai Latte N/A N/A N/A

Divinity N/A N/A N/A

Earl Grey N/A N/A N/A

Frappe N/A N/A N/A

Irish Crème N/A N/A N/A

Macchiato N/A N/A N/A

Sea Salt N/A N/A N/A

White Icing N/A N/A N/A

White Chocolate N/A N/A N/A

STEP 4 – DRY BRUSHOPTIONAL

Application Upcharge

DRYBRUSH light dry brushed taupe accents

15%

• Available on any base color.

• Complements the base color and further enhances the wood characteristics, door style details and decorative molding/accessory profiles.

• Brush strokes are random and apparent.

• Varies in thickness, opacity and quantity.

• Appears darker on open grain species such as oak as compared to the closed grain character of maple.

STEP 5 – DISTRESSINGOPTIONAL: Pick one distressing technique.

Distressing Technique Upcharge

HRLM - HEIRLOOM machine dents, sand through 3%

ANTQ - ANTIQUE hand dents, round over

5%

LGCY - LEGACY Antique plus rasping, pock marks, spatter/cowtailing

13%

• Not available on Bella or MDF door styles.

• Available on any base color.

• Does not require glaze color.

• Spatter/cowtailing uses glaze selected; will be omitted from Legacy distressing if glaze is not ordered.

• See page 200.7 for further details on distressing options.

STEP 6 – SHEEN LEVELREQUIRED

Sheen

SATN - Satin

SGLS - Semi-Gloss

*Color sample required for Custom Paints; see Finish Select order form for sample requirements.

• Step 1 base color availability: – Wood door styles: all base colors. – Bella door style in Premium Veneers: stains and coastal sheers. – MDF door styles: paint options only.

200.13OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood and MDF Door Styles – Unfinished and Stain Finishes

Applicable to wood door styles only, see charts for exceptions. See individual door specifications for wood species availability by door style. See pages 200.18-20 for finish availability on the Bella door style (Premium Veneer and MDF).

UNFINISHED

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Unfinished — —

STAIN FINISHES

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER†

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Amaretto 2% Satin

Brandywine — Semi-Gloss

Cappuccino 2% Satin

Champagne 2% Semi-Gloss

Chestnut — Satin

Eagle Rock — Satin

Espresso 2% Satin

Ginger Snap 2% Satin

Hazelnut — Semi-Gloss

Natural — Semi-Gloss

Onyx 2% Satin

Pecan — Semi-Gloss

Peppercorn 2% Satin

Rumberry — Satin

Sandalwood — Semi-Gloss

Sangria — Satin

Smoke — Satin

Tumbleweed — Semi-Gloss

Walnut 2% Satin

†Knotty Alder door styles always receive Satin sheen.

FALL 2016 UPDATE: Espresso made available on maple. Cashew, Sesame and Wheat have been discontinued/removed from chart.

FALL 2017 UPDATE: New finish, Eagle Rock, has been added to chart.

200.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood and MDF Door Styles – Stain with Glaze Finishes

STAIN WITH GLAZE: HIGHLIGHT ONLY (HGLT) OR GLAZE & HIGHLIGHT (GLZHGLT)

GLAZE COLOR KEY: Burnt Sienna (BRN), Ebony (EBN), Sable (SBL)

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH CHARGE

SHEEN CHERRY HICKORYKNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAKHIGHLIGHT ONLY

GLAZE & HIGHLIGHT

Amaretto EBN 12% 17% Satin

Brandywine EBN 10% 15% Satin

Cappuccino BRN 12% 17% Satin

Champagne BRN 12% 17% Satin

Chestnut EBN 10% 15% Satin

Eagle Rock SBL N/A 15% Satin

Ginger Snap EBN 12% 17% Satin

Harvest Bronze EBN N/A 15% Satin

Hazelnut BRN 10% 15% Satin

Natural BRN 10% 15% Satin

Pecan BRN 10% 15% Satin

Peppercorn EBN 12% 17% Satin

Rumberry EBN 10% 15% Satin

Sandalwood BRN 10% 15% Satin

Smoke EBN 10% 15% Satin

Tumbleweed BRN 10% 15% Satin

Walnut EBN 12% 17% Satin

FALL 2016 UPDATE: Cashew, Sesame and Wheat have been discontinued/removed from chart.

FALL 2017 UPDATE: Frost finishes have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

Applicable to wood door styles only, see charts for exceptions. See individual door specifications for wood species availability by door style. See pages 200.18-20 for finish availability on the Bella door style (Premium Veneer and MDF).

200.15OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood and MDF Door Styles – Distressed Finishes & Paint Finishes

ANTIQUE (ANTQ) OR LEGACY (LGCY) DISTRESSING

Available on stain with glaze and highlight only (GLZHGLT).

GLAZE COLOR KEY: Burnt Sienna (BRN), Ebony (EBN), Sable (SBL)

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH CHARGE

SHEEN CHERRY HICKORYKNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAKANTIQUE LEGACY

Amaretto EBN GLZHGLT 22% 30% Satin

Brandywine EBN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Cappuccino BRN GLZHGLT 22% 30% Satin

Champagne BRN GLZHGLT 22% 30% Satin

Chestnut EBN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Eagle Rock SBL GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Ginger Snap EBN GLZHGLT 22% 30% Satin

Harvest Bronze EBN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Hazelnut BRN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Natural BRN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Pecan BRN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Peppercorn EBN GLZHGLT 22% 30% Satin

Rumberry EBN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Sandalwood BRN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Smoke EBN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Tumbleweed BRN GLZHGLT 20% 28% Satin

Walnut EBN GLZHGLT 22% 30% Satin

Not available on Flat center panel door styles. FALL 2016 UPDATE: Cashew, Sesame and Wheat have been discontinued/removed from chart.

Applicable to wood door styles only, see charts for exceptions. See individual door specifications for wood species availability by door style. See pages 200.18-20 for finish availability on the Bella door style (Premium Veneer and MDF).

CLASSIC PAINT (CLSC)

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Bliss CLSC 8% Satin

Carriage Black CLSC 8% Satin

Cayenne CLSC 8% Satin

Chai Latte CLSC 8% Satin

Divinity CLSC 8% Satin

Earl Grey CLSC 8% Satin

Frappe CLSC 8% Satin

Irish Créme CLSC 8% Satin

Macchiato CLSC 8% Satin

Saffron CLSC 8% Satin

Sage CLSC 8% Satin

Sea Salt CLSC 8% Satin

White Chocolate CLSC 8% Satin

White Icing CLSC 8% Satin

FALL 2017 UPDATES: Addition of MDF. New paint colors: Earl Grey, Frappe, Macchiato and Sea Salt. Available to order on October 23, 2017.

200.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood and MDF Door Styles – Paint Finishes

PAINT WITH GLAZE: HIGHLIGHT ONLY (HGLT) OR GLAZE & HIGHLIGHT (GLZHGLT)

GLAZE COLOR KEY: Burnt Sienna (BRN), Ebony (EBN), Mocha (MCH), Pewter (PWT), Raw Umber (RWU), Sable (SBL)

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH CHARGE

SHEEN CHERRY HICKORYKNOTTY ALDER

MDFMAPLE OAK QS OAKHIGHLIGHT

ONLYGLAZE &

HIGHLIGHT

Cayenne SBL 17% 22% Satin

Chai Latte PWT 17% N/A Satin

Divinity BRN 17% N/A Satin

Divinity PWT 17% N/A Satin

Earl Grey EBN 17% N/A Satin

Frappe EBN 17% N/A Satin

Irish Créme PWT 17% N/A Satin

Macchiato EBN 17% N/A Satin

Macchiato PWT 17% N/A Satin

Morel RWU N/A 22% Satin

Oyster MCH N/A 22% Satin

Saffron MCH 17% 22% Satin

Sage MCH 17% 22% Satin

Sea Salt PWT 17% N/A Satin

White Chocolate MCH 17% N/A Satin

White Chocolate PWT 17% N/A Satin

White Icing PWT 17% N/A Satin

FALL 2017 UPDATES: • Addition of MDF. • New paint colors: Earl Grey, Frappe, Macchiato and Sea Salt with various glaze options. • Available to order on October 23, 2017.

HEIRLOOM: PAINT, GLAZE AND HIGHLIGHT (GLZHGLT) AND DISTRESSING (HRLM)

GLAZE COLOR KEY: Ebony (EBN), Mocha (MCH), Raw Umber (RWU), Sable (SBL)

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Carriage Black EBN GLAZE HRLM* 25% Satin

Cayenne SBL GLZHGLT HRLM 25% Satin

Morel RWU GLZHGLT HRLM 25% Satin

Oyster MCH GLZHGLT HRLM 25% Satin

Saffron MCH GLZHGLT HRLM 25% Satin

Sage MCH GLZHGLT HRLM 25% Satin

*FALL 2016 UPDATE: Carriage Black EBN GLAZE HRLM does not receive highlighting.

Applicable to wood door styles only, see charts for exceptions. See individual door specifications for wood species availability by door style. See pages 200.18-20 for finish availability on the Bella door style (Premium Veneer and MDF).

200.17OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood and MDF Door Styles – Specialty Finishes

COASTAL COLLECTION

Semi-Transparent Stain – Sheer / No Dry Brush Accents

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Castle Rock Sheer 5% Satin

Cottage White Sheer 5% Satin

Harbor Mist Sheer 5% Satin

Islander Sheer 5% Satin

Seagrass Sheer 5% Satin

White Sand Sheer 5% Satin

Semi-Transparent Stain with Dry Brush Accents*

Castle Rock with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Cottage White with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Harbor Mist with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Islander with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Seagrass with Dry Brush 20% Satin

White Sand with Dry Brush 20% Satin

*SPRING 2017 UPDATE: This collection now includes “with Dry Brush” in the finish description.FALL 2017 UPDATE: Sundance has been discontinued/removed from these charts.

THE APPALOOSA COLLECTION

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Buckskin Appaloosa 40% Satin

Dove Appaloosa 40% Satin

Peppered Appaloosa 40% Satin

Silver Appaloosa 40% Satin

*SPRING 2017 UPDATE: Appaloosa has been re-named Peppered Appaloosa.FALL 2017 UPDATE: New Appaloosa colors have been added to chart.

STONEY BROOKE COLLECTION

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Boulder 35% Satin

Cobblestone 35% Satin

Greystone 35% Satin

Shale 35% Satin

Not available on following door styles: Reverse Raised center panel doors (RR), Beaded center panel doors (BP) and Bahamas.

Applicable to wood door styles only, see charts for exceptions. See individual door specifications for wood species availability by door style. See pages 200.18-20 for finish availability on the Bella door style (Premium Veneer and MDF).

VINEYARD

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGESHEEN CHERRY HICKORY

KNOTTY ALDER

MDF MAPLE OAK QS OAK

Vineyard 20% Satin

200.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

UNFINISHED

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGE SHEEN RECO

NST

ITU

TED

H

EART

WO

OD

RECO

NST

ITU

TED

W

HIT

EWO

OD

STRA

IGH

T-G

RAIN

RE

D O

AK

BAM

BOO

BEEC

H

ROSE

WO

OD

SYCA

MO

RE

WEN

GE

MD

F

Unfinished — n/a

STAIN FINISHES

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGE SHEEN RECO

NST

ITU

TED

H

EART

WO

OD

RECO

NST

ITU

TED

W

HIT

EWO

OD

STRA

IGH

T-G

RAIN

RE

D O

AK

BAM

BOO

BEEC

H

ROSE

WO

OD

SYCA

MO

RE

WEN

GE

MD

F

Amaretto 2% Satin

Brandywine — Semi-Gloss

Cappuccino 2% Satin

Champagne 2% Semi-Gloss

Chestnut — Satin

Espresso 2% Satin

Ginger Snap 2% Satin

Hazelnut — Semi-Gloss

Natural — Semi-Gloss

Onyx 2% Satin

Pecan — Semi-Gloss

Peppercorn 2% Satin

Rumberry — Satin

Sandalwood — Semi-Gloss

Sangria — Satin

Smoke — Satin

Tumbleweed — Semi-Gloss

Walnut 2% Satin

FALL 2016 UPDATE: Cashew, Sesame and Wheat have been discontinued/removed from chart.SPRING 2017 UPDATE: Straight-Grain Cherry and Straight-Grain Maple have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

Applicable to Bella door style.

Premium Veneer and MDF Door Styles – Unfinished and Stain Finishes

STAIN WITH GLAZE & HIGHLIGHT OPTIONS (GLZHGLT)

GLAZE COLOR KEY: Burnt Sienna (BRN), Ebony (EBN)

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGE SHEEN RECO

NST

ITU

TED

H

EART

WO

OD

RECO

NST

ITU

TED

W

HIT

EWO

OD

STRA

IGH

T-G

RAIN

RE

D O

AK

BAM

BOO

BEEC

H

ROSE

WO

OD

SYCA

MO

RE

WEN

GE

MD

F

Sandalwood BRN GLZHGLT 15% Satin

Smoke EBN GLZHGLT 15% Satin

Tumbleweed BRN GLZHGLT 15% Satin

Glaze & Highlight options ordered on Bella-Premium Veneer will not receive highlighting on doors, drawer fronts, premium veneer moldings and accessories.FALL 2016 UPDATE: Cashew, Sesame and Wheat have been discontinued/removed from chart.SPRING 2017 UPDATE: Straight-Grain Cherry and Straight-Grain Maple have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

FALL 2017 UPDATE: Frost finishes have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

200.19OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Premium Veneer and MDF Door Styles – Paint Finishes

Applicable to Bella door style.

CLASSIC PAINT

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGE SHEEN RECO

NST

ITU

TED

H

EART

WO

OD

RECO

NST

ITU

TED

W

HIT

EWO

OD

STRA

IGH

T-G

RAIN

RE

D O

AK

BAM

BOO

BEEC

H

ROSE

WO

OD

SYCA

MO

RE

WEN

GE

MD

F

Bliss CLSC 8% Satin

Carriage Black CLSC 8% Satin

Cayenne CLSC 8% Satin

Chai Latte CLSC 8% Satin

Divinity CLSC 8% Satin

Earl Grey CLSC 8% Satin

Frappe CLSC 8% Satin

Irish Créme CLSC 8% Satin

Macchiato CLSC 8% Satin

Saffron CLSC 8% Satin

Sage CLSC 8% Satin

Sea Salt CLSC 8% Satin

White Chocolate CLSC 8% Satin

White Icing CLSC 8% Satin

FALL 2016 UPDATE: MDF and Classic Paint options added to Bella door style.

SPRING 2017 UPDATE: Straight-Grain Cherry and Straight-Grain Maple have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

FALL 2017 UPDATES: New paint colors: Earl Grey, Frappe, Macchiato and Sea Salt. Available to order on October 23, 2017.

PAINT WITH GLAZE & HIGHLIGHT (GLZHGLT)

GLAZE COLOR KEY: Mocha (MCH), Raw Umber (RWU), Sable (SBL)

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGE SHEEN RECO

NST

ITU

TED

H

EART

WO

OD

RECO

NST

ITU

TED

W

HIT

EWO

OD

STRA

IGH

T-G

RAIN

RE

D O

AK

BAM

BOO

BEEC

H

ROSE

WO

OD

SYCA

MO

RE

WEN

GE

MD

F

Cayenne SBL GLZHGLT 22% Satin

Morel RWU GLZHGLT 22% Satin

Oyster MCH GLZHGLT 22% Satin

Saffron MCH GLZHGLT 22% Satin

Sage MCH GLZHGLT 22% Satin

Orders in Bella-MDF: Doors and drawer fronts receive glaze, but no highlight details; applicable wood moldings and accessories receive glaze and

highlight.

FALL 2016 UPDATE: MDF and Paint with Glaze & Highlight options added to Bella door style.

SPRING 2017 UPDATE: Straight-Grain Cherry and Straight-Grain Maple have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

200.20 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

COASTAL COLLECTION

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGE SHEEN RECO

NST

ITU

TED

H

EART

WO

OD

RECO

NST

ITU

TED

W

HIT

EWO

OD

STRA

IGH

T-G

RAIN

RE

D O

AK

BAM

BOO

BEEC

H

ROSE

WO

OD

SYCA

MO

RE

WEN

GE

MD

F

Semi-Transparent Stain – Sheer / No Dry Brush Accents

Castle Rock Sheer 5% Satin

Cottage White Sheer 5% Satin

Harbor Mist Sheer 5% Satin

Islander Sheer 5% Satin

Seagrass Sheer 5% Satin

White Sand Sheer 5% Satin

Semi-Transparent Stain with Dry Brush Accents*

Castle Rock with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Cottage White with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Harbor Mist with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Islander with Dry Brush 20% Satin

Seagrass with Dry Brush 20% Satin

White Sand with Dry Brush 20% Satin

SPRING 2017 UPDATES:

• Straight-Grain Cherry and Straight-Grain Maple have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

*This collection now includes “with Dry Brush” in the finish description.

FALL 2017 UPDATE: Sundance has been discontinued/removed from these charts.

Premium Veneer and MDF Door Styles – Specialty Finishes

STONEY BROOKE COLLECTION

FINISH OPTIONSFINISH

CHARGE SHEEN RECO

NST

ITU

TED

H

EART

WO

OD

RECO

NST

ITU

TED

W

HIT

EWO

OD

STRA

IGH

T-G

RAIN

RE

D O

AK

BAM

BOO

BEEC

H

ROSE

WO

OD

SYCA

MO

RE

WEN

GE

MD

FBoulder 35% Satin

Cobblestone 35% Satin

Greystone 35% Satin

Shale 35% Satin

SPRING 2017 UPDATE: Straight-Grain Cherry and Straight-Grain Maple have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

Applicable to Bella door style.

200.21OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

ACRYLIC

COLOR MELAMINE BACK GIBSON DOOR STYLE

Carbon Black Black

Charcoal Gray Gray

Cornflower Blue Blue

Gardenia White

Imperial Red Red

White Dahlia White

Acrylic / Textured Melamine Specifications and Color Charts

Acrylic SpecificationsApplicable to the Gibson door style; available in 6 gloss finishes.

The Gibson High Gloss Acrylic cabinet door features an ABS† colored layer, which is permanently fused with a clear ultra high gloss acrylic top layer. This product is then flat laminated to an engineered substrate and edge banded with color matched ABS to create a sleek and sophisticated product. Doors/drawer fronts in Acrylic receive a matching melamine back, see color chart for details.

High heat generated from the self-cleaning cycle of ovens or ranges may discolor Acrylic cabinetry. It is highly recommended to use a heat shield (see Section 900) or to open the doors and drawers fully while running the self-cleaning cycle.

A protective peel coat is applied to some Acrylic product. Please remove after cabinet installation, but prior to decorative hardware installation. Use fingernail, not sharp objects.†ABS (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene) is an impact resistant, mechanically and thermally resilient, high quality thermoplastic.

Textured Melamine SpecificationsTextured Melamine features advanced European technology in a material that emulates the tone and character found in naturally time-worn woods. The Pike’s Peak door style is available in four colors; each having its own unique grain pattern and dimensional texture.

REMNANTS COLLECTION – TEXTURED MELAMINE

COLOR MELAMINE BACK PIKE’S PEAK DOOR STYLE

Desert Wood Matching

Driftwood Matching

Silver Moss Matching

Tobacco Matching

200.22 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

FOIL – GLOSS

COLORMELAMINE

BACK*

DOOR STYLES

CALEDON EATON FENWICK LEIGHTON LINCOLN WATTSBURG WINTERBERRY

Brushed Sterling Gray

Midnight Black

Pearl Ivory

Ruby Red Gray

Whitecap White

FALL 2017 UPDATE: Marine Blue Metallic and Seafoam Green Metallic have been discontinued/removed from this chart.

FOIL – MATTE

COLORMELAMINE

BACK*

DOOR STYLES

CALEDON EATON FENWICK LEIGHTON LINCOLN WATTSBURG WINTERBERRY

Dune Matching

Polar Matching

FOIL – WOODGRAIN

COLORMELAMINE

BACK*

DOOR STYLES

CALEDON EATON FENWICK LEIGHTON LINCOLN WATTSBURG WINTERBERRY

Amber Walnut Matching

Golden Applewood Matching

Honeysuckle Cherry Matching

Kona Oak Matching

Tigereye Walnut Matching

*Melamine Back color information is not applicable to five-piece Thermofoil door styles; five-piece styles receive foil on front and back of doors/drawer fronts.

Thermofoil SpecificationsFinish options: Gloss, Matte, Woodgrain

Our thermofoil selection includes a variety of solids (matte and gloss) and realistic woodgrains in thicknesses ranging from 8 mil to 30 mil. Woodgrain foils provide a realistic-looking durable alternative to diminishing hardwood resources.

One-Piece Thermofoil doors and drawer fronts are constructed from one piece of 3⁄4" thick medium density fiberboard; profile detail is routed into MDF and is then covered with thermofoil material. The backside of one-piece door/drawer fronts receive complementary melamine backs, see color charts below for details.

Five-Piece Thermofoil doors and drawer fronts feature thermofoil-wrapped profiled stiles and rails with flat or raised center panels. Flat and raised center panels of five-piece door/drawer fronts receive foil on the front and back side.

Thermofoils have consistent color, gloss and surface quality from edge to edge. Matte and woodgrain Thermofoils are scratch, mar and water resistant and won’t chip or crack. Thermofoil is made from PVC which is one of the most versatile polymers. It prints and laminates very well and can accept a variety of coatings.

High heat generated from the self-cleaning cycle of ovens or ranges may discolor Thermofoil cabinetry. It is highly recommended to use a heat shield (see Section 900) or to open the doors and drawers fully while running the self-cleaning cycle.

A protective peel coat is applied to some Thermofoil product. Please remove after cabinet installation, but prior to decorative hardware installation. Use fingernail, not sharp objects.NOTE: Thermofoils will be also be referred to as Foils in this specifications guide.

Thermofoil Specifications and Color Charts

200.23OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Square Foot Door and Drawer Front Pricing

Square Foot Door Pricing DOOR

• Available in 1⁄16" increments.

• Minimum width 5", maximum 25".

• Minimum height 63⁄4", maximum 62".

• See individual door style specifications in this section for styling details.

• Doors can be bored for hinges; order hinges separately, see Section 1200. The number of hinge borings varies by door height, see chart below right.

• Specify hinge boring requirement:

LPREP Prep/bored for hinge left RPREP Prep/bored for hinge right NH No boring

• If no hinge is selected there may be a small hole on the back side of door which was created during the finishing process.

• Specify bumper pad requirement, see codes below.

• If door is being used for cabinet with light valance prep modification, specify LVP and hinge boring will be adjusted accordingly.

• Glass insert and mullion modifications available; see Section 1100.

• We do not identify base, wall, vanity and tall cabinet types; specify arch/square door styles as needed. EXAMPLE: If Windwood door style is ordered, an arch door will be shipped. If Brookhill door style is ordered, a square door will be shipped.

• Doors outside the minimums/maximums listed as well as Base/Wall Spice Racks, Bi-Fold, Lift and Stay, Square Corner and Vertical Lift are not available through the Square Foot Pricing Program but will be considered through the Custom Quote Program. Tambor door replacements available, see Section 1200.

Square Foot Drawer Front Pricing DRAWERFRONT

• Available in 1⁄16" increments.

• Minimum width 5", maximum 48".

• Minimum height 3", maximum 24".

• Drawer fronts follow current drawer style configurations; see following pages of this section for configuration based on height.

• Drawer boxes are not included, order separately.

• Specify bumper pad requirement, see codes below.

• Slab and tilt-down tray modification available; see Section 1100.

• Drawer fronts outside the minimums/maximums listed as well as Spice (SDC) drawer fronts are not available through the Square Foot Pricing Program but will be considered through the Custom Quote Program. Corner drawer front replacements available, see Section 1200.

Calculating Size and List Price for Doors and Drawer Fronts

To calculate square feet for doors and drawer fronts:

• Multiply width x height.

EXAMPLE DOOR: 23.875 x 23.25 = 555.09375

• Divide above total by 144. This is your total square feet. 555.09375 ÷ 144 = 3.8548 . . . round to 3.85 – always round up to the second decimal.

To calculate the list price for each front:

• Follow the Door or Drawer Front chart to determine size category based on total square feet determined above (Small, Medium, etc.).

• Multiply total square feet by the list price/group applicable to door style:

Brookhill Raised Panel Maple (PG5) door example (medium size): 3.85 x $82 = $315.70 List Price

NOTE: Finish upcharges and modification pricing will be additional.

Example door and drawer front – order specifications:

SKU Width Height

DOOR 23.875 x 23.25

DRAWERFRONT 23.875 x 6.50

SQUARE FOOT DOORS DOOR SQUARE FOOT PRICINGDoor Size Sq. Ft 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13Small 0 to 2.0 59 67 75 77 97 102 104 114 120 126 132 139 158

Medium 2.1 to 4.0 47 54 61 63 82 86 89 98 103 108 113 119 141

Large 4.1 to 6.0 40 48 53 55 75 79 81 89 93 98 103 111 133

X-Large Over 6.0 35 43 47 48 68 71 75 83 87 91 96 103 126

SQUARE FOOT DRAWER FRONTS DRAWER FRONT SQUARE FOOT PRICINGDrawer Front Size Sq. Ft 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13Small 0 to 1.0 132 142 177 182 210 221 228 251 264 266 297 312 334

Medium Over 1.0 76 82 103 106 124 130 135 149 156 159 179 188 204

237⁄8"

61⁄2"

231⁄4"

Conversion Chart Fraction to Decimal

Fraction Decimal

1/16 0.0625 1/8 0.125 3/16 0.1875 1/4 0.25 5/16 0.3125 3/8 0.375 7/16 0.4375 1/2 0.5 9/16 0.5625 5/8 0.625 11/16 0.6875 3/4 0.75 13/16 0.8125 7/8 0.875 15/16 0.9375 1 1

Bumper Pads

BUMP Bumper Pads Installed NOBUMP Bumper Pads Not Included

Number of Hinge Borings by Door Height

Door Height Number of Hinge Borings

Up to 30" high 2

301⁄16" – 60" high 3

601⁄16" high and greater 4

200.24 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

One Style – Four Options

Flat (FP) Raised (RP)Reverse Raised (RR) Beaded (BP)

Center Panel options are available in seventeen door styles. Pick a door style and one of four center panel options to create a unique look. Choose from flat, reverse raised, raised or beaded center panels. See following pages for wood species availability, price group information, mullion availability as well as door, drawer and deluxe panel information.

Pick Your Door Style Pick Your Panel

Flat (FP)

Raised (RP)

Reverse Raised (RR)

Beaded (BP)

Pick A Panel for Wood Door Styles

200.25OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Door Style Conversion Chart, Complete Door List

Door Style Conversion Chart – Wood Door Styles

OLD NAME 2015 DOOR STYLE NAME – PICK A PANEL

Barcelona Valencia Flat Panel

Bayside Potter's Mill Reverse Raised Panel

Brookhill Brookhill Raised Panel

Calistoga Calistoga Raised Panel

Catalina Devonshire Beaded Panel

Central Park West Park Place Reverse Raised Panel

Dana Pointe Dana Pointe Beaded Panel

Devonshire Devonshire Raised Panel

Hartford Providence Reverse Raised Panel

Hudson Falls Hudson Falls Reverse Raised Panel

Loxley Loxley Flat Panel

Madison Madison Raised Panel

Mendocino Sonoma Reverse Raised Panel

Mission Mission Flat Panel

Newcastle Devonshire Reverse Raised Panel

Park Place Park Place Flat Panel

Potter's Mill Potter's Mill Flat Panel

Providence Providence Flat Panel

Quaint Mission Reverse Raised Panel

Santiago Hudson Falls Flat Panel

Sonoma Sonoma Flat Panel

St. Andrews Devonshire Flat Panel

Valencia Valencia Raised Panel

Venice Venice Raised Panel

Victoria Victoria Raised Panel

Wakefield Wakefield Raised Panel

Windwood Windwood Raised Panel

Complete Door List

DOOR NAME MATERIAL TYPE

Bahamas Wood

Bella Premium Veneer & MDF

Brookhill Wood & MDF

Caledon Thermofoil

Calistoga Wood

Dana Pointe Wood

Devonshire Wood

Eaton Thermofoil

Fenwick Thermofoil

Gibson Acrylic

Hudson Falls* Wood

Leighton Thermofoil

Lincoln Thermofoil

Loxley Wood

Madison Wood

Mission Wood

Park Place Wood & MDF

Pike’s Peak Textured Melamine

Potter’s Mill Wood & MDF

Providence Wood & MDF

Sonoma Wood

Valencia Wood

Venice Wood

Victoria Wood

Wakefield Wood

Wattsburg Thermofoil

Windwood Wood

Winterberry Thermofoil

Door styles with this symbol are available with four center panel options: flat, reverse raised, raised or beaded.

*Not available with a raised center panel.

200.26 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Bahamas Specialty Door Style

Stile DetailRail

Detail

Wood Species Price Group

Cherry 12

Hickory 11

Knotty Alder* 12

Maple 11

Oak 10

* Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon construction.

• Unique louvered center panel.

• If door or five piece drawer front height does not allow for full-height louvers, bottom louver will be adjusted.

Bahamas (Wood)

200.27OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP)

MEDIUM69⁄16" – 9" high,21⁄4" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, louvered center panel

LARGE91⁄16" high and greater, 21⁄4" stiles, 2" rails, louvered center panel

SLAB Up to 61⁄2" high

Drawer Front Rules – Standard Top Drawer Shaded

21⁄16"

69⁄16"

21⁄16"

21⁄16"

25⁄16" 21⁄4"

25⁄16" 21⁄4"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)SLAB Up to 67⁄16" wide

MEDIUM61⁄2" – 611⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 2" rails, louvered center panel

LARGE63⁄4" wide and greater, 21⁄4" stiles, 2" rails, louvered center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

MUL MP CMUL XMUL MCB MPOL

25⁄16" 21⁄4"

69⁄16"

Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

21⁄16"

Panel Profile Detail

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Door Rules – Typical Door Shaded

Bahamas Specialty Door Style

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

200.28 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Bella (Premium Veneer and MDF) Material Price Group

Reconstituted Heartwood 7

Reconstituted Whitewood 6

Straight-Grain Red Oak 7

Bamboo 12

Beech 12

Rosewood 12

Sycamore 13

Wenge 12

MDF* 5

*Available in Paint finishes only, see finish charts for details.

Construction Details – Premium Veneer

• Door and drawer front are constructed from 3⁄4" thick veneered MDF with 3 mm thick, 6 ply veneer edge banding.

• Veneers on doors/drawers is quartersawn/riftsawn material. This cut produces clean, straight vertical grain patterns.

• Door and drawer fronts maintain slab design with vertical grain direction.

• Veneers on doors and drawer fronts are not book matched, grain matched or sequence matched; graining does not line up between doors or drawer fronts.

Construction Details – MDF

• Door and drawer front are constructed from 3⁄4” thick MDF.

• Moldings ordered in MDF door styles will be constructed of maple and painted to match order selection; see Wood Moldings pages in Section 800 for availability.

• Orders with matching finish modifications specified (interior, end panels, tops, bottoms and backs) are constructed with standard maple cabinet components painted to match.

Detail of Profile – Premium Veneer

Bella Specialty Door Style

Detail of Profile – MDF

Due to the Premium Veneer material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

200.29OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

SLAB All widths and heights

SLAB All widths and heights

MTSM*33⁄8" stiles and rails

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Deluxe panels are not available for slab door styles.

Door Rules

Stiles and rails for this door style with decorative insert options or mullion doors are 33⁄8" wide for all door sizes; please take this into consideration when ordering these options on small doors.Decorative Inserts*

33⁄8" stiles and rails

DESIGN NOTE

Bella Specialty Door Style

*See Section 1100 for limitations.

200.30 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Brookhill with Center Panel Options

Brookhill (Wood and MDF) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 4 7 7 8

Hickory 2 5 5 6

Knotty Alder* 5 7 7 8

MDF** 2 4 4 —

Maple 3 5 5 6

Oak 2 5 5 6

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware. **Available in Paint finishes only, see finish charts for details.

Construction Details – Wood

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Construction Details – MDF

• MDF door frame with mortise and tenon assembly; MDF center panels.

• Moldings ordered in MDF door styles will be constructed of maple and painted to match order selection; see Wood Moldings in Section 800.

• Orders with matching finish modifications specified are constructed with standard maple cabinet components painted to match.

• Decorative doors ordered in MDF may be constructed from MDF, maple or a combination of the two materials.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood or MDF raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Flat (FP)

Veneer or MDF flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood or MDF reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat center panel appearance.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.31OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

MEDIUM61⁄4"– 713⁄16" high,23⁄8" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 415⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE77⁄8" high and greater, 23⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL55⁄8"– 63⁄16" high,23⁄8" stiles, 11⁄4" rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

SLAB Up to 63⁄4" wide

MEDIUM73⁄8" – 713⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE77⁄8" wide and greater, 23⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

63⁄4"

21⁄4"

21⁄4"

21⁄4"

25⁄32"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

21⁄4" 25⁄32"

21⁄4" 25⁄32"

21⁄4"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

21⁄4"

SMALL613⁄16" – 75⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

63⁄4"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

Brookhill with Center Panel Options

MUL CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

EXTRA SMALL5"– 59⁄16" high, 23⁄8" stiles, 11⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

200.32 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Caledon (Thermofoil) Material Price Group

Foil – Matte 7

Construction Details

• Door and drawer fronts have MDF cores, one-piece, membrane pressed frames and center panels with applied molding look.

• Five-piece appearance with a beaded center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Caledon Specialty Door Style

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.33OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

SLAB Up to 67⁄16" high MEDIUM

61⁄2" – 87⁄16" high, 25⁄16"stiles, 113⁄16" rails, beaded center panel

LARGE81⁄2" high and greater, 25⁄16" stiles and rails, beaded center panel

65⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP)

SLAB Up to 87⁄16" wide

LARGE81⁄2" wide and greater, 25⁄16" stiles and rails,beaded center panel

MUL

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules – Standard Top Drawer Shaded

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Not available in tall deluxe panels.

• Wall and base deluxe panels available in single panel configuration only.

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

Door Rules – Typical Door Shaded

Caledon Specialty Door Style

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

200.34 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Calistoga with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Calistoga (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 8 11 11 12

Hickory 7 10 10 11

Knotty Alder* 8 11 11 12

MDF — — — —

Maple 7 10 10 11

Oak 7 10 10 11

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with french-cut miter assembly.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.35OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Calistoga with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM71⁄2"– 101⁄4" high,33⁄8" stiles, 21⁄8" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE105⁄16" high and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL51⁄2"– 77⁄16" high,33⁄8" stiles, 21⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

73⁄8"

27⁄8"

27⁄8"

27⁄8"

25⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

27⁄8" 25⁄8"

73⁄8"

27⁄8" 25⁄8"

27⁄8"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

27⁄8"

MUL CMUL XMUL MCBDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 615⁄16" wide

MEDIUM81⁄4" – 915⁄16" wide, 21⁄2" stiles, 33⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE10" wide and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL7" – 83⁄16" wide, 21⁄2" stiles, 33⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

200.36 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Dana Pointe with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Dana Pointe (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 5 7 7 8

Hickory 4 6 6 7

Knotty Alder* 5 7 7 8

MDF — — — —

Maple 4 6 6 7

Oak 4 6 6 7

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.37OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

EXTRA SMALL51⁄2"– 61⁄16" high, 25⁄8" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

Dana Pointe with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM67⁄8"– 81⁄16" high,25⁄8" stiles, 2" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE81⁄8" high and greater, 25⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL61⁄8"– 613⁄16" high,25⁄8" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

631⁄32"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

215⁄32" 213⁄32"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP, MAC MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 75⁄16" wide

MEDIUM73⁄8" – 85⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 25⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE83⁄8" wide and greater, 25⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

215⁄32"

215⁄32"

215⁄32"

215⁄32" 213⁄32"

215⁄32"

215⁄32" 213⁄32"

631⁄32"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

200.38 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Devonshire with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Devonshire (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 8 10 11 12

Hickory 7 10 11 12

Knotty Alder* 9 10 11 12

MDF — — — —

Maple 7 9 10 11

Oak 7 9 10 10

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

• Inside edges of five piece doors and drawer fronts feature mitered molding.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.39OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Devonshire with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM83⁄8"– 97⁄16" high,25⁄8" stiles, 2" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE91⁄2" high and greater, 25⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL51⁄2"– 85⁄16" high,25⁄8" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

627⁄32"

217⁄32"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 711⁄16" wide

MEDIUM85⁄8" – 99⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 25⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE95⁄8" wide and greater, 25⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL73⁄4" – 89⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 25⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

217⁄32"

217⁄32"

217⁄32" 215⁄32"

217⁄32" 215⁄32"

217⁄32" 215⁄32"

217⁄32"

627⁄32"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

200.40 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Eaton (Thermofoil) Material Price Group

Foil – Gloss 8

Foil – Matte 1

Foil – Woodgrain 3

Construction Details

• One-piece, membrane pressed thermofoil construction with MDF core and slab appearance.

• Wood grain finishes feature vertical grain on doors, horizontal grain on drawer fronts.

Detail of Profile

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Eaton Specialty Door Style

200.41OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

SLAB All widths and heights

SLAB All widths and heights

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Deluxe panels are not available for slab door styles.

Door Rules

MUL*33⁄8" stiles and rails

Stiles and rails for this door style with decorative insert options or mullion doors (MUL) are 33⁄8" wide for all door sizes; please take this into consideration when ordering these options on small doors.Decorative Inserts

33⁄8" stiles and rails

DESIGN NOTE

*Not available in gloss foil.

Eaton Specialty Door Style

200.42 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Fenwick (Thermofoil) Material Price Group

Foil – Matte 4

Construction Details

• One-piece, membrane pressed, thermofoil construction with MDF core.

• Doors feature a five-piece appearance with a beaded center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Fenwick Specialty Door Style

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.43OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Not available in tall deluxe panels.

• Wall and base deluxe panels available in single panel configuration only.

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

LARGE71⁄2" high and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, beaded center panel

SLAB Up to 315⁄16" high MEDIUM

51⁄4" – 77⁄16" high, 21⁄4" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, beaded center panel

2"

2"

2"

2"

2"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP)

SLAB Up to 615⁄16" wide

LARGE7" wide and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, beaded center panel

SMALL4" – 53⁄16" high, 21⁄4" stiles, 11⁄4" rails, beaded center panel

MUL

61⁄2"

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules – Standard Top Drawer Shaded

Door Rules – Typical Door Shaded

Fenwick Specialty Door Style

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

200.44 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Gibson (Acrylic) Material Price Group

Acrylic – Gloss 10

Construction Details

• Doors and drawer fronts are slab design featuring acrylic fronts and melamine backs with MDF cores.

• Edges of doors and drawer fronts are edge banded to match acrylic front.

Detail of Profile

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Gibson Specialty Door Style

200.45OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Deluxe panels are not available for slab door styles.

SLAB All widths and heights

SLABAll widths and heights

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules

Door Rules

Gibson Specialty Door Style

200.46 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Hudson Falls with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Hudson Falls (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 6 10 — 11

Hickory 5 8 — 9

Knotty Alder* 7 10 — 11

MDF — — — —

Maple 5 8 — 9

Oak 5 8 — 9

QS Oak 8 11 — 12

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

• Doors greater than 117⁄16" wide and 54" high will have an intermediate stile and rail with four center panels.

Center Panel Options

Hudson Falls is not available with

a raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Stile/Rail Detail

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.47OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Hudson Falls with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM61⁄4"– 713⁄16" high,21⁄2" stiles, 15⁄8" rails

SLAB Up to 55⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Reverse Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE77⁄8" high and greater, 21⁄2" stiles and rails

SMALL53⁄8"– 63⁄16" high,21⁄2" stiles, 11⁄4" rails

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised —

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

• For orders with reverse raised center panel, backside of door will mirror number of panels on front side.

Center Panel Varies – Reverse Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Reverse Raised Center Panel Shown

71⁄16"

21⁄2"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP MS, MK* CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 67⁄16" wide

SMALL61⁄2" – 75⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 21⁄2" rails, no center stile

LARGE111⁄2" wide and greater, 21⁄2" stiles and rails, center stile

21⁄2"

21⁄2"

21⁄2"

21⁄2"

27⁄16"

27⁄16"

21⁄2"

21⁄2"

27⁄16"

71⁄16"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (reverse raised center panel shown).

*MK (glass lower panel) does not receive center stile.

MEDIUM73⁄8" – 117⁄16" wide, 21⁄2" stiles and rails, no center stile

200.48 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Leighton (Thermofoil) Material Price Group

Foil – Gloss 9

Foil – Matte 3

Foil – Woodgrain 4

Construction Details

• One-piece, membrane pressed thermofoil construction with MDF core, slab appearance and pillowed edges.

• Wood grain finishes feature vertical grain on doors, horizontal grain on drawer fronts.

• Drawer fronts maintain slab design with horizontal grain direction.

Detail of Profile

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Leighton Specialty Door Style

200.49OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Deluxe panels are not available for slab door styles.

SLAB All widths and heights

SLABAll widths and heights

MUL*33⁄8" stiles and rails

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Decorative Inserts33⁄8" stiles and rails

Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules

Door Rules

Stiles and rails for this door style with decorative insert options or mullion doors (MUL) are 33⁄8" wide for all door sizes; please take this into consideration when ordering these options on small doors.

DESIGN NOTE

*Not available in gloss foil.

Leighton Specialty Door Style

200.50 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Lincoln (Thermofoil)

Stile/Rail Detail

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Lincoln Specialty Door Style

Material Price Group

Foil – Matte 6

Construction Details

• Door and drawer fronts have MDF cores, one-piece, membrane pressed frames and center panels with applied molding look.

• Five-piece appearance with a flat center panel.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.51OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

65⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP)

SLAB Up to 87⁄16" wide

LARGE81⁄2" wide and greater, 25⁄16" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 67⁄16" high

MEDIUM61⁄2" – 87⁄16" high, 25⁄16" stiles, 113⁄16" rails, raised center panel

LARGE81⁄2" high and greater, 25⁄16" stiles and rails, raised center panel

MUL

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules – Standard Top Drawer Shaded

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Not available in tall deluxe panels.

• Wall and base deluxe panels available in single panel configuration only.

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

Door Rules – Typical Door Shaded

Lincoln Specialty Door Style

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

200.52 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Loxley with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Loxley (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 10 12 12 13

Hickory 9 11 11 12

Knotty Alder — — — —

MDF — — — —

Maple 9 11 11 12

Oak 9 11 11 12

QS Oak — — — —

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

• Inside edges of five piece doors and drawer fronts feature small mitered molding.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.53OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Loxley with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM61⁄4"– 101⁄4" high,33⁄8" stiles, 13⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE105⁄16" high and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL51⁄2"– 63⁄16" high,33⁄8" stiles, 11⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

33⁄16"

33⁄16"

33⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

33⁄16" 33⁄8"

713⁄16"

33⁄16" 33⁄8"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 73⁄8" wide

LARGE915⁄16" wide and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL77⁄16" – 97⁄8" wide, 21⁄4" stiles, 33⁄8" rails, raised center panel

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

33⁄16"

33⁄16"

33⁄16"

713⁄16"

200.54 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Madison with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Madison (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 5 8 8 9

Hickory 4 7 7 8

Knotty Alder* 6 9 9 10

MDF — — — —

Maple 4 7 7 8

Oak 3 6 6 7

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.55OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Madison with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM73⁄4"– 101⁄4" high,23⁄4" stiles, 2" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE105⁄16" high and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL51⁄2"– 711⁄16" high,23⁄4" stiles, 2" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

611⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

21⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 67⁄16" wide

MEDIUM8" – 93⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄4" rails, raised center panel

LARGE91⁄4" wide and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails,raised center panel

SMALL61⁄2" – 715⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

611⁄16"

200.56 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Mission with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Mission (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 6 9 9 10

Hickory 5 8 8 9

Knotty Alder* 6 9 9 10

MDF — — — —

Maple 5 8 8 9

Oak 5 8 8 9

QS Oak 6 10 10 11

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

200.57OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Mission with Center Panel Options

SLAB Up to 85⁄8" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE811⁄16" high and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

77⁄16"

23⁄4"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 67⁄16" wide

MEDIUM77⁄16" – 85⁄8" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄4" rails, raised center panel

LARGE811⁄16" wide and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails,raised center panel

SMALL61⁄2" – 73⁄8" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

23⁄4"

23⁄4"

23⁄4"

23⁄4"

23⁄4"

23⁄4" 25⁄8"

25⁄8"

77⁄16"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

25⁄8"

200.58 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Park Place with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Flat (FP)

Veneer or MDF flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Park Place (Wood and MDF) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 6 9 9 10

Hickory 5 7 7 8

Knotty Alder* 6 9 9 10

MDF** 4 7 7 —

Maple 5 8 8 9

Oak 5 7 7 8

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware. **Available in Paint finishes only, see finish charts for details.

Construction Details – General

• Profiled inside edge detail on five piece doors and drawer fronts.

Construction Details – Wood

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Construction Details – MDF

• MDF door frame with mortise and tenon assembly; MDF center panels.

• Moldings ordered in MDF door styles will be constructed of maple and painted to match order selection; see Wood Moldings in Section 800.

• Orders with matching finish modifications specified are constructed with standard maple cabinet components painted to match.

• Decorative doors ordered in MDF may be constructed from MDF, maple or a combination of the two materials.Center Panel Options

Solid wood or MDF raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood or MDF reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat center panel appearance.

200.59OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Park Place with Center Panel Options

SLAB Up to 89⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE85⁄8" high and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

73⁄32"

219⁄32" 219⁄32"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

73⁄32"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP, MAC MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 67⁄16" wide

MEDIUM73⁄8" – 89⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄4" rails, raised center panel

LARGE85⁄8" wide and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL61⁄2" – 75⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

219⁄32"

219⁄32"

219⁄32"

219⁄32"

219⁄32"

219⁄32"

219⁄32"

219⁄32"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

200.60 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Pike’s Peak (Textured Melamine)

Detail of Profile

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Pike’s Peak Specialty Door Style

Material Price Group

Textured Melamine 10

Construction Details

• Doors and drawer fronts are constructed from engineered material featuring textured melamine fronts and backs.

• Edges of doors and drawer fronts are edge banded to match front.

• Door and drawer fronts maintain slab design with vertical grain direction.

200.61OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Deluxe panels are not available for slab door styles.

SLAB All widths and heights

SLABAll widths and heights

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules

Door Rules

Pike’s Peak Specialty Door Style

200.62 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Potter’s Mill with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Flat (FP)

Veneer or MDF flat center panel.

Potter’s Mill (Wood and MDF) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 6 9 9 10

Hickory 4 7 7 8

Knotty Alder* 6 9 9 10

MDF** 3 7 7 —

Maple 4 8 8 9

Oak 4 7 7 8

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware. **Available in Paint finishes only, see finish charts for details.

Construction Details – Wood

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Construction Details – MDF

• MDF door frame with mortise and tenon assembly; MDF center panels.

• Moldings ordered in MDF door styles will be constructed of maple and painted to match order selection; see Wood Moldings in Section 800.

• Orders with matching finish modifications specified are constructed with standard maple cabinet components painted to match.

• Decorative doors ordered in MDF may be constructed from MDF, maple or a combination of the two materials.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood or MDF raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood or MDF reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat center panel appearance.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.63OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Potter’s Mill with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM61⁄4"– 75⁄8" high,21⁄4" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE711⁄16" high and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL51⁄2"– 63⁄16" high,21⁄4" stiles, 11⁄4" rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

63⁄4"

21⁄4" 21⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 63⁄16" wide

MEDIUM77⁄16" – 75⁄8" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 21⁄4" rails, raised center panel

LARGE711⁄16" wide and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL61⁄4" – 73⁄8" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 21⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

21⁄4"

21⁄4" 21⁄8"

21⁄4"

21⁄4" 21⁄8"

21⁄4"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

21⁄4"

63⁄4"

200.64 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Providence with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Flat (FP)

Veneer or MDF flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Providence (Wood and MDF) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 7 10 10 11

Hickory 5 8 8 9

Knotty Alder* 7 10 10 11

MDF** 5 7 7 —

Maple 6 8 8 9

Oak 5 8 8 9

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware. **Available in Paint finishes only, see finish charts for details.

Construction Details – General

• Profiled inside edge detail on five piece doors and drawer fronts.

Construction Details – Wood

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Construction Details – MDF

• MDF door frame with mortise and tenon assembly; MDF center panels.

• Moldings ordered in MDF door styles will be constructed of maple and painted to match order selection; see Wood Moldings in Section 800.

• Orders with matching finish modifications specified are constructed with standard maple cabinet components painted to match.

• Decorative doors ordered in MDF may be constructed from MDF, maple or a combination of the two materials.Center Panel Options

Solid wood or MDF raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail (Wood Shown)

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood or MDF reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.65OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Providence with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM75⁄16"– 101⁄4" high,33⁄8" stiles, 21⁄8" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE105⁄16" high and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL51⁄2"– 71⁄4" high,33⁄8" stiles, 21⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

77⁄16"

215⁄16"

27⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

27⁄8"

77⁄16"

27⁄8"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP, MAC MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 615⁄16" wide

MEDIUM713⁄16" – 93⁄4" wide, 23⁄8" stiles, 33⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE913⁄16" wide and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL7" – 73⁄4" wide, 23⁄8" stiles, 33⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

215⁄16"

215⁄16"

215⁄16"

215⁄16"

215⁄16"

215⁄16"

200.66 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Sonoma with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Sonoma (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 9 10 10 12

Hickory 8 8 8 10

Knotty Alder* 9 10 10 12

MDF — — — —

Maple 8 8 8 10

Oak 8 8 8 10

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

• Special characteristics: Drawer fronts up to 61⁄4" high feature slab three piece construction. Designed to complement and align with base door stiles.

• Important: If SLAB modification is applied, construction of all drawer fronts will change to one piece slab design with horizontal grain.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.67OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Sonoma with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM73⁄16"– 101⁄4" high,33⁄8" stiles, 17⁄8" rails, raised center panel

3-PIECE SLAB Up to 61⁄4" highNOTE: For orders in paint, one piece slab design will be shipped.

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE105⁄16" high and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL65⁄16"– 71⁄8" high,33⁄8" stiles, 17⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

715⁄16"

37⁄16"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 615⁄16" wide

MEDIUM715⁄16" – 97⁄8" wide, 23⁄8" stiles, 33⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE915⁄16" wide and greater, 33⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL7" – 77⁄8" wide, 23⁄8" stiles, 33⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

33⁄8"

33⁄8"

33⁄8"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

37⁄16"

37⁄16"

37⁄16"

37⁄16"

37⁄16"

715⁄16"

37⁄16"

200.68 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Valencia with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Valencia (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 8 11 11 12

Hickory — — — —

Knotty Alder — — — —

MDF — — — —

Maple 7 10 10 11

Oak — — — —

QS Oak — — — —

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mitered full tenon construction.

• Features ‘pillowed’ profile on stiles/rails of five piece doors and drawer fronts.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.69OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Valencia with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM51⁄2"– 97⁄16" high,13⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE91⁄2" high and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

61⁄2"

2"

2"

2"

21⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

2" 21⁄8"

2" 21⁄8"

2"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

2"

MULDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 615⁄16" wide

MEDIUM7" – 97⁄16" wide, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, flat reverse raised center panel

LARGE91⁄2" wide and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

61⁄2"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

200.70 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Venice with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Venice (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 9 11 11 12

Hickory — — — —

Knotty Alder* 9 11 11 12

MDF — — — —

Maple 8 10 10 11

Oak — — — —

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mitered full tenon construction.

• Features ‘pillowed’ profile on stiles/rails of five piece doors and drawer fronts.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.71OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Venice with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM5"– 81⁄16" high,17⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 415⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE81⁄8" high and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

61⁄2"

2"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MULDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 615⁄16" wide

MEDIUM7" – 81⁄16" wide, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, flat reverse raised center panel

LARGE81⁄8" wide and greater, 23⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

2"

23⁄16"2"

2"

2" 23⁄16"

2"

2"

23⁄16"

61⁄2"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

200.72 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Victoria with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Victoria (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 9 11 11 12

Hickory — — — —

Knotty Alder — — — —

MDF — — — —

Maple 8 10 10 11

Oak — — — —

QS Oak — — — —

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mitered full tenon construction.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.73OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Victoria with Center Panel Options

SMALL43⁄4"– 83⁄8" high, 13⁄4" stiles and rails, modified raised center panel

SLAB Up to 411⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE91⁄16" high and greater, 3" stiles and rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

63⁄4"

21⁄4"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MULDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 513⁄16" wide

MEDIUM71⁄2" – 9" wide, 3" stiles and rails, flat reverse raised center panel

LARGE91⁄16" wide and greater, 3" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL57⁄8" – 77⁄16" wide, 13⁄4" stiles and rails, modified raised center panel

21⁄8"21⁄4"

21⁄4"

21⁄4"

21⁄4"

21⁄8"

21⁄8"21⁄4"

21⁄4"

63⁄4"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

MEDIUM87⁄16"– 9" high, 3" stiles and rails, flat reverse raised center panel

200.74 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wakefield with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Wakefield (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 10 13 13 13

Hickory — — — —

Knotty Alder* 10 13 13 13

MDF — — — —

Maple 9 12 12 12

Oak — — — —

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mitered full tenon construction.

• Inside edges of five piece doors and drawer fronts feature mitered molding.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.75OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wakefield with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM73⁄8"– 813⁄16" high,11⁄2" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 63⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE87⁄8" high and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

611⁄16"

23⁄16" 23⁄32"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 73⁄16" wide

LARGE87⁄8" wide and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL71⁄4" – 813⁄16" wide, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, flat reverse raised center panel

SMALL61⁄4"– 75⁄16" high,11⁄2" stiles and rails, raised center panel

23⁄32"

23⁄32"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

23⁄16"

611⁄16"

200.76 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wattsburg (Thermofoil)

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

Stile/Rail Detail

Tigereye Walnut Only

DESIGN NOTE

Wattsburg Specialty Door Style

Material Price Group

Foil – Matte 6

Foil – Woodgrain 7

Construction Details

• Five-piece thermofoil construction with MDF core and recessed flat center panel.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.77OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

MEDIUM51⁄2" – 815⁄16" high, 31⁄8" stiles, 13⁄4" rails LARGE

9" high and greater, 31⁄8" stiles and rails

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

31⁄16"

31⁄16"

31⁄16"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)SLAB Up to 715⁄16" wide

LARGE9" wide and greater, 31⁄8" stiles and rails

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules – Standard Top Drawer Shaded

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Not available in base or tall deluxe panels.

• Wall deluxe panels available in single panel configuration only.

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

Door Rules – Typical Door Shaded

MEDIUM8"– 815⁄16" wide, 23⁄4" stiles, 31⁄8" rails

Wattsburg Specialty Door Style

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

200.78 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Windwood with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

Windwood (Wood) PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 4 7 7 8

Hickory 2 5 5 6

Knotty Alder* 5 7 7 8

MDF — — — —

Maple 3 5 5 6

Oak 2 5 5 6

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

• Orders in Windwood receive the Brookhill door on base cabinets as well as lower doors of tall cabinets. Vanity base cabinets receive Windwood style as shown here.

• Slab drawer front modification available.

Center Panel Options

• To view standard top drawer configuration, see drawings for Brookhill on page 200.30.

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

200.79OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Windwood with Center Panel Options

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain Direction

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

SLAB Up to 63⁄4" wide

MEDIUM73⁄8" – 713⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE77⁄8" wide and greater, 23⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL613⁄16" – 75⁄16" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 23⁄8" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

MULDecorative Inserts(exluding BEV)

Aluminum

63⁄4"

21⁄4"

21⁄4"

21⁄4"

25⁄32"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

21⁄4" 25⁄32"

21⁄4" 25⁄32"

21⁄4"

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

21⁄4"

63⁄4"

MEDIUM61⁄4"– 713⁄16" high,23⁄8" stiles, 15⁄8" rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 415⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE77⁄8" high and greater, 23⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL55⁄8"– 63⁄16" high,23⁄8" stiles, 11⁄4" rails, raised center panel

EXTRA SMALL5"– 59⁄16" high, 23⁄8" stiles, 11⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

200.80 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Winterberry (Thermofoil)

Stile/Rail Detail

Due to material used for this door style, availability of matching accessories is limited. See applicable sections of this manual for further details.

DESIGN NOTE

Winterberry Specialty Door Style

Material Price Group

Foil – Matte 4

Foil – Woodgrain 5

Construction Details

• Door and drawer fronts have one-piece, membrane pressed thermofoil construction, MDF core and a five-piece appearance.

Slab drawer front modification available.

200.81OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

SLAB Up to 63⁄16" high

LARGE81⁄2" high and greater, 23⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SLAB Up to 63⁄16" wide

MEDIUM61⁄4" – 87⁄16" wide, 11⁄2" stiles, 23⁄8" rails, raised center panel

LARGE81⁄2" wide and greater, 23⁄8" stiles and rails, raised center panel

MUL

MEDIUM61⁄4" – 87⁄16" high, 23⁄8" stiles, 11⁄2" rails, raised center panel

2"

2"

2"

2"

2"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP)

65⁄16"

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

Decorative Inserts Aluminum

Drawer Front Rules – Standard Top Drawer Shaded

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Not available in tall deluxe panels.

• Wall and base deluxe panels available in single panel configuration only.

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

Door Rules – Typical Door Shaded

Winterberry Specialty Door Style

TALLDoors over 54" high, no center horizontal rail

200.82 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Page left intentionally blank.

200.83OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Page left intentionally blank.

200.84 DESIGN-CRAFT SPEC GUIDE OCTOBER 2017 UPDATES

200DOORS AND FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Page left intentionally blank.

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

300.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

300.3 Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

300.4 13" Deep Wall Cabinets

300.6 13" Deep Peninsula Wall Cabinets

300.7 24" Deep Wall Cabinets

300.8 Message Center Cabinets, Wall Plate Racks

300.9 Stacked Wall Cabinets

300.10 Counter Wall Cabinets

300.13 Tambour Door Cabinets

300.14 Wall Blind Corner Cabinets

300.15 Peninsula Wall Blind Corner Cabinets

300.16 Diagonal Corner Wall Cabinets

300.18 Microwave Wall Cabinets

300.20 Easy Reach Square Corner Wall Cabinets

300.21 Lift Door Wall Cabinets

300.24 Wall Bookcase Cabinets, Wine Storage

300.26 Spice Storage

300.27 Pull-Out Storage

300.28 Angle Wall Cabinets

300.30 Wall End Shelves

300.31 Peninsula Wall End Shelves, Floating Shelves

300.32 One Piece Wood Hoods

300.44 Component Wood Hoods

300.49 Component Peninsula Wood Hoods

300.54 Metal Trim Kits

300.55 Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units and Stainless Steel Range Hoods

300.61 Vent-A-Hood® Accessory Venting Parts

300.63 Broan Stainless Steel Range Hoods

In This Section

300.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

Wall Cabinet Specifications / Ordering GuidelinesEnd Panel Information

• Standard construction is 3⁄4" thick furniture board with natural maple melamine interior/exterior; white melamine and other upgrades available.

Door Information

• Note for front and matching end doors of counter wall cabinets: doors 54" high or greater may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels dependent on door style; see individual door pages in Section 200 for details. See Vertical Dimensional Details in Section 100 or contact Customer Care for door size information.

Configuration Information

• Standard depths: 13" and 24".

• Standard heights: 12" to 60".

• Cabinets up to 24" wide are available in single door configuration, specify hinge location.

• Cabinets 24" to 45" wide are available in butt door configuration with a 1⁄8" gap between doors. Cabinets greater than 36" wide include a center partition for additional support.

• Cabinets 42" to 48" wide are available in three door configuration with partition; see SKUs ending in LLR or LRR.

• 48" wide cabinets also available with two sets of butt doors and center partition; see SKUs ending in F.

• Adjustable shelving is 3⁄4" thick; shelf quantities for cabinets that receive shelving listed in parentheses by cabinet heights.

• Drawings in this section are intended to show general configuration; all construction details may not be reflected. Doors may be depicted open beyond actual hinge allowance to show interior details.

Order Information

• For one door cabinets, specify hinge location.

• For three door cabinets, specify hinge location by SKU selection of LLR (left, left, right) or LRR (left, right, right) at end of order code. Partition location is determined by hinge pattern. From left to right, partition for LLR is located between first and second door; partition for LRR hinging is between second and third door.

1⁄4" thick full back

3⁄4" thick ends

3⁄4" thick bottom

3⁄4" thick center partition (cabinets greater than 36" wide)

3⁄4" thick shelves

3⁄4" thick top

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to specify finished ends for all exposed ends of cabinetry, see end treatment options in Section 1100 for details.

DESIGN NOTE

See Section 1100 for general details of dimensional modifications; see individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual for exceptions. NOTE: Cabinets with drawers or roll-out trays have a maximum depth of 24".

300.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

13" Deep Wall Cabinets

One Door

18" High (0)

W0918 W1218 W1518 W1818 W2118 W2418

24" High (1)

W0924 W1224 W1524 W1824 W2124 W2424

36" High (3)

W0936W1236W1536W1836W2136W2436

30" High (2)

W0930W1230W1530W1830W2130W2430

42" High (3)

W0942 W1242 W1542W1842W2142W2442

36" High (3)

W2436BW2736BW3036BW3336BW3636B

30" High (2)

W2430BW2730BW3030BW3330BW3630B

42" High (3)

W2442BW2742BW3042BW3342BW3642B

Butt Doors

24" High (1)

W2424B W2724B W3024B W3324B W3424B W3624B

27" High (2)

W2427B W2727B W3027B W3327BW3427B W3627B

15" High (0)

W2415B W2715B W3015B W3315B W3615B

18" High (0)

W2418B W2718B W3018B W3318BW3418B W3618B

12" High (0)

W2412B W2712B W3012B W3312B W3612B

21" High (1)

W2421B W2721B W3021B W3321B W3421B W3621B

13" Deep Wall Cabinets • Cabinets 18" high and less do not include shelving and are not drilled

for shelves.

27" High (2)

W0927W1227W1527W1827W2127W2427

21" High (1)

W0921W1221W1521W1821W2121W2421

12" High (0)

W0912 W1212 W1512 W1812 W2112 W2412

15" High (0)

W0915 W1215 W1515 W1815 W2115 W2415

36" High (6)

W3936BW4236BW4536B

30" High (4)

W3930BW4230BW4530B

42" High (6)

W3942BW4242BW4542B

24" High (2)

W3724B W3924B W4024BW4224BW4324B W4524B

27" High (4)

W3727B W3927B W4027BW4227BW4327B W4527B

21" High (2)

W3721B W3921B W4021BW4221BW4321B W4521B

Butt Doors, Center Partition

15" High (0)

W3915B W4215B W4515B

18" High (0)

W3718B W3918B W4018B W4218B W4318B W4518B

12" High (0)

W3912B W4212B W4512B

39" High (3)

W0939W1239W1539W1839W2139W2439

33" High (3)

W0933W1233W1533W1833W2133W2433

39" High (3)

W2439BW2739BW3039BW3339BW3639B

33" High (3)

W2433BW2733BW3033BW3333BW3633B

39" High (6)

W3939BW4239BW4539B

33" High (6)

W3933BW4233BW4533B

• Add a Rail (AIRF)

• Decorative Doors (DG, ADA, BDA, SDA, ADC, BDC, SDC, ADD, BDD, SDD, ADE, BDE, SDE, MUL, MP, MAC, MS, MK, CMUL, XMUL, MCB, MPOL, MTSM)

• Matching Finished Interior (FI)

300.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

36" High (6)

W4836F

27" High (4)

W4827F

42" High (6)

W4842F

Four Doors, Center Partition

15" High (0)

W4815F

18" High (0)

W4818F

12" High (0)

W4812F

24" High (2)

W4824F

30" High (4)

W4830F

21" High (2)

W4821F

Three Doors, Partition

• Choose code with desired hinging of LLR or LRR.

• Cabinets hinged left, left, right (LLR) have partition between first and second door; cabinets hinged left, right, right (LRR) have partition between second and third door.

36" High (6)

W4236LLR W4236LRRW4536LLR W4536LRR W4836LLR W4836LRR

30" High (4)

W4230LLR W4230LRRW4530LLR W4530LRRW4830LLR W4830LRR

42" High (6)

W4242LLR W4242LRRW4542LLR W4542LRRW4842LLR W4842LRR

24" High (2)

W4224LLR W4224LRR W4524LLR W4524LRR W4824LLR W4824LRR

27" High (4)

W4227LLR W4227LRR W4527LLR W4527LRR W4827LLR W4827LRR

21" High (2)

W4221LLR W4221LRR W4521LLR W4521LRR W4821LLR W4821LRR

Partition with LRR Hinging

15" High (0)

W4215LLR W4215LRR W4515LLR W4515LRR W4815LLR W4815LRR

18" High (0)

W4218LLR W4218LRR W4518LLR W4518LRR W4818LLR W4818LRR

12" High (0)

W4212LLR W4212LRR W4512LLR W4512LRR W4812LLR W4812LRR

13" Deep Wall Cabinets • Cabinets 18" high and less do not include shelving and are not drilled

for shelves.

33" High (6)

W4233LLR W4233LRRW4533LLR W4533LRRW4833LLR W4833LRR

39" High (6)

W4239LLR W4239LRRW4539LLR W4539LRRW4839LLR W4839LRR

39" High (6)

W4839F

33" High (6)

W4833F

13" Deep Wall Cabinets

• Add a Rail (AIRF)

• Decorative Doors (DG, ADA, BDA, SDA, ADC, BDC, SDC, ADD, BDD, SDD, ADE, BDE, SDE, MUL, MP, MAC, MS, MK, CMUL, XMUL, MCB, MPOL, MTSM)

• Matching Finished Interior (FI)

300.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

13" Deep Peninsula Wall Cabinets

Kitchen Side: One Door Peninsula Side: One Door

18" High (0)

PW0918 PW1218 PW1518 PW1818 PW2118 PW2418

24" High (1)

PW0924 PW1224 PW1524 PW1824 PW2124 PW2424

33" High (3)

PW0933PW1233PW1533PW1833PW2133PW2433

30" High (2)

PW0930PW1230PW1530PW1830PW2130PW2430

• Specify hinge location for both sides.

EXAMPLE: PW2412, HL, PENR specifies kitchen side hinge left, peninsula side hinge right.

42" High (3)

PW0942 PW1242 PW1542PW1842PW2142PW2442

33" High (3)

PW2433BPW2733BPW3033BPW3333BPW3633B

30" High (2)

PW2430BPW2730BPW3030BPW3330BPW3630B

42" High (3)

PW2442BPW2742BPW3042BPW3342BPW3642B

Kitchen Side: Butt Doors Peninsula Side: Butt Doors

15" High (0)

PW2415B PW2715B PW3015B PW3315B PW3615B

18" High (0)

PW2418B PW2718B PW3018B PW3318B PW3618B

24" High (1)

PW2424B PW2724B PW3024B PW3324B PW3624B

27" High (2)

PW2427B PW2727B PW3027B PW3327B PW3627B

12" High (0)

PW2412B PW2712B PW3012B PW3312B PW3612B

21" High (1)

PW2421B PW2721B PW3021B PW3321B PW3621B

13" Deep Peninsula Wall Cabinets • Includes stretcher in top of cabinet for additional strength.

• Cabinets 18" high and less do not include shelving and are not drilled for shelves.

27" High (2)

PW0927PW1227PW1527PW1827PW2127PW2427

21" High (1)

PW0921PW1221PW1521PW1821PW2121PW2421

12" High (0)

PW0912 PW1212 PW1512 PW1812 PW2112 PW2412

15" High (0)

PW0915 PW1215 PW1515 PW1815 PW2115 PW2415

36" High (3)

PW0936PW1236PW1536PW1836PW2136PW2436

39" High (3)

PW0939PW1239PW1539PW1839PW2139PW2439

36" High (3)

PW2436BPW2736BPW3036BPW3336BPW3636B

39" High (3)

PW2439BPW2739BPW3039BPW3339BPW3639B

300.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

24" Deep Wall Cabinets

One Door

18" High (0)

24W121824W151824W181824W211824W2418

24" High (1)

24W122424W152424W182424W212424W2424

24" High (1)

24W2424B24W2724B24W3024B24W3324B24W3424B24W3624B

27" High (1)

24W2427B24W2727B24W3027B24W3327B24W3427B24W3627B

15" High (0)

24W2415B24W2715B24W3015B24W3315B24W3615B

18" High (0)

24W2418B24W2718B24W3018B24W3318B24W3418B24W3618B

12" High (0)

24W2412B24W2712B24W3012B24W3312B24W3612B

21" High (1)

24W2421B24W2721B24W3021B24W3321B24W3421B24W3621B

Butt Doors

24" Deep Wall Cabinets • Cabinets 18" high and less do not include shelving and are not drilled for shelves.• Installed roll-out tray modification available for most cabinet widths; see Section

1100 for details.

15" High (0)

24W121524W151524W181524W211524W2415

12" High (0)

24W121224W151224W181224W211224W2412

21" High (1)

24W122124W152124W182124W212124W2421

27" High (1)

24W122724W152724W182724W212724W2427

39" High (2)

24W2439

30" High (2)

24W2430

42" High (3)

24W2442

33" High (2)

24W2433B24W2733B24W3033B24W3333B24W3633B

42" High (3)

24W2442B24W2742B24W3042B24W3342B24W3642B

30" High (2)

24W2430B24W2730B24W3030B24W3330B24W3630B

24" High (2)

24W3724B24W3924B24W4024B 24W4224B24W4324B 24W4524B

27" High (2)

24W3727B24W3927B24W4027B24W4227B24W4327B24W4527B

21" High (2)

24W3721B24W3921B24W4021B24W4221B24W4321B24W4521B

Butt Doors, Center Partition

Three Doors, Partition

18" High (0)

24W4218LLR24W4218LRR24W4518LLR24W4518LRR24W4818LLR 24W4818LRR

24" High (2)

24W4224LLR24W4224LRR24W4524LLR 24W4524LRR 24W4824LLR24W4824LRR

15" High (0)

24W4215LLR24W4215LRR24W4515LLR24W4515LRR24W4815LLR24W4815LRR

12" High (0)

24W4212LLR24W4212LRR24W4512LLR24W4512LRR24W4812LLR24W4812LRR

21" High (2)

24W4221LLR 24W4221LRR 24W4521LLR24W4521LRR24W4821LLR24W4821LRR

27" High (2)

24W4227LLR24W4227LRR24W4527LLR24W4527LRR24W4827LLR 24W4827LRR

Partition with LLR Hinging

Four Doors, Center Partition

18" High (0)

24W4818F

24" High (2)

24W4824F

15" High (0)

24W4815F

12" High (0)

24W4812F

21" High (2)

24W4821F

27" High (2)

24W4827F

15" High (0)

24W3915B24W4215B24W4515B

18" High (0)

24W3718B24W3918B24W4018B24W4218B24W4318B24W4518B

12" High (0)

24W3912B24W4212B24W4512B

INSTALLATION NOTE24" deep cabinets require support on three sides (adjacent cabinets, ceiling, countertop or side walls).

33" High (2)

24W2433

36" High (2)

24W2436

36" High (2)

24W2436B24W2736B24W3036B24W3336B24W3636B

39" High (2)

24W2439B24W2739B24W3039B24W3339B24W3639B

• Choose code ending with desired hinging of LLR or LRR.

• Cabinets hinged left, left, right (LLR) have partition between first and second door; cabinets hinged left, right, right (LRR) have partition between second and third door.

300.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Message Center Cabinet, 13" Wide, 6" Deep• Message center designed for organizing office supplies and mail as

well as key storage.

• Intended for installation on end of 13" deep wall cabinets.

• Includes finished ends, magnetic white board on back of door, fixed shelves with plexi-glass fronts and key rack.

• Due to fixed shelves, cabinet is not reversible; please specify hinge location.

• If installing message center adjacent to a wall, restrictor clips recommended to limit opening of door to 86 degrees, see Section 1200. NOTE: Decorative knobs/pulls may hit wall.

• Key rack is constructed of mahogany with four brushed bronze hooks.

• Available modifications: white melamine case construction (WHTCS), all plywood construction (PLYBOX) and matching finished interior (FI). No other modifications available.

30" High (2)

6WMC1330

33" High (2)

6WMC1333

36" High (2)

6WMC1336

39" High (3)

6WMC1339

42" High (3)

6WMC1342

DESIGN NOTE

Consider adding an overlay filler or split post to end of message center for decorative element.

application example

Message Center Cabinets, Wall Plate Racks

SKU Sections

WPR1515 6WPR1815 8WPR2115 8WPR2415 10WPR2715 11 WPR3015 13 WPR3315 14 WPR3615 16

• Available for wood door styles only.

• Plate rack interior height is 115⁄8".

• Includes matching finished interior.

• When using depth modification, distance (51⁄4") between front and back plate racks remains constant. Depth reduction not recommended for use with medium and large size plates. Minimum depth 10".

• Front frame and plate racks are removable for cleaning purposes.

• Cabinet is 133⁄4" deep; when installed under cabinet with doors, frame of plate rack will be flush with doors above.

Wall Plate Rack Cabinet, 133⁄4" Deep, 15" High

300.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

Stacked Wall Cabinet, 13" Deep• Upper section of 48", 51" and 54" high cabinets is equivalent to 15" high wall cabinet.

• Upper section of 57" and 60" high cabinets is equivalent to 18" high wall cabinet.

• Height modification available; minimum 27", maximum 60". Height adjustment applied to lower section.

• If ordered in arch door style, upper door(s) will be arch, lower door(s) receive coordinating square door style.

• When specifying matching end modification, a single full-height door is applied.

57" High (3)

WST1257 WST1557 WST1857 WST2157 WST2457

60" High (3)

WST1260 WST1560 WST1860 WST2160 WST2460

48" High (3)

WST1248WST1548WST1848

WST2148 WST2448

54" High (3)

WST1254 WST1554 WST1854 WST2154 WST2454

Butt Doors (Upper & Lower)

15" High Upper Section

57" High (3)

WST2457B WST2757B WST3057B WST3357B WST3657B

60" High (3)

WST2460B WST2760B WST3060B WST3360B WST3660B

48" High (3)

WST2448B WST2748B WST3048B WST3348B WST3648B

54" High (3)

WST2454B WST2754B WST3054B WST3354B WST3654B

51" High (3)

WST1251 WST1551 WST1851 WST2151 WST2451

51" High (3)

WST2451B WST2751B WST3051B WST3351BWST3651B

One Door (Upper & Lower)

15" High Upper Section

18" High Upper Section 18" High Upper Section

Stacked Wall Cabinets

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

300.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Counter Wall Cabinets

Counter Wall with Full-Height Doors, 13" Deep• Bottom door reveal adjusted to 1⁄4"; allows for door clearance with tile

countertops or in uneven installations.

One Door

60" High (4)

CW1260 CW1560 CW1860 CW2160 CW2460

Butt Doors

60" High (4)

CW2460B CW2760B CW3060B CW3360BCW3660B

48" High (4)

CW1248CW1548CW1848

CW2148CW2448

54" High (4)

CW1254 CW1554 CW1854 CW2154 CW2454

48" High (4)

CW2448B CW2748B CW3048B CW3348BCW3648B

51" High (4)

CW2451B CW2751B CW3051B CW3351BCW3651B

Butt Doors

60" High (4)

WDC2460BWDC2760BWDC3060BWDC3360BWDC3660B

Counter Wall with One Drawer, 13" Deep• Bottom drawer reveal adjusted to 1⁄4"; allows for drawer clearance

with tile countertops or in uneven installations.• Drawer front height is 61⁄2", see Section 200 for drawer front styling

details.

One Door

51" High (3)

WDC1551WDC1851WDC2151WDC2451

60" High (4)

WDC1560WDC1860WDC2160WDC2460

51" High (3)

WDC2451BWDC2751BWDC3051BWDC3351BWDC3651B

48" High (3)

WDC2448BWDC2748BWDC3048BWDC3348BWDC3648B

48" High (3)

WDC1548WDC1848WDC2148WDC2448

51" High (4)

CW1251 CW1551 CW1851 CW2151 CW2451

57" High (4)

CW1257 CW1557 CW1857 CW2157 CW2457

54" High (4)

CW2454B CW2754B CW3054B CW3354BCW3654B

57" High (4)

CW2457B CW2757B CW3057B CW3357BCW3657B

54" High (4)

WDC1554WDC1854WDC2154WDC2454

57" High (4)

WDC1557WDC1857WDC2157WDC2457

54" High (4)

WDC2454BWDC2754BWDC3054BWDC3354BWDC3654B

57" High (4)

WDC2457BWDC2757BWDC3057BWDC3357BWDC3657B

• Add a Rail (AIRF)

• Decorative Doors (DG, ADA, BDA, SDA, ADC, BDC, SDC, ADD, BDD, SDD, ADE, BDE, SDE, MUL, MP, MAC, MS, MK, CMUL, XMUL, MCB, MPOL, MTSM)

• Matching Finished Interior (FI)

300.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Counter Wall Cabinets

Butt Doors

51" High (3)

W2D2451B W2D2751B W2D3051B W2D3351B W2D3651B

60" High (3)

W2D2460BW2D2760BW2D3060BW2D3360BW2D3660B

Counter Wall with Two Drawers, 13" Deep• Bottom drawer reveal adjusted to 1⁄4"; allows for drawer clearance

with tile countertops or in uneven installations.

• Drawer fronts are 83⁄4" high; see Section 200 for drawer front styling details.

One Door

51" High (3)

W2D1551 W2D1851 W2D2151 W2D2451

60" High (3)

W2D1560W2D1860W2D2160W2D2460

48" High (2)

W2D1548W2D1848W2D2148W2D2448

48" High (2)

W2D2448BW2D2748BW2D3048BW2D3348BW2D3648B

Butt Doors

Counter Wall with Three Drawers, 13" Deep• Bottom drawer reveal adjusted to 1⁄4"; allows for drawer clearance

with tile countertops or in uneven installations.

• Drawer fronts are 513⁄16" high; see Section 200 for drawer front styling details.

One Door

51" High (3)

WDG1551WDG1851WDG2151WDG2451

60" High (3)

WDG1560WDG1860WDG2160WDG2460

51" High (3)

WDG2451BWDG2751BWDG3051BWDG3351BWDG3651B

60" High (3)

WDG2460BWDG2760BWDG3060BWDG3360BWDG3660B

48" High (2)

WDG2448BWDG2748BWDG3048BWDG3348BWDG3648B

48" High (2)

WDG1548WDG1848WDG2148WDG2448

54" High (3)

W2D2454BW2D2754BW2D3054BW2D3354BW2D3654B

54" High (3)

WDG2454BWDG2754BWDG3054BWDG3354BWDG3654B

57" High (3)

W2D2457B W2D2757B W2D3057B W2D3357B W2D3657B

57" High (3)

WDG2457BWDG2757BWDG3057BWDG3357BWDG3657B

54" High (3)

W2D1554W2D1854W2D2154W2D2454

54" High (3)

WDG1554WDG1854WDG2154WDG2454

57" High (3)

W2D1557 W2D1857 W2D2157 W2D2457

57" High (3)

WDG1557WDG1857WDG2157WDG2457

300.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Counter Wall Cabinets

Counter Wall with Vertical Lift Door Appliance Garage, 13" Deep• Lower section is 18" high; designed so upper doors align with

adjacent wall cabinets.

• Lower section does not have floor or bottom; see drawing for appliance clearance.

• Bottom door reveal adjusted to 1⁄4"; allows for door clearance with tile countertops or in uneven installations.

• Appliance garage door opens up and out in one smooth motion; requires decorative pull on door.

• Appliance garage door lift mechanism is visible when door is opened; finished in brushed steel. Mechanism does not allow for shelving in lower section of cabinet.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Width: minimum 18"; maximum 36" – Height: minimum 27", maximum 60" – Depth: minimum 12", maximum 30"

• Decorative glass, mullion and aluminum doors not available on appliance garage.

• Cabinets greater than 24" wide receive a two panel door on appliance garage in wood door styles except for mitered door styles.

• If ordered in arch door style, upper door(s) will be arch, appliance garage door receives coordinating square door style.

57" High (3)

WVLDAG1857WVLDAG2157WVLDAG2457

60" High (3)

WVLDAG1860WVLDAG2160WVLDAG2460

48" High (2)

WVLDAG1848WVLDAG2148WVLDAG2448

54" High (3)

WVLDAG1854WVLDAG2154WVLDAG2454

Butt Doors, Upper

57" High (3)

WVLDAG2457BWVLDAG2757BWVLDAG3057BWVLDAG3357BWVLDAG3657B

60" High (3)

WVLDAG2460BWVLDAG2760BWVLDAG3060BWVLDAG3360BWVLDAG3660B

48" High (2)

WVLDAG2448BWVLDAG2748BWVLDAG3048BWVLDAG3348BWVLDAG3648B

51" High (3)

WVLDAG2451BWVLDAG2751BWVLDAG3051BWVLDAG3351BWVLDAG3651B

One Door, Upper

Side View

81⁄8"

2013⁄16"

*

*See installation note.

Appliance Clearance

Opening Width11⁄2" less

cabinet width

Clearance Width3" less

opening width 17

5 ⁄8"

Ope

ning

H

eigh

t

16" C

lear

ance

Hei

ght

INSTALLATION NOTEBefore installation of decorative hardware on upper doors, verify clearance with appliance garage door open.

54" High (3)

WVLDAG2454BWVLDAG2754BWVLDAG3054BWVLDAG3354BWVLDAG3654B

51" High (3)

WVLDAG1851WVLDAG2151WVLDAG2451

300.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Tambour Door Cabinets

Butt Doors

Counter Wall with Tambour Appliance Garage, 13" DeepOne Door

57" High (3)

WAG1557WAG1857WAG2157WAG2457

60" High (3)

WAG1560WAG1860WAG2160WAG2460

54" High (3)

WAG2454BWAG2754BWAG3054BWAG3354BWAG3654B

60" High (3)

WAG2460BWAG2760BWAG3060BWAG3360BWAG3660B

48" High (2)

WAG1548WAG1848WAG2148WAG2448

48" High (2)

WAG2448BWAG2748BWAG3048BWAG3348BWAG3648B

Counter Wall with Full-Height Metal Tambour, 137⁄8" Deep

54" High (4)

FHTM2454FHTM3054FHTM3654

60" High (4)

FHTM2460FHTM3060FHTM3660

48" High (4)

FHTM2448FHTM3048 FHTM3648

• Metal tambours are constructed of solid, roll formed aluminum; specify stainless steel (SSTL) or brushed aluminum (ALUM) for tambour door color.

• Tambour door does not open fully; it stops approximately 8" from top of cabinet due to height of roll mechanism and tambour handle.

• No floor/bottom.• Shelves are 11¾" deep. • Metal frame on three sides; frame is

¾" deep.• Width modifications not available.• Height modifications available in 1⁄4"

increments; minimum 36", maximum 60".• Depth modifications available in 1⁄4"

increments. Specify cabinet box depth and overall depth with metal frame. Minimum cabinet box depth is 12½"/overall depth 13¼"; maximum cabinet box depth is 30"/overall 30¾" cabinet depth.

Tambour Appliance Garage, 133⁄4" Deep, 18" High

AG1518 AG2718AG1818 AG3018AG2118 AG3318AG2418 AG3618

• Designed for use under standard height wall cabinets.

• Cabinet is 133⁄4" deep; when installed under cabinet with doors, frame around tambour door will be flush with doors above.

• Height modifications not available.

Tambour Door Cabinets this column:• Available for wood door styles only.

• Tambour constructed of wood veneer; solid wood frame on three sides.• No floor/bottom.

• 15" clearance height with tambour open.

51" High (2)

WAG1551WAG1851WAG2151WAG2451

54" High (3)

WAG1554WAG1854WAG2154WAG2454

51" High (2)

WAG2451BWAG2751BWAG3051BWAG3351BWAG3651B

57" High (3)

WAG2457BWAG2757BWAG3057BWAG3357BWAG3657B

51" High (4)

FHTM2451FHTM3051FHTM3651

57" High (4)

FHTM2457FHTM3057FHTM3657

137⁄8"

DESIGN NOTE

FHTM is 137⁄8" deep overall and will align with a 13" deep cabinet with doors. If placing next to frameless bookcase (BK) cabinet, FHTM or bookcase depth may need to be modified or pull bookcase forward if design allows.

300.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall Blind Corner Cabinets

Wall Blind Cabinet Specifications – Top View: Blind Left

Cabinet must be pulled a minimum of 3" from corner; refer to drawing below for specifications when planning.

Minimum Pull

Butt DoorsOne Door

33" High (3)

WBC2433WBC2733WBC3033WBC3333WBC3633

42" High (3)

WBC2442WBC2742WBC3042WBC3342WBC3642

• Hinge location is same as blind location.

• Specify blind location. EXAMPLE: WBC2430, BLL specifies hinge left, blind left.

• Width modification: minimum 19", maximum 36".

30" High (2)

WBC2430WBC2730WBC3030WBC3330WBC3630

• Specify blind location.• Width modification: minimum 361⁄4",

maximum 48".

30" High (2)

WBC3930BWBC4230BWBC4530BWBC4830B

33" High (3)

WBC3933BWBC4233BWBC4533BWBC4833B

42" High (3)

WBC3942BWBC4242BWBC4542BWBC4842B

Blind Right

Filler

Blind Overlay Panel, 9" Wide

SKU Height

BOP30 297⁄8"BOP33 327⁄8"BOP36 357⁄8"BOP39 387⁄8"BOP42 417⁄8"

• 3⁄4" thick material.

• Field miter, see top view detail drawing.

• Matches door material/finish, outside edges profiled to match door.

215⁄16"

3"

3"

3" Filler

Use Corner Overlay Fillers (shown) or Blind Overlay Panel, Order Separately

Specifications are based on 13" deep wall cabinet perpendicular to blind corner cabinet.

Blind Right

Filler

131⁄16"

Wall Blind Corner Cabinets, 13" Deep• One 3" filler included with cabinet; shipped separately.

• Blind area is enclosed.

• Blind area is same width for all cabinet widths.

• Blind overlay panels (BOP) may be ordered separately for field miter and installation, see below. Corner wall overlay fillers (CWFA) may also be used, see Section 1000.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – See below for width minimums/maximums. – Minimum height 12", maximum 60"; minimum depth 5", maximum 30".

• Downgrade hinge modification (HNGNSC) not available.

Detail of Blind Overlay Panel

application with field miter

131⁄16"

NOTE: Cabinet width indicated in SKU is actual width of cabinet.

36" High (3)

WBC2436WBC2736WBC3036WBC3336WBC3636

39" High (3)

WBC2439WBC2739WBC3039WBC3339WBC3639

36" High (3)

WBC3936BWBC4236BWBC4536BWBC4836B

39" High (3)

WBC3939BWBC4239BWBC4539BWBC4839B

Cabinet Width

Door Width

24 107⁄8"27 137⁄8"30 167⁄8"33 197⁄8"36 227⁄8"

Cabinet Width

Door Width* (each)

39 127⁄8"42 143⁄8"45 157⁄8"48 173⁄8"

*Blind side of cabinet.

300.152015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

33" High (3)

PWBC2433PWBC2733PWBC3033PWBC3333PWBC3633

30" High (2)

PWBC2430PWBC2730PWBC3030PWBC3330PWBC3630

Butt Doors on Kitchen Side, Butt Doors on Peninsula Side

• Hinge location for kitchen side is same as blind location.

• Specify blind location for kitchen side. EXAMPLE: PWBC2730, BLL specifies hinge left, blind left.

• Width modification: minimum 21", maximum 36".

42" High (3)

PWBC2442PWBC2742PWBC3042PWBC3342PWBC3642

• Specify blind location for kitchen side.

• Width modification: minimum 361⁄4", maximum 48".

Blind Right

30" High (2)

PWBC3930BPWBC4230BPWBC4530BPWBC4830B

33" High (3)

PWBC3933BPWBC4233BPWBC4533BPWBC4833B

42" High (3)

PWBC3942BPWBC4242BPWBC4542BPWBC4842B

Filler

131⁄16"

Filler

131⁄16"

Blind Right

One Door on Kitchen Side, Butt Doors on Peninsula Side

Wall Blind Cabinet Specifications – Top View: Blind Left

Cabinet must be pulled a minimum of 3" from corner; refer to drawing below for specifications when planning.

Minimum Pull

215⁄16"

3" (filler not included)

3"

3" Filler

Use Corner Overlay Fillers (shown) or Blind Overlay Panel, Order Separately

Specifications are based on 13" deep wall cabinet perpendicular to blind corner cabinet.

Peninsula Wall Blind Corner Cabinets, 13" Deep• One 3" filler included with cabinet; shipped separately.

• Order a separate 3" filler for peninsula side of cabinet.

• Blind area is enclosed.

• Blind area is same width for all cabinet widths.

• Blind overlay panels (BOP) may be ordered separately for field miter and installation, see below. Corner wall overlay fillers (CWFA) may also be used, see Section 1000.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – See below for width minimums/maximums. – Minimum height 12", maximum 60"; minimum depth 5", maximum 30".

• Downgrade hinge modification (HNGNSC) not available.

Detail of Blind Overlay Panel

application with field miter

NOTE: Cabinet width indicated in SKU is actual width of cabinet.

36" High (3)

PWBC2436PWBC2736PWBC3036PWBC3336PWBC3636

36" High (3)

PWBC3936BPWBC4236BPWBC4536BPWBC4836B

39" High (3)

PWBC2439PWBC2739PWBC3039PWBC3339PWBC3639

39" High (3)

PWBC3939BPWBC4239BPWBC4539BPWBC4839B

Peninsula Wall Blind Corner Cabinets

Blind Overlay Panel, 9" Wide

SKU Height

BOP30 297⁄8"BOP33 327⁄8"BOP36 357⁄8"BOP39 387⁄8"BOP42 417⁄8"

• 3⁄4" thick material.

• Field miter, see top view detail drawing.

• Matches door material/finish, outside edges profiled to match door.

Cabinet Width

Door Width

24 107⁄8"27 137⁄8"30 167⁄8"33 197⁄8"36 227⁄8"

Cabinet Width

Door Width* (each)

39 127⁄8"42 143⁄8"45 157⁄8"48 173⁄8"

*Blind side of cabinet.

300.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS Diagonal Corner Wall Cabinets

Diagonal Corner Wall CabinetOne Door

42" High (3)

■ DW2142■ DW2442■ DW2742

Peninsula Diagonal Corner Wall Cabinet

42" High (3)

■ PDW2142■ PDW2442■ PDW2742

39" High (3)

■ DW2139■ DW2439■ DW2739

39" High (3)

■ PDW2139■ PDW2439■ PDW2739

30" High (2)

■ DW2130■ DW2430■ DW2730

30" High (2)

■ PDW2130■ PDW2430■ PDW2730

24" High (1)

■ DW2124■ DW2424■ DW2724

24" High (1)

■ PDW2124■ PDW2424■ PDW2724

• Includes one door on kitchen side and butt doors on peninsula side.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Wainscot interior modification not available.

Hinge/Peninsula Location Specifications

Specify hinge location and peninsula location using codes shown in bold face type. EXAMPLE: PDW2430, HL, PSL specifies kitchen side hinge left and peninsula location left.

Kitchen Side: Hinged Right (HR)Peninsula Side Right (PSR)

Kitchen Side: Hinged Left (HL)Peninsula Side Left (PSL)

Kitchen Side: Hinged Right (HR)Peninsula Side Left (PSL)

Kitchen Side: Hinged Left (HL)Peninsula Side Right (PSR)

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Wainscot interior modifications will be considered through a Custom Quote Request.

Top View27" x 27" x 16"

27"

27"

16"

16"

24"

24"

13"

13"

Top View24" x 24" x 13"

21"

21"

13"

13"

Top View21" x 21" x 13"

97 ⁄16"

115 ⁄16"

1311 ⁄16"

159 ⁄16"

1311 ⁄16"

159 ⁄16"

33" High (3)

■ DW2133■ DW2433■ DW2733

36" High (3)

■ DW2136■ DW2436■ DW2736

33" High (3)

■ PDW2133■ PDW2433■ PDW2733

36" High (3)

■ PDW2136■ PDW2436■ PDW2736

INSTALLATION NOTEIn addition to hanger rail, it is recommended to attach PDW to soffit or ceiling and all adjacent cabinets.

Diagonal Corner Stacked Wall Cabinet• Upper section of 48", 51" and 54" high cabinets is

equivalent to 15" high wall cabinet.

• Upper section of 57" and 60" high cabinets is equivalent to 18" high wall cabinet.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Height modification available; minimum 27", maximum 60". Height adjustment applied to lower section.

• If ordered in arch door style, upper door will be arch, lower door receives coordinating square door style.

• Wainscot interior modifications will be considered through a Custom Quote Request.

48" High (3)

DWST2148DWST2448DWST2748

51" High (3)

DWST2151DWST2451DWST2751

54" High (3)

DWST2154DWST2454DWST2754

57" High (3)

DWST2157DWST2457DWST2757

60" High (3)

DWST2160DWST2460DWST2760

One Door (Upper & Lower)

15" High Upper Section

18" High Upper Section

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

300.172015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Diagonal Corner Wall Cabinets

Wall Cabinet

Adjustable Lazy Susan Trays

33" High (3)

LSDWW2133LSDWW2433

LSDWW2733

42" High (4)

LSDWW2142LSDWW2442

LSDWW2742

30" High (3)

LSDWW2130LSDWW2430

LSDWW2730

Diagonal Corner Cabinets• Lazy susan tray or adjustable shelf

quantities listed below in ( ).• Width and depth modifications not

available.• Wainscot interior modifications will be

considered through a Custom Quote Request.

Lazy Susan Cabinets

• One lazy susan tray is fixed to floor of cabinet, remaining trays are fixed to adjustable shelves.

• Lazy susan includes wood trays with 1⁄2" thick solid wood sides.

Tambour Garage Cabinets

• Available for wood door styles only.• Tambours are constructed of wood veneer; solid wood frame on three sides.• Lower section does not have floor/bottom.• 15" clearance height with tambour open.

Counter Wall Cabinet

Wood Tambour Appliance Garage and Adjustable Lazy Susan Trays

51" High (3)

LDWAGW2451 LDWAGW2751

60" High (4)

LDWAGW2460 LDWAGW2760

48" High (3)

LDWAGW2448 LDWAGW2748

Counter Wall Cabinet

Wood Tambour Appliance Garage

51" High (2)

DWAG2451DWAG2751

60" High (3)

DWAG2460DWAG2760

48" High (2)

DWAG2448DWAG2748

Appliance Garage, 18" High

Wood TambourDAG2418

DAG2718

• Designed for use under standard height wall cabinets.

• When installed under cabinet with doors, frame around tambour door will be flush with doors above.

• Height modification not available.

Top View27" x 27" x 16"

27"

27"

16"

16"

24"

24"

13"

13"

Top View24" x 24" x 13"

18" 21"

21"

21"

13"

13"

Top View21" x 21" x 13"

18"

159 ⁄16

"115 ⁄16

"97 ⁄16"

1311 ⁄16"

1311 ⁄16"

159 ⁄16

"

54" High (3)

DWAG2454DWAG2754

57" High (3)

DWAG2457DWAG2757

36" High (3)

LSDWW2136LSDWW2436

LSDWW2736

54" High (3)

LDWAGW2454 LDWAGW2754

39" High (3)

LSDWW2139LSDWW2439

LSDWW2739

57" High (3)

LDWAGW2457 LDWAGW2757

300.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Microwave Wall Cabinets

With Lift and Stay Door

36" High (0)

18BMLS243618BMLS2736 18BMLS303618BMLS333618BMLS3636

42" High (1)

18BMLS244218BMLS274218BMLS304218BMLS3342

18BMLS3642

30" High (0)

18BMLS243018BMLS273018BMLS303018BMLS3330

18BMLS3630

With Drawer

• Drawer front is 61⁄2" high; see Section 200 for drawer front styling details.

• Bottom drawer reveal adjusted to 1⁄4"; allows for drawer clearance with tile countertops or in uneven installations.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Width: minimum 21", maximum 36". – Height: minimum 39", maximum 60". – Depth: minimum 12", maximum 24".

54" High (2)

18BMD2454B18BMD2754B 18BMD3054B18BMD3354B

18BMD3654B

60" High (3)

18BMD2460B18BMD2760B18BMD3060B18BMD3360B

18BMD3660B

48" High (1)

18BMD2448B18BMD2748B 18BMD3048B18BMD3348B

18BMD3648B

Built-In Microwave Wall Cabinet• Designed for use with built-in microwaves.

• 3⁄4" thick square edge appliance overlay panel attached to case with cam cleat system; matches door material/finish, edge banded all four edges. Panel is flush with doors/drawer fronts. Replacement panels available, see Section 1200.

• Appliance panel can be modified on site or customized with oven cut-out (OCM) modification at time of order.

• Maximum cut-out dimensions:

– Width: 11⁄2" less cabinet width – Height without oven shelf kit: 11⁄2" less appliance panel height – Height with oven shelf kit: 35⁄16" (field cut) / 51⁄8" (factory cut) less appliance panel height

• Oven shelf kit available for field installation of fixed floor, see Section 900 for details. Kit included with OCM modification. Allow 29⁄16" room for shelf and cleat system.

INSTALLATION NOTE24" deep cabinets require support on three sides (adjacent cabinets, ceiling, countertop or side walls).

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Width: minimum 21", maximum 36". – Height: minimum 30", maximum 42". – Depth: minimum 9", maximum 30".

• Lift mechanism not compatible with Automated Drive.

• Arch door styles available in cabinets up to 24" wide only.

• Cabinets greater than 24" wide receive two panel doors in wood door styles except for mitered door styles.

• Restrictor clips available to reduce opening of door, see Section 1200.

207⁄8"

A

B

Height A B30 815/16" 23/32"36 1415/16" 45/32"42 2015/16" 711/16"

Side View

201⁄16"

18" Deep

54" High (2)

21BMD2454B21BMD2754B 21BMD3054B21BMD3354B

21BMD3654B

60" High (3)

21BMD2460B21BMD2760B21BMD3060B21BMD3360B

21BMD3660B

48" High (1)

21BMD2448B21BMD2748B 21BMD3048B21BMD3348B

21BMD3648B

21" Deep

18" Deep

36" High (0)

21BMLS243621BMLS2736 21BMLS303621BMLS333621BMLS3636

42" High (1)

21BMLS244221BMLS274221BMLS304221BMLS3342

21BMLS3642

30" High (0)

21BMLS243021BMLS273021BMLS303021BMLS3330

21BMLS3630

21" Deep

300.192015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Microwave Shelf Unit

18" High

PMS2718PMS3018

• 3⁄4" thick construction, finished on sides, bottom, top and interior.

• Orders in wood and textured melamine door styles receive plywood construction; acrylic, foil and premium veneer door styles receive furniture board construction (upgrades not available).

• Modifications not available.

• Interior dimensions:

– Width = 11⁄2" less than width of exterior. – Height = 161⁄2". – Depth = 171⁄4".

18"

13"

18"

Side View

• Designed for free standing microwave or other small appliances.

• Includes matching finished interior and finished bottom.

• Opening is not trimmable.

• Shelf for microwave also functions as bottom structure of cabinet and cannot be removed.

• Do not plan/install next to diagonal wall corner cabinet.

• Depth modifications affect cabinet box and microwave shelf equally. To modify depth of shelf only a Custom Quote Request may be submitted.

Microwave Shelf CabinetButt Doors

33" High (0)

PMW2433BPMW2733BPMW3033B

42" High (1)

PMW2442BPMW2742BPMW3042B

13"

171⁄4"

30" High (0)

PMW2430BPMW2730BPMW3030B

17"

39" High (1)

PMW2439BPMW2739BPMW3039B

36" High (0)

PMW2436BPMW2736BPMW3036B

Microwave Wall Cabinets

300.20 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall

Hinge/Peninsula Location SpecificationsSpecify hinge location and peninsula location using codes shown in bold face type. EXAMPLE: PSCW2430, HL, PSL specifies kitchen side hinge left and peninsula location left.

36" High (3)

SCW2136SCW2436

Open

42" High (3)

SCW2142SCW2442

36" High (3)

WODSCW2436

42" High (3)

WODSCW2442

24" High (1)

SCW2124 SCW2424

Easy Reach Square Corner Wall Cabinets, 13" Deep• Occupies 24" x 24" corner space.

• Corner doors are hinged together at center with concealed strap hinges.

• Depth modifications will be considered through a Custom Quote Request.

• Width modifications (MW) available in 1⁄4" increments. Specify dimension and location of modification. Minimum dimension of each back is 21", maximum 27".

EXAMPLE: SCW2430, HL, MW (MW back left to 243⁄4", MW back right to 27").

• Wainscot interior modification not available.

• Square corner door rules vary from those listed in Section 200. Contact Customer Care for specific styling details.

Kitchen Side: Hinged Left (HL)Peninsula Side Right (PSR)

Kitchen Side: Hinged Right (HR)Peninsula Side Left (PSL)

Kitchen Side: Hinged Right (HR)Peninsula Side Right (PSR)

Kitchen Side: Hinged Left (HL)Peninsula Side Left (PSL)

• Includes matching finished interior.• Valance can be modified to 3" square valance, add CVSQ to SKU

when ordering, no other valance modifications available.

30" High (2)

WODSCW2430

30" High (2)

SCW2130SCW2430

24" High (1)

WODSCW2424

Easy Reach Square Corner Wall Cabinets

Easy Reach Asymmetrical Corner Wall Cabinet, 13" Deep

Top ViewACW24L21R

21"

24"

13"

24"

21"

13"

Top ViewACW21L24R

13"

13"

• L shape corner wall with unequal back and door widths.• See top view drawings for dimensional detail.• Doors are hinged together at center with concealed strap hinges.• Width, depth and wainscot interior modifications not available.• Square corner door rules vary from those listed in Section 200.

NOTE: These cabinets receive two different size door widths. Orders in some door styles may receive variation in styling for each door, contact Customer Care for details. Door sizes = 7" and 10".

• Specify hinge location.

24" High (1) 30" High (2) 33" High (3) 36" High (3) 39" High (3) 42" High (3)

ACW21L24R24 ACW21L24R30 ACW21L24R33 ACW21L24R36 ACW21L24R39 ACW21L24R42 21" Left / 24" Right ACW24L21R24 ACW24L21R30 ACW24L21R33 ACW24L21R36 ACW24L21R39 ACW24L21R42 24" Left / 21" Right

8"

11"8"

11"

Peninsula Wall

30" High (2)

PSCW2430

39" High (3)

PSCW2439

24" High (1)

PSCW2424

42" High (3)

PSCW2442

• Includes butt doors on peninsula side; doors hinged independently.

39" High (3)

SCW2139SCW2439

33" High (3)

SCW2133SCW2433

39" High (3)

WODSCW2439

33" High (3)

WODSCW2433

36" High (3)

PSCW2436

33" High (3)

PSCW2433

• Specify hinge location.

300.212015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

• Decorative pull on door not required.

• Intended for professional installation only.

• Cabinets including Automated Drive open with a light touch of your hand or elbow and close with the press of a button on side of cabinet.

• Electrical information: – Electrical outlet required. – Automated Drive is factory installed in cabinet. – Can be opened manually during power outages.

• Automated Drive features: – Electrical drive triggers opening signal. – Auto open/close feature interrupted if resistance is encountered.

Standard

13" Deep

Lift Door Wall Cabinets

21" High (1)

WVL1821 WVL2121 WVL2421 WVL2721 WVL3021 WVL3321 WVL3621

24" Deep (not shown)18" High (0)

24WVL1818 24WVL211824WVL2418

24WVL2718 24WVL3018 24WVL3318 24WVL3618

18" High (0)

WVL1818 WVL2118 WVL2418WVL2718

WVL3018 WVL3318 WVL3618

21" High (1)

24WVL1821 24WVL2121 24WVL2421 24WVL2721 24WVL3021 24WVL3321 24WVL3621

161⁄2"+/- 5⁄8"

7"

Side View

13" Deep

Wall with Vertical Lift Door• Door lifts up and out in one smooth motion.

• Includes Quiet Close technology for silent closing.

• Placement of cabinet must be where overhead area is free of obstacles/projecting molding. (See diagram at right to plan for overhead clearance.)

• Lift mechanism is visible when door is opened or if glass doors are specified.

• Adjustable shelves are reduced in depth slightly; 13" depths receive 91⁄2" deep shelves, 24" depths receive 201⁄2" deep shelves.

• 18" high cabinets do not include shelving and are not drilled for shelving.

• Arch door styles available in cabinets up to 24" wide only.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments:

– Width - minimum 18", maximum 36". – Height - minimum 18", maximum 24". – Depth - minimum 12", maximum 30".

Automated Drive

13" Deep

21" High (1)

WVLS1821 WVLS2121 WVLS2421 WVLS2721 WVLS3021 WVLS3321 WVLS3621

24" Deep (not shown)18" High (0)

24WVLS1818 24WVLS211824WVLS2418

24WVLS2718 24WVLS3018 24WVLS3318 24WVLS3618

18" High (0)

WVLS1818 WVLS2118 WVLS2418WVLS2718

WVLS3018 WVLS3318 WVLS3618

21" High (1)

24WVLS1821 24WVLS2121 24WVLS2421 24WVLS2721 24WVLS3021 24WVLS3321 24WVLS3621

Door obstructs opening:18" height = 1⁄4"21" height = 35⁄16"

13" Deep

• Requires decorative pull on door.

DESIGN NOTE

Add aluminum doors on Automated Drive cabinets for a contemporary look; decorative hardware not required.

NOTE: Lift hardware will be visible through glass; obscure with frosted or textured glass upgrade.

Cabinets greater than 24" wide receive two panel doors in wood door styles.

cabinet height less 911⁄16"

cabinet height less 3"

cabinet width less 41⁄2"

Clearance

cabinet height less 21⁄8"

cabinet width less 61⁄4"

Clearance

Power Supply for Automated Drive Cabinets

POWER

• Power supply sold separately, powers up to eight Automated Drive cabinets.

• Includes six foot cable.

• Connect to GFCI outlet.

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

300.22 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS Lift Door Wall Cabinets

Standard

21" High (0)

WLS1821 WLS2121 WLS2421 WLS2721 WLS3021 WLS3321 WLS3621

18" High (0)

WLS1818 WLS2118 WLS2418 WLS2718 WLS3018 WLS3318 WLS3618

Lift and Stay Wall Cabinet, 13" Deep• Door opens out and towards user from bottom (top pivot/

hinge point). Lift hardware features variable stop – allows door to open in any position.

• Includes Quiet Close technology for silent closing.

• Placement of cabinet must be where overhead area is free of obstacles/projecting molding. See diagram at right to plan for overhead clearance.

• Restrictor clips available to reduce opening of door, see Section 1200.

• Lift mechanism is visible when door is opened or if glass doors are specified.

• Lift mechanism projects into cabinet and does not allow for shelving within cabinet.

• Arch door styles available in cabinets up to 24" wide only.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments:

– Width - minimum 18", maximum 36". – Height - minimum 15"*, maximum 24". – Depth - minimum 9", maximum 30".

*12" – 143⁄4" height modifications will be considered through our Custom Quote program on a case by case basis.

Automated Drive

• Decorative pull on door not required.

• Intended for professional installation only.

• Cabinets including Automated Drive open with a light touch of your hand or elbow and close with the press of a button on side of cabinet.

• Electrical information: – Electrical outlet required. – Automated Drive is factory installed in cabinet. – Can be opened manually during power outages.

• Automated Drive features: – Electrical drive triggers opening signal. – Auto open/close feature interrupted if resistance is encountered.

Side View

21" High (0)

WLSS1821 WLSS2121 WLSS2421 WLSS2721 WLSS3021 WLSS3321 WLSS3621

18" High (0)

WLSS1818 WLSS2118 WLSS2418WLSS2718

WLSS3018 WLSS3318 WLSS3618

B

Height A B

18" 1715⁄16" 613⁄16"

21" 2015⁄16" 711⁄16"

A

• Requires decorative pull on door.

cabinet height less 21⁄8"

cabinet width less 41⁄2"

Clearance

cabinet height less 103⁄8"

cabinet height less 21⁄16"

cabinet width less 61⁄4"

Clearance

cabinet height less 71⁄4"

Power Supply for Automated Drive Cabinets

POWER

• Power supply sold separately, powers up to eight Automated Drive cabinets.

• Includes six foot cable.

• Connect to GFCI outlet.

DESIGN NOTE

Add aluminum doors on Automated Drive cabinets for a contemporary look; decorative hardware not required.

NOTE: Lift hardware will be visible through glass; obscure with frosted or textured glass upgrade.

Cabinets greater than 24" wide receive two panel doors in wood door styles.

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

300.232015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

Wall Cabinets with Bi-fold Doors, 13" Deep• Door lifts up and out in one smooth motion.

• Includes Quiet Close technology for silent closing.

• Placement of cabinet must be where overhead area is free of obstacles/projecting molding. (See diagrams to plan for overhead clearance.)

• Restrictor clips available to reduce opening of door, see Section 1200.

• Lift mechanism is visible when door is opened or if glass doors are specified.

• Adjustable shelves are reduced in depth slightly; receives 91⁄2" deep shelves.

• Arch door styles available in cabinets up to 24" wide only. If ordered in an arch door style, upper door is arch, lower door receives coordinating square door style.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments:

– Width: minimum 24", maximum 36". – Height: minimum 27", maximum 42". – Depth: minimum 12", maximum 30".

Automated Drive

Standard

33" High (3)

WBFL2433WBFL3033WBFL3333WBFL3633

42" High (3)

WBFL2442WBFL3042WBFL3342WBFL3642

30" High (2)

WBFL2430WBFL3030WBFL3330WBFL3630

Side View

A

B

Height A B C

30" 77⁄16" 141⁄2" 18"

33" 81⁄8" 1513⁄16" 21"

36" 83⁄4" 173⁄16" 24"

39" 97⁄16" 189⁄16" 27"

42" 101⁄16" 1915⁄16" 30"

Lift Door Wall Cabinets

Cabinets greater than 24" wide receive two panel doors in wood door styles.

• Decorative pull on door not required.

• Intended for professional installation only.

• Cabinets including Automated Drive open with a light touch of your hand or elbow and close with the press of a button on side of cabinet.

• Electrical information: – Electrical outlet required. – Automated Drive is factory installed in cabinet. – Can be opened manually during power outages.

• Automated Drive features: – Electrical drive triggers opening signal. – Auto open/close feature interrupted if resistance is encountered.

36" High (3)

WBFLS2436WBFLS3036WBFLS3336WBFLS3636

42" High (3)

WBFLS2442WBFLS3042WBFLS3342WBFLS3642

30" High (2)

WBFLS2430WBFLS3030WBFLS3330WBFLS3630

36" High (3)

WBFL2436WBFL3036WBFL3336WBFL3636

39" High (3)

WBFL2439WBFL3039WBFL3339WBFL3639

33" High (3)

WBFLS2433WBFLS3033WBFLS3333WBFLS3633

39" High (3)

WBFLS2439WBFLS3039WBFLS3339WBFLS3639

• Requires decorative pull on door.

C

cabinet width less 4"

Clearance

cabinet width less 51⁄2"

Clearance

DESIGN NOTE

Add aluminum doors on Automated Drive cabinets for a contemporary look; decorative hardware not required.

NOTE: Lift hardware will be visible through glass; obscure with frosted or textured glass upgrade.

Power Supply for Automated Drive Cabinets

POWER

• Power supply sold separately, powers up to eight Automated Drive cabinets.

• Includes six foot cable.

• Connect to GFCI outlet.

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

300.24 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall Bookcase Cabinets, Wine Storage

Wine Cube, 13" Deep• 3⁄4" thick construction throughout.• Includes matching finished interior.• Cabinet can be planned for horizontal or vertical applications; specify

finished top/bottom or ends as needed.• Dimensional and matching end modifications not available.

Single Overall Exterior Interior Dimensions Qty. of

SKU Dimensions (of each opening) Openings

WWC12 6" x 12" 41⁄2" x 47⁄8" 2 WWC18 6" x 18" 41⁄2" x 5" 3 WWC24 6" x 24" 41⁄2" x 51⁄16" 4 WWC30 6" x 30" 41⁄2" x 53⁄32" 5 WWC36 6" x 36" 41⁄2" x 51⁄8" 6 WWC42 6" x 42" 41⁄2" x 53⁄32" 7

Double Overall Exterior Interior Dimensions Qty. of SKU Dimensions (of each opening) Openings

WWCD12 12" x 12" 47⁄8" x 47⁄8" 4 WWCD18 12" x 18" 47⁄8" x 5" 6 WWCD24 12" x 24" 47⁄8" x 51⁄16" 8 WWCD30 12" x 30" 47⁄8" x 53⁄32" 10 WWCD36 12" x 36" 47⁄8" x 51⁄8" 12 WWCD42 12" x 42" 47⁄8" x 53⁄32" 14

BK

Wall Bookcase Cabinets• See Section 700 for a complete SKU listing of bookcase cabinets and available valance modifications.

BKF

36" Single

Top

Top

End

End

1⁄4"

12" Single 18" Single 24" Single

30" Single 36" Single 42" Single

12" Double 18" Double 24" Double

30" Double 36" Double 42" Double

300.252015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Crossmate Wine Storage Wall Cabinet, 13" Deep • Includes matching finished interior.• Cross dividers are constructed from 3⁄4" thick edge banded material.• 11⁄2" thick floor divides/separates stacked sections.• Height and width modifications not available.• Depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 5", maximum 30".• L/R and T/B designations specify divider direction which is needed if finished ends or toe space options are added; cabinet is not reversible.• Bottle count based on 31⁄2" diameter bottles.

RightLeft

Left

Bottom

Wall Square Wine

Wall Horizontal Wine

Four Openings Bottles

WCWS2412T 12 WCWS2412B 12WCWS3015T 24WCWS3015B 24

Wall Vertical Wine

Eight Openings Bottles

WCWS3618 32WCWS4221 48WCWS4824 56

Eight Openings Bottles

WCWS1836 32WCWS2142 48WCWS2448 56

Four Openings Bottles

WCWS1224L 12 WCWS1224R 12WCWS1530L 24WCWS1530R 24

Four Openings Bottles

WCWS1818 16WCWS2121 24WCWS2424 28

Two Openings Bottles

WCWS1212L 6 WCWS1212R 6WCWS1515L 12WCWS1515R 12

1⁄4"

Top

Right

Wine Storage

300.26 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS Spice Storage

Wall Spice Drawers, 6" Wide, 13" Deep

Number of Horizontal Vertical Drawers

SDH12 SDV12 2 SDH18 SDV18 3 SDH24 SDV24 4 SDH30 SDV30 5 SDH36 SDV36 6 SDH42 SDV42 7

• Spice drawers have slab front with profiled edges, see below. Pulls/knobs required.

• Drawer boxes are 1⁄2" thick dovetailed construction; no drawer guides. Sides are hardwood in natural finish; fronts match material and finish of cabinet.

• If matching finished interior is specified, drawer boxes are not affected.

• Openings are not square and drawers cannot be changed on site from original vertical or horizontal placement. Opening sizes vary within cabinet, however all drawer fronts are equal in size.

• Modify depth available in 1⁄4" increments, minimum 9", maximum 30". 241⁄4"–30" depths receive drawer boxes for 24" deep cabinets.

• Width and height modifications not available as standard modification or through Custom Quote request.

• Matching end modification not available.

SDH18

SDV36

Wall Door Spice Rack Cabinet, 13" Deep

30" High (0)

WDSR1530WDSR1830WDSR2130WDSR2430

42" High (2)

WDSR1542WDSR1842WDSR2142WDSR2442

30" Height

33", 36" and 39" Heights (42" height receives additional full-depth shelf)

• All heights include 8" deep shelves; 30" and 42" cabinets receive two, 33", 36" and 39" receive three. Full-depth shelf quantities listed above in ( ); must be placed above spice rack.

• Available in single door configuration only.

• Includes hardwood spice rack mounted to door. Spice rack is 24" high x 4" deep.

• Spice rack includes three dowels with spring loaded end caps for vertical adjustability.

• For proper interior access, do not plan next to item of greater depth.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

36" High (1)

WDSR1536WDSR1836WDSR2136WDSR2436

Profile for following door styles:

Bahamas • Brookhill • Caledon • Devonshire • Eaton Fenwick • Hudson Falls • Lincoln • Loxley • Mission Park Place • Potter’s Mill • Providence • Sonoma Valencia • Victoria • Wakefield • Wattsburg Windwood

Madison • Venice • Winterberry

Calistoga

Bella • Gibson • Pike’s Peak

Dana Pointe

Leighton

33" High (1)

WDSR1533WDSR1833WDSR2133WDSR2433

39" High (1)

WDSR1539WDSR1839WDSR2139WDSR2439

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

300.272015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

33" High (1) X

13WPS0933 261⁄2" 13WPS1233 261⁄2"

30" High (1) X

13WPS0930 231⁄2" 13WPS1230 231⁄2"

• Includes pull-out shelving rack fixed to door.

• Rack is constructed from hardwood and plywood with clear coat applied and is open on both sides.

• Includes adjustable shelving; see ( ) above for quantity.

• Operates on two sets of Quiet Close drawer guides.

• Height modifications not available.

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments.

– Width - minimum 9", maximum 18". – Depth - minimum 12", maximum 24".

• Heavy Duty Quiet Close is an optional upgrade for cabinets modified to 21" – 24" depths.

42" High (2) X

13WPS0942 351⁄2" 13WPS1242 351⁄2"

36" High (1) X

15WPS0936 291⁄2" 15WPS1236 291⁄2"

30" High (1) X

15WPS0930 231⁄2" 15WPS1230 231⁄2"

42" High (2) X

15WPS0942 351⁄2" 15WPS1242 351⁄2"

15" Deep

Wall Cabinet with Pull-Out Storage13" Deep

Wall Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out, 13" Deep• Includes pull-out spice rack, filler, overlay filler

and one fixed shelf. See ( ) below for adjustable shelf quantites.

• Designed to be installed between two cabinets; not intended to be used on end of run or as stand alone cabinet.

• Pull-out spice rack is open both sides, operates on specialty full extension guides (non-Quiet Close) and is constructed from plywood with clear coat applied and metal side rails.

• Bottom of pull-out is maple laminate; modifications not available.

• When installed, overlay filler will be flush with doors of adjacent cabinets.

• Micro-adjustment screw allows for precise filler alignment.

• Modifications not available.

6" Plain Front30" High (3)

WSR0630

6" Fluted Front

• Includes six flutes.• Available in wood and

thermofoil door styles only.

33" High (3)

WSR0633

42" High (5)

WSR0642

30" High (3)

WSRF0630

36" High (4)

WSRF0636

42" High (5)

WSRF0642

67⁄8" or 97⁄8"

Spice and Pull-Out Storage

36" High (4)

WSR0636

39" High (4)

WSR0639

33" High (3)

WSRF0633

39" High (4)

WSRF0639

39" High (2) X

15WPS0939 321⁄2" 15WPS1239 321⁄2"

33" High (1) X

15WPS0933 261⁄2" 15WPS1233 261⁄2"

39" High (2) X

13WPS0939 321⁄2" 13WPS1239 321⁄2"

36" High (1) X

13WPS0936 291⁄2" 13WPS1236 291⁄2"

X

Overlay Filler

Filler

Fluted Overlay Filler

Filler

Bahamas • Brookhill • Caledon • Devonshire • Eaton Fenwick • Hudson Falls • Lincoln • Loxley • Mission Park Place • Potter’s Mill • Providence • Sonoma • Valencia Victoria • Wakefield • Wattsburg • Windwood

Madison • Venice • Winterberry

Calistoga

Bella • Gibson • Pike’s Peak

Dana Pointe

Leighton

Profile of Overlay Fillers by Door Style:

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

300.28 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Angle Wall Cabinets

• Choose either left or right angle.

• Designed to be used on end of run.

• Width, depth and wainscot interior modifications not available.

Angle Wall Cabinet• Designed to be used on end of run.• Width, depth, finished end and wainscot interior modifications not

available.

One Door

Angle Wall Cabinet

Double Angle Wall Cabinet

33" High (3)

WAC1333

42" High (3)

WAC1342

13"

93⁄4"

135°

Top View

42" High (3)

WAC2442LWAC2442R

Angle Left

107⁄8"

135° 13"

24"

Top View (Angle Left)

173⁄4"

42" High (3)

DWC1342DWC1542

15"

15"183⁄8"

Top Views

24" High (1)

WAC1324

33" High (3)

WAC2433LWAC2433R

33" High (3)

DWC1333DWC1533

42" High (3)

DWC1842BDWC2142BDWC2442B

33" High (3)

DWC1833BDWC2133BDWC2433B

13"

13"

211⁄4"

30" High (2)

WAC2430LWAC2430R

30" High (2)

DWC1330DWC1530

24" High (1)

WAC2424LWAC2424R

• Designed to be used on end of run.• Doors are 93⁄4" wide.• Due to narrow width of doors, glass

door modifications not recommended.• Width, depth, finished end and

wainscot interior modifications not available.

30" High (2)

WAC1330

30" High (2)

DWC1830BDWC2130BDWC2430B

24" High (1)

DWC1824BDWC2124BDWC2424B

Butt Doors

24" High (1)

DWC1324DWC1524

18"

18"257⁄16"

21"

21"2911⁄16"

24"

24"3315⁄16"

Top Views

39" High (3)

WAC1339

36" High (3)

WAC1336

39" High (3)

DWC1339DWC1539

36" High (3)

DWC1336DWC1536

36" High (3)

WAC2436LWAC2436R

36" High (3)

DWC1836BDWC2136BDWC2436B39" High (3)

WAC2439LWAC2439R

39" High (3)

DWC1839BDWC2139BDWC2439B

300.292015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Top View – Outside Angle (COA)

135° Corner Outside/Inside Angle Wall Cabinet • Choose either outside or inside angle.

• Includes two full-height doors, hinged at outside of cabinet case.

• Back of cabinet is constructed from 3⁄4" thick material for added strength.

• Depth, width and finished back modifications not available.

• Wainscot interior modifications will be considered through Custom Quote Request.

Outside Angle

Hinged Left

A

Hinged RightB

SKU A B

W06(*)COA 6" 113⁄8"

W09(*)COA 9" 143⁄8"

W12(*)COA 12" 173⁄8"

135°13"

Hinged Left

A

Hinged RightB

Top View – Inside Angle (CIA)

A indicates back width of cabinet and wall space.(*) Indicates height of cabinet.B indicates case width.

SKU A B

W21(*)CIA 21" 155⁄8"

W24(*)CIA 24" 185⁄8"

W27(*)CIA 27" 215⁄8"

30" High (2)

W2130CIAW2430CIAW2730CIA

33" High (3)

W2133CIAW2433CIAW2733CIA

Inside Angle

24" High (1)

W2124CIAW2424CIAW2724CIA

A indicates back width of cabinet and wall space.(*) Indicates height of cabinet.B indicates case width.

135°13"

42" High (3)

W2142CIAW2442CIAW2742CIA

30" High (2)

W0630COAW0930COAW1230COA

33" High (3)

W0633COAW0933COAW1233COA

24" High (1)

W0624COAW0924COAW1224COA

42" High (3)

W0642COAW0942COAW1242COA

39" High (3)

W2139CIAW2439CIAW2739CIA

36" High (3)

W2136CIAW2436CIAW2736CIA

39" High (3)

W0639COAW0939COAW1239COA

36" High (3)

W0636COAW0936COAW1236COA

Angle Wall Cabinets

300.30 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall End Shelves

Square Top Radius ShelvingRadius Shelving

30" High

13WN630

42" High

13WN642

13"

6"

Top View – Radius Shelves

9" 11" 99⁄16"

36"30" 42"

30" High

13WN630STL 13WN630STR

42" High

13WN642STL 13WN642STR

Top View – Square Shelves

13"

33" High

13WN633 33" High

13WN633STL 13WN633STR

41⁄2" radius

• All shelves include 41⁄2" radius.

• Reversible for left or right applications.

24" High

13WN624

• Top shelf is square, all other shelves include 41⁄2" radius.

• Square top shelf is not reversible; select appropriate shelf by SKU. L indicates LEFT, R indicates RIGHT.

24" High

13WN624STL 13WN624STR

Radius End Shelf, 13" Deep• Available with all radius shelves, top shelf square or top and bottom shelf square, choose

appropriate SKU below.

• Width limited to 51⁄4" due to radius.

• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick material. Wood and textured melamine door styles receive plywood; acrylic, foil and premium veneer door styles receive furniture board (upgrades not available).

• Modify height available; minimum 9", maximum 60". Number of shelves and/or height of openings will be adjusted accordingly.

• All visible edges are edge banded.

• Spacing between shelves is consistent for all units.

107⁄8"

24"

6"

Square Top and Bottom Radius Shelving

• Top and bottom shelves are square, all other shelves include 41⁄2" radius.

• Reversible for left or right applications.

36" High

13WN636

39" High

13WN639

36" High

13WN636STL 13WN636STR

39" High

13WN639STL 13WN639STR

30" High

13WN630STB

42" High

13WN642STB

33" High

13WN633STB

24" High

13WN624STB

36" High

13WN636STB

39" High

13WN639STB

Reversible Shelving Unit

Reversible Shelving Unit

Right Shelving Unit Shown

Radius Shelves shown, dimensions also apply to Square Top and Square Top and Bottom Shelving.

39"33"

12"10"

300.312015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

Peninsula Radius Shelf, 13" Deep• Available with all radius shelves or top shelf square. Choose

appropriate SKU.• Reversible for left or right applications.• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick material. Wood and textured melamine

door styles receive plywood; acrylic, foil and premium veneer door styles receive furniture board (upgrades not available).

• Modify height available; minimum 9", maximum 60". Number of shelves and/or height of openings will be adjusted accordingly.

• All visible edges are edge banded.

• Spacing between shelves is consistent for all units.

Top View – Square Shelves

13"

61⁄2"

13"

61⁄2"

Top View – Radius Shelves

61⁄2" radius

41⁄4"

41⁄4"

Support Bracket Profile

Peninsula Wall End Shelves, Floating Shelves

Radius Top

30" High

PWN1330

33" High

PWN1333

Square Top Radius Shelving

30" High

PWN1330ST

33" High

PWN1333ST

24" High

PWN1324

24" High

PWN1324ST

42" High

PWN1342

42" High

PWN1342ST

36" High

PWN1336

36" High

PWN1336ST

39" High

PWN1339

39" High

PWN1339ST

11"

24" 30" 36" 42"

107⁄8" 9" 99⁄16"

33" 39"

10" 12"

Floating Shelves, 2" Thick

13" Deep

■ FLTS24 ■ FLTS27 ■ FLTS30 ■ FLTS33 ■ FLTS36 ■ FLTS39 ■ FLTS42■ FLTS45■ FLTS48 ■ FLTS54 ■ FLTS60 ■ FLTS66 ■ FLTS72

• Includes installation screws, mounting cleat and installation instructions.

• Last two digits indicate width of shelf.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄16" increments at no charge; specify exact dimensions in decimal format. Minimum width 18", maximum 72"; minimum depth 6", maximum 16".

EXAMPLE: FLTS66, width65.25, depth11.75 specifies a floating shelf 651⁄4" wide, 113⁄4" deep.

• Maximum recommended load rating:

– 13" deep shelves: 15 lbs. per square foot. – 16" deep shelves: 71⁄2 lbs. per square foot.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

For orders in wood door styles:• UPDATE: Constructed from plywood tops and bottoms with solid

wood front and sides.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer or textured melamine door styles:• Constructed from plywood, edge banded front and sides.

16" Deep

■ 16FLTS24 ■ 16FLTS27 ■ 16FLTS30 ■ 16FLTS33 ■ 16FLTS36 ■ 16FLTS39 ■ 16FLTS42 ■ 16FLTS45 ■ 16FLTS48 ■ 16FLTS54 ■ 16FLTS60 ■ 16FLTS66 ■ 16FLTS72

Secure mounting cleat to wall studs with washer head screws (included)

Flat head set screws (included)

Countersink flat head set screws

Floating shelfslides over mounting cleat

Mounting cleat (included)

3⁄4"

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

300.32 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

Plate Ledge Detail Examples

21⁄2"

3⁄4" ledge (PSSF)

11⁄4" crown molding (SMCRN)

Ledge profile and crown molding are selected individually; see SKUs at right.

21⁄2"

3⁄4" ledge (PSSE)

11⁄4" crown molding (ACSTPCRN)

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood, Style A or B• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished three sides, back is not finished.

• Styles A and B incorporate a deluxe panel in upper section of hood.

• Lower sections vary by style; Style A incorporates a deluxe arch valance (DAVF), Style B incorporates a deluxe panel.

• Deluxe panels reflect door style specified on order; see deluxe panel information (DWP) in Section 1000 for styling details.

• Includes 3⁄4" thick end panels; matching ends (FHM) available.

• Includes decorative plate ledge with choice of profile solid stock and crown molding, see options below.

• Center panels of valance (Style A) are designed to complement styling of door; however, please note following:

– Orders in applied molding door styles do not receive applied molding. – Inside profile/center panel varies by door style, see details on next page.

• Interior of hood is finished approximately 6–8" from bottom back edge. Back panel of Style A is shorter than sides, see drawing on page 300.34.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Height can be modified in 1⁄4" increments, minimum 24", maximum 36".

• Hood fronts are removable for ease of use in installation and maintenance of venting equipment.

• Metal trim kits available; see page 300.54 for illustration. 20 gauge brushed stainless steel cut to fit exposed edges under wood hood; available installed or as a kit for field installation, see SKUs on pages 300.34-35.

EXAMPLE: 21RHDXA3624, IMTS specifies a 213⁄4" deep, 24" high Deluxe Wood Hood with Style A lower section and factory installed metal trim kit. Specify 21RHDXA36MT for field install metal trim kit.

• Vent-A-Hood® blower units are separate SKUs and can be referenced at the end of Section 300. Corresponding blower size information is listed by SKUs on pages 300.34-35.

Crown Profile SelectionProfile Molding Selection

PSSE

PSSF ACSTPCRN Arts and Crafts Small Crown

SMCRN Small Crown

Style A – See page 300.34 for SKUs and additional details.

Ledge Detail OptionsSelect and add profile molding and crown profile SKU to deluxe wood hood SKU.

Style B – See page 300.35 for SKUs and additional details.

• Vent-A-Hood® Blower (see chart by SKUs for details)

• Profile Molding (PSSE, PSSF)

• Crown Profile (SMCRN, ACSTPCRN)

300.332015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood, Style AProfile/Center Panel Details for Valance A

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat (FP) Reverse Raised (RR) Raised (RP) Beaded (BP)

Bahamas* •

Hudson Falls • • • •

Loxley • • • •

Mission • • • •

Potter’s Mill • • • •

Sonoma • • • •

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat (FP) Reverse Raised (RR) Raised (RP) Beaded (BP)

Brookhill • • • •

Calistoga • • A† •

Dana Pointe • • • •

Devonshire • • B† •

Madison • • C† •

Park Place • • • •

Providence • • • •

Valencia • • • •

Venice • • D† •

Victoria • • • •

Wakefield • • • •

Windwood • • • •

†Profile/Center Panel Details for Raised Panel Doors (RP) as Marked at Left

A – Calistoga Raised Panel (RP)

B – Devonshire Raised Panel (RP)

C – Madison Raised Panel (RP)

D – Venice Raised Panel (RP)

*This door style is a specialty door that is not available with choice of center panel options.

†The center panel of these door styles vary, see drawings in right column.

Profile/center panels details by door style.

300.34 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

213⁄4", 243⁄4"

21⁄2"

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

113⁄4"

113⁄4"

2"

2"

21/24 RHDXA

24"30"36"

One Piece Wood Hoods

Deluxe Wood Hood Style A• See page 300.32 for details.

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Install Field Install

21RHDXA3624 21RHDXA3630 21RHDXA3636 2 V2 IMTS 21RHDXA36MT 21RHDXA4224 21RHDXA4230 21RHDXA4236 2 V3 IMTL 21RHDXA42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Install Field Install

24RHDXA3624 24RHDXA3630 24RHDXA3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24RHDXA36MT 24RHDXA4224 24RHDXA4230 24RHDXA4236 2 V8 IMTL 24RHDXA42MT 24RHDXA4824 24RHDXA4830 24RHDXA4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24RHDXA48MT 24RHDXA5424 24RHDXA5430 24RHDXA5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24RHDXA54MT 24RHDXA6024 24RHDXA6030 24RHDXA6036 3 V14 IMTL 24RHDXA60MT 24RHDXA6624 24RHDXA6630 24RHDXA6636 3 V15 IMTL 24RHDXA66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

Shaded area represents

Metal Trim Kit

300.352015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

213⁄4", 243⁄4"

21⁄2"

113⁄4"

113⁄4"

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

21/24 RHDXB

24"30"36"

One Piece Wood Hoods

Shaded area represents

Metal Trim Kit

Deluxe Wood Hood Style B• See page 300.32 for details.

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Install Field Install

21RHDXB3624 21RHDXB3630 21RHDXB3636 2 V2 IMTS 21RHDXB36MT 21RHDXB4224 21RHDXB4230 21RHDXB4236 2 V3 IMTL 21RHDXB42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Install Field Install

24RHDXB3624 24RHDXB3630 24RHDXB3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24RHDXB36MT 24RHDXB4224 24RHDXB4230 24RHDXB4236 2 V8 IMTL 24RHDXB42MT 24RHDXB4824 24RHDXB4830 24RHDXB4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24RHDXB48MT 24RHDXB5424 24RHDXB5430 24RHDXB5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24RHDXB54MT 24RHDXB6024 24RHDXB6030 24RHDXB6036 3 V14 IMTL 24RHDXB60MT 24RHDXB6624 24RHDXB6630 24RHDXB6636 3 V15 IMTL 24RHDXB66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

300.36 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

Ledge Detail ExampleLedge Detail OptionsSelect and add SKU to deluxe wood hood SKU.

ACSTPLV Arts and Crafts Stepped Cove Light Valance

ASTLV Astragal Light Valance

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hoods with Columns and Corbels, Styles A – F• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished three sides, back is not finished.

• Hood incorporates deluxe panel in upper section. Lower sections vary by style, available with deluxe panel or deluxe arch valance (DAVF) and choice of corbels. Deluxe panel reflects door style specified on order; see deluxe panel information (DWP) in Section 1000 for styling details. Please note center stiles will be 3" in hood applications. See drawings/details on next pages for styling options and corbel availability.

• Includes 3⁄4" thick end panels; matching ends (FHM) available.

• Includes decorative ledge with choice of molding, see options below.

• Center panels of valance (Style A, C, E) are designed to complement styling of door; however please note following:

– Orders in applied molding door styles do not receive applied molding. – Inside profile/center panel varies by door style, see details on following page.

• Interior of hood is finished approximately 6–8" from bottom back edge. Back panel of Style A, C & E is shorter than sides, see drawings on following pages.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Height can be modified in 1⁄4" increments, minimum 24", maximum 36".

• Hood fronts are removable for ease of use in installation and maintenance of venting equipment.

• Metal trim kits available; see page 300.54 for illustration. 20 gauge brushed stainless steel cut to fit exposed edges under wood hood; available installed or as a kit for field installation, see SKUs on pages 300.38-43.

EXAMPLE: 21CLMHOODA3624, IMTS, specifies a 213⁄4" deep, 24" high Deluxe Wood Hood with Style A lower section and factory installed metal trim kit. Specify 21CLMHOODA36MT for field install metal trim kit.

• Vent-A-Hood® blower units are separate SKUs and can be referenced at the end of Section 300. Corresponding blower size information is listed by SKUs on pages 300.38-43.

4", 51⁄2", 7"

Arts and Crafts Stepped Cove Light Valance (ACSTPLV)

Depth of ledge varies based on lower section style.Ledge molding is selected individually; see SKUs at right.

XX

Hood Ledge Depth (X) Page #

Style A 4" 300.38Style C 51⁄2" 300.40Style E 7" 300.42

Hood Ledge Depth (X) Page #

Style B 4" 300.39Style D 51⁄2" 300.41Style F 7" 300.43

DESIGN NOTE

Corbel availability varies by plate ledge depth.

300.372015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood with Columns and CorbelsProfile/Center Panel Details for Valance A, C and E

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat (FP) Reverse Raised (RR) Raised (RP) Beaded (BP)

Bahamas* •

Hudson Falls • • • •

Loxley • • • •

Mission • • • •

Potter’s Mill • • • •

Sonoma • • • •

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat (FP) Reverse Raised (RR) Raised (RP) Beaded (BP)

Brookhill • • • •

Calistoga • • A† •

Dana Pointe • • • •

Devonshire • • B† •

Madison • • C† •

Park Place • • • •

Providence • • • •

Valencia • • • •

Venice • • D† •

Victoria • • • •

Wakefield • • • •

Windwood • • • •

†Profile/Center Panel Details for Raised Panel (RP) Doors as Marked at Left

A – Calistoga Raised Panel (RP)

B – Devonshire Raised Panel (RP)

C – Madison Raised Panel (RP)

D – Venice Raised Panel (RP)

*This door style is a specialty door that is not available with choice of center panel options.

†The center panel of these door styles vary, see drawings in right column.

One Piece Wood Hoods

Profile/center panel details by door style.

300.38 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

21CLMHOODA3624 21CLMHOODA3630 21CLMHOODA3636 2 V2 IMTS 21CLMHOODA36MT 21CLMHOODA4224 21CLMHOODA4230 21CLMHOODA4236 2 V3 IMTL 21CLMHOODA42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

24CLMHOODA3624 24CLMHOODA3630 24CLMHOODA3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24CLMHOODA36MT 24CLMHOODA4224 24CLMHOODA4230 24CLMHOODA4236 2 V8 IMTL 24CLMHOODA42MT 24CLMHOODA4824 24CLMHOODA4830 24CLMHOODA4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24CLMHOODA48MT 24CLMHOODA5424 24CLMHOODA5430 24CLMHOODA5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24CLMHOODA54MT 24CLMHOODA6024 24CLMHOODA6030 24CLMHOODA6036 3 V14 IMTL 24CLMHOODA60MT 24CLMHOODA6624 24CLMHOODA6630 24CLMHOODA6636 3 V15 IMTL 24CLMHOODA66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood Style A, Lower Section – Deluxe Arch Valance Mantel• See page 300.36 for details.

21 3⁄4", 24 3⁄4"

4"

21/24 CLMHOODA, CBLWHTNYSIStyle A lower section shown with Whitney corbels.

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

111⁄4"

2"

111⁄4"

2"

24"30" 36"

WhitneySymphony

Corbel Oak, Maple, Hickory Cherry, Knotty Alder, QS Oak

Symphony Wide Small CBLSYMWSI CBLSYMWSICWhitney Small CBLWHTNYSI CBLWHTNYSIC

Corbel OptionsInclude applicable corbel SKU and add to wood hood SKU. Reference Section 800 for corbel dimensions and species substitutions.

300.392015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

21 3⁄4", 24 3⁄4"

4"

21/24 CLMHOODB, CBLWHTNYSIStyle B lower section shown with Whitney corbels.

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

111⁄4"

111⁄4"

24"30" 36"

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood Style B, Lower Section – Deluxe Mantel• See page 300.36 for details.

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

21CLMHOODB3624 21CLMHOODB3630 21CLMHOODB3636 2 V2 IMTS 21CLMHOODB36MT 21CLMHOODB4224 21CLMHOODB4230 21CLMHOODB4236 2 V3 IMTL 21CLMHOODB42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

24CLMHOODB3624 24CLMHOODB3630 24CLMHOODB3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24CLMHOODB36MT 24CLMHOODB4224 24CLMHOODB4230 24CLMHOODB4236 2 V8 IMTL 24CLMHOODB42MT 24CLMHOODB4824 24CLMHOODB4830 24CLMHOODB4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24CLMHOODB48MT 24CLMHOODB5424 24CLMHOODB5430 24CLMHOODB5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24CLMHOODB54MT 24CLMHOODB6024 24CLMHOODB6030 24CLMHOODB6036 3 V14 IMTL 24CLMHOODB60MT 24CLMHOODB6624 24CLMHOODB6630 24CLMHOODB6636 3 V15 IMTL 24CLMHOODB66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

Corbel Oak, Maple, Hickory Cherry, Knotty Alder, QS Oak

Symphony Wide Small CBLSYMWSI CBLSYMWSICWhitney Small CBLWHTNYSI CBLWHTNYSIC

Corbel OptionsInclude applicable corbel SKU and add to wood hood SKU. Reference Section 800 for corbel dimensions and species substitutions.

WhitneySymphony

300.40 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

21 3⁄4", 24 3⁄4"

51⁄2"

21/24 CLMHOODC, CBLRGLSIStyle C lower section shown with Regal corbels.

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

111⁄4"

2"

111⁄4"

2"

24"30" 36"

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood Style C, Lower Section – Deluxe Arch Valance Mantel• See page 300.36 for details.

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

21CLMHOODC3624 21CLMHOODC3630 21CLMHOODC3636 2 V2 IMTS 21CLMHOODC36MT 21CLMHOODC4224 21CLMHOODC4230 21CLMHOODC4236 2 V3 IMTL 21CLMHOODC42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

24CLMHOODC3624 24CLMHOODC3630 24CLMHOODC3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24CLMHOODC36MT 24CLMHOODC4224 24CLMHOODC4230 24CLMHOODC4236 2 V8 IMTL 24CLMHOODC42MT 24CLMHOODC4824 24CLMHOODC4830 24CLMHOODC4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24CLMHOODC48MT 24CLMHOODC5424 24CLMHOODC5430 24CLMHOODC5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24CLMHOODC54MT 24CLMHOODC6024 24CLMHOODC6030 24CLMHOODC6036 3 V14 IMTL 24CLMHOODC60MT 24CLMHOODC6624 24CLMHOODC6630 24CLMHOODC6636 3 V15 IMTL 24CLMHOODC66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

RegalAmericana

Corbel Oak, Maple, Hickory Cherry, Knotty Alder, QS Oak

Americana Small CBLAMRSI CBLAMRSICRegal Small CBLRGLSI CBLRGLSIC

Corbel OptionsInclude applicable corbel SKU and add to wood hood SKU. Reference Section 800 for corbel dimensions and species substitutions.

300.412015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood Style D, Lower Section – Deluxe Mantel• See page 300.36 for details.

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

21CLMHOODD3624 21CLMHOODD3630 21CLMHOODD3636 2 V2 IMTS 21CLMHOODD36MT 21CLMHOODD4224 21CLMHOODD4230 21CLMHOODD4236 2 V3 IMTL 21CLMHOODD42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

24CLMHOODD3624 24CLMHOODD3630 24CLMHOODD3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24CLMHOODD36MT 24CLMHOODD4224 24CLMHOODD4230 24CLMHOODD4236 2 V8 IMTL 24CLMHOODD42MT 24CLMHOODD4824 24CLMHOODD4830 24CLMHOODD4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24CLMHOODD48MT 24CLMHOODD5424 24CLMHOODD5430 24CLMHOODD5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24CLMHOODD54MT 24CLMHOODD6024 24CLMHOODD6030 24CLMHOODD6036 3 V14 IMTL 24CLMHOODD60MT 24CLMHOODD6624 24CLMHOODD6630 24CLMHOODD6636 3 V15 IMTL 24CLMHOODD66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

213⁄4", 243⁄4"

51⁄2"

21/24 CLMHOODD, CBLRGLSIStyle D lower section shown with Regal corbels.

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

111⁄4"

111⁄4"

24"30" 36"

RegalAmericana

Corbel Oak, Maple, Hickory Cherry, Knotty Alder, QS Oak

Americana Small CBLAMRSI CBLAMRSICRegal Small CBLRGLSI CBLRGLSIC

Corbel OptionsInclude applicable corbel SKU and add to wood hood SKU. Reference Section 800 for corbel dimensions and species substitutions.

300.42 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood Style E, Lower Section – Deluxe Arch Valance Mantel• See page 300.36 for details.

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

21CLMHOODE3624 21CLMHOODE3630 21CLMHOODE3636 2 V2 IMTS 21CLMHOODE36MT 21CLMHOODE4224 21CLMHOODE4230 21CLMHOODE4236 2 V3 IMTL 21CLMHOODE42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

24CLMHOODE3624 24CLMHOODE3630 24CLMHOODE3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24CLMHOODE36MT 24CLMHOODE4224 24CLMHOODE4230 24CLMHOODE4236 2 V8 IMTL 24CLMHOODE42MT 24CLMHOODE4824 24CLMHOODE4830 24CLMHOODE4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24CLMHOODE48MT 24CLMHOODE5424 24CLMHOODE5430 24CLMHOODE5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24CLMHOODE54MT 24CLMHOODE6024 24CLMHOODE6030 24CLMHOODE6036 3 V14 IMTL 24CLMHOODE60MT 24CLMHOODE6624 24CLMHOODE6630 24CLMHOODE6636 3 V15 IMTL 24CLMHOODE66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

213⁄4", 243⁄4"

7"

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

13"

13"

2"

2"

21/24 CLMHOODE, CBLSHKIStyle E lower section shown with Shaker corbels.

24"30" 36"

Scroll

AcanthusAmericana

Vineyard

Corbel Oak, Maple, Hickory Cherry, Knotty Alder, QS Oak

Acanthus Small CBLACSI CBLACSICAmericana Medium CBLAMRMI CBLAMRMICGrape Small CBLGRSI CBLGRSICPlain Small CBLPLSI CBLPLSICScroll Small CBLSHSI CBLSHSICShaker Large CBLSHKI CBLSHKICSherwood Small CBLSHERSI CBLSHERSICVineyard Small CBLVINSI CBLVINSIC

Corbel SelectionsInclude applicable corbel SKU and add to wood hood SKU. Reference Section 800 for corbel dimensions and species substitutions.

GrapePlain

Shaker Sherwood

300.432015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

One Piece Wood Hoods

One Piece Deluxe Wood Hood Style F, Lower Section – Deluxe Mantel• See page 300.36 for details.

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

21CLMHOODF3624 21CLMHOODF3630 21CLMHOODF3636 2 V2 IMTS 21CLMHOODF36MT 21CLMHOODF4224 21CLMHOODF4230 21CLMHOODF4236 2 V3 IMTL 21CLMHOODF42MT

Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT 24" High 30" High 36" High Panels Blower Factory Installed Field Installed

24CLMHOODF3624 24CLMHOODF3630 24CLMHOODF3636 2 V5, V7 IMTS 24CLMHOODF36MT 24CLMHOODF4224 24CLMHOODF4230 24CLMHOODF4236 2 V8 IMTL 24CLMHOODF42MT 24CLMHOODF4824 24CLMHOODF4830 24CLMHOODF4836 2 V9, V11 IMTL 24CLMHOODF48MT 24CLMHOODF5424 24CLMHOODF5430 24CLMHOODF5436 2 V10, V12, V13 IMTL 24CLMHOODF54MT 24CLMHOODF6024 24CLMHOODF6030 24CLMHOODF6036 3 V14 IMTL 24CLMHOODF60MT 24CLMHOODF6624 24CLMHOODF6630 24CLMHOODF6636 3 V15 IMTL 24CLMHOODF66MT

213⁄4" Deep

243⁄4" Deep

213⁄4", 243⁄4"

7"

21/24 CLMHOODF, CBLSHKIStyle F lower section shown with Shaker corbels.

36", 42", 48", 54"

60", 66"

13"

13"

24"30" 36"

Scroll

AcanthusAmericana

Vineyard

Corbel Oak, Maple, Hickory Cherry, Knotty Alder, QS Oak

Acanthus Small CBLACSI CBLACSICAmericana Medium CBLAMRMI CBLAMRMICGrape Small CBLGRSI CBLGRSICPlain Small CBLPLSI CBLPLSICScroll Small CBLSHSI CBLSHSICShaker Large CBLSHKI CBLSHKICSherwood Small CBLSHERSI CBLSHERSICVineyard Small CBLVINSI CBLVINSIC

Corbel OptionsInclude applicable corbel SKU and add to wood hood SKU. Reference Section 800 for corbel dimensions and species substitutions.

GrapePlain

Shaker Sherwood

300.44 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Component Wood Hoods

Wood Hood Component ProgramThis program enables you to create a customized wood hood from our three part system of components which are available in a variety of styles and sizes. Also available are hood liner/blower units from Vent-A-Hood® to complete the function of the hood you design. Follow steps below to order your three part component system. • To determine appropriate SKU choices, see coordinating symbols

below in each step.

• Specify hood width (not including molding projections) in place of ‘__’; this dimension is the same for each component style.

EXAMPLE: 9RHC__ , 21RHTR__ , 21RHM__ (coordinating symbols)

Order as 9RHC36, 21RHTR36, 21RHM36 or 9RHC42, 21RHTR42, 21RHM42 based on width requirement.

• Refer to following pages for complete specifications

1: Top ComponentChimney

2: Middle ComponentTransition

3: Bottom ComponentMantel

Step 1: Choose Chimney Step 2: Choose Transition Step 3: Choose Mantel

Plain

9RHC__

12RHC__

Plain

21RHTR__

24RHTR__

OR

Wainscot

21RHTWC__

24RHTWC__

Plain OR Plain w/Onlay21RHM__

24RHM__

Deluxe21RHMDX__

24RHMDX__

Deluxe Arch21RHDAVF__

24RHDAVF__

Wainscot

9RHCW__

12RHCW__

Small Deluxe

9RHSDX__

12RHSDX__

Angled Front Deluxe

21RHTDXAF__

24RHTDXAF__

Large Deluxe

21RHSDX__

24RHSDX__

Straight Front Deluxe

21RHTDX__

24RHTDX__

300.452015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood Hoods, Chimney Components

Plain, 12" High

• Last two numbers in SKU indicate width of coordinating transition components.

• 3⁄4" thick end panels and front.

• Minimum height 4", maximum 24".

For use with 21" deep transition components with angled sides/front.

9" Deep Face Width

9RHC36 12" 9RHC42 18"

For use with 24" deep transition components with angled sides/front.

12" Deep Face Width

12RHC36 12" 12RHC42 18" 12RHC48 24" 12RHC54 30"

Wainscot, 12" High

• Last two numbers in SKU indicate width of coordinating transition components.

• 3⁄8" thick tongue and groove wainscot material applied to 3⁄4" thick plywood, finished on front and sides.

• Minimum height 4", maximum 24".

For use with 21" deep transition components with angled sides/front.

9" Deep Face Width

9RHCWC36 131⁄4" 9RHCWC42 191⁄4"

For use with 24" deep transition components with angled sides/front.

12" Deep Face Width

12RHCWC36 131⁄4" 12RHCWC42 191⁄4" 12RHCWC48 251⁄4" 12RHCWC54 311⁄4"

Deluxe, 12" High

For use with 21" deep angled front deluxe transition components.

9" Deep Deluxe Panels

9RHSDX30 2 9RHSDX36 2 9RHSDX42 2

For use with 24" deep angled front deluxe transition components.

12" Deep Deluxe Panels

12RHSDX30 2 12RHSDX36 2 12RHSDX42 2 12RHSDX48 3 12RHSDX54 3

For use with 21" deep straight deluxe transition components.

21" Deep Deluxe Panels

21RHSDX30 2 21RHSDX36 2 21RHSDX42 2

For use with 24" deep straight deluxe transition components.

24" Deep Deluxe Panels

24RHSDX30 2 24RHSDX36 2 24RHSDX42 2 24RHSDX48 3 24RHSDX54 3

9" or 12" Depth

21" or 24" Depth

• Last two numbers in SKU indicate face width. Coordinate to associated components.

• 3⁄4" thick end panels with door style specific deluxe front panel. Reference rules for wall deluxe panels (DWP), Section 1000.

• Minimum height 12", maximum 24".

Coordinating Transition Components

Coordinating Transition Components

Coordinating Transition Components

Chimney Components• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished three sides, back is not finished.

• Height modification available; see below for minimums/maximums.

300.46 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood Hoods, Transition Components

Deluxe Transitions, Angled and Straight Front, 191⁄4" High

• Includes 3⁄4" thick end panels and door style specific deluxe front panel. See Section 1000 Deluxe Wall Panels (DWP) for details/styling variations pertaining to deluxe panels.

• Angled front units: Modifications not available.

• Straight front units: Height can be modified in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 131⁄2", maximum 24".

C1

D

A

B

C2

D

A

Transition Components• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished three sides, back is not finished.

• Transition component not intended to house blower unit. Mantel component must be used for housing blower unit.

• Transition components feature removable fronts for easier installation and maintenance of venting equipment.

• Options for two styles of 3⁄4" thick profile solid stock (PSS) molding are available for top and bottom of transition; profile must be specified. See below for details.

Profile Molding SelectionTransition Elevation

C

D

A

B

C

D

A

B B

Angled Transitions, Plain and Wainscot, 191⁄4" High

• Angled vertical front edges include trim molding.

• Plain units include 1⁄2" thick finished material on both sides and face.

• Wainscot units include 3⁄8" thick tongue and groove solid wainscot staves applied to 1⁄2" thick substrate; finished both sides and face.

• Modifications not available.

Plain Wainscot A B C D

21RHTR36 21RHTWC36 143⁄4" 40" 101⁄2" 23" 21RHTR42 21RHTWC42 203⁄4" 46" 101⁄2" 23"

Plain Wainscot A B C D

24RHTR36 24RHTWC36 143⁄4" 40" 131⁄2" 26"24RHTR42 24RHTWC42 203⁄4" 46" 131⁄2" 26"

24RHTR48 24RHTWC48 263⁄4" 52" 131⁄2" 26" 24RHTR54 24RHTWC54 323⁄4" 58" 131⁄2" 26"

For use with 21" deep coordinating components.

For use with 24" deep coordinating components.

For use with 21" deep coordinating components.

For use with 24" deep coordinating components.

3⁄4" thick profile moldings:PSSE or PSSF

Select and add profile molding SKU to transition SKU.

PSSE PSSF

Mantel ComponentsCoordinating mantel components for all transitions on this page.

Deluxe Angled Straight Panels A B C1 C2 D

21RHTDXAF30 21RHTDX30 2 311⁄2" 34" 93⁄4" 213⁄4" 23" 21RHTDXAF36 21RHTDX36 2 371⁄2" 40" 93⁄4" 213⁄4" 23" 21RHTDXAF42 21RHTDX42 2 431⁄2" 46" 93⁄4" 213⁄4" 23"

Deluxe Angled Straight Panels A B C1 C2 D

24RHTDXAF30 24RHTDX30 2 311⁄2" 34" 123⁄4" 243⁄4" 26" 24RHTDXAF36 24RHTDX36 2 371⁄2" 40" 123⁄4" 243⁄4" 26" 24RHTDXAF42 24RHTDX42 2 431⁄2" 46" 123⁄4" 243⁄4" 26" 24RHTDXAF48 24RHTDX48 3 491⁄2" 52" 123⁄4" 243⁄4" 26" 24RHTDXAF54 24RHTDX54 3 551⁄2" 58" 123⁄4" 243⁄4" 26"

300.472015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood Hoods, Mantel Components

Deluxe Mantel, 10" High

• Includes matching finished interior, top molding and 3⁄4" thick end panels with door style specific deluxe front panel. Reference rules for wall deluxe panels (DWP), Section 1000.

• When planning, adjacent cabinets cannot be installed flush to ends of mantel as molding protrudes past end panels. Refer to dimension A for width including molding projection.

• Crown molding styles must be specified. See below for details.

For use with 21" deep coordinating components. Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT Panels A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

21RHMDX30 2 321⁄2" 30" 221⁄4" 21" V1 IMTS 21RHMDXMT30 21RHMDX36 2 381⁄2" 36" 221⁄4" 21" V2 IMTS 21RHMDXMT36 21RHMDX42 2 441⁄2" 42" 221⁄4" 21" V3 IMTL 21RHMDXMT42

For use with 24" deep coordinating components. Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT Panels A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

24RHMDX30 2 321⁄2" 30" 251⁄4" 24" V4,V6 IMTS 24RHMDXMT30 24RHMDX36 2 381⁄2" 36" 251⁄4" 24" V5,V7 IMTS 24RHMDXMT36 24RHMDX42 2 441⁄2" 42" 251⁄4" 24" V8 IMTL 24RHMDXMT42 24RHMDX48 3 501⁄2" 48" 251⁄4" 24" V9,V11 IMTL 24RHMDXMT48 24RHMDX54 3 561⁄2" 54" 251⁄4" 24" V10,V12,V13 IMTL 24RHMDXMT54

D

C

A

B

Plain Mantel, 103⁄4" High

• Includes matching finished interior, top and bottom molding and 3⁄4" thick end panels and front panel.

• Profile solid stock (PSS) molding and crown molding styles must be specified. See below right for details.

• When planning, adjacent cabinets cannot be installed flush to ends of mantel as moldings protrude past end panels. Refer to dimension B for overall width including molding projection.

• Option to add one piece onlays available, see below.

For use with 21" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

21RHM30 321⁄2" 34" 221⁄4" 23" V1 IMTS 21RHMMT3021RHM36 381⁄2" 40" 221⁄4" 23" V2 IMTS 21RHMMT36

21RHM42 441⁄2" 46" 221⁄4" 23" V3 IMTL 21RHMMT42

For use with 24" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

24RHM30 321⁄2" 34" 251⁄4" 26" V4,V6 IMTS 24RHMMT30 24RHM36 381⁄2" 40" 251⁄4" 26" V5,V7 IMTS 24RHMMT36 24RHM42 441⁄2" 46" 251⁄4" 26" V8 IMTL 24RHMMT42 24RHM48 501⁄2" 52" 251⁄4" 26" V9,V11 IMTL 24RHMMT48 24RHM54 561⁄2" 58" 251⁄4" 26" V10,V12,V13 IMTL 24RHMMT54

PSSF (3⁄4")

EXAMPLE: Molding Profile

SMCRN (11⁄4")

SMCRN (11⁄4")

D

C

A

B

71⁄2"

Onlay Options

To add onlay to plain mantel, select from onlays shown below and include appropriate modification code on order.

NOTE: Add "C" to end of SKU for orders in Cherry, Knotty Alder and QS Oak.

Grape Onlay

CRVGRI

Acanthus Onlay

CRVACI

Shell Onlay

CRVSHI

Vineyard Onlay

CRVVINSI Small CRVVINMI Med CRVVINLI* Large

Sherwood Onlay

CRVSHERSI Small CRVSHERMI Med CRVSHERLI* Large

Chateau Onlay

CRVCHATSI Small CRVCHATMI Med CRVCHATLI* Large

*Large onlays not available on plain mantel SKUs ending in 30.

Crown Profile Selection – Applicable to Plain and Deluxe Mantel Select and add crown profile SKU to mantel SKU.

Profile Molding Selection – Applicable to Plain MantelSelect and add a profile molding SKU to mantel SKU.

See below right for molding options.

EXAMPLE: Molding Profile

SMCRN (11⁄4")

See below for molding options.

PSSE PSSF

ACSTPCRNArts and Crafts Small Crown

SMCRN Small Crown

Mantel Components• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished three sides, back is not finished.

• Reference Vent-A-Hood® blowers at end of wood hood section and column below for corresponding blower size information.

• Metal trim kits available; see page 300.54 for illustration. 20 gauge brushed stainless steel cut to fit exposed edges under mantel; available installed or as a kit for field installation, see chart for SKUs.

• Modifications other than those listed are not available.

300.48 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Woods Hoods, Mantel Components

Deluxe Arch Valance Mantel, 103⁄4" High

For use with 21" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

21RHDAVF36 383⁄8" 36" 223⁄16" 21" V2 IMTS 21RHDAVFMT36 21RHDAVF42 443⁄8" 42" 223⁄16" 21" V3 IMTL 21RHDAVFMT42

For use with 24" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

24RHDAVF36 383⁄8" 36" 253⁄16" 24" V5, V7 IMTS 24RHDAVFMT36 24RHDAVF42 443⁄8" 42" 253⁄16" 24" V8 IMTL 24RHDAVFMT42 24RHDAVF48 503⁄8" 48" 253⁄16" 24" V9, V11 IMTL 24RHDAVFMT48 24RHDAVF54 563⁄8" 54" 253⁄16" 24" V10, V12,V13 IMTL 24RHDAVFMT54

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished three sides, back is not finished.

• Includes matching finished interior, top molding and 3⁄4" thick end panels with deluxe arch valance front (DAVF).

• Center panels of deluxe arch valance are designed to complement styling of deluxe panel of door style specified on order; however, please note following: – Inside profile/center panel varies by door style, see details at right. – Orders in applied molding door styles do not receive applied molding.

• When planning, adjacent cabinets cannot be installed flush to ends of mantel as molding protrudes past end panels. Refer to dimension A for overall width including molding projection.

• Crown molding styles must be specified. See below for details.

• Reference Vent-A-Hood® blowers at end of wood hood section and column above for corresponding blower size information.

• Metal trim kits available; see page 300.54 for illustration. 20 gauge brushed stainless steel cut to fit exposed edges under mantel; available installed or as a kit for field installation, see chart for SKUs.

• No other modifications available.

Crown Profile SelectionSelect and add crown profile SKU to mantel SKU.

ACSTPCRNArts and Crafts Small Crown

SMCRN Small Crown

D

C

EXAMPLE: Molding Profile

SMCRN (11⁄4")

See right for molding options

A

B 2"

103⁄4"

Profile/Center Panel Details

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat Reverse Raised Raised Beaded

Bahamas* •

Hudson Falls • • • •

Loxley • • • •

Mission • • • •

Potter’s Mill • • • •

Sonoma • • • •

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door StyleFlat Reverse

Raised Raised Beaded

Brookhill • • • •

Calistoga • • A† •

Dana Pointe • • • •

Devonshire • • B† •

Madison • • C† •

Park Place • • • •

Providence • • • •

Valencia • • • •

Venice • • D† •

Victoria • • • •

Wakefield • • • •

Windwood • • • •

†Raised Center Panel/Profile Details for RP Doors as Marked Above

A B C D

*This door style is a specialty door that is not available with choice of center panel options.

†The center panel of these door styles vary, see drawings below.

300.492015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Component Peninsula Wood Hoods

Step 1: Choose Chimney Step 2: Choose Transition Step 3: Choose Mantel

Plain

12PRHC__

15PRHC__

Plain

27PRHTR__

30PRHTR__

OR

Wainscot

27PRHTWC__

30PRHTWC__

Plain OR Plain w/Onlay27PRHM__

30PRHM__

Deluxe27PRHMDX__

30PRHMDX__

Deluxe Arch27PRHDAVF__

30PRHDAVF__

Wainscot

12PRHCW__

15PRHCW__

Small Deluxe

12PRHSDX__

15PRHSDX__

Angled Front Deluxe

27PRHTDXAF__

30PRHTDXAF__

Large Deluxe

27PRHSDX__

30PRHSDX__

Straight Front Deluxe

27PRHTDX__

30PRHTDX__

Peninsula Wood Hood Component ProgramThis program enables you to create a customized peninsula wood hood from our three part system of components which are available in a variety of styles and sizes. Also available are hood liner/blower units from Vent-A-Hood® to complete the function of the hood you design.

Follow steps below to order your three part component system.

• To determine appropriate SKU choices, see coordinating symbols below in each step.

• Specify hood width (not including molding projections) in place of ‘__’; this dimension is the same for each component style.

EXAMPLE: 12PRHC__ , 27PRHTR__ , 27PRHM__ (coordinating symbols)

Order as 12PRHC36, 27PRHTR36, 27PRHM36 or 12PRHC42, 27PRHTR42, 27PRHM42 based on width requirement.

• Refer to following pages for complete specifications

1: Top ComponentChimney

2: Middle ComponentTransition

3: Bottom ComponentMantel

300.50 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Peninsula Wood Hoods, Chimney Components

Coordinating Transition Components

Plain Chimney, 18" High

• Last two numbers in SKU indicate width of coordinating transition components.

• 3⁄4" thick end panels.

• Minimum height 4", maximum 24".

For use with 27" deep transition components with angled sides/front/back.

121⁄2" Deep Face Width

12PRHC36 211⁄2" 12PRHC42 271⁄2"

For use with 30" deep transition components with angled sides/front/back.

151⁄2" Deep Face Width

15PRHC48 331⁄2" 15PRHC54 391⁄2"

Wainscot Chimney, 18" High

• Last two numbers in SKU indicate width of coordinating transition components.

• 3⁄8" thick tongue and groove wainscot material applied to 3⁄4" thick plywood, finished on front/back and sides.

• Minimum height 4", maximum 24".

For use with 27" deep transition components with angled sides/front/back.

131⁄4" Deep Face Width

12PRHCWC36 221⁄4" 12PRHCWC42 281⁄4"

For use with 30" deep transition components with angled sides/front/back.

161⁄4" Deep Face Width

15PRHCWC48 341⁄4" 15PRHCWC54 401⁄4"

Deluxe Chimney, 18" High

For use with 27" deep deluxe angled front/back transition components.

Deluxe 121⁄2" Deep Panels Face Width

12PRHSDX36 2 373⁄4" 12PRHSDX42 2 433⁄4"

For use with 30" deep deluxe angled front/back transition components.

Deluxe 151⁄2" Deep Panels Face Width

15PRHSDX48 3 493⁄4" 15PRHSDX54 3 553⁄4"

For use with 27" deep deluxe straight front transition components.

Deluxe 283⁄4" Deep Panels Face Width

27PRHSDX36 2 373⁄4" 27PRHSDX42 2 433⁄4"

For use with 30" deep deluxe straight front transition components.

Deluxe 313⁄4" Deep Panels Face Width

30PRHSDX48 3 493⁄4" 30PRHSDX54 3 553⁄4"

• Last two numbers in SKU indicate width of coordinating transition components.

• 3⁄4" thick end panels with door style specific deluxe front and back panel. Reference rules for wall deluxe panels (DWP), Section 1000.

• Minimum height 12", maximum 24".

Coordinating Transition Components

Chimney Components• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished all four sides.

• Height modifications available; see below for minimums/maximums.

Coordinating Transition Components

300.512015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Peninsula Wood Hoods, Transition Components

C1

A

D1

B

C2

A

D2

B

Angled Transitions, Plain and Wainscot, 131⁄4" High

C

A

D

B

C

A

D

B

Deluxe Transitions, Angled and Straight Front/Back, 131⁄4" High

• Includes 3⁄4" thick end panels and door style specific deluxe front and back panel. See Section 1000 Deluxe Wall Panels (DWP) for details/styling variations pertaining to deluxe panels.

• Angled front units: Modifications not available.

• Straight front units: Height can be modified in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 131⁄2", maximum 24".

Deluxe Angled Straight Panels A B C1 C2 D1 D2

27PRHTDXAF36 27PRHTDX36 2 413⁄4" 323⁄4" 391⁄4" 393⁄4" 143⁄8" 303⁄4" 27PRHTDXAF42 27PRHTDX42 2 473⁄4" 323⁄4" 451⁄4" 453⁄4" 143⁄8" 303⁄4"

• Angled vertical front edges include trim molding.

• Plain units include 1⁄2" thick finished material on both sides and faces.

• Wainscot units include 3⁄8" thick tongue and groove solid wainscot staves applied to 1⁄2" thick substrate; finished both sides and faces.

• Modifications not available.

Plain Wainscot A B C D

27PRHTR36 27PRHTWC36 413⁄4" 323⁄4" 243⁄4" 153⁄4" 27PRHTR42 27PRHTWC42 473⁄4" 323⁄4" 303⁄4" 153⁄4"

Plain Wainscot A B C D

30PRHTR48 30PRHTWC48 533⁄4" 353⁄4" 363⁄4" 183⁄4"30PRHTR54 30PRHTWC54 593⁄4" 353⁄4" 423⁄4" 183⁄4"

For use with 27" deep coordinating components.

For use with 30" deep coordinating components.

For use with 27" deep coordinating components.

For use with 30" deep coordinating components.

Deluxe Angled Straight Panels A B C1 C2 D1 D2

30PRHTDXAF48 30PRHTDX48 3 533⁄4" 353⁄4" 511⁄4" 513⁄4" 173⁄8" 333⁄4" 30PRHTDXAF54 30PRHTDX54 3 593⁄4" 353⁄4" 571⁄4" 573⁄4" 173⁄8" 333⁄4"

Transition Components• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished all four sides.

• Transition component not intended to house blower unit. Mantel component must be used for housing blower unit.

• Transition components feature removable fronts for easier installation and maintenance of venting equipment.

• Options for two styles of 3⁄4" thick profile solid stock (PSS) molding are available for top and bottom of transition; profile must be specified. See below for details.

Profile Molding SelectionTransition Elevation

3⁄4" thick profile moldings:PSSE or PSSF

Select and add profile molding SKU to transition SKU.

PSSE PSSF

Mantel ComponentsCoordinating mantel components for all transitions on this page.

300.52 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Peninsula Wood Hoods, Mantel Components

Deluxe Mantel, 10" High

• Includes matching finished interior, top molding and 3⁄4" thick end panels with door style specific deluxe front and back panels. Reference rules for wall deluxe panels (DWP), Section 1000.

• When planning, adjacent cabinets cannot be installed flush to ends of mantel as molding protrudes past end panels. Refer to dimension C for width including molding projection.

• Crown molding must be specified. See below for details.

For use with 27" deep coordinating components. Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT Panels A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

27PRHMDX36 2 373⁄4" 283⁄4" 40" 31" PV1 IMTSP 27PRHMDXMT36 27PRHMDX42 2 433⁄4" 283⁄4" 46" 31" PV2 IMTLP 27PRHMDXMT42

For use with 30" deep coordinating components. Deluxe Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT Panels A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

30PRHMDX48 3 493⁄4" 313⁄4" 52" 34" PV3 IMTLP 30PRHMDXMT48 30PRHMDX54 3 553⁄4" 313⁄4" 58" 34" PV4 IMTLP 30PRHMDXMT54

A

CD

B

Plain Mantel, 103⁄4" High

• Includes matching finished interior, top and bottom molding and 3⁄4" thick end panels and front/back panels.

• When planning, adjacent cabinets cannot be installed flush to ends of mantel as moldings protrude past end panels. Refer to dimension A for overall width including molding projection.

• Profile solid stock (PSS) molding and crown molding must be specified. See below right for details.

• Option to add one piece onlay available, see below.

For use with 27" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

27PRHM36 413⁄4" 323⁄4" 401⁄8" 311⁄8" PV1 IMTSP 27PRHMMT36 27PRHM42 473⁄4" 323⁄4" 461⁄8" 311⁄8" PV2 IMTLP 27PRHMMT42

For use with 30" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

30PRHM48 533⁄4" 353⁄4" 521⁄8" 341⁄8" PV3 IMTLP 30PRHMMT48 30PRHM54 593⁄4" 353⁄4" 581⁄8" 341⁄8" PV4 IMTLP 30PRHMMT54

A

CD

BPSSF (3⁄4")

Molding Profile

SMCRN (11⁄4")

SMCRN (11⁄4")

See below right for molding options.

Molding Profile

SMCRN (11⁄4")

See below for molding options.

Onlay Options

To add onlay to peninsula plain mantel, select from onlays shown below and include appropriate modification code on order. Specify 1 or 2 in place of ‘__’ in code below. 1 specifies one onlay installed on long edge (reversible); 2 specifies two onlays installed (front and back).

NOTE: Add "C" to end of SKU for orders in Cherry, Knotty Alder and QS Oak.

Grape Onlay

__CRVGRI

Acanthus Onlay

__CRVACI

Shell Onlay

__CRVSHI

Vineyard Onlay

__CRVVINSI Small __CRVVINMI Med __CRVVINLI Large

Sherwood Onlay

__CRVSHERSI Small __CRVSHERMI Med __CRVSHERLI Large

Chateau Onlay

__CRVCHATSI Small __CRVCHATMI Med __CRVCHATLI Large

Crown Profile Selection – Applicable to Plain and Deluxe Mantel Select and add crown profile SKU to mantel SKU.

Profile Molding Selection – Applicable to Plain MantelSelect and add profile molding SKU to mantel SKU.

PSSE PSSF

ACSTPCRNArts and Crafts Small Crown

SMCRN Small Crown

Mantel Components• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished all four sides.

• Reference Vent-A-Hood® blowers at the end of wood hood section and column below for corresponding blower size information.

• Metal trim kits available; see page 300.54 for illustration. 20 gauge brushed stainless steel cut to fit exposed edges under mantel; available installed or as a kit for field installation, see chart for SKUs.

• Modifications, other than those listed, are not available.

300.532015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Peninsula Wood Hoods, Mantel Components

Deluxe Arch Valance Mantel, 103⁄4" High

For use with 27" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

27PRHDAVF36 373⁄4" 283⁄4" 401⁄8" 311⁄8" PV1 IMTSP 27PRHDAVFMT36 27PRHDAVF42 433⁄4" 283⁄4" 461⁄8" 311⁄8" PV2 IMTLP 27PRHDAVFMT42

For use with 30" deep coordinating components. Vent-A-Hood® METAL TRIM KIT

A B C D Blower Factory Install Field Install

30PRHDAVF48 493⁄4" 313⁄4" 521⁄8" 341⁄8" PV3 IMTLP 30PRHDAVFMT48 30PRHDAVF54 553⁄4" 313⁄4" 581⁄8" 341⁄8" PV4 IMTLP 30PRHDAVFMT54

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished all four sides.

• Includes matching finished interior, top molding and 3⁄4" thick end panels with deluxe arch valance (DAVF) front/back.

• Center panels of deluxe arch valance are designed to complement styling of deluxe panel of door style specified on order; however, please note following: – Inside profile/center panel varies by door style, see details at right. – Orders in applied molding door styles do not receive applied molding.

• When planning, adjacent cabinets cannot be installed flush to ends of mantel as molding protrudes past end panels. Refer to dimension C for overall width including molding projection.

• Crown molding styles must be specified. See below for details.

• Reference Vent-A-Hood® blowers at end of wood hood section and column above for corresponding blower size information.

• Metal trim kits available; see page 300.54 for illustration. 20 gauge brushed stainless steel cut to fit exposed areas under mantel; available installed or as a kit for field installation, see chart for SKUs.

• No other modifications available.

EXAMPLE: Molding Profile

SMCRN (11⁄4")

See below for molding options.

B

DC

A

Crown Profile SelectionSelect and add crown profile SKU to mantel SKU.

ACSTPCRNArts and Crafts Small Crown

SMCRN Small Crown

C

A 2"

103⁄4"

Profile/Center Panel Details

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat Reverse Raised Raised Beaded

Bahamas* •

Hudson Falls • • • •

Loxley • • • •

Mission • • • •

Potter’s Mill • • • •

Sonoma • • • •

CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat Reverse Raised Raised Beaded

Brookhill • • • •

Calistoga • • A† •

Dana Pointe • • • •

Devonshire • • B† •

Madison • • C† •

Park Place • • • •

Providence • • • •

Valencia • • • •

Venice • • D† •

Victoria • • • •

Wakefield • • • •

Windwood • • • •

†Raised Center Panel/Profile Details for RP Doors as Marked Above

A B C D

*This door style is a specialty door that is not available with choice of center panel options.

†The center panel of these door styles vary, see drawings below.

300.54 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Metal Trim Kits

Applicable to One Piece Wood Hoods on pages 300.32-43. Applicable to Mantel Components on pages 300.47-48.

Applicable to Peninsula Mantel Components on pages 300.52-53.

Metal Trim Kits20 gauge brushed stainless steel cut to fit exposed edges under wood hood; available installed or as a kit for field installation.

Shaded area represents Metal

Trim Kit

Shaded area represents Metal

Trim Kit

Shaded area represents Metal

Trim Kit

Shaded area represents Metal

Trim Kit

300.552015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units & Stainless Steel Range Hoods – Wall Mount

Vent-A-Hood® – General InformationVent-A-Hood ventilation systems require external venting; ductwork is not included with unit. Smooth, galvanized ductwork should be used; do not use flexible ductwork. All units use halogen lighting and are uniquely constructed with the Magic LungTM ventilation system.

Vent-A-Hood’s Magic LungTM Technology

A patented system with the following features:

Quiet. Turn on a Vent-A-Hood and you’ll hear only a whisper of air movement because the Magic Lung system provides the quietest ventilation available, see sones rating on next page. Vent-A-Hoods feature SensaSource (see below). With SensaSource, when full blower power is not needed, you can lower blower speed for even quieter operation.

Efficient. Vent-A-Hood canopy traps all cooking contaminants, then the powerful Magic Lung blower uses centrifugal filtration to separate cooking grease from the air stream. Because it doesn’t need to pull air through a filter—it is the most efficient kitchen ventilation available today.

Easy cleaning. Magic Lung housing snaps apart for easy cleaning in the dishwasher or with warm soapy water. Moreover, Magic Lung is the only ventilation system that collects grease in an easily cleaned housing rather than in hard to reach areas behind a mesh or baffle filter. Motor and wiring are enclosed in sealed housing; grease does not infiltrate this area so no cleaning is required.

Fire safe. Magic Lung is the only residential ventilation system that prevents fire from spreading to the rest of the home. Constant speed creates centrifugal pressure that prevents fire from entering ductwork. SensaSource increases blower speed to its normal level as needed to maintain this safety feature.

SensaSource

An integrated motor and heat sensor that perfectly balances extra-quiet operation with full power performance and safety. During light cooking, motor operates at low speed. When temperature inside the Vent-A-Hood rises to unacceptable levels – or a range fire occurs – the heat sensor switches motor to high speed. Motor returns to quiet operation when temperature is safely lowered.

The purpose of any kitchen ventilation system is to completely remove cooking contaminants of heat, steam, grease, smoke, odors and hazardous gases before they have a chance to mix with air in the rest of the home. Please follow all specifications within this section during the planning stage, prior to ordering. The BTU output of the cooking appliance may require a larger blower than anticipated, resulting in an adjustment to the size of hood and adjacent cabinets. Additionally, cooking appliance information directly relates to placement of hood/liner. Please verify all information in conjunction with local codes.

Begin planning by first identifying the following:

What type of cooking equipment is involved?• A standard gas appliance.• A standard electric appliance.• A professional-style gas appliance.

The second step is to arrive at physical specifications relating to performance.

Width

• A hood/liner should never be narrower than the appliance it is venting.• Hoods/liners should overlap standard appliances by 3"-6" on each side.• 3" overlap on each side is required for island/peninsula hoods/liners.

Depth

• Hoods/liners should be deep enough to fully cover all burners.• Wall mount hoods/liners should be 24" deep for standard appliances

and most professional-style appliances. A 27" depth is required for some professional-style appliances.

Proximity

• Hoods/liners are required to be mounted at a specified distance above cooking surface. Refer to appliance specifications and hood/liner specifications on following pages for proper placement.

Make-up Air

• Air is drawn from the home in many ways, including fireplaces, bath fans, ceiling fans, kitchen ventilation etc., creating potential for air pressure inside the house to become significantly less than outside the house (negative pressure). These two pressure levels will attempt to equalize, with air infiltrating into the home via the easiest pathway possible. In today’s tighter homes, the pressure may equalize by backdrafting water heater flues and fireplace chimneys.

• Backdrafting is a potentially dangerous situation that can be avoided by replacing air, removed from the home, via a safe pathway from the outside (make-up air). A hood/liner may perform poorly if it is starved of air to exhaust due to inadequate make-up air. This prevents cooking contaminants from being completely exhausted to the outside. Present your appliance and ventilation choice to a qualified HVAC professional who can determine how much, if any, make-up air is needed.

Blower Configuration

• The recommendations for selecting your blower are shown in the table on following page.

DESIGN NOTE

300.56 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units and Range Hoods

* Heavy usage on a standard appliance is defined as 3 to 4 burners frequently in use, canning, wok cooking, frying, grill/griddle in cooktop.* Heavy usage on a professional appliance is defined by the application itself and the customers cooking practices. To help with decisions about blower capacity, a good rule of thumb is that a single, 300 CFM Magic Lung® blower will handle up to 20,000 BTU.† Because the Magic Lung™ blower uses centrifugal filtration rather than conventional baffle or mesh filters, the Magic Lung™ blower can handle cooking equipment with higher cubic feet per minute (CFM) requirements and can deliver equivalent CFM much more efficiently than other filtration systems. When comparing Magic Lung™ with blower units made by other manufacturers, use the "Equivalent CFM".

* Add .5 amp for each halogen bulb.

• V11, V12 and PRH18-3xx: Model B100 and B200.

• V13, V14, V15 and PRH18-4xx: Model B200 (Two).

Electrical Specifications for Blower Units

Blower Configurations – Blower/Liner Units and Range Hoods

Vent-A-Hood® Blower Model Volts Amps HZ Minimum Round

Duct Size

WALL MOUNT

V1 - V5, PRH18-1xx

B100 Single 115 1.5* 60 6" (or equivalent)

WALL MOUNT

V6 - V10,PRH18-2xx

B200 Dual 115 2.9* 60 8" (or equivalent)

ISLAND/ PENINSULA

PV1 - PV2T200 Dual 115 2.9* 60 8" (or equivalent)

ISLAND/ PENINSULA

PV3 - PV4T400 Cluster 115 5.8* 60 12" (or equivalent)

Vent-A-Hood® Blower

Cooking Equipment Type

Usages L=Light M=Medium

H=Heavy*

Multi-Burner Cooktop Rating

BBQ, Wok, or Griddle

Vent-A-Hood® Magic Lung® Blower(s)

Equivalent CFM†

Sones at High Speed

WALL MOUNT

V1 - V5, PRH18-1xx

Standard GasStandard Electric

L L/M

20,000 - 30,000 BTU12,000 Watts

20,000 BTU12,000 Watts

300 CFM (B100 single blower)

450 CFM 5.4

WALL MOUNT

V6 - V10,PRH18-2xx

Standard GasStandard Electric

30" Pro-Style36" Pro-Style

M/HH

L/ML

40,000 - 60,000 BTU24,000 Watts

40,000 BTU24,000 Watts

600 CFM(B200 dual blower)

900 CFM 6.5

WALL MOUNT

V11 - V12,PRH18-3xx

36" Pro-Style48" Pro-Style

M/HL/M

60,000 - 90,000 BTU36,000 Watts

60,000 BTU36,000 Watts

900 CFM (B100 single blower and

B200 dual blower)1350 CFM 6.3

WALL MOUNT

V13 - V15,PRH18-4xx

48" Pro-Style60" Pro-Style

HAll

80,000 - 120,000 BTU48,000 Watts

80,000 BTU48,000 Watts

1200 CFM (Two B200 dual

blowers)1800 CFM 6.6

ISLAND/ PENINSULA

PV1 - PV2

Standard GasStandard Electric

30" Pro-Style36" Pro-Style

AllAllL/M

L

40,000 - 60,000 BTU24,000 Watts

40,000 BTU24,000 Watts

550 CFM(T200 dual blower)

900 CFM 6.0

ISLAND/

PENINSULA

PV3 - PV4

36" Pro-Style48" - 60"Pro-Style

M/HAll

80,000 - 120,000 BTU48,000 Watts

80,000 BTU48,000 Watts

1100 CFM(T400 cluster blower)

1800 CFM 6.4

300.572015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units• See pages 300.55–56 for general information, blower configuration and electrical specifications.

• See page 300.62 for optional Vent-A-Hood® accessories.

• Includes 50 watt halogen lights with high-low settings.

• Liner is constructed of stainless steel.

Vent-A-Hood® # of Halogen Blower/Liner Code SKU Bottom Width Top Width Bottom Depth CFM Equivalent CFM* Lights (50 Watt)

V1 RHLNR3021 283⁄8" 223⁄8" 191⁄4" 300 450 2V2 RHLNR3621 343⁄8" 283⁄8" 191⁄4" 300 450 2V3 RHLNR4221 403⁄8" 343⁄8" 191⁄4" 300 450 2V4 RHLNR3024 283⁄8" 223⁄8" 221⁄2" 300 450 2V5 RHLNR3624 343⁄8" 283⁄8" 221⁄2" 300 450 2V6 RHLNR3024DB 283⁄8" 223⁄8" 221⁄2" 600 900 2V7 RHLNR3624DB 343⁄8" 283⁄8" 221⁄2" 600 900 2V8 RHLNR4224 403⁄8" 343⁄8" 221⁄2" 600 900 2V9 RHLNR4824 463⁄8" 403⁄8" 221⁄2" 600 900 3V10 RHLNR5424 523⁄8" 463⁄8" 221⁄2" 600 900 3

*Because the Magic Lung™ blower uses centrifugal filtration rather than conventional baffle or mesh filters, the Magic Lung™ blower can handle cooking equipment with higher cubic feet per minute (CFM) requirements and can deliver equivalent CFM much more efficiently than other filtration systems. When comparing Magic Lung™ with blower units made by other manufacturers, use the "Equivalent CFM".

300 CFM Blower (B100 single blower)

• 300 cfm, fire safe, single blower system, includes two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motor with centrifugal ‘squirrel cage’.

Side View of Liner

191⁄4" or 221⁄2"

12"

12"

3"

Wall Side

Electrical

Centerline of Hood

Vent Hole

Intended for 6"Round Duct

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 27" maximum for V1-V3; 30" maximum for V4-V5.

Top View

31⁄4"

51⁄4"

13⁄8"13⁄4"

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Wall Side

Electrical

Vent Holes

Centerline of Hood

Intended for8" Round Duct

51⁄4"

13⁄4"

51⁄2"

600 CFM Blower (B200 dual blower)

• 300/600 cfm, fire safe, dual blower system, includes two motors with two ‘squirrel cage’ units. One of motors is a two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motor.

Top View

Recommended Mounting Height for V1-V3

36"

27-30"

Wood Hood

ProLiner

Recommended Mounting Height for V4-V10

36"

24-27"

Wood Hood

Liner

Exceeding recommended mounting height may compromise performance.

Liner/Blower units are intended to be installed flush to bottom of mantel or in the case of an arch mantel, flush to highest point of arch; can be installed slightly higher is desired.

300.58 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units• See pages 300.55-56 for general information, blower configuration and electrical specifications.

• See pages 300.61–62 for optional Vent-A-Hood® accessories.

• Includes 50 watt halogen lights with high-low settings.

• Liner is constructed of stainless steel.

Vent-A-Hood® # of Halogen Blower/Liner Code SKU Bottom Width Top Width Bottom Depth CFM Equivalent CFM* Lights (50 Watt)

V11 RHLNR4824HP 463⁄8" 403⁄8" 221⁄2" 900 1350 3V12 RHLNR5424HP 523⁄8" 463⁄8" 221⁄2" 900 1350 3V13 RHLNR5424XHP 523⁄8" 463⁄8" 221⁄2" 1200 1800 3V14 RHLNR6024 583⁄8" 523⁄8" 221⁄2" 1200 1800 4V15 RHLNR6624 643⁄8" 583⁄8" 221⁄2" 1200 1800 4

*Because the Magic Lung™ blower uses centrifugal filtration rather than conventional baffle or mesh filters, the Magic Lung™ blower can handle cooking equipment with higher cubic feet per minute (CFM) requirements and can deliver equivalent CFM much more efficiently than other filtration systems. When comparing Magic Lung™ with blower units made by other manufacturers, use the "Equivalent CFM".

900 CFM Blower (B100 single blower and B200 dual blower)

• Includes one, single, 300 cfm and one, dual 300/600 cfm, fire-safe blowers with squirrel cages. Two of three motors are two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motors.

1200 CFM Blower (Two B200 dual blowers)

• Includes two, dual 300/600 cfm, fire-safe blowers with squirrel cages. Two of four motors are two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motors.

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Top View

Centerlineof Hood

VentHoles

Electrical (2)

Intended for8" Round Duct

Wall Side

Intended for6" Round Duct

13⁄4"17⁄8"

51⁄2"

51⁄4"

75⁄16" 75⁄16"

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Top View

Wall SideVentHoles

Electrical (2)

Centerline of Hood

Intended for 8" Round Duct

Intended for8" Round Duct

13⁄4"

51⁄2"

51⁄4"

11" 11"

51⁄2"

Side View of Liner

221⁄2"

12"

12"

3"

36"

27-30"

Wood Hood

ProLiner

Recommended Mounting Height for V11-V15

Exceeding recommended mounting height may compromise performance.

Liner/Blower units are intended to be installed flush to bottom of mantel or in the case of an arch mantel, flush to highest point of arch; can be installed slightly higher is desired.

300.592015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units

Island/Peninsula Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units• See pages 300.55-56 for general information, blower configuration and electrical specifications.

• See page 300.62 for optional Vent-A-Hood® accessories.

• Includes 50 watt halogen lights with high-low settings.

• Liner is constructed of stainless steel.

• When planning for island/peninsula hoods, it is recommended to over-size the blower/liner due to cross drafts in island installation.

Vent-A-Hood® # of Halogen Blower/Liner Code SKU Bottom Width Top Width Bottom Depth CFM Equivalent CFM* Lights (50 Watt)

PV1 RHLNRP3627 36" 24" 27" 550 900 4 PV2 RHLNRP4227 42" 30" 27" 550 900 4

PV3 RHLNRP4830 48" 32" 30" 1100 1800 4PV4 RHLNRP5430 54" 38" 30" 1100 1800 4

*Because the Magic Lung™ blower uses centrifugal filtration rather than conventional baffle or mesh filters, the Magic Lung™ blower can handle cooking equipment with higher cubic feet per minute (CFM) requirements and can deliver equivalent CFM much more efficiently than other filtration systems. When comparing Magic Lung™ with blower units made by other manufacturers, use the "Equivalent CFM".

550 CFM Blower (T200 dual blower)

• 300/600 cfm, fire safe, dual blower system includes two motors with two ‘squirrel cage’ units. One of motors is a two speed ‘quite-mode’ motor.

1100 CFM Blower (T400 cluster blower)

• Includes two, dual 300/600 cfm, fire-safe blowers with squirrel cages. Two of four motors are two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motors.

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Top View

Centerline of Hood

Centerline of Hood

5" x 16"ExhaustOpening

8" TransitionOpening 9"Above Top ofHood

Electrical

Vent Holes

3⁄4" 21⁄8"

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Top View

Centerline of Hood

Electrical (2) Vent HolesCenterline of Hood

12" TransitionOpening 11¼"Above Top ofHood

8" BlowerOutlets

101⁄2"

51⁄2"

13⁄4"

PV1-PV2 Liner

PV3-PV4 Liner

16" less than bottom width 22"

30"

3"

48", 54"12"

36", 42"

27"

12" less than bottom width

12"

3"

Side View of Transition Installed

12"

9"

Side View of Transition Installed

12"

111⁄4"

Standard Transition (Included)

16"

8" Dia.

8" Dia.

9"

5"

Standard Transition (Included)

12" Dia.

12" Dia.

111⁄4"

8" Dia. 8" Dia. 8" Dia.

15"

Recommended Mounting Height for PV1-PV4

Exceeding recommended mounting height may compromise performance.

36"

30"

Wood Hood

Liner Liner/Blower units are intended to be installed flush to bottom of mantel or in the case of an arch mantel, flush to highest point of arch; can be installed slightly higher is desired.

300.60 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Stainless Steel Range Hoods

Vent-A-Hood® Stainless Steel Range Hoods• See pages 300.55-56 for general information, blower configuration and electrical specifications.

• See pages 300.61-62 for optional Vent-A-Hood® accessories.

• Includes 50 watt halogen lights with high-low settings.

# of Halogen SKU Width CFM Equivalent CFM* Lights (50 Watt)

PRH18-130 30" 300 450 2 PRH18-136 36" 300 450 2 PRH18-142 42" 300 450 3 PRH18-148 48" 300 450 3 PRH18-230 30" 600 900 2 PRH18-236 36" 600 900 2 PRH18-242 42" 600 900 3 PRH18-248 48" 600 900 3 PRH18-254 54" 600 900 4 PRH18-342 42" 900 1350 3 PRH18-348 48" 900 1350 3 PRH18-354 54" 900 1350 4 PRH18-360 60" 900 1350 4 PRH18-448 48" 1200 1800 3 PRH18-454 54" 1200 1800 4 PRH18-460 60" 1200 1800 4 PRH18-466 66" 1200 1800 4

300 CFM Blower (B100 single blower)

• 300 cfm, fire safe, single blower system, includes two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motor with centrifugal ‘squirrel cage’

Wall Side

Electrical

Centerline of Hood

Vent Hole

Intended for 6"Round Duct

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Top View

31⁄4"

51⁄4"

13⁄8"13⁄4"

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Wall Side

Electrical

Vent Holes

Centerline of Hood

Intended for8" Round Duct

51⁄4"

13⁄4"

51⁄2"

600 CFM Blower (B200 dual blower)

• 300/600 cfm, fire safe, dual blower system, includes two motors with two ‘squirrel cage’ units. One motor is a two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motor.

900 CFM Blower (B100 single blower and B200 dual blower)

• Includes one, single, 300 cfm and one, dual 300/600 cfm, fire-safe blowers with squirrel cages. Two of three motors are two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motors.

1200 CFM Blower (Two B200 dual blowers)

• Includes two, dual 300/600 cfm, fire-safe blowers with squirrel cages. Two of four motors are two speed ‘quiet-mode’ motors.

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Top View

Centerlineof Hood

VentHoles

Electrical (2)

Intended for8" Round Duct

Wall Side

Intended for6" Round Duct

13⁄4"17⁄8"

51⁄2"

51⁄4"

75⁄16" 75⁄16"

Recommended distance from top of cooking surface to bottom of liner is 30" maximum.

Top View

Wall SideVentHoles

Electrical (2)

Centerline of Hood

Intended for 8" Round Duct

Intended for8" Round Duct

13⁄4"

51⁄2"

51⁄4"

11" 11"

51⁄2"

*Because the Magic Lung™ blower uses centrifugal filtration rather than conventional baffle or mesh filters, the Magic Lung™ blower can handle cooking equipment with higher cubic feet per minute (CFM) requirements and can deliver equivalent CFM much more efficiently than other filtration systems. When comparing Magic Lung™ with blower units made by other manufacturers, use the "Equivalent CFM".

18"

12"

6"

24" WIDTH

Top View

300.612015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Accessory Venting Parts

Transitions

Combination Transition – 6"and 8"to 10"

RHTRANS10

• Fits standard blower outlet location on liners with one dual and one single blower/900 cfm (V11, V12, PRH18-3xx).

Vent-A-Hood® Accessory Venting Parts• Use of optional venting materials is strongly recommended.

• These Vent-A-Hood® manufactured items provide optimal performance, where other types may not.

• Reference "V" codes listed below with corresponding Vent-A-Hood® Liner/Blower information on page 300.58; see page 300.60 for wall mount range hoods (PRH18).

• These combination transitions do not fit in some of our angled component wood hood transitions, however they may be used outside of wood hood as shown in drawing below right.

• Transitions are included with Island/Peninsula Vent-A-Hoods® (PV1 - 4).

• Does not fit in the following angled transition components:

– 21, 24 RHTR and RHTWC – 21, 24 RHTDXAF

Combination Transition – 8"and 8" to 12"

RHTRANS12

• Fits standard blower outlet location on liners with two dual blowers/1200 cfm (V13 - V15, PRH18-4xx).6"Dia.8"Dia.

10"Dia.

171⁄2"

231⁄4"8"Dia.8"Dia.

12"Dia.

161⁄2"

301⁄2"

Example – Ducting WITHOUT Use of Vent-A-Hood® Combination Transition Example – Ducting WITH Use of Vent-A-Hood® Combination Transition

300.62 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Vent-A-Hood® Accessory Venting Parts

Vent-A-Hood® Accessory Venting Parts• Use of optional venting materials is strongly recommended.

• These Vent-A-Hood® manufactured items provide optimal performance, where other types may not.

• Reference "V" or "PV" codes listed below with corresponding Vent-A-Hood® Liner/Blower information on pages 300.57-59 and page 300.60 for wall mount range hoods (PRH18).

Roof Jacks

• Roof jack with damper.

• Galvanized, unpainted.

• Use when Vent-A-Hood® Liner/Blower requires venting through roof.

6" Roof Jack RHRJ6

• For use with single blower/300 cfm (V1 - V5, PRH18-1xx).

• For 6" diameter ductwork

163⁄4"

163⁄4" 61⁄2"

8" Roof Jack RHRJ8

• For use with dual blower/600 cfm (V6 - V10, PV1 - 2, PRH18-2xx).

• For 8" diameter ductwork.

163⁄4"

163⁄4" 61⁄2"

10" Roof Jack RHRJ10

• For use with one dual and one single blower/900 cfm (V11 - V12, PRH18-3xx).

• For 10" diameter ductwork.

203⁄4"

221⁄2" 101⁄2"

12" Roof Jack RHRJ12

• For use with two dual blowers/1200 cfm (V13 - V15, PV3 - 4, PRH18-4xx).

• For 12" diameter ductwork.

203⁄4"

221⁄2" 101⁄2"

Wall Louvers

• Wall cap with damper.

• Use when Vent-A-Hood® Liner/Blower or Range Hood requires venting through wall.

• Wall louvers are gunsmoke gray (medium dark gray).

10" Wall Louver RHWL10

• For use with one dual and one single blower/900 cfm (V11 - V12, PRH18-3xx).

• For 10" diameter ductwork.

11"

11"

33⁄8" 14"

133⁄4"

14"

8" Wall Louver RHWL8

• For use with dual blower/600 cfm (V6 - V10, PV1 - 2, PRH18-2xx).

• For 8" diameter ductwork.

85⁄8"

8" 71⁄8"

115⁄8"

11"

6"x 81⁄2" Wall Louver RHWLBVE6

• For use with back venting elbow (RHVBE).

• For use with dual blower/600 cfm (V6 - V10, PRH18-2xx).

• For 6" x 81⁄2" rectangular ductwork.

85⁄8"

6" 51⁄4"

115⁄8"

9"

7"

6"

12"

16"

81⁄2"

8" Dia.

Side ViewRHBVE (shown in gray) installed with RHWLBVE6

Back Venting Elbow RHBVE

• For use with RHWLBVE6 wall louver (shown above).

• RHBVE may be used in place of 8" round 90 degree elbow.

• Requires 7" of space in wood hood above liner.

85⁄8"

6" 51⁄4"

115⁄8"

9"

6" Wall Louver RHWL6

• For use with single blower/300 cfm (V1 - V5, PRH18-1xx).

• For 6" diameter ductwork.

12" Wall Louver RHWL12

• For use with two dual blowers/1200 cfm (V13 - V15, PV3 - 4, PRH18-4xx).

• For 12" diameter ductwork.

13"

13" 161⁄4"

16"

16"33⁄8"

300.632015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Stainless Steel Range Hoods

Stainless Steel Range Hood by Broan Noise Level Height Height Duct Air Flow (sone) at

SKU Description Width Depth Min* Max* Size Controls Halogen Lights (CFM) Volts Amps Max Speed

SSHSV36 Wall Mount Design 36" 193⁄4" 32" 47" 6" 3 speed slide 2 - 20 watt 370 120 2.63 7 Sones SSHPCG36 Ceiling Mount Design with Curved 353⁄8" 255⁄8" 301⁄2" 351⁄4" 6" 4 push buttons 4 - 35 watt 500 120 3.55 10.5 Sones

Glass for Islands and Peninsulas w/LED speed indicator

• Requires external ducting.

• Brushed stainless steel construction.

• Dishwasher safe aluminum filter features quick release latch.

• Halogen lights included, see above for quantity and watts.

• Heat Sentry™ system automatically turns blower to high speed when excess cooking heat is detected.

• Standard flues fit 8-9’ ceiling.

• Install minimum of 24", maximum of 30" from cooktop surface.

Wall Mount – SSHSV36 Ceiling Mount – SSHPCG36

*Height of duct cover is adjustable, allowing for use with various ceiling heights (see height min/height max above for minimum/maximum overall heights).

10" 107⁄8"

32" min47" max

181⁄2"

193⁄4"

36"

31⁄8"

103⁄8"

107⁄8"

211⁄16"

255⁄8" 353⁄8"

Bottom of blower housing

301⁄2"min351⁄4"max

300.64 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

300WALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

400.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

400.3 Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

400.4 Base Cabinets

400.5 Peninsula Base Cabinets

400.6 Base Cabinets with Full-Height Doors

400.7 Peninsula Base Cabinets with Full-Height Doors

400.8 Base Cabinets with Roll-Out Trays

400.9 Base Cabinets with Tiered Storage, Pots and Pans Storage

400.10 Smart Storage Base, Base Cabinets with Internal Accessories

400.12 Base Cabinets with Pull-Out Storage

400.13 Spice and Wine Storage, Bookcase Base

400.14 Component Drawers, Drawer Base Cabinets

400.18 Sink Base Cabinets

400.20 Sink Fronts, Sink Base Apron, Base Dishwasher

400.21 Microwave Base Cabinets, Base Oven, Drop-In Range Fronts

400.22 Base with Chopping Block, Cooktop Base Cabinets

400.23 Waste and Recycling Cabinets

400.24 Easy Reach Square Corner Base Cabinets

400.25 Corner Sink Fronts

400.26 Diagonal Corner Base and Sink Base Cabinets

400.27 Base Blind Corner Cabinets

400.30 Peninsula Base Blind Corner Cabinets

400.31 Angle Base Cabinets

400.33 Base End Shelves

400.34 Island End Shelves

400.36 Island Carts, Butcher Block Tops

In This Section

400.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

Base Cabinet Specifications / Ordering GuidelinesEnd Panel Information

• Standard construction is 3⁄4" thick furniture board with natural maple melamine interior/exterior; white melamine and other upgrades available.

Configuration Information

• Standard depth: 24".

• Standard heights: 341⁄2" and 401⁄2".

• Cabinets up to 24" wide are available in single door configuration.

• Cabinets 24" to 45" wide are available in butt door configuration with a 1⁄8" gap between doors. Cabinets greater than 36" wide include a center partition for additional support; see individual cabinet specifications for exceptions.

• Cabinets 42" to 48" wide are available in three door configuration with partition; see SKUs ending in LLR or LRR.

• 48" wide cabinets also available with two sets of butt doors, center partition and full-width drawer/drawer front; see SKUs ending in F.

• Cabinets up to 48" wide receive full width drawers/drawer fronts. Two drawer/drawer front option (WTD) is available; see Section 1100 for details.

• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers, full width roll-out trays or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

• Sink base cabinets include full backs. Plumbing accommodations must be made at time of installation.

• Sink base cabinets do not include shelving and are not drilled for shelving.

• Adjustable shelving is 3⁄4" thick; shelf quantities for cabinets that receive shelving listed in parentheses by cabinet heights.

• Drawings in this section are intended to show general configuration; all construction details may not be reflected. Doors may be depicted open beyond actual hinge allowance to show interior details.

Toe Space Information

• Toe base may be ordered loose (TKL) or omitted (TSR). Leg leveling system is also available. See Section 1100 for details.

Order Information

• For one door cabinets, specify hinge location.

• For three door cabinets, specify hinge location by SKU selection of LLR (left, left, right) or LRR (left, right, right) at end of order code. Partition location is determined by hinge pattern. From left to right, partition for LLR hinging is located between first and second door; partition for LRR hinging is between second and third door.

33⁄4" deep

toe

41⁄2"

3⁄4" thick bottom

front stretcher

intermediate stretcher (located under drawers/drawer fronts)

3⁄4" thick center partition (cabinets greater than 36" wide)

3⁄4" thick shelves

1⁄4" thick full back back stretcherStainless Steel Tilt-Down Trays

• Stainless steel tilt-down trays available for sink base cabinets with false drawer fronts; either factory installed or as kit for field installation.

• See individual cabinet specifications in rest of this section for availability and order codes.

• Numbers in stainless steel tilt-down tray kit SKUs indicate actual width of tray; same sizes will be utilized in installed modification.

• For factory installed options, L, R or B at end of code signifies location of trays on cabinets with two drawer fronts; for field installation order one kit per drawer front. For single drawer front configuration either L or R may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: SB24B, ISSTL; may also specify SB24B, ISSTR.

• Sink base SKUs with stainless steel tilt-down trays included also available.

• See Section 900 and 1100 for additional details on kits and installed options.

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to specify finished ends for all exposed ends of cabinetry, see end treatment options in Section 1100 for details.

DESIGN NOTE

See Section 1100 for general details of dimensional modifications; see individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual for exceptions. NOTE: Cabinets with drawers or roll-out trays have a maximum depth of 24".

3⁄4" thick ends

400.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Four Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition

One Door, One Drawer

341⁄2" High (1)

B09 B12 B15 B18 B21 B24

Butt Doors, One Drawer

341⁄2" High (1)

B24B B27B B30B B33B B36B

Butt Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition

341⁄2" High (2)

B39B B42B B45B

341⁄2" High (2)

B48F

341⁄2" High (2)

B42LLR B42LRR B45LLR B45LRR B48LLR B48LRR

• Choose product code with desired hinging of LLR or LRR.

• Cabinets hinged left, left, right (LLR) have partition between first and second door; cabinets hinged left, right, right (LRR) have partition between second and third door.

• Custom Quote required for roll-out tray options.

Partition with LLR Hinging

Base Cabinets

Three Doors, One Drawer, Partition

Base Cabinet, 24" Deep• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers, full width roll-out

trays or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

• Matching Ends (FHMEL, FHMER, FHMEB)

• Finished Back (FFB)

• Modify Height (MH)

400.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Kitchen Side: One Door, One Drawer Peninsula Side: One Door, One Drawer Front

Peninsula Base Cabinet, 24" Deep• Includes functional drawer on kitchen side only; false drawer front on peninsula side.

• Recessed toe space on kitchen and peninsula side.

• Roll-out trays not available.

• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

341⁄2" High (1)

PB09 PB12PB15 PB18 PB21 PB24

• Specify hinge location for both sides.

EXAMPLE: PB21, HL, PENR specifies kitchen side hinge left and peninsula side hinge right (shown).

Kitchen Side: Butt Doors, One Drawer Peninsula Side: Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

341⁄2" High (1)

PB24B PB27B PB30B PB33B PB36B

Kitchen Side: Butt Doors, One Drawer Peninsula Side: Butt Doors, One Drawer Front Center Partition

341⁄2" High (2)

PB39B PB42B PB45B

Kitchen Side: Three Doors, One Drawer Peninsula Side: Three Doors, One Drawer Front Partition

341⁄2" High (2)

PB42LLR PB42LRR PB45LLR PB45LRR PB48LLR PB48LRR

• Choose product code with desired hinging of LLR or LRR.

• Cabinets hinged left, left, right (LLR) have partition between first and second door; cabinets hinged left, right, right (LRR) have partition between second and third door.

• Specify hinge location for both sides. If kitchen side is hinged LLR (left, left, right), peninsula side will be hinged LRR (left, right, right). If kitchen side is hinged LRR, peninsula side will be hinged LLR.

Kitchen Side: Four Doors, One Drawer Peninsula Side: Four Doors, One Drawer Front Center Partition

341⁄2" High (2)

PB48F

Partition with LLR Hinging

Peninsula Base Cabinets

400.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Base Cabinets with Full-Height Doors

Base Cabinet with Full-Height Door(s), 24" Deep One Door

Base Cabinet with Full-Height Door(s), 13" Deep One Door

401⁄2" High (2)

13BFH0940 13BFH1240 13BFH1540 13BFH1840 13BFH2140 13BFH2440

341⁄2" High (2)

13BFH09 13BFH12 13BFH15 13BFH18 13BFH21 13BFH24

Four Doors, Center Partition

401⁄2" High (4)

13BFH4840F

341⁄2" High (4)

13BFH48F

341⁄2" High (2)

BFH09 BFH12 BFH15 BFH18 BFH21 BFH24

401⁄2" High (2)

BFH0940 BFH1240 BFH1540 BFH1840 BFH2140 BFH2440

Four Doors, Center Partition

341⁄2" High (4)

BFH48F

401⁄2" High (4)

BFH4840F

341⁄2" High (2)

BFH24B BFH27B BFH30B BFH33B BFH36B

Butt Doors

401⁄2" High (2)

BFH2440B BFH2740B BFH3040B BFH3340B BFH3640B

Butt Doors

401⁄2" High (2)

13BFH2440B 13BFH2740B 13BFH3040B 13BFH3340B 13BFH3640B

341⁄2" High (2)

13BFH24B 13BFH27B 13BFH30B 13BFH33B 13BFH36B

Butt Doors, Center Partition

401⁄2" High (4)

BFH3940B BFH4240B BFH4540B

341⁄2" High (4)

BFH39B BFH42B BFH45B

Butt Doors, Center Partition

401⁄2" High (4)

13BFH3940B 13BFH4240B 13BFH4540B

341⁄2" High (4)

13BFH39B 13BFH42B 13BFH45B

Three Doors, Partition

401⁄2" High (4)

13BFH4240LLR 13BFH4240LRR 13BFH4540LLR 13BFH4540LRR 13BFH4840LLR 13BFH4840LRR

341⁄2" High (4)

13BFH42LLR 13BFH42LRR 13BFH45LLR 13BFH45LRR 13BFH48LLR 13BFH48LRR Partition with

LLR Hinging

• Choose order code with desired hinging of LLR or LRR.

• Cabinets hinged left, left, right (LLR) have partition between first and second door; cabinets hinged left, right, right (LRR) have partition between second and third door.

Three Doors, Partition

401⁄2" High (4)

BFH4240LLR BFH4240LRR BFH4540LLR BFH4540LRR BFH4840LLR BFH4840LRR

341⁄2" High (4)

BFH42LLR BFH42LRR BFH45LLR BFH45LRR BFH48LLR BFH48LRR Partition with

LLR Hinging• Choose order code with desired hinging of LLR

or LRR.

• Cabinets hinged left, left, right (LLR) have partition between first and second door; cabinets hinged left, right, right (LRR) have partition between second and third door.

400.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Peninsula Base Cabinets with Full-Height Doors

Kitchen Side: One Door Peninsula Side: One Door

Peninsula Base Cabinet with Full-Height Door(s), 24" Deep• Recessed toe space on kitchen and peninsula side.

• Roll-out trays not available.

341⁄2" High (2)

PBFH09 PBFH12PBFH15 PBFH18 PBFH21 PBFH24

• Specify hinge location for both sides.

EXAMPLE: PBFH21, HL, PENR specifies kitchen side hinge left and peninsula side hinge right (shown).

Kitchen Side: Butt Doors Peninsula Side: Butt Doors

341⁄2" High (2)

PBFH24B PBFH27B PBFH30B PBFH33B PBFH36B

Kitchen Side: Butt Doors Peninsula Side: Butt Doors Center Partition

341⁄2" High (4)

PBFH39B PBFH42B PBFH45B

Kitchen Side: Three Doors Peninsula Side: Three Doors Partition

341⁄2" High (4)

PBFH42LLR PBFH42LRR PBFH45LLR PBFH45LRR PBFH48LLR PBFH48LRR

• Choose order code with desired hinging of LLR or LRR.

• Cabinets hinged left, left, right (LLR) have partition between first and second door; cabinets hinged left, right, right (LRR) have partition between second and third door.

• Specify hinge location for both sides. If kitchen side is hinged LLR (left, left, right), peninsula side will be hinged LRR (left, right, right). If kitchen side is hinged LRR, peninsula side will be hinged LLR.

Kitchen Side: Four Doors Peninsula Side: Four Doors Center Partition

341⁄2" High (4)

PBFH48F

Partition with LLR Hinging

400.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Single Roll-Out Tray

• One roll-out tray and one full-depth adjustable shelf per opening.

• Roll-out tray is installed on floor of cabinet.

One Door, One Drawer

BT12-1 BT15-1 BT18-1 BT21-1 BT24-1

Base Cabinets with Roll-Out Trays

Double Roll-Out Trays

• Two adjustable roll-out trays per opening.

One Door, One Drawer

BT12-2 BT15-2 BT18-2 BT21-2 BT24-2

Butt Doors, One Drawer

BT24B-2 BT27B-2 BT30B-2 BT33B-2 BT36B-2 BT39B-2 BT42B-2 BT45B-2

Butt Doors, One Drawer

BT24B-1 BT27B-1 BT30B-1 BT33B-1 BT36B-1

Four Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition

BT48F-4

Four Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition

BT48F-2

Butt Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition

BT39BCP-2 BT42BCP-2 BT45BCP-2

Base Cabinet with Roll-Out Trays, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• See below for roll-out tray information and upgrade option.

• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers, full width roll-out trays or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

Roll-Out Tray Upgrade Option

NEW! Standard roll-out trays are now 31⁄2" high.

• Roll-out tray height may be modified to 61⁄2" high.

• Prefix modification code below with quantity.

• Not required on all roll-out trays in cabinet. May mix and match 31⁄2" and 61⁄2" sizes.

EXAMPLE: BT36B-2, 1DDSOS specifies one roll-out tray remains 31⁄2" high and one tray is upgraded to 61⁄2" high.

• Guides remain standard; modifications available, see Section 1100 for details.

__DDSOS

Standard Roll-Out Tray

DDSOS Option

400.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Butt Doors, Full-Width Drawer, Tiered Cutlery Divider

B24BTCDPP

• Top drawer includes two tiered cutlery divider constructed of hardwood in natural finish with 12 compartments.

• Top tier of cutlery divider operates on specialty full extension guides; lower tier is accessed by pushing top tier back into cabinet.

• Intivo options not available.

Base Cabinets with Tiered Storage, Pots and Pans Storage

One Door, One Drawer, One Hidden Drawer

B12HSOS B15HSOS B18HSOS B21HSOS B24HSOS

• Includes functional top drawer, pull-out door attached to 101⁄2" high drawer box and one non-adjustable 31⁄2" high hidden drawer.

• Width modification available; minimum 12", maximum 24".

Base Cabinet with Pots & Pans Storage, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Includes pull-out unit with two shelves and two side racks which

provide generous space for a variety of cookware and lids.

• Shelves are pre-finished birch veneer with chrome-plated heavy-duty wire surrounds.

• Each shelf carries a maximum of 25 lbs. and slides-out individually on KV® full-extension precision ball-bearing slides.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

Butt Doors, Full-Width Drawer

B24BPP B30BPP

Butt Doors, Full-Width Bottom Drawer

SBD24BPP SBD30BPP

• Door/drawer fronts match standard base door/drawer front heights; configuration is inverted.

Full Height Butt Doors, One Hidden Drawer

BFH24BPP BFH30BPP

• Includes tiered storage consisting of one non-adjustable 31⁄2" high drawer with scooped front. Standard drawer guide and Intivo drawer modifications available on tiered storage/hidden drawer.

Base Cabinet with Tiered Storage, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Tiered storage consists of non-adjustable 31⁄2" high drawers with

scooped fronts.

• Standard drawer guide and Intivo drawer modifications available on drawers and tiered storage/hidden drawers.

• Height modification not available.

Full-Height Door, Two Hidden Drawers

BFH12H2SOS BFH15H2SOS BFH18H2SOS BFH21H2SOS BFH24H2SOS

• Includes full-height pull-out door attached to 101⁄2" high drawer box and two non-adjustable 31⁄2" high hidden drawers.

• Width modification available; minimum 12", maximum 24".

Two Drawers, Two Hidden Drawers

2DBT1234 2DBT1534 2DBT1834 2DBT2134 2DBT2434 2DBT2734 2DBT3034 2DBT3334 2DBT3634

• Includes two 61⁄2" high drawer boxes with non-adjustable 31⁄2" high hidden drawers above each drawer.

• Width modification available; minimum 12", maximum 36".

221⁄8"

391⁄2" Extended

Tiered Cutlery Divider Detail

400.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

DESIGN NOTE

Both sides of cabinet are drilled for shelves and tray divider allowing you to customize and change the configuration of this cabinet as your storage needs change.

Smart Storage Base Cabinets, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" HighButt Doors, One Drawer

B36BSMART

• Includes cutlery insert in drawer, tray divider on one side of cabinet (see cut-out detail), two roll-out trays centered, two shelves on other side of cabinet and door organizer on each door.

• Cutlery insert is constructed of birch plywood.

• Roll-out trays are situated between two fixed partitions; trays are equivalent in size to trays in a 21" wide x 21" deep cabinet. Roll-out trays are 31⁄2" high with scooped front; trays may be modified to 61⁄2" high, see DDSOS modification in Section 1100.

• Dimensional, installed door/interior accessory and drawer modifications not available.

• Replacement door organizers and cutlery inserts available, see Section 900 for SKUs and additional details.

Tray Divider on left side; may be used on right side or removed.

Base Cabinet with Tiered Cutlery Divider, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Drawer includes two tiered cutlery divider constructed of hardwood in

natural finish.

• Top tier of cutlery divider operates on specialty full extension guides; lower tier is accessed by pushing top tier back into cabinet.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• 15" and 18" widths have 10 compartments; 21" and 24" have 12. See TCD kits in Section 900 for drawings of configurations.

One Door, One Drawer

B15TCD B18TCD B21TCD B24TCD

B24BTCD

Butt Doors, One Drawer

Smart Storage Base, Base Cabinets with Internal Accessories

400.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Base Cabinets with Internal Accessories

Base Cabinet with Mixer Shelf, Full-Height Door, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

BFH18MX BFH21MX BFH24MX

• Heavy duty spring-loaded mixer shelf featuring three adjustable spring tension settings: 0 – 20 lbs., 20 – 30 lbs. and 30 – 60 lbs and alignment bracket that assists in side to side stabilization.

• 191⁄4" high appliance clearance.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

Base Pantry Cabinet with Full-Height Butt Doors, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

BPC36B

• Includes two swing-out shelf units and two door mount shelf units which are shipped separately and require field assembly. Also includes shallow shelves in back of cabinet behind swing-out shelf units.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

• Use of filler (1" minimum) is recommended when base pantry is installed against a wall or adjacent cabinet greater in depth. This allows proper operation of interior swing-out shelves.

Base Cabinet with Pull-Out Table, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Self supporting table top/work surface pulls out of drawer location;

extends 32" from face of cabinet.

• Table top is hardwood laminate in natural finish.

• Maximum weight capacity of table is 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

One Door, One Drawer Front

B24POT

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

B24POTB

Base Cabinet with Wicker Baskets, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

B15WI B18WI

• Baskets are natural finish and do not match finish of cabinet.

• Top drawer is functional.

• Includes matching finished interior.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

• Replacement wicker baskets available, see Section 1200.

Side View – Mechanism Closed

341⁄2"

191⁄4"

41⁄4"

400.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Base Cabinets with Internal Accessories/Pull-Out Storage

Base Cabinet with Pull-Out Storage, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

BPS09 BPS12

• Includes pull-out shelving rack constructed of hardwood and plywood with clear coat applied; rack is fixed to door.

• Rack is open on both sides and includes one adjustable shelf.

• Operates on two sets of Quiet Close drawer guides.

• Height modification not available.

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments:

– Width: minimum 9", maximum 18". – Depth: minimum 12", maximum 24".

• Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides are an optional upgrade for 21" to 24" depths.

Tray Base Cabinet with Full-Height Door, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

TB09

• Constructed with a solid top.

• Features 1⁄2" thick maple plywood adjustable tray divider in natural finish with scooped front.

Base Cabinet with Tray Dividers, One Door, One Drawer, 24" Deep

341⁄2" High Dividers

TDC12 1 TDC15 2 TDC18 3

• Features 1⁄2" thick maple plywood adjustable tray divider(s) in natural finish with scooped front.

Pull-out Tray Divider Cabinet, 24" Deep

341⁄2" High Number of Slots Slot Width

PTDC12 2 45⁄16" PTDC15 3 37⁄8" PTDC18 4 35⁄8"

• Pull-out is attached to door; operates on Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides.

• Width modification not available.

• Depth modification available: 21".

• Fixed dividers are 1⁄2" thick baltic birch plywood in natural finish.

Base with Pull-Out Pantry, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

BFHKPS09 BFHKPS12 BFHKPS15 BFHKPS18 BFHKPS21

• Pull-out is attached to door; operates on full-extension guides with features similar to Quiet Close; guides slow pull-out before final closure, creating automatic and silent closing.

• Trays have non-slip maple print surface and metal side rails; additional trays available through Custom Quote request.

• 80 lb. load capacity.

• Width modification available in 1⁄4" increments: minimum 9", maximum 21". Pantry from next smallest cabinet size will be used.

EXAMPLE: BFHKPS21, MW 191⁄4" will receive same size pantry as BFHKPS18.

• Depth modification not available.

• Height modification available in 1⁄4" increments: minimum 321⁄2", maximum 36".

Adjustable Shelf

231⁄2"

67⁄8" or 97⁄8"

Base Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Includes pull-out spice rack, filler, overlay

filler, three adjustable shelves and one fixed shelf.

• For profile of overlay filler by door style, see chart on next page for BSDC cabinets.

• Designed to be installed between two cabinets; not intended to be used on end of run or as stand alone cabinet.

• Pull-out spice rack is open both sides, operates on specialty full extension guides and is constructed from plywood with clear coat applied and metal side rails.

• When installed, overlay filler will be flush with doors of adjacent cabinets.

• Micro-adjustment screw allows for precise filler alignment.

• Modifications not available.Overlay

FillerFiller Fluted

Overlay FillerFiller

Fluted Front

BSRF06

• Includes six flutes.

• Available in wood and thermofoil door styles only.

Plain Front

BSR06

400.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETSSpice and Wine Storage, Bookcase Base

Base Spice Drawer Cabinet, 6" Wide

• Spice drawers have slab front with profiled edges, see below. Pulls/knobs required.

• Drawer boxes are 1⁄2" thick dovetailed construction; no drawer guides. Sides are hardwood in natural finish; fronts match material and finish of cabinet.

• If matching finished interior is specified, drawer boxes are not affected.

• Openings are not square and vary in height; however, all drawer fronts are equal in size.

• Modify depth available in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 9", maximum 30". 241⁄4" – 30" depths receive drawer boxes for 24" deep cabinets.

• Width and height modifications not available as standard or through Custom Quote request.

• Matching end modification not available.

21" Deep 24" Deep Height Drawers

21BSDC34 24BSDC34 341⁄2" 5 21BSDC40 24BSDC40 401⁄2" 6

341⁄2" High 401⁄2" High

Crossmate Vertical Wine Storage Cabinet, 13" DeepFour Openings Height Bottles

BCWS1534L 341⁄2" 24 BCWS1534R 341⁄2" 24

Eight Openings Height Bottles

BCWS1840 401⁄2" 32

• BCWS1534 is available in a left or right configuration; specify with SKU ending in L or R.

• Includes matching finished interior.

• Cross dividers are constructed from 3⁄4" thick edge banded material.

• 11⁄2" thick floor divides/separates stacked sections.

• Height and width modifications not available.

• Depth modification available in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 51⁄4", maximum 30".

• Bottle count based on 31⁄2" diameter bottles.

BCWS1534R

BCWS1840

Base Wine Cubes, 13" Deep• Includes matching finished interior.

• Dimensional and matching end modifications not available.

Single Width Height Openings

BWC34 6" 341⁄2" 5 BWC40 6" 401⁄2" 6

BWC34 BWC40

Double Width Height Openings

BWCD34 12" 341⁄2" 10 BWCD40 12" 401⁄2" 12

BWCD34

Bookcase Base Cabinets• See Section 700 for

complete SKU listing for bookcase cabinets.

BOD BODF

BWCD40

1⁄4"

BCWS1534L

1⁄4"Profile for the following door styles:

Bahamas • Brookhill • Caledon • Devonshire • Eaton Fenwick • Hudson Falls • Lincoln • Loxley • Mission Park Place • Potter’s Mill • Providence • Sonoma Valencia • Victoria • Wakefield • Wattsburg Windwood

Madison • Venice • Winterberry

Calistoga

Bella • Gibson • Pike’s Peak

Dana Pointe

Leighton

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

400.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Component Drawers, Drawer Base Cabinets

Component Drawer, 15" High, 24" Deep• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments:

– Minimum width 9", maximum 48". – See below for height information. – For cabinets up to 36" wide: minimum depth 12", maximum 24". – For cabinets over 36" wide: minimum depth 21", maximum 24"; includes Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, downgrades not available.

CD1D15CD1D18CD1D21CD1D24CD1D27CD1D30

CD1D33CD1D36CD1D39CD1D42CD1D45CD1D48

• Height modification available; minimum 6", maximum 18".

One Drawer, One Hidden Drawer

CD1DT15CD1DT18CD1DT21CD1DT24CD1DT27CD1DT30

CD1DT33CD1DT36CD1DT39CD1DT42CD1DT45CD1DT48

• Includes one 61⁄2" high drawer box with tiered storage above consisting of one non-adjustable 31⁄2" high drawer with scooped front.

• Height modification not available.

CD2D15CD2D18CD2D21CD2D24CD2D27CD2D30

CD2D33CD2D36CD2D39CD2D42CD2D45CD2D48

• Height modification available; minimum 111⁄2", maximum 18".

Two Drawers

One Deep Drawer

• Typical application is a window or bench seat. May be used with single drawer dishwasher appliances.

• Cabinet includes fully enclosed top.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 9", maximum 36". – Minimum height 11", maximum 221⁄2". – Minimum depth 12", maximum 24".

18" Deep

18DB1218 18DB1518 18DB1818 18DB2118 18DB2418 18DB2718 18DB3018 18DB3318 18DB3618

One Drawer Base Cabinet, 181⁄4" High

21" Deep

21DB1218 21DB1518 21DB1818 21DB2118 21DB2418 21DB2718 21DB3018 21DB3318 21DB3618

24" Deep

24DB1218 24DB1518 24DB1818 24DB2118 24DB2418 24DB2718 24DB3018 24DB3318 24DB3618

400.152015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Two Drawer Base Cabinet, 24" Deep

• Drawer fronts are equal in height.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 9", maximum 48". – Minimum height 16", maximum 341⁄2" (drawer fronts remain equal in height). – For cabinets up to 36" wide: minimum depth 12", maximum 24". – For cabinets over 36" wide: minimum depth 21", maximum 24"; includes Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, downgrades not available.

• File drawer system fits in 32" and 341⁄2" heights.

341⁄2" High

2DB1234 2DB1534 2DB1834 2DB2134 2DB24342DB2734 2DB3034 2DB3334 2DB36342DB39342DB4234 2DB4534 2DB4834

Two drawer bases can be used with professional style range tops; please consult appliance manufacturer specifications for details. Modify height available in 1⁄4" increments; see details above.

281⁄2" High

2DB1228 2DB1528 2DB1828 2DB2128 2DB24282DB2728 2DB3028 2DB3328 2DB36282DB3928 2DB4228 2DB4528 2DB4828

32" High

2DB1232 2DB1532 2DB1832 2DB2132 2DB24322DB2732 2DB3032 2DB3332 2DB36322DB3932 2DB4232 2DB4532 2DB4832

Drawer Base Cabinets

DESIGN NOTE

Two Drawer Base Cabinet with Pegboard, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

Pegboard in Top Drawer, Eight Peg Posts

2DB3034PEG2DB3334PEG2DB3634PEG

• Includes pegboard in top drawer, eight peg posts and Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides on both drawers.

• All cabinets include full-width drawers, equal in height.

• Modifications in height affect openings equally, please consider this when applying MH.

• Width modification available; minimum 15", maximum 36".

• Height modification available; minimum 27", maximum 341⁄2".

• Depth modification available; minimum 21", maximum 24".

• Additional peg posts available, see PEGPOSTKIT in Section 900.

• To add pegboard to bottom drawer, see IPEG in Section 1100.

Two Drawer Base Cabinet with Tiered Storage• See page 400.9 for details.

400.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Three Drawers with Tiered Cutlery Divider

3DB15TCD 3DB18TCD 3DB21TCD

3DB24TCD

Drawer Base Cabinets

Three Drawers Three Drawers with Bread Board

3DB15BB

• Includes unfinished bread board; top drawer must be opened to access bread board.

• Depth modification available in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 21", maximum 24".

• Width modification not available.

191⁄8", 221⁄8"

391⁄2" Extended

21" and 24" Widths

391⁄2" Extended

15" and 18" Widths

131⁄8", 161⁄8"

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 9", maximum 48". – For cabinets up to 36" wide: minimum depth 12", maximum 24". – For cabinets over 36" wide: minimum depth 21", maximum 24"; includes Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, downgrades not available.

Three Drawer Base Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Height modifications available: 281⁄2" and 32" (drawer front heights

match DDRB and VDB respectively; see dimensional specifications in Section 100).

3DB123DB153DB183DB213DB243DB27 3DB30 3DB33 3DB36 3DB39 3DB42 3DB45 3DB48

• Top drawer includes two tiered cutlery divider constructed of hardwood in a natural finish.

• Top tier operates on specialty full extension guides; lower tier is accessed by pushing top tier back into cabinet.

• 15" and 18" widths have 10 compartments; 21" and 24" have 12.

• Width, depth and Intivo modifications not available.

DESIGN NOTE

For use in cooktop applications, add shallow top drawer modification (SHDWR), see Section 1100 for details.

• Peg Board Drawer (IPEGL, IPEGR)

• Installed Bread Box (BBI)

• Installed Bin Storage (BIN)

400.172015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Four Drawer Base Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

4DB12 4DB15 4DB18 4DB214DB24 4DB27 4DB30 4DB33 4DB364DB39 4DB42 4DB45 4DB48

• Height modification not available.

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 9", maximum 48". – For cabinets up to 36" wide: minimum depth 12", maximum 24". – For cabinets over 36" wide: minimum depth 21", maximum 24"; includes Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, downgrades not available.

Drawer Base Cabinets

4DB15TCD 4DB18TCD 4DB21TCD 4DB24TCD

• Top drawer includes two tiered cutlery divider constructed of hardwood in natural finish.

• Top tier of cutlery divider operates on specialty full extension guides; lower tier is accessed by pushing top tier back into cabinet.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

• 15" and 18" widths have 10 compartments; 21" and 24" have 12. See TCD kits in Section 900 for drawings of configurations.

Four Drawer Base Cabinet with Tiered Cutlery Divider, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

Two Drawers

2BD15 2BD18

• Glass fronts on both drawer fronts.• Width and height modifications not available.

Three Drawers

3DB15IG 3DB18IG 3DB21IG 3DB24IG

• Glass fronts on middle and bottom drawer fronts.

• Width modification available in 1⁄4" increments: 12" minimum, 24" maximum.

• Height modification not available.

Four Drawers

4BD30 4BD36

• Glass fronts on all four drawer fronts.

• Width and height modifications not available.

Glass Front Drawer Display Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Glass front drawers have display section occupying 21⁄4" of front

section of drawer.

• Partition dividing display area and remaining drawer space is removable.

• Drawer front styling may be altered on orders in door styles with applied molding or narrow stiles and rails to accommodate glass front/bean drawer.

• Modification available for textured glass or mirror, see Section 1100. These modifications are applicable to all glass fronts on cabinet, specify Level 1 modification code. Beveled glass not available.

• Intivo options not available.

• Not available in Gibson and Pike’s Peak door styles.

400.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Sink Base, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Includes false drawer front with full back in cabinet.

• Under sink storage options available, see Section 1100.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

SB24B ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1 SB27B ISSTL or R KIT-SST22 1 SB30B ISSTL or R KIT-SST25 1 SB33B ISSTL or R KIT-SST28 1 SB36B ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1 SB39B ISSTD KIT-SST16D 2 SB42B ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2 SB45B ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2

Four Doors, One Drawer Front

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

SB48F ISSTD KIT-SST22D 2

Sink Base Cabinets

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

SB18 ISSTL or R KIT-SST13 1 SB21 ISSTL or R KIT-SST16 1 SB24 ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1

One Door, One Drawer Front

Stainless steel tilt-down trays are available factory installed or as a kit for field installation. Numbers in kit code indicate actual width of tray; codes ending in D receive two trays.

DESIGN NOTE

Sink Base with Sink Mat, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Includes false drawer front, full cabinet back and sink mat.

• Removable gray polystyrene sink mat lines floor of cabinet to prevent water damage.

• Unique dimples of sink mat collect up to six liters of liquid per square meter.

• Replacement sink mats and door organizers available, see Section 900.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

SB30BSM SB33BSM SB36BSM

SB30BSMDORG SB33BSMDORG SB36BSMDORG

• Includes door organizer on each door.

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front, Sink Mat, Two Door Organizers

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front, Sink Mat

400.192015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Sink Base with Functional Bottom Drawer, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Door/drawer front heights match standard base door/drawer front

heights, configuration is inverted.

• Plumbing should come in through wall, not floor of cabinet.

• Plumbing should start a minimum of 12" above finished flooring.

• Under sink storage options available, see Section 1100.

• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers, full width roll-out trays or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

One Door, One Drawer

SBD18 SBD21 SBD24

Four Doors, One Drawer

SBD48F

Butt Doors, One Drawer

SBD24B SBD27B SBD30B SBD33B SBD36B SBD39B SBD42B SBD45B

Sink Base Cabinets

Sink Base with Tilt-Down Trays, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front, Stainless Steel Tilt-Down Trays

TILT-DOWN TRAY INFOSKU Quantity Width

SB30BTDT 1 25" SB33BTDT 1 28" SB36BTDT 1 31" SB39BTDT 2 16" SB42BTDT 2 19"

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

Sink Base with Full-Height Doors, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Includes 10" high vertical stretcher.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

One Door

Hinge Left Hinge Right

SBFH18L SBFH18R SBFH21L SBFH21R SBFH24L SBFH24R

Butt Doors

SBFH24B SBFH27B SBFH30BSBFH33BSBFH36BSBFH39BSBFH42BSBFH45B

Hinge Right Shown

400.20 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Sink Front, 341⁄2" High• Includes 6" deep end, top and bottom panels, door(s) and drawer

front. Floor and toe pedestal also included; shipped loose for field assembly.

• Floor is 3⁄4" thick material; size = width of cabinet x 24" deep. Floor sits behind 6" bottom panel, this allows use up to 30" depths, trim in field for other depths.

• Stainless steel tllt-down trays are available factory installed or as a kit for field installation. Numbers in kit code indicate actual width of tray; codes ending in D receive two trays.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

One Door, One Drawer Front

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

SF18 ISSTL or R KIT-SST13 1 SF21 ISSTL or R KIT-SST16 1SF24 ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

SF24B ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1 SF27B ISSTL or R KIT-SST22 1 SF30B ISSTL or R KIT-SST25 1 SF33B ISSTL or R KIT-SST28 1 SF36B ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1 SF39B ISSTD KIT-SST16D 2 SF42B ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2 SF45B ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2

Four Doors, One Drawer Front

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

SF48F ISSTD KIT-SST22D 2

Sink Fronts, Sink Base Apron, Base Dishwasher

Sink Base Apron Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

Butt Doors

SBA30B SBA33B SBA36B SBA39B SBA42B

• Accommodates farm/apron style sinks.

• Apron area includes overlay panel which is flush with cabinet doors.

• All cut-out or trimming of overlay panel must be done on site.

• Front stretcher is located above doors. Blocking added to apron area for added strength.

• Additional support for apron sink should be built in field.

• Maximum cut-out dimensions: – 3" less width of cabinet. – 107⁄16" in height.

• Custom Quote must be requested for modification to height.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

• See Section 1200 for replacement overlay panels.

Base Dishwasher Cabinet, 251⁄2" Wide, 461⁄2" High, 24" Deep (For raised dishwasher applications)

BDW25

• Includes 3⁄4" thick fixed floor and hinged drawer front for ease of dishwasher installation; may be used for storage.

• Allows for 101⁄2" raised installation of standard dishwashers.

• Top of cabinet is completely enclosed.

Hinged Drawer Front

Doors and drawer front removed to show front stretcher and blocking detail.

Stainless steel tilt-down trays are available factory installed or as a kit for field installation. Numbers in kit code indicate actual width of tray; codes ending in D receive two trays.

DESIGN NOTE

1115⁄16"

Cabinet Width less 1⁄8"

400.212015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Drop-In Range FrontDORF30

• Front is 3⁄4" thick material and matches finish selected on order.

• Front is not intended to carry weight; field-constructed oven support required.

• Includes sub toe kick, shipped loose for field installation.

• Toe kick is 3⁄4" thick material; does not match finish selected on order.

Base Oven Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2"High

BOC24 BOC27 BOC30 BOC33 BOC36

• Intended for installation of built-in appliance (oven, microwave, etc.).

• 3⁄4" thick square edge appliance overlay panel attached to case with cam cleat system; matches door material/finish, edge banded all four edges. Panel is 1⁄8" less width of cabinet, 297⁄8" high. Replacement panels available, see Section 1200.

• Appliance panel can be modified on site or customized with oven cut-out modification (OCM) at time of order placement.

• Oven shelf kit (DOSK) available for field installation of fixed floor, see Section 900 for details. Kit is included with OCM modification. Allow 29⁄16" for shelf and cleat system.

• Maximum field cut-out dimensions:

– Width: 11⁄2" less cabinet width. – Height: 283⁄8" if oven shelf kit is not used; 269⁄16" with oven shelf kit.

• Maximum factory cut-out dimensions:

– Width: 11⁄2" less cabinet width. – Height: 283⁄8" if oven shelf kit is not used; 243⁄4" with oven shelf kit.

297⁄8"

Microwave Base, Base Oven, Range Fronts

Small Drawer

BW24SD BW27SD BW30SD BW33SD BW36SD

• Drawer height matches drawer from standard base cabinet (61⁄2" high drawer front).

• Minimum height 221⁄2"; maximum 48".

Large Drawer

BW24LD BW27LD BW30LD BW33LD BW36LD

• Drawer height matches bottom drawer from three drawer base cabinet (119⁄16" high drawer front).

• Minimum height 273⁄4"; maximum 48".

Medium Drawer

BW24MD BW27MD BW30MD BW33MD BW36MD

• Drawer height matches bottom drawer from four drawer base cabinet (10" high drawer front).

• Minimum height 251⁄2"; maximum 48".

Microwave Base, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Intended for installation of built-in microwave.

• 3⁄4" thick square edge appliance overlay panel attached to case with cam cleat system; matches door material/finish, edge banded all four edges. Panel is flush with drawer front on cabinet. Panel is 1⁄8" less width of cabinet, see drawings for height. Replacement panels available, see Section 1200.

• Appliance overlay panel can be modified on site or customized with oven cut-out modification (OCM) at time of order placement.

• Maximum field cut-out dimensions: – Width: 11⁄2" less cabinet width. – Height: 11⁄2" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is not used; 35⁄16" if oven shelf kit is used.

• Maximum factory cut-out dimensions: – Width: 11⁄2" less cabinet width. – Height: 11⁄2" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is not used; 51⁄8" if oven shelf kit is used.

• Oven shelf kit (DOSK) available for field installation of fixed floor, see Section 900 for details. Kit is included with OCM modification. Allow 29⁄16" for shelf and cleat system.

• Height modification available; see below for minimums/maximums. NOTE: Height is adjusted in appliance overlay panel, drawers remain same size.

231⁄4"

183⁄16"

193⁄4"

101⁄4"

400.22 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Cooktop Base Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• See below for roll-out tray information and

upgrade option.

• Includes shallow top drawer to allow installation of cooktop in countertop. Check appliance manufacturer specifications for clearances.

• For other size availability, choose standard base cabinet with shallow top drawer modification.

• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers, full width roll-out trays or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

Butt Doors, Two Roll-Out Trays

RB30B RB33B RB36B RB39B RB42B RB45B

Top Drawer Side View

21⁄2"

27⁄16"Base Cabinet with Pull-Out Chopping Block and Two Roll-Out Trays, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• See below for roll-out tray information and upgrade option.

• Includes 11⁄4" thick solid wood chopping block mounted on wood runners. Drawer front is hinged on bottom. Remove chopping block from cabinet for functional use. Rubber bumpers included on bottom of block to protect counter surfaces.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

One Door, Two Roll-Out Trays

RBCB18 RBCB21 RBCB24

Four Doors, Four Roll-Out Trays, Center Partition

RB48F

Butt Doors, Two Roll-Out Trays

RBCB24B

Base with Chopping Block, Cooktop Base Cabinets

Roll-Out Tray Upgrade Option

NEW! Standard roll-out trays are now 31⁄2" high.

• Roll-out tray height may be modified to 61⁄2" high.

• Prefix modification code below with quantity.

• Not required on all roll-out trays in cabinet. May mix and match 31⁄2" and 61⁄2" sizes.

EXAMPLE: RB36B, 1DDSOS specifies one roll-out tray remains 31⁄2" high and one tray is upgraded to 61⁄2" high.

• Guides remain standard; modifications available, see Section 1100 for details.

__DDSOS

Standard Roll-Out Tray DDSOS Option

400.232015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

• Includes pull-out door attached to waste containment system.

• Scooped drawer box of waste containment system includes plywood deck with cut-outs for waste baskets; operates on Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides.

• Height modification available; minimum 341⁄2", maximum 48".

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Replacement waste baskets available, see Section 1200.

Automated Drive

• Cabinets including Automated Drive open with a light touch of your hand, hip, knee or foot.

• Electrical information: – Electrical outlet required. – Automated Drive is factory installed in back of cabinet. – Transformer and connector ships separately; installer to drill back or end panel to install. – Low power consumption, approximately 3.5 kWh per year. – Drawer can be opened manually during power outages.

• Automated Drive features: – Electrical drive triggers opening signal. – Dampening function ensures pull-out closes securely regardless of force used. – Leaning protection feature prevents unintentional opening. – Auto open feature interrupted if resistance is encountered. – Integrated dripping water protection if water gets in cabinet.

Base with Pull-Out Recycling Bins, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" HighBRC24

• Includes pull-out door attached to recycling unit; operates on integrated guide system with 150 lb weight capacity.

• Includes fixed floor under drawer.

• Recycling unit has three separate triangle-shaped containers (25 qt. each) and one canvas bag (18 qt.).

• Dimensional modifications not available.

• Replacement containers and canvas bags available, see Section 1200.

Waste and Recycling Cabinets

Full-Height Door

Standard Automated Drive Basket Size Basket Qty

BFH15WB BFH15WBS 50 qt. 1 BFH18WB BFH18WBS 50 qt. 1BFH21WB BFH21WBS 35 qt./50 qt. 1 each

One Door, One Drawer

Standard Automated Drive Basket Size Basket Qty

B15WB B15WBS 35 qt. 1 B18WB B18WBS 35 qt. 1 B18DWB B18DWBS 35 qt. 2 B21WB B21WBS 35 qt. 2

• Includes fixed floor under drawer.

Automated Drive Detail

Base Cabinet with Pull-Out Waste Container(s), 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

400.24 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Easy Reach Square Corner Base Cabinets

With ShelfSCB33 SCB36

• Includes one fixed shelf.

With Super SusanSKU Weight Capacity

SSCB33 45 lbs SSCB36 65 lbs

• Includes two wood trays with 1⁄2" thick solid wood sides attached to fixed shelving.

Easy Reach Square Corner Base Cabinet, 341⁄2" High• Cabinet doors are hinged together at center with concealed strap hinges.

• Top of cabinet is completely enclosed.

• See drawings below for dimensional detail.

• Square corner door rules vary from those listed in Section 200. Contact Customer Care for specific styling details.

• IMPORTANT: A filler or end panel with filler may be needed if installed where adjacent cabinet or appliance is deeper than 24". (For proper clearance to open doors.)

• IMPORTANT: In order for cabinet to be delivered into customer’s home, entry/doorway clearance must be 34" minimum.

• Maximum weight capacity of super susan trays listed below; capacity based on equal weight distribution.

With ShelfSKU Back Dimensions

ACB36L33R 36" Left /33" Right ACB33L36R 33" Left /36" Right

• Includes one fixed shelf.

With Super SusanSKU Back Dimensions Weight Capacity

ASSCB36L33R 36" Left /33" Right 45 lbs ASSCB33L36R 33" Left /36" Right 45 lbs

Asymmetrical Corner

• L shape corner base with unequal back and door widths.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Includes two rotating wood trays attached to fixed shelving (wood trays from SSCB33).

Square Corner

• Depth modifications will be considered through a Custom Quote.

• Width modification available.

– Minimum dimension of each back is 33", maximum is 39". For SSCB cabinets, tray sizes remain same size as original cabinet.

– If either back dimension is between 33" and 353⁄4", order SCB33 or SSCB33 plus MW. – If both back dimensions are between 36" and 39" order SCB36 or SSCB36 plus MW. – To order, specify dimension and location of modification. EXAMPLE: SSCB33, HL, MW (MW back left to 341⁄2", MW back right to 361⁄2").

Top View – SCB33*, SSCB33

24"

24"

33"

9"

9"

185⁄16"

201 ⁄1

6"

24"

24"

36"

36"

12"

12"

231 ⁄1

6"

Top View – SCB36*, SSCB36

31"

33"

26"

Top ViewACB36L33R*, ASSCB36L33R

24"

33"

9"

12"

24"

36"

33"

231⁄16"

201 ⁄1

6"

Top ViewACB33L36R*, ASSCB33L36R

12"

9"

231 ⁄1

6"

36" 26"26"

24" 24"

201⁄16" 231⁄16"201⁄16"

185⁄16"185⁄16"185⁄16"

*Super susan tray not applicable. *Super susan tray not applicable. *Super susan tray not applicable. *Super susan tray not applicable.

400.252015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Easy Reach Square Corner Base Cabinets, Corner Sink Fronts

Easy Reach Square Corner Drawer Base Cabinet, 341⁄2" High

If appliance or cabinet of greater depth is planned next to corner cabinet with drawers, drawers will not open fully. To allow full access to drawers, a cabinet of same depth should be placed next to corner cabinet or a filler should be used on adjacent cabinetry, see chart for details.

Incorrect placement of appliance/deeper cabinet next to Corner Drawer Base.

Correct placement of appliance/deeper cabinet next to Corner Drawer Base using a cabinet as filler.

AB 24"

24"

A B

24"* 0" 25" 11⁄4" 26" 21⁄4" 27" 31⁄4" 28" 41⁄4" 29" 51⁄4" 30" 61⁄4"

A Depth of adjacent appliance or cabinet

B Minimum space needed between appliance/deeper cabinet and drawer base for proper operation of drawers

*Standard depth cabinet (24") does not require filler.

• Includes Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides and two installation filler strips (DBSCBIS).

• Intivo and installed drawer organization modifications not available.

• When planning a single door cabinet next to this cabinet, hinge door on side adjacent to corner drawer base to allow for clearance of knobs/pulls without using filler material.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

Three Drawers

3DBSCB36 3DBSCB39

Two Drawers

2DBSCB36 2DBSCB39

Easy Reach Square Corner Sink Front, 341⁄2" High

SCSF39 SCSF42

• Includes 6" deep end, top and bottom panels and doors. Doors are hinged separately with 170 degree opening allowance.

• Floor and sub toe kick assembly also included; shipped loose for field assembly.

• Floor is 3⁄4" thick, 48" x 48".

• Knobs or pulls may be installed on one door only.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

Top View – DBSCB36 Top View – DBSCB39

36"

36"24

"

24"

337 ⁄8"

17"

39"

39"24

"

24"

337 ⁄8"

211⁄4"

Diagonal Corner Sink Front, 341⁄2" High• Includes 81⁄2" deep end panels, 6" deep top and bottom panels,

door(s) and drawer front. Floor and toe pedestal also included; shipped loose for field assembly.

• Floor is 3⁄4" thick, 48" x 48".

• Stainless steel tilt-down trays are available factory installed or as a kit for field installation. Numbers in kit code indicate actual width of tray.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

One Door, One Drawer Front

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

Installation strips shipped loose for field install.

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

DSF36 ISSTL or R KIT-SST10 1

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

DSF42B ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1

7⁄8"

7⁄8"

DESIGN NOTE

Stainless steel tilt-down trays are available factory installed or as a kit for field installation. Numbers in kit code indicate actual width of tray.

DESIGN NOTE

400.26 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Diagonal Corner Base and Sink Base Cabinets

Corner Sink Base – One Door, One Drawer Front

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

Corner Sink Base – Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

Diagonal Front Corner Base Cabinet with Full-Height Door, 341⁄2" High

24" x 24" x 13" or 27" x 27" x 15" Sizes

13DBFH24 15DBFH27

• Includes one adjustable shelf.

• Top of cabinet is completely enclosed.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

36" x 36" Sizes

• Tops of cabinets are completely enclosed.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• IMPORTANT: In order for cabinet to be delivered into customer’s home, entry/doorway clearance must be 34" minimum.

FDSB36

LDCB36

Top View – FDSB36 36"

36"

Top View – LDCB36

24"

1915

⁄16"

13"15"

13"

27"

159 ⁄16

"

Top Views

24"

513⁄16"

15"

27"

17"

36"

36"

Diagonal Front Corner Base and Sink Base Cabinets, 341⁄2" High• 36" x 36" size is available with functional drawer or as sink base.

• Top of cabinet is completely enclosed.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• IMPORTANT: In order for cabinet to be delivered into customer’s home, entry/doorway clearance must be 34" minimum.

• Stainless steel tilt-down trays are available factory installed or as kit for field installation for diagonal sink bases. Numbers in kit code indicate actual width of tray.

32" 28"

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

DSB36 ISSTL or R KIT-SST10 1

TILT-DOWN TRAYSSKU Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

DSB42B ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1

24" 24"

17"

24"24"

Top View

17"

24"

24"

36"

36"

231 ⁄1

6"

231⁄16"

Drawer box does not apply to DSB36

185 ⁄16

"

Top View

257 ⁄16

"

24"

24"

42"

42"

32"

231⁄16"

231 ⁄1

6"26

13 ⁄16"

231⁄16"

231 ⁄1

6"

231⁄16"

231 ⁄1

6"

185 ⁄16

"

185 ⁄16

"

2215

⁄16"

513⁄16"

17"

Corner Base – One Door, One Drawer

DCB36

• Includes functional drawer and one fixed shelf.

Stainless steel tilt-down trays are available factory installed or as a kit for field installation. Numbers in kit code indicate actual width of tray.

DESIGN NOTE

Cabinet with Fixed Shelf

FDSB36

• Includes one fixed shelf.

Cabinet with Lazy Susan Unit

LDCB36

• Includes two rotating wood trays with 1⁄2" thick solid wood sides attached to fixed shelves.

• Maximum weight capapcity of lazy susan tray is 65 lbs; capacity based on equal weight distribution.

400.272015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Base Blind Corner Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Includes one 3" filler; shipped separately.

• Blind area is enclosed.

• Blind area is same width for all cabinet widths.

• Blind overlay panels (BOP) may be ordered separately for field miter and installation, see below. Corner base overlay fillers (CBFA) may also be used, see Section 1000.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – See below for width minimums/maximums. – Minimum height 221⁄2", maximum 48". – Minimum depth 12", maximum 24".

• Downgrade hinge modification (HNGNSC) not available.

Base Blind Corner Cabinets

One Door, One Drawer

SKU Door Width

BBC36 117⁄8" BBC39 147⁄8" BBC42 177⁄8"BBC45 207⁄8" BBC48 237⁄8"

• Hinge location is same as blind location.

• Specify blind location. EXAMPLE: BBC36, BLL specifies hinge left, blind left.

• Width modification: minimum 32", maximum 48".

• Includes one full-depth adjustable shelf.

241⁄16"

Base Blind Cabinet Specifications

Cabinet must be pulled a minimum of 3" from corner; refer to drawing at right for specifications when planning.

Specifications are based on 24" deep base cabinet perpendicular to blind corner cabinet. If appliance is in this location, refer to clearance requirements of appliance manufacturer for additional filler/pulling needed.

3"

3"

215⁄16"

3" Filler (included, shipped separately)

Blind Overlay Panel, 9" Wide

BOP30

• 3⁄4" thick material.

• Matches door material/finish, outside edges profiled to match door.

• Field miter, see top view drawing.

297⁄8"

Butt Doors, One Drawer

SKU Door Width

BBC48B 117⁄8"

• Specify blind location.

• Width modification: minimum 45", maximum 54".

• Includes one full-depth adjustable shelf.

241⁄16"

Use Corner Overly Fillers (shown) or Blind Overlay Panel, Order Separately

Detail of Blind Overlay Panel

application with field miter

Top View: Blind LeftNOTE: Cabinet width indicated in SKU is actual width of cabinet.

One Full-Height Door

SKU Door Width

BFHBBC36 117⁄8" BFHBBC39 147⁄8" BFHBBC42 177⁄8"BFHBBC45 207⁄8" BFHBBC48 237⁄8"

• Hinge location is same as blind location.

• Specify blind location. EXAMPLE: BFHBBC36, BLL specifies hinge left, blind left.

• Width modification: minimum 32", maximum 48".

• Includes two full-depth adjustable shelves.

Full-Height Butt Doors

SKU Door Width

BFHBBC48B 117⁄8"

• Specify blind location.

• Width modification: minimum 45", maximum 54".

• Includes two full-depth adjustable shelves.

241⁄16"

241⁄16"

Blind Right Blind Right

Blind Right Blind Right

400.28 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Base Blind Corner Cabinets

Base Blind Corner with Full Access Trays, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

Full-Height Door with Four Swing-Out Trays

SKU Door Width

BFHBC48 237⁄8"

• Hinge location is same as blind location.• Specify blind location. Example: BFHBC48, BLL indicates hinge

left, blind left.• Front trays pull out and pivot to a 90 degree open position

while back trays move into door opening. Back trays slide forward individually providing full access.

• Weight capacity of each tray: front trays - 22 lbs. each; back trays - 17 lbs. each.• Trays have non-slip maple print surface and metal side rails.• One 3" filler is included and shipped separately for field installation.• Blind area is enclosed.• Blind overlay panels (BOP) may be ordered separately for field miter and installation, see

previous page. Corner base overlay fillers (CBFA) may also be used, see Section 1000.• Cabinet/appliance adjacent to blind cabinet must be less than 251⁄2" deep for proper

clearance and operation of swing-out trays; see information below for proper planning.• Width and depth modifications not available.• Height modification available: minimum 341⁄2", maximum 48".• Downgrade hinge modification (HNGNSC) not available.

When planning with this cabinet, allow appropriate space in surrounding appliances/cabinets for proper operation of door and swing-out trays. This is especially important when installing next to appliances or cabinets which exceed standard base depth.

Top View: Blind LeftCabinet must be pulled a minimum of 3" from corner. Use of 3" filler is also required to allow clearance for doors/drawers/decorative hardware.

241⁄16"

Cabinet or appliance next to blind corner cabinet (adjacent or perpendicular) should not exceed 251⁄4" deep* with minimum width indicated in black circles. This allows blind corner door/internal trays to open without obstruction.* Consider projection of handles/knobs

3" Filler Required (Included with Blind Corner Base)

See detail at right for blind overlay panel or corner overlay filler usage.

24"

15"

24"

Deeper Cabinet or Appliance

48" (actual cabinet width)

Minimum 3"

Blind Left Pictured

Blind Right

Detail of Blind Overlay Panel application with field miter

Detail of Corner Base Overlay Filler application

DESIGN NOTE

400.292015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Base Blind Corner with Pull-Out Storage, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Hinge location is same as blind location.

• Specify blind location.

EXAMPLE: BBCPO45, BLL indicates hinge left, blind left.

• Pull-out trays swing out of cabinet giving full access to cabinet contents.

• Shelves have non-slip maple print surface with metal side rails.

• Shelf height can be adjusted in 2" increments.

• Each shelf has a maximum load capacity of 55 lbs.

• Shelves include Quiet Close mechanism for smooth and silent closing.

• One 3" filler is included and shipped separately for field installation.

• Blind area is enclosed.

• Blind area is same width for all cabinet widths.

• Blind overlay panels (BOP) may be ordered separately for field miter and installation; see page 400.27. Corner base overlay fillers (CBFA) may also be used, see Section 1000.

• Dimensional and downgrade hinge (HNGNSC) modifications not available.

• See information at right for proper planning.

One Door, One Drawer

SKU Door Width

BBCPO45 207⁄8" BBCPO48 237⁄8"

Full-Height Door

SKU Door Width

BFHBCPO45 207⁄8" BFHBCPO48 237⁄8"

Restrictor Unit

BBCPORESTRICT

• Optional restrictor unit available to limit swing of shelf to approximately 90 degrees.

• Pack of two.

When planning with this cabinet, allow appropriate space in surrounding appliances/cabinets for proper operation of door and swing-out trays. This is especially important when installing next to appliances or cabinets which exceed standard base depth.

Cabinet or appliance next to blind corner should not exceed 261⁄4" deep* with minimum width indicated in black circle. This allows internal trays to open without obstruction.

*Consider projection or handles/knobs.

Top View: Blind Right – Without Restrictor Unit

Top View: Blind Right – With Restrictor Unit

12"

Deeper Cabinet or Appliance

Base Blind Corner Cabinets

45" or 48" (actual cabinet widths)

Minimum 3"

Detail of Blind Overlay Panel application with field miter

Detail of Corner Base Overlay Filler application

See Below

See Below

241⁄16"

Blind Right

Blind Right

400.30 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Peninsula Base Blind Corner Cabinet, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High• Hinge location is same as blind location for kitchen side.

• Specify blind location. EXAMPLE: PBBC36, BLL specifies hinge left, blind left.

• Includes one 3" filler; shipped separately.

• Both front and back of cabinet has recessed toe space.

• Blind area of cabinet is enclosed.

• Blind area is same width for all cabinet widths.

• Blind overlay panels (BOP) may be ordered separately for field miter and installation, see below. Corner base overlay fillers (CBFA) may also be used, see Section 1000.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 33", maximum 48". – Minimum height 221⁄2", maximum 48". – Minimum depth 12", maximum 24".

• Downgrade hinge modification (HNGNSC) not available.

Blind Right

241⁄16"

Kitchen Side: One Door, One Drawer Peninsula Side: Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

SKU Kitchen Side Door Width

PBBC36 117⁄8" PBBC42 177⁄8" PBBC48 237⁄8"

• Includes one full-depth adjustable shelf.

Base Blind Cabinet Specifications

Cabinet must be pulled a minimum of 3" from corner; refer to drawing at right for specifications when planning.

Specifications are based on 24" deep base cabinet perpendicular to blind corner cabinet. If appliance is in this location, refer to clearance requirements of appliance manufacturer for additional filler/pulling needed.

3"

3"

215⁄16"

3" Filler (included, shipped separately)

Blind Overlay Panel, 9" Wide

BOP30

• 3⁄4" thick material.

• Matches door material/finish, outside edges profiled to match door.

• Field miter, see top view drawing.

297⁄8"

Use Corner Overlay Filler (shown) or Blind Overlay Panel, Order Separately

Detail of Blind Overlay Panel

application with field miter

Top View: Blind LeftNOTE: Cabinet width indicated in SKU is actual width of cabinet.

Peninsula Base Blind Corner Cabinets

Kitchen Side: One Full-Height Door Peninsula Side: Full-Height Butt Doors

SKU Kitchen Side Door Width

PBFHBBC36 117⁄8" PBFHBBC42 177⁄8" PBFHBBC48 237⁄8"

• Includes two full-depth adjustable shelves.

Blind Right

241⁄16"

400.312015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Angle Base Cabinets

Angle Base Cabinet, 341⁄2" High• Includes two adjustable shelves.

• Width, depth, finished end and wainscot interior modifications not available.

One Door

DBC13 DBC15

Top Views

13"

Butt Doors

DBC18B DBC21B DBC24B

15"

18"

18"

21"

21"

24"

24"

Top Views

257⁄16" 2911⁄16" 3315⁄16"

Double Angle Base Cabinet with Full-Height Doors, 341⁄2" High

BAC24

• Includes one fixed shelf.

• Width, depth and finished end modifications not available.

Top View24"

135°24" 181⁄8"

13"

24"

13"

12"12"

Angle RightAngle Left

Top View

Base Transition Angle Cabinet, 341⁄2" High

Angle Left

BTA2413L

Angle Right

BTA2413R

• Includes two adjustable shelves.

• Width modification not available.

181⁄8"

Angle Right

1⁄16"

24"1321⁄2˚

471⁄2˚

183⁄8" 211⁄4"13" 15"

400.32 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

135˚ Corner Outside/Inside Angle Base Cabinet, 341⁄2" High

Outside Angle

9" Wide

BFH09COA

12" Wide

BFH12COA

135°

24"

Hinged Left

A

Hinged Right

B

135°24"

Hinged Left

A

Hinged Right

B

24" Wide

BFH24CIA

27" Wide

BFH27CIA

21" Wide

BFH21CIA

6" Wide

BFH06COA

• Choose either outside or inside angle.

• Includes two full-height doors, hinged at outside of cabinet box.

• Includes one adjustable shelf which matches shape of cabinet; ships inside cabinet.

• Back of cabinet is constructed from 3⁄4" thick material.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

Inside AngleSKU A B

BFH06COA 6" 1513⁄16"

BFH09COA 9" 1813⁄16"

BFH12COA 12" 2113⁄16"

A indicates back width of cabinet and wall space.B indicates front width.

SKU A B

BFH21CIA 21" 109⁄16"

BFH24CIA 24" 139⁄16"

BFH27CIA 27" 169⁄16"

A indicates back width of cabinet and wall space.B indicates front width.

Angle Base Cabinets

Top View – Inside Angle

Top View – Outside Angle

400.332015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Base End Shelves

Peninsula Radius End Shelf, 341⁄2" High• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick

material. Wood and textured melamine door styles receive plywood; acrylic, foil and premium veneer door styles receive furniture board core (upgrades not available).

• All visible edges are edge banded.

• Reversible for left/right application.

• Finished toe kick assembly is shipped detached from shelf.

• Height modification available; see drawings below for examples.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

Square Top

BWN1234STL BWN1234STR BWN1534STL BWN1534STR BWN1834STL BWN1834STR

• Square top shelf is not reversible; select appropriate shelf by SKU; L indicates LEFT, R indicates RIGHT.

Top View

12", 15", 18"

24"

10" Radius

Peninsula Radius Top

PBWN1234

Peninsula Square Top

PBWN1234ST

Radius Top

BWN1234 BWN1534 BWN1834

• Reversible for left/right application.

Right

Side View of End Shelves

• Drawings are examples of configuration changes for common height modifications.

• Quantity/spacing of shelves varies based on overall height of shelf.

• Right Square Top shelves shown.

• Minimum height: 15"; maximum height: 48".

Heights 15" – 233⁄4"• One shelf opening removed.

15" 21"

137⁄8"

137⁄8"

341⁄2"

Heights 24" – 383⁄4"• Maintains two shelf openings.

147⁄8"

147⁄8"

361⁄2"

Heights 39" – 48"• One shelf opening added.

101⁄2"

39" 101⁄2"

101⁄2"

11"

11"

11"

401⁄2"

48"

131⁄2"

131⁄2"

131⁄2"

Radius End Shelf, 341⁄2" High• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick material. Wood

and textured melamine door styles receive plywood; acrylic, foil and premium veneer door styles receive furniture board core (upgrades not available).

• All visible edges are edge banded.

• Dimensional modifications are available; minimum width 103⁄4" due to radius.

• See drawings below for height modification examples.

• Finished toe kick assembly is shipped detached from shelf.

Top View123⁄4"

24"

12" Radius

Support Bracket Profile

41⁄4"

41⁄4"

400.34 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Island End Shelves

Open Shelf End with Decorative Legs, Two Shelves• Available in wood door styles only.

• Fully assembled, shipped as one piece.

• Plain or Wainscot back panel, finished on edges and face.

• Two fixed shelves with 11⁄2" thick profiled edges.

• Decorative legs in choice of three designs.

• Three width options: 251⁄2", 371⁄2" and 491⁄2".

Design Considerations for Island End Shelves:

• Height is 341⁄2" and is designed to work below standard counter.

• Plan for placement on end of base cabinet or island cabinets.

• Use as freestanding shelf, with back of panel against wall or other cabinetry. Add a wood top with edge to match shelving.

• Back panel has 3⁄4" thick molding applied to both vertical edges. Molding is finished on front and back.

• Width of shelf is measured from edge to edge of moldings on back panel.

EXAMPLE 2

A This example shows a 371⁄2" wide shelf end installed on end of cabinet run. Door/drawer front of adjacent base cabinet aligns with front edge of vertical molding of shelf end.

B 3⁄4" thick deluxe back panels have been mitered together and installed on back of base cabinet and shelf end.

C Deluxe back panel can be ordered to align flush with edge of panel from shelf end or align flush with vertical molding.

Examples (shown in top view detail)Examples refer to shelf end and butcher block end. Outlines do not show butcher block top.

EXAMPLE 1

A This example shows a 251⁄2" wide shelf end installed on end of cabinet run. Door/drawer front of adjacent base cabinet aligns with front edge of vertical molding of shelf end.

B 3⁄4" thick deluxe base panel has been installed on back of base cabinet.

C Front of deluxe panel is flush with vertical molding on panel.

Adjacent base cabinet

A

B

C

Shelf End

Adjacent base cabinet

Shelf End

A

B

C

400.352015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Island End Shelves

Style D Leg

Plain Back Panel Wainscot Back Panel Back Width

BIE24D2S BIEWC24D2S 251⁄2" BIE36D2S BIEWC36D2S 371⁄2" BIE48D2S BIEWC48D2S 491⁄2"

• Molding and accent details:

– Shelving edge detail: ECMWF2.

– Decorative leg: TRNLEGD2SR.

– Vertical molding on edges of back panel: PSSB.

Style F Leg

Plain Back Panel Wainscot Back Panel Back Width

BIE24F2S BIEWC24F2S 251⁄2" BIE36F2S BIEWC36F2S 371⁄2" BIE48F2S BIEWC48F2S 491⁄2"

• Molding and accent details:

– Shelving edge detail: ECMWF2.

– Decorative leg: TRNLEGF2S.

– Vertical molding on edges of back panel: PSSB.

Style G Leg

Plain Back Panel Wainscot Back Panel Back Width

BIE24G2S BIEWC24G2S 251⁄2" BIE36G2S BIEWC36G2S 371⁄2" BIE48G2S BIEWC48G2S 491⁄2"

• Molding and accent details:

– Shelving edge detail: ECME2.

– Decorative leg: TRNLEGG2S.

– Vertical molding on edges of back panel: PSSA.

Island End Shelves• Available in wood door styles only.

• Includes two fixed shelves with 11⁄2" thick profiled edge treatment.

• Dimensions: 341⁄2" high x 18" deep.

• See Section 800 for further details of moldings and accents.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments.

– Minimum width 15", maximum 491⁄2" (specify desired back width). – Minimum height 251⁄2", maximum 341⁄2". – Minimum depth 9", maximum 30".

• John Boos & Co.® butcher block tops available, see next page.

400.36 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

400BASE CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

With Butcher Block Top

Top Cart SKU Width Width

PBICBB24G1S 251⁄2" 23" PBICBB30G1S 311⁄2" 29" PBICBB36G1S 371⁄2" 35" PBICBB42G1S 431⁄2" 41" PBICBB48G1S 491⁄2" 47"

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Height may be decreased; minimum 321⁄2" (adjustable to 311⁄2" on site through casters).

351⁄2"– 361⁄2"high243⁄4" deep

333⁄4"– 343⁄4"high221⁄4" deep

13⁄4" Thick

4" Thick

Island Cart• Available in wood door styles only.

• Island carts include functional drawer on front with matching drawer fronts applied to back and both ends. Decorative slat shelf is integrated into square, Style G legs.

• 48" carts receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, downgrades not available.

• Available with 13⁄4" thick John Boos & Co.® butcher block end grain maple top treated with penetrating oil finish; butcher block ships separately.

• Carts also available without butcher block top.

• Casters have natural finished maple wheel with locking mechanism.

• Height can be adjusted 1" on site through casters.

Without Butcher Block Top

Cart SKU Width

PBIC24G1S* 23" PBIC30G1S 29" PBIC36G1S 35" PBIC42G1S 41" PBIC48G1S 47"

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments. Minimum width 23", maximum 47" (specify cart width); minimum depth 221⁄4", maximum 27".

• Height may be decreased; minimum 303⁄4" (adjustable to 293⁄4" on site through casters).

*Modify depth not available.

Island Carts, Butcher Block Tops

13⁄4" Thick Width Approx. Weight

1BTOP2425 251⁄2" 31 lbs. 1BTOP2431 311⁄2" 38 lbs. 1BTOP2437 371⁄2" 46 lbs. 1BTOP2443 431⁄2" 53 lbs. 1BTOP2449 491⁄2" 60 lbs.

4" Thick Width Approx. Weight

4BTOP2425 251⁄2" 67 lbs. 4BTOP2437 371⁄2" 100 lbs. 4BTOP2449 491⁄2" 134 lbs.

Butcher Block Tops, 243⁄4" Deep• John Boos & Co.® butcher block end grain maple top treated with

penetrating oil finish.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

500.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

500.3 Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

500.4 641⁄2" High Full-Height Door Utility Cabinets

500.5 Tall Cabinets with Shelves

500.6 Tall Cabinets with Drawers

500.7 Tall Cabinets with Roll-Out Trays

500.8 Tall Pantry Cabinets

500.9 641⁄2" High and Tall Pull-Out Storage Cabinets

500.10 641⁄2" High and Tall Oven Cabinets

500.12 Tall Angle Cabinets, Tall Bookcase Cabinets

500.13 Tall End Shelves

In This Section

500.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

Tall Cabinet Specifications / Ordering GuidelinesEnd Panel Information

• Standard construction is 3⁄4" thick furniture board with natural maple melamine interior/exterior; white melamine and other upgrades available.

Door Information• Doors 54" high or greater may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels dependent on the

door style; see individual door pages in Section 200 for details.

• For your reference, cabinets with doors 54" high or greater are depicted in this section with a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels. EXCEPTION: Door height for tall cabinets with drawers varies by cabinet height see page 500.6 for further details.

Configuration Information

• Standard depths: 12" and 24".

• Standard heights: 641⁄2", 84", 87", 90", 93" and 96".

• Cabinets up to 24" wide are available in single door configuration.

• Cabinets 24" to 36" wide are available in butt door configuration, 1⁄8" gap between doors.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments; see Section 1100 for details, see individual cabinet specifications for exceptions.

1⁄4" thick full back

3⁄4" thick ends

33⁄4" deep toe41⁄2"

3⁄4" thick bottom

3⁄4" thick shelves

3⁄4" thick top

unfinished toe base shipped separately for cabinets over 90" high

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to specify finished ends for all exposed ends of cabinetry, see end treatment options in Section 1100 for details.

DESIGN NOTE

See Section 1100 for general details of dimensional modifications; see individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual for exceptions. NOTE: Cabinets with drawers or roll-out trays have a maximum depth of 24".

• Drawings in this section are intended to show general configuration; all construction details may not be reflected. Doors may be depicted open beyond actual hinge allowance to show interior details.

• Adjustable shelving is 3⁄4" thick; shelf quantities listed in parentheses by cabinet heights.

Toe Space Information

• Unfinished toe base for cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater is separate from cabinet and must be installed on site. Toe base may be ordered loose for other heights (TKL) or omitted for all heights (TSR). Leg leveling system is also available. See Section 1100 for details.

Order Information

• For one door cabinets, specify hinge location.

500.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

641⁄2" High Full-Height Door Utility Cabinets

Full-Height Door Utility Cabinet

One Door, 24" Deep

641⁄2" High (5)

13UFH1264 13UFH1564 13UFH1864 13UFH2164 13UFH2464

Butt Doors, 13" Deep

641⁄2" High (5)

13UFH2464B 13UFH2764B 13UFH3064B 13UFH3364B 13UFH3664B

641⁄2" High (5)

24UFH1264 24UFH1564 24UFH1864 24UFH2164 24UFH2464

Butt Doors, 24" Deep

641⁄2" High (5)

24UFH2464B 24UFH2764B 24UFH3064B 24UFH3364B 24UFH3664B

• Matching End (FHMEL, FHMER, FHMEB)

• Modify Depth (MD)

• Installed Roll-Out Trays (ISOS)

One Door, 13" Deep

500.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Tall Cabinets with Shelves

Tall Cabinet with Shelves, 13" DeepOne Door (Upper and Lower)

90" High (6)

13UCS129013UCS1590 13UCS1890 13UCS2190 13UCS2490

Butt Doors (Upper and Lower)

90" High (6)

13UCS2490B 13UCS2790B 13UCS3090B 13UCS3390B 13UCS3690B

Tall Cabinet with Shelves, 24" DeepOne Door (Upper and Lower)

90" High (6)

24UCS129024UCS1590 24UCS1890 24UCS2190 24UCS2490

Butt Doors (Upper and Lower)

90" High (6)

24UCS2490B 24UCS2790B 24UCS3090B 24UCS3390B 24UCS3690B

84" High (5)

13UCS128413UCS1584 13UCS1884 13UCS2184 13UCS2484

84" High (5)

13UCS2484B 13UCS2784B 13UCS3084B 13UCS3384B 13UCS3684B

84" High (5)

24UCS128424UCS1584 24UCS1884 24UCS2184 24UCS2484

84" High (5)

24UCS2484B 24UCS2784B 24UCS3084B 24UCS3384B 24UCS3684B

96" High (6)

13UCS129613UCS1596 13UCS1896 13UCS2196 13UCS2496

96" High (6)

24UCS129624UCS1596 24UCS1896 24UCS2196 24UCS2496

96" High (6)

13UCS2496B 13UCS2796B 13UCS3096B 13UCS3396B 13UCS3696B

96" High (6)

24UCS2496B 24UCS2796B 24UCS3096B 24UCS3396B 24UCS3696B

93" High (6)

13UCS129313UCS1593 13UCS1893 13UCS2193 13UCS2493

93" High (6)

13UCS2493B 13UCS2793B 13UCS3093B 13UCS3393B 13UCS3693B

93" High (6)

24UCS129324UCS1593 24UCS1893 24UCS2193 24UCS2493

93" High (6)

24UCS2493B 24UCS2793B 24UCS3093B 24UCS3393B 24UCS3693B

87" High (5)

13UCS128713UCS1587 13UCS1887 13UCS2187 13UCS2487

87" High (5)

13UCS2487B 13UCS2787B 13UCS3087B 13UCS3387B 13UCS3687B

87" High (5)

24UCS128724UCS1587 24UCS1887 24UCS2187 24UCS2487

87" High (5)

24UCS2487B 24UCS2787B 24UCS3087B 24UCS3387B 24UCS3687B

500.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Tall Cabinets with Drawers

Two Drawers

• Drawer height aligns with Two Drawer Base (2DB), 341⁄2" high.

One Door, Two Drawers

Tall Cabinet with Drawers, 24" Deep• Magnetic catches are installed at top and bottom of door/opening.

• Doors 54" high or greater may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels dependent on door style; see individual door pages in Section 200 for details. See chart at right for door heights.

90" High (4)

24UC2DB129024UC2DB1590 24UC2DB1890 24UC2DB2190 24UC2DB2490

Butt Doors, Two Drawers

90" High (4)

24UC2DB2490B 24UC2DB2790B 24UC2DB3090B 24UC2DB3390B 24UC2DB3690B

84" High (4)

24UC2DB128424UC2DB1584 24UC2DB1884 24UC2DB2184 24UC2DB2484

84" High (4)

24UC2DB2484B 24UC2DB2784B 24UC2DB3084B 24UC2DB3384B 24UC2DB3684B

90" High (4)

24UC3DB1290 24UC3DB1590 24UC3DB1890 24UC3DB2190 24UC3DB2490

Butt Doors, Three Drawers

90" High (4)

24UC3DB2490B 24UC3DB2790B 24UC3DB3090B 24UC3DB3390B 24UC3DB3690B

84" High (4)

24UC3DB1284 24UC3DB1584 24UC3DB1884 24UC3DB2184 24UC3DB2484

84" High (4)

24UC3DB2484B 24UC3DB2784B 24UC3DB3084B 24UC3DB3384B 24UC3DB3684B

Three Drawers

• Drawer height aligns with Three Drawer Base (3DB), 341⁄2" high.

One Door, Three Drawers

96" High (4)

24UC2DB129624UC2DB1596 24UC2DB1896 24UC2DB2196

24UC2DB2496

96" High (4)

24UC2DB2496B 24UC2DB2796B 24UC2DB3096B 24UC2DB3396B 24UC2DB3696B

96" High (4)

24UC3DB1296 24UC3DB1596 24UC3DB1896 24UC3DB2196 24UC3DB2496

96" High (4)

24UC3DB2496B 24UC3DB2796B 24UC3DB3096B 24UC3DB3396B 24UC3DB3696B

93" High (4)

24UC2DB129324UC2DB1593 24UC2DB1893 24UC2DB2193 24UC2DB2493

93" High (4)

24UC2DB2493B 24UC2DB2793B 24UC2DB3093B 24UC2DB3393B 24UC2DB3693B

87" High (4)

24UC2DB128724UC2DB1587 24UC2DB1887 24UC2DB2187 24UC2DB2487

87" High (4)

24UC2DB2487B 24UC2DB2787B 24UC2DB3087B 24UC2DB3387B 24UC2DB3687B

93" High (4)

24UC3DB1293 24UC3DB1593 24UC3DB1893 24UC3DB2193 24UC3DB2493

93" High (4)

24UC3DB2493B 24UC3DB2793B 24UC3DB3093B 24UC3DB3393B 24UC3DB3693B

87" High (4)

24UC3DB1287 24UC3DB1587 24UC3DB1887 24UC3DB2187 24UC3DB2487

87" High (4)

24UC3DB2487B 24UC3DB2787B 24UC3DB3087B 24UC3DB3387B 24UC3DB3687B

Cabinet Height Door Height

84" 493⁄8"

87" 523⁄8"

90" 553⁄8"

93" 583⁄8"

96" 613⁄8"

500.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Tall Cabinets with Roll-Out Trays

Butt Doors (Upper and Lower), Four Roll-Out Trays

One Door (Upper and Lower), Four Roll-Out Trays

90" High (2)

24UT1590-4 24UT1890-4 24UT2190-4 24UT2490-4

90" High (2)

24UT2490B-4 24UT2790B-4 24UT3090B-4 24UT3390B-4 24UT3690B-4

Tall Cabinet with Roll-Out Trays, 24" Deep• Includes four adjustable roll-out trays in lower section.

• See below for roll-out tray information and upgrade option.

For proper clearance and operation of roll-out trays, doors of this cabinet must open to a minimum of 90°. When planning directly next to cabinets/structures greater in depth, we recommend using a minimum of 11⁄2" filler space. Filler width is dependent upon width of door, decorative hardware and depth of opposing cabinet/structure. See illustration for example. If using a single door cabinet, plan for hinging on opposite end to eliminate need for filler.

84" High (1)

24UT1584-4 24UT1884-4 24UT2184-4 24UT2484-4

84" High (1)

24UT2484B-4 24UT2784B-4 24UT3084B-4 24UT3384B-4 24UT3684B-4

Top View

96" High (2)

24UT1596-4 24UT1896-4 24UT2196-4 24UT2496-4

87" High (1)

24UT1587-4 24UT1887-4 24UT2187-4 24UT2487-4

93" High (2)

24UT1593-4 24UT1893-4 24UT2193-4 24UT2493-4

96" High (2)

24UT2496B-4 24UT2796B-4 24UT3096B-4 24UT3396B-4 24UT3696B-4

87" High (1)

24UT2487B-4 24UT2787B-4 24UT3087B-4 24UT3387B-4 24UT3687B-4

93" High (2)

24UT2493B-4 24UT2793B-4 24UT3093B-4 24UT3393B-4 24UT3693B-4

DESIGN NOTE

• Modify Depth (MD)

• Finished Ends (FETL, FETR, FETB)

• 61⁄2" High Roll-Out Trays (DDSOS)

Roll-Out Tray Upgrade Option

NEW! Standard roll-out trays are now 31⁄2" high.

• Roll-out tray height may be modified to 61⁄2" high.

• Prefix modification code below with quantity.

• Not required on all roll-out trays in cabinet.

EXAMPLE: 24UT3096B-4, 2DDSOS specifies two roll-out trays remain 31⁄2" high and two trays are upgraded to 61⁄2" high.

• Guides remain standard; modifications available, see Section 1100 for details.

61⁄2" High Scooped Front

__DDSOS

31⁄2" high roll-out tray with scooped front

61⁄2" high roll-out traywith scooped front

Standard Roll-Out Tray

DDSOS Option

500.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Tall Pantry Cabinets

One Door (Upper and Lower)

90" High (2)

24PC1890

Butt Doors (Upper and Lower)

90" High (2)

24PC3690B

For proper clearance and operation of swing-out shelves, doors of this cabinet must open to maximum allowance for concealed hinges. When planning directly next to cabinets/structures greater in depth, we recommend using a minimum of 11⁄2" filler space. Filler width is dependent upon width of door, decorative hardware and depth of opposing cabinet/structure. If using a single door cabinet, plan for hinging on opposite end to eliminate need for filler.

Tall Cabinet with Pantry Kit, 24" Deep• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Swing-out unit(s) and door rack(s) are packaged separately from cabinet to prevent damage in shipping. Field installation required.

84" High (1)

24PC1884

84" High (1)

24PC3684B

• Includes two door racks with shallow shelving, two swing-out units and eight adjustable shallow shelves for back of cabinet.

• Includes door rack with shallow shelving, swing-out unit and four adjustable shallow shelves for back of cabinet.

96" High (2)

24PC1896

93" High (2)

24PC1893

87" High (1)

24PC1887

96" High (2)

24PC3696B

93" High (2)

24PC3693B

87" High (1)

24PC3687B

DESIGN NOTE

500.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

641⁄2" High and Tall Pull-Out Storage Cabinets

Pull-Out Storage Cabinet, 24" Deep • Includes pull-out shelving rack fixed to door; constructed from hardwood and plywood with clear coat applied.

• Rack is open on both sides and includes two adjustable shelves.

• Storage rack is same height for all cabinet heights.

• See individual cabinet specifications below for drawer guide information.

641⁄2" High, One Door• Height modifications not available.

Tall Cabinets, One Door (Upper and Lower)• Specify hinge location of upper door.

• Height modifications available in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 72", maximum 96". Dimension is reduced from upper door section; storage rack remains same height.

• Includes two sets of Quiet Close guides.

• Heavy Duty Quiet Close is optional upgrade for 21"– 24" depths.

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments.

– Minimum width 9", maximum 12". – Minimum depth 12", maximum 24".

15" – 24" Wide

93" High (2)

24UPS0993 24UPS1293

96" High (2)

24UPS0996 24UPS1296

96" High (2)

24UPS1596 24UPS1896 24UPS2196 24UPS2496

93" High (2)

24UPS1593 24UPS1893 24UPS2193 24UPS2493

641⁄2" High

24UPS0964 24UPS1264

9" and 12" Wide

641⁄2" High

24UPS1564 24UPS1864 24UPS2164 24UPS2464

• Includes two sets of Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, downgrade options not available.

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments.

– Minimum width 121⁄4", maximum 24".– Minimum depth 21", maximum 24".

84" High (1)

24UPS0984 24UPS1284

84" High (1)

24UPS1584 24UPS1884 24UPS2184 24UPS2484

Adjustable Shelves

Adjustable Shelves

641⁄2" High Tall

641⁄2" High Tall

51"

67⁄8" or 97⁄8"

51"

127⁄8", 157⁄8", 187⁄8" or 217⁄8"

90" High (2)

24UPS0990 24UPS1290

87" High (1)

24UPS0987 24UPS1287

90" High (2)

24UPS1590 24UPS1890 24UPS2190 24UPS2490

87" High (1)

24UPS1587 24UPS1887 24UPS2187 24UPS2487

500.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

641⁄2" High and Tall Oven Cabinets

Tall Oven Cabinets (page 500.10 to 500.11)• 3⁄4" thick square edge appliance overlay panel attached to case with cam cleat system; matches

door material/finish, edge banded all four edges. Panels are flush with doors/drawer fronts on cabinet. Panel may be field or factory cut for appliances.

• Back of cabinet is open in appliance area to allow for easier installation and additional clearance.

• For field cut-outs, an oven shelf kit (DOSK) can be ordered separately for field installation of fixed floor. See Section 900 for details.

• Factory cut-outs available (OCM, DOCM, TOCM); oven shelf kits included. See Section 1100 for details.

• If using oven shelf kit, allow 29⁄16" room for shelf and cleat system.• Maximum field cut-out dimensions:

– 11⁄2" less cabinet width. – 11⁄2" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is not used. – 35⁄16" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is used. – See individual cabinet specifications for panel height information.

• Maximum factory cut-out dimensions: – 11⁄2" less cabinet width. – 11⁄2" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is not used. – 51⁄8" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is used. – See individual cabinet specifications for panel height information.

• Replacement appliance overlay panels available, see Section 1200.• Factory cut-outs do not affect door/drawer size or position.• Height modifications available in 1⁄4" increments, see individual cabinet specifications for

minimums/maximums.• If cabinet height is modified, height adjustment will be applied to door sections. If cabinet style

does not include doors, height adjustment will be applied to appliance overlay panel.

Vertical Dimensional Details for Tall Oven Cabinets• Vertical dimensions listed are door, drawer front and appliance overlay panel heights.• Toe space dimensions are 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.• Unfinished toe base assembly is shipped separately on cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater.• Dimensions of overall cabinet heights shown with symbols ( , , , , ) coordinate with individual door heights with same symbol.

OCA

* Appliance panel may be field or factory cut. OCC OCK OCJ

TOE SPACE TOE SPACE TOE SPACE TOE SPACE

147⁄8" 177⁄8" 207⁄8" 237⁄8" 267⁄8"

207⁄8" 237⁄8" 267⁄8" 297⁄8" 327⁄8"

213⁄4"*

61⁄2"

147⁄8"

147⁄8"

403⁄8"*

237⁄8"

573⁄4"*

61⁄2" 61⁄2"

531⁄4"*

641⁄2"

84" 87" 90" 93" 96"

147⁄8" 177⁄8" 207⁄8" 237⁄8" 267⁄8"

DESIGN NOTE

Factory Appliance Cut-Out Modifications

OCM includes one opening, use for single appliance or combination appliance.

DOCM includes two openings, use for two separate appliances.

TOCM includes three openings, use for three separate appliances.

• Appliance Cut-Out (OCM, DOCM, TOCM)

• Finished Ends (FETL, FETR, FETB)

• Tray Divider (3TDW)

500.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

641⁄2" High and Tall Oven Cabinets

Oven Cabinet, Style A, 24" DeepButt Doors Above and Below

90" High (1)

OCA2490B OCA2790B OCA3090B OCA3390B OCA3690B

Oven Cabinet, Style C, 24" DeepButt Doors Above and Drawer Below

90" High (1)

OCC2490B OCC2790B OCC3090B OCC3390B OCC3690B

84" High (0)

OCA2484B OCA2784B OCA3084B OCA3384B OCA3684B

84" High (0)

OCC2484B OCC2784B OCC3084B OCC3384B OCC3684B

• Maximum field and factory cut-out height if oven shelf kit is not used = 561⁄4".

• Height modification: minimum 81", maximum 96".• OCM, DOCM and TOCM cut-outs available.

• Maximum field and factory cut-out height if oven shelf kit is not used = 387⁄8".

• Height modification: minimum 81", maximum 96".• OCM, DOCM and TOCM cut-outs available.

96" High (2)

OCA2496B OCA2796B OCA3096B OCA3396B OCA3696B

96" High (2)

OCC2496B OCC2796B OCC3096B OCC3396B OCC3696B

Built-In Appliance Cabinet, Style K, 24" DeepButt Doors Above, Two Drawers Below, Pull-Out Surface

90" High (2)

OCK2490B OCK2790B OCK3090B OCK3390B OCK3690B

84" High (1)

OCK2484B OCK2784B OCK3084B OCK3384B OCK3684B

• Maximum field and factory cut-out height if oven shelf kit is not used = 201⁄4".

• OCM cut-out available; DOCM and TOCM not available.• Bottom two drawers align with a Two Drawer Base (2DB), 341⁄2"

high. • Top drawer front is slab for all door styles and pulls out to access

work surface. • Pull-out work surface is 3⁄4" thick solid maple construction with a 11⁄2"

edge molding in natural finish; not intended as a cutting surface.• Height modification: minimum 75", maximum 96".

96" High (2)

OCK2496B OCK2796B OCK3096B OCK3396B OCK3696B

Oven Cabinet, Style J, 24" Deep Drawer Below

641⁄2" High

OCJ2464 OCJ2764 OCJ3064 OCJ3364 OCJ3664

• Maximum field and factory cut-out height if oven shelf kit is not used = 513⁄4".

• Height modification: minimum 481⁄4", maximum 641⁄2".

• OCM, DOCM and TOCM cut-outs available.

403⁄8"213⁄4"

573⁄4"

531⁄4"

93" High (1)

OCA2493B OCA2793B OCA3093B OCA3393B OCA3693B

87" High (0)

OCA2487B OCA2787B OCA3087B OCA3387B OCA3687B

93" High (1)

OCC2493B OCC2793B OCC3093B OCC3393B OCC3693B

87" High (0)

OCC2487B OCC2787B OCC3087B OCC3387B OCC3687B

93" High (2)

OCK2493B OCK2793B OCK3093B OCK3393B OCK3693B

87" High (1)

OCK2487B OCK2787B OCK3087B OCK3387B OCK3687B

500.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Tall Angle Cabinets, Tall Bookcase Cabinets

Butt Doors (Upper and Lower)

90" High (6)

DUC1890B DUC2190B DUC2490B

Tall Angle Cabinet• Width, depth, finished end and wainscot interior back modifications

not available.

One Door (Upper and Lower)

90" High (6)

DUC1390 DUC1590

13" 15"

15"13"

211⁄4"183⁄8"

Top View – DUC13 Top View – DUC15

18"

18"

257⁄16"

21"

21"2911⁄16"

24"

24"

3315⁄16"

Top View – DUC18

Top View – DUC21 Top View – DUC24

84" High (5)

DUC1384 DUC1584

84" High (5)

DUC1884B DUC2184B DUC2484B

Tall Bookcase Cabinet (US)

Tall Bookcase Cabinets• See Section 700 for complete SKU listing of bookcase cabinets.

96" High (6)

DUC1396 DUC1596

96" High (6)

DUC1896B DUC2196B DUC2496B

93" High (6)

DUC1893B DUC2193B DUC2493B

87" High (5)

DUC1887B DUC2187B DUC2487B

93" High (6)

DUC1393 DUC1593

87" High (5)

DUC1387 DUC1587

Tall Bookcase Cabinet with Frame (USF)

500.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Tall End Shelves

Radius Top

90" High

UWN1390

Top View

10" Radius

133⁄8"

851⁄2"791⁄2"

123⁄8"

84" High 87" High

Square Top

90" High

UWN1390STL UWN1390STR

96" High

911⁄2"

121⁄4"

Tall End Shelves with Radius Shelving• Constructed from 3⁄4" material. Wood and textured melamine door styles receive plywood; acrylic, foil and premium veneer door styles receive

furniture board (upgrades not available).

• All visible edges are edge banded.

• Finished toe space pedestal is shipped separately and must be installed on site.

• Shelf spacing shown in each illustration below is consistent for entire shelf unit.

• Dimensional modifications available.

• Minimum width is 103⁄4" due to radius.

• Height modification: minimum 72", maximum 96". Number of shelves and/or height of openings will be adjusted accordingly.

84" High

UWN1384

13"24"

84" High

UWN1384STL UWN1384STR

• Shelf cannot be flipped; indicate choice of Left or Right by SKU selection; UWN1384STR specifies right (shown).

84" High 87" High

96" High

Top View

10" Radius

133⁄8"

851⁄2"791⁄2"

123⁄8"

911⁄2"

121⁄4"

96" High

UWN1396

93" High

UWN1393

87" High

UWN1387

96" High

UWN1396STL UWN1396STR

93" High

UWN1393STL UWN1393STR

87" High

UWN1387STL UWN1387STR

90" High

93" High

13"24"

13"24"

13"24"

13"24"

13"24"

90" High

821⁄2"

127⁄8"

13"24"

881⁄2"

137⁄8"

13"24"

93" High

821⁄2"

127⁄8"

13"24"

881⁄2"

137⁄8"

13"24"

500.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

500TALL CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

600.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

600.3 Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

600.4 Vanity Base Cabinets

600.5 Vanity Drawer Base, Vanity Base with Pull-Out Waste Container

600.6 Vanity Sink Base Cabinets

600.8 Combination Vanity Sink Base Cabinets

600.11 Diagonal Vanity, Angle Vanity Cabinets

600.12 Vanity Linen Cabinets

600.13 Vanity Wall Cabinets

In This Section

600.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vanity Cabinet Specifications / Ordering GuidelinesEnd Panel Information

• Standard construction is 3⁄4" thick furniture board with natural maple melamine interior/exterior; white melamine and other upgrades available.

Configuration Information

• Standard depths: 18" and 21".

• Standard heights: 32" and 341⁄2".

• Cabinets up to 24" wide are available in single door configuration.

• Cabinets 24" to 45" wide are available in butt door configuration with a 1⁄8" gap between doors. Cabinets greater than 36" wide that include shelving have a center partition for additional support.

• 48" wide cabinets receive two sets of butt doors and center partition; see SKUs ending in F.

• Cabinets up to 48" wide receive full width drawers/drawer fronts. Two drawer/drawer front option (WTD) is available, see Section 1100 for details.

• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers, full width roll-out trays or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

• Combination vanity cabinets (doors/drawer stacks) are available 24" to 72" wide, see this section for configuration details.

• Vanity sink base cabinets include full backs. Plumbing accommodations must be made at time of installation.

• Vanity sink base cabinets do not include shelving and are not drilled for shelving.

• Adjustable shelving is 3⁄4" thick; shelf quantities for cabinets that receive shelving listed in parentheses by cabinet heights.

• Drawings in this section are intended to show general configuration; all construction details may not be reflected. Doors may be depicted open beyond actual hinge allowance to show interior details.

Toe Space Information

• Unfinished toe base for vanity linen cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater is separate from cabinet and must be installed on site. Toe base may be ordered loose for other heights (TKL) or omitted for all heights (TSR). Leg leveling system is also available. See Section 1100 for details.

Order Information

• For one door cabinets, specify hinge location.

Stainless Steel Tilt-Down Trays

• Stainless steel tilt-down trays are available for vanity sink base cabinets with false drawer fronts; either factory installed or as kit for field installation.

• See individual cabinet specifications in rest of this section for availability and order codes.

• Numbers in stainless steel tilt-down tray kit SKUs indicate actual width of tray; same sizes will be utilized in installed modification.

• For factory installed options, L, R or B at end of code signifies location of trays on cabinets with two drawer fronts; for field installation order one kit per drawer front. For single drawer front configuration either L or R may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: 21VSB24, ISSTL; may also specify 21VSB24, ISSTR.

• See Section 900 and 1100 for additional details on kits and installed options.

Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

1⁄4" thick full back

3⁄4" thick ends

3⁄4" thick bottom

back stretcher

front stretcher intermediate

stretcher (located under drawers/drawer fronts)

33⁄4" deep

toe

41⁄2"

cabinet with 3⁄4" thick center partition

3⁄4" thick shelves

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to specify finished ends for all exposed ends of cabinetry, see end treatment options in Section 1100 for details.

DESIGN NOTE

See Section 1100 for general details of dimensional modifications; see individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual for exceptions. NOTE: Cabinets with drawers or roll-out trays have a maximum depth of 24".

600.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Vanity Base Cabinet• Cabinets over 36" wide with full width drawers, full width roll-out trays or split drawers (WTD option) receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides;

downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21" – 24". See Section 1100 for details.

341⁄2" High (1)

18AHVB12 18AHVB15 18AHVB18 18AHVB21 18AHVB24

Four Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition

21" Deep

32" High (1)

18VB12 18VB15 18VB18 18VB21 18VB24

Butt Doors, One Drawer

18" Deep

341⁄2" High (1)

18AHVB24B 18AHVB27B 18AHVB30B 18AHVB33B 18AHVB36B

32" High (1)

18VB24B 18VB27B 18VB30B 18VB33B 18VB36B

Butt Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition

21" Deep

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

Vanity Base Cabinets

One Door, One Drawer

18" Deep

341⁄2" High (1)

21AHVB12 21AHVB15 21AHVB18 21AHVB21 21AHVB24

32" High (1)

21VB12 21VB15 21VB18 21VB21 21VB24

21" Deep

21" Deep

341⁄2" High (2)

21AHVB39B 21AHVB42B 21AHVB45B

32" High (2)

21VB39B 21VB42B 21VB45B

341⁄2" High (2)

21AHVB48F

32" High (2)

21VB48F

341⁄2" High (1)

21AHVB24B 21AHVB27B 21AHVB30B 21AHVB33B 21AHVB36B

32" High (1)

21VB24B 21VB27B 21VB30B 21VB33B 21VB36B

600.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vanity Drawer Base Cabinet

• Height modification available: 281⁄2" (drawer front heights match DDRB, see dimensional specifications in Section 100).

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments:

– Minimum width 9", maximum 36". – Minimum depth 12", maximum 24".

341⁄2" High

18AHVDB12 18AHVDB15 18AHVDB18 18AHVDB21 18AHVDB24 18AHVDB27 18AHVDB30 18AHVDB33 18AHVDB36

32" High

18VDB12 18VDB15 18VDB18 18VDB21 18VDB24 18VDB27 18VDB30 18VDB33 18VDB36

Three Drawers

18" Deep 21" Deep

341⁄2" High

21AHVDB12 21AHVDB15 21AHVDB18 21AHVDB21 21AHVDB24 21AHVDB27 21AHVDB30 21AHVDB33 21AHVDB36

32" High

21VDB12 21VDB15 21VDB18 21VDB21 21VDB24 21VDB27 21VDB30 21VDB33 21VDB36

Vanity Drawer Base, Vanity Base with Pull-Out Waste Container

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

Vanity Base Cabinet with Pull-Out Waste Container, 21" Deep• Includes functional top drawer with fixed floor below and pull-out door attached to waste containment system.

• Scooped drawer box of waste containment system includes plywood deck with cut-outs for waste baskets; operates on Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides.

• Includes one 28 qt. waste container.

• Replacement waste container available, see Section 1200.

• Height modification available; minimum 32", maximum 48".

• Width and depth modifications not available.

341⁄2" High

21AHV15WB 21AHV18WB

32" High

21V15WB 21V18WB

One Door, One Drawer

341⁄2" High

21AHV15WBS 21AHV18WBS

32" High

21V15WBS 21V18WBS

One Door, One Drawer, Automated Drive

• Cabinets including Automated Drive open with a light touch of your hand, hip, knee or foot.

• Electrical information: – Electrical outlet required. – Automated Drive is factory installed in back of cabinet. – Transformer and connector ships separately; installer to drill back or end panel to install. – Low power consumption, approximately 3.5 kWh per year. – Drawer can be opened manually during power outages.

• Automated Drive features: – Electrical drive triggers opening signal. – Dampening function ensures pull-out closes securely regardless of force used. – Leaning protection feature prevents unintentional opening. – Auto open feature interrupted if resistance is encountered. – Integrated dripping water protection if water gets in cabinet.

• Finished Ends (FEL, FER, FEB)

• Installed Tiered Cutlery Divider (ITCD, ITCDL, ITCDR)

• Modify Depth (MD)

Automated Drive Detail

600.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Full-Height Door Vanity Sink Base Cabinet• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

341⁄2" High

18AHFVSB24B 18AHFVSB27B 18AHFVSB30B 18AHFVSB33B 18AHFVSB36B 18AHFVSB39B 18AHFVSB42B 18AHFVSB45B

32" High

18FVSB24B 18FVSB27B 18FVSB30B 18FVSB33B 18FVSB36B 18FVSB39B 18FVSB42B 18FVSB45B

Butt Doors

18" Deep

341⁄2" High

18AHFVSB18 18AHFVSB21 18AHFVSB24

32" High

18FVSB18 18FVSB21 18FVSB24

One Door

18" Deep

21" Deep

21" Deep

341⁄2" High

21AHFVSB18 21AHFVSB21 21AHFVSB24

32" High

21FVSB18 21FVSB21 21FVSB24

341⁄2" High

21AHFVSB24B 21AHFVSB27B 21AHFVSB30B 21AHFVSB33B 21AHFVSB36B 21AHFVSB39B 21AHFVSB42B 21AHFVSB45B

32" High

21FVSB24B 21FVSB27B 21FVSB30B 21FVSB33B 21FVSB36B 21FVSB39B 21FVSB42B 21FVSB45B

Vanity Sink Base Cabinets

• Finished Ends (FEL, FER, FEB)

• Installed Roll-out Trays (ISOS)

• Installed Sink Caddy (ICADDYL, ICADDYR)

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

600.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vanity Sink Base Cabinet• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

341⁄2" High

18AHVSB18 18AHVSB21 18AHVSB24

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

18" Deep

341⁄2" High

18AHVSB24B 18AHVSB27B 18AHVSB30B 18AHVSB33B 18AHVSB36B 18AHVSB39B 18AHVSB42B 18AHVSB45B

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTL or R KIT-SST13 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST16 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST22 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST25 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST28 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1 ISSTD KIT-SST16D 2 ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2 ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2

32" High

18VSB18 18VSB21 18VSB24

32" High

18VSB24B 18VSB27B 18VSB30B 18VSB33B 18VSB36B 18VSB39B 18VSB42B 18VSB45B

Four Doors, One Drawer Front, Center Partition

18" Deep

341⁄2" High

18AHVSB48F

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTD KIT-SST22D 2

32" High

18VSB48F

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

Vanity Sink Base Cabinets

One Door, One Drawer Front

18" Deep 21" Deep

341⁄2" High

21AHVSB18 21AHVSB21 21AHVSB24

32" High

21VSB18 21VSB21 21VSB24

21" Deep

21" Deep

341⁄2" High

21AHVSB24B 21AHVSB27B 21AHVSB30B 21AHVSB33B 21AHVSB36B 21AHVSB39B 21AHVSB42B 21AHVSB45B

32" High

21VSB24B 21VSB27B 21VSB30B 21VSB33B 21VSB36B 21VSB39B 21VSB42B 21VSB45B

341⁄2" High

21AHVSB48F

32" High

21VSB48F

DESIGN NOTE

Stainless steel tilt-down trays available; available factory installed or as a kit for field installation, see below.

• Installed Sink Caddy (ICADDYL, ICADDYR)

• Tilt-Down Trays (ISSTL, ISSTR, ISSTB)

• Sink Base Door Organizer (SBDOM, SBDOML, SBDOMR)

600.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

Single Sink Vanity Combination Cabinet• Available with left or right drawer stack. Choose appropriate code

ending with L or R.

EXAMPLE: 21VSDB24L is 21" deep cabinet with a left drawer stack.

• False drawer front in top position. Functional drawers have same width drawer as standard 12" wide cabinet.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

341⁄2" High

18AHVSDB24L 18AHVSDB24R 18AHVSDB27L 18AHVSDB27R 18AHVSDB30L 18AHVSDB30R 18AHVSDB33L 18AHVSDB33R

Butt Doors, Drawer Stack on Left or Right, One Drawer Front

18" Deep

341⁄2" High

18AHVSDB36BL 18AHVSDB36BR 18AHVSDB39BL18AHVSDB39BR

18AHVSDB42BL 18AHVSDB42BR

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST22 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST22 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST25 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST25 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST28 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST28 1

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1 ISSTD KIT-SST16D 2 ISSTD KIT-SST16D 2 ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2 ISSTD KIT-SST19D 2

32" High

18VSDB24L 18VSDB24R 18VSDB27L 18VSDB27R 18VSDB30L 18VSDB30R 18VSDB33L 18VSDB33R

32" High

18VSDB36BL 18VSDB36BR 18VSDB39BL 18VSDB39BR 18VSDB42BL 18VSDB42BR

Left Drawer Stack

Left Drawer Stack

Combination Vanity Sink Base Cabinets

One Door, Drawer Stack on Left or Right, One Drawer Front

18" Deep 21" Deep

21" Deep

341⁄2" High

21AHVSDB24L 21AHVSDB24R 21AHVSDB27L 21AHVSDB27R 21AHVSDB30L 21AHVSDB30R 21AHVSDB33L 21AHVSDB33R

341⁄2" High

21AHVSDB36BL 21AHVSDB36BR 21AHVSDB39BL 21AHVSDB39BR 21AHVSDB42BL 21AHVSDB42BR

32" High

21VSDB24L 21VSDB24R 21VSDB27L 21VSDB27R 21VSDB30L 21VSDB30R 21VSDB33L 21VSDB33R

32" High

21VSDB36BL 21VSDB36BR 21VSDB39BL 21VSDB39BR 21VSDB42BL 21VSDB42BR

DESIGN NOTE

Stainless steel tilt-down trays available; available factory installed or as a kit for field installation, see below.

600.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Single Sink Vanity Combination Cabinet• False drawer front in top center position.

• See chart for functional drawer size for various cabinet widths.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

Combination Vanity Sink Base Cabinets

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front, Two Drawer Stacks

18" Deep

341⁄2" High

18AHVSDB42 18AHVSDB45

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTL or R KIT-SST13 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST16 1

32" High

18VSDB42 18VSDB45

341⁄2" High

18AHVSDB48B 18AHVSDB54B 18AHVSDB60B 18AHVSDB66B 18AHVSDB72B

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST25 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST31 1

32" High

18VSDB48B 18VSDB54B 18VSDB60B 18VSDB66B 18VSDB72B

CABINET DRAWER WIDTH STACK

42 12 45 12 48 12 54 12 60 12 66 15 72 18

Drawer Stack Width (Equivalent Cabinet Width)

One Door, One Drawer Front, Two Drawer Stacks

18" Deep

341⁄2" High

21AHVSDB42 21AHVSDB45

32" High

21VSDB42 21VSDB45

341⁄2" High

21AHVSDB48B 21AHVSDB54B 21AHVSDB60B 21AHVSDB66B 21AHVSDB72B

32" High

21VSDB48B 21VSDB54B 21VSDB60B 21VSDB66B 21VSDB72B

21" Deep

21" Deep

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

DESIGN NOTE

Stainless steel tilt-down trays available; available factory installed or as a kit for field installation, see below.

Sink Clearance Width

171⁄4"201⁄4"

Sink Clearance Width

231⁄4"291⁄4"351⁄4"351⁄4"351⁄4"

600.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Combination Vanity Sink Base Cabinets

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

Single Sink Vanity Combination Cabinet• False drawer front in center position.

• Includes repair kit (RK or RKPG).

• See Section 900 for aluminum sink/granite supports (SUPPORT36 or 50).

341⁄2" High

18AHCVSB36B 18AHCVSB42B 18AHCVSB48B

TILT-DOWN TRAYS Factory Install Field Install Tray Qty

ISSTL or R KIT-SST13 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1 ISSTL or R KIT-SST19 1

32" High

18CVSB36B 18CVSB42B 18CVSB48B

Butt Doors, Two Drawers, One Drawer Front

18" Deep

341⁄2" High

21AHCVSB36B 21AHCVSB42B 21AHCVSB48B

32" High

21CVSB36B 21CVSB42B 21CVSB48B

21" Deep

Sink Clearance Width

171⁄4"231⁄4"231⁄4"

DESIGN NOTE

Stainless steel tilt-down trays available; available factory installed or as a kit for field installation, see below.

600.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Diagonal Vanity Base Cabinet

One Door, One Drawer

341⁄2" High

18AHVDCB30 21AHVDCB33

30"

18"

18"

1615⁄16"

Top View

32" High

18VDCB30 21VDCB33

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Does not include shelving; shelving cannot be added on site. A Custom Quote request can be submitted to include shelving.

• IMPORTANT: In order for cabinet to be delivered into customer’s home, entry/doorway clearance must be 30" or 33" minimum.

Vanity Double Angle Base Cabinet

Two Full-Height Butt Doors

341⁄2" High

AHVAC21

21"

21"

1513⁄16"

1513⁄16"

135°

Top View

32" High

VAC21

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Designed to align with 21" deep vanity cabinets.

• Includes one 3⁄4" thick fixed shelf located at approximately center of opening height.

30"

33"

33"

21"

21"

1615⁄16"

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on vanity base cabinets.

Diagonal Vanity, Angle Vanity

600.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Vanity Linen Cabinet• Two drawers between upper and lower doors.

• Lower section lines up with 32" high full-height door vanity base cabinets.

One Door (Upper and Lower), Two Drawers

18" Deep

90" High (3)

18VLCD1890 18VLCD2490

Vanity Linen Cabinet with Hamper, 21" Deep

Tilt-Out Hamper, One Door (Upper and Lower), Two Drawers

90" High (3)

21VLCDTH2190

96" High (3)

21VLCDTH2196

Butt Doors (Upper and Lower), Two Drawers

18" Deep

90" High (3)

18VLCD2490B

96" High (3)

18VLCD2496B

96" High (3)

18VLCD1896 18VLCD2496

84" High (2)

18VLCD1884 18VLCD2484

84" High (2)

18VLCD2484B

84" High (2)

21VLCDTH2184

Vanity Linen Cabinets

Orders which include arch door styles will receive arch doors on upper and lower doors of vanity linen cabinets.

• Available in standard depth of 21" only.

• Two drawers between upper and lower doors.

• Lower section lines up with 32" high full-height door vanity base cabinets.

• Includes metal hamper unit with removable canvas bag.

• Hamper is attached to door and operates on a special tilt-out hinge allowing door to stay where it is released.

• Width modifications not available.

• Depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments, minimum 18", maximum 24". See Section 1100 for details.

93" High (3)

18VLCD1893 18VLCD2493

93" High (3)

21VLCDTH2193

93" High (3)

18VLCD2493B

87" High (2)

18VLCD1887 18VLCD2487

87" High (2)

18VLCD2487B

87" High (2)

21VLCDTH2187

21" Deep

90" High (3)

21VLCD1890 21VLCD2490

96" High (3)

21VLCD1896 21VLCD2496

84" High (2)

21VLCD1884 21VLCD2484

93" High (3)

21VLCD1893 21VLCD2493

87" High (2)

21VLCD1887 21VLCD2487

21" Deep

90" High (3)

21VLCD2490B

96" High (3)

21VLCD2496B

84" High (2)

21VLCD2484B

93" High (3)

21VLCD2493B

87" High (2)

21VLCD2487B

600.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Vanity Wall Cabinets

Vanity Wall with Open Shelf, 6" Deep

Butt Doors

Vanity Wall Cabinet, 5" Deep

One Door

30" High (2)

VWC1230 VWC1530 VWC1830 VWC2130 VWC2430

36" High (3)

VWC1236 VWC1536 VWC1836 VWC2136 VWC2436

24" High (2)

VWC1224 VWC1524 VWC1824 VWC2124 VWC2424

30" High (2)

TT2430B

36" High (2)

TT2436B

• Includes matching finished interior.

Mirror/Medicine Cabinet, 5" Deep• Includes matching finished interior.

• Mirrors are equally sized.

• Hinges and touch plates available in Chrome (CH) or Polished Brass (POB); specify finish.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

• Available with standard mirror only; decorative mirror options not available.

• Surface mount.

Bi-View Mirror/Medicine Cabinet

30" High (2)

BV2430

30" High (3)

TV2430 TV3030 TV3630 TV4830

Tri-View Mirror/Medicine Cabinet

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to specify finished ends, tops and bottoms as needed in your design.

600.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

600VANITY CABINETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Vanity Wall Cabinet with Standard Mirror, 5" Deep

24" High (1)

VWCM1224 VWCM1524 VWCM1824 VWCM2124 VWCM2424

30" High (2)

VWCM1230 VWCM1530 VWCM1830 VWCM2130 VWCM2430

36" High (3)

VWCM1236 VWCM1536 VWCM1836 VWCM2136 VWCM2436

Mirror Upgrade Options

Standard mirror may be omitted or replaced with specialty mirror. Select appropriate modification code below and include following on order:

• Cabinet SKU

• Insert code

EXAMPLE: VWCM1830, EPC1 specifies that cabinet receives Epic mirror instead of standard mirror.

Specialty Mirror Inserts

Epic Mirror

EPC1

Patina Mirror

PTN1

Gunmetal Mirror

GNM1

Omit Mirror

NON1• Includes standard mirror; mirror may be omitted or upgraded to a

specialty mirror, see details at right.

• Specialty mirrors include Epic, Patina and Gunmetal styles. These mirrors are hand made; each piece is unique with widely varying characteristics.

• Intended for surface mount installation only.

• Center stile is removed on Hudson Falls door style.

• Not available in Gibson or Pike’s Peak door styles.

• Dimensional modifications available:

– Minimum width 7", maximum 24". – Minimum height 12", maximum 36". – Minimum depth 5", maximum 12".

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to specify finished ends, tops and bottoms as needed in your design.

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity 1.

Vanity Wall Cabinets

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

700.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

700.3 Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

700.4 Wall Organizer Cabinets

700.5 Drawer Base Cabinets

700.6 Pencil Desk Drawer, Desk Base Cabinets

700.7 Desk Base Cabinets with Internal Accessories

700.8 File Drawer Desk Base Cabinets

700.10 Bookcase Cabinets

700.12 Bookcase Cabinets with Frame

700.14 Shelving/Valance Information for Bookcase Cabinets

In This Section

700.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Specifications / Ordering Guidelines

Cabinet Specifications / Ordering GuidelinesEnd Panel Information

• Standard construction is 3⁄4" thick furniture board with natural maple melamine interior/exterior; white melamine and other upgrades available.

Configuration Information

• See individual specifications in this section for wall and base cabinetry.

• Wall bookcase cabinets are available from 18" – 48" wide; cabinets over 36" wide include shelving with 11⁄2" thick profiled edges to prevent sagging.

• Base bookcase cabinets are available from 18" to 36" wide; tall bookcase cabinets are available from 15" to 36" wide.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments; see Section 1100 for details, see individual specifications for exceptions.

• Adjustable shelving is 3⁄4" thick; shelf quantities listed in parentheses by cabinet heights.

• Drawings in this section are intended to show general configuration; all construction details may not be reflected.

Toe Space Information

• Unfinished toe base for cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater is separate from cabinet and must be installed on site. Toe base may be ordered loose for other heights (TKL) or omitted for all heights (TSR). Leg leveling system is also available. See Section 1100 for details.

Order Information

• For one door cabinets, specify hinge location.

3⁄4" thick ends

3⁄4" thick shelves

3⁄4" thick top

3⁄4" thick ends

3⁄4" thick shelves with 11⁄2" thick profiled edges

3⁄4" thick top

33⁄4" deep

toe

41⁄2"

Wall Bookcase Cabinet – Up to 36" Wide

Wall Bookcase Cabinet – Over 36" Wide

3⁄4" thick bottom

3⁄4" thick bottom

toe kick for base or tall cabinets

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to specify finished ends for all exposed ends of cabinetry, see end treatment options in Section 1100 for details.

DESIGN NOTE

See Section 1100 for general details of dimensional modifications; see individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual for exceptions.

NOTE: Cabinets with drawers or roll-out trays have a maximum depth of 24".

700.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall Organizer Cabinets

Wall Cabinet with Organizer Section, 13" DeepButt Doors

• Includes matching finished interior.

• Organizer configuration changes with cabinet width, see illustrations below.

• Height of organizer section remains the same with different cabinet heights.

• Width modification not available except through a Custom Quote.

Configurations for Organizer Section

Wall Organizer, 13" Deep

30" High (1)

WDO2430B WDO2730B WDO3030B WDO3330B WDO3630B

33" High (1)

WDO2433B WDO2733B WDO3033B WDO3333B WDO3633B

42" High (2)

WDO2442B WDO2742B WDO3042B WDO3342B WDO3642B

6" High

DOU24 DOU27 DOU30 DOU33 DOU36

• Includes matching finished interior.

• Unit is smaller in height than organizer built into wall cabinet.

• Dimensional modifications not available.

24"

27"

30"

33"

36"

6"

6"

6"

6"

17⁄8"51⁄2" 51⁄2"

53⁄8" 51⁄2"53⁄8"

61⁄8"61⁄8"

6"

17⁄8"

17⁄8"

17⁄8"

17⁄8"41⁄2"

41⁄2"45⁄8"

41⁄2"

41⁄2"41⁄2"

41⁄2"

43⁄8"43⁄8"

Configurations for Organizer Section

24" 27"

30"

33"

36"

7"7"

81⁄2"51⁄2"43⁄8"

53⁄8" 51⁄2"53⁄8"

61⁄8"

81⁄2"

81⁄2"

81⁄2"

81⁄2"

31⁄8" 31⁄8"

31⁄8"

31⁄8"

31⁄8"

7"

7"

7"

43⁄8"41⁄2"

10"

45⁄8"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10"

10" 10"

45⁄8"

36" High (2)

WDO2436B WDO2736B WDO3036B WDO3336B WDO3636B

39" High (2)

WDO2439B WDO2739B WDO3039B WDO3339B WDO3639B

1⁄4"

1⁄4"

700.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Drawer Base Cabinets

• Typical application is a window or bench seat. May be used with single drawer dishwasher appliances.

• Cabinet includes fully enclosed top.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 9", maximum 36". – Minimum height 11", maximum 221⁄2". – Minimum depth 12", maximum 24".

One Drawer Base Cabinet, 181⁄4" High

Two Drawer Base Cabinet, 24" Deep

• Drawer fronts are equal in height.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 9", maximum 48". – Minimum height 16", maximum 32" (drawer fronts remain equal in height). – For cabinets up to 36" wide: minimum depth 12", maximum 24". – For cabinets over 36" wide: minimum depth 21", maximum 24"; includes Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, downgrades not available.

• 341⁄2" heights available, see Section 400.

• File drawer hardware fits in 32" and 341⁄2" heights.

281⁄2" High

2DB1228 2DB1528 2DB1828 2DB2128 2DB24282DB2728 2DB3028 2DB3328 2DB36282DB3928 2DB4228 2DB4528 2DB4828

32" High

2DB1232 2DB1532 2DB1832 2DB2132 2DB24322DB2732 2DB3032 2DB3332 2DB36322DB3932 2DB4232 2DB4532 2DB4832

18" Deep

18DB1218 18DB1518 18DB1818 18DB2118 18DB2418 18DB2718 18DB3018 18DB3318 18DB3618

21" Deep

21DB1218 21DB1518 21DB1818 21DB2118 21DB2418 21DB2718 21DB3018 21DB3318 21DB3618

24" Deep

24DB1218 24DB1518 24DB1818 24DB2118 24DB2418 24DB2718 24DB3018 24DB3318 24DB3618

• Height modification available: 341⁄2" (drawer front heights match 3DB, see dimensional specifications in Section 100).

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments: – Minimum width 9", maximum 18". – Minimum depth 12", maximum 24".

Drawer Desk Base CabinetThree Drawers

18" Deep

281⁄2" High

18DDRB12 18DDRB15 18DDRB18

32" High

18DDRB1232 18DDRB1532 18DDRB1832

21" Deep 24" Deep

281⁄2" High

21DDRB12 21DDRB15 21DDRB18

32" High

21DDRB1232 21DDRB1532 21DDRB1832

281⁄2" High

24DDRB12 24DDRB15 24DDRB18

32" High

24DDRB1232 24DDRB1532 24DDRB1832

700.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Desk Base Cabinet• Does not include shelving.

281⁄2" High

18DDOB12 18DDOB15 18DDOB18 18DDOB21 18DDOB24

One Door, One Drawer

18" Deep

32" High

18DDOB1232 18DDOB1532 18DDOB1832 18DDOB2132 18DDOB2432

281⁄2" High

21DDOB12 21DDOB15 21DDOB18 21DDOB21 21DDOB24

21" Deep

32" High

21DDOB1232 21DDOB1532 21DDOB1832 21DDOB2132 21DDOB2432

281⁄2" High

24DDOB12 24DDOB15 24DDOB18 24DDOB21 24DDOB24

24" Deep

32" High

24DDOB1232 24DDOB1532 24DDOB1832 24DDOB2132 24DDOB2432

281⁄2" High

18DDOB24B

Butt Doors, One Drawer

18" Deep

32" High

18DDOB2432B

281⁄2" High

21DDOB24B

21" Deep

32" High

21DDOB2432B

281⁄2" High

24DDOB24B

24" Deep

32" High

24DDOB2432B

Pencil Desk Drawer, Desk Base Cabinets

Pencil Desk Drawer

• Not a trimmable drawer unit.

• Open bottom; no bottom panel.

• Includes fully enclosed top.

• Drawer box features dowel construction for 3" height; 5" and 6" heights receive dovetail drawers.

• Intivo options not available on 3" height.

Dashed line = drawer box (11⁄2" high) Interior height of drawer = 3⁄4"

Pencil Drawer Elevation – 3" Height

3" 21⁄4"

Dashed line = drawer box (31⁄2" high) Interior height of drawer = 23⁄4"

Pencil Drawer Elevation – 5" and 6" Heights

5" or 6"

41⁄4" or 51⁄4"

3" High

18DD243 18DD273 18DD303 18DD333 18DD363

5" High

18DD245 18DD275 18DD305 18DD335

18DD365

6" High

18DD246 18DD276 18DD306 18DD336 18DD366

18" Deep

3" High

21DD243 21DD273 21DD303 21DD333 21DD363

5" High

21DD245 21DD275 21DD305 21DD335

21DD365

6" High

21DD246 21DD276 21DD306 21DD336 21DD366

21" Deep

3" High

24DD243 24DD273 24DD303 24DD333 24DD363

5" High

24DD245 24DD275 24DD305 24DD335

24DD365

6" High

24DD246 24DD276 24DD306 24DD336 24DD366

24" Deep

700.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Desk Base with Pull-Out Table• Self supporting table top/work surface pulls out of drawer location;

extends 32" from face of cabinet.

• Table top is hardwood laminate in natural finish.

• Maximum weight capacity of table is 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

• Width and depth modifications not available.

• Shelving not included; end panels of 281⁄2" high cabinets are not drilled for addition of shelving.

One Door, One Drawer Front

Desk Base Cabinets with Internal Accessories

281⁄2" High

21DPOT24B

281⁄2" High

21DPOT24

281⁄2" High

24DPOT24

Butt Doors, One Drawer Front

281⁄2" High

24DPOT24B

21" Deep

24" Deep

32" High

21DPOT2432

32" High

24DPOT2432

21" Deep

32" High

21DPOT2432B

32" High

24DPOT2432B

24" Deep

Desk Base Cabinet with Pull-Out Waste Container, 21" Deep• Includes functional top drawer with fixed floor below and pull-out

door attached to waste containment system.

• Scooped drawer box of waste containment system includes plywood deck with cut-outs for waste baskets; operates on Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides.

• Includes one 28 qt. waste container.

• Replacement waste container available, see Section 1200.

• Height modification available; minimum 32", maximum 48".

• Width and depth modifications not available.

341⁄2" High

21D1534WB 21D1834WB

32" High

21D1532WB 21D1832WB

One Door, One Drawer

One Door, One Drawer, Automated Drive

• Cabinets including Automated Drive open with a light touch of your hand, hip, knee or foot.

• Electrical information: – Electrical outlet required. – Automated Drive is factory installed in back of cabinet. – Transformer and connector ships separately; installer to drill back or end panel to install. – Low power consumption, approximately 3.5 kWh per year. – Drawer can be opened manually during power outages.

• Automated Drive features: – Electrical drive triggers opening signal. – Dampening function ensures pull-out closes securely regardless of force used. – Leaning protection feature prevents unintentional opening. – Auto open feature interrupted if resistance is encountered.– Integrated dripping water protection if water gets in cabinet.

341⁄2" High

21D1534WBS21D1834WBS

32" High

21D1532WBS21D1832WBS

Automated Drive Detail

700.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Single File Drawer Base Desk Cabinet

• Includes one file drawer and one standard drawer.

File Drawer Desk Base Cabinets• File drawers include black steel file suspensions with snap together cross rails and adjustable bars that support file folders; no tools required for

adjustments.

• Hanging file folders not included.

• Width and depth modifications available: minimum width 18", maximum 30"; minimum depth 18", maximum 24".

• Height modifications not available due to various opening requirements for file system. Height modifications may be considered through Custom Quote Request.

• Intivo options not available.

• See next page for top views of file configurations.

Double File Drawer Base Desk Cabinet

• Includes two file drawers.

• NOTE: 281⁄2" height includes non-standard 1" flush toe space, see drawing for specifications.

• 32" and 341⁄2" heights receive standard 41⁄2" high toe space.

281⁄2" High

32" and 341⁄2" High

281⁄2" High1" Flush Toe

1" Flush Toe

File Drawer Desk Base Cabinets

32" and 341⁄2" High

1" Flush Toe

281⁄2" High

18DFDB18 18DFDB21

32" High

18DFDB1832 18DFDB2132

18" Deep

281⁄2" High

21DFDB18 21DFDB21

32" High

21DFDB1832 21DFDB2132

21" Deep

281⁄2" High

24DFDB18 24DFDB21

32" High

24DFDB1832 24DFDB2132

24" Deep

341⁄2" High

18TDFB18 18TDFB21 18TDFB24

281⁄2" High

18TDFB1828 18TDFB2128 18TDFB2428

281⁄2" High

18TDFB3028

32" High

18TDFB1832 18TDFB2132 18TDFB2432

32" High

18TDFB3032

Lateral File, 18" Deep

Standard File, 18" Deep

281⁄2" High

21TDFB3028

32" High

21TDFB3032

Lateral File, 21" Deep

281⁄2" High

24TDFB3028

32" High

24TDFB3032

Lateral File, 24" Deep

341⁄2" High

21TDFB18 21TDFB21 21TDFB24

281⁄2" High

21TDFB1828 21TDFB2128 21TDFB2428

32" High

21TDFB1832 21TDFB2132 21TDFB2432

Standard File, 21" Deep

341⁄2" High

24TDFB18 24TDFB21 24TDFB24

281⁄2" High

24TDFB1828 24TDFB2128 24TDFB2428

32" High

24TDFB1832 24TDFB2132 24TDFB2432

Standard File, 24" Deep

341⁄2" High

18TDFB30

341⁄2" High

21TDFB30

341⁄2" High

24TDFB30

700.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

File Configurations – Top Views

• Dimensions listed are drawer box dimensions. • File configuration listed in bold is default factory installation. Configurations may be adjusted in field to other options listed by moving/

removing cross rails and adjustable bar.

18DFDB1818TDFB18

18DFDB2118TDFB21 18TDFB24

161⁄8"wide

15" deep

191⁄8" wide

15" deep

221⁄8" wide

15" deep

adjustable bar

• Letter Only

adjustable bar

• Letter Only • Combo Letter/Legal • Letter

24DFDB1824TDFB18

24DFDB2124TDFB21 24TDFB24

161⁄8" wide

21" deep

191⁄8"wide

21" deep

221⁄8" wide

21" deep

cross rail adjustable bar adjustable bar

• Letter• Legal

• Combo Letter/Legal • Letter• Legal

• Combo Letter/Legal • Letter• Legal

21DFDB1821TDFB18

21DFDB2121TDFB21 21TDFB24

161⁄8" wide

18" deep

191⁄8" wide

18" deep

221⁄8"wide

18" deep

cross rail adjustable bar adjustable bar

• Letter• Legal

• Combo Letter/Legal • Letter• Legal

• Combo Letter/Legal • Letter• Legal

18TDFB30 21TDFB30 24TDFB30

281⁄8" wide

15" deep

281⁄8" wide

18" deep

281⁄8" wide

21" deep

adjustable baradjustable baradjustable bar

• Combo Letter/Legal • Letter• Legal

• Combo Letter/Legal • Letter• Legal

• Combo Letter/Legal • Letter

File Drawer Desk Base Cabinets

700.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall, 13" Deep

12" High (0)

BK1812BK2112BK2412BK2712BK3012BK3312BK3612BK3912BK4212BK4512BK4812

15" High (0)

BK1815BK2115BK2415BK2715BK3015BK3315BK3615BK3915

BK4215 BK4515 BK4815

18" High (0)

BK1818BK2118BK2418BK2718BK3018BK3318BK3618BK3918

BK4218 BK4518 BK4818

21" High (1)

BK1821BK2121BK2421BK2721BK3021BK3321BK3621BK3921

BK4221 BK4521 BK4821

24" High (1)

BK1824BK2124BK2424BK2724BK3024BK3324BK3624BK3924

BK4224 BK4524 BK4824

33" High (2)

BK1833BK2133BK2433BK2733BK3033BK3333BK3633

BK3933 BK4233 BK4533 BK4833

42" High (3)

BK1842BK2142BK2442BK2742BK3042BK3342BK3642BK3942

BK4242 BK4542 BK4842

48" High (4)

BK1848BK2148BK2448BK2748BK3048BK3348BK3648BK3948

BK4248 BK4548 BK4848

60" High (5)

BK1860BK2160BK2460BK2760BK3060BK3360BK3660

BK3960 BK4260 BK4560 BK4860

54" High (4)

BK1854BK2154BK2454BK2754BK3054BK3354BK3654BK3954

BK4254 BK4554 BK4854

30" High (2)

BK1830BK2130BK2430BK2730BK3030BK3330BK3630BK3930

BK4230 BK4530 BK4830

Bookcase Cabinet• Includes matching finished interior.

• See page 700.14 for valance and shelving modifications.

• Glass shelving modification available, see Section 1100 for details.

• 12" to 18" high BK cabinets do not include shelving and are not drilled for shelving.

2020 DESIGN NOTE:Due to program limitations, cabinets including matching finished interior will render with matching finished interior AND finished exterior which is incorrect. To finish the exterior order FEB, FCT and FCB.

Bookcase Cabinets

36" High (2)

BK1836BK2136BK2436BK2736BK3036BK3336BK3636

BK3936 BK4236 BK4536 BK4836

39" High (2)

BK1839BK2139BK2439BK2739BK3039BK3339BK3639

BK3939 BK4239 BK4539 BK4839

51" High (4)

BK1851BK2151BK2451BK2751BK3051BK3351BK3651BK3951

BK4251 BK4551 BK4851

57" High (4)

BK1857BK2157BK2457BK2757BK3057BK3357BK3657BK3957

BK4257 BK4557 BK4857

DESIGN NOTE

See Bookcase Cabinets with Frames on pages 700.12-13 to create a furniture feel in your design for orders in wood door styles.

700.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Base

13" Deep

13BOD1840 13BOD2140 13BOD2440 13BOD2740 13BOD3040 13BOD3340 13BOD3640

13" Deep

13BOD18 13BOD21 13BOD24 13BOD27 13BOD30 13BOD33 13BOD36

401⁄2" High (2)341⁄2" High (2)

Tall

13" Deep

96" High (6)

13US1596 13US1896 13US2196 13US2496 13US2796 13US3096 13US3396 13US3696

90" High (6)

13US1590 13US1890 13US2190 13US2490 13US2790 13US3090 13US3390 13US3690

84" High (5)

13US1584 13US1884 13US2184 13US2484 13US2784 13US3084 13US3384 13US3684

87" High (5)

13US1587 13US1887 13US2187 13US2487 13US2787 13US3087 13US3387 13US3687

93" High (6)

13US1593 13US1893 13US2193 13US2493 13US2793 13US3093 13US3393 13US3693

Bookcase Cabinet• Includes matching finished interior.

• See page 700.14 for valance and shelving modifications.

• Glass shelving modification available, see Section 1100 for details.

2020 DESIGN NOTE:Due to program limitations, cabinets including matching finished interior will render with matching finished interior AND finished exterior which is incorrect. To finish the exterior order FEB, FCT and FCB.

DESIGN NOTE

See Bookcase Cabinets with Frames on pages 700.12-13 to create a furniture feel in your design for orders in wood door styles.

18" Deep

18BOD18 18BOD21 18BOD24 18BOD27 18BOD30 18BOD33 18BOD36

21" Deep

21BOD18 21BOD21 21BOD24 21BOD27 21BOD30 21BOD33 21BOD36

24" Deep

24BOD18 24BOD21 24BOD24 24BOD27 24BOD30 24BOD33 24BOD36

18" Deep

18BOD1840 18BOD2140 18BOD2440 18BOD2740 18BOD3040 18BOD3340 18BOD3640

18" Deep

96" High (6)

18US1596 18US1896 18US2196 18US2496 18US2796 18US3096 18US3396 18US3696

90" High (6)

18US1590 18US1890 18US2190 18US2490 18US2790 18US3090 18US3390 18US3690

84" High (5)

18US1584 18US1884 18US2184 18US2484 18US2784 18US3084 18US3384 18US3684

87" High (5)

18US1587 18US1887 18US2187 18US2487 18US2787 18US3087 18US3387 18US3687

93" High (6)

18US1593 18US1893 18US2193 18US2493 18US2793 18US3093 18US3393 18US3693

Bookcase Cabinets

700.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall, 133⁄4" Deep

12" High (0)

BKF1812BKF2112

BKF2412 BKF2712 BKF3012 BKF3312 BKF3612BKF3912

BKF4212 BKF4512 BKF4812

15" High (0)

BKF1815 BKF2115 BKF2415 BKF2715 BKF3015 BKF3315 BKF3615BKF3915

BKF4215 BKF4515 BKF4815

18" High (0)

BKF1818 BKF2118 BKF2418 BKF2718 BKF3018 BKF3318 BKF3618BKF3918

BKF4218 BKF4518 BKF4818

21" High (1)

BKF1821 BKF2121 BKF2421 BKF2721 BKF3021 BKF3321 BKF3621BKF3921

BKF4221 BKF4521 BKF4821

24" High (1)

BKF1824 BKF2124 BKF2424 BKF2724 BKF3024 BKF3324 BKF3624BKF3924

BKF4224 BKF4524 BKF4824

33" High (2)

BKF1833BKF2133BKF2433BKF2733BKF3033BKF3333BKF3633

BKF3933 BKF4233 BKF4533 BKF4833

42" High (3)

BKF1842 BKF2142 BKF2442 BKF2742 BKF3042 BKF3342 BKF3642BKF3942

BKF4242 BKF4542 BKF4842

48" High (4)

BKF1848 BKF2148 BKF2448 BKF2748 BKF3048 BKF3348 BKF3648 BKF3948 BKF4248 BKF4548 BKF4848

60" High (5)

BKF1860 BKF2160 BKF2460 BKF2760 BKF3060 BKF3360 BKF3660 BKF3960 BKF4260 BKF4560 BKF4860

54" High (4)

BKF1854 BKF2154 BKF2454 BKF2754 BKF3054 BKF3354 BKF3654BKF3954

BKF4254 BKF4554 BKF4854

30" High (2)

BKF1830 BKF2130 BKF2430 BKF2730 BKF3030 BKF3330 BKF3630BKF3930

BKF4230 BKF4530 BKF4830

Bookcase Cabinet with Frame• Available in wood door styles only.

• Includes matching finished interior.

• See page 700.14 for valance and shelving modifications.

• Glass shelving modification available, see Section 1100 for details.

• 12" to 18" high BKF cabinets do not include shelving and are not drilled for shelving.

2020 DESIGN NOTE:Due to program limitations, cabinets including matching finished interior will render with matching finished interior AND finished exterior which is incorrect. To finish the exterior order FEB, FETB, FCT and FCB.

36" High (2)

BKF1836 BKF2136 BKF2436 BKF2736 BKF3036 BKF3336 BKF3636 BKF3936 BKF4236 BKF4536 BKF4836

39" High (2)

BKF1839BKF2139BKF2439BKF2739BKF3039BKF3339BKF3639

BKF3939 BKF4239 BKF4539 BKF4839

51" High (4)

BKF1851BKF2151BKF2451BKF2751BKF3051BKF3351BKF3651BKF3951

BKF4251 BKF4551 BKF4851

57" High (4)

BKF1857BKF2157BKF2457BKF2757BKF3057BKF3357BKF3657BKF3957

BKF4257 BKF4557 BKF4857

Bookcase Cabinets

DESIGN NOTE

Bookcase cabinets with frames align with doors of standard depth cabinets.

DESIGN NOTE

Frame has 1⁄16" reveal on each side of cabinet case. This matches the reveal of cabinets with doors.

1⁄16"

1⁄16"

Frame

Cabinet Outline

700.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Bookcase Cabinets

Base

133⁄4" Deep

13BODF1840 13BODF2140 13BODF2440 13BODF2740 13BODF3040 13BODF3340 13BODF3640

133⁄4" Deep

13BODF18 13BODF21 13BODF24 13BODF27 13BODF30 13BODF33 13BODF36

401⁄2" High (2)341⁄2" High (2)

Tall

133⁄4" Deep

96" High (6)

13USF1596 13USF1896 13USF2196 13USF2496 13USF2796 13USF3096 13USF3396 13USF3696

90" High (6)

13USF1590 13USF1890 13USF2190 13USF2490 13USF2790 13USF3090 13USF3390 13USF3690

84" High (5)

13USF1584 13USF1884 13USF2184 13USF2484 13USF2784 13USF3084 13USF3384 13USF3684

87" High (5)

13USF1587 13USF1887 13USF2187 13USF2487 13USF2787 13USF3087 13USF3387 13USF3687

93" High (6)

13USF1593 13USF1893 13USF2193 13USF2493 13USF2793 13USF3093 13USF3393 13USF3693

183⁄4" Deep

18BODF18 18BODF21 18BODF24 18BODF27 18BODF30 18BODF33 18BODF36

213⁄4" Deep

21BODF18 21BODF21 21BODF24 21BODF27 21BODF30 21BODF33 21BODF36

243⁄4" Deep

24BODF18 24BODF21 24BODF24 24BODF27 24BODF30 24BODF33 24BODF36

183⁄4" Deep

18BODF1840 18BODF2140 18BODF2440 18BODF2740 18BODF3040 18BODF3340 18BODF3640

183⁄4" Deep

96" High (6)

18USF1596 18USF1896 18USF2196 18USF2496 18USF2796 18USF3096 18USF3396 18USF3696

90" High (6)

18USF1590 18USF1890 18USF2190 18USF2490 18USF2790 18USF3090 18USF3390 18USF3690

84" High (5)

18USF1584 18USF1884 18USF2184 18USF2484 18USF2784 18USF3084 18USF3384 18USF3684

87" High (5)

18USF1587 18USF1887 18USF2187 18USF2487 18USF2787 18USF3087 18USF3387 18USF3687

93" High (6)

18USF1593 18USF1893 18USF2193 18USF2493 18USF2793 18USF3093 18USF3393 18USF3693

Bookcase Cabinet with Frame• Available in wood door styles only.

• Includes matching finished interior.

• See page 700.14 for valance and shelving modifications.

• Glass shelving modification available, see Section 1100 for details.

2020 DESIGN NOTE:Due to program limitations, cabinets including matching finished interior will render with matching finished interior AND finished exterior which is incorrect. To finish the exterior order FEB, FETB, FCT and FCB.

DESIGN NOTE

Frame has 1⁄16" reveal on each side of cabinet case. This matches the reveal of cabinets with doors.

DESIGN NOTE

Bookcase cabinets with frames align with doors of standard depth cabinets.

1⁄16"

1⁄16"

Frame

Cabinet Outline

700.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

700OTHER ROOM CABINETRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wall Bookcase Cabinets over 36" WideAll Bookcase Cabinets up to 36" Wide

Shelving Information

Shelving/Valance Information for Bookcase Cabinets

Shelf Edge Modifications

To modify Edge Detail of shelving, select from choices listed below and add specific code to cabinet SKU. See chart for availability based on door style/material and cabinet width.

Shelf Edge Modification Pricing:Cabinets 36" wide or less — additional charges apply.

Cabinets greater than 36" wide — no charge.

SHFE11⁄8" Eased Profile Top edge

SHFE21⁄8" Eased Profile Top & bottom edges

SHFWF1Waterfall Profile Top edge

SHFWF2Waterfall Profile Top & bottom edges

SHFBN13⁄8" Eased Profile Top edge

SHFBN23⁄8" Eased Profile Top & bottom edges

SHFT1Traditional Profile Top edge

SHFT2Traditional Profile Top & bottom edges

SHFBTBeaded Profile

SHFCV2

Concave Edge

SHFAST2Astragal Profile

Example:Tall Bookcase (US) with Arch Valance (CVAR). Thermofoil Shown.

Shelf Edge Standard Shelving Shelf Edge Door Style/Material Standard Shelving Upgrade Availability 11⁄2" thick profiled edge Upgrade Availability

Acrylic 3⁄4" thick edge banded SHFSQ2 SHFSQ2 None

Premium Veneer 3⁄4" thick edge banded SHFSQ2 SHFSQ2 None

Textured Melamine 3⁄4" thick edge banded SHFSQ2 SHFSQ2 None

Thermofoil 3⁄4" thick edge banded SHFE2 SHFE2 None

Wood 3⁄4" thick edge banded All SHFE1 All except SHFE1

SHFSQ2Square EdgeTop & bottom edges

Valance Information

Valance Modifications

To modify Valance, select from choices listed below and add specific code to cabinet SKU. See chart for availability based on door style/material. NOTE: Some valance styles have a minimum cabinet width requirement, see below for details. There is no additional charge for this modification.

Door Style/Material Valance Modification Availability

Acrylic CVSQ

Premium Veneer CVSQ

Textured Melamine CVSQ

Thermofoil All

Wood All

Example:Base Bookcase with SHFT1 Shelf EdgeThermofoil Shown

CVSQSquare Valance, 3" high

CVMSMission Valance, 41⁄2" high Minimum cabinet width: 18"

CVST Straight Valance, 41⁄2" highMinimum cabinet width: 18"

CVSC Scallop Valance, 41⁄2" high Minimum cabinet width: 30"

CVRM Roman Valance, 41⁄2" highMinimum cabinet width: 18"

CVPR Provincial Valance, 41⁄2" high Minimum cabinet width: 18"

CVARArch Valance, 41⁄2" highMinimum cabinet width: 18"

Example:Wall Bookcase with

Frame (BKF) with Arch Valance (CVAR).

Wood shown.

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

800.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

STAINLESS STEEL 800.3 Base Molding

ALUMINUM 800.3 Decorative Feet

ACRYLIC & TEXTURED MELAMINE800.4 Starter and Under Cabinet Moldings, Square Columns, Base Moldings

PREMIUM VENEER 800.6 Crown, Under Cabinet, Trim and Starter Moldings

800.7 Base Moldings 800.8 Square Columns

THERMOFOIL800.9 Crown, Under Cabinet, Specialty and Starter Moldings

800.10 Trim and Base Moldings800.13 Square Columns

800.14 Valances

WOOD800.15 Crown Moldings

800.16 Decorative Insert Moldings800.17 Frieze Moldings, Crown Molding Mounting Strip

800.18 Specialty and Starter Moldings800.19 Under Cabinet Moldings

800.20 Edge Cap Moldings800.21 Profile Solid Stock Moldings

800.22 Trim Moldings800.23 Base Moldings

800.26 Split Post Moldings, Capitals800.27 Carved Onlays

800.28 Solid Stock with Applied Carved Onlay, Rosettes, Appliqués800.29 Valances

800.31 Corbels800.32 Counter Support Brackets

800.33 Square Columns800.34 Decorative Legs

800.38 Decorative Feet

MOLDING STACK EXAMPLES - VARIOUS MATERIALS800.39 Molding Stack Examples

In This Section

800.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

1⁄4" or 3⁄4"

Stainless Steel and Aluminum – Moldings and Accents

Stainless Steel Base Molding

Stainless Steel Toe Kick Material

• 8’ lengths.

• Constructed of stainless steel laminate.

• Install over unfinished toe space assembly.

• 1⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face only; MDF core.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face and two short edges; includes dado on back side for use with leg leveling modification (TSLLV), see Section 1100 for details.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick has plywood core.

41⁄2" High, Standard Height

TKSS96 1⁄4" Thick TKSS3496 3⁄4" Thick

9"

1⁄4"

9" High, Universal Access Height

TKHCSS996 1⁄4" Thick

41⁄2"

Aluminum Decorative Feet

Aluminum Decorative Feet

Matte Polished Height

HW-63455423 HW-63455223 41⁄8" HW-63458423 HW-63458223 61⁄2"

• Available in matte or polished aluminum finish.

• Static load rating is approximately 110 lbs. per foot.

• Includes mounting plate.

• Does not include installation screws; use pan head #8 screws.

29⁄16"

113⁄32"

Photo does not show mounting plate.

HEIGHT

31⁄8"

2"

219⁄32"

Top View

Side View

13⁄8"

800.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

For Acrylic & Textured Melamine Moldings this page:

• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our acrylic and textured melamine door styles.

• Finished in matching acrylic or textured melamine, finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings.

Starter Molding

STARTMLD396 STARTMLD696

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Modify height available on 6" side of STARTMLD696; minimum 31⁄4", maximum 6".

• Constructed from plywood core material.

• 8' lengths.

Acrylic & Textured Melamine Starter Molding

Acrylic & Textured Melamine Base Molding

41⁄2" High, Standard Height

TKF96 1⁄4" Thick TKF3496 3⁄4" Thick

9" High, Universal Access Height

TKHCF996 1⁄4" Thick

9"

1⁄4"41⁄2"

1⁄4" or 3⁄4"

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

33⁄4"

Profile for Gibson & Pike’s Peak Door Styles

Light Valance

LVM8

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Molding is edge banded on two long 3⁄4" edges; plywood core.

• For use with light valance prep modification; see LVP in Section 1100.

• 8' lengths.

Acrylic & Textured Melamine Under Cabinet Molding

Acrylic & Textured Melamine – Moldings and Accents

Toe Kick Material

• Install over unfinished toe space assembly.

• 1⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face only; MDF core.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face and two short edges; includes dado on back side for use with leg leveling modification (TSLLV), see Section 1100 for details.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick has furniture board core; PLYBOX modification is available to upgrade to plywood core.

• 8' lengths.

3" 3⁄4"

21⁄4"

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

Acrylic & Textured Melamine Empire Square Columns

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall

■ WSQC348 ■ WSQC648 48" ■ WSQC351 ■ WSQC651 51"■ WSQC354 ■ WSQC654 54"■ WSQC357 ■ WSQC657 57"■ WSQC360 ■ WSQC660 60"

Base

■ BSQC334 ■ BSQC634 341⁄2" ■ BSQC340 ■ BSQC640 401⁄2"

Tall

■ USQC364 ■ USQC664 641⁄2"■ USQC384 ■ USQC684 84" ■ USQC387 ■ USQC687 87" ■ USQC390 ■ USQC690 90"■ USQC393 ■ USQC693 93"■ USQC396 ■ USQC696 96"

Vanity Base

■ VSQC332 ■ VSQC632 32"

Desk Base

■ DSQC328 ■ DSQC628 281⁄2"

3"

3"

Top View

• Columns are constructed from 3⁄4" thick plywood.

• Four side deluxe mitered construction, see top view.

• Width modification available on 6" x 6" column only: 31⁄4" x 31⁄4" minimum, 7" x 7" maximum. Width modification affects all sides equally; column remains square.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

6"

6"

800.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

48" or 96"

Flush Toe Kick Molding

• 4’ or 8’ lengths, plywood core material.

• Length may be modified at factory at no charge; specify width, minimum 15", maximum 96".

EXAMPLE: TOEMLD496, width84.

• Molding is 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.

• Designed for field installation to create a flush toe on a single cabinet or run of cabinets (see examples below).

Door Style Specific Profile

TOEMLD448

TOEMLD496

Acrylic & Textured Melamine Base Molding• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our acrylic and textured melamine door styles.

• Finished in matching acrylic or textured melamine, finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings. Back has protective coating.

DESIGN NOTE

Use recess toe space modifications and additional molding to wrap around sides of cabinet to create a furniture look.

Acrylic & Textured Melamine – Moldings

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

33⁄4"

41⁄2"

Design Examples

Molding is flush with front of doorsMolding is flush with

front of cabinet

Flush with front of cabinet Flush with front of door

41⁄2" 41⁄2" 33⁄4" 45⁄8"

Side View – Gibson & Pike’s Peak Profile

One piece flush toe kick molding shown on run of cabinets

Molding shown assembled with field applied returns

DESIGN NOTE

To cap flush toe kick molding on end of a run, consider using extend end panel down and finished end modifications to achieve this look.

800.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Premium Veneer – Moldings

For Premium Veneer Moldings this page:

• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our premium veneer door styles.

• Finished in matching veneer, finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings.

• 8’ lengths.

Premium Veneer Crown Moldings

Straight/Shaker Crown Molding

SHKV8

Please see Section 1000 for our filler selection. Overlay fillers for Premium Veneer door styles can be split down the middle to create a variety of accessory items. Some examples are pictured at right. Light Rail Stacked Crown Base Molding

Cabinet Door

Cabinet Door

31⁄16"

31⁄4"

Cove Crown Molding

CCV8

27⁄8"

215⁄16"

Batten Molding

BATV8

Premium Veneer Starter Moldings

Profile for Bella Door Style

1⁄4"

11⁄4"

Premium Veneer Trim Molding

Premium Veneer Under Cabinet Moldings

Light Valance

LVM8

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Molding is edge banded on two long 3⁄4" edges; plywood core.

• For use with light valance prep modification; see LVP in Section 1100.

Starter Molding

STARTMLD396 STARTMLD696

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Modify height available on 6" side of STARTMLD696; minimum 31⁄4", maximum 6".

• Constructed from plywood core material.

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

33⁄4"

21⁄4"

11⁄2"

Split Filler

Saw Cut

3" 3⁄4"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

DESIGN NOTE

800.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Premium Veneer Base Molding• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our premium veneer door styles.

Premium Veneer Toe Kick Material

• 8’ lengths.

• Install over unfinished toe space assembly.

• 1⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face only; MDF core.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face and two short edges; includes dado on back side for use with leg leveling modification (TSLLV), see Section 1100 for details.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick has furniture board core; PLYBOX modification is available to upgrade to plywood core.

41⁄2" High, Standard Height

TKV96 1⁄4" Thick TKV3496 3⁄4" Thick

9" High, Universal Access Height

TKHCV996 1⁄4" Thick 9"

1⁄4"41⁄2"

1⁄4" or 3⁄4"

Premium Veneer – Moldings

48" or 96"

Premium Veneer Flush Toe Kick Molding

• 4’ or 8’ lengths, plywood core material.

• Length may be modified at factory at no charge; specify width, minimum 15", maximum 96". EXAMPLE: TOEMLD496, width84.

• Molding is 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.

• Finished in matching veneer, veneered edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings.

• Designed for field installation to create a flush toe on a single cabinet or run of cabinets (see examples below).

Door Style Specific Profile

TOEMLD448 TOEMLD496

DESIGN NOTE

Use recess toe space modifications and additional molding to wrap around sides of cabinet to create a furniture look.

Design Examples

Molding is flush with front of doors

Molding is flush with front of cabinet

Flush with front of cabinet

Flush with front of door

41⁄2"

41⁄2" 33⁄4"

45⁄8"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

33⁄4"

41⁄2"

Side View – Bella

One piece flush toe kick molding shown on run of cabinets

Molding shown assembled with field applied returns

DESIGN NOTE

To cap flush toe kick molding on end of a run, consider using extend end panel down and finished end modifications to achieve this look.

800.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Premium Veneer – Accents

• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our premium veneer door styles.

• Finished in matching veneer, finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings.

• Columns are constructed from 3⁄4" thick plywood.

• Four side deluxe mitered construction, see top view.

• Width modification available on 6" x 6" column only: 31⁄4" x 31⁄4" minimum, 7" x 7" maximum. Width modification affect all sides equally; column remains square.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

Premium Veneer Empire Square Columns

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall

■ WSQC348 ■ WSQC648 48" ■ WSQC351 ■ WSQC651 51"■ WSQC354 ■ WSQC654 54"■ WSQC357 ■ WSQC657 57"■ WSQC360 ■ WSQC660 60"

Base

■ BSQC334 ■ BSQC634 341⁄2" ■ BSQC340 ■ BSQC640 401⁄2"

3"

3"

6"

6"

Top View

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Tall

■ USQC364 ■ USQC664 641⁄2"■ USQC384 ■ USQC684 84" ■ USQC387 ■ USQC687 87" ■ USQC390 ■ USQC690 90"■ USQC393 ■ USQC693 93"■ USQC396 ■ USQC696 96"

Vanity Base

■ VSQC332 ■ VSQC632 32"

Desk Base

■ DSQC328 ■ DSQC628 281⁄2"

800.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTSThermofoil – Moldings

For Thermofoil Moldings this page:

• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our thermofoil door styles.

• Finished in matching foil material, finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings.

• 8’ lengths.

Thermofoil Crown Moldings

Small Crown

FSMCRN8

Medium Crown

FCCM8

Large Crown

FLCM8

Thermofoil Specialty Moldings

Soffit Molding

FSFM8

Profile for following door styles:

PROFILE A: Caledon • Eaton • Fenwick • Lincoln • Wattsburg • Winterberry

PROFILE B: Leighton

23⁄16"

3"

Cove Molding

FCOV8 15⁄16"

15⁄16"

3"

315⁄16"

37⁄16"

41⁄2"

11⁄16"

11⁄16"

Profile A Profile B

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

3" 3⁄4"

Thermofoil Under Cabinet Moldings

Light Valance

LVM8

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Molding is edge banded on two long 3⁄4" edges; plywood core.

• For use with light valance prep modification; see LVP in Section 1100.

13⁄16"

Starter Molding

STARTMLD396 STARTMLD696

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Modify height available on 6" side of STARTMLD696; minimum 31⁄4", maximum 6".

• Constructed from plywood core material.

Thermofoil Starter Molding

33⁄4"

21⁄4"

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

800.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Thermofoil – Moldings

Thermofoil Trim Moldings

Scribe Molding

FMLD8

For Thermofoil Moldings this page:

• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our thermofoil door styles.

• Finished in matching foil material, finished edges indicated by bold lines in side view drawings.

• 8’ lengths.

Shoe Molding

FSM8

Small Base Hutch Molding

FBHM8

Thermofoil Base Moldings

Batten Molding

FBAT8

11⁄4"

5⁄16"

Outside Corner Molding

FCMD8 Small FCMD8L Large

11⁄16"

11⁄16"

11⁄16"

11⁄16"

11⁄16"

1⁄4"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

21⁄2"

1⁄2"

Large Base Hutch Molding

FBHM8L

51⁄4"

3⁄4"

Thermofoil Toe Kick Material

• Install over unfinished toe space assembly.

• 1⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face only; MDF core.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face and two short edges; includes dado on back side for use with leg leveling modification (TSLLV), see Section 1100 for details.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick has furniture board core; PLYBOX modification is available to upgrade to plywood core.

41⁄2" High, Standard Height

TKF96 1⁄4" Thick TKF3496 3⁄4" Thick

9"

1⁄4"

9" High, Universal Access Height

TKHCF996 1⁄4" Thick

41⁄2"

1⁄4" or 3⁄4"

800.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

Thermofoil Base Moldings• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our thermofoil door styles.

• Finished in matching foil material, finished edges indicated by bold lines in side view drawings.

Thermofoil – Moldings

48" or 96"

Thermofoil Flush Toe Kick Molding

• 4’ or 8’ lengths.

• Length may be modified at factory at no charge; specify width, minimum 15", maximum 96".

EXAMPLE: TOEMLD496, width84.

• Molding is 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.

• Designed for field installation to create a flush toe on a single cabinet or run of cabinets (see examples below.)

Door Style Specific Profile

TOEMLD448 TOEMLD496

DESIGN NOTE

Use recess toe space modifications and additional molding to wrap around sides of cabinet to create a furniture look.

Design Examples

Molding is flush with front of doors

Molding is flush with front of cabinet

Flush with front of cabinet Flush with front of door

41⁄2" 41⁄2" 33⁄4" 45⁄8"

One piece flush toe kick molding shown on a run of cabinets

Molding shown assembled with field applied returns

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

33⁄4"

41⁄2"

Side View – Plywood Core Leighton Profile

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

33⁄4"

41⁄2"

Side View – MDF Core

3"

Profile for following doors:CaledonEatonFenwickLincolnWattsburgWinterberry

DESIGN NOTE

To cap flush toe kick molding on end of a run, consider using extend end panel down and finished end modifications to achieve this look.

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

800.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Thermofoil Decorative Toe Kick Molding

• 4’ or 8’ lengths, MDF core.

• Length may be modified at factory at no charge; specify width, see below for minimums & maximums.

EXAMPLE: RAVALMLD496, width84.

• Molding is 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.

• Designed for field installation to create a decorative toe on a single cabinet or run of cabinets, see examples at right.

• To cover unfinished toe kick and seams between cabinets, order matching toe kick (TKF) material for installation behind decorative toe kick molding.

• Order TOEMLD for field install returns, see previous page.

Thermofoil – Moldings

Thermofoil Base Moldings• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our thermofoil door styles.

• Finished in matching foil material.

Scallop Valance

VALMLD448 VALMLD496

• Available in the following widths only: 30", 36", 48", 60", 72", 84" and 96".

Roman Arch Valance

RAVALMLD448 RAVALMLD496

• Minimum width 19", maximum 96".

Provincial Arch Valance

PRVVALMLD448 PRVVALMLD496

• Minimum width 15", maximum 96".

Mission Arch Valance

MAVALMLD448 MAVALMLD496

• Minimum width 15", maximum 96".

Arch Valance

AVALMLD448 AVALMLD496

• Minimum width 21", maximum 96".

Design Examples One piece decorative flush toe kick with Roman Valance

One piece decorative flush toe kick with Roman Valance and field installed finish returns

Molding shown assembled with field installed returns

One piece decorative flush toe kick with Roman Valance. Recessed Toe Space added to left side with mitered return molding (TOEMLD) to create a custom furniture look. Molding returns to be cut in field.

DESIGN NOTE

Use recess toe space modifications and additional molding to wrap around sides of cabinet to create a furniture look.

Use finished toe kick material behind decorative toe molding to conceal unfinished toe base and cabinet seams. Order separately, field trim to fit.

DESIGN NOTE

To cap flush toe kick molding on end of a run, consider using extend end panel down and finished end modifications to achieve this look.

800.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Thermofoil – Accents

• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our thermofoil door styles.

• Finished in matching foil material, finished edges indicated by bold lines in side view drawings.

• Columns are constructed from 3⁄4" thick plywood.

• Four side deluxe mitered construction, see top view.

• Width modification available on 6" x 6" column only: 31⁄4" x 31⁄4" minimum, 7" x 7" maximum. Width modification affect all sides equally; column remains square.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

Thermofoil Empire Square Columns

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall

■ WSQC348 ■ WSQC648 48" ■ WSQC351 ■ WSQC651 51"■ WSQC354 ■ WSQC654 54"■ WSQC357 ■ WSQC657 57"■ WSQC360 ■ WSQC660 60"

Base

■ BSQC334 ■ BSQC634 341⁄2" ■ BSQC340 ■ BSQC640 401⁄2"

3"

3"

6"

6"

Top View

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Tall

■ USQC364 ■ USQC664 641⁄2"■ USQC384 ■ USQC684 84" ■ USQC387 ■ USQC687 87" ■ USQC390 ■ USQC690 90"■ USQC393 ■ USQC693 93"■ USQC396 ■ USQC696 96"

Vanity Base

■ VSQC332 ■ VSQC632 32"

Desk Base

■ DSQC328 ■ DSQC628 281⁄2"

800.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Thermofoil – Valances

Thermofoil Valances• Available exclusively to coordinate with orders in our thermofoil door styles.

• Front and edges finished in matching foil material.

• Last two numbers in item SKU indicate width of valance.

• Width can be modified at factory (MW), except for scallop valance; see below for minimum width requirements.

Straight Valance

41⁄2" High

SVAL430 SVAL436 SVAL448 SVAL460 SVAL472 SVAL484

6" High

SVAL630 SVAL636 SVAL648 SVAL660 SVAL672 SVAL684

Arch Valance

41⁄2" High

AVAL430 AVAL436 AVAL448 AVAL460 AVAL472 AVAL484

6" High

AVAL630 AVAL636 AVAL648 AVAL660 AVAL672 AVAL684

Mission Arch Valance

41⁄2" High

MAVAL430 MAVAL436 MAVAL448 MAVAL460 MAVAL472 MAVAL484

6" High

MAVAL630 MAVAL636 MAVAL648 MAVAL660 MAVAL672 MAVAL684

Roman Valance Provincial Valance

41⁄2" High

PRVVAL430 PRVVAL436 PRVVAL448 PRVVAL460 PRVVAL472 PRVVAL484

6" High

PRVVAL630 PRVVAL636 PRVVAL648 PRVVAL660 PRVVAL672 PRVVAL684

Scallop Valance

41⁄2" High

VAL430 VAL436 VAL448 VAL460 VAL472 VAL484

6" High

VAL630 VAL636 VAL648 VAL660 VAL672 VAL684

• Width cannot be modified at factory.

• Minimum width: 19".

• Minimum width: 21".

• Minimum width: 15".

• Minimum width: 15".

6" High

RAVAL636 RAVAL648 RAVAL654 RAVAL660 RAVAL672 RAVAL684

41⁄2" High

RAVAL436 RAVAL448 RAVAL454 RAVAL460 RAVAL472 RAVAL484

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

21⁄2"

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

41⁄2"

21⁄2"

4"

Edge Detail

41⁄2"6"

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

21⁄2"

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

2"

41⁄2"

2"

2"

41⁄2"

2"

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

6" high valance

41⁄2" high valance

41⁄2"

• Minimum width: 15".

800.152015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Crown Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ or 10’ lengths.

• Order crown mounting strip (CRNMTS) separately.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

21⁄8"

31⁄2"

Marquis Crown

MRQCRN8 MRQCRN10*

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.* Not available in Knotty Alder.

Stepped Cove Crown

STPCRN8 STPCRN10

• Available in all species.

17⁄8"

3"

Medium Crown

CCM8 CCM10

• Species substitutions: Oak for

QS Oak. 11⁄2"

2"

Wide Cove Large Crown

WCVM8 WCVM10

• Available in all species.

2"

211⁄16"

Small Crown

SMCRN8 SMCRN10

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak. 13⁄16"

11⁄4"

Deluxe Crown

DXCRN8 DXCRN10

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

31⁄2"

39⁄16"

Crescent Crown

CRESCRN8 CRESCRN10

• Available in all species.

17⁄8"

3"

Shaker Crown

SHKM8 SHKM10

• Available in all species.• If ordered with Highlights, this item

does not receive highlight detail.

17⁄8"

25⁄8"3⁄4"

Mounting Strip

Crown Molding

3⁄4"

Side ViewCRNMTS

See page 800.17 for ordering details

Pillowed Large Crown

WCRN8P WCRN10P

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

21⁄4"

23⁄4"

Arts & Crafts Small Stepped Crown

ACSTPCRN8 ACSTPCRN10

• Available in all species.

11⁄4"

13⁄16"

Classic Large Crown

CLCM8 CLCM10

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak. 21⁄8"

211⁄16"45⁄8"

51⁄4"

Renaissance Crown

RCRN8 RCRN10*

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.* Not available in Knotty Alder.

13⁄16"

800.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Classic Decorative Crown

CDCM8 CDCM10

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak. 21⁄2"

1⁄2"

13⁄16"

35⁄16"

Decorative Crown Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ or 10’ lengths. • Molding is designed to accept all

decorative insert moldings. Order separately, assemble on site.

• Order crown mounting strip separately (CRNMTS).

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Pillowed Decorative Crown

DCM8P DCM10P

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak. 21⁄2"

13⁄16"

1⁄2"

35⁄16"

Cove Decorative Crown

DCVM8 DCVM10

• Available in all species. 21⁄2"

13⁄16"

1⁄2"

35⁄16"

Astragal

AST8

• Available in all species.3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Decorative Insert Moldings• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings;

additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

For all Embossed Moldings this section:• Embossed molding of solid wood.

• 8’ lengths.

For all Carved Moldings this section:• Carved molding of solid wood.

• All moldings this section are 8’ lengths, except Bambusa.

Aztec

AZTC8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Bambusa

BAMB4

• 4’ lengths.

• Not available in Hickory, Oak and QS Oak.

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄8"

3⁄4"

Rope

RP8

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄8"

3⁄4"

Egg and Dart

EGD8

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder, Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

1⁄2"

3⁄4"

Mounting Strip

Crown Molding

3⁄4"

Side ViewCRNMTS

See page 800.17 for ordering details 13⁄16"

800.172015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings, Crown Mounting Strip

Lillian

LLAN8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

5⁄16"

Bellflower

BLFLW8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Cane

CANE8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Deco

DECO8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Deluxe Egg and Dart

DXEGD8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Dentil

DE8

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Decorative Insert Moldings (continued)

For all Carved Moldings this section:• Carved molding of solid wood.

• 8’ lengths.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Hamlet

HAML8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

13⁄4"

1⁄4"

Frieze Moldings• Carved molding of solid wood.

• 8’ lengths.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Wisteria

WISTR8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

1⁄4"

13⁄4"

Pergola

PERG8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.• If ordered with Highlights, this item does

not receive highlight detail.

2"

1⁄4"

Finished Crown Molding Mounting Strip• Designed to fit into recess on back of select

moldings; moldings priced separately.

• Solid wood.

• 8’ lengths.

•Species/finish match order; finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawing.

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

CRNMTS8

Mounting Strip

Crown Molding

13⁄16"

3⁄4"

Mounting Strip

Crown Molding

13⁄16"

3⁄4"

Unfinished Crown Molding Mounting Strip• Designed to fit into recess on back of select

moldings; moldings priced separately.

• Unfinished solid bass wood.

• 10’ lengths.

CRNMTSUF10

800.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Palladian

PALL8

• Carved molding.

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder, Oak for QS Oak.

Specialty & Starter Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ lengths.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Cairo

CAIR8

• Carved molding.• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Persia

PERS8

• Carved molding.

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

13⁄8"

13⁄16"

Starter Molding

STARTMLD396 STARTMLD696

• Consists of two solid stock moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Corner piece is profiled to match door style profile on order; see chart below.

• Available in all species.

• Modify height available on 6" side of STARTMLD696; minimum 31⁄4", maximum 6".

Profile for following door styles:

PROFILE A*: Bahamas • Brookhill • Devonshire • Hudson Falls • Loxley • Mission Park Place • Potter’s Mill • Providence • Sonoma • Windwood

PROFILE B: Valencia • Victoria • Wakefield

PROFILE C: Calistoga

PROFILE D: Madison • Venice

PROFILE E: Dana Pointe

Profile B

Profile D

Profile C

11⁄2"

1⁄2"

Profile A (Radius)*

Profiled detail

Triangles point to Quartersawn Oak face material

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

3"

Profile E

Application Example – Crown Molding Stack

Cairo Molding (CAIR)

Side View of Crown Molding Stack

Crown Molding Mounting Strip (CRNMTS)

Arts & Crafts Crown (ACSTPCRN)

Tall Filler (UF396)

Profiled Solid Stock (PSSM)

Cabinet

13⁄4"

13⁄16"

13⁄16"

13⁄16"

Application Example

Starter Molding (STARTMLD696)

Side View

Marquis Crown Molding (MRQCRN8)

Crown Molding Mounting Strip (CRNMTS)

Classic Large Crown Molding

(CLCM8)

Starter Molding(STARTMLD696)

Cabinet Door

Blocking

*If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

33⁄4"

800.192015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Decorative Light Valance

DLV8

• Molding is designed to accept all Decorative Insert Moldings. Order separately, assemble on site.

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Round Profile Molding

RND8

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder, Oak for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Pillowed Decorative Light Valance

DLV8P

• Design complements Pillowed Crown Moldings. • Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Flush Bottom Molding

FBM8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Under Cabinet Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ lengths. LVM also available in 10' lengths.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Arts & Crafts Concave Light Valance

ACCLV8

• Available in all species.• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not

receive highlight detail.

21⁄4"

11⁄2"

Arts & Crafts Stepped Cove Light Valance

ACSTPLV8

• Available in all species.

11⁄2"

21⁄4"

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

11⁄2"3⁄4"

21⁄4" 11⁄2"

11⁄2"

3⁄4" 3⁄4"

3⁄4" 1⁄2"

1⁄4"

21⁄2"

11⁄16" 17⁄16"

3⁄4" 13⁄8"

5⁄8"

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

Light Valance Molding

LVM8 LVM10

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• Available in all species.• For use with light valance prep mod, see LVP in Section 1100.

11⁄2"

Astragal Light Valance

ASTLV8

• Available in all species.

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

3⁄4" 11⁄2"

Astragal Light Valance – Small

ASTLVS8

• Available in all species. 3⁄4" 1⁄4"

15⁄8"

13⁄16"11⁄16"

21⁄4"

11⁄2"

800.20 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Edge Cap Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ lengths.

• Order mounting strip separately (CRNMTS).

• For orders in Quartersawn Oak, arrow indicates position of the quartered cut.

• Available in all species.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Beaded Profile – Both Edges

ECMB2

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Waterfall Profile – Both Edges

ECMWF2

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Waterfall Profile – One Edge

ECMWF1

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Traditional Profile – Both Edges

ECMT2

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Bullnose Profile – Both Edges

ECMBN2• If ordered with Highlights, this

item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Bullnose Profile – One Edge

ECMBN1• If ordered with Highlights, this

item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Astragal

ECMAST2

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Concave Edge Cap

ECMCV2• If ordered with Highlights, this

item does not receive highlight detail.

Eased Profile – One Edge

ECME1• If ordered with Highlights, this

item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Eased Profile – Both Edges

ECME2• If ordered with Highlights, this

item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

11⁄2"

Mounting Strip

Edge CapMolding

13⁄16"

3⁄4"

Side ViewCRNMTS

See page 800.17 for ordering details

Traditional Profile – One Edge

ECMT111⁄2"

3⁄4"

800.212015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Profile F

PSSF396 PSSF696

Profile Solid Stock Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ lengths.

• Dimensions shown are of solid stock prior to profiling.

• Available in all species.

• Modify width (MW) available on all PSS stock in 1⁄4" increments. 3" stock has a minimum width of 1"; 6" stock has minimum width of 31⁄4".

• For orders in Quartersawn Oak, arrows indicates position of the quartered cut.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Profile M

PSSM396 PSSM696

3" or 6"

3⁄4"

Profile A

PSSA396 PSSA696

3" or 6"

3⁄4"Profile G

PSSG396 PSSG696 3" or 6"

3⁄4"

Profile C

PSSC396 PSSC696

3" or 6"

3⁄4"Profile J

PSSJ396 PSSJ696

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

Profile B

PSSB396 PSSB696

Profile H

PSSH396 PSSH696

3" or 6"

3⁄4"3⁄4"

3" or 6"

Profile E

PSSE396 PSSE696

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3" or 6"

3⁄4"Profile L

PSSL396 PSSL696

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

Profile D

PSSD396 PSSD696

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3" or 6"

3⁄4"Profile K

PSSK396 PSSK696

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

3" or 6"

5⁄16"

800.22 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Trim Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ lengths.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Scribe Molding

MLD8

• 1⁄4" thick.• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not

receive highlight detail.

Inside Cove Molding

COV8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4" Small

Large

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

11⁄4"

11⁄4"

Angled Outside Corner Molding – 135°

AOCMD8 Small AOCMD8L Large

• 1⁄4" thick.• Available in all species.• If ordered with

Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Small

Large

3⁄4"3⁄4"

11⁄4"

11⁄4"

Arts & Crafts Trim Molding

ACTRM8

• Available in all species. 3⁄4"

1"

Shoe Molding

SSM8 Small SM8 Large

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.• If ordered with Highlights,

this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

Decorative Trim Molding

TRM8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Application Example

Outside Corner Molding – 90°

CMD8 Small CMD8L Large

• 1⁄4" thick.• Species substitutions: Oak

for QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

Application Example

Batten Molding

BAT8

• 1⁄4" thick.• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not

receive highlight detail.

1"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

1⁄2"

Small

Large

800.232015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings

Base Moldings• Decorative base hutch moldings are 45⁄8" high; scribing/trimming required in field.

• 8’ lengths.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

45⁄8"

3⁄4"

Decorative Base Hutch Molding

BHM8

• Solid wood.

• Molding is designed to accept all Decorative Insert moldings.

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Classic Base Hutch Molding

CBHM8

• Solid wood.

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

45⁄8"

3⁄4"

Astragal Base Hutch Molding

ASTBHM8

• Solid wood.

• Available in all species.

3⁄4"

45⁄8"

Arts & Crafts Base Hutch Molding

ACBHM8

• Solid wood.

• Available in all species.

3⁄4"

45⁄8"

Coliseum Base Hutch Molding

CSBHM8

• Solid wood.

• Available in all species.

3⁄4"

45⁄8"

Rook Base Hutch Molding

RBHM8

• Solid wood.

• Available in all species.

3⁄4"

45⁄8"

Santorini Base Hutch Molding

SBHM8

• Solid wood.

• Available in all species.

3⁄4"

45⁄8"

Toe Kick Material

• Install over unfinished toe space assembly.

• 1⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face only; MDF core.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick is finished on face and two short edges; includes dado on back side for use with leg leveling modification (TSLLV), see Section 1100 for details.

• 3⁄4" thick toe kick has furniture board core; PLYBOX modification is available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Available in all species.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

41⁄2" High, Standard Height

TK96 1⁄4" Thick TK3496 3⁄4" Thick

9"

1⁄4"

9" High, Universal Access Height

TKHC996 1⁄4" Thick

41⁄2"

1⁄4" or 3⁄4"

Toe Kick Cap, 41⁄2" High

TKC

• Install over cut end of toe kick on standard base, vanity base and tall cabinets.

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawing.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

• Pack of two.

41⁄2"

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

TKC Installed

800.24 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Flush Toe Kick Molding

• 4’ or 8’ lengths, solid wood.

• Length may be modified at factory at no charge; specify width, minimum 15", maximum 96". EXAMPLE: TOEMLD496, width84.

• Molding is 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.

• Designed for field installation to create a flush toe on a single cabinet or run of cabinets (see examples below.

• Available in all species.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings; additional finishing available through Custom Quote request.

Wood – Moldings

Base Moldings

48" or 96"

DESIGN NOTE

Use recess toe space modifications and additional molding to wrap around sides of cabinet to create a furniture look.

3⁄4"

3⁄4"

33⁄4"

41⁄2"

Side View*

3"

Design Examples

Molding is flush with front of doors

Molding is flush with front of cabinet

Flush with front of cabinet

Flush with front of door

41⁄2" 33⁄4"

41⁄2" 45⁄8"

One piece flush toe kick molding shown on run of cabinets.

Molding shown assembled with field applied returns

Calistoga PSSF

MadisonVenice

PSSG

Dana Pointe

PSSH

PSSD

PSSN

Profile for all wood door styles except those noted at right.*If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Profile N*

PSSNMLD448 PSSNMLD496

Door Style Specific Profile

TOEMLD448 TOEMLD496

Solid Stock Profile

Profile D*

PSSDMLD448 PSSDMLD496

Profile F

PSSFMLD448 PSSFMLD496

Profile G

PSSGMLD448 PSSGMLD496

Profile H

PSSHMLD448 PSSHMLD496

DESIGN NOTE

To cap flush toe kick molding on end of a run, consider using extend end panel down and finished end modifications to achieve this look.

*If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

800.252015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Base Moldings

Wood – Moldings

Decorative Toe Kick Molding

• 4’ or 8’ lengths, solid wood.

• Length may be modified at factory at no charge; specify width, see below for minimums & maximums. EXAMPLE: RAVALMLD496, width84.

• Molding is 41⁄2" high x 33⁄4" deep.

• Designed for field installation to create a decorative toe on a single cabinet or run of cabinets, see examples at right.

• To cover unfinished toe kick and seams between cabinets, order matching toe kick (TK) material for installation behind decorative toe kick molding.

• Order PSSNMLD for field install returns, see previous page.

• Available in all species.*If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Scallop Valance

VALMLD448 VALMLD496

• Available in the following widths only: 30", 36", 48", 60", 72", 84" and 96".

Roman Arch Valance*

RAVALMLD448 RAVALMLD496

• Minimum width 19", maximum 96".

Provincial Arch Valance*

PRVVALMLD448 PRVVALMLD496

• Minimum width 15", maximum 96".

Mission Arch Valance*

MAVALMLD448 MAVALMLD496

• Minimum width 15", maximum 96".

Arch Valance*

AVALMLD448 AVALMLD496

• Minimum width 21", maximum 96".

Design ExamplesOne piece decorative flush toe kick with Roman Valance

One piece decorative flush toe kick with Roman Valance and field installed finish returns

Molding shown assembled with field installed returns

One piece decorative flush toe kick with Roman Valance. Recessed Toe Space added to left side with mitered return molding (PSSNMLD) to create a custom furniture look. Molding returns to be cut in field.

DESIGN NOTE

Use recess toe space modifications and additional molding to wrap around sides of cabinet to create a furniture look.

Use finished toe kick material behind decorative toe molding to conceal unfinished toe base and cabinet seams. Order separately, field trim to fit.

DESIGN NOTE

To cap flush toe kick molding on end of a run, consider using extend end panel down and finished end modifications to achieve this look.

800.26 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Moldings and Accents

Estate Capital

CPTLESTS Small

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Split Post Moldings• Solid wood, 8’ lengths.

• Loose for field install.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on side view drawings.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Capitals

Large

Plain

TPBS Small TPBL Large

• Loose for field install.

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Small

7⁄8"

51⁄4"

Rope Split Post

TPMRP8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

11⁄2"

5"

35⁄8"

11⁄2"

Plain Split Post - Small

TPMSPL8

• Available in all species.

Plain with Spool Assembly

CAPSPLSM Small CAPSPLLG Large

• Loose for field install.

• Available in all species.

• For use with small plain split post (TPMSPL8).

53⁄8"

Side View Detail

Elevation Detail

21⁄8"

Spool

SPOOL

• Loose for field install.

• Available in all species.

• For use with small plain split post (TPMSPL8).

Side View Detail

21⁄4"

7⁄8"

Side View Detail

Elevation Detail

Small Capital/Spool Assembly

Overall Height: 47⁄8"

Large Capital/Spool Assembly

Overall Height: 71⁄2"

11⁄4"

21⁄8"

23⁄4"

2"13⁄4"

2"13⁄4"

21⁄2"11⁄4"

31⁄2"

77⁄8"

21⁄2"11⁄4"

7⁄8"

3⁄4"

Reeded Split Post

TPMRE8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

Fluted Split Post

TPMFL8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

Plain Split Post - Large

TPMPN8

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

11⁄2"

3⁄4"

5⁄8"

Dimensions may vary slightly.

800.272015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Accents

Carved Onlays• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Vineyard Onlay, Pair

EACH: Width Height Depth

CRVVINPR 7" 31⁄2" 5⁄8"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.• Coordinates with Vineyard corbel.

Chateau Onlay

Width Height Depth

CRVCHATS Small 20" 41⁄2" 3⁄4" CRVCHATM Medium 24" 51⁄2" 3⁄4" CRVCHATL Large 32" 6" 7⁄8"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

For Grape, Acanthus and Shell onlays:• Dimensions: 20" w x 41⁄2" h x 5⁄8" d.

• Species substitutions: Beech for Hickory, Oak and QS Oak; Cherry for Knotty Alder.

• For Onlays attached to solid stock material, see Solid Stock with Applied Onlay (ICRV) on next page.

Grape Onlay

CRVGR

Acanthus Onlay

CRVAC

Shell Onlay

CRVSH

Sherwood Onlay, Pair

Width Height Depth

CRVSHERPR 7" 31⁄2" 5⁄8"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

• Coordinates with Sherwood corbel.

Chateau Onlay, Pair

EACH: Width Height Depth

CRVCHATPR 7" 3" 5⁄8"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Sherwood Onlay

Width Height Depth

CRVSHERS Small 20" 41⁄2" 3⁄4" CRVSHERM Medium 24" 5" 7⁄8" CRVSHERL Large 32" 51⁄2" 1"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

• Coordinates with Sherwood corbel.

Vineyard Onlay

Width Height Depth

CRVVINS Small 20" 41⁄2" 3⁄4" CRVVINM Medium 24" 5" 3⁄4" CRVVINL Large 32" 6" 7⁄8"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.• Coordinates with Vineyard

corbel.

800.28 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Accents

Oval

ROSOVL

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak; Birch for Maple; Cherry for Knotty Alder.

13⁄4" w x 31⁄4" h

21⁄8" diam.

21⁄8" diam.

Rosettes• All rosettes are 3⁄8" at thickest point.• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Appliqués

Square Appliqué

Width Height Thickness

ROSSQS Small 1" 1" 1⁄4" ROSSQL Large 31⁄2" 31⁄2" 3⁄8"

• Fits on face of Small and Large Shaker Corbels.• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not

receive highlight detail.

Solid Stock with Applied Carved Onlay

Solid Stock Height

ICRVGR Grape 6" ICRVAC Acanthus 6" ICRVSH Shell 6" ICRVCHATS Chateau, S 6" ICRVCHATM Chateau, M 71⁄2" ICRVCHATL Chateau, L 71⁄2"

Solid Stock Height

ICRVSHERS Sherwood, S 6" ICRVSHERM Sherwood, M 71⁄2" ICRVSHERL Sherwood, L 71⁄2" ICRVVINS Vineyard, S 6" ICRVVINM Vineyard, M 71⁄2" ICRVVINL Vineyard, L 71⁄2"

• Onlay applied to center of solid wood material, finished on face and four edges. See previously listed onlays for visual reference and species substitutions.

• Solid stock is 3⁄4" thick and 48" wide. Reference chart for height of solid stock.

• Width of solid stock can be modified at the factory (MW); minimum is dependent on onlay width, maximum 66".

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Acanthus

ROSACN

• Species substitutions: Beech for Hickory, Oak and QS Oak; Cherry for Knotty Alder.

Ringed/Plain

ROSPLN

• Species substitutions: Maple for Hickory, Oak and QS Oak; Cherry for Knotty Alder.

800.292015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Valances

Deluxe Arch Valance

103⁄4" High

DAVF3610DAVF4210DAVF4810DAVF5410DAVF6010DAVF6610DAVF7210

• 3⁄4" thick, solid wood frame.

• Center height of 83⁄4" does not change.

• Center panels of valance are designed to complement styling of door; however, please note following:

– Inside profie maintains detail shown at right. – Orders in applied molding door styles do not receive applied molding.

• Available in all species.

• Finished all sides/edges.

103⁄4"

DAVF3610

Valances

Profile/Center Panel Details

PROFILE / CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door Style Flat Reverse Raised Raised Beaded

Bahamas* •

Hudson Falls • • • •

Loxley • • • •

Mission • • • •

Potter’s Mill • • • •

Sonoma • • • •

PROFILE / CENTER PANEL DETAIL

Door StyleFlat Reverse

Raised Raised Beaded

Brookhill • • • •

Calistoga • • A† •

Dana Pointe • • • •

Devonshire • • B† •

Madison • • C† •

Park Place • • • •

Providence • • • •

Valencia • • • •

Venice • • D† •

Victoria • • • •

Wakefield • • • •

Windwood • • • •

†Raised Center Panel/Profile Details for RP Doors as Marked Above

A B C D

*Indicates a specialty door that is not available with choice of center panel options.

†The center panel of these door styles vary, see drawings below.

800.30 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Valances

Valances• Last two numbers in item SKU indicate width of valance.

• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood.

• Finished all sides/edges.

• Available in all species.

Mission Arch Valance

• Width can be modified at factory; minimum 15".

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

41⁄2" High

MAVAL430 MAVAL436 MAVAL448 MAVAL460 MAVAL472 MAVAL484

6" High

MAVAL630 MAVAL636 MAVAL648 MAVAL660 MAVAL672 MAVAL684

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

21⁄2"

• Width can be modified at factory; minimum 15".

41⁄2" High

SVAL430 SVAL436 SVAL448 SVAL460 SVAL472 SVAL484

6" High

SVAL630 SVAL636 SVAL648 SVAL660 SVAL672 SVAL684

Straight Valance

• Width can be modified at factory; minimum 19".

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

2"

41⁄2"

6" High

RAVAL636 RAVAL648 RAVAL654 RAVAL660 RAVAL672 RAVAL684

Roman Valance

Arch Valance 41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

41⁄2"

21⁄2"

4"

41⁄2" High

AVAL430 AVAL436 AVAL448 AVAL460 AVAL472 AVAL484

6" High

AVAL630 AVAL636 AVAL648 AVAL660 AVAL672 AVAL684

• Width can be modified at factory; minimum 21".

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Provincial Valance 41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

2"

41⁄2" High

PRVVAL430 PRVVAL436 PRVVAL448 PRVVAL460 PRVVAL472 PRVVAL484

6" High

PRVVAL630 PRVVAL636 PRVVAL648 PRVVAL660 PRVVAL672 PRVVAL684

• Width can be modified at factory; minimum 15" .

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

41⁄2"

41⁄2" High

VAL430 VAL436 VAL448 VAL460 VAL472 VAL484

6" High

VAL630 VAL636 VAL648 VAL660 VAL672 VAL684

• Width cannot be modified at factory.

Scallop Valance

6" high valance

41⁄2" high valance

Edge Detail

41⁄2"6"

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

21⁄2"

2"

41⁄2" High

RAVAL436 RAVAL448 RAVAL454 RAVAL460 RAVAL472 RAVAL484

2"

41⁄2" high valance

6" high valance

41⁄2"

800.312015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Accents

Grape Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-GR9 53⁄4" 87⁄8" 61⁄16" CBL-GR13 27⁄8" 123⁄4" 93⁄16"

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder; Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Scroll Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-SC9 53⁄4" 9" 61⁄16" CBL-SC13 27⁄8" 13" 93⁄16"

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder; Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Acanthus Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-AC9 53⁄4" 9" 61⁄16" CBL-AC13 27⁄8" 13" 93⁄16"

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder; Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Corbels• Modifications not available.

• Corbels are decorative elements and should not be considered structural/load bearing.

Regal Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-RGL9 35⁄8" 9" 41⁄2" CBL-RGL13 53⁄8" 133⁄8" 63⁄4"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Vineyard Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-VIN10 43⁄4" 10" 5" CBL-VIN14 55⁄8" 14" 67⁄8"

• Coordinates with Vineyard onlay.

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Whitney Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-WHT7 5" 7" 3" CBL-WHT11 6" 11" 4" CBL-WHT14 41⁄2" 133⁄4" 10"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Americana Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-AMR7 41⁄2" 7" 41⁄2" CBL-AMR11 51⁄2" 101⁄2" 51⁄2"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Sherwood Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-SHR10 43⁄4" 10" 5" CBL-SHR14 55⁄8" 14" 67⁄8"

• Coordinates with Sherwood onlay.

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

CBL-WHT7

CBL-GR9

CBL-GR13

CBL-SC9

CBL-SC13

CBL-AC9

CBL-AC13

CBL-WHT11

CBL-WHT14

Symphony Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-SYM8 5" 8" 3" CBL-SYM10 41⁄2" 10" 17⁄8" CBL-SYM12 67⁄8" 121⁄8" 41⁄4" CBL-SYM14 6" 133⁄4" 21⁄2"

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak. CBL-SYM10

CBL-SYM12

800.32 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Accents

Corbels• Modifications not available.

• Corbels are decorative elements and should not be considered structural/load bearing.

Plain Counter Support Bracket

Shaker Counter Support Bracket

Width Height Depth

CTS11M 21⁄4" 111⁄4" 9"

• Available in all species.

Width Height Depth

CTS11 21⁄4" 111⁄4" 111⁄4"

• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak.

Counter Support Brackets• 3⁄4" thick solid wood construction.

• Counter support brackets can support up to 100 pounds if they are securely attached to mounting surface. If attached to side or back of cabinet, a minimum of three #8 x 11⁄2" long pan head style screws is required per bracket. If secured to wall, a minimum of three #8 x 21⁄2" long pan head style screws is required per bracket; screws must be driven into wall studs.

• Modifications not available.

Width Height Depth

CTS06 21⁄4" 61⁄4" 61⁄4"

• Available in all species.

Width Height Depth

CTS08 11⁄2" 10" 8"

• Available in all species.

• Designed to fit on end stiles/intermediate stiles of all Deluxe Back Panels.

Small Shaker Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-SHK9 11⁄2" 9" 5"

• Available in all species.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Large Shaker Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-SHK11 33⁄4" 101⁄2" 6"

• Available in all species.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Ornamental Shaker Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-SHK3 3⁄4" 23⁄4" 11⁄2"

Plain Corbel

Width Height Depth

CBL-PL9 511⁄16" 815⁄16" 515⁄16" CBL-PL13 23⁄4" 13" 815⁄16"

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder; Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

• Available in all species.• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not

receive highlight detail.

CBL-PL9

CBL-PL13

800.332015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Wood – Accents

Plain Fluted

• Width modification available on 6" x 6" plain column only: 31⁄4" x 31⁄4" minimum, 7" x 7" maximum. Width modification affect all sides equally; column remains square.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Empire Square Columns• Columns are constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood.

• Four side deluxe mitered construction, see top view.

• Finished edges indicated by bold lines on top view drawings.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• 3" x 3" column has 3 flutes per side; 6" x 6" column has 6 flutes per side.

• Width modification not available.

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall

■ WSQCF348 ■ WSQCF648 48" ■ WSQCF351 ■ WSQCF651 51"■ WSQCF354 ■ WSQCF654 54"■ WSQCF357 ■ WSQCF657 57"■ WSQCF360 ■ WSQCF660 60"

Base

■ BSQCF334 ■ BSQCF634 341⁄2" ■ BSQCF340 ■ BSQCF640 401⁄2"

Tall

■ USQCF364 ■ USQCF664 641⁄2"■ USQCF384 ■ USQCF684 84" ■ USQCF387 ■ USQCF687 87" ■ USQCF390 ■ USQCF690 90"■ USQCF393 ■ USQCF693 93"■ USQCF396 ■ USQCF696 96"

Vanity Base

■ VSQCF332 ■ VSQCF632 32"

Desk Base

■ DSQCF328 ■ DSQCF628 281⁄2"

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall

■ WSQC348 ■ WSQC648 48" ■ WSQC351 ■ WSQC651 51"■ WSQC354 ■ WSQC654 54"■ WSQC357 ■ WSQC657 57"■ WSQC360 ■ WSQC660 60"

Base

■ BSQC334 ■ BSQC634 341⁄2" ■ BSQC340 ■ BSQC640 401⁄2"

Tall

■ USQC364 ■ USQC664 641⁄2"■ USQC384 ■ USQC684 84" ■ USQC387 ■ USQC687 87" ■ USQC390 ■ USQC690 90"■ USQC393 ■ USQC693 93"■ USQC396 ■ USQC696 96"

Vanity Base

■ VSQC332 ■ VSQC632 32"

Desk Base

■ DSQC328 ■ DSQC628 281⁄2"

3"

3"

6"

6"

Top View

All heights of Wall Fluted Square Columns

2"2"

All heights of Base, Vanity, Desk and Tall Fluted Square Columns

2"

61⁄2"

Flute Spacing

800.34 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS Wood – Accents

Decorative Legs• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak on

Legs A through H.• UPDATE: Legs J through Q now available in

all species.

Leg A

Isometric Example of Full Leg A

341⁄2"

7"4"

7"

201⁄2"

Full Leg AOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGA

4"715⁄16"

245⁄8"

715⁄16"

401⁄2"

Full Leg AOne Piece, 401⁄2" High

TRNLEGA40

Leg B

Isometric Example of Full Leg B

4"65⁄8"

41⁄2"

281⁄2"173⁄8"

Full Leg BOne Piece, 281⁄2" High

TRNLEGBV

41⁄2"

341⁄2"

7"

23"

4"

Full Leg BOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGB

341⁄2"

4"65⁄8"

41⁄2"

281⁄2"

Designed for use with one shelf, 11⁄2" thick

Full Leg BTwo Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGB1SR

401⁄2"

91⁄16"4"

317⁄16"

Full Leg BOne Piece, 401⁄2" High

TRNLEGB40

341⁄2"

7"3"

Full Leg COne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGC

41⁄2"21⁄4"

Full Leg EOne Piece, 401⁄2" High

TRNLEGE40

401⁄2"

4"

Leg C

Isometric Example of Full Leg C

Leg E

Isometric Example of Full Leg E

Tapered on front and one side.

Top View

41⁄2"21⁄4"

341⁄2"

4"

Full Leg EOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGEIf ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

800.352015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTSWood – Accents

Decorative Legs• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak on Legs A through H; legs J through Q available in all species.

41⁄2"

341⁄2"

151⁄8"

147⁄8"

4"

Full Leg D One Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGD

Leg D

Isometric Example of Full Leg D

Full Leg D Two Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGD1SR

Designed for use with one shelf, 11⁄2" thick

341⁄2"

4"

281⁄2"

41⁄2"

151⁄8"

Full Leg DThree Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGD2SR

341⁄2"

151⁄8"

4"

117⁄8"

41⁄2"

Designed for use with two shelves, 11⁄2" thick

341⁄2"

3"

155⁄8"

Full Leg FOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGF

Full Leg FTwo Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGF1S

341⁄2"

281⁄2"

3"

41⁄2"

Designed for use with one shelf, 11⁄2" thick

Full Leg FThree Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGF2S

3"

341⁄2"

113⁄8"

155⁄8"

Designed for use with two shelves, 11⁄2" thick

41⁄2"

Leg F

Isometric Example of Full Leg F

Leg G

Isometric Example of Full Leg G

Tapered on front and one side.

Top View

Full Leg GTwo Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGG1S

341⁄2"

281⁄2"

3"

13⁄4"

Designed for use with one shelf, 11⁄2" thick41⁄2"

341⁄2"

3"

13⁄4" 41⁄2"

Full Leg GOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGG

Full Leg GThree Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGG2S

341⁄2"

3"

13⁄4"

15"

12"

41⁄2"

Designed for use with two shelves, 11⁄2" thick

133⁄8"

If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

800.36 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS Wood – Accents

Decorative Legs• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak on Legs A through H; legs J through Q available in all species.

341⁄2"

73⁄4"

6"

Full Leg HOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGH

Full Leg HOne Piece, 401⁄2" High

TRNLEGH40

401⁄2"

11"

6"

341⁄2"

211⁄2"

31⁄2"

51⁄8"

15⁄8"

27⁄8"

41⁄2"

41⁄2"

81⁄2"

Full Leg JOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGJ

Full Leg JOne Piece, 401⁄2" High

TRNLEGJ40

401⁄2"

271⁄2"

31⁄2"

51⁄8" 81⁄2"

41⁄2"15⁄8"

27⁄8"

41⁄2"

Leg J

Isometric Example of Full Leg J

Leg H

Isometric Example of Full Leg H

Leg K

Isometric Example of Full Leg K

341⁄2"

4"

41⁄2"

151⁄8"

Full Leg LOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGL

Leg L

Isometric Example of Full Leg L

341⁄2"

4"8"

7"

Full Leg KOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGK

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

800.372015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTSWood – Accents

Decorative Legs• Species substitutions: Oak for QS Oak on Legs A through H; legs J through Q available in all species.

Full Leg MOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGM

341⁄2"

4"

41⁄2"

8"

Leg M

Isometric Example of Full Leg M

4"

Full Leg MOne Piece, 401⁄2" High

TRNLEGM40

401⁄2"

101⁄16"

41⁄2"

4"

341⁄2"

5"

45⁄8"

7"

31⁄2"

3"

Full Leg POne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGP

Leg P

Isometric Example of Full Leg P

Leg Q

Isometric Example of Full Leg Q

341⁄2"

5"

45⁄8"

151⁄8"

3"

31⁄2"

5"

401⁄2"

15"

45⁄8"

31⁄2"

3"

Full Leg QOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGQ

Full Leg QOne Piece, 401⁄2" High

TRNLEGQ40

341⁄2"

5" 7"

5"

31⁄2"

13⁄4"23⁄16"

Leg N

Isometric Example of Full Leg N

Full Leg NOne Piece, 341⁄2" High

TRNLEGN

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

800.38 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood – Accents

French Foot

FTFRN

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder; Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

Colonial Foot

FTCOL

• Same design as foot from Decorative Legs C and F. • Species substitutions:

Oak for QS Oak.

33⁄16"

27⁄16"

Traditional Foot

FTTRAD

• Same design as foot from Decorative Legs B and D. • Species substitutions:

Oak for QS Oak.

Symphony Foot

■ FTSYM

• Dimensions: 57⁄8" high x 23⁄4" square at top.

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Bun Foot

■ FTBUN

• Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

2"

6"

1"21⁄4"

33⁄8"

Decorative Feet

21⁄2" 5"

2"

1⁄4"

6"33⁄4"

Contoured Foot

■ FTCONTR

• 6" high x 2" square at top.• Available in all species.• If ordered with Highlights,

this item does not receive highlight detail.

6"

11⁄4"

2"

Tapered Foot

FTTPR

• Species substitutions: Cherry for Knotty Alder; Oak for Hickory and QS Oak.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail. 21⁄2"

21⁄2"13⁄4"

31⁄4"6"

10.6˚

2"

41⁄2"

11⁄2"

15⁄32"

215⁄16"

41⁄2"

11⁄2"

11⁄2"

37⁄16"

2"

800.392015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

MLDSTCK1 61⁄2"- 8" height range*

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut PSSB and wood block (1" x 4") to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block 1" back from front of PSSB molding.Step Three: Mount the PSSB/wood block configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Four: Cut BHM8 to desired length. Attach to wood block.Step Five: Cut MRQCRN8 to desired length. Attach to BHM8 at desired height. *MRQCRN8 can move up or down on the face of the BHM8 to accommodate an uneven ceiling.

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

PSSB396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 3

8 " over end panel

BHM8

MRQCRN8*

DoorCabinet

DoorCabinet

PSSB396

BHM8

MRQCRN8*

7" (+ or -)*

1"

318 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK1 is only available in wood door styles.

800.40 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK2 47⁄8" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut bottom CRNMTS8 and ECMCV2 to desired length.Step Two: Attach ECMCV2 to CRNMTS8. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in ECMCV2.Step Three: Cut wood block #1 (3⁄4" x 21⁄4") to length and attach to back of ECMCV2.Step Four: Cut wood block #2 (5⁄8" x 11⁄2") Attach to face of wood block #1.Step Five: Attach ECMCV2/wood block configuration to top of wall cabinet.Step Six: Cut PALL8 to desired length. Attach to face of wood block #2.Step Seven: Cut top CRNMTS8 to desired length. Attach to top of PALL8 so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits back 1⁄8" from front of PALL8. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in CRESCRN8.Step Eight: Cut CRESCRN8 to desired length. Attach to front of top CRNMTS8.

12

CRESCRN8

PALL8

CRNMTS8

CRNMTS8

DoorCabinet

ECMCV2

PALL8

CRESCRN8

DoorCabinet

ECMCV2 Recommended reveals:· 3

4 " over door· 3

8 " over end panel

478 "

34 "

4"

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK2 is only available in wood door styles.

800.412015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK3 75⁄8" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut PSSJs and wood block #1 (3⁄4" x 45⁄8") to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block (#1) 1" back from front of PSSJ moldings being sure PSSJ profile is facing down on top and bottom pieces.Step Three: Cut wood block #2 (3⁄4" x 3⁄4") to desired length. Attach face of wood block 1⁄4" back from front of top PSSJ.Step Four: Mount the PSSJ/wood block configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Five: Cut SBHM8 to desired length and attach to face of wood block #1.Step Six: Cut ASTLV8 to desired length and attach to face of wood block #2.

ASTLV8

PSSJ396

SBHM8

DoorCabinet

DoorCabinet

ASTLV8

PSSJ396

SBHM8

PSSJ3962

1

PSSJ396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 1

2 " over end panel

758 "

1"

238 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK3 is only available in wood door styles.

800.42 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK4 75⁄8" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut wood block #1 (3⁄4" x 11⁄2"), wood block #2 (3⁄4" x 3 7⁄16") and wood block #3 (3⁄4" x 13⁄4") to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block (#2) 1" back from front of PSSE molding.Step Three: Attach wood block #1 behind wood block #2.Step Four: Attach wood block #3 in front of and flush with top of wood block #2.Step Five: Cut CRNMTS8 to desired length. Attach to top of wood block #3 so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits 1⁄16" past front of wood block #3. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in DXCRN8.Step Six: Mount the PSSE/wood block configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Seven: Cut WCVM8 to desired length. Attach to wood block #2 and #3.Step Eight: Cut CANE8 to desired length. Attach to face of wood block #3Step Nine: Cut DXCRN8 to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.

DoorCabinet

DXCRN8

CRNMTS8

CANE8

WCVM8

DoorCabinet

DXCRN8

PSSE396

WCVM8

CANE82

1

3

PSSE396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 3

8 " over end panel

1"

758 "

538 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK4 is only available in wood door styles.

800.432015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK5 55⁄8" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut wood block (3⁄4" x 13⁄8"), CRNMTS8 and PSSJ to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block 1⁄2" back from front of PSSJ molding.Step Three: Attach CRNMTS8 to top of wood block so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits 1⁄2" past front of wood block. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in DXCRN8.Step Four: Mount the PSSJ/wood block configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Five: Cut PERS8 to desired length. Attach to wood block.Step Six: Cut DXCRN8 to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.

CRNMTS8

DXCRN8

PERS8

DoorCabinet

DoorCabinet

PSSJ396

PERS8

DXCRN8

PSSJ396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 1

2 " over end panel

1"

558 "

412 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK5 is only available in wood door styles.

800.44 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK6 4" - 6 3⁄4" height range*

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut wood block (3⁄4" x 11⁄2") and PSSM to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block (#1) 11⁄4" back from front of PSSM molding.Step Three: Mount the PSSM/wood block configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Four: Cut down UF696 to 47⁄8" high and to desired length. Height of UF696 needs to change if overall height of molding stack is different than 55⁄8". Attach UF696 to face of wood block #1.Step Five: Cut CAIR8, wood block #2 (13⁄8" x 3⁄4") and ACSTPCRN8 to desired length. Step Six: Attach face of wood block (#2) 1⁄8" back from front edge of CAIR8.Step Seven: Attach ACSTPCRN8 to face of wood block #2. Attach CAIR8/ACSTPCRN8 configuration to UF696 at desired length.* CAIR8/ACSTPCRN8 can move up or down on the face of UF696 to accommodate an uneven ceiling.

1

2ACSTPCRN8*

CAIR8*

UF696

DoorCabinet

DoorCabinet

PSSM396

UF696

ACSPTCRN8*

CAIR8*

PSSM396 Recommended reveals:· 1 1 4 " over door· 5

8 " over end panel

5 5/8" (+ or -)*

114 "

314 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK6 is only available in wood door styles.

800.452015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK7 8" - 93⁄4" height range*

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut wood block #1 (11⁄4" x 3⁄4"), CRNMTS8 and ECMWF1 to desired length.Step Two: Attach ECMWF1 to wood block (#1) and CRNMTS8. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in ECMWF1. Step Three: Cut PSSL to length. Attach PSSL to top of wood block #1 so front of PSSL sits 1⁄2" past front of face ECMWF1.Step Four: Cut wood block #2 (3⁄4" x 11⁄2") and UF396 to desired length. Height of UF396 needs to change if overall height of molding stacks is different than 9" high.Step Five: Attach face of wood block (#2) 11⁄4" back from front edge of PSSL. Attach UF396 to face of wood block #2.Step Six: Mount the PSSL/wood block configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Seven: Cut DECO8, ACSTPLV8, CRNMTS8 and STPCRN8 to desired length.Step Eight: Attach ACSTPLV8 to front corner of UF396. Attach DECO8 below ACSTPLV8.Step Nine: Attach CRNMTS8 to top of ACSTPLV8 so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits back 3⁄8" from front corner of ACSTPLV8. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in STPCRN8. Attach STPCRN8 to CRNMTS8.*STPCRN8/ACSTPLV8/DECO8 can move up or down on the face of UF396 to accommodate an uneven ceiling.

1

2

STPCRN8*

CRNMTS8*ACSTPLV8*

UF396

DECO8*

PSSL396

CRNMTS8

DoorCabinet

ECMWF1

PSSL396

ACSTPLV8*

DECO8*

UF396

STPCRN8*

DoorCabinet

ECMWF1 Recommended reveals:· 3

4 " over door· 5

8 " over end panel

34 "

9" (+ or -) *

338 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK7 is only available in wood door styles.

800.46 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK8 4" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut PSSJ and CRNMTS8 to desired length.Step Two: Attach CRNMTS8 to top of PSSJ so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits back 3⁄4" from front of PSSJ. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in CDCM8.Step Three: Mount the PSSJ/CRNMTS8 configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Four: Cut CDCM8 to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.Step Five: Cut BLFLW8 to desired length. Attach to CDCM8.

DoorCabinet

PSSJ396

CDCM8

BLFLW8CRNMTS8

CDCM8

BLFLW8

DoorCabinet

PSSJ396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 1

2 " over end panel

1"

4"

234 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK8 is only available in wood door styles.

800.472015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK9 63⁄4" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut PSSJs and wood block (11⁄2" x 2") to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block 3⁄4" back from front of PSSJ moldings being sure PSSJ profile is facing down on top and bottom pieces. Step Three: Attach CRNMTS8 to top of PSSJ so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits back 3⁄4" from front of PSSJ. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in CDCM8.Step Four: Mount the PSSJ/CRNMTS8 configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Five: Cut PERG8 to desired length. Attach to face of wood block.Step Six: Cut CDCM8 to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.Step Seven: Cut DXEGD8 to desired length. Attach to CDCM8.

PSSJ396

CDCM8

DXEGD8

PSSJ396CRNMTS8

CDCM8

DoorCabinet

PERG8

PSSJ396

PERG8

DoorCabinet

PSSJ396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 1 2" over end panel

DXEGD8

1"

634 "

234 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK9 is only available in wood door styles.

800.48 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK10 4" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut PSSB and CRNMTS8 to desired length.Step Two: Attach CRNMTS8 to top of PSSB so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits back 1⁄4" from front of PSSB. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in DCM8P.Step Three: Mount the PSSB/CRNMTS8 configuration to the top of the wall cabinet.Step Four: Cut DCM8P to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.Step Five: Cut LLAN8 to desired length. Attach to DCM8P.

CRNMTS8

DoorCabinet

DCM8P

LLAN8

DoorCabinet

PSSB396

DCM8P

LLAN8PSSB396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 3

8" over end panel

1"

4"

314 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK10 is only available in wood door styles.

800.492015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK11 7" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut PSSBs and wood block (11⁄2" x 2") to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block 5⁄8" back from front of PSSB moldings.Step Three: Attach CRNMTS8 to top of PSSB so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits back 1⁄2" from front of PSSB. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in DXCRN8.Step Four: Mount the PSSB/CRNMTS8 configuration to the top of wall cabinet.Step Five: Cut HAML8 to desired length. Attach to face of wood block.Step Six: Cut DXCRN8 to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.

HAML8

CRNMTS8

DoorCabinet

PSSB396

DXCRN8

DoorCabinet

PSSB396

DXCRN8

PSSB396

HAML8PSSB396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 3

8 " over end panel

1"

7"

418 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK11 is only available in wood door styles.

800.50 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK12 51⁄4" - 71⁄4" height range*

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut wood block #1 (11⁄2" x 3⁄4") and wood block #2 (3⁄4" x 3") to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block #2 flush with front of wood block #1. Step Three: Cut UF696 to desired length. Attach UF696 to face of wood block #2 flush with bottom of wood block #1. Keep in mind that UF696 may need to be cut down if overall height of molding stack is less than 63⁄4" high.Step Four: Mount the UF696/wood block configuration to the top of wall cabinet.Step Five: Cut AZTC8 to desired length. Attach to face of wood block. Make bottom AZTC8 flush with bottom of UF696. Make top AZTC8 flush with top of wood block. Step Six: Cut STPCRN8 to desired length. Attach to UF696 at desired height.*STPCRN8/AZTC8 can move up or down on the face of UF696 to accommodate an uneven ceiling.

1

DoorCabinet

AZTC8*

STPCRN8*

AZTC8

UF696

AZTC8*UF696

STPCRN8*

2

DoorCabinet

AZTC8 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 1

2 " over end panel

6 (+ or -)*34 "

1"

238 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK12 is only available in wood door styles.

800.512015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK13 63⁄4" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut PSSMs and wood block (21⁄4" x 13⁄4") to desired length.Step Two: Attach face of wood block 3⁄4" back from front of PSSM moldings being sure PSSM profile is facing down on top and bottom pieces. Step Three: Attach CRNMTS8 to top of PSSM so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits back 3⁄8" from front of PSSM. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in MRQCRN8.Step Four: Mount the PSSM/CRNMTS8 configuration to the top of wall cabinet.Step Five: Cut WISTR8 to desired length. Attach to face of wood block. Step Six: Cut MRQCRN8 to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.

PSSM396

MRQCRN8

CRNMTS8

MRQCRN8

DoorCabinet

WISTR8

PSSM396

WISTR8

DoorCabinet

PSSM396

PSSM396 Recommended reveals:· 1" over door· 5

8 " over end panel

634 "

1"

234 "

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK13 is only available in wood door styles.

800.52 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

indicates wood block (not included)

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut RND8 and wood block (11⁄4" x 5⁄8") to desired length.Step Two: Attach wood block into back groove of RND8.Step Three: Cut CRNMTS8 to desired length. Attach CRNMTS8 to top of wood block so front edge of CRNMTS8 sits flush with front of wood block. Consider placement of CRNMTS8 so it lines up with recess in CRESCRN8.Step Four: Mount the RND8/CRNMTS8 configuration to the top of wall cabinet.Step Five: Cut CRESCRN8 to desired length. Attach to CRNMTS8.

DoorCabinet

CRESCRN8

RND8

DoorCabinet

CRNMTS8

CRESCRN8

RND8 Recommended reveals:· 1 1 2 " over door· 7

8 " over end panel

112 "

314 "

338 "

MLDSTCK14 31⁄4" high

Molding Stacks

MLDSTCK14 is only available in wood door styles.

800.532015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Molding Stacks

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK15 23⁄16" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut FSMCRN8 to desired length.Step Two: Attach FSMCRN8 to top of cabinet so the outer most front edge of FSMCRN8 sits 23⁄8" past front of cabinet face.

DoorCabinet

DoorCabinet

FSMCRN8

FSMCRN8

2 3 8" over door2 " over end panel

238"

2 316 "

38

Recommended reveals:

MLDSTCK 15 is only available in foil door styles.

800.54 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

800MOLDINGS, VALANCES, ACCENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Molding Stacks

Use of finish nails and glue to assemble molding stack is acceptable. Pre-drill holes as needed. Increase molding quantities when adding miters to design.

MLDSTCK16 33⁄4" high

Install InstructionsStep One: Cut STARTMLD396 to desired length.Step Two: Attach STARTMLD396 to top of cabinet so the face of STARTMLD396 sits 7⁄8" past front of cabinet face.Step Three: Cut UF396 to desired length.Step Four: Attach UF396 to top of STARTMLD396 so the face of side sits 1⁄4" past front of STARTMLD396.

DoorCabinet

DoorCabinet

STARTMLD396

STARTMLD396 Recommended reveals:· 7

8 " over door· 7

8 " over end panel

UF396 UF396

334 "

78 "

MLDSTCK 16 is available in all door styles.

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

900.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

900.3 Lighting Accessories

900.4 Under Cabinet and Internal Accessories

900.10 Oven Accessories

900.11 Drawer Organization

900.15 Shelving

900.18 Roll-Out Tray Kits

900.19 Decorative Hardware

In This Section

900.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Lighting Accessories

Touch Switch/DimmerLighting AccessoriesThe following Lighting Accessories are available for field installation.

Transformer

■ UCLTRANSFORMER

• LED driver with mini distributor block.

• 120V 60Hz 12DC

• 2.5 m (983⁄8") polarized primary cord.

• Material: plastic; Color: black.

• 15 Watts

• 6 Ports

• Supplied with adaptor.

Intermediate Connecting WireLength

■ UCLWIRE30MM 30mm (13⁄16")■ UCLWIRE300MM 300mm (113⁄4")■ UCLWIRE1500MM 1500mm (59")

• Use between LED light strips.

• Required when daisy chaining strips together.

• Not required if strips are directly connected in a continuous run.

Foam Pieces■ UCLFOAM

• 1" pieces of foam to hold wire in dado.

• Pack of 10.

22 mm

22 mm

9 mm

Connecting Wire

Length

■ UCLWIRE1M 1m (393⁄8") ■ UCLWIRE2M 2m (783⁄4") ■ UCLWIRE4M 4m (1571⁄2")

LED Pucks – Circle Light Temp

■ UCLPUCKWARM Warm White ■ UCLPUCKCOOL Cool White

LED – Strip Light Temp

■ UCLSTRIPWARM Warm White■ UCLSTRIPCOOL Cool White

LED KitsStrip Light Kit Puck Light Kit Light Temp

■ UCLSTRIPWARMKIT ■ UCLPUCKWARMKIT Warm White■ UCLSTRIPCOOLKIT ■ UCLPUCKCOOLKIT Cool White

• High intensity illumination; perfect for under or interior cabinet lighting.

• 24 LEDs with 1.65 watts per 250 mm strip.

• Choose between warm (3200K) or cool (5100K) white.

• DC 12V; connect up to 6 strips or 60".

• Material: aluminum, transparent plastic.

• Dimensions (L x W x H): 250mm x 10mm x 5mm (97⁄8" x 3⁄8" x 3⁄16").

• Choose between warm (3200K) or cool (5100K) white.

• Strip Light Kit includes:

– 3 LED strip lights (UCLSTRIP) – 1 Transformer (UCLTRANSFORMER) – 2 Intermediate Connection Wires (UCLWIRE1500MM) – 1 Connecting Wire (UCLWIRE1M) – 20 Foam Pieces (2 pkgs UCLFOAM)

• Puck Light Kit includes:

– 3 Puck lights (UCLPUCK) – 1 Transformer (UCLTRANSFORMER) – 20 Foam Pieces (2 pkgs UCLFOAM)

• High efficiency light output with 18 LEDs, 1.25 watts.

• Choose between warm (3200K) or cool (5100K) white.

• 2 m (79") lead.

• Diameter: 58 mm (25⁄16").

• Material: thermoplastic with brushed steel finish.

• Surface mount.

• Supplied with adaptor.

■ UCLDIMMER

• Dimmer switch with touch sensor; hold your finger on sensor to dim/brighten lights. Touch sensor light activates at dusk.

• 12V DC / 24V DC (for use on secondary side).

• Controls a single port from transformer block; includes 6 ports.• Material: plastic with aluminum finish.• Switch dimensions (L x W x H): 64mm x 25mm x 10mm

(21⁄2" x 1" x 3⁄8").• Supplied with adaptor.

Dimmer Switch

• Extension cord between LED light strip and distributor block.

• Required to connect each run with transformer.

• Supplied with adaptor.

983⁄8"

51⁄2"

13⁄16"

111⁄16"

6 PortsExtender 2M

LED Strip Light Plug

LED Strip Light Socket

Input 4MAdaptor

Output 2M

Adaptor

900.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

Metal Wine Glass Holder• Installs to bottom of wall cabinet.

• 11⁄2" high, 11" deep.

• Modifications not available.

Satin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Width Rows

■ WGHSN4 ■ WGHORB4 4" 1■ WGHSN17 ■ WGHORB17 17" 4

WGH installed on bottom of wall cabinet

Under Cabinet and Internal Accessories

Broom Holder■ KIT-BROOMHLDR

• Includes all mounting hardware, white plastic mounting plate and 4 rubber coated steel broom hooks.

• Size: 121⁄2" wide x 3" high x 11⁄16" deep.

• Modifications not available.

Key Rack WMCKEY

• Constructed of mahogany with four brushed bronze hooks.

• Size: 811⁄16" wide x 15⁄8" high x 13⁄4" deep.

• Included with wall message center cabinet, see WMC in Section 300.

• Modifications not available.

811⁄16"

15⁄8"

71⁄2" (mounting)

Front ViewSide View

13⁄4"5⁄8"

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

900.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Internal Accessories

Wall Cabinet Spice Rack Kit SKU X

■ SRK15 9"■ SRK18 12"■ SRK21 15"■ SRK24 18"

• Designed to mount to door of wall cabinet (15" to 24" wide, minimum 30" high and 12" deep, single door).

• Includes 4" deep door spice rack with three spring loaded dowels for vertical adjustability, three adjustable shelves for back interior of cabinet and drill template.

• Adjustable shelves for interior of cabinet are 3⁄4" thick and 8" deep. Shelf holes to be drilled in field.

• Kit is hardwood in natural finish.

• See Section 300 for wall cabinet with kit installed (WDSR).

• Modifications not available.

Not for use in2 door cabinets

Sink Base or Base Door Organizer Kit

HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT SKU X Min Max

■ SBDO15 9" 113⁄4" 163⁄4"■ SBDO18 12" 143⁄4" 193⁄4"■ SBDO21 15" 173⁄4" 223⁄4"

• Kit is constructed of hardwood in natural finish; attaches to door frame.

• Includes all mounting hardware. Door mount hardware is adjustable, see above for minimum/maximum adjustability.

• 5" deep rack with two 4" deep fixed shelves. Top shelf includes removable polymer tray which may be used to store cleaning supplies (sponges, etc.).

• Full-depth shelving requires field cut for use with kit. Shelf hole boring will need to be re-drilled, drill template (DRILLTEMP) available, see Section 1200.

• Modifications not available.

• Available installed, see Section 1100.

X

185⁄8"

X

24"

Base Door OrganizerSKU X Corresponding Cabinet Width

KIT-DORG15 83⁄8" 15, 24B*, 27B* KIT-DORG18 113⁄8" 18, 30B*, 33B* KIT-DORG21 143⁄8" 21, 24, 36B*, 39B*, 42B*, 45B*

*One side of butt door cabinet.

• Numbers in code indicate coordinating minimum cabinet width. See chart above for recommended corresponding base cabinet widths.

• Designed to mount to inside of base door cabinet (door/drawer configuration); not available for full height door base cabinets.

• Shelves of organizer are constructed of birch plywood with clear coat applied and metal side rails.

• Installation hardware is not included; #6 x 5⁄8" long flat head screws are recommended.

• Available factory installed (IDORG), see Section 1100.

• See Section 400 for base cabinets with door organizer installed (B36BSMART, SB_BSMDORG).

• Full-depth shelving requires field cut for use with kit. Shelf hole boring will need to be re-drilled, drill template (DRILLTEMP) available, see Section 1200.

• Modifications not available.

Front View Side View

X

33⁄8"

205⁄8"

X

900.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Sink Mat• Gray polystyrene mat used to line floor of

sink base cabinet to prevent water damage.

• Unique dimples collect liquids up to 6 liters per square meter.

• Modifications not available.

Universal

SINKMAT

• Size: 451⁄2"w x 245⁄8"d; cut in field to fit.

Factory Cut to Size

SINKMAT30 SINKMAT33 SINKMAT36

• Cut to fit 24" deep cabinets; cabinet width indicated in SKU.

Internal Accessories

Pull-Out Storage Kit ■ KIT-SUP2 Two baskets■ KIT-SUP3 Three baskets

• Includes metal baskets with acid resistant plastic trays and all mounting hardware.

• Side baskets are removable.

• Top basket on KIT-SUP3 swivels side to side.

• Unit operates on undermount full extension guides with features similar to Quiet Close; guides slow the pull-out before final closure, for automatic and silent closing.

• Storage basket dimensions: – KITSUP2: 11" w x 151⁄2" h x 191⁄2" d. – KITSUP3: 11" w x 20" h x 191⁄2" d.

• Consider plumbing location when ordering this item.

• Modifications not available.

Stainless Steel Tilt-Down Tray Kit Single Tray

■ KIT-SST10 ■ KIT-SST13 ■ KIT-SST16 ■ KIT-SST19■ KIT-SST22 ■ KIT-SST25■ KIT-SST28■ KIT-SST31

Double Tray

■ KIT-SST16D ■ KIT-SST19D ■ KIT-SST22D

• Kit includes stainless steel tilt-down tray(s) with installation hardware.

• For installation on back of false drawer fronts in sink base or vanity sink base cabinets prior to counter top/sink installation.

• Numbers in code indicate actual tray width.

• Drawer front opening should be a minimum of 2" larger than width of tray to allow for hardware.

• SKUs ending in D receive two trays; for use in 39" – 48" wide cabinets with single drawer front.

• See individual cabinets listed in sections 400 and 600 for size specifications.

• Available factory installed, see Section 1100 (ISST).

• Modifications not available.

Sink/Granite Support■ SUPPORT36■ SUPPORT50

• Each aluminum I-beam includes two mounting brackets, four screws and four leveling bolts with caps.

• I-beam can be field cut.

• 300 lb. weight maximum.

• Modifications not available.

• Pack of two.

Side View

2"

Sink Caddy KIT-CADDY

• Includes chrome plated base and rack with plastic trays.

• All plastic parts are removable and dishwasher safe for easy cleaning.

• Caddy may be removed from cabinet for transport of cleaning supplies to other areas of your home.

• Caddy includes rubber feet on base to prevent marring or sliding when you set it down.

• Caddy dimensions: 103⁄16" w x 189⁄16" h x 185⁄8" d.

• Includes undermount full extension guides with features similar to Quiet Close; guides slow pull-out before final closure, creating automatic and silent closing.

• Consider plumbing location when ordering this item.

• Available factory installed (ICADDY), see Section 1100.

• Modifications not available.

900.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Pots and Pans Storage Kit Minimum Cabinet Dimensions SKU Width Depth

■ KIT-24BPP 24" 24"■ KIT-30BPP 30" 24"

• Includes pull-out unit with two shelves and two side racks which provide generous space for a variety of cookware and lids.

• Shelves are pre-finished birch veneer with chrome-plated heavy-duty wire surrounds.

• Each shelf carries a maximum of 25 lbs. and slide-out individually on KV full-extension precision ball-bearing slides.

• See Section 400 for pots and pans storage kits installed in cabinets.

• Modifications not available.

Mixer Kit■ KIT-BFH18MX ■ KIT-BFH21MX■ KIT-BFH24MX

• Numbers in code indicate width of coordinating full-height door base cabinet.

• Includes one 3⁄4" thick shelf and heavy duty mixer lift hardware system featuring three adjustable spring tension settings: 0–20 lbs., 20–30 lbs. and 30–60 lbs and alignment bracket that assists in side to side stabilization.

• 191⁄4" high appliance clearance.

• See Section 400 for mixer kits installed in cabinets.

• Modifications not available.

Internal Accessories

• Includes all hardware, waste basket(s) and plywood pull-out.

• Plywood pull-out has deck with cut-outs for waste baskets. Pull-out is attached to door; operates on Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides.

• Kit SKU indicates coordinating cabinet.

EXAMPLE 1: KIT-B15WB fits in a B15. EXAMPLE 2: KIT-21V18WB fits in a 21VSB18.

• Replacement waste baskets available; see Section 1200.

• Automated Drive available, see Section 1200.

• See Sections 400, 600 and 700 for waste baskets installed in cabinets.

• Modifications not available.

Waste Basket Kits

21" Deep Basket Size Basket Qty.

KIT-21V15WB 28 qt 1 KIT-21V18WB 28 qt 1 KIT-21D15WB 28 qt 1 KIT-21D18WB 28 qt 1

24" Deep Basket Size Basket Qty.

KIT-B15WB 35 qt 1KIT-B18WB 35 qt 1KIT-B18DWB 35 qt 2KIT-B21WB 35 qt 2KIT-BFH15WB 50 qt 1KIT-BFH18WB 50 qt 1KIT-BFH21WB 35 qt / 50 qt 1 each

Recycling Kit KIT-BRC24

• Kit fits in B24.

• Includes all hardware, integrated guide system with 150 lb weight capacity, three triangle shaped containers (25 qt each) and one canvas bag (18 qt).

• See Section 400 for recycling kit installed in cabinet.

• Replacement bins and canvas bags available, see Section 1200.

• Modifications not available.

900.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Internal Accessories

Pull-Out Table Kit KIT-24POT

• Designed to REPLACE standard top drawer of B24, B24B or one side of B48F, WTD (with two drawer option), minimum cabinet depth 21".

• Includes hardwood laminate table top in natural finish and all mounting hardware.

• Self supporting table top/work surface pulls out of drawer location; extends 32" from face of cabinet.

• Maximum weight capacity of table is 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

• Does not include drawer front.

• See Sections 400 and 700 for pull-out table kits installed in cabinets.

• Modifications not available.

Base Blind Corner Pull-Out Storage Kit, 24" Deep

Blind Swing Location Direction

■ KIT-BBCPO45L Left Right■ KIT-BBCPO45R Right Left■ KIT-BBCPO48L Left Right■ KIT-BBCPO48R Right Left

Restrictor Unit ■ BBCPORESTRICT

• Optional restrictor unit available to limit swing of shelf to approximately 90 degrees.

• Pack of two.

• Includes all hardware and two pull-out trays that swing out of blind corner base cabinet giving full access to cabinet contents.

• Kit SKU indicates coordinating cabinet width.

• Shelves have non-slip maple print surface with metal side rails.

• Shelf height can be adjusted in 2" increments.

• Shelves include Quiet Close mechanism for smooth and silent closing.

• Each shelf has a maximum load capacity of 55 lbs.

• Kit works in full height door applications; can be cut in field with pipe cutter for drawer/door combination cabinets.

• See Section 400 for base cabinets with kit installed.

• Modifications not available.

Tilt-Out Hamper Kit ■ KIT-HAMP21TH

• Includes metal basket with removable canvas bag and all mounting hardware.

• Requires full-height door vanity base cabinet, minimum size: 21" wide x 32" high x 18"deep.

• Basket dimensions: 17" wide x 191⁄2" high x 157⁄16" deep.

• See Section 600 for tall vanity linen cabinet with kit installed.

• Modifications not available.

Hamper Bag

■ RHAMPBAG21

• Canvas hamper bag for tilt-out hamper cabinet/kit.

• Cabinet/kit includes one hamper bag; this SKU is for replacement or add-on purposes.

Adjustable Wood Lazy Susan Kit for Diagonal Wall CabinetFor 24" x 24" Diagonal Wall, 18" Diameter

WOODLSK24

For 27" x 27" Diagonal Wall, 21" Diameter

WOODLSK27

• Includes adjustable furniture board shelf, wood lazy susan tray and shelf clips.

• PLYBOX modification available to upgrade shelf to plywood core.

• See Section 300 for wall cabinets with kits installed (LSDWW, LDWAGW).

• Matching finished interior modification available; adjustable shelf will be finished, lazy susan tray remains natural.

• No other modifications available.

900.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Internal Accessories

Pull-Out Kits

Wall, 9" Wide

13" Deep 15" Deep X Y

KIT-13WPS0930 KIT-15WPS0930 67⁄8" 231⁄2" KIT-13WPS0933 KIT-15WPS0933 67⁄8" 261⁄2" KIT-13WPS0936 KIT-15WPS0936 67⁄8" 291⁄2" KIT-13WPS0939 KIT-15WPS0939 67⁄8" 321⁄2" KIT-13WPS0942 KIT-15WPS0942 67⁄8" 351⁄2"

• Includes hardwood pull-out spice rack in natural finish.

• 9" and 12" widths operate on two sets Quiet Close guides. 15" to 24" widths operate on two sets Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides.

• Spice rack is open on both sides and includes adjustable shelves. Wall kits 30" – 36" high receive one adjustable shelf, wall kits 39" – 42" high receive two, base kits receive one and tall kits receive two.

• Cabinet door must be removed and attached to front of kit. Hinge must also be removed; please note that hinge routings on door will be visible.

• See Sections 300 – 500 for cabinets with kit installed (WPS, BPS, UPS).

• Modifications not available.

KIT-UPS

51"

21"X

Tall

24" Deep X

KIT-UPS09 67⁄8" KIT-UPS12 97⁄8" KIT-UPS15 127⁄8" KIT-UPS18 157⁄8" KIT-UPS21 187⁄8" KIT-UPS24 217⁄8"

Base

24" Deep X

KIT-BPS09 67⁄8" KIT-BPS12 97⁄8"

231⁄2"

21"

KIT-BPS

X

KIT-WPS

9" or 12"

X

Y

Wall, 12" Wide

13" Deep 15" Deep X Y

KIT-13WPS1230 KIT-15WPS1230 97⁄8" 231⁄2" KIT-13WPS1233 KIT-15WPS1233 97⁄8" 261⁄2" KIT-13WPS1236 KIT-15WPS1236 97⁄8" 291⁄2" KIT-13WPS1239 KIT-15WPS1239 97⁄8" 321⁄2" KIT-13WPS1242 KIT-15WPS1242 97⁄8" 351⁄2"

Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out KitsWall, 13" Deep

30" High (3)

KIT-WSR630

33" High (3)

KIT-WSR633

42" High (5)

KIT-WSR642

36" High (4)

KIT-WSR636

39" High (4)

KIT-WSR639

• Includes pull-out spice rack and one fixed shelf. See ( ) above for adjustable shelf quantites.

• Designed to be installed between two cabinets; not intended to be used on end of run or as stand alone cabinet.

• Pull-out spice rack is open both sides, operates on specialty full extension guides and is constructed from plywood with clear coat applied and metal side rails.

• Bottom of pull-out is maple laminate; modifications not available.

• See Sections 300 and 400 for complete wall and base pull-out spice rack (WSR, BSR).

• Replacement fillers and overlay fillers available, see Section 1200.

• Micro-adjustment screw allows for precise filler alignment.

• Modifications not available.

Base, 24" Deep

341⁄2" High (3)

KIT-BSR06

900.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES Internal Accessories, Oven Accessories

Tray Divider Kit■ KIT-TDW Plywood

• Kit includes drill template, one tray divider, two wood runners/guides and four guide pins.

• Tray divider is 1⁄2" thick plywood in natural finish with scooped front. Front edge of divider is edge banded.

Partition Kit■ KIT-TDWPART Plywood

• Kit includes one partition, four cam cleats, four locking pins and drill template.

• Partition is 3⁄4" thick plywood in natural finish and drilled for shelf holes. Front edge of partition is edge banded.

• Partition may be located anywhere within width of cabinet; shelves to be cut in field once partition location determined.

Partition kit shown with two tray divider kits.

For accessories this column:• Available for cabinet widths and

heights 12"– 42" and depths 12"– 30".

• Modify height and depth (no charge) must be specified to indicate dimensions of tray divider or partition.

EXAMPLE: Tray divider kit for 24W3021B would be specified as KIT-TDW, MH21, MD24.

• Matching finished interior modification not available.

• Available factory installed (TDW, TDWPART), see Section 1100.

• Use tray divider kit in conjunction with partition kit for a unique storage solution.

Oven Shelf Kit■ DOSK

• Includes 3⁄4" thick furniture board shelf and cleats for installation between two appliances.

• Matches cabinet case material specified on order (maple natural melamine standard or white melamine if WHTCS is specified); matching finished interior modification available.

• Front edge of shelf is edge banded to match door color.

• To upgrade to plywood core, specify PLYBOX modification.

• Specify cabinet width and depth; shelf will be cut to size.

• Minimum width 9", maximum 36"; minimum depth 6", maximum 30".

Heat Shield■ HEATA Almond■ HEATB Black■ HEATW White

• Recommended for installation between oven and adjacent cabinets to protect cabinetry from excessive heat.

• Heat shield is 19⁄16" wide x 30" long.

• Pre-drilled for easy installation.

• Powder coated steel in almond, black or white.

• Attaches to cabinet with four #6 flat head wood screws (not included).

Base Tray Divider Kit

SKU # of Tray Dividers

■ KIT-TDC12 1■ KIT-TDC15 2■ KIT-TDC18 3

• Includes 1⁄2” thick plywood tray divider(s) with scooped fronts, runners, hardware, plywood for fixed floor, drill template and instructions.

• For use in base door/drawer cabinets.

• See Section 400 for base cabinets (TDC) with kit installed.

• Numbers in code indicate coordinating cabinet width.

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

900.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Drawer Organization

Spice Drawer Insert, 24" Deep■ SDI12■ SDI15■ SDI18■ SDI21■ SDI24■ SDI27

• Three tiered drawer insert constructed of hardwood in a natural finish; designed to drop into drawer.

• Holds spices at an angle for easy identification and removal.

• Last two numbers in code indicate coordinating cabinet width.

• Inserts are factory cut to size, however insert width and depth may be trimmed in field. Minimum cabinet depth is 21"; requiring field cut of insert to 1611⁄16".

• Modifications not available.

• Not available with Intivo options.

55⁄8"

19 11⁄16"

3⁄16"

Side View

Cutlery Divider Insert, 24" Deep■ CUT12 ■ CUT15 ■ CUT18 ■ CUT21 ■ CUT24 ■ CUT27 ■ CUT30

• Constructed of hardwood with natural finish with open bottom; designed to drop into drawer.

• Divider is 21⁄2" high and 195⁄8" deep.• Last two numbers in code indicate

coordinating cabinet width. EXAMPLE: CUT27 fits in drawer of B27B.

• Modifications not available.• Not available with Intivo options.

CUT12

CUT15

CUT18

CUT21 CUT24

CUT27 CUT30

125 ⁄8"

23⁄4"

Two Tiered Cutlery Divider Kit, 24" Deep KIT-TCD21 KIT-TCD24

KIT-TCD15 KIT-TCD18

• Includes two tiered cutlery divider constructed of hardwood in natural finish installed in drawer box; drawer guides not included.

• Designed to replace standard top drawer of base cabinets.

• Does not include drawer front.

• Numbers in code indicate width of coordinating cabinet; also fits in one side of a cabinet with two drawer option (WTD).

EXAMPLE: KIT-TCD15 can be installed in a B15, top drawer of 3DB15 or 4DB15, one side of B30B, WTD.

• Top tier operates on specialty full extension guides; lower tier is accessed by pushing top tier back into cabinet.

• See Section 400 for cabinets with tiered cutlery divider kit installed.

• Available factory installed (ITCD), see Section 1100.

• Modifications not available.

• Not available with Intivo options.

KIT-TCD15/18

KIT-TCD21/24

131⁄8", 161⁄8"

391 ⁄2"

191⁄8", 221⁄8"

41⁄2"

900.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Drawer Organization

■ DOTH

Small Tray

■ DOTK

1⁄2" Spacer

1 ⁄2" ■ DOTL3"

5 7⁄8"

Drawer Organization Trays and Inserts• 2" high organizer trays constructed of hardwood in natural finish with full bottom; designed to drop into drawer.

• Dimensions are slightly smaller than drawer interior dimensions. Interior dimension of full width drawer equals cabinet width minus 31⁄8".

• Create customized organization by combining various inserts. See examples at bottom of next page.

• Modifications not available.

• Not available with Intivo options.

For Use in 24" Deep Cabinetry• Organizer trays DOTA-L are 195⁄8" deep.

• Cabinet/drawer applications are listed below applicable drawings. Interior widths (I.W.) of drawers listed vary 1⁄16".

■ DOTA

Drawer of B12 (I.W. = 87⁄8")

■ DOTB

Drawer of B15 (I.W. = 117⁄8")

■ DOTC ■ DOTD

Drawer of B1 8 (I.W. = 147⁄8")

■ DOTE ■ DOTF

Drawer of B21 (I.W. = 177⁄8")

83 ⁄4"

10 3⁄8" 3 11⁄16"

10 3⁄8" 3 11⁄16"

10 3⁄8" 3 11⁄16"

10 3⁄8" 3 11⁄16"

10 3⁄8" 3 11⁄16"

10 3⁄8" 3 11⁄16"

113 ⁄4" 131 ⁄4"143 ⁄4"

161 ⁄4"173 ⁄4"

143 ⁄4"

14 9⁄16"3 11⁄16"

4"

9"

13 3⁄8"

3"

■ DOTG

Drawer of B18 (I.W. = 147⁄8")

■ DOTJ

■ DOTW

Acrylic Wrap Dispenser:• Holds wax paper, tin foil, plastic wrap, etc.• Includes cutter for plastic wrap.• Hinged lids can be utilized to tear tin foil, etc.• Two open compartments, one at each end.

105 ⁄16"

19 3⁄8"

CutterHinged Lid

Top View

133 ⁄8

"

123 ⁄8

"

123 ⁄8

"

29⁄16"

Knife Drawer Inserts For Use in 24" Deep Cabinetry• 1⁄8" thick routings secure knife blade.

• Knife drawer inserts are 195⁄8" deep and are field trimmable.

• Solid hardwood stave construction.

■ KDI15

Drawer of B15 – Holds 9 knives.

■ KDI18

Drawer of B18 – Holds 12 knives.

11 1⁄2"

143 ⁄4"

11 1⁄2"

113 ⁄4"

Outside edge knife groove detail

11⁄16"

Outside edge knife groove detail

1⁄2"

13⁄4"

3⁄4"

13⁄4"3⁄4"

■ DOTI

Large Divided Tray: Back compartment fits standard size boxed wax paper, tin foil, etc.

900.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Drawer Organization

■ CONSS

Stainless Steel Containers (2.5 oz., 5 per set)Includes shaker lids for dispensing spices and plastic lids for sealing. Salt and Pepper labeled lids also included.

■ CONGLASS Glass Containers (2.5 oz., 5 per set)Includes glass lids with a rubber grommet for a tight fitting seal.

Containers and Container Holder For Use in 24" Deep Cabinetry• Containers drop into Container Holder;

choose stainless steel or glass containers.

For Use in 21" Deep Cabinetry• Organizer trays are 165⁄8" deep.

3"

■ CONHOLDER

Container Holder (No bottom)

■ 21DOTG

11 9⁄16" 3 11⁄16"

143 ⁄4"

■ 21DOTI

4 7⁄8"

9"

10 3⁄8" 4 7⁄8"

19 5⁄8"

ExamplesExamples of organizer tray combinations for drawers/cabinets as listed below sets of drawings.

3"

Drawer of B24B(I.W. = 207⁄8")

3" 3"

203⁄4"

113⁄4" 9"

143⁄4"

203⁄4"

Drawer of B27B(I.W. = 237⁄8")

233⁄4"

233⁄4"

173⁄4"3" 3"

143⁄4"9"

Drawer of B30B(I.W. = 267⁄8")

263⁄4"

263⁄4"

173⁄4"9"

9" 143⁄4"3"

Drawer of B33B (I.W. = 297⁄8")

293⁄4"

291⁄2"

173⁄4"113⁄4"

9"113⁄4"9"

Drawer of B36B(I.W. = 327⁄8")

321⁄2"

323⁄4"

173⁄4"9"

113⁄4"

3"3"

3"143⁄4"

3"

DOTD

DOTB DOTI

DOTGDOTI

DOTF DOTI DOTF

DOTI DOTD DOTI DOTB DOTI

DOTFKDI15

DOTG

DOTFDOTI

DO

TJ

DO

TJ

KDI15

Drawer of B39B(I.W. = 357⁄8") Bottom example uses DOTK (1⁄2" spacer)

Drawer of B42B(I.W. = 387⁄8")

DOTG

DO

TJ

DOTG

DOTA DOTA

DO

TL

KDI18

DO

TJ

DO

TJ

DO

TJ

DOTI DOTF DOTI

DOTE DOTE

Drawer of B45B (I.W. = 417⁄8") Top example uses DOTK (1⁄2" spacer)

DOTI DOTF DOTI

DO

TJ

DOTC DOTC

Drawer of B48B(I.W. = 447⁄8")Top example uses DOTK (1⁄2" spacer)

DOTF DOTI

DO

TJ

DO

TL

DOTBDOTBKDI18 KDI18

KDI18

3"3"

3"

3" 3"

3" 3" 3" 3"

3" 3"

173⁄4" 173⁄4" 173⁄4" 9"9"9"9"9"

143⁄4" 143⁄4" 113⁄4" 113⁄4"

83⁄4" 83⁄4"

131⁄4" 131⁄4"161⁄4" 161⁄4"

351⁄2"

353⁄4" 383⁄4"

381⁄2" 413⁄4"

413⁄4"

443⁄4"

441⁄2"

143⁄4"

143⁄4"

143⁄4"

143⁄4"

■ 21DOTL

900.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

• Includes eight peg posts, see below to order additional posts.

• Last two digits of code indicate coordinating cabinet width.

• Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides are recommended for heavy loads. See Design Note in Section 100 for weight capacity information.

• Pegboard material is cut to fit floor of drawer; includes rubber spacers/feet.

• See Section 400 for two drawer base with pegboard system installed in top drawer.

• Available factory installed (IPEG), see Section 1100.

• Minimum of 61⁄2" high drawer box is required; see drawer box dimensional details in Section 100 to determine cabinet availability.

• Modifications not available.

• Not available with Intivo options.

Peg Post Set

■ PEGPOSTKIT Set of 4 posts

• Eight peg posts included with PEGKIT, this SKU for add on purposes.

Rubber Peg Feet/Spacers

■ PEGFOOT Set of 5

• Included with PEGKIT; this SKU for replacement or add on purposes.

Pegboard Drawer Organizer SystemPegboard Insert

6"

3⁄8"

5mm Pin

Side View – Peg Post

File Drawer Hardware■ KIT-LETTER Letter Size Filing

System Frame■ KIT-LEGAL Legal Size Filing System Frame

• Black steel rod system with snap together cross rails and adjustable bar that support file folders.

• Minimum drawer box height is 101⁄2", see Section 100 for drawer box height information.

NOTE: Two drawer bases (2DB) require minimum height of 32" for clearance of hanging file folder tabs. Two drawer file cabinets in Section 700 less than 32" high have modified toe kick dimensions to allow for tab clearance.

• See Section 700 for desk base cabinets with kits installed.

• Modifications not available.

Drawer Organization

21" Deep

■ 21PEGKIT15 ■ 21PEGKIT18■ 21PEGKIT21 ■ 21PEGKIT24 ■ 21PEGKIT27 ■ 21PEGKIT30 ■ 21PEGKIT33 ■ 21PEGKIT36

24" Deep

■ 24PEGKIT15 ■ 24PEGKIT18■ 24PEGKIT21 ■ 24PEGKIT24 ■ 24PEGKIT27 ■ 24PEGKIT30 ■ 24PEGKIT33 ■ 24PEGKIT36

Drawer Organizer, Cutlery Divider Insert DOBCUT36

• Constructed of birch plywood.

• Shipped as two separate pieces.

• For 36" wide x 24" deep cabinet, may be trimmed in field.

• Included with Smart Storage Base cabinets, see B36BSMART in Section 400.

19 11⁄16"

3213 ⁄16"

Top View

900.152015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIESShelving

Glass Shelf Kit• Includes two 3⁄8" thick glass shelves and

eight padded shelf clips with anti-slide feature.

• Glass is tempered glass, polished on all four edges.

• Numbers in code indicate corresponding cabinet dimensions, not actual shelf dimensions. First two numbers in code indicate corresponding cabinet width, last two numbers indicate corresponding cabinet depth.

• NOTE: Shelving for cabinets with modifications that affect interior cabinet dimensions (example wainscot interior) require a Custom Quote Request.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments at no charge; specify cabinet width and/or depth in decimal format.

EXAMPLE: SKWTG3613, width35.75, depth12.00 (for cabinet 353⁄4" wide, 12" deep). Dimensions cannot be increased; start with larger size shelf kit and decrease dimensions.

• Minimum glass shelf size is 135⁄16" on the diagonal, minimum cabinet width 9", minimum cabinet depth 9". Confirm minimums with Customer Care if both cabinet width and depth are 12" or less.

• Most cabinets are drilled for full-depth shelving; if other depth shelving is desired a drill template (DRILLTEMP) is available to aid in re-drilling shelf holes, see Section 1200.

• Available factory installed (IGS), see Section 1100.

For 13" Deep Cabinets

■ SKWTG0913 ■ SKWTG2413■ SKWTG1213 ■ SKWTG2713■ SKWTG1513 ■ SKWTG3013■ SKWTG1813 ■ SKWTG3313■ SKWTG2113 ■ SKWTG3613

For Diagonal Wall Cabinets

■ SKDWTG24 24" x 24"■ SKDWTG27 27" x 27"

Universal Shelving

• To specify shelf size, specify cabinet width and depth.

EXAMPLE: SHELF-FBS, width 30, depth 13. Shelf will be sized to fit a 30" wide, 13" deep cabinet.

• 3⁄4" thick shelf will be full-depth based on cabinet depth specified.

• NOTE: Shelving for cabinets with modifications that affect interior cabinet dimensions (example wainscot interior) require a Custom Quote Request.

• One long edge of shelf will be edge banded, peninsula option available to edge band additional long edge. Custom Quote requests may be submitted to edge band short edges.

• Includes four shelf clips.

Required Specifications:

• WIDTH - specify width of cabinet.

– Shelf Size = 19⁄16" less cabinet width specified.

• DEPTH - specify depth of cabinet.

– Shelf Size = 1" less cabinet depth specified.

Optional Specifications:

■ PEN - peninsula modification; shelf will be edge banded on front and back edges.

– Shelf Size = 3⁄8" less cabinet depth. – Additional charges apply.

Cabinet Configuration Specifications:For cabinets 36” wide and greater:

■ FW - full width modification; shelf will be sized to fit full width of cabinet.

■ CP - center partition; shelf will be sized to fit one side of a cabinet with a center partition.

For cabinets 42” wide and greater:

■ TDOS - shelf will be size to fit smaller opening on cabinet with offset partition.

■ TDOL- shelf will be size to fit larger opening on cabinet with offset partition.

Universal Shelf

■ SHELF-FBS Furniture Board Core■ SHELF-PLS Plywood Core

• Features natural maple melamine as standard or white melamine if WHTCS is specified.

Matching Finish Universal Shelf

■ SHELF-FBF Furniture Board Core■ SHELF-PLF Plywood Core

• Shelf matches door style material and color.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

• Modification to upgrade to 11⁄2" thick shelf edge profile (SHF) is available. Some shelf edge profiles receive highlight detail. See Section 1100 for details.

GrainSquare Foot Pricing

Shelving Units• See Sections 300 and 400 for a complete SKU listing of shelving units.

WN WN_ST WN_STB PWN PWN_ST

FLTS

PBWNBWN

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

900.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Shelving

Melamine – Standard

• One long edge is edge banded.

Two Shelves

13" Deep

■ SKS0913 ■ SKS1213 ■ SKS1513 ■ SKS1813 ■ SKS2113 ■ SKS2413 ■ SKS2713 ■ SKS3013 ■ SKS3313 ■ SKS3613

13" Deep

■ SKS3913■ SKS4213

■ SKS4513■ SKS4813

Four Shelves (for cabinets with center partition)

Melamine Shelf Kit• Features natural maple melamine as standard or white melamine if WHTCS is specified.

• 3⁄4" thick shelves include furniture board core; specify PLYBOX modification to upgrade to plywood core.

• Includes shelf clips; four per shelf.

• Numbers in code indicate corresponding cabinet dimensions, not actual shelf dimensions. First two numbers in code indicate corresponding cabinet width, last two numbers indicate corresponding cabinet depth.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments at no charge; specify cabinet width and/or depth in decimal format.

EXAMPLE: SKS3318, width32.50, depth15.00 (for cabinet 321⁄2" wide, 15" deep). Dimensions cannot be increased; start with larger size shelf kit and decrease dimensions.

• Standard shelf size = 19⁄16" less cabinet width, 1" less cabinet depth.

• Peninsula shelf size = 19⁄16" less cabinet width, 3⁄8" less cabinet depth.

• Most cabinets are drilled for full-depth shelving; if other depth shelving is desired a drill template (DRILLTEMP) is available to aid in re-drilling shelf holes, see Section 1200.

• NOTE: Shelving for cabinets with modifications that affect interior cabinet dimensions (example wainscot interior) require a Custom Quote Request.

Grain

Melamine – Peninsula

• Both long edges are edge banded.

Two Shelves

13" Deep

■ PSKS0913■ PSKS1213■ PSKS1513■ PSKS1813■ PSKS2113■ PSKS2413■ PSKS2713■ PSKS3013■ PSKS3313■ PSKS3613

13" Deep

■ PSKS3913■ PSKS4213■ PSKS4513■ PSKS4813

Four Shelves (for cabinets with center partition)Grain

Grain

Grain

18" Deep

■ SKS0918 ■ SKS1218 ■ SKS1518 ■ SKS1818 ■ SKS2118 ■ SKS2418 ■ SKS2718 ■ SKS3018 ■ SKS3318 ■ SKS3618

21" Deep

■ SKS0921 ■ SKS1221 ■ SKS1521 ■ SKS1821 ■ SKS2121 ■ SKS2421 ■ SKS2721 ■ SKS3021 ■ SKS3321 ■ SKS3621

24" Deep

■ SKS0924 ■ SKS1224 ■ SKS1524 ■ SKS1824 ■ SKS2124 ■ SKS2424 ■ SKS2724 ■ SKS3024 ■ SKS3324 ■ SKS3624

18" Deep

■ SKS3918■ SKS4218

■ SKS4518■ SKS4818

21" Deep

■ SKS3921■ SKS4221

■ SKS4521■ SKS4821

24" Deep

■ SKS3924■ SKS4224

■ SKS4524■ SKS4824

24" Deep

■ PSKS3924■ PSKS4224■ PSKS4524■ PSKS4824

24" Deep

■ PSKS0924■ PSKS1224■ PSKS1524■ PSKS1824■ PSKS2124■ PSKS2424■ PSKS2724■ PSKS3024■ PSKS3324■ PSKS3624

900.172015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Matching Finish – Standard

• One long edge is edge banded.

Two Shelves

13" Deep

■ SKF0913■ SKF1213■ SKF1513■ SKF1813■ SKF2113■ SKF2413■ SKF2713■ SKF3013■ SKF3313■ SKF3613

13" Deep

■ SKF3913■ SKF4213■ SKF4513■ SKF4813

Four Shelves (for cabinets with center partition)

13" Deep

■ PSKF0913■ PSKF1213■ PSKF1513■ PSKF1813■ PSKF2113■ PSKF2413■ PSKF2713■ PSKF3013■ PSKF3313■ PSKF3613

13" Deep

■ PSKF3913■ PSKF4213■ PSKF4513■ PSKF4813

Four Shelves (for cabinets with center partition)

Matching Finish – Peninsula

• Both long edges are edge banded.

Two Shelves

Grain

Grain

Grain

Grain

Shelving

Matching Finish Shelf Kit• Shelf matches door style material and color.

• If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

• 3⁄4" thick shelves include furniture board core; specify PLYBOX modification to upgrade to plywood core.

• Includes shelf clips; four per shelf.

• Numbers in code indicate corresponding cabinet dimensions, not actual shelf dimensions. First two numbers in code indicate corresponding cabinet width, last two numbers indicate corresponding cabinet depth.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments at no charge; specify cabinet width and/or depth in decimal format.

EXAMPLE: SKS3318, width32.50, depth15.00 (for cabinet 321⁄2" wide, 15" deep). Dimensions cannot be increased; start with larger size shelf kit and decrease dimensions.

• Standard shelf size = 19⁄16" less cabinet width, 1" less cabinet depth.

• Peninsula shelf size = 19⁄16" less cabinet width, 3⁄8" less cabinet depth.

• Most cabinets are drilled for full-depth shelving; if other depth shelving is desired a drill template (DRILLTEMP) is available to aid in re-drilling shelf holes, see Section 1200.

• NOTE: Shelving for cabinets with modifications that affect interior cabinet dimensions (example wainscot interior) require a Custom Quote Request.

• Modification to upgrade to 11⁄2" thick shelf edge profile (SHF) is available. Some shelf edge profiles receive highlight detail, see Section 1100 for details.

18" Deep

■ SKF0918■ SKF1218■ SKF1518■ SKF1818■ SKF2118■ SKF2418■ SKF2718■ SKF3018■ SKF3318■ SKF3618

21" Deep

■ SKF0921■ SKF1221■ SKF1521■ SKF1821■ SKF2121■ SKF2421■ SKF2721■ SKF3021■ SKF3321■ SKF3621

24" Deep

■ SKF0924■ SKF1224■ SKF1524■ SKF1824■ SKF2124■ SKF2424■ SKF2724■ SKF3024■ SKF3324■ SKF3624

18" Deep

■ SKF3918■ SKF4218■ SKF4518■ SKF4818

21" Deep

■ SKF3921■ SKF4221■ SKF4521■ SKF4821

24" Deep

■ SKF3924■ SKF4224■ SKF4524■ SKF4824

24" Deep

■ PSKF0924■ PSKF1224■ PSKF1524■ PSKF1824■ PSKF2124■ PSKF2424■ PSKF2724■ PSKF3024■ PSKF3324■ PSKF3624

24" Deep

■ PSKF3924■ PSKF4224■ PSKF4524■ PSKF4824

900.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Roll-Out Tray Kits

Roll-Out Tray Kit• See right for roll-out tray information and upgrade option.

• Last two numbers in code indicate width of coordinating cabinet. EXAMPLE: BTK24-1 for B24.

• Width and depth modifications available in 1⁄4" increments, specify cabinet width and/or depth. See Section 1100 for details.

• Drill template (DRILLTEMP) available to aid in installation, see Section 1200 for details.

• Available factory installed, see Section 1100 (ISOS).

• See sections throughout this manual for cabinets that include roll-out trays.

Tall, 24" DeepSingle, 24" Deep Double, 24" Deep

Single Door (full width)

TTK15-4 TTK18-4 TTK21-4 TTK24-4

Butt Doors (full width)

TTK24B-4 TTK27B-4 TTK30B-4 TTK33B-4 TTK36B-4

Single Door (full width)

BTK12-1 BTK15-1 BTK18-1 BTK21-1 BTK24-1

Butt Doors (full width)

BTK24B-1 BTK27B-1 BTK30B-1 BTK33B-1 BTK36B-1

Single Door (full width)

BTK12-2 BTK15-2 BTK18-2 BTK21-2 BTK24-2

Butt Doors (full width)

BTK24B-2 BTK27B-2 BTK30B-2 BTK33B-2 BTK36B-2

Butt Doors, Center Partition (for one side of cabinet)

BTK39-1 BTK42-1 BTK45-1

Butt Doors, No Center Partition (full width)

BTK39B-1 BTK42B-1 BTK45B-1

Four Doors, Center Partition (for one side of cabinet)

BTK48F-1

Butt Doors, Center Partition (for one side of cabinet)

BTK39-2 BTK42-2 BTK45-2

Butt Doors, No Center Partition (full width)

BTK39B-2 BTK42B-2 BTK45B-2

Four Doors, Center Partition (for one side of cabinet)

BTK48F-2

Roll-Out Tray Upgrade Option

NEW! Standard roll-out trays are now 31⁄2" high.

• Roll-out tray height may be modified to 61⁄2" high.

• Prefix modification code below with quantity.

• Not required on all roll-out trays in kit. May mix and match 31⁄2" and 61⁄2" sizes.

EXAMPLE: TTK36B, 2DDSOS specifies two roll-out trays remain 31⁄2" high and two trays are upgraded to 61⁄2" high.

• Guides remain standard, see Section 1100 for details.

__DDSOS

Standard Roll-Out Tray

DDSOS Option

900.192015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Decorative Hardware

Understanding Decorative Hardware DimensionsReference diagrams below to correctly understand hardware dimensions listed below and on following pages.

Pull Shaped KnobRound Knob

width

depth

center

depth

diameter

depth

width

*Appliance Pull

• NOTE: Appliance pull SKUs are noted with an *.

• Installation screws included. Break-off screws (HSCR832) available in Section 1200 if different length screws required.

Contemporary Collection

Contemporary Pull B

Polished Chrome Center Width Depth

HW-10534200 2.5" 3.9" 0.7"

Contemporary Pull AMatte Nickel Center Width Depth

HW-11609617 3.8" 4.2" 1.4" HW-11609680 5" 5.4" 1.4" HW-11609644 6.3" 6.7" 1.4" HW-11609665* 7.6" 7.9" 1.4" HW-11609671* 11.3" 11.7" 1.4"

Contemporary Knob B

Polished Chrome Center Width Depth

HW-10543200 1.25" 1.5" 1"

Contemporary Pull CSatin Nickel Center Width Depth

HW-26201-G10 3" 5.25" 1" HW-9362-G10 5" 7.1875" 1.25" HW-26204-G10* 6.25" 9" 1.25" HW-26205-G10* 8" 12" 1.67" HW-26206-G10* 12" 16" 1.67" HW-26207-G10* 18" 22" 1.75"

Aluminum Finger Pull for Doors

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Steel Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Width Depth

■ HW-P242NA-ALM ■ HW-P242S-SS ■ HW-P242ORBMED-OR 2" 3" 1.6875"

DESIGN NOTE

If you are installing vertically, please consider location of pull to avoid interference between doors or doors and drawer fronts.

Finger pull installed

3"

111⁄16"

2"

DESIGN NOTE

For a contemporary look, use on aluminum doors, see Section 1100.

900.20 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Decorative Hardware

*Appliance Pull

Contemporary Pull EStainless Steel Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-19541-SS HW-40517-ORB 5" 7.4375" 1.375" HW-19012-SS HW-40518-ORB 7.5" 9.75" 1.375" HW-19013-SS HW-40519-ORB 10" 13" 1.375" HW-19014-SS HW-19014-ORB 12.5" 15.625" 1.375" HW-19015-SS HW-19015-ORB 16.25" 19.375" 1.375" HW-19016-SS HW-19016-ORB 18.75" 21.875" 1.375" HW-19017-SS HW-19017-ORB 21.25" 24.5" 1.375" HW-19018-SS HW-19018-ORB 25" 28.0625" 1.375" HW-19019-SS HW-19019-ORB 30" 33.0625" 1.375" HW-54008-SS* HW-54008-ORB* 12" 14.75" 2" HW-54025-SS* HW-54025-ORB* 18" 20.625" 2"

Contemporary Pull FPolished Chrome Anodized Aluminum Center Width Depth

HW-27017-26 HW-27017-AA 5" 5.875" 1.375"

Contemporary Knob FPolished Chrome Anodized Aluminum Width Depth

HW-27018-26 HW-27018-AA .875" 1.375"

Contemporary Knob GFrosted Glass Clear Glass Diameter Depth

HW-13573410 HW-13573400 1.6" 1.5"

Contemporary Pull HSatin Nickel Center Width Depth

HW-24018-SN 3.78" 4.2" 1.1" HW-24017-SN 6.3" 6.7" 1.1"

Contemporary Collection (continued)

Contemporary Pull GFrosted Glass Clear Glass Center Width Depth

HW-10379411 HW-10379401 5" 7.8" 1.5"

Contemporary Pull DSatin Nickel Graphite Center Width Depth

HW-55365-G10 HW-55365-GPH 3.75" 4.44" 1.17" HW-55367-G10 HW-55367-GPH 5" 5.7" 1.2" HW-55369-G10* HW-55369-GPH* 8" 9" 1.625" HW-55370-G10* HW-55370-GPH* 12" 13" 1.625" HW-55371-G10* HW-55371-GPH* 18" 19.14" 1.625"

Contemporary Knob DSatin Nickel Graphite Width Depth

HW-55360-G10 HW-55360-GPH 1.1" 1"

900.212015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Transitional Knob A

Polished Chrome Satin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Diameter Depth

HW-53005-26 HW-53005-G10 HW-53005-ORB 1.25" 1.125"

Flat Black Diameter Depth

HW-53005-FB 1.25" 1.125"

Transitional Collection

Decorative Hardware

*Appliance Pull

Transitional Pull ESatin Nickel Center Width Depth

HW-1590-G10 3" 5.625" 1" HW-1588-G10 5" 7.5" 1" HW-54001-G10* 8" 12" 1.75"

Transitional Knob ESatin Nickel Diameter Depth

HW-1586-G10 1.375" 1"

Transitional Pull F

Polished Nickel Center Width Depth

HW-26137-PN 3.75" 4" 1"

Transitional Knob FPolished Nickel Width Depth

HW-26139-2-PN 1.4" 1.25" HW-26131-PN 1" 1.125"

Transitional Pull B

Polished Chrome Satin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-53003-26 HW-53003-G10 HW-53003-ORB 3.8" 4.75" 1.1875"

Flat Black Center Width Depth

HW-53003-FB 3.8" 4.75" 1.1875"

Transitional Pull D

Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-4235-ORB 3" 3.25" 1.25"

Transitional Pull C

Polished Chrome Satin Nickel Flat Black Center Width Depth

HW-53010-26 HW-53010-G10 HW-53010-FB 3" 3.1875" 1.25"

900.22 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Decorative Hardware

*Appliance Pull

Transitional Pull HSatin Nickel Black Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-55276-G10 HW-55276-BBR 3.75" 4.6" 1" HW-55278-G10 HW-55278-BBR 6.25" 7.25" 1.25" HW-55279-G10* HW-55279-BBR* 8" 9.4" 1.4" HW-55280-G10* HW-55280-BBR* 12" 13.4" 1.4"HW-55281-G10* HW-55281-BBR* 18" 19.4" 1.4"

Transitional Knob H-1Satin Nickel Black Bronze Height Width Depth

HW-55274-G10 HW-55274-BBR 1.4" 1.8" .75"

Transitional Knob H-2Satin Nickel Black Bronze Width Depth

HW-55271-G10 HW-55271-BBR 1" 1.3"

Transitional Knob IGuilded Bronze Satin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Width Depth

HW-55340-GB HW-55340-G10 HW-55340-ORB 1.25" 1.0625"

Transitional Pull I

Guilded Bronze Satin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-55344-GB HW-55344-G10 HW-55344-ORB 3.75" 4.3" 1.4" HW-55346-GB HW-55346-G10 HW-55346-ORB 5" 5.6" 1.5" HW-55348-GB* HW-55348-G10* HW-55348-ORB* 8" 8.9" 2.2" HW-55349-GB* HW-55349-G10* HW-55349-ORB* 12" 13" 2.3" HW-55350-GB* HW-55350-G10* HW-55350-ORB* 18" 19" 2.5"

Transitional Pull J-1Satin Nickel Graphite Center Width Depth

HW-53713-G10 HW-53713-GPH 5" 6" 1.25" HW-54021-G10* HW-54021-GPH* 12" 13.25" 1.6" HW-54022-G10* HW-54022-GPH* 18" 19.25" 1.7"

Transitional Pull J-2Satin Nickel Graphite Center Width Depth

HW-53715-G10 HW-53715-GPH 3" 4.5" .75"

Transitional Collection (continued)

Transitional Knob GSatin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Width Depth

HW-29203-G10 HW-29203-ORB 1.5" 1"

Transitional Pull G

Satin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-29202-G10 HW-29202-ORB 3.75" 5" 1"

900.232015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Transitional Knob JSatin Nickel Graphite Diameter Depth

HW-53710-G10 HW-53710-GPH 1.25" 1"

Transitional Knob KSatin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Pewter Diameter Depth

HW-53703-G10 HW-53703-ORB HW-53703-PWT 1" 1.125"

Transitional Pull KSatin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Pewter Center Width Depth

HW-53704-G10 HW-53704-ORB HW-53704-PWT 3" 3.25" 1.125" HW-53705-G10 HW-53705-ORB HW-53705-PWT 3.75" 4.5" 1.125"

Decorative Hardware

*Appliance Pull

Transitional Knob L-1Polished Nickel Dark Oiled Bronze Diameter Depth

HW-55312-PN HW-55312-DOB 1.1" 1.25"

Transitional Pull L-1Polished Nickel Dark Oiled Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-55319-PN HW-55319-DOB 5" 6.6" 1.25" HW-55322-PN* HW-55322-DOB* 8" 10.5" 1.6" HW-55323-PN* HW-55323-DOB* 12" 15.3" 1.8" HW-55324-PN* HW-55324-DOB* 18" 21" 2"

Transitional Pull L-2Polished Nickel Dark Oiled Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-55318-PN HW-55318-DOB 3.5" 4" .75"

Transitional Knob L-2Polished Nickel Dark Oiled Bronze Width Depth

HW-55311-PN HW-55311-DOB 1.4" 1"

Transitional Backer Plate LPolished Nickel Dark Oiled Bronze Width Depth

HW-55314-PN HW-55314-DOB 5" .0625"

Transitional Collection (continued)

900.24 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Traditional Pull C-1

Antique Nickel Center Width Depth

HW-24011-AN 3.75" 4" 1.25"

Traditional Knob C

Antique Nickel Diameter Depth

HW-24009-AN 1.1" 1"

Traditional Pull C-2

Antique Nickel Center Width Depth

HW-24012-AN 3.75" 4.25" 1.25"

Traditional Pull D

Satin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-55222-G10 HW-55222-ORB 3" 3.6" 1.25" HW-55224-G10 HW-55224-ORB 5" 5.7" 1.5" HW-55226-G10* HW-55226-ORB* 8" 9" 2" HW-55227-G10* HW-55227-ORB* 12" 13" 2.4" HW-55228-G10* HW-55228-ORB* 18" 19.2" 2.75"

Traditional Knob DSatin Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Width Depth

HW-55220-G10 HW-55220-ORB 2.625" 1.3" HW-55221-G10 HW-55221-ORB 3" 1.5"

Traditional Pull A

Weathered Nickel Copper Center Width Depth

HW-24004-WNC 3.75" 4" 1.2"

Traditional Knob A

Weathered Nickel Copper Diameter Depth

HW-24003-WNC 1.1" 1"

Traditional Pull B

Rustic Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-4428-RBZ 3" 4.125" 1"

Traditional Knob B

Rustic Bronze Width Depth

HW-4429-RBZ 1.125" 1.125"

Traditional Collection

*Appliance Pull

Decorative Hardware

900.252015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Decorative Hardware

*Appliance Pull

Traditional Collection (continued)

Traditional Pull E

Satin Nickel Dark Oiled Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-55421-SN HW-55421-DOB 3" 3.6" 1.2" HW-55422-SN HW-55422-DOB 5" 5.7" 1.375" HW-55424-SN* HW-55424-DOB* 8" 9" 2" HW-55425-SN* HW-55425-DOB* 12" 13" 2.3" HW-55426-SN* HW-55426-DOB* 18" 19.2" 2.5"

Traditional Knob ESatin Nickel Dark Oiled Bronze Diameter Depth

HW-24234-SN HW-24234-DOB 1.3" 1"

Traditional Pull F

Sterling Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Roman Bronze Center Width Depth

HW-1300-G9 HW-1300-ORB HW-1300-RB 3" 5.25" 1"

Traditional Knob FSterling Nickel Oil Rubbed Bronze Roman Bronze Diameter Depth

HW-1307-G9 HW-1586-ORB HW-1586-RB 1.25" 1"

Traditional Knob GAged Pewter Distressed Brass Diameter Depth

HW-53027-AP HW-53027-DBS 1.3" 1"

Traditional Pull GAged Pewter Distressed Brass Center Width Depth

HW-53028-AP HW-53028-DBS 3.75" 4.4" 1.25"

Traditional Knob HWrought Iron Diameter Depth

HW-1355-WI 1.25" 1"

Traditional Pull HWrought Iron Center Width Depth

HW-1351-WI 3" 5.25" 1"

Weathered Nickel Antique Rust Width Depth

HW-27006-WN HW-27006-ART 1.125" 1"

Traditional Knob I

Traditional Pull IWeathered Nickel Antique Rust Center Width Depth

HW-27005-WN HW-27005-ART 3" 4" 1"

900.26 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

900ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Decorative Hardware

*Appliance Pull

Traditional Collection (continued)

Traditional Knob J-1Dark Oil Rubbed Bronze Height Width Depth

HW-12119303 1.5" 1.4" .6"

Traditional Pull JDark Oil Rubbed Bronze Center Height Width Depth

HW-12118311 2.5" 1" 2.8" .6" HW-12101321 3.7" 1.5" 4" .6"

Traditional Knob J-2Dark Oil Rubbed Bronze Height Depth

HW-12105364 2.5" .6"

Traditional Knob K

• Available in maple or cherry only, species substitutions will not be made.

• See finish charts for finish availability by wood species.

Maple Cherry Diameter Depth

HW-19674107 HW-19674607 1.25" 1"

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1000.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1000.3 Fillers

1000.4 Overlay Fillers

1000.5 0° and 45° Corner Fillers

1000.6 90° Inside Corner Fillers and Overlay Fillers

1000.7 135° Corner Angle Fillers

1000.8 Veneered Panels

1000.9 Side and End Panels

1000.12 End Panel with Filler

1000.14 Box Column Fillers

1000.18 Deluxe Panels

1000.20 Appliance Front Panels

1000.22 Deluxe Panels for Sub-Zero Refrigeration

1000.24 Wood Tops

In This Section

1000.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Fillers

3" Wide 6" Wide Height

Wall WF330 WF630 30" WF333 WF633 33" WF336 WF636 36" WF339 WF639 39" WF342 WF642 42" WF348 WF648 48" WF351 WF651 51" WF354 WF654 54" WF357 WF657 57" WF360 WF660 60"

Base BF330 BF630 30" BF334 BF634 341⁄2" BF340 BF640 401⁄2"

Tall UF364 UF664 641⁄2" UF384 UF684 84" UF387 UF687 87" UF390 UF690 90" UF393 UF693 93" UF396 UF696 96" UF3108* UF6108* 108" UF3120* UF6120* 120"

*Available for orders in wood door styles only in Cherry, Hickory, Knotty Alder, Maple and Oak; not available in QS Oak.

Vanity Base VF327 VF627 271⁄2" VF332 VF632 32"

Desk Base DF328 DF628 281⁄2"

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood; finish applied to face and four

edges.

• Width modification available in 1⁄4" increments; minimum width 1", maximum 6".

• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer or textured melamine door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; finished on face, edge

banded two short and one long edge.

• PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Width modification available on 6" widths only, minimum width 31⁄4".

Plain

Flute spacing for all heights of Wall Fluted

Filler and 271⁄2" height of Vanity Base Fluted Filler

2"

61⁄2"

2"

2"

Flute spacing for all heights of Base, Tall,

Desk Base and 32" height of Vanity Base Fluted Filler

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood, finish

applied to face and four edges.

For orders in foil door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick MDF; finished on

face and four edges.

• PLYBOX modification not available.

For orders in acrylic, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles:• Not available.

Fluted

3" Wide 6" Wide Height

Wall WFF312 WFF612 12" WFF315 WFF615 15" WFF318 WFF618 18" WFF321 WFF621 21" WFF324 WFF624 24" WFF327 WFF627 27" WFF330 WFF630 30" WFF333 WFF633 33" WFF336 WFF636 36" WFF339 WFF639 39" WFF342 WFF642 42" WFF348 WFF648 48" WFF351 WFF651 51" WFF354 WFF654 54" WFF357 WFF657 57" WFF360 WFF660 60"

Base BFF334 BFF634 341⁄2" BFF340 BFF640 401⁄2"

Tall UFF364 UFF664 641⁄2" UFF384 UFF684 84" UFF387 UFF687 87" UFF390 UFF690 90" UFF393 UFF693 93" UFF396 UFF696 96"

Vanity Base VFF327 VFF627 271⁄2" VFF332 VFF632 32"

Desk Base DFF328 DFF628 281⁄2"

Fillers, 3" and 6" Wide• Base, tall and vanity base fillers do not include toe kick return.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• Width modification available for plain fillers only; see below for minimums/maximums for various material types.

• 3" fluted fillers receive three equally spaced flutes, 6" widths receive six equally spaced flutes.

1000.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS Overlay Fillers

Overlay Fillers, 3" and 6" Wide• Intended for field application on 3" or 6" wide fillers.

• Dimensions of overlay fillers coordinate with dimensions of most standard fillers. When centered on face of filler, a 1⁄16" reveal is present on top, bottom and edges.

• Overlay fillers are flush with face of doors and drawer fronts of cabinets and are designed to ‘blend’ filler space into cabinetry.

• Overlay fillers are profiled on all four edges; specific styles indicated at right.

• Base, tall and vanity base fillers do not include toe kick return.

• Width modification not available.

• Height modification available; specify overall final height required. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• 3" fluted overlay fillers receive three equally spaced flutes, 6" fluted overlay fillers receive six equally spaced flutes.

EXCEPTION: Leighton door style – 3" wide fluted overlay fillers are not available, 6" wide fluted overlay fillers receive 4 flutes.

Plain27⁄8" Wide 57⁄8" Wide Height

Wall WFA330 WFA630 297⁄8" WFA333 WFA633 327⁄8" WFA336 WFA636 357⁄8" WFA339 WFA639 387⁄8" WFA342 WFA642 417⁄8" WFA348 WFA648 477⁄8" WFA351 WFA651 507⁄8" WFA354 WFA654 537⁄8" WFA357 WFA657 567⁄8" WFA360 WFA660 597⁄8"

Base BFA334 BFA634 297⁄8" BFA340 BFA640 357⁄8"

Tall UFA364 UFA664 597⁄8" UFA384 UFA684 793⁄8" UFA387 UFA687 823⁄8" UFA390 UFA690 853⁄8" UFA393 UFA693 883⁄8" UFA396 UFA696 913⁄8"

Vanity Base VFA332 VFA632 273⁄8"

Desk Base DFA328 DFA628 237⁄8"

Fluted27⁄8" Wide 57⁄8" Wide Height

Wall WFFA312 WFFA612 117⁄8" WFFA315 WFFA615 147⁄8" WFFA318 WFFA618 177⁄8" WFFA321 WFFA621 207⁄8" WFFA324 WFFA624 237⁄8" WFFA327 WFFA627 267⁄8" WFFA330 WFFA630 297⁄8" WFFA333 WFFA633 327⁄8" WFFA336 WFFA636 357⁄8" WFFA339 WFFA639 387⁄8" WFFA342 WFFA642 417⁄8" WFFA348 WFFA648 477⁄8" WFFA351 WFFA651 507⁄8" WFFA354 WFFA654 537⁄8" WFFA357 WFFA657 567⁄8" WFFA360 WFFA660 597⁄8"

Base BFFA334 BFFA634 297⁄8" BFFA340 BFFA640 357⁄8"

Tall UFFA364 UFFA664 597⁄8" UFFA384 UFFA684 793⁄8" UFFA387 UFFA687 823⁄8" UFFA390 UFFA690 853⁄8" UFFA393 UFFA693 883⁄8" UFFA396 UFFA696 913⁄8"

Vanity Base VFFA332 VFFA632 273⁄8"

Desk Base DFFA328 DFFA628 237⁄8"

End Detail of Overlay Filler by Door Style

Profile for following door styles: Bahamas • Brookhill • Caledon • Devonshire • Eaton Fenwick • Hudson Falls • Lincoln • Loxley • Mission Park Place • Potter’s Mill • Providence • Sonoma • Valencia Victoria • Wakefield • Wattsburg • Windwood Madison • Venice • Winterberry

Calistoga

Bella* • Gibson* • Pike’s Peak*

Dana Pointe

Leighton* (3" width) Leighton (6" width)

*Fluted Overlay Filler not available.

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from

3⁄4" thick solid wood, finish applied to face and four edges.

For orders in foil door styles:• Constructed from

3⁄4" thick MDF; finished on face and four edges.

• PLYBOX modification not available.

For orders in acrylic, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles:• Not available.

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood; finish applied to face and four

edges.

• If ordered in Highlights, orders with this profile do not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer or textured melamine door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick MDF; finished face and four edges.

• PLYBOX modification not available.

2"

2"

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1000.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

0° and 45° Corner Fillers• Available for wood door styles only.

• Does not include toe kick return.

• Modifications not available.

• Reversible for left or right applications.

• For proper planning, see installation guide below. X = cabinet width; Y = space required.

0° Corner FillerBase Height

BZF330 30"

45° Corner FillerBase Height

BAF330 30"

Top View

3"

45˚

6"

4"

Finished edges indicated by bold lines.

Application Example – Top View

Application Example

Base CabinetBAF Filler

BAF Filler

Top View

45˚

11⁄2"

Finished edges indicated by bold lines.

Application Example – Top View

Application Example

Base CabinetBZF Filler

BZF Filler

33⁄4"

21⁄4"

Round-over Edge

Roundover Edge

BZF Filler

Finished Visible Area

Corner Fillers

Y

Y

X

Installation Guide

X Y24" 417⁄8"

27" 44"

30" 461⁄8"

33" 481⁄4"

36" 503⁄8"

Installation Guide

X Y24" 447⁄8"

27" 47"

30" 491⁄8"

33" 511⁄4"

36" 533⁄8"

Y

Y

X

1000.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Corner Fillers, Corner Overlay Fillers

Top View

23⁄16"or 53⁄16"

215⁄16"or 515⁄16"

23⁄16"or

53⁄16"

215⁄16"or 515⁄16"

90° Inside Corner Fillers and Overlay Fillers• Base, tall and vanity base fillers do not include toe kick return.

• Width modification not available.

• Height modification available; specify overall final height required. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks, 481⁄4" for talls.

• Intended for field application on 3" x 3" or 6" x 6" corner fillers.

• Dimensions of overlay filler leave a 1⁄16" reveal on all outside edges.

• Overlay fillers are flush with face of doors and drawer fronts of cabinets and are designed to ‘blend’ filler space into cabinetry.

• Overlay fillers are profiled on all four edges; specific styles indicated on page 1000.4.

Top View

3" or 6"

3"or 6"

Overlay FillersFillers

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall CWF330 CWF630 30" CWF333 CWF633 33" CWF336 CWF636 36" CWF339 CWF639 39" CWF342 CWF642 42" CWF348 CWF648 48" CWF351 CWF651 51" CWF354 CWF654 54" CWF357 CWF657 57" CWF360 CWF660 60"

Base CBF330 CBF630 30" CBF334 CBF634 341⁄2" CBF340 CBF640 401⁄2"

Tall CUF364 CUF664 641⁄2" CUF384 CUF684 84" CUF387 CUF687 87" CUF390 CUF690 90" CUF393 CUF693 93" CUF396 CUF696 96"

Vanity Base CVF327 CVF627 271⁄2" CVF332 CVF632 32"

Desk Base CDF328 CDF628 281⁄2"

215⁄16" x 215⁄16" 515⁄16" x 515⁄16" Height

Wall CWFA330 CWFA630 297⁄8" CWFA333 CWFA633 327⁄8" CWFA336 CWFA636 357⁄8" CWFA339 CWFA639 387⁄8" CWFA342 CWFA642 417⁄8" CWFA348 CWFA648 477⁄8" CWFA351 CWFA651 507⁄8" CWFA354 CWFA654 537⁄8" CWFA357 CWFA657 567⁄8" CWFA360 CWFA660 597⁄8"

Base CBFA334 CBFA634 297⁄8" CBFA340 CBFA640 357⁄8"

Tall CUFA364 CUFA664 597⁄8" CUFA384 CUFA684 793⁄8" CUFA387 CUFA687 823⁄8" CUFA390 CUFA690 853⁄8" CUFA393 CUFA693 883⁄8" CUFA396 CUFA696 913⁄8"

Vanity Base CVFA332 CVFA632 273⁄8"

Desk Base CDFA328 CDFA628 237⁄8"

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood; finish applied to face and four

edges.

• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer or textured melamine door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; finished on face and edge

banded on four short edges.

• PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood; finish applied to face and four

edges.

• If ordered in Highlights, orders with this profile do not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer or textured melamine door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick MDF; finished on face and four edges.

• PLYBOX modification not available.

1000.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Corner Angle Fillers

Top View

3" or 6"

3" or 6"

135˚

Inside Corner Outside Corner

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall WACFI330 WACFI630 30" WACFI333 WACFI633 33" WACFI336 WACFI636 36" WACFI339 WACFI639 39" WACFI342 WACFI642 42" WACFI348 WACFI648 48" WACFI351 WACFI651 51" WACFI354 WACFI654 54" WACFI357 WACFI657 57" WACFI360 WACFI660 60"

BaseBACFI330 BACFI630 30"

BACFI334 BACFI634 341⁄2" BACFI340 BACFI640 401⁄2"

Tall UACFI364 UACFI664 641⁄2" UACFI384 UACFI684 84" UACFI387 UACFI687 87" UACFI390 UACFI690 90" UACFI393 UACFI693 93" UACFI396 UACFI696 96"

Vanity Base VACFI327 VACFI627 271⁄2" VACFI332 VACFI632 32"

Desk Base DACFI328 DACFI628 281⁄2"

3" x 3" 6" x 6" Height

Wall WACFO330 WACFO630 30" WACFO333 WACFO633 33" WACFO336 WACFO636 36" WACFO339 WACFO639 39" WACFO342 WACFO642 42" WACFO348 WACFO648 48" WACFO351 WACFO651 51" WACFO354 WACFO654 54" WACFO357 WACFO657 57" WACFO360 WACFO660 60"

Base BACFO330 BACFO630 30" BACFO334 BACFO634 341⁄2" BACFO340 BACFO640 401⁄2"

Tall UACFO364 UACFO664 641⁄2" UACFO384 UACFO684 84" UACFO387 UACFO687 87" UACFO390 UACFO690 90" UACFO393 UACFO693 93" UACFO396 UACFO696 96"

Vanity Base VACFO327 VACFO627 271⁄2"

VACFO332 VACFO632 32"

Desk Base DACFO328 DACFO628 281⁄2"

135° Corner Angle Fillers• Base, tall and vanity base corner fillers do not include toe kick return.

• Width modification not available.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood; finish applied to face and four edges.

• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer or textured melamine door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; finished on face and edge banded on four short edges.

• PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

Top View

3" or 6"

3" or 6"135˚

1000.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Veneered Panels

1⁄4" Thick

Cross Grain

Wood/Premium Veneer Width Height

PNL147234 72" 341⁄2" PNL149634 96" 341⁄2" PNL149648 96" 48"

Long Grain

Textured Melamine/ Wood/Premium Veneer Foil–Woodgrain Width Height

PNL144848 PNLF144848 48" 48" PNL144896 PNLF144896 48" 96" PNL1424108* 24" 108" PNL1430108* 30" 108" PNL1448108* 48" 108" PNL1424120* 24" 120" PNL1430120* 30" 120" PNL1448120* 48" 120"

*Available for orders in wood door styles only in Cherry, Hickory, Knotty Alder, Maple and Oak; not available in QS Oak.

Non-Grain

Acrylic, Foil–Gloss and Foil–Matte Width Height

PNLF147234 72" 341⁄2" PNLF149634 96" 341⁄2" PNLF144848 48" 48" PNLF144896 48" 96"

For panels this page:

• Panels can be reduced in size at no charge; specify width and height.

EXAMPLE: PNL147234, width60.25, height32.00 specifies 601⁄4" wide x 32" high.

• Grain runs with height; applicable to crossgrain and long grain panels.

• Finished on one side.

• Matching finished interior modification not available to finish back side of panel.

• For wood panels ordered with Highlights, these panels do not receive highlight details.

• See below for panel availability by material type.

1⁄2" Thick

Cross Grain

Wood Width Height

PNL124834 48" 341⁄2" PNL129634 96" 341⁄2" PNL129648 96" 48"

Long Grain

Wood Width Height

PNL124848 48" 48" PNL124896 48" 96"

Veneered Panels• Panels are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Two edges of panel are edge banded; edge banding location follows height of panel.

height

width

Long GrainCross Grain

width

height

3⁄4" Thick

Cross Grain

Wood/Premium Veneer Width Height

PNL347234 72" 341⁄2" PNL349634 96" 341⁄2" PNL349648 96" 48"

• Two edges of panel are edge banded; edge banding location follows height of panel.

Veneered Panels• We reserve the right to use furniture board or plywood core material.

Long Grain

Textured Melamine/ Wood/Premium Veneer Foil–Woodgrain Width Height

PNL344848 PNLF344848 48" 48" PNL344896 PNLF344896 48" 96"

Non-Grain

Acrylic, Foil–Gloss and Foil–Matte Width Height

PNLF347234 72" 341⁄2" PNLF349634 96" 341⁄2" PNLF344848 48" 48" PNLF344896 48" 96"

1000.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Melamine Veneered Panels, 3⁄4" Thick

Long GrainMelamine Width Height

PNLM344848 48" 48" PNLM344896 48" 96"

• Features natural maple melamine as standard or white melamine if WHTCS is specified.

• Panels have melamine on both sides.

• Panels are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

Beaded Wainscot Plywood Panel (veneered plywood)

Long Grain

End View

Beading Detail

1⁄16"

11⁄2"

Wood Width Height

VBPNL144848 48" 48" VBPNL144896 48" 96"

• Available in wood door styles only.

• 1⁄4" thick veneered plywood with 1⁄16" deep machined groove.

• Grain runs with height.

• Finished on face only.

Face View

For panels this column:

• Panels can be reduced in size at no charge; specify width and height.

EXAMPLE: PNLM344848, width40.25, height32.00 specifies 401⁄4" wide x 32" high.

• See below for panel availability by material type.

height

width

Long Grain

Veneered Panels, Side and End Panels

Desk Legs – 3⁄4" Thick• Height modification available; minimum 24"; maximum 48".• Depth modification available; minimum 12", maximum 30". Depth

modification dimension coordinates with longest edge.

• See coordinating 3", 5" or 6" high desk drawers in Section 700.

For orders in wood door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick veneered plywood and edge banded front

– finished both sides and front edge.• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer or textured melamine door styles:• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick material*; finished both sides and front

edge.*We reserve the right to use furniture board or plywood core material.

281⁄2" High, 21" Deep

DL328DL528DL628

32" High, 24" Deep

DL332DL532DL632

341⁄2" High, 24" Deep

DL334DL534DL634

281⁄2"

3", 5" or 6"

21"

12"

32"341⁄2"

3", 5" or 6"

24"

15"

1000.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Side and End Panels

Wall Decorative Panel Application

Desk Decorative Panel Application

Decorative Side Panel

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Designed for use as decorative panels at end of cabinet runs, see examples.

• Panel depth captures door/drawer front thickness.

• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick veneered plywood, front edge is edge banded. Finished both sides and front edge.

• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

• Depth modification available, minimum 12", maximum 30". Depth dimension coordinates with longest edge.

• Height modification available. Minimum height for walls is 30", maximum 72"; minimum for base, vanity base and desk base is 161⁄2", maximum 48".

Classic (CL)Arts & Crafts ( AC) Scalloped (SC)

1515⁄16"153⁄4" 153⁄4"

7" 7"21⁄16"

14"

Wall Decorative Panels Base, Vanity Base and Desk Decorative Panels

12", 15", 18"

14 5⁄8",17 5⁄8", 20 5⁄8"

281⁄2"32"

341⁄2"

281⁄2"32"

341⁄2"

281⁄2"32"

341⁄2"

19", 22", 25"

19", 22", 25"

19", 22", 25"

Classic (CL)Arts & Crafts ( AC) Scalloped (SC)

12", 15", 18"

3", 5" or 6"

3", 5" or 6"

3", 5" or 6"

DESIGN NOTE

Base, vanity base and desk sizes coordinate with desk drawer (DD) available in 3", 5" and 6" heights, see Section 700.

Wall

Arts & Crafts14" Deep

14DSPAC48 14DSPAC51 14DSPAC54 14DSPAC57 14DSPAC60

Base, 341⁄2" High

Arts & Crafts3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3ACB 19DSP5ACB 19DSP6ACB 22DSP3ACB 22DSP5ACB 22DSP6ACB 25DSP3ACB 25DSP5ACB 25DSP6ACB

Classic14" Deep

14DSPCL48 14DSPCL51 14DSPCL54 14DSPCL57 14DSPCL60

Classic3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3CLB 19DSP5CLB 19DSP6CLB 22DSP3CLB 22DSP5CLB 22DSP6CLB 25DSP3CLB 25DSP5CLB 25DSP6CLB

Scallop14" Deep

14DSPSC48 14DSPSC51 14DSPSC54 14DSPSC57 14DSPSC60

Scallop3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3SCB 19DSP5SCB 19DSP6SCB 22DSP3SCB 22DSP5SCB 22DSP6SCB 25DSP3SCB 25DSP5SCB 25DSP6SCB

Vanity Base, 32" High

Arts & Crafts3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3ACV 19DSP5ACV 19DSP6ACV 22DSP3ACV 22DSP5ACV 22DSP6ACV 25DSP3ACV 25DSP5ACV 25DSP6ACV

Classic 3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3CLV 19DSP5CLV 19DSP6CLV 22DSP3CLV 22DSP5CLV 22DSP6CLV 25DSP3CLV 25DSP5CLV 25DSP6CLV

Scallop 3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3SCV 19DSP5SCV 19DSP6SCV 22DSP3SCV 22DSP5SCV 22DSP6SCV 25DSP3SCV 25DSP5SCV 25DSP6SCV

Desk, 281⁄2" High

Arts & Crafts3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3ACD 19DSP5ACD 19DSP6ACD 22DSP3ACD 22DSP5ACD 22DSP6ACD 25DSP3ACD 25DSP5ACD 25DSP6ACD

Classic 3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3CLD 19DSP5CLD 19DSP6CLD 22DSP3CLD 22DSP5CLD 22DSP6CLD 25DSP3CLD 25DSP5CLD 25DSP6CLD

Scallop 3" High 5" High 6" High

19DSP3SCD 19DSP5SCD 19DSP6SCD 22DSP3SCD 22DSP5SCD 22DSP6SCD 25DSP3SCD 25DSP5SCD 25DSP6SCD

Depth

19"22"25"

Depth

19"22"25"

Depth

19"22"25"

Height

48"51"54"57"60"

1000.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

End Panels

3⁄4" Thick End Panels• Available for orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer, textured melamine and wood door styles.

EXCEPTION: 108" and 120" heights are available in wood door styles only.

• Panels match door material/color.

• Panels are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Finished both sides.

• For wood panels ordered in Highlights, these panels do not receive highlight details.

• Standard panels are edge banded on three sides (top, bottom and one long edge); peninsula panels are edge banded on all four sides.

• For placement on end of wall, base, tall, vanity and desk cabinets.

• Depth of panels are designed so front edge of panel will be flush with doors/drawer fronts of cabinets.

• Panels can be reduced in size at no charge; specify width and height.

EXAMPLE: DEPW42, width12.875, height39.25 specifies 127⁄8" wide x 391⁄4" high.

• Matching end modification not available.

Visible Seam

Top ViewEdgebanding

Wall 137⁄8" Wide 247⁄8" Wide Height

DEPW12 24DEPW12 12" DEPW15 24DEPW15 15" DEPW18 24DEPW18 18" DEPW21 24DEPW21 21" DEPW24 24DEPW24 24" DEPW27 24DEPW27 27" DEPW30 24DEPW30 30" DEPW33 24DEPW33 33" DEPW36 24DEPW36 36" DEPW39 24DEPW39 39" DEPW42 24DEPW42 42" DEPW48 24DEPW48 48" DEPW51 24DEPW51 51" DEPW54 24DEPW54 54" DEPW57 24DEPW57 57" DEPW60 24DEPW60 60"

Wall Panels – Peninsula Applications

143⁄4" Wide 253⁄4" Wide Height

PDEPW12 24PDEPW12 12" PDEPW15 24PDEPW15 15" PDEPW18 24PDEPW18 18" PDEPW21 24PDEPW21 21" PDEPW24 24PDEPW24 24" PDEPW27 24PDEPW27 27" PDEPW30 24PDEPW30 30" PDEPW33 24PDEPW33 33" PDEPW36 24PDEPW36 36" PDEPW39 24PDEPW39 39" PDEPW42 24PDEPW42 42"

Base Panels

137⁄8" Wide 187⁄8" Wide 217⁄8" Wide 247⁄8" Wide Height

13DEPB34 18DEPB34 21DEPB34 24DEPB34 341⁄2" 13DEPB40 18DEPB40 21DEPB40 24DEPB40 401⁄2"

Base Panels – Peninsula Applications

253⁄4" Wide Height

24PDEPB34 341⁄2"

Tall Panels

137⁄8" Wide 187⁄8" Wide 217⁄8" Wide Height

13DEPU64 18DEPU64 21DEPU64 641⁄2" 13DEPU84 18DEPU84 21DEPU84 84" 13DEPU87 18DEPU87 21DEPU87 87" 13DEPU90 18DEPU90 21DEPU90 90" 13DEPU93 18DEPU93 21DEPU93 93" 13DEPU96 18DEPU96 21DEPU96 96"

247⁄8" Wide 277⁄8" Wide 307⁄8" Wide Height

24DEPU64 27DEPU64 30DEPU64 641⁄2" 24DEPU84 27DEPU84 30DEPU84 84" 24DEPU87 27DEPU87 30DEPU87 87" 24DEPU90 27DEPU90 30DEPU90 90" 24DEPU93 27DEPU93 30DEPU93 93" 24DEPU96 27DEPU96 30DEPU96 96" 24DEPU108* 27DEPU108* 30DEPU108* 108" 24DEPU120* 27DEPU120* 30DEPU120* 120"

*Available for orders in wood door styles only.

– Available in Cherry, Hickory, Knotty Alder, Maple and Oak only; not available in QS Oak.

Vanity Base Panels

187⁄8" Wide 217⁄8" Wide Height

18DEPV32 21DEPV32 32" 18DEPV34 21DEPV34 341⁄2"

Vanity Wall Panels

67⁄8" Wide Height

DEPVW24 24" DEPVW30 30" DEPVW36 36"

Desk Base Panels

137⁄8" Wide 187⁄8" Wide 217⁄8" Wide 247⁄8" Wide Height

13DEPB28 18DEPB28 21DEPB28 24DEPB28 281⁄2"

1000.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

End Panel with Filler

End Panel with Filler

11⁄2" Wide 3" Wide 6" Wide Height

Wall, 13" Deep■ 13EPW130FB ■ 13EPW330FB ■ 13EPW630FB 30"■ 13EPW133FB ■ 13EPW333FB ■ 13EPW633FB 33"■ 13EPW136FB ■ 13EPW336FB ■ 13EPW636FB 36"■ 13EPW139FB ■ 13EPW339FB ■ 13EPW639FB 39"■ 13EPW142FB ■ 13EPW342FB ■ 13EPW642FB 42"■ 13EPW148FB ■ 13EPW348FB ■ 13EPW648FB 48"■ 13EPW151FB ■ 13EPW351FB ■ 13EPW651FB 51"■ 13EPW154FB ■ 13EPW354FB ■ 13EPW654FB 54"■ 13EPW157FB ■ 13EPW357FB ■ 13EPW657FB 57"■ 13EPW160FB ■ 13EPW360FB ■ 13EPW660FB 60"

Base, 24" Deep ■ 24EPB134FB ■ 24EPB334FB ■ 24EPB634FB 341⁄2" ■ 24EPB140FB ■ 24EPB340FB ■ 24EPB640FB 401⁄2"

Tall, 13" Deep■ 13EPU164FB ■ 13EPU364FB ■ 13EPU664FB 641⁄2"■ 13EPU184FB ■ 13EPU384FB ■ 13EPU684FB 84"■ 13EPU187FB ■ 13EPU387FB ■ 13EPU687FB 87"■ 13EPU190FB ■ 13EPU390FB ■ 13EPU690FB 90"■ 13EPU193FB ■ 13EPU393FB ■ 13EPU693FB 93"■ 13EPU196FB ■ 13EPU396FB ■ 13EPU696FB 96"

Tall, 24" Deep■ 24EPU164FB ■ 24EPU364FB ■ 24EPU664FB 641⁄2"■ 24EPU184FB ■ 24EPU384FB ■ 24EPU684FB 84"■ 24EPU187FB ■ 24EPU387FB ■ 24EPU687FB 87"■ 24EPU190FB ■ 24EPU390FB ■ 24EPU690FB 90"■ 24EPU193FB ■ 24EPU393FB ■ 24EPU693FB 93"■ 24EPU196FB ■ 24EPU396FB ■ 24EPU696FB 96"■ 24EPU1108PL* ■ 24EPU3108PL* ■ 24EPU6108PL* 108"■ 24EPU1120PL* ■ 24EPU3120PL* ■ 24EPU6120PL* 120"

Tall, 27" Deep■ 27EPU164FB ■ 27EPU364FB ■ 27EPU664FB 641⁄2"■ 27EPU184FB ■ 27EPU384FB ■ 27EPU684FB 84"■ 27EPU187FB ■ 27EPU387FB ■ 27EPU687FB 87"■ 27EPU190FB ■ 27EPU390FB ■ 27EPU690FB 90"■ 27EPU193FB ■ 27EPU393FB ■ 27EPU693FB 93"■ 27EPU196FB ■ 27EPU396FB ■ 27EPU696FB 96"■ 27EPU1108PL* ■ 27EPU3108PL* ■ 27EPU6108PL* 108"■ 27EPU1120PL* ■ 27EPU3120PL* ■ 27EPU6120PL* 120"

Tall, 30" Deep■ 30EPU164FB ■ 30EPU364FB ■ 30EPU664FB 641⁄2"■ 30EPU184FB ■ 30EPU384FB ■ 30EPU684FB 84"■ 30EPU187FB ■ 30EPU387FB ■ 30EPU687FB 87"■ 30EPU190FB ■ 30EPU390FB ■ 30EPU690FB 90"■ 30EPU193FB ■ 30EPU393FB ■ 30EPU693FB 93"■ 30EPU196FB ■ 30EPU396FB ■ 30EPU696FB 96"■ 30EPU1108PL* ■ 30EPU3108PL* ■ 30EPU6108PL* 108"■ 30EPU1120PL* ■ 30EPU3120PL* ■ 30EPU6120PL* 120"

*Available in wood door styles only in Cherry, Hickory, Knotty Alder, Maple and Oak; not available in QS Oak. Panels constructed from plywood; PLYBOX modification not applicable.

• Panels up to 96" high are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Outside of end panels are finished to match door material/color.

• Interior of end panel matches case material/color on order (natural maple melamine or white melamine). EXCEPTION: 108" and 120" heights are always natural maple melamine.

• Matching finished interior modification can be specified to upgrade inside of end panel to match door material/color.

• Matching ends available, see Section 1100.

• Dimensional modifications available in 1⁄4" increments.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• Depth modification available; minimum 43⁄4"; maximum 30".

• Width of front filler may be modified, see below for minimums/maximums by material type.

• Base, tall and vanity base panels do not include recessed toe space.

For orders in wood door styles:• Available with 11⁄2", 3" and 6" wide front filler.

• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood, finish applied to face and four edges.

• Minimum width for front filler is 1", maximum 6".

• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles:• Available with 3" and 6" wide front filler only.

• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board, finished on face, edge banded all four edges.

• PLYBOX modification upgrades front filler and panel to plywood core.

• Minimum width for front filler is 3", maximum 6".

• 108" and 120" heights not available.

Top View3⁄4" End Panel

Widths:11⁄2", 3", 6"

11⁄2" Wide 3" Wide 6" Wide Height

Vanity Base, 18" Deep■ 18EPV132FB ■ 18EPV332FB ■ 18EPV632FB 32"■ 18EPV134FB ■ 18EPV334FB ■ 18EPV634FB 341⁄2"

Vanity Base, 21" Deep■ 21EPV132FB ■ 21EPV332FB ■ 21EPV632FB 32"■ 21EPV134FB ■ 21EPV334FB ■ 21EPV634FB 341⁄2"

Desk Base, 21" Deep■ 21EPD128FB ■ 21EPD328FB ■ 21EPD628FB 281⁄2"

Tall End Panels

Base, Vanity & Desk End

Panels

Wall End Panel

1000.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

End Panel with Filler

End Panel with Fluted Filler

3" Wide 6" Wide Height

Wall, 13" Deep■ 13FEPW330FB ■ 13FEPW630FB 30"■ 13FEPW333FB ■ 13FEPW633FB 33"■ 13FEPW336FB ■ 13FEPW636FB 36"■ 13FEPW339FB ■ 13FEPW639FB 39"■ 13FEPW342FB ■ 13FEPW642FB 42"■ 13FEPW348FB ■ 13FEPW648FB 48"■ 13FEPW351FB ■ 13FEPW651FB 51"■ 13FEPW354FB ■ 13FEPW654FB 54"■ 13FEPW357FB ■ 13FEPW657FB 57"■ 13FEPW360FB ■ 13FEPW660FB 60"

Base, 24" Deep■ 24FEPB334FBL ■ 24FEPB634FBL 341⁄2" ■ 24FEPB334FBR ■ 24FEPB634FBR 341⁄2" ■ 24FEPB340FBL ■ 24FEPB640FBL 401⁄2" ■ 24FEPB340FBR ■ 24FEPB640FBR 401⁄2"

Vanity Base, 18" Deep■ 18FEPV332FBL ■ 18FEPV632FBL 32" ■ 18FEPV332FBR ■ 18FEPV632FBR 32" ■ 18FEPV334FBL ■ 18FEPV634FBL 341⁄2" ■ 18FEPV334FBR ■ 18FEPV634FBR 341⁄2"

Vanity Base, 21" Deep■ 21FEPV332FBL ■ 21FEPV632FBL 32" ■ 21FEPV332FBR ■ 21FEPV632FBR 32" ■ 21FEPV334FBL ■ 21FEPV634FBL 341⁄2" ■ 21FEPV334FBR ■ 21FEPV634FBR 341⁄2"

Desk Base, 21" Deep■ 21FEPD328FBL ■ 21FEPD628FBL 281⁄2" ■ 21FEPD328FBR ■ 21FEPD628FBR 281⁄2"

• Panels are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Outside of end panels are finished to match door material/color.

• Interior of end panel matches case material/color on order (natural maple melamine or white melamine).

• Matching finished interior modification can be specified to upgrade interior of end panel to match door material/color.

• Matching ends available, see Section 1100.

• For base, tall, vanity base and desk base panels indicate left or right configuration by selecting L or R at end of SKU.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• Depth modification available; minimum 43⁄4"; maximum 30".

• Width modification not available for front filler.

• 3" width receives three equally spaced flutes; 6" width receives six equally spaced flutes.

• Base, tall and vanity base panels do not include recessed toe space.

For orders in wood door styles:• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood, finish applied to face and four

edges.• If ordered with Highlights, end panels do not receive highlight detail.

For orders in foil door styles:• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick MDF; finished on face and four edges.• PLYBOX modification upgrades panel only; front filler remains MDF.

For orders in acrylic, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles:• Not available. Tall End Panels

(Left configuration shown)Base, Vanity and Desk End Panels

(Left configuration shown)

Wall End Panels

Top View

3⁄4" End Panel

Widths:3", 6"

3" Wide 6" Wide Height

Tall, 13" Deep

■ 13FEPU364FBL ■ 13FEPU664FBL 641⁄2" ■ 13FEPU364FBR ■ 13FEPU664FBR 641⁄2" ■ 13FEPU384FBL ■ 13FEPU684FBL 84" ■ 13FEPU384FBR ■ 13FEPU684FBR 84" ■ 13FEPU387FBL ■ 13FEPU687FBL 87" ■ 13FEPU387FBR ■ 13FEPU687FBR 87" ■ 13FEPU390FBL ■ 13FEPU690FBL 90" ■ 13FEPU390FBR ■ 13FEPU690FBR 90" ■ 13FEPU393FBL ■ 13FEPU693FBL 93" ■ 13FEPU393FBR ■ 13FEPU693FBR 93" ■ 13FEPU396FBL ■ 13FEPU696FBL 96" ■ 13FEPU396FBR ■ 13FEPU696FBR 96"

Tall, 24" Deep

■ 24FEPU364FBL ■ 24FEPU664FBL 641⁄2" ■ 24FEPU364FBR ■ 24FEPU664FBR 641⁄2" ■ 24FEPU384FBL ■ 24FEPU684FBL 84" ■ 24FEPU384FBR ■ 24FEPU684FBR 84" ■ 24FEPU387FBL ■ 24FEPU687FBL 87" ■ 24FEPU387FBR ■ 24FEPU687FBR 87" ■ 24FEPU390FBL ■ 24FEPU690FBL 90" ■ 24FEPU390FBR ■ 24FEPU690FBR 90" ■ 24FEPU393FBL ■ 24FEPU693FBL 93" ■ 24FEPU393FBR ■ 24FEPU693FBR 93" ■ 24FEPU396FBL ■ 24FEPU696FBL 96" ■ 24FEPU396FBR ■ 24FEPU696FBR 96"

3" Wide 6" Wide Height

Tall, 27" Deep

■ 27FEPU364FBL ■ 27FEPU664FBL 641⁄2" ■ 27FEPU364FBR ■ 27FEPU664FBR 641⁄2" ■ 27FEPU384FBL ■ 27FEPU684FBL 84" ■ 27FEPU384FBR ■ 27FEPU684FBR 84" ■ 27FEPU387FBL ■ 27FEPU687FBL 87" ■ 27FEPU387FBR ■ 27FEPU687FBR 87" ■ 27FEPU390FBL ■ 27FEPU690FBL 90" ■ 27FEPU390FBR ■ 27FEPU690FBR 90" ■ 27FEPU393FBL ■ 27FEPU693FBL 93" ■ 27FEPU393FBR ■ 27FEPU693FBR 93" ■ 27FEPU396FBL ■ 27FEPU696FBL 96" ■ 27FEPU396FBR ■ 27FEPU696FBR 96"

Tall, 30" Deep

■ 30FEPU364FBL ■ 30FEPU664FBL 641⁄2" ■ 30FEPU364FBR ■ 30FEPU664FBR 641⁄2" ■ 30FEPU384FBL ■ 30FEPU684FBL 84" ■ 30FEPU384FBR ■ 30FEPU684FBR 84" ■ 30FEPU387FBL ■ 30FEPU687FBL 87" ■ 30FEPU387FBR ■ 30FEPU687FBR 87" ■ 30FEPU390FBL ■ 30FEPU690FBL 90" ■ 30FEPU390FBR ■ 30FEPU690FBR 90" ■ 30FEPU393FBL ■ 30FEPU693FBL 93" ■ 30FEPU393FBR ■ 30FEPU693FBR 93" ■ 30FEPU396FBL ■ 30FEPU696FBL 96" ■ 30FEPU396FBR ■ 30FEPU696FBR 96"

1000.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Box Column Fillers

3" Wide Height

Wall, 13" Deep13ECW330FB 30"13ECW333FB 33"13ECW336FB 36"13ECW339FB 39"13ECW342FB 42"13ECW348FB 48"13ECW351FB 51"13ECW354FB 54"13ECW357FB 57"13ECW360FB 60"

Base, 24" Deep 24ECB334FB 341⁄2"24ECB340FB 401⁄2"

Tall, 13" Deep 13ECU364FB 641⁄2"13ECU384FB 84"13ECU387FB 87"13ECU390FB 90"13ECU393FB 93"13ECU396FB 96"

3" Wide Height

Tall, 24" Deep 24ECU364FB 641⁄2"24ECU384FB 84"24ECU387FB 87"24ECU390FB 90"24ECU393FB 93"24ECU396FB 96"24ECU3108PL* 108"24ECU3120PL* 120"

*Available in wood door styles only. – Available in Cherry, Hickory, Knotty Alder, Maple and Oak only; not available in QS Oak.

– Panels constructed from plywood; PLYBOX modification not applicable.

Vanity Base, 18" Deep18ECV332FB 32"18ECV334FB 341⁄2"

Vanity Base, 21" Deep21ECV332FB 32"21ECV334FB 341⁄2"

Desk Base, 21" Deep21ECD328FB 281⁄2"

Wall Box Column

Base, Vanity and Desk Box Column

Tall Box Columns• Panels up to 96" high are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board;

PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Outside of end panels are finished to match door material/color.

• Matching ends available, see Section 1100.

• Unit is enclosed on top and bottom.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• Depth modification available; minimum 43⁄4", maximum 30".

• Base, tall and vanity base panels do not include recessed toe space. Top View

3⁄4" End Panels

3"

For orders in wood door styles:• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood; finish applied to

face and four edges.

• Width modification available, minimum 2".

• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

For orders in acrylic, foil, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles:• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; finished on

face, edge banded all four edges.

• Width modification not available.

• PLYBOX modification upgrades front filler and panel to plywood core.

• 108" and 120" heights not available.

Box Column Fillers

1000.152015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Box Column Fillers

3" Wide Height

Wall, 13" Deep13FECW330FB 30"13FECW333FB 33"13FECW336FB 36"13FECW339FB 39"13FECW342FB 42"13FECW348FB 48"13FECW351FB 51"13FECW354FB 54"13FECW357FB 57"13FECW360FB 60"

Base, 24" Deep 24FECB334FB 341⁄2"24FECB340FB 401⁄2"

Tall, 13" Deep 13FECU364FB 641⁄2"13FECU384FB 84"13FECU387FB 87"13FECU390FB 90"13FECU393FB 93"13FECU396FB 96"

3" Wide Height

Tall, 24" Deep 24FECU364FB 641⁄2"24FECU384FB 84"24FECU387FB 87"24FECU390FB 90"24FECU393FB 93"24FECU396FB 96"

Vanity Base, 18" Deep18FECV332FB 32"18FECV334FB 341⁄2"

Vanity Base, 21" Deep21FECV332FB 32"21FECV334FB 341⁄2"

Desk Base, 21" Deep21FECD328FB 281⁄2"

Base, Vanity and Desk Box Column

Tall Box Columns

Wall Box Column

For orders in wood door styles:• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick solid wood; finish applied to

face and four edges.

• If ordered in Highlights, end panels do not receive highlight detail.

For orders in foil door styles:• Front filler is constructed from 3⁄4" thick MDF; finished on face and

four edges.

• PLYBOX modification upgrades panels only; front filler remains MDF.

For orders in acrylic, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles:• Not available.

• Panels are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Outside of end panels are finished to match door material/color.

• Matching ends available, see Section 1100.

• Unit is enclosed on top and bottom.

• Receives 3 equally spaced flutes.

• Width modification not available.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 9" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• Depth modification available; minimum 43⁄4", maximum 30".

• Base, tall and vanity base panels do not include recessed toe space.

Top View

3⁄4" End Panels

3"

Fluted Box Column Fillers

All heights of Wall Fluted Box Columns

2"2"

All heights of Base, Vanity, Desk and Tall Fluted Box Columns

2"

61⁄2"

Flute Spacing

1000.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Box Column Fillers

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Panels are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Outside of end panels are finished to match door material/color.

• If ordered in Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

• Matching ends available, see Section 1100.

• Top and bottom of units are enclosed.

• Choice of four styles of split posts, shown at right. Include appropriate split post code when ordering.

EXAMPLE: 13WTPEC330FB, TPFL specifies fluted split post.

• Depth of split post/capital is 11⁄4" and is included in depths listed above.

• Width modification not available.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 12" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• Depth modification available; minimum overall depth is 51⁄2"; maximum overall depth is 311⁄4". Please specify box column depth and overall depth with split post/capital.

EXAMPLE: 24BTPEC334PL, MD21, overall depth 221⁄4".

Tall Box Columns

Wall Box Columns

Capital Details

Split Post Options

LARGE 77⁄8" h

SMALL31⁄2" h

Top View

11⁄4"

21⁄2"

3"

X

• Base, Tall, Vanity Base and Desk Base columns have a small capital at top and a large capital at bottom.

• Wall columns have a small capital at top and bottom.

Box Column Filler with Split Post, 3" Wide

Base, Vanity and Desk Box Columns

Wall141⁄4" Deep Height

13WTPEC330FB 30" 13WTPEC333FB 33" 13WTPEC336FB 36" 13WTPEC339FB 39" 13WTPEC342FB 42" 13WTPEC348FB 48" 13WTPEC351FB 51" 13WTPEC354FB 54" 13WTPEC357FB 57" 13WTPEC360FB 60"

Base 251⁄4" Deep Height

24BTPEC334FB 341⁄2" 24BTPEC340FB 401⁄2"

Tall141⁄4" Deep 251⁄4" Deep Height

13UTPEC364FB 24UTPEC364FB 641⁄2" 13UTPEC384FB 24UTPEC384FB 84" 13UTPEC387FB 24UTPEC387FB 87" 13UTPEC390FB 24UTPEC390FB 90" 13UTPEC393FB 24UTPEC393FB 93" 13UTPEC396FB 24UTPEC396FB 96"

Vanity Base 191⁄4" Deep 221⁄4" Deep Height

18VTPEC332FB 21VTPEC332FB 32" 18VTPEC334FB 21VTPEC334FB 341⁄2"

Desk Base 221⁄4" Deep Height

21DTPEC328FB 281⁄2" RopeTPROP

FlutedTPFL

PlainTPPN

ReededTPRED

1000.172015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Box Column Fillers

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Panels are constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board; PLYBOX modification available to upgrade to plywood core.

• Outside of end panels are finished to match door material/color.

• If ordered in Highlights, end panels do not receive highlight detail.

• Matching ends available, see Section 1100.

• Enclosed top and bottom.

• Face of columns are 2" wide. Capital portion extends 7⁄8" beyond face.

• Column with scooped toe space available for base, tall, vanity base and desk applications. Designed to allow 1⁄4" thick toe-kick material to die into inside of scooped side.

Capital/Spool and Plain Split

Post Column with Scooped Toe

Available for Base, Tall, Vanity and Desk Columns

41⁄2"21⁄2"

Box Column Filler with Plain Split Post, Capital/Spool Assembly, 2" Wide

23⁄4"Small Capital/

Spool Assembly

21⁄8"

21⁄8"

53⁄8"

11⁄4"

13⁄4"2"

Plain Split Post

Large Capital/ Spool Assembly

Small Capital/Spool assembly is used on bottom for Scooped

Toe Columns

Face Elevation

Wall

137⁄8" Deep Height

13WTPEC230FB 30" 13WTPEC233FB 33" 13WTPEC236FB 36" 13WTPEC239FB 39" 13WTPEC242FB 42" 13WTPEC248FB 48" 13WTPEC251FB 51" 13WTPEC254FB 54" 13WTPEC257FB 57" 13WTPEC260FB 60"

Base

247⁄8" Deep Height

Full Height Toe/Capital

24BTPEC234FB 341⁄2" 24BTPEC240FB 401⁄2"

Scooped Toe

24BTPEC234STFB 341⁄2" 24BTPEC240STFB 401⁄2"

Tall

137⁄8" Deep 247⁄8" Deep Height

Full Height Toe/Capital

13UTPEC264FB 24UTPEC264FB 641⁄2" 13UTPEC284FB 24UTPEC284FB 84" 13UTPEC287FB 24UTPEC287FB 87" 13UTPEC290FB 24UTPEC290FB 90" 13UTPEC293FB 24UTPEC293FB 93" 13UTPEC296FB 24UTPEC296FB 96"

Scooped Toe

13UTPEC264STFB 24UTPEC264STFB 641⁄2" 13UTPEC284STFB 24UTPEC284STFB 84" 13UTPEC287STFB 24UTPEC287STFB 87" 13UTPEC290STFB 24UTPEC290STFB 90" 13UTPEC293STFB 24UTPEC293STFB 93" 13UTPEC296STFB 24UTPEC296STFB 96"

Vanity Base

187⁄8" Deep 217⁄8" Deep Height

Full Height Toe/Capital

18VTPEC232FB 21VTPEC232FB 32" 18VTPEC234FB 21VTPEC234FB 341⁄2"

Scooped Toe

18VTPEC232STFB 21VTPEC232STFB 32" 18VTPEC234STFB 21VTPEC234STFB 341⁄2"

Desk Base

217⁄8" Deep Height

Full Height Toe/Capital

21DTPEC228FB 281⁄2"

Scooped Toe

21DTPEC228STFB 281⁄2"

7⁄8"

2"

Top View

Base, Vanity and Desk Box Column Tall Box Columns

• Wall columns receive small capital/spool at top and bottom.

• Base, tall, vanity and desk columns receive small capital/spool at top and large capital/spool at bottom.

• Columns with scooped toe receive small capital/spool at top and bottom.

• Columns 641⁄2" high and greater receive one additional spool in center vertical position.

• Width modification not available.

• Height modification available. Minimum height is 15" for walls, 24" for bases, vanities and desks and 481⁄4" for talls.

• Depth modification available; minimum overall depth is 51⁄2" and maximum overall depth is 307⁄8". Please specify box column depth and overall depth including capital portion.

EXAMPLE: 24BTPEC234FB, MD21, overall depth 217⁄8".

Wall Box Column

Dimensions may vary slightly.

1000.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Deluxe Wall and Base Panels

Deluxe Panels• 3⁄4" thick material with stile and rail construction to match specified door style.

• Outside edge profiles of panels are square.

• Please specify width based on parameters shown in illustrations. EXAMPLE: 4DWP36, width60.5625 specifies four panels, 609⁄16" wide x 36" high. Widths can be specified to nearest 1⁄16" increment in decimal format (up to four decimal places).

• Height modifications (MH) can be specified in 1⁄4" increments and must be applied to larger size and reduced. For deluxe wall panels 481⁄4"- 60" high and deluxe tall panels width cannot exceed 48". Custom quote is not available to exceed this rule.

• Insert panel(s) and inside edge profile will match specified door style.

• Mitered wood door styles are constructed with French cut mitered stiles/rails. This construction method consists of inside profile being mitered (approximately 13⁄16") while rest of construction is mortise and tenon. Inside profile/insert panel will maintain details of specified mitered door style.

• Deluxe panels for door styles with applied molding will be constructed with applied molding detail.

• Deluxe panels for arch door styles will match their coordinating base door styles.

• Not available in Bella, Eaton, Gibson, Leighton and Pike’s Peak door styles.

84"- 96"

5 Panels1 Panel

12"-24" 24"- 48"

2 Panels

48"- 60"

3 Panels

60"- 84"

4 Panels

84"- 96"

5 Panels1 Panel

12"-24" 24"- 48"

2 Panels

48"- 60"

3 Panels

60"- 84"

4 Panels

Deluxe Base Panels

• Finished on face, top and vertical edges; matching finished interior modification available to finish bottom edge and back of panel.

• Height modification does not affect bottom rail.

• Minimum height 24", maximum 48".

• Two to five panel styles are available in wood door styles only.

Deluxe Wall Panels

• Finished on face, top, bottom and vertical edges; matching finished interior modification available to finish back of panel.

• Top and bottom rails are equal height.

• Minimum height 12", maximum 60".

• Two to five panel styles are available in wood door styles only.

1 Panel 2 Panels 3 Panels 4 Panels 5 Panels Height

1DWP15 2DWP15 3DWP15 4DWP15 5DWP15 15" 1DWP30 2DWP30 3DWP30 4DWP30 5DWP30 30" 1DWP33 2DWP33 3DWP33 4DWP33 5DWP33 33" 1DWP36 2DWP36 3DWP36 4DWP36 5DWP36 36" 1DWP39 2DWP39 3DWP39 4DWP39 5DWP39 39" 1DWP42 2DWP42 3DWP42 4DWP42 5DWP42 42" 1DWP51 2DWP51 51" 1DWP57 2DWP57 57" 1DWP60 2DWP60 60"

1 Panel 2 Panels 3 Panels 4 Panels 5 Panels Height

1DBP34 2DBP34 3DBP34 4DBP34 5DBP34 341⁄2" 1DBP40 2DBP40 3DBP40 4DBP40 5DBP40 401⁄2" 1DBP42 2DBP42 3DBP42 4DBP42 5DBP42 42" 1DBP48 2DBP48 3DBP48 4DBP48 5DBP48 48"

See individual door information in Section 200 for availability and dimensional details for installing trim, corbels or counter support brackets on stiles/rails of deluxe panels.

1000.192015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Deluxe Tall Panels

1 Panel 2 Panels 3 Panels Height

■ 1DTP64 ■ 2DTP64 ■ 3DTP64 641⁄2"■ 1DTP84 ■ 2DTP84 ■ 3DTP84 84"■ 1DTP87 ■ 2DTP87 ■ 3DTP87 87"■ 1DTP90 ■ 2DTP90 ■ 3DTP90 90"■ 1DTP93 ■ 2DTP93 ■ 3DTP93 93"■ 1DTP96 ■ 2DTP96 ■ 3DTP96 96"

Deluxe Panels (continued)

Deluxe Tall Panels

• See previous page for deluxe panel information.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Finished on face, top and vertical edges; matching finished interior modification available to finish bottom edge and back of panel.

• Height modification does not affect bottom rail.

• Minimum height 481⁄4", maximum 96".

1 Panel 2 Panels 3 Panels

12"-24" 24"- 48" 48"

Page Examples from Section 200

200.62 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

200DOORS AND FINISHES Potter’s Mill with Center Panel Options

Stile/Rail Detail

Flat (FP)

Veneer flat center panel.

Potter’s Mill (Wood)

PRICE GROUPS

Wood Species

Center Panel Options

Flat Reverse Raised

Raised Beaded

Cherry 6 9 9 10

Hickory 4 7 7 8

Knotty Alder* 6 9 9 10

Maple 4 8 8 9

Oak 4 7 7 8

QS Oak — — — —

*Knots may be in locations that affect placement of decorative hardware.

Construction Details

• Solid wood door frame with mortise and tenon assembly.

Center Panel Options

Solid wood raised center panel.

Stile/Rail Detail

Raised (RP)

Stile/Rail Detail

Reverse Raised (RR)

Solid wood reverse raised center panel; exterior maintains flat

center panel appearance.

Stile/Rail Detail

Beaded (BP)

Solid wood beaded center panel.

200.632015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

200DOORS AND FINISHESPotter’s Mill with Center Panel Options

MEDIUM61⁄4"– 75⁄8" high,21⁄4" stiles, 15⁄8" rails

SLAB Up to 57⁄16" high

Drawer Front Rules – Shaded Art Shows Top Drawer Styling

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

LARGE711⁄16" high and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails

SMALL51⁄2"– 63⁄16" high,21⁄4" stiles, 11⁄4" rails

Decorative Door Availability

See Section 1100 for details.

FIVE PIECE DRAWER FRONTS

Center Panel Grain DIrection

Flat Vertical

Reverse Raised Horizontal

Raised Horizontal

Beaded Vertical

Door Rules – Shaded Art Shows Typical Door Styling

• Doors in all center panel types have vertical grain direction.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

TALLDoors over 54" high, center horizontal rail

Specifications for Deluxe Panels – See Section 1000

• Dimensions given are "flat surface width" of stile/rail for corbel or trim placement.

• See Section 1000 for panel configuration and size information. Two panel configuration shown.

Center Panel Varies – Raised Center Panel Shown

63⁄4"

21⁄4" 21⁄8"

Wall Deluxe Panel (DWP)

Base Deluxe Panel (DBP) Tall Deluxe Panel (DTP)

Panel Profile Detail Center Panel Varies

MUL MP MS, MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOLDecorative Inserts Aluminum

SLAB Up to 63⁄16" wide

MEDIUM77⁄16" – 75⁄8" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 21⁄4" rails, raised center panel

LARGE711⁄16" wide and greater, 21⁄4" stiles and rails, raised center panel

SMALL61⁄4" – 73⁄8" wide, 21⁄8" stiles, 21⁄4" rails, flat reverse raised center panel

21⁄4"

21⁄4" 21⁄8"

21⁄4"

21⁄4" 21⁄8"

21⁄4"

DESIGN NOTE

Stile and rail dimensions listed on this page apply to all center panel options; however, center panels will match your order selection (raised center panel shown).

21⁄4"

63⁄4"

Deluxe Panel Availability and Dimensional Information

1000.20 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Appliance Front Panels

Appliance Panel – Plain• Panel thickness is 1⁄4".

• Grain runs vertical with height of panel.

• Panel is finished on face only.

• Include specific dimensions to nearest 1⁄16".

• RFP panel configuration is an example only. Other configurations available.

• If ordered in Highlights, these panels do not receive highlight detail.

CFP Compactor DFP Dishwasher RFP Refrigerator

Appliance Panel – Raised• Available in wood raised panel door

styles only.

• Features raised panel design with beveled edges, as shown in edge profile detail.

• Panel is finished on face only.

• Include specific dimensions to nearest 1⁄16".

• Maximum size of RRFP individual panel is 24" wide x 70" high.

• RRFP panel configuration is an example only. Other configurations available.

RCFP Compactor RDFP Dishwasher RRFP Refrigerator

MAX.341⁄2"

MAX.24"

MAX.96"

MAX.48"

9⁄16" thick

Edge Profile Detail

Compactor1 Panel Only

MAX.341⁄2"

MAX.24"

DishwasherUp to 2 Panels

RefrigeratorUp to 4 Panels

Compactor1 Panel Only

MAX.341⁄2"

MAX.24"

DishwasherUp to 2 Panels MAX.

96"

MAX.48"

RefrigeratorUp to 4 Panels

MAX.341⁄2"

MAX.24"

Compactor

DCFP

• Includes door (to match order) attached to 1⁄4" thick panel.

Dishwasher

DDFP

• Top Panel includes door (to match order) attached to 1⁄4" thick panel. Bottom panel is 1⁄4" thick, with grain running vertical.

• Maximum height is overall height of both panels.

Decorative Appliance Front Panel• When ordering this product, the Appliance Panel Order Form must be

completed and submitted with order.• Include specific dimensions to nearest 1⁄16".

1 Panel Only

MAX.341⁄2"

MAX.24"

Up to 2 Panels

MAX.341⁄2"

MAX.24"

Dish Drawer Width Height

DDFPSD2418 up to 24" up to 18" DDFPSD3018 241⁄16"–30" up to 18" DDFPSD3618 301⁄16"–36" up to 18"

• Includes drawer front (to match order) attached to 1⁄4" thick panel.

• For double dish drawer appliance, order two panels.

• Cut-outs for control panels to be field cut; please take drawer front styling into consideration, see individual door style information in Section 200 for details.

MAX.18"

MAX.36"

1000.212015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Appliance Front Panels

Up to 36" Wide 361⁄16" to 42" Wide 421⁄16" to 48" Wide Height

DRFP3672 DRFPL3672 DRFP4272 DRFPL4272 DRFP4872 DRFPL4872 Up to 72"

DRFP3684 DRFPL3684 DRFP4284 DRFPL4284 DRFP4884 DRFPL4884 From 721⁄16" to 84"

DRFP3696 DRFPL3696 DRFP4296 DRFPL4296 DRFP4896 DRFPL4896 From 841⁄16" to 96"

DRFP3672

5"

20"

44"

69"

351⁄2"

Configuration Examples

Decorative Appliance Front Panel (continued)

Refrigerator

• Consists of doors and/or drawer fronts attached to 1⁄4" thick backer panels. Up to four panels may be included. Arrangement may vary; maximum width and height applicable to overall combination.

• SKU is determined by overall width and height of panels within configuration of appliance. As shown in examples, overall width of panels are 351⁄2" and overall height of three panels is 69" requiring SKU choice of DRFP3672 or DRFPL3672.

DRFPL3672

DRFP• DRFP SKUs may include multiple doors applied to backer panel;

quantity of doors varies.

• If width of door exceeds 24", two doors will be applied.

• If height of door exceeds 60", two doors will be applied.

• If width of door exceeds 24" and height exceeds 60", four doors will be applied.

DRFPL• Available in wood door styles only.

• DRFPL SKUs receive one door per backer panel.

• Doors may include multiple panels; dependent on door style.

Configuration Examples

5"

20"

44"

69"

351⁄2"

Drawer front applied to backer panel

Two doors applied to backer panel

Two doors applied to backer panel

Drawer front applied to backer panel

One door with two center panels applied to backer panel

One door with two center panels applied to backer panel

End View End View

1000.22 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Deluxe Panels for Sub-Zero Refrigeration

Model No. 632, 642

SZ632 SZ642

Model No. 650

SZ650

Model No. 561

SZ561

Model No. 601F and 601R

SZ601F SZ601R

Model No. 611

SZ611

Sub-Zero Panels• Illustration represents panel quantity and layout for specified Sub-Zero appliance.

• Each panel consists of:

– 1⁄4" thick backer panel – 1⁄8" thick spacer panel – Doors and/or drawer fronts attached to spacer panel

• Sub-Zero panel SKUs intended for overlay installation only, please submit Custom Quote Request for flush inset or framed applications.

• Sub-Zero model number listed coordinates with SKU.

• Modifications not available.

Door (3⁄4" thick)

Appliance Door

1⁄8" thick Spacer Panel

1⁄4" thick Backer Panel

Profile – Panel Applied to Sub-Zero Appliance

Model No. 685, 695

SZ685 SZ695

1000.232015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Deluxe Panels for Sub-Zero Refrigeration

Model No. 700TC, 700TCI, 700TF, 700TFI, 700TR

SZ700TC SZ700TCI SZ700TF SZ700TFI SZ700TR

• Orders in arch, acrylic, foil, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles receive two doors pocket screwed together; all other styles receive a single door (may be multiple panels).

• Includes two drawer fronts.

Model No. 700BF, 700BFI, 700BR

SZ700BF SZ700BFI SZ700BR

• Includes two drawer fronts.

Sub-Zero Panels • Illustration represents

panel quantity and layout for specified Sub-Zero appliance.

• Each panel consists of:

– 1⁄4" thick backer panel

– 1⁄8" thick spacer panel

– Doors and/or drawer fronts attached to spacer panel

• Sub-Zero panel SKUs intended for overlay installation only, please submit Custom Quote Request for flush inset or framed applications.

• Sub-Zero model number listed coordinates with SKU.

• Modifications not available.

Door (3⁄4" thick)

Appliance Door

1⁄8" thick Spacer Panel

1⁄4" thick Backer Panel

Profile – Panel Applied to Sub-Zero Appliance Sub-Zero Panels• Illustration represents panel quantity and layout for specified Sub-Zero

appliance.

• Sub-Zero model number listed coordinates with SKU.

• Modifications not available.

Model No. 736TR, 736TC

SZ736TR SZ736TC

• Orders in arch, acylic, foil, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles receive two doors pocket screwed together; all other styles receive a single door (may be multiple panels).

• Includes two drawer fronts.

Model No. BI-30U, BI-36U

SZBI-30U SZBI-36U

• Orders in arch, acylic, foil, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles receive two doors pocket screwed together; all other styles receive a single door (may be multiple panels).

Model No. BI-42S, BI-48S

SZBI-42S SZBI-48S

• Some door styles may receive multiple panel doors.

Model No. BI-36F, BI-36R

SZBI-36R SZBI-36F

• Orders in arch, acylic, foil, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles receive two doors pocket screwed together; all other styles receive a single door (may be multiple panels).

1000.24 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1000FILLERS, PANELS, COLUMNS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Wood Tops

Add modification of clipped corner(s). Available with 3" or 6" clips only. Simple sketch with exact location of clip(s) must accompany order.

WTC1 One Corner Clipped WTC2 Two Corners Clipped WTC3 Three Corners Clipped WTC4 Four Corners Clipped

Wood Tops • Available in wood door styles only.

• Designed to be used for shelving, wood tops, vertical partitions, etc.

• All panels are finished top and bottom sides. Specify location of finished edges by SKU selection below, all remaining edges will not be finished.

• If ordered with Highlights, panel does not receive highlight detail. Profiles noted with * do not receive highlight detail.

• Not intended for applications with consistent exposure to water, such as a counter for a vessel bowl.

3⁄4" x 25" deep x 48" wide(This size indicated by symbol)

3⁄4" x 48" deep x 96" wide(This size indicated by symbol)

3⁄4" x 48" deep x 48" wide(This size indicated by symbol)

3⁄4" x 25" deep x 96" wide(This size indicated by symbol)

STEP 1 Select Panel Size (4 sizes)

STEP 5 Clipped Corners (optional)

X

X = 3"x 3"

or 6"x 6"

Top View

X

STEP 2 Select Placement of Finished Edges –See top view above

Finished FRONT EDGE Only

PNLE342548F PNLE342596F PNLE344848F PNLE344896F

Finished FRONT and BOTH ENDS

PNLE342548FLR PNLE342596FLR PNLE344848FLR

PNLE344896FLR

Finished FRONT, BACK and ONE END, Reversible

PNLE342548FB1E PNLE342596FB1E PNLE344848FB1E

PNLE344896FB1E

Finished FRONT and RIGHT END

PNLE342548FR PNLE342596FR PNLE344848FR

PNLE344896FR

Finished FRONT and LEFT END

PNLE342548FL PNLE342596FL PNLE344848FL PNLE344896FL

Finished FRONT and BACK

PNLE342548FB PNLE342596FB PNLE344848FB PNLE344896FB

Finished FRONT, BACK and BOTH ENDS

PNLE342548FB2E PNLE342596FB2E PNLE344848FB2E

PNLE344896FB2E

Grain

BACK

FRONT

LEFT

RIGH

T

Top Viewof a Panel

ECE1*Eased Profile,Top Only

ECE2*Eased Profile,Top & Bottom

ECBN1*Bullnose Profile, Top Only

ECWF2Waterfall Profile,Top & Bottom

ECB2Beaded Profile,Top & Bottom

ECT2Traditional Profile,Top & Bottom

ECT1Traditional Profile,Top Only

ECBN2*Bullnose Profile,Top & Bottom

ECWF1Waterfall Profile,Top Only

PCPSSA PCPSSB PCPSSC PCPSSD* PCPSSE*

PCPSSF PCPSSG PCPSSH

PCRPM* Rope Detail

EBND* Edgeband Detail

STEP 3 Select Molding Profile

ECCV2*Concave Profile

ECAST2Astragal Profile

PCPSSJ PCPSSK*

PCPSSL* PCPSSM

• Indicate molding profile selection after listing panel selection. EXAMPLE: PNLE342548FLR, ECBN2.• For orders in Quartersawn Oak, gray triangle indicates position of the quarter cut.• All EC moldings are 3⁄4" wide x 11⁄2" high; PC moldings are 3⁄4" wide x 3⁄4" high.

• Specify width and depth, include final dimensions (including molding).

EXAMPLE: PNLE342548FLR, ECBN2 width36.25, depth21.00 specifies 361⁄4" wide x 21" deep.

• Panel may be reduced in size. Order will not be processed where size is larger than original panel SKU.

• Minimum size 6" x 6".

• No additional charge for this option.

STEP 4 Cut to Size (optional)

Grain

Grain

Top

Bottom

Unfinished Edges

Unfinished Edges

PNLE342548FL, ECE1

Panel finished front and left end with ECE1 molding

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1100.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS Modification Index

MODIFICATION CODE PAGE MODIFICATION CODE PAGE

DIMENSIONALCabinet Dimension MW, MD, MH 1100.4

CONSTRUCTION MODIFICATIONSWhite Melamine Case Option WHTCS 1100.5

All Plywood Construction PLYBOX 1100.5

HINGE MODIFICATIONSDowngrade Hinge HNGNSC 1100.5

DRAWER/ROLL-OUT TRAY GUIDE AND INTIVO MODSDowngrade to Full Extension DRWFXD, SOSFXD 1100.6

Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close DRWHD, SOSHD, INTDRWHD, INTSOSHD

1100.6

Intivo Drawer and Roll-Out Tray INTDRWG, INTSOS_W

1100.7

DECORATIVE DOOR OPTIONSDecorative Door Style Availability Chart 1100.8

Steps to Determine Decorative Door Code 1100.9

Deco

rativ

e Do

or In

sert

Opt

ions

Prepared for Glass NON 1100.10

Clear Beveled Glass BEV 1100.10

Art Glass LEB, LED, LEE, LEF 1100.10

Mirror STD, EPC, PTN, GNM

1100.11

Textured Glass NVR, VRT, NHR, HRZ, CRS, SDY, GLR, FRS, WTR, RIN, MTX, BRD

1100.11

Glass Door (Clear Glass) DG, PDG 1100.12

Bellagio Aluminum Door (Clear Glass) ADA, SDA, BDA, PADA, PSDA, PBDA

1100.13

Carlton Aluminum Door (Clear Glass) ADC, SDC, BDC, PADC, PSDC, PBDC

1100.14

Catania Aluminum Door (Clear Glass) ADD, SDD, BDD, PADD, PSDD, PBDD

1100.15

Alum

inum

Doo

r Ins

ert O

ptio

ns Prepared for Glass NON 1100.13-15

Textured Glass Inserts TVRT, THRZ, TFRS 1100.13-15

Brava Aluminum Door (Backpainted Glass) ADE, SDE, BDE, PADE, PSDE, PBDE

1100.16

DECORATIVE DOOR OPTIONS (cont)Mullion Door Profile Chart 1100.17

Traditional Mullion Door MUL, PMUL 1100.18

Prairie Mullion Door MP, PMP, MAC, PMAC

1100.19

Mission Mullion Door MS, PMS, MK, PMK 1100.20

Eclipse Mullion Door CMUL, PCMUL 1100.21

Chi Mullion Door XMUL, PXMUL 1100.22

Canterbury Mullion Door MCB, PMCB 1100.23

Polaris Mullion Door MPOL, PMPOL 1100.24

Transom Light Mullion Door MTSM, PMTSM 1100.25

FINISHED OPTIONSFinished Top/Bottom FCT, FCB 1100.26

Matching Finished Interior FI 1100.26

Finished Back FFB, FFBT 1100.26

END TREATMENTSFinished Ends FE, FET 1100.26

Matching End FHME, FHMET,FHMEDD, FHMEDDT

1100.27

END PANEL OPTIONSExtend End Panel Back EPB 1100.28

Extend End Panel Down EPD 1100.29

VALANCE AND LIGHTING OPTIONSChange Valance CV__ 1100.30

Light Valance Prep Modification LVP 1100.30

Light Valance Molding LVM 1100.30

FLOOR OPTIONSAdd Intermediate Floor AIRF 1100.31

Move Intermediate Floor MIRF 1100.31

TOE SPACE OPTIONSToe Space Leg Leveler System TSLLV 1100.32

Toe Space Removed TSR 1100.32

Toe Space Added (Wall Cabinets)

TSA 1100.32

Toe Kick Shipped Loose TKL 1100.32

Toe Space Added to Side or Back RTS 1100.33

Flush Toe and Valance Toe Moldings See Section 800 1100.33

Toe Kick Drawer TKD 1100.33

Universal Access Toe UA9 1100.33

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1100.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Modification Index

MODIFICATION CODE PAGE

INTERIOR OPTIONSWainscot Interior Back of Cabinet WCI 1100.34

Omit Shelf Hole Drilling NSH 1100.34

BOX OPTIONSCabinet Box Only BOXO, BWDF 1100.35

Pipe Chase PCM 1100.35

DOOR AND FRONT OPTIONSInvert Face of Tall Cabinet UINV 1100.36

Frame and Door FFD 1100.36

DOOR/DRAWER OPTIONSSlab Drawer Front SLAB, SLABT 1100.36

Two Drawer/Drawer Front WTD 1100.36

Shallow Top Drawer SHDWR 1100.36

INSTALLED ACCESSORIESRoll-Out Tray ISOS, DDSOS 1100.37

Bin Storage IBIN, IBINDDSOS 1100.38

Bin Lids and Replacement Cont BIN, BIN_LID 1100.39

Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Organizer IDO, IDOD 1100.40

Peg Board Drawer Organization IPEG 1100.41

Deep Drawer Divider System I__DD 1100.41

Bread Box BBI 1100.42

Stainless Steel Tilt-Down Tray ISSTL/R/B 1100.42

Tray Divider TDW 1100.42

Partition TDWPART 1100.42

Tiered Cutlery Divider ITCD 1100.43

Sink Base or Base Door Organizer SBDOM 1100.44

Base Door Organizer IDORG 1100.44

Sink Caddy ICADDY 1100.44

Message Center MCO 1100.45

Charging Station UCCSM 1100.45

SHELF OPTIONSAdd-A-Shelf ASHF 1100.46

Shelf Edge Profile SHF 1100.46

Glass Shelving IGS 1100.46

APPLIANCE CUT-OUTSCut-Out OCM, DOCM, TOCM 1100.47

1100.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

Modify Width MW

• When reducing cabinets to 12" wide or less, the appearance of certain door styles may be affected; see Section 200 for details.

• Available on square corner cabinets; see individual cabinet specifications in Sections 300 and 400 for details.

• Minimum Width: 7" (cabinets without drawers) 9" (cabinets with drawers) 12" (cabinets with roll-out trays)

• Maximum Width: 48" (two door walls, bases and vanity bases) 48" (four door bases with full-width drawers) 54" (four door walls and four door bases with no or split drawers) 36" (two door talls, bookcases with standard shelving) 48" (bookcases with 11⁄2" thick shelf edges) 72" (vanity combination cabinets)

Modify Depth MD

For cabinets without drawers or roll-out trays:• Minimum Depth:

5" (cabinets without recessed toe) 51⁄4" (cabinets with recessed toe)

• Maximum Depth: 30"

• In addition to hanger rail, wall cabinets greater than 18" deep require support on three sides (countertop, side wall, ceiling or adjacent cabinets).

For cabinets with drawers or roll-out trays:• Available in 1⁄4" increments up to 24" deep.

• Drawer box, roll-out tray and guides will be in nearest standard 3" incremental depth when cabinet depth is modified in 1⁄4" increments. Exterior cabinet dimension will be built to depth specified.

• Drawers and roll-out trays in cabinets up to 36" wide and roll-out trays in cabinets over 36" wide with center partition receive Quiet Close guides; minimum cabinet depth 12" for drawers, 15" for roll-out trays, maximum 24"*.

• Drawers in cabinets over 36" wide and roll-out trays in cabinets over 36" wide without center partition receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides; minimum cabinet depth 21", maximum 24"*.

* To achieve a depth greater than 24" without a Custom Quote, apply extend end panel back modification (EPB); drawer box/roll-out tray remains standard depth.

Modify Height MH

Wall Cabinets• Minimum Height: 12"• Maximum Height: 60"

Base and Vanity Base Cabinets • Minimum Height: 161⁄2" (cabinets without drawers) 24" (cabinets with drawers)• Maximum Height: 48"

• On door/drawer cabinets, height adjustment is applied to door section.

• Height specifications for drawer base cabinets:

– One drawer base cabinets: minimum 11", maximum 221⁄2". – Two drawer base cabinets*: minimum 16", maximum 341⁄2". – Three drawer base cabinets* limited to 281⁄2", 32" or 341⁄2" heights. – Four drawer base cabinets* cannot be altered with this modification.

* Customized heights available; submit Custom Quote Request for approval of specifications and to obtain pricing.

641⁄2" High Cabinets • Minimum Height: 481⁄4"

• Maximum Height: 641⁄2"

Tall Cabinets • Minimum Height: 72"

• Maximum Height: 96"

• Height adjustment is applied to upper door section.

• Unfinished toe base shipped separately on cabinets 901⁄4" high and greater.

Tall Accessories• Minimum Height: 481⁄4"

• Maximum Height: 96"

Cabinet Dimensional Modifications (MW, MD, MH)NEW! Dimensional modifications are now available at no charge.

To modify cabinet dimensions, choose from following and apply to cabinet code:

• ONE direction – apply MW, MH or MD in 2020.

• TWO directions – apply MW + MH, MW + MD or MH + MD in 2020.

• THREE directions – apply MW + MH + MD in 2020.

• Use next larger or largest standard item available and add modification; see details this page for specific parameters.

• Specify overall finished dimension. EXAMPLE: W1830, MH29.50.

• Cabinets can be modified in 1⁄4" increments in decimal format; specify overall finished dimension(s) to the nearest 1⁄4". Doors, drawer fronts and openings will be modified to coordinate with new dimension.

• See general specifications of each cabinet type below, exceptions noted by individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual.

Dimensional Modifications

DESIGN NOTE

If using MH in conjunction with toe space modifications, see order specifications on page 1100.32.

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1100.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONSConstruction and Hinge Modifications

All Plywood Construction OptionThis modification upgrades cabinet construction from furniture board material to plywood.

• Includes end panels, tops, bottoms, backs, shelving and stretchers.

• Panel components will be upgraded to a plywood core.

UPDATE:

– For orders specifying PLYBOX and maple cabinet cases, cabinets will receive plywood end panels with maple natural interior and unfinished maple exteriors.

– For orders specifying PLYBOX and white melamine cabinet cases (WHTCS), cabinets will receive white melamine on the interior and exterior of the plywood end panels.

• Specify finished options as required in design for specific cabinetry components to match door color/material (finished ends, tops, bottoms, interior and back).

• Cabinets that include matching finished interior maintain matching finished interior.

• Also applicable to some shelf kits (Section 900), fillers and panels (Section 1000 and 1200); see individual specifications for availability.

• Drawer/roll-out tray guides remain standard; modifications available.

• We reserve the right to utilize plywood with engineered material in the core; see plywood information in Section 100 for further details.

PLYBOX List price + 16%

Top View - Furniture Board Top View - Plywood

White Melamine Case OptionOur standard cabinet case is now natural maple melamine. This modification upgrades the standard maple melamine cabinet case construction to white melamine.

• Includes end panels, tops, bottoms, backs and shelving.

• Components remain furniture board unless PLYBOX modification applied.

• Specify finished options as required in design for specific cabinetry components to match door color/material (finished ends, tops, bottoms, interior and back).

• Cabinets that include matching finished interior maintain matching finished interior.

• Also applicable to some shelf kits and panels, see Section 900 and 1000 for details.

• Drawer/roll-out tray guides remain standard; modifications available.

• This modification is available at no charge.

WHTCS

Downgrade Hinge

This modification downgrades Quiet Close hinges to non-Quiet Close hinges for a reduction in price.

• Priced per door.

• Not available on blind corner cabinets.

• Opening angle may be decreased slightly in some instances; see Section 1200 for hinge detail.

HNGNSC

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

1100.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Guide Modifications

Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Guide ModificationsStandard* drawer and roll-out tray hardware is Quiet Close which consists of ball-bearing mechanics, full-extension operation, undermount installation and 90 lb. weight capacity. Positive-close feature prevents drawers/roll-out trays from bouncing back open. An additional feature is a quiet close operation that controls closure in a smooth uniform manner and prevents slamming. This operation begins approximately 2" from cabinet front when closing drawers or roll-out trays. Drawer box and roll-out trays are adjustable both in/out and up/down.*Certain cabinets include Heavy Duty Quiet Close, see individual cabinet specifications throughout this manual for details.

Downgrade to Full Extension

This modification replaces standard hardware (Quiet Close) as described above with Full Extension hardware. Full Extension has all the features of Quiet Close except quiet close operation and box adjustability.

• Not available on cabinets less than 15" deep or cabinets that include Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides as standard.

• Not available on Intivo drawers/roll-out trays.

• Receives reduction in price per drawer/roll-out tray.

• 75 lb weight capacity.

Drawers Specify quantity per cabinet/kit; required on all drawers within cabinet.

__DRWFXD

Roll-Out TraysSpecify quantity per cabinet/kit; not required on all roll-out trays within cabinet/kit.

__SOSFXD

Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close

This modification replaces standard hardware (Quiet Close) with Heavy Duty Quiet Close.

• Inclusive of the features of Quiet Close, including "quiet close", Heavy Duty Quiet Close upgrades weight capacity of drawer from 90 lbs. to 135 lbs.

• Available on 21"– 24" deep cabinets only.

• See Intivo options on next page.

Drawers Specify quantity per cabinet/kit. Required on all drawers within cabinet.

__DRWHD

Roll-Out TraysSpecify quantity per cabinet/kit; not required on all roll-out trays within cabinet/kit.

__SOSHD

Intivo DrawersSpecify quantity per cabinet/kit. Required on all drawers within cabinet.

Must use in conjunction with INTDRWG modification, see next page.

__INTDRWHD

Intivo Roll-Out TraysSpecify quantity per cabinet/kit; not required on all roll-out trays within cabinet/kit. Must use in conjunction with INTSOS modification, see next page.

__INTSOSHD

Standard Guide Chart

Drawers and roll-out trays in cabinets up to 36" wide and roll-out trays in cabinets over 36" wide with center partition:

Min Depth: 12" drawers / 15" roll-out trays

Max Depth: 24"*

Guide: Quiet Close

Drawers in cabinets over 36" wide and roll-out trays in cabinets over 36" wide without center partition:

Min Depth: 21"

Max Depth: 24"*

Guide: Heavy Duty Quiet Close

* To achieve a depth greater than 24" without a Custom Quote, apply extend end panel back modification (EPB); end panels of cabinet can be modified to a maximum of 30" in 1⁄4" increments. Drawer box/roll-out tray remains standard depth.

Full Extension guides - 75 lb. weight capacity.

Quiet Close guides - 90 lb. weight capacity.

Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides - 135 lb. weight capacity.

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1100.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

Gray Intivo Drawer/Roll-Out Tray ModificationThis modification changes the original hardwood drawer/roll-out tray to an Intivo drawer/roll-out tray.

• Intivo drawers feature gray metal sides and gray melamine back/bottom; available in three heights, see Drawer Box Height Information in Section 100 for details.

• Intivo roll-out trays feature gray metal sides/front and gray melamine back/bottom; available in two heights, see below.

• Sides and guides are integrated offering self-closing, silent operation with no maintenance.

• Quiet Close guides are included on drawers and roll-out trays in cabinets up to 36" wide and on roll-out trays in cabinets over 36" wide with center partition. Minimum cabinet depth 18", maximum 24". Heavy Duty upgrade is available on 21" – 24" deep cabinets (INTDRWHD, INTSOSHD); see previous page.

• Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides are included on drawers and full-width roll-out trays for cabinets over 36" wide; downgrade options are not available and depth modifications are limited to 21"– 24".

• Intivo Roll-Out Tray options are applicable to cabinets including roll-out trays, cabinets including installed roll-out tray modification (ISOS) or roll-out tray kits.

Roll-Out Trays

Specify quantity per cabinet/kit. Not required on all roll-out trays within cabinet/kit.

35⁄16" High 81⁄8" High

__INTSOS3G __INTSOS8G

Drawers

Specify quantity per cabinet/kit. Required on all drawers within cabinet.

__INTDRWG

Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Intivo Modifications

211⁄16" or 35⁄16"

81⁄8"

35⁄16"

81⁄8"

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

1100.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS Decorative Door Options

Decorative Door Availability by Door Style

† Door styles with expanded M3 profile must use MAC codes. See details on page 1100.19.

*Door Style Exceptions• Bella: Transom (MTSM) mullions available in Straight-Grain Red Oak and MDF only; not available in other premium veneers. Decorative inserts not

available in Reconstituted Heartwood or Whitewood; available in all other premium veneers.

• Eaton/Leighton: Tradition mullion (MUL) not available in high gloss foil.

• Hudson Falls: Center stile is removed on MK mullion doors.

• Windwood: All decorative inserts available, except beveled (BEV).

Mullion Door Style

Decorative Inserts

Aluminum Doors

TraditionalMUL

PrairieMP

PrairieMAC†

MissionMS, MK

EclipseCMUL

ChiXMUL

CanterburyMCB

PolarisMPOL

TransomMTSM

Bahamas

Bella*

Brookhill

Caledon

Calistoga

Dana Pointe

Devonshire

Eaton*

Fenwick

Gibson

Hudson Falls*

Leighton*

Lincoln

Loxley

Madison

Mission

Park Place

Pike’s Peak

Potter’s Mill

Providence

Sonoma

Valencia

Venice

Victoria

Wakefield

Wattsburg

Windwood*

Winterberry

DESIGN NOTE

Contact Customer Care to confirm availability on small doors; minimums vary by door style.

1100.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

STEP 1: Choose Code for Decorative DoorCode choice indicates:

• Decorative Door Type

• Location

• Level

Decorative Door Type• Choose from Glass Doors, Aluminum Doors or Mullion Doors; all include

clear glass. EXCEPTION: Brava aluminum door includes backpainted glass.

• See following pages for decorative door codes.

• Confirm decorative door availability by door style on previous page or individual door style pages in Section 200.

Location• Location refers to where the decorative door options are to be applied;

front or peninsula side of cabinet.

• Multiple locations may be specified.

Level• Level refers to horizontal location of decorative doors, starting from top of cabinet going

down (1, 2, or 3), see drawings.

• Drawers and appliance openings are excluded in numbering of levels.

• Decorative door codes apply to all doors across a single level. EXAMPLE: W3636B, MUL1*, VRT1*, FI specifies both left and right doors receive mullions. EXCEPTION: Use level 1 codes on drawer base cabinets with glass, all drawers on cabinet with glass will be modified.

• Multiple levels may be specified. *For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level); see order entry note.

STEPS TO DETERMINE DECORATIVE DOOR CODE

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with another material. Insert SKUs include location (front/peninsula) and level as described in Step 2.

Clear Glass Door Insert Options (pages 1100.10-11)• Omit glass, door will be prepped for field installed glass (glass not included)

• Beveled Glass

• Art Glass

• Mirror

• Textured Glass

Aluminum Door Insert Options (pages 1100.13-15)• Omit glass, door will be prepped for field installed glass (glass not included)

• Textured Glass

• EXCEPTION: Brava door receives backpainted glass, insert options not applicable. See page 1100.16 for details.

Mullion Door Glass Insert Options (pages 1100.10-11)• Omit glass, door will be prepped for field installed glass (glass not

included)

• Mirror

• Textured Glass

Mullion Door with Clear Glass

• See pages 1100.18-25.

Decorative Clear Glass Door

• See page 1100.12.

OR

11 1

11

11 2

2

2

3

2Wall

Wall w/AIRF

Base BFH OCA UCS UCS w/AIRF

Appliance Opening

Cabinet Level Examples

OR

Aluminum Clear or Backpainted Glass Door

• See pages 1100.13-16.

MUL MP, MAC MS MK CMUL XMUL MCB MPOL MTSM

Level Examples – Traditional Mullion (MUL)

One Level Two Levels Three Levels

W3030B, MUL1

W3042B, AIRFT12.00, MUL1

24UCS3096B, AIRFB30.00, MUL1, MUL2, MUL3

DG AD

MERCURY ORDER ENTRY

EXAMPLE: W3636B, 2MUL1, 2VRT1, FI.

1100.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

Prepared for Glass (NON, PNON) Clear Beveled Glass* (BEV, PBEV)

Insert Options• See following page for more insert options.

* BEV, LEE and LEF glass styles not recommended for applied molding door styles; applied molding will overlap/obstruct features of glass.

Open center; glass is not included.

• Door frame is routed on backside to accept glass insert.

• Glass is not included; to be provided/installed on site.

• Clips for installing glass included.

• Available for glass door (DG), aluminum door (except Brava style) and mullion doors.

• Glass is clear safety glass (laminated or tempered) with 1" beveled edge installed into door frame.

• Maximum cabinet height is 42".

• Minimum glass panel size is 6" w x 6" h.

• Available for glass door (DG); not available for aluminum or mullion doors.

• Not available in arch door styles.

Art Glass

• Includes zinc caming and untempered glass.

• Maximum cabinet height is 42".

• Minimum glass panel sizes listed below, contact Customer Care to confirm availabilty on small doors. NOTE: Art glass in small doors may experience styling variations.

• Available for glass doors (DG); not available for aluminum or mullion doors.

Style B (LEB, PLEB)• Glass is spectrum antique.

• All sizes receive three columns and four rows of lites.

• Minimum glass panel size: 6" w x 6" h.

Style D (LED, PLED)• 3 accent glass colors: cream with light green

undertones, dark green and iridescent black.

• Minimum glass panel size: 71⁄8" w x 71⁄8" h.

Style E* (LEE, PLEE)• Border glass is clear seedy glass.

• Minimum glass panel size: 65⁄16" w x 65⁄16" h.

• For orders in arch door styles, glass pattern will be arch.

Style F* (LEF, PLEF)• Border glass is clear seedy glass.

• Minimum glass panel size: 81⁄4" w x 141⁄4" h.

• For orders in arch door styles, glass pattern will be arch.

1100.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Insert Options• See previous page for more insert options.

Mirror

• Epic, Patina and Gunmetal style mirror are hand made; each piece is unique with widely varying characteristics.

• Available for glass doors (DG) and mullion doors, not available for aluminum doors.

Standard (STD, PSTD)

Epic (EPC, PEPC)

Patina (PTN, PPTN)

Gunmetal (GNM, PGNM)

Reeded Vertical (VRT, PVRT)Vertical uniform pattern, slightly obscure.

Cross Reeded (CRS, PCRS)Quartile uniform pattern, slightly obscure.

Reeded Horizontal (HRZ, PHRZ)Horizontal uniform pattern, slightly obscure.

Seedy (SDY, PSDY)Antiqued, speckled pattern slightly obscure.

Frosted (FRS, PFRS)Back of glass is acid-etched for white opacity.

Glacier (GLR, PGLR)Variated ‘ice’ like pattern, mostly clear.

Water (WTR, PWTR)Subtle wave pattern, mostly clear.

Textured Glass

• Textured glass is safety glass (laminated or tempered) installed into door frame.

• Smooth side of glass is facing out, may be reversed in field.

• Available for glass door (DG) and mullion doors. See page 1100.13-15 for Textured Glass options for aluminum doors.

Broad Stripe (BRD, PBRD)Textured wide stripes with narrow clear strips, slightly obscure.

Rain (RIN, PRIN)Vertical variated pattern, slightly obscure.

Matrix (MTX, PMTX)Dot matrix, slightly obscure

Narrow Vertical Reeded (NVR, PNVR)Narrow vertical uniform pattern, slightly obscure.

Narrow Horizontal Reeded (NHR, PNHR)Narrow horizontal uniform pattern, slightly obscure.

Decorative Door Options

1100.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

Glass Door (Clear Glass Standard)Modification replaces center panel of door style with clear glass.

• Clear glass insert is safety glass (laminated or tempered).

• Not available in Gibson or Pike’s Peak door styles.

• For orders in Premium Veneer or Thermofoil slab door styles (Bella, Eaton and Leighton), doors receive 33⁄8" stiles and rails. Take this into consideration when ordering this option on small doors.

• Center stile is removed on Hudson Falls door style.

• Doors over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door style pages in Section 200 for details.

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

DG1 PDG1 1DG2 PDG2 2

DG3 3

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, DG1 specifies cabinet with two glass doors.

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with beveled glass, art glass, mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, DG1, VRT1 specifies both doors of cabinet will receive vertical reeded inserts.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Beveled Glass

Art Glass MirrorLevel

Style B Style D Style E Style F Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 BEV1 LEB1 LED1 LEE1 LEF1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1 NON2 BEV2 LEB2 LED2 LEE2 LEF2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2 NON3 BEV3 LEB3 LED3 LEE3 LEF3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1 NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2 NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Beveled Glass

Art Glass MirrorLevel

Style B Style D Style E Style F Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PBEV1 PLEB1 PLED1 PLEE1 PLEF1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1 PNON2 PBEV2 PLEB2 PLED2 PLEE2 PLEF2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1 PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

1100.132015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

Bellagio Aluminum Door (Clear Glass Standard)This option allows you to upgrade from a standard door to a mitered aluminum extruded door with glass insert.

• Available for orders in all door styles.

• Doors are 13⁄16" thick.

• Available in aluminum, brushed stainless steel or oil rubbed bronze finish, choose appropriate modification code.

• Includes tempered, clear glass; glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass, see modification codes below.

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, ADA1 specifies cabinet with two Bellagio doors in aluminum finish with clear glass installed.

Front Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

ADA1 SDA1 BDA1 1 ADA2 SDA2 BDA2 2 ADA3 SDA3 BDA3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

PADA1 PSDA1 PBDA1 1 PADA2 PSDA2 PBDA2 2

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass, see

modification codes below.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, SDA1, THRZ1 specifies cabinet with two Bellagio doors in brushed stainless steel finish with horizontal reeded glass installed.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Vertical Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Frosted Level

NON1 TVRT1 THRZ1 TFRS1 1

NON2 TVRT2 THRZ2 TFRS2 2

NON3 TVRT3 THRZ3 TFRS3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Vertical Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Frosted Level

PNON1 PTVRT1 PTHRZ1 PTFRS1 1

PNON2 PTVRT2 PTHRZ2 PTFRS2 2

Textured Glass Options

• Textured glass is safety glass (tempered).

• Smooth side of textured glass is facing out, may be reversed in field.

Reeded Vertical (TVRT, PTVRT)

Reeded Horizontal (THRZ, PTHRZ)

Frosted (TFRS, PTFRS)

21⁄8"

• Knobs/pulls to be field installed; not available factory installed.

• Knobs/pulls must be placed a minimum of 21⁄4" from edge of door; centered on stile/rail.

Prepared for Glass Inserts (NON, PNON)

• Glass is not included; to be provided/installed on site.

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

Knob/Pull Placement

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

If adding aluminum doors to lift door wall cabinets, consider ordering Automated Drive cabinets so decorative hardware is not needed.

Door Examples (shown with brushed stainless steel finish)

Vertical Reeded Glass Horizontal Reeded Glass Frosted Glass

1100.14 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Carlton Aluminum Door (Clear Glass Standard)This option allows you to upgrade from a standard door to a mitered aluminum extruded door with glass insert.

• Available for orders in all door styles.

• Doors are 13⁄16" thick.

• Available in aluminum, brushed stainless steel or oil rubbed bronze finish, choose appropriate modification code.

• Includes tempered, clear glass; glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass, see modification codes below.

Door Examples

Oil Rubbed Bronze with Frosted Glass

Brushed Stainless Steel with Clear Glass

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, ADC1 specifies cabinet with two Carlton doors in aluminum finish with clear glass installed.

Front Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

ADC1 SDC1 BDC1 1 ADC2 SDC2 BDC2 2 ADC3 SDC3 BDC3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

PADC1 PSDC1 PBDC1 1 PADC2 PSDC2 PBDC2 2

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass, see

modification codes below.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, SDC1, THRZ1 specifies cabinet with two Carlton doors in brushed stainless steel finish with horizontal reeded glass installed.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Vertical Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Frosted Level

NON1 TVRT1 THRZ1 TFRS1 1

NON2 TVRT2 THRZ2 TFRS2 2

NON3 TVRT3 THRZ3 TFRS3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Vertical Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Frosted Level

PNON1 PTVRT1 PTHRZ1 PTFRS1 1

PNON2 PTVRT2 PTHRZ2 PTFRS2 2

Textured Glass Options

• Textured glass is safety glass (tempered).

• Smooth side of textured glass is facing out, may be reversed in field.

Reeded Vertical (TVRT, PTVRT)

Reeded Horizontal (THRZ, PTHRZ)

Frosted (TFRS, PTFRS)

23⁄4"

• Knobs/pulls to be field installed; not available factory installed.

• Knobs/pulls must be placed a minimum of 21⁄4" from edge of door; centered on stile/rail.

Prepared for Glass Inserts (NON, PNON)

• Glass is not included; to be provided/installed on site.

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

Knob/Pull Placement

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

If adding aluminum doors to lift door wall cabinets, consider ordering Automated Drive cabinets so decorative hardware is not needed.

Decorative Door Options

Aluminum with Horizontal Reeded Glass

1100.152015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

Catania Aluminum Door (Clear Glass Standard)This option allows you to upgrade from a standard door to a mitered aluminum extruded door with glass insert.

• Available for orders in all door styles.

• Doors are 13⁄16" thick.

• Available in aluminum, brushed stainless steel or oil rubbed bronze finish, choose appropriate modification code.

• Includes tempered, clear glass; glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass, see modification codes below.

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, ADD1 specifies cabinet with two Catania doors in aluminum finish with clear glass installed.

Front Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

ADD1 SDD1 BDD1 1 ADD2 SDD2 BDD2 2 ADD3 SDD3 BDD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

PADD1 PSDD1 PBDD1 1 PADD2 PSDD2 PBDD2 2

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass, see

modification codes below.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, SDD1, THRZ1 specifies cabinet with two Catania doors in brushed stainless steel finish with horizontal reeded glass installed.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Vertical Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Frosted Level

NON1 TVRT1 THRZ1 TFRS1 1

NON2 TVRT2 THRZ2 TFRS2 2

NON3 TVRT3 THRZ3 TFRS3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

Vertical Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Frosted Level

PNON1 PTVRT1 PTHRZ1 PTFRS1 1

PNON2 PTVRT2 PTHRZ2 PTFRS2 2

Knob or pull installation on face of Catania door is not available due to construction of door; however, an aluminum finger pull is available for field installation, see HW-P242 in Section 900.

Prepared for Glass Inserts (NON, PNON)

• Glass is not included; to be provided/installed on site.

Knob/Pull Information

Door Examples

Oil Rubbed Bronze with Frosted Glass

Brushed Stainless Steel with Frosted Glass

Aluminum with Vertical Reeded Glass

Textured Glass Options

• Textured glass is safety glass (tempered).

• Smooth side of textured glass is facing out, may be reversed in field.

Reeded Vertical (TVRT, PTVRT)

Reeded Horizontal (THRZ, PTHRZ)

Frosted (TFRS, PTFRS)

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

If adding aluminum doors to lift door wall cabinets, consider ordering Automated Drive cabinets so decorative hardware is not needed.

21⁄8"

1100.16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

Brava Aluminum Door This option allows you to upgrade from a standard door to a mitered aluminum extruded door with backpainted tempered glass panel permanently applied to front of frame.

• Available for orders in all door styles.

• Doors are 13⁄16" thick.

• Available in aluminum, brushed stainless steel or oil rubbed bronze finish, choose appropriate modification code.

Backpainted Glass• Available in gloss or matte finishes, see below for color availability.

• High quality, environmentally friendly, water-based glass coating system.

• Smooth flat furniture quality finish on painted side of glass.

• Low-iron clear (gloss finish) glass in 4mm thickness; low-iron acid etch (matte finish) glass in 4mm thickness.

Door Examples – shown with Aluminum Finger Pull

Stainless with White Matte Glass

Aluminum with Black Gloss Glass

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Front Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

ADE1 SDE1 BDE1 1 ADE2 SDE2 BDE2 2 ADE3 SDE3 BDE3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Aluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

PADE1 PSDE1 PBDE1 1 PADE2 PSDE2 PBDE2 2

STEP 2: Choose Backpainted Glass Color (Required)EXAMPLE: W3030B, SDE1, BLKG1 specifies cabinet with two Brava doors in brushed stainless steel finish with black gloss backpainted glass.

Front Side of Cabinet

Gloss OptionsLevel

White Gloss Sand Gloss Mocha Gloss Charcoal Gloss Black Gloss

WHTG1 SNDG1 MCHG1 CRCG1 BLKG1 1

WHTG2 SNDG2 MCHG2 CRCG2 BLKG2 2

WHTG3 SNDG3 MCHG3 CRCG3 BLKG3 3

Matte OptionsLevel

White Matte Sand Matte Mocha Matte Charcoal Matte Black Matte

WHTM1 SNDM1 MCHM1 CRCM1 BLKM1 1

WHTM2 SNDM2 MCHM2 CRCM2 BLKM2 2

WHTM3 SNDM3 MCHM3 CRCM3 BLKM3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Gloss OptionsLevel

White Gloss Sand Gloss Mocha Gloss Charcoal Gloss Black Gloss PWHTG1 PSNDG1 PMCHG1 PCRCG1 PBLKG1 1

PWHTG2 PSNDG2 PMCHG2 PCRCG2 PBLKG2 2

Matte OptionsLevel

White Matte Sand Matte Mocha Matte Charcoal Matte Black Matte

PWHTM1 PSNDM1 PMCHM1 PCRCM1 PBLKM1 1

PWHTM2 PSNDM2 PMCHM2 PCRCM2 PBLKM2 2

Knob or pull installation on face of Brava door is not available due to construction of door; however, an aluminum finger pull is available for field installation, see HW-P242 in Section 900.

Knob/Pull Placement

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

If adding aluminum doors to lift door wall cabinets, consider ordering Automated Drive cabinets so decorative hardware is not needed.

Decorative Door Options

Oil Rubbed Bronze with Sand Matte Glass

Door Profile

Aluminum door frame

Backpainted glass panel 21⁄8"

21⁄32

"

13⁄16

"

Backpainted Glass Edge Profile

Flat Edge Polish

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1100.172015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

M12 Profile

3⁄4"

M2 Profile

5⁄8"

3⁄8"

M3 Profile††

3⁄4"

M11 Profile

1"

M9 Profile

15⁄8"

M15 Profile

11⁄4"

M24 Profile

1"

M25 Profile

7⁄8"

M13 Profile

11⁄2"

M22 Profile

11⁄4"

M23 Profile

3⁄4"

M20† Profile

1⁄2" or 11⁄4"

M14 Profile

11⁄4"

End Profile Drawings of Mullions for Specified Door StylesDoor Style Mullion Profile

Bahamas M3Bella* M20†

Brookhill M2Caledon M21Calistoga M9Dana Pointe M2 / M3††

Eaton* M22Fenwick M23Hudson Falls* M3Leighton* M22Lincoln M21Madison M11Mission M3Park Place M2 / M3††

Potter’s Mill M3Providence M15 / M3††

Sonoma M3Valencia M12Venice M14Victoria M13Windwood M2Winterberry M25

†MUL = 1⁄2", MTSM = 11⁄4".††Prairie Mullion door styles with the expanded M3 profile must use MAC SKUs. See Design Note for MAC Profile information.

*Door Style Exceptions• Bella: Transom (MTSM) mullions available in

Straight-Grain Red Oak and MDF only; not available in other premium veneers.

• Eaton/Leighton: Tradition mullion (MUL) not available in high gloss foil.

• Hudson Falls: Center stile is removed on MK mullion doors.

Mullion Doors

• See individual door style pages in Section 200 for mullion door appearance by door style.

• Mullion doors include clear safety glass (laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• See chart/drawings below for mullion profile by door style.

Decorative Door Options

M21 Profile

1⁄2"

DESIGN NOTE

Prairie mullion doors (MAC) receive inside profile and mullion shown for orders in all door styles; however, outside profile will match door style chosen.

1100.18 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

Traditional Mullion Door (Clear Glass Standard)• Traditional mullion doors feature multiple lites and clear safety glass (laminated or tempered);

clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• For orders in Thermofoil slab door styles (Eaton and Leighton), doors receive 33⁄8" stiles and rails. Take this into consideration when ordering this option on small doors. NOTE: Not available in Eaton/Leighton gloss foil.

• Contact Customer Care to confirm availability on small doors; minimums vary by door style.

• Doors over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door style pages in Section 200 for details.

• See pages 1100.8 and 1100.17 for door style availability and additional information.

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Front Side Peninsula Side of Cabinet of Cabinet Level

MUL1 PMUL1 1 MUL2 PMUL2 2 MUL3 3

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

Up to 251⁄2" high

From 259⁄16" to 351⁄2" high

From 359⁄16" to 54" high

From 541⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

WOOD DOOR STYLE EXAMPLES

Non-Mitered Door Styles(Heights listed are door heights)

Up to 251⁄2" high

From 259⁄16" to 351⁄2" high

From 359⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

WOOD DOOR STYLE EXAMPLES

Mitered Door Styles(Heights listed are door heights)

Up to 2315⁄16" high

From 24" to 3015⁄16" high

From 31" to 4015⁄16" high

From 41" to 613⁄8" high

THERMOFOIL DOOR STYLE EXAMPLES

(Heights listed are door heights)

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

1100.192015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

MP1 PMP1 1 MP2 PMP2 2 MP3 3

Expanded Profile (M3)

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

MAC1 PMAC1 1 MAC2 PMAC2 2 MAC3 3

Prairie Mullion Door (Clear Glass Standard)• Prairie mullion doors include solid wood dividers and clear safety glass

(laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Contact Customer Care to confirm availability on small doors; minimums vary by door style.

• Doors over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door style pages in Section 200 for details.

• See pages 1100.8 and 1100.17 for door style availability and additional information. Select door styles available with an alternative profile (M3), reference chart on page 1100.17 and see MAC information below.

3⁄4"

M3 Profile

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Standard ProfileMullion profile varies by door style, see page 1100.17 for details.

Less than 40" high

From 40" to 54" high

From 541⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

PRAIRIE MULLION DOOR EXAMPLES Narrow Doors* – One Vertical Wood Divider(Heights listed are door heights)

Standard Doors* – Two Vertical Wood Dividers(Heights listed are door heights)

Less than 40" high

From 40" to 54" high

From 541⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

Expanded Profile (M3)

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

*Receipt of one or two vertical wood dividers varies by door style chosen and cabinet width. Contact Customer Care on cabinets 15" wide or less to confirm vertical wood divider quantity.

1100.20 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS Decorative Door Options

Wood or Glass Lower Panel

Up to 1115⁄16" wide

12"-1415⁄16" wide

15"-197⁄16" wide 191⁄2"- 231⁄2" wide

MISSION MULLION DOOR EXAMPLES No Lower Panel

Up to 1115⁄16" wide

12"-1415⁄16" wide

15"-197⁄16" wide 191⁄2"- 231⁄2" wide

Available with wood lower panel (MS) or glass (MK)

Grid height varies by door height

Mission Mullion Door (Clear Glass Standard)• Mission mullion doors include solid wood dividers and clear safety

glass (laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Receipt of doors with no lower panel versus wood or glass lower panel varies by cabinet height/door style chosen, see examples at right. Contact Customer Care on cabinets less than 21" high to confirm mission mullion type you will receive.

• Doors with no lower panel: – Grid/glass height varies by door height. – Applicable to both wood and glass lower panel codes below.

• Doors with wood or glass lower panel: – Specify appropriate code below to receive wood or glass lower panels. – Upper grid section will be 6" high or 9" high, see right for details.

• See pages 1100.8 and 1100.17 for door style availability and additional information.

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Mission Mullion Door with Wood Lower Panel (MS)

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

MS1 PMS1 1 MS2 PMS2 2 MS3 3

Mission Mullion Door with Glass Lower Panel (MK)

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

MK1 PMK1 1 MK2 PMK2 2 MK3 3

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or Textured Glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of CabinetOmit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of CabinetOmit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

6" high grids on doors up to 357⁄8" high; 9" high on doors over 357⁄8" high.

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1100.212015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

Eclipse Mullion Door (Clear Glass Standard)• Eclipse mullion doors include wood dividers in back to back "C"

patterns and clear safety glass (laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror. Pattern varies per door width and height, see drawings.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Contact Customer Care to confirm availability on small doors; minimums vary by door style.

• Doors over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door style pages in Section 200 for details.

• See pages 1100.8 and 1100.17 for door style availability and additional information.

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

CMUL1 PCMUL1 1 CMUL2 PCMUL2 2 CMUL3 3

From 541⁄16"to 561⁄8" high

From 291⁄2"to 54" high

Up to 297⁄16" high

From 563⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

ECLIPSE MULLION DOOR EXAMPLES Up to 231⁄2" Wide (Heights listed are door heights)

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

1100.22 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Decorative Door Options

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

CHI MULLION DOOR EXAMPLESUp to 231⁄2"Wide(Heights listed are door heights)

Chi Mullion Door (Clear Glass Standard)• Chi mullion doors include wood dividers in an "X" pattern and clear

safety glass (laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Contact Customer Care to confirm availability on small doors; minimums vary by door style.

• Doors over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door style pages in Section 200 for details.

• See pages 1100.8 and 1100.17 for door style availability and additional information.

Up to 54" high From 541⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

XMUL1 PXMUL1 1 XMUL2 PXMUL2 2 XMUL3 3

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

1100.232015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

Canterbury Mullion Door (Clear Glass Standard)• Canterbury mullion doors include wood dividers in an arch pattern

and clear safety glass (laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Contact Customer Care to confirm availability on small doors; minimums vary by door style.

• Doors over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door style pages in Section 200 for details.

• See pages 1100.8 and 1100.17 for door style availability and additional information.

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

MCB1 PMCB1 1 MCB2 PMCB2 2 MCB3 3

CANTERBURY MULLION DOOR EXAMPLESUp to 231⁄2" wide(Heights listed are door heights)

Up to 54" high From 541⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

Decorative Door Options

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

1100.24 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

Polaris Mullion Door (Clear Glass Standard)• Polaris mullion doors include wood dividers with circular center grid

and clear safety glass (laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Contact Customer Care to confirm availability on small doors; minimums vary by door style.

• Doors over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door style pages in Section 200 for details.

• See pages 1100.8 and 1100.17 for door style availability and additional information.

POLARIS MULLION DOOR EXAMPLESUp to 231⁄2" wide(Heights listed are door heights)

Up to 54" high From 541⁄16" to 613⁄8" high

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

MPOL1 PMPOL1 1 MPOL2 PMPOL2 2 MPOL3 3

Decorative Door Options

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

1100.252015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

STEP 2: Choose Insert (Optional)• Clear glass may be omitted or replaced with mirror or textured glass. See details on pages 1100.10-11.

Front Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal NON1 STD1 EPC1 PTN1 GNM1 1

NON2 STD2 EPC2 PTN2 GNM2 2

NON3 STD3 EPC3 PTN3 GNM3 3

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

NVR1 VRT1 NHR1 HRZ1 CRS1 SDY1 GLR1 FRS1 WTR1 RIN1 MTX1 BRD1 1

NVR2 VRT2 NHR2 HRZ2 CRS2 SDY2 GLR2 FRS2 WTR2 RIN2 MTX2 BRD2 2

NVR3 VRT3 NHR3 HRZ3 CRS3 SDY3 GLR3 FRS3 WTR3 RIN3 MTX3 BRD3 3

Peninsula Side of Cabinet

Omit Glass

MirrorLevel

Standard Epic Patina Gunmetal PNON1 PSTD1 PEPC1 PPTN1 PGNM1 1

PNON2 PSTD2 PEPC2 PPTN2 PGNM2 2

Textured Glass

LevelNarrow Vertical Reeded

Vertical Reeded

Narrow Horizontal

Reeded

Horizontal Reeded

Cross Reeded

Seedy Glacier Frosted Water Rain MatrixBroad Stripe

PNVR1 PVRT1 PNHR1 PHRZ1 PCRS1 PSDY1 PGLR1 PFRS1 PWTR1 PRIN1 PMTX1 PBRD1 1

PNVR2 PVRT2 PNHR2 PHRZ2 PCRS2 PSDY2 PGLR2 PFRS2 PWTR2 PRIN2 PMTX2 PBRD2 2

Transom Light Mullion Door – Premium Veneer Doors• Transom light mullion doors include square

or rectangular design(s) in top portion of door and clear safety glass (laminated or tempered); clear glass may be omitted or replaced with textured glass or mirror.

• Available in Bella door style in Straight-Grain Red Oak and MDF only.

• Top rail and stiles are 33⁄8" wide.

• Quantity of grids and width of grids is variable by door width, see drawings.

• Door widths over 231⁄2" wide applicable to Wall Vertical Lift, Wall Lift and Stay and Bi-fold Door cabinets.

• Minimum door width and height is 123⁄4"; minimum cabinet width and height is 127⁄8".

STEP 1: Choose Code• See page 1100.9 for details.

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

MTSM1 PMTSM1 1 MTSM2 PMTSM2 2 MTSM3 3

Decorative Door Options

ORDER ENTRY NOTE

For orders placed in Mercury prefix all codes with quantity (number of doors per level).

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

Up to 237⁄8" wide

Door Heights 141⁄2" – 61"

2315⁄16"to 273⁄16" wide 271⁄4"to 357⁄8" wide

X

6" or 9"

Door Heights 171/2" to 201⁄2" (Applicable to Wall Lift Cabinets)

11⁄4"

6" 6"

X X

33⁄8"

33⁄8"

Y

33⁄8"

33⁄8"

6" high grids on doors up to 357⁄8" high; 9" high grids on doors over 357⁄8" high.

X = varies with door width; minimum 6"

Y = varies with door height; minimum 33⁄8"

top rail and stile dimensions fixed at 33⁄8"

1100.26 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

2020 DESIGN NOTE:Due to program limitations, wall cabinets including finished top OR bottom will render with both the top and bottom finished which is incorrect. To finish both the top and bottom order FCT and FCB.

Finished Options/End Treatments

Finished Options/End TreatmentsThese modifications upgrade specified cabinet components from white melamine or natural maple melamine to material matching the door style; cabinet components not modified remain melamine material.

Matching Finished Interior

Interior and shelving will be finished to match door style.

EXCEPTIONS: Drawers, roll-out trays, wicker baskets, spice rack kits, pantry kits, lazy susan kits and installed accessories, such as waste bins, cannot be finished to match.

FI

Shaded areas indicate matching finished interior application.

Base/Vanity Base CabinetDrawer/Door

Finished Ends

Available on cabinets and accessories unless indicated otherwise.

Remember to specify finished or matching ends for any cabinetry with exposed ends.

FEL

Tall Cabinet, FCT

Wall Cabinet, FCTWall Cabinet, FCB

2020 DESIGN NOTE:Due to program limitations, cabinets including matching finished interior will render with matching finished interior AND exterior which is incorrect. To finish the exterior order FEB, FETB, FCT and FCB.

Finished Back

This modification upgrades cabinet back to 3⁄4" thick material finished to match door material/color. Grain runs vertical.

• Available on wall, base, vanity base and tall cabinets.

• Depth of cabinet does not change.

• For cabinets with pedestals (TKL modification or tall cabinets over 90" high), finished back height matches height of cabinet case excluding toe area.

Diagonal and Square Corner Cabinets (not shown)• Applicable to wall and base diagonal and square corner cabinets.

• Specify location of modification, back left, back right or both.

• Cabinet back is built with square corner, clip omitted.

FFBL Back Left FFBR Back Right FFBB Back Both

Edge Banding

Wall Cabinet

Finished Top/Bottom

FCT Applicable to Top of Wall/Tall Cabinets

FCB Applicable to Bottom of Wall Cabinets Only

Edge Banding

Wall/Base/Vanity Base/ 641⁄2" High Tall Tall

FFB FFBT

Square Foot Pricing

Square Foot Pricing

Wall/Base/Vanity Base/ 641⁄2" High Tall Tall Location

FEL FETL Left End FER FETR Right End FEB FETB Both Ends

1100.272015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

End Treatments

Matching End

This treatment consists of a single full-height door applied to a finished end panel.

EXCEPTION: Matching end on applicable tall accessories 108" high and greater will be built with two equal height doors stacked.

• Available on cabinets and accessories unless indicated otherwise.

• Minimum depth for this modification is 9"; maximum 27" for arch and mitered door styles, maximum 30" for all other door styles.

• Matching end doors on cabinets/accessories over 27" deep may receive a center vertical stile; cabinets/accessories over 54" high may receive a center horizontal rail. The addition of center stiles/rails varies by door style and size, contact Customer Care for details.

• Matching ends add 3⁄4" to the overall width of the cabinet (per side).

• Door depth matching ends extend 7⁄8" beyond front of cabinet to align with front of door. See top views below for details.

• If matching end is ordered in conjunction with extend end panel back, matching end will be full width of panel.

• If matching end is ordered in conjunction with extend end panel down, matching end will be full height of end panel.

• Matching end in arch door styles receive arch styling for walls, vanity bases and top of talls.

Base with Matching End Left

Wall Cabinet withMatching End Left Tall Oven Cabinet (OCA) with Matching End LeftTall Cabinet, 641⁄2" high (UFH) with Matching End Left

Remember to specify finished or matching ends for any cabinetry with exposed ends.

Cabinet End Panel

Full-Height Door Matching End Top View

Front of Cabinet

Functional Door

Matching End

NOTE: End panel below matching end will be finished to match door color; see gray shading. Unfinished toe base shipped separately for cabinets over 90" high.

*Doors over 54" may receive a horizontal rail/two vertical panels; see individual door pages in Section 200 for details.

Full Height Door Matching End

Wall/Base/Vanity Base/ 641⁄2" High Tall Tall Location

FHMEL FHMETL Left EndFHMER FHMETR Right EndFHMEB FHMETB Both End

*

Square Foot Pricing

Door Depth Full Height Door Matching End

Wall/Base/Vanity Base/ 641⁄2" High Tall Tall Location

FHMEDDL FHMEDDTL Left EndFHMEDDR FHMEDDTR Right EndFHMEDDB FHMEDDTB Both End

1⁄16" reveal from edge of end panel to matching end door

Cabinet End Panel

Door Depth Full Height Matching End Top View

Front of Cabinet

Functional Door

Matching End

Matching end door flush with doors on front of cabinet

FHMEL FHMEDDL

*

*

1100.28 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

End Panel Options

Backsidematches interior

Specify

30" max.

Backsidematches interior

Backsidematches interior

Specify

Specify

30" max.

30" max.

Extend End Panel Back

Modification extends end panel of cabinet back.

• Available on wall, base, tall and vanity base cabinets.

• This modification does not finish exterior of end panels, specify finished end modifications as needed for exposed ends.

• If matching end is ordered in conjunction with extend end panel back, matching end will be full width of end panel.

• Maximum depth of end panel with extension is 30".

• Square foot pricing based on square footage of extension.

Specify dimension in place of ‘__’ in code below. Dimensions available in 1⁄4" increments; specify in decimal format (2 decimal places).

EXAMPLE: W3030B, EPBL3.00 extends left end panel back 3".

EPBL__ Left End EPBR__ Right End EPBB__ Both End

Square Foot Pricing

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to select finished or matching ends for cabinets with exposed ends.

Edge banded

Edge banded

Not Edge banded

Not Edge banded

Edge banded

Not Edge banded

Not Edge banded

1100.292015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

60"maximum

Specify height:maximum extension is 18"

Specify height:extension must match toe space height

48" maximum

Base, Tall and Vanity Base Extend End Panel Down

• May be used as toe kick return.

• Can only be specified in height that matches toe kick height of cabinet (41⁄2" or 9").

• Toe space removed (TSR) modification not available in conjunction with this modification.

Extend End Panel Down

Modification increases overall height of end panel while maintaining original front height. Doors maintain their original height.

• Available on wall, base, tall and vanity base cabinets.

• Interior side of extended end panel will match standard interior of cabinet. To finish interior side of extended end panels, include matching finished interior modification.

• Interior of end panel extension will not have shelf drillings or dados.

• This modification does not finish exterior of end panels, specify finished end modifications as needed for exposed ends.

• If matching end is ordered in conjunction with extend end panel down, matching end will be full height of end panel (excluding toe kick area if applicable).

• Square foot pricing based on square footage of extension.

Specify dimension in place of ‘__’ in code below. Dimensions available in 1⁄4" increments; specify in decimal format (2 decimal places). See drawings below for available dimensions.

EXAMPLE: W3030B, EPDL15.25 specifies a 151⁄4" extension on left side. EXAMPLE: W3030B, EPDB15.00 specifies a 15" extension on both sides.

EPDL__ Left End EPDR__ Right End EPDB__ Both End

Square Foot Pricing

Wall with Extend End Panel Down

• May be used for hutch applications.

• Maximum extension is 18".

• Code for both sides: Includes extension of both end panels. Interior sides of panels will match standard interior of cabinet. If matching finished interior modification is included, back interior panel of cabinet will also be extended and finished.

DESIGN NOTE

Remember to select finished or matching ends for cabinets with exposed ends.

Edge banded

Not Edge banded

Edge banded

Not Edge banded

Not Edge banded

End Panel Options

Specify height:extension must match toe space height

96" maximum

Edge banded

Not Edge banded

DESIGN NOTE

To cap flush toe kick molding on end of a run, consider using extend end panel down and finished end modifications to achieve this look.

1100.30 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Valance and Lighting Options

Change Valance OptionThis modification allows you to choose a different valance for specified cabinet. This modification is for use on bookcase cabinets. See valance options below.

• All valances are 41⁄2" high except square valance.

• Cabinets included are: Wall/Base/Tall Bookcase Cabinets located in Section 700.

• Note width limitations indicated for specific valance styles.

• For orders in acrylic, premium veneer and textured melamine door styles, valance choice is limited to square valance; all valance styles are available for orders in thermofoil and wood door styles.

• This modification is available at no charge.

Arch Valance CVAR

Valance Height: 41⁄2" Minimum cabinet width: 18"

Scallop Valance CVSC

Valance Height: 41⁄2" Minimum cabinet width: 30"

Roman Valance CVRM

Valance Height: 41⁄2" Minimum cabinet width: 18"

Mission Arch Valance CVMS

Valance Height: 41⁄2" Minimum cabinet width: 18"

Provincial Valance CVPR

Valance Height: 41⁄2" Minimum cabinet width: 18"

Straight Valance CVST

Valance Height: 41⁄2" Minimum cabinet width: 18"

Square Valance CVSQ

Valance Height: 3"

Edge Profile of Straight Valance

BK3660 with Arch Valance Thermofoil shown

BKF3042 with Arch ValanceWood shown

Light Valance Prep ModificationThis modification moves floor of cabinet up leaving a 11⁄2" recess under cabinet.

• Light valance molding required to fill 11⁄2" recess, see below.

• Overall height of cabinet doors remain the same; doors will overhang bottom of cabinet.

• Not available on bookcase cabinets, crossmate wine storage, wine cube, wall spice drawer, pull out spice rack and wall cabinet with pull out storage.

• Not available in conjunction with toe space add (TSA) modification.

• Finish bottom (FCB) modification finishes the bottom of cabinet, the 11⁄2" inside of end panel will not be finished. To finish inside of end panels, specify matching finished interior or purchase PSA.

• If ordering decorative glass or mullion doors, the cabinet floor may be visible, depending on rail height of door style.

End panel information: • End panels will be reduced in height

and align with floor if finished ends are not specified.

• End panels will extend beyond floor of cabinet by 11⁄2" on sides which have finished end modifications specified.

• Finished end modifications recommended on end of cabinet runs in conjunction with the LVP modification.

LVP

Light Valance Molding• Available in 8’ or 10’ lengths.

• Consists of two moldings joined together at factory; shipped as one piece.

• See Section 800 for additional details.

LVM8 Available in All MaterialsLVM10 Available in Wood Only

Side View – Cabinet without finished ends specified

Cabinet Height

less 11⁄2"

StandardDoor Height

Door overhangs cabinet box 17⁄16"

Cabinets shown with finished ends and LVP

modification; end panels are extended 11⁄2" on finished end sides to capture light valance.

LVMLight Valance Molding

(field installed)

NOTE: Bottom edges of wall cabinets are edge banded.

1100.312015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Floor Options

Add Intermediate Floor

This modification adds an intermediate floor to a wall or tall cabinet to create a transom or stacked cabinet appearance without seams.

• Doors will be split at intermediate floor; modification charge includes additional door(s). EXAMPLE: CW1560, AIRFT30.00, HR • Floor is 3⁄4" thick.• Do not include toe kick dimension on AIRFB. EXAMPLE: 24UCS1596, AIRFB30.00 – floor will be

added to lower section of utility cabinet that will line up with a base full height door cabinet (base height 341⁄2" minus 41⁄2" toe kick).

• If ordered in an arch door style, upper section receives arch door(s), lower section receives coordinating square door style. EXCEPTION: Tall vanity linen cabinets receive arch door styles in all locations.

• Not available on full height metal tambour (FHTM), lift door (WLS, WVL, WBFL) and cabinets with internal accessories (WDSR).

• Modification will be considered through Custom Quote request for blind (WBC, PWBC), microwave shelf (PMW), square corner (SCW, PSCW, WODSCW), angle (WAC, DWC, W_COA, W_CIA), tall pull-out (UPS) and tall ovens (OC) cabinets.

• Replace ‘__’ with dimension required.

Move Intermediate Floor

This modification moves the intermediate floor of a tall cabinet to desired location.

EXAMPLE: 24UCS1596, HR, MIRF42.00 – floor will be moved; top portion of cabinet will line up with a 42" high wall cabinet.

• Not available on talls with drawers (UC_DB) and 641⁄2" high (UFH) cabinets. • Modification will be considered through Custom Quote request for cabinets with internal accessories (PC, UPS) and

tall ovens (OC).

MIRF__

Add/Move Intermediate Floor Modification• Specify equivalent cabinet height. Specify in decimal format (2 decimal places).

EXAMPLE: CW3060B, AIRFT18.00 – floor will be added to top portion of cabinet; will line up with an 18" high wall cabinet.

• See Section 100 for vertical dimensional information.

• Single door configurations will be hinged same direction, specify hinge location.

• Minimum equivalent cabinet height is 12", maximum 611⁄2".

• If decorative glass door modifications are desired, use code that corresponds with level required, see decorative door options this section for details. EXAMPLE: 13UCS2484B, MIRF27, MUL1 (mullion doors on top two doors).

• AIRF may be used in conjunction with MIRF on tall cabinets. Specify new location of existing rail from top of cabinet (MIRF) and specify location of additional rail (AIRFB) from bottom of cabinet.

CW1560, AIRFT30.00

96"

Standard UCS lines up with 36" high wall

611⁄2"MIRF61.50

341⁄2"Lines up with base

full-height door

MIRF12.00Lines up

with 12" high wall

AIRFB30.00Lines up with base

full-height door30"

41⁄2"

AIRFT12.00

42"

AIRFT12.00

42"

41⁄2"

24UCS1596, AIRFB30.00

24UCS1596, MIRF42.00

Available on Tall cabinets only. AIRFB__ Specify from bottom of cabinet (not including 41⁄2" toe kick dimension)

2020 DESIGN NOTE: See 2020 Catalog Manual for details on rendering issues for these modifications.

Available on Wall and Tall cabinets only.

AIRFT__ Specify from top of cabinet

DESIGN NOTE

No portion of cabinet can exceed maximum equivalent cabinet height of 611⁄2"; Custom Quote requests will be considered for heights greater than this.

DESIGN NOTE

48" – 60" high wall and diagonal wall stacked cabinets now available as standard, see Section 300 for details.

1100.32 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Toe Space Options

Toe Space RemovedThis modification removes toe kick assembly from cabinet.

• Overall height of cabinet is reduced by 41⁄2".

• If TSR modification is used with modifications in height, you must specify height including toe kick dimension and overall final dimension.

EXAMPLE: 13UCS2490B, TSR, MH89 overall height of 841⁄2".

TSR

Toe Space Added (Wall Cabinets)This modification adds toe kick assembly to a wall cabinet, increasing the overall height by 41⁄2". EXAMPLE: W3030B, TSA results in cabinet 341⁄2" high.

• When ordered in an arch door style, cabinet will be built with coordinating square door style. Refer to Section 200.

• If TSA modification is used with modifications in height, you must specify height not including toe kick and overall dimension.

EXAMPLE: 24W3615B, TSA, MH14 overall height of 181⁄2".

TSA

Toe Space Removed from Base/Vanity Base Cabinet

Toe Space Removed from Tall Cabinet

Toe Kick Shipped LooseAvailable on base, tall (90" high or less) and vanity base cabinets.

• Cabinet is built without 41⁄2" high toe space; pedestal is shipped separately for field install.

• Pedestal is 1" less width of cabinet.

• Pedestal is 33⁄4" less depth of cabinet; pedestals line up with cabinets that have factory complete toe space.

• Unfinished toe space is shipped loose on 901⁄4"– 96" tall cabinets as standard; modification TKL is not required.

TKL

Toe Space Leg Leveler SystemThis modification allows you to easily create perfectly level cabinets, regardless of the condition of floors or walls. Toe space is replaced with black plastic leveling legs and removable toe kick material (order separately).

• Cabinet side height is 41⁄2" less than specified cabinet height.

• Leveling leg sockets are installed on bottom of cabinet and adjustable legs are shipped loose for field install.

• Cabinets up to 36" wide receive 4 levelers; cabinets greater than 36" wide receive 6 levelers. Quantity of levelers for corner/angle cabinets varies based on configuration and size of cabinet.

• Toe kick material attaches to leg levelers using a clip system; see 3⁄4" thick toe kick material in Section 800 to order.

• Installed toe kick is recessed 31⁄2"; aligns with standard recess toe with 1⁄4" thick toe kick material applied.

• Leg levelers are adjustable from 35⁄8" to 57⁄8" high.

• Each leg leveler has load capacity of 400 lbs.

• Minimum cabinet depth is 9".

TSLLV

Side View

3⁄4" thick toe kick

41⁄4"

Leg Detail

3⁄4" thick finished toe kick (order separately)

31⁄2"

DESIGN NOTE

When using toe space leg leveler system, consider extending the end panel down (EPD) or adding end panels on exposed end to cap toe kick area and create a finished look.

1100.332015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

DESIGN NOTE

Flush toe and valance toe moldings available, see Section 800.

Toe Space Options

Toe Space Added to Side or BackThis modification adds recessed toe space to cabinet on the left, right, both or back sides of cabinet.

• Note additional requirements for wall cabinets.

Toe Space Added to Back Toe Space Added to Side and Back

Toe Space Added to Side

RTSL Left Side RTSR Right Side RTSB Both Sides RTSP Back Side

Wall Cabinet SpecificationsToe space added modification (TSA) must be ordered in conjunction with RTS options. EXAMPLE: W3030B, TSA, RTSL

• When ordered in an arch door style, coordinating square door style will be used. Refer to Section 200.

Diagonal and Square Corner Cabinets (not shown)

• Applicable to wall and base diagonal and square corner cabinets.

RTSL Left Front Side RTSPL Left Back Side RTSR Right Front Side RTSPR Right Back Side RTSB Both Front Sides RTSPB Both Back Sides

Toe Kick Drawer Modification• This modification installs a drawer in

recessed toe kick area of cabinet.

• Includes full extension guides; upgrades not available. Push-release mechanism installed on guide allows drawer to be opened with just a touch of drawer front.

• Drawer front is 3⁄4" thick material.

• Drawer front will project 1⁄2" beyond standard recessed toe area of adjoining cabinets with 1⁄4" thick toe kick applied.

• There is 1⁄4" clearance from bottom of drawer front to floor; guides can be adjusted up 1⁄8" for additional clearance.

• Nylon glides are attached to bottom of drawer front to prevent front from dragging on or scratching the floor.

• Minimum cabinet width 15", maximum 48". Minimum cabinet depth 18", maximum 24".

• Loose toe space modification not available in conjunction with TKD.

TKD

Toe Space Added to Back

Toe Space Added to Left Side

Toe Space Added to Both Sides

Universal Access Toe OptionThis modification changes the toe space to be 9" high x 6" deep.

Base and Vanity Base Cabinets• Cabinets will be 321⁄2" high.

• Available on standard base and vanity base cabinets only.

• Custom Quote required on drawer base cabinets.

Tall Cabinets• Upper door section height is reduced,

lower section remains standard height.

UA9

321⁄2"

6"

9"

Base/Vanity Base Cabinet

Tall Cabinet

1100.34 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Interior Options

Wainscot Interior Back of Cabinet

This modification applies 3⁄8" thick tongue and groove solid wood wainscot material to back interior of cabinet.

• Available in wood door styles only.

• Interior depth of cabinet is reduced by 3⁄8".

• Wainscot material runs vertically.

• Not available on angle, diagonal and square corner cabinets.

• IMPORTANT: This modification does not include matching finished interior option but is recommended if cabinet interior will be exposed. Some cabinetry includes matching finished interior as standard, see individual cabinet specifications for details.

Cabinet Interior Wainscot Material Finish

Natural Maple Melamine Maple NaturalWhite Melamine Maple Painted WhiteMatching Finished Interior Species matches Finish matches

door species door color

WCI

TallBase

Wall

NOTE: shelving is not pictured to show wainscot detail.

Omit Shelf Hole DrillingThis modification eliminates shelf hole drilling in end panels of specified cabinet or portion of cabinet.

• Applicable to all cabinetry that includes shelves.

• Shelves will be omitted from specified cabinet or section of cabinet.

• Interior of cabinet remains standard unless matching finished interior modification is applied (some cabinetry comes with FI standard).

• For wall and tall cabinets, SKU is determined by number of vertical openings per cabinet, see SKU listing below.

EXAMPLE 1: 24W3027B (one opening), NSHA specifies cabinet will not be drilled, shelf omitted. NSHA is also used to specify no drilling for all openings of a multi opening cabinet.

EXAMPLE 2: 24UCS3696B, AIRF (add intermediate floor), NSH2 specifies that middle of three openings will not be drilled, shelving omitted from this section.

• For base and vanity base cabinets only NSHA is available. All drilling and shelving will be omitted in door areas.

• This modification is available at no charge.

Wall and Tall Cabinets

One Opening

NSHA

Two Openings Location

NSH1 TopNSH2 BottomNSHA Top and Bottom (All)

Three Openings Location

NSH1 TopNSH2 MiddleNSH3 BottomNSHA Top, Middle and Bottom (All)

Base and Vanity Base Cabinets

NSHA

DESIGN NOTE

Did you remember to specify matching finished interior?

Square Foot Pricing

1100.352015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Box Options

W2430 with BOXO Modification

Cabinet Box Only OptionsThis modification eliminates doors and drawer fronts on cabinet.

• Internal components (drawer box, shelves, etc.) are included.

• Interior of cabinet remains standard; matching finished interior modification can be applied.

• For cabinets with valance options, please see bookcase cabinets located in Section 700.

• If applied to a peninsula cabinet, modification applies to front and peninsula side of cabinet.

• Specify one of following to determine cabinet box preparation:

– NH: no hinge drilling

– Hinge location (HL, HR, HLR, etc.): drilled for hinges on side(s) specified

• Hinges/hinge plates not included.

Box Only

Eliminates doors or doors and drawer fronts.

BOXO

Box Only with Drawer Fronts

Eliminates doors only on door/drawer cabinets.

BWDF

B39B with BWDF Modification

Pipe ChaseThis modification allows a three-sided notch to be cut into back of a wall, base, tall or vanity base cabinet.

• Include sketch with order detailing location and dimensions of pipe chase.

• Dimensions may be specified in 1⁄16" increments.

• Specify dimensions of A, B, and C as shown in examples below.

• Dimensions of A, B or C can be zero; if not zero, minimum is 21⁄4".

• If dimensions of A or C are 51⁄4" wide or greater the shelf will be cut to fit around pipe chase (see Example 1).

• If dimensions of A or C are less than 51⁄4" wide the shelf will not be cut around the pipe chase (see Example 2).

• Maximum of dimension B is 41⁄2" from front of cabinet case.

• This modification includes addition of solid top for base and vanity base cabinets.

• If pipe chase interferes with functional drawers, drawers will be eliminated. False fronts will replace functional drawers.

• This modification includes plywood case construction.

PCM

Base or Vanity Base Cabinet with Pipe Chase

Dotted lines on drawings represent shelf configuration.

Tall Cabinet with Pipe Chase

Solid Top Added

Example 1 Example 2

A C

B

13"

4"

30"

10" 6"

13"

4"

30"

4" 12"

A C

B

Wall Cabinet with Pipe Chase

1100.36 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Door, Front and Drawer Options

Frame and DoorThis modification includes 6" deep end, top and bottom panels with functional doors and/or false drawer fronts. When applying this modification to cabinets which include toe kick, please note following:

• Toe space area is excluded and height is 41⁄2" less than original cabinet height.

EXAMPLE: 13UCS2484, FFD results in overall height of 791⁄2".

• If FFD modification is used with MH, you must specify height including toe kick dimension and overall dimension.

EXAMPLE: 13UCS2484, FFD, MH81 overall height of 761⁄2".

FFD

Wall

Base/Vanity Base

Invert Tall CabinetThis modification changes front door configuration of tall cabinets (84" high and greater), by placing small door at bottom of cabinet and large door at top. Fixed shelf is built between upper and lower doors.

• Available on DUC, PC, UCS and UT tall cabinets only.

• If ordered in arch door style, large top door will be arch, small bottom door will be coordinating square door style.

• This modification is available at no charge.

UINV

Top Drawer Side ViewIntivo Drawer

Two Drawer/Drawer Front ModificationThis modification splits a single full-width drawer/drawer front into two separate drawers/drawer fronts.

• Available on wall with one drawer (WDC), base and vanity base cabinets with full width drawer/drawer fronts as standard, from 24"– 48" wide.

• Available on top drawer of three and four drawer base cabinets (3DB, 4DB), from 24" – 48" wide.

• Cabinets greater than 36" wide with WTD modification retain Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides, minimum depth 21", maximum 24". Guide downgrades and depth modifications below 21" are not available unless requested through Custom Quote.

• On cabinets with butt doors, spacing between doors will line up with spacing between drawers (see illustration).

WTD

Shallow Top Drawer ModificationThis modification replaces standard top drawer box(es) with shallow drawer box(es).

Wood Drawers – 41⁄2" high drawer box replaced with 21⁄2" high drawer box.

Intivo Drawers – 33⁄8" high drawer box replaced with 211⁄16" high drawer box. Must use in conjunction with INTDRWW modification on page 1100.7.

• Applicable to top drawers of base cabinets with 61⁄2" high drawer fronts, see dimensional specifications in Section 100.

• Not available on wall, tall or vanity base cabinets.

• Drawer guides/box follow standard for cabinet or are modified as specified on order.

• If two drawer modification is applied, SHDWR applies to both drawers.

• This modification is available at no charge.

SHDWR

Top Drawer Side ViewWood Drawer

21⁄2"

27⁄16"

211⁄16"

21⁄4"

511⁄16" 511⁄16"

511⁄16" 511⁄16"

Slab Drawer Front ModificationModification changes five piece drawer fronts of applicable styles to slab construction. See individual door style details in Section 200 for dimensional information/inclusion of five piece fronts per style.

A Custom Quote Request can be submitted for configurations other than listed below.

• Available for wood door styles only.

• NOTE: Solid wood, slab drawer fronts will expand/contract with changes in humidity. With the tight reveals of this cabinetry, it is extremely important to control humidity levels in the home. See humidity information in Section 100 for more details.

• Modification available at no charge.

SLAB Applies to entire cabinet SLABT Applies to top drawer only

3DB24, SLABT

1100.372015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Installed Accessories

Installed Roll-Out TraysThis modification installs roll-out trays in standard wall, base, tall (in top only of cabinets with internal accessories and UCS’s), desk or vanity base cabinets; some exclusions apply.

• See sections throughout this manual for cabinets that include roll-out trays.

• Roll-out trays are 31⁄2" high and are constructed of hardwood in a natural finish; deep roll-out trays and Intivo options are available, see below and page 1100.7 for details.

• Roll-out trays in cabinets up to 36" wide or over 36" wide with center partition receive Quiet Close guides; guide modifications available, see page 1100.6. Minimum cabinet depth 15", maximum 24". Roll-out trays in cabinets less than 15" deep available through Custom Quote Request only.

• Roll-out trays in cabinets over 36" wide without center partition receive Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides as standard; guide modifications not available. Minimum cabinet depth 21", maximum 24".

• Minimum cabinet width for full width roll-out tray is 12", maximum 45".

• Last two numbers in code indicate coordinating cabinet width.

• Specify quantity per cabinet. EXAMPLE: BFH30B, 3ISOS30B.

Roll-Out Tray ModificationThis modification replaces original 31⁄2" high roll-out trays with 61⁄2" high roll-out trays with scooped front.

• Applicable to cabinets including roll-out trays, cabinets with installed roll-out tray modification (ISOS) or to roll-out tray kits.

• Not applicable to Intivo roll-out trays.

• Guides remain standard; modifications available, see page 1100.6.

• Specify quantity per cabinet; modification is not required on all roll-out trays within cabinet.

EXAMPLE: BFH3640B, 4ISOS36B, 2DDSOS specifies that four roll-out trays are installed in BFH, two roll-out trays remain 31⁄2" high and two are upgraded to 61⁄2" high.

__DDSOS 61⁄2" High

Standard Roll-Out Tray is now 31⁄2" high

DDSOS61⁄2" high roll-out tray

24" Deep Wall Cabinet withRoll-Out Tray Installed

Tall Cabinet withRoll-Out Tray Installed

BFH39B, 1ISOS39D

Butt Doors

__ISOS24B __ISOS27B __ISOS30B __ISOS33B __ISOS36B __ISOS39B __ISOS42B __ISOS45B

One Door

__ISOS12 __ISOS15 __ISOS18 __ISOS21 __ISOS24

Butt Doors, Center Partition (1 Set)

__ISOS39D__ISOS42D__ISOS45D

Four Doors, Center Partition (1 Set)

__ISOS48F

1100.38 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Installed Accessories

Installed Bin Storage Bin storage system factory installed in bottom of specified drawer or 61⁄2" high roll-out tray; includes bins.

• Available in 21" and 24" cabinet depths only.

• Set on or snap on lids are available, see next page (BIN_LID).

• See drawings for available configurations for various cabinet widths.

• Some sizes receive a fixed partition and additional side storage.

• Minimum drawer width equivalent to 12" wide cabinet, maximum 36".

• Minimum roll-out tray width equivalent to 15" wide cabinet, maximum 36".

• Sizes in SKUs coordinate with cabinet width or equivalent cabinet width for combination cabinets.

• Not available on drawers with glass fronts or Intivo drawers/roll-out trays.

• Width modification not available.

21" Depth 24" Depth Configuration Configuration

IBIN12-__L/R AA AIBIN15-__L/R AA AIBIN18-__L/R CC BIBIN21-__L/R CC FIBIN24-__L/R EE CIBIN27-__L/R EE DIBIN30-__L/R FF GIBIN33-__L/R GG EIBIN36-__L/R HH E

Installed Bin Storage in Roll-Out Trays

• Specify quantity in SKU prefix.

• Available in 61⁄2" high roll-out trays only (DDSOS).

• Must specify DDSOS modification in conjunction with these modifications.

Corresponding 21" Depth 24" Depth Cabinet Width Configuration Configuration

__IBINDDSOS15 15 AA A__IBINDDSOS18 18 BB B__IBINDDSOS21 21 CC F__IBINDDSOS24 24 DD C

Corresponding 21" Depth 24" Depth Cabinet Width Configuration Configuration

__IBINDDSOS24B 24 DD C__IBINDDSOS27B 27 EE C__IBINDDSOS30B 30 FF D__IBINDDSOS33B 33 GG G__IBINDDSOS36B 36 HH E

Installed Bin Storage in Drawers

• Minimum drawer box height 61⁄2", maximum 101⁄2"; see Section 100 for drawer box height information.

• Specify location of modification by drawer position. Position determined by starting from top of cabinet going down;

EXAMPLE: 3DB top drawer would be position 1, second drawer would be position 2, etc.. Replace ‘__’ in code below with position 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

• L or R at end of code signifies location of modification in cabinets with side by side drawers/drawer stacks.

EXAMPLE: 21VSDB42 (vanity with two stacks of three drawers), IBIN12-2L specifies bin storage location in left drawer stack in middle/2nd position. Choose both L and R codes to specify modification on both sides of cabinet.

• For single drawer/drawer stack configuration, either L or R may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: 3DB36, IBIN36-3L specifies organizer in bottom drawer, may also specify 3DB36, IBIN36-3R.

One Door

Butt Doors

1100.392015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Installed Accessories

• Bins are 57⁄16" deep.

• Interior dimensions are 1" less than exterior dimensions.

Half Size 9.4 qtBIN12

Third Size 6.6 qtBIN13

Quarter Size 3.9 qtBIN14

Sixth Size 2.4 qtBIN16

101⁄4"

125⁄8"

67⁄8"

125⁄8" 101⁄4"

61⁄4" 61⁄4"

63⁄4"

Half Size Third Size Quarter Size Sixth Size

Top View

Bin Lids and Replacement Containers• Food grade plastic storage containers and lids; use in conjunction with

IBIN modification.

• Containers are included with IBIN modification, SKUs listed below are for replacement or add-on purposes.

• Lids are not included with the IBIN modification.

• Snap on lid is sealable/airtight.

Containers Set On Lid Snap On Lid Size

BIN12 BIN12LID BIN12SLID Half Size BIN13 BIN13LID BIN13SLID Third Size BIN14 BIN14LID BIN14SLID Quarter Size BIN16 BIN16LID BIN16SLID Sixth Size

Snap On Bin Lid

Set On Bin Lid

Sixth Size Container

Configurations – 24" Deep

A B C

D E

F

AA

G

CC

EE

GG

1⁄2

1⁄3

1⁄4

1⁄6

1⁄2

1⁄3

1⁄4

1⁄6

1⁄2

1⁄3

1⁄2

1⁄3

1⁄21⁄3

1⁄41⁄6

1⁄2

1⁄4

1⁄3

1⁄6

1⁄2

1⁄4

1⁄2

1⁄4

1⁄2

1⁄4

1⁄2

1⁄4

1⁄3

1⁄6

1⁄3

1⁄6

1⁄3

1⁄6

1⁄3

1⁄6

1⁄3

1⁄6

1⁄2

1⁄4

BB DD

FF

HH

Configurations – 21" Deep

1⁄4

1⁄6

1⁄2

1⁄3

1⁄2

1⁄3

1⁄4

1⁄6

1⁄2

1⁄3

1⁄2

1⁄3

1100.40 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Installed Accessories

Installed Drawer Organizer• Specify location of modification by drawer position. Position

determined by starting from top of cabinet going down.

EXAMPLE: 4DB top drawer would be position 1, second drawer would be position 2, etc.

• Specify L or R at end of code to signify location of modification in cabinets with side by side drawers/drawer stacks.

EXAMPLE: 21VSDB42 (vanity with two stacks of three drawers), IDOA2L specifies drawer organizer location in left drawer stack in middle/2nd position. Choose both L and R codes to specify modification on both sides of cabinet.

• For single drawer/drawer stack configuration, either L or R may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: 3DB36, IDOB3L specifies organizer in bottom drawer, may also specify 3DB36, IDOB3R.

• Minimum cabinet width or drawer stack equivalent width 12", maximum 48".

• Minimum drawer box height 31⁄2", maximum 101⁄2"; see Section 100 for drawer box height information.

Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Organizer ModificationModification adds organizer to specified drawer or roll-out tray, choose from style A or B.

• Constructed of hardwood in natural finish.

• Features adjustable dividers.

• Minimum cabinet depth 21", maximum 30". Depths greater than 24" deep require a Custom Quote Request.

• Not available on 21⁄2" high shallow drawers, drawer bases with glass fronts or Intivo drawers/roll-out trays.

• Kit for field install available through Custom Quote Request.

Style A Position

IDOA1__ 1 IDOA2__ 2 IDOA3__ 3 IDOA4__ 4 IDOA5__ 5

Style B Position

IDOB1__ 1 IDOB2__ 2 IDOB3__ 3 IDOB4__ 4 IDOB5__ 5

Installed Roll-Out Tray Organizer• Specify quantity in place of ‘__’ in code below.

• Must specify DDSOS modification in conjunction with IDODD modification.

Base with IDOA1 Installed Base with IDODSOSB Installed

Style A

Cabinet Width # of Dividers

12" 3121⁄4" – 36" 5 (shown)

361⁄4" – 48" 7

Style B

Cabinet Width # of Dividers

12" 5 121⁄4" – 36" 8 (shown) 361⁄4" – 48" 11

Roll-Out Style A Tray Height

__IDODSOSA 31⁄2"__IDODDSOSA 61⁄2"

Roll-Out Style B Tray Height

__IDODSOSB 31⁄2"__IDODDSOSB 61⁄2"

1100.412015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Installed Accessories

Deep Drawer Divider System• Adjustable drawer divider system installed in specified drawer.

• Metal posts fit into pre-drilled holes in front and back of drawer box. Drawer divider material is dadoed on ends and slides over metal posts.

• Pre-drilled holes are spaced approximately 21⁄2" apart.

• Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides are recommended if heavy items such as stoneware or pots and pans will be stored in drawers, see Section 100 for details.

• Available in cabinet widths 15" – 48" and depths 21" – 24".

• Divider material is 1⁄2" thick edge banded plywood.

• Minimum drawer box height 61⁄2", maximum 101⁄2"; see Section 100 for drawer box height information.

• Specify location of modification by drawer position. Position determined by starting from top of cabinet going down.

EXAMPLE: 3DB top drawer is position 1, middle drawer is position 2, etc. Fill ‘__’ in code with position 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

• Sizes in SKUs coordinate with cabinet width or equivalent cabinet width.

• L or R at end of SKU signifies location of modification in cabinets with side by side drawers/drawer stacks.

EXAMPLE: 21VSDB66B, IDD15-3L specifies a vanity with two stacks of three drawers with a deep drawer divider in the bottom drawer of the left drawer stack. Choose L and R codes to specify modification in both sides.

• For single drawer/drawer stack configuration, either L or R SKUs may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: 3DB36, IDD36-3L specifies divider in bottom drawer, may also specify 3DB36, IDD36-3R.

• Not available with Intivo options.

Peg Board Drawer Organization• Pegboard organization system factory installed in bottom of specified

drawer.

• Organize dishware, pots, pans, lids, bowls, etc.

• Heavy Duty Quiet Close guides are recommended if heavy items such as stoneware or pots and pans will be stored in drawers, see Section 100 for details.

• Available in cabinet widths 15" – 36" and depths 21" – 24".

• Includes eight peg posts, if additional posts are required see PEGPOSTKIT in Section 900.

• Pegboard organizer may also be ordered as a kit (PEGKIT) for field installation, see Section 900.

• Minimum drawer box height 61⁄2", maximum 101⁄2"; see Section 100 for drawer box height information.

• Specify location of modification by drawer position. Position determined by starting from top of cabinet going down.

EXAMPLE: 3DB top drawer is position 1, middle drawer is position 2, etc. Fill in ‘__’ in code with position 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

• L or R at end of SKU signifies location of modification in cabinets with side by side drawers/drawer stacks.

EXAMPLE: 21VSDB66B, IPEG3L specifies a vanity with two stacks of three drawers with pegboard in the bottom drawer of the left drawer stack. Choose L and R codes to specify modification in both sides.

• For single drawer/drawer stack configuration, either L or R SKUs may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: 3DB36, IPEG3L specifies pegboard in bottom drawer, may also specify 3DB36, IPEG3R.

• Not available with Intivo options.

IPEG__LIPEG__R Left Side

I15DD__LI18DD__LI21DD__LI24DD__LI27DD__LI30DD__LI33DD__LI36DD__LI39DD__LI42DD__LI45DD__LI48DD__L

Right Side

I15DD__RI18DD__RI21DD__RI24DD__RI27DD__RI30DD__RI33DD__RI36DD__RI39DD__RI42DD__RI45DD__RI48DD__R

Number of Dividers

122334456677

1100.42 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Installed Stainless Steel Tilt-Down Tray• Available in sink base or vanity sink base

cabinets with false drawer fronts.

• Trays will be a minimum of 2" less drawer front opening width to allow for hardware.

• Please reference sink base and vanity sink base cabinets in Sections 400 and 600; coordinating SKU for tray kits are listed by individual cabinets in these sections. Numbers in kit SKUs indicate actual width of stainless steel tilt-down tray; same sizes will be utilized in installed modification.

• Kits for field install can be located in Section 900 (KIT-SST).

• L, R or B at end of code signifies location of modification in cabinets with side by side drawer fronts (cabinets with two drawer front option – WTD).

• For single drawer front configuration either L or R may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: SB24B, ISSTL; may also specify SB24B, ISSTR.

• D at end of code signifes two trays will be utilized; applicable to full-width drawer fronts on 39" to 48" wide cabinets.

Installed Accessories

Installed Bread Box Accessory• Features a 5⁄8" thick solid hardwood

drawer box with a clear plexiglass lid.

• Applicable to cabinets in the following widths: 15", 18", 21", 24".

• Minimum drawer box height is 61⁄2", maximum 101⁄2"; see Section 100 for drawer box height information.

• Specify location of modification by drawer position. Position determined by starting from top of cabinet going down. For single drawer/drawer stack configuration, either L or R may be chosen.

EXAMPLE: 3DB24, BBI2L specifies Bread Box in middle drawer, may also specify BBI2R.

• Not available with Intivo options.

BBI__L/R

3DB24, BBI2L or BBI2R

Use tray divider modification in conjunction with partition modification for a unique storage solution.

Tray Divider Modification• Adjustable tray divider system

available installed in wall, base and upper portion of tall cabinets.

• Includes 1⁄2" thick plywood tray divider in natural finish, with scooped front, two wood runners/ guides and four guide pins per tray divider ordered.

• Front edge of divider is edge banded.

• Specify quantity of tray divider in SKU prefix.

EXAMPLE: 24W3027B, 4TDW specifies four dividers.

• Available for cabinet widths and heights 12"–42" and depths 12"–30".

• Cabinets greater that 33" wide include a fixed center partition.

• May be used with partition modification.• Shelves will be omitted with tray divider modification unless partition

modification is also ordered.• If matching finished interior is specified, tray dividers and runners

remain natural finish.• Kits for field install are located in Section 900 (KIT-TDW).

__TDW

Partition Modification• Adjustable partition system

installed in wall, base (door/drawer and full-height door) and upper portion of tall cabinets.

• Includes partition, four cam cleats and four locking pins.

• Partition is 3⁄4" thick plywood in natural finish. Partition is drilled for shelf holes; front edge of partition is edge banded.

• Partition may be located anywhere within width of cabinet; shelf to be cut in field once partition location is determined.

• Available for cabinet widths and heights 12" – 42" and depths 12" – 30".

• May be used with tray divider modification.

• Kits for field install are located in Section 900 (KIT-TDWPART).

TDWPART

ISSTL Left ISSTR Right ISSTB Both ISSTD Double

Side View

2"

Fixed Center Partition(cabinets greater

than 33" wide)

DESIGN NOTE

1100.432015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Installed Accessories

Installed Tiered Cutlery Divider Modification replaces specified drawer with drawer box containing two tiered cutlery divider constructed of hardwood in natural finish.

• Applicable to standard top drawer of base cabinets in following widths: 15", 18", 21" and 24".

EXAMPLE: B15, ITCD specifies tiered cutlery divider in top drawer.

• Also available in base cabinets with two drawer option in 30", 36", 42" and 48" widths, specify left, right or both drawers.

EXAMPLE: B30B, WTD, ITCDB specifies B30B with tiered cutlery dividers installed in both drawers.

• Available in 24" deep cabinets only.

• Top tier operates on specialty full extension guides; lower tier accessed by pushing top tier back into cabinet.

• See Section 400 for base cabinets with tiered cutlery divider kit installed.

• Available as kit (KIT-TCD), see Section 900 for details.

• Not available with Intivo options.

ITCD Top Drawer ITCDL Left Drawer ITCDR Right Drawer ITCDB Both Drawers

131⁄8", 161⁄8"

15", 18" Cabinet Widths

21", 24" Cabinet Widths

191⁄8", 221⁄8"

391⁄2"

41⁄2"

B18, ITCD

B48, WTD, ITCDB

1100.44 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Installed Sink Base or Base Door Organizer• Includes installation of door organizer on

specified cabinet; organizer is attached to door frame.

• Kit is constructed of hardwood in a natural finish.

• 5" deep rack with two 4" deep fixed shelves. Top shelf includes removable polymer tray which may be used to store cleaning supplies (sponges, etc.).

• Full depth shelves will be cut down to allow for clearance.

• Width modifications not available.

• Height modifications available in 1⁄4" increments; minimum 311⁄2".

• Kits for field install available, see Section 900.

Doors open beyond actual hinge allowance to show

interior details.

For Single Door CabinetsCabinet availability: B15, B18, B21, SB18, SB21.

SBDOM

For Butt Door CabinetsCabinet availability: B27B, B30B, B33B, B36B, B39B, B42B, B45B, SB27B, SB30B, SB33B, SB36B, SB39B, SB42B, SB45B.

SBDOML Left DoorSBDOMR Right Door

Installed Accessories

Installed Base Door Organizer Modification includes installation of door organizer to door frame.

• Organizer features shelves constructed of birch plywood with clear coat applied and metal side rails.

• Available on door/drawer base configurations only, not available on base cabinets with full height doors.

• Width, height and any modification that affects door size are not available in conjunction with this modification.

• Kit extend 33⁄8" into cabinet from back of door.

• Full depth shelves will be cut down to allow for clearance.

• Kits for field install available, see Section 900.

• See Section 400 for base cabinets with door organizer installed (B36BSMART, SB_BSMDORG).

For Single Door Cabinets

IDORG

For Butt Door Cabinets

IDORGL Left Door IDORGR Right Door

Available Cabinet Widths X

15, 24B, 27B 83⁄8"18, 30B, 33B 113⁄8"21, 24, 36B, 39B, 42B, 45B 143⁄8"

X

Installed Sink CaddyModification available in sink base, full height door vanity sink base and adult height vanity sink base cabinets, minimum cabinet depth 21".

• Specify appropriate code for placement in left or right side of cabinet.

• Includes chrome plated base and rack with plastic trays.

• All plastic parts are removable and dishwasher safe for easy cleaning.

• Caddy may be removed from cabinet for transport of cleaning supplies to other areas of your home.

• Caddy includes rubber feet on base to prevent marring or sliding when you set it down.

• Caddy dimensions: 103⁄16" w x 189⁄16" h x 185⁄8" d.

• Includes undermount full extension guides with features similar to Quiet Close; guides slow pull-out before final closure, creating automatic and silent closing.

• Sink caddy may be ordered as kit for field installation (KIT-CADDY), see Section 900.

• Consider plumbing location when ordering this item.

SKU Location

ICADDYL Left Side of Cabinet ICADDYR Right Side of Cabinet

1100.452015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Message CenterThis modification includes a magnetic/dry erase board applied to back of door(s), organizer section in wall cabinet and 8" deep shelves above organizer section.

• Available for standard wall cabinets, wall cabinets with drawer(s) and counter wall cabinets.

• Interior will be maple natural melamine or white melamine as specified on order; matching finished interior may be specified, interior will match door material/color.

• Interior dividers are constructed from 3⁄4" thick material.

• M inimum cabinet depth is 12"; maximum 24". If depth of cabinet is anything other than 13", the 8" deep shelves and organizer section are modified accordingly.

• Minimum cabinet height is 24"; maximum 60".

• Cabinet width availability is indicated by first two numbers of SKU. Cabinet width cannot be modified with this modification unless a Custom Quote is submitted and approved.

• See drawings below for configurations of organizer unit for various cabinet widths. Organizer Section

Magnetic/ Dry Erase

Board

Up to 30" High

MCO1230 MCO1530 MCO1830 MCO2130 MCO2430 MCO2730 MCO3030 MCO3330 MCO3630

301⁄4" to 42" High

MCO1242 MCO1542 MCO1842 MCO2142 MCO2442 MCO2742 MCO3042 MCO3342 MCO3642

421⁄4" to 60" High

MCO1260 MCO1560 MCO1860 MCO2160 MCO2460 MCO2760 MCO3060 MCO3360 MCO3660

Organizer Configurations by Cabinet Width

7"

12"

31⁄8"

12" 15" 18" 21"

24"

27" 30"6"

33"

93⁄4"

36"

101⁄2" 131⁄2" 161⁄2" 12" 63⁄4"

6"12" 12"71⁄2"

6" 12"12"

21⁄4"

9" 12"12"

7"

7"

Charging Station Modification This modification integrates a charging station into lower section of wall cabinet; allows outlets, power cords and power strips to be hidden out of sight.

• Fixed floor added to lower section of wall cabinet with opening height of 7".

• A slotted divider for cords is held in place with magnetic catches. Divider includes finger well for easy removal.

• Floor and divider are made of 3⁄4" thick solid maple in a natural finish. If matching finished interior is specified, floor and divider remain maple natural.

• Electrical openings must be determined and cut in field.

• Available on single or butt door wall cabinets and counter wall cabinets (CW).

• Available for cabinet widths 12"– 36", heights 24"– 60" and depths 12"– 30".

UCCSM

51⁄4"

Charging Station is set back 51⁄4" from edge of cabinet.

Cabinet # of Width Cord Slots

12 4 15 6 18 8 21 8 24 8 27 10 30 10 33 10 36 12

Shelf cut away to show charging station details.

71⁄2"

21⁄4"

12"24"

93⁄4"12"24"

93⁄4"

Door Hinged Right Door Hinged Left Butt Doors

21"12"63⁄4"

21⁄4"21⁄4"

4"

4"4"4"

4" 4" 4"

Door Hinged Right Door Hinged Left

7"

4"

31⁄8"

31⁄8"

Installed Accessories

1100.46 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

Shelf Options

Shelf Edge Profile OptionsThis modification changes all inclusive shelving (3⁄4" thick edge banded) to include a 11⁄2" thick profiled detail. See below for details of profile.

• Available on all cabinets and shelving (Section 900) with matching finished interior as standard or with matching finished interior modification added.

• SHFSQ2 only option for orders in acrylic, premium veneers and textured melamines.

• SHFE2 only option for orders in thermofoil.

• All options available in wood door styles.

SHFE2*1⁄8" Eased ProfileTop & bottom edges

SHFE1*1⁄8" Eased Profile Top edge

SHFWF1Waterfall Profile Top edge

SHFWF2Waterfall Profile Top & bottom edges

SHFBN1*3⁄8" Eased Profile Top edge

SHFBN2*3⁄8" Eased ProfileTop & bottom edges

SHFT1Traditional Profile Top edge

SHFT2Traditional ProfileTop & bottom edges

SHFBTBeaded Profile

SHFCV2*Concave Profile

SHFAST2Astragal Profile

SHFSQ2*Square ProfileTop & bottom edges

Add-a-Shelf Modification allows for one additional shelf to be included with standard cabinetry. Applies to cabinets which contain shelving as standard inclusion.

Plywood*

ASHFW

Furniture Board/Laminate

ASHFL

*For orders with Matching Finished Interior or PLYBOX modification.

Grain

Glass Shelving Modification

Modification replaces standard adjustable shelving to glass shelving; not applicable to cabinets with fixed shelves.

• Glass shelving is 3⁄8" thick tempered. Includes padded metal shelf clips that provide scratch-free stability.

• Original shelf quantity maintained.

• If additional glass shelf desired, use Plywood Add-a-Shelf (ASHFW) modification and include total quantity of glass shelves as prefix to glass shelf code. EXAMPLE: BK3030, ASHFW, 3IGS.

• For open/display cabinets (no doors) glass shelf modification must be applied to all shelves included.

• Minimum cabinet dimensions: 11" wide x 11" deep. Maximum cabinet dimensions: 36" wide x 24" deep.

• Minimum glass shelf size is 135⁄16" on the diagonal.

• Applicable to following angle cabinets: BTA, DBC, DW, DUC, DWC, SCW and WAC24.

• Not available on cabinets that are greater in depth than in height.

__IGS

Square Foot Pricing

*If ordered with Highlights, these profiles do not receive highlight detail.

1100.472015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTSMOD INDEX

Appliance Cut-Out Modifications

Appliance Cut-Out Modification• This modification allows customized openings for wall, base and

tall appliance cabinets as specified throughout this manual.

• Appliance cabinets include 3⁄4" thick square edge overlay panels which are attached to cabinet case with cam cleat system; panel matches door material/finish, edge banded all four edges. Panel is flush with doors/drawer fronts on cabinet. Factory appliance cut-outs in these panels will have raw edges.

• Refer to details in illustrations below for dimensional information.

• Maximum factory cut-out dimensions: – 11⁄2" less cabinet width. – 11⁄2" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is not used. – 51⁄8" less appliance overlay panel height if oven shelf kit is used. – Include A and C dimensions in maximum, see below. – See chart for panel height information.

• Oven shelf kits are included with this modification for field installation of fixed floors, one kit per opening.

• Oven shelf kits match interior of cabinet (maple natural melamine, white melamine or finished to match door color if matching finished interior modification applied). In all cases, front edge of shelf is edge banded to match door color.

• Cut-out modifications do not affect door, drawer, appliance panel size or position.

• If cabinet height is modified, height adjustment will be applied to door section of applicable cabinets. If cabinet style does not have doors, height adjustment will be applied to appliance overlay panel.

• Indicate specifications for cut-out following modification code. Refer to specific cabinet details for minimum and maximum cut-out dimensions.

EXAMPLE: OCA3690B, OCM 341⁄2" wide x 391⁄4" high.

Cabinet SKU

Appliance Overlay

Panel Height OCM DOCM TOCM

Walls BMLS 207⁄8"

BMD 201⁄16"

Bases BW_SD 231⁄4"

BW_MD 193⁄4"

BW_LD 183⁄16"

BOC 297⁄8"

Talls OCA 403⁄8"

OCC 573⁄4"

OCK 213⁄4"

OCJ 531⁄4"

Specify

A

B

A

B

C

C

Specify

Specify

Single Cut-Out Modification

OCM

EXAMPLE: BOC with OCM

Triple Cut-Out Modification

TOCM

EXAMPLE: OCJ with TOCM

Double Cut-Out Modification

DOCM

EXAMPLE: OCA with DOCM

Specify

A

B

A

B

C

Specify

Door area does not

change with cut-out mods

403⁄8"

Specify

A

A

B

B

Specify width and height of each cut-out.

• Height of dimension A will be equal; minimum 3⁄4" if oven shelf kit is not used; minimum 29⁄16" if oven shelf kit is used.

• Width of dimension B will be equal; minimum 11⁄16".

• Height of dimension C is fixed at 3".

DESIGN NOTE

Factory Appliance Cut-Out Modifications

OCM includes one opening, use for single appliance or combination appliance.

DOCM includes two openings, use for two separate appliances.

TOCM includes three openings, use for three separate appliances.

1100.48 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1100MODIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS MOD INDEX

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1200.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1200.3 Finish and Touch-Up Items, Cleaning Items

1200.4 Replacement Parts

1200.8 Specialty Door/Drawer Replacements

1200.9 Hinges/Hardware

1200.11 Drawer Guides/Parts

In This Section

1200.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Finish and Touch-up Items, Cleaning Items

Cleaning ItemsWood and Premium Veneer Door Styles – Cabinet Care Kit by Guardsman®

CCK

• Includes wood cleaner, wood polish, dusting cloth and polishing cloth.

• Materials in kit contain no wax, silicone or abrasives that can cause wax build-up on cabinet surfaces or cause softening of finish.

• Wood cleaner (spray can) safely removes dirt, smudges, fingerprints, polish build-up, kitchen grease and cooking oils.

• Wood polish (spray can) nourishes and revitalizes finish with organic and natural oils, while removing dirt, greasy film and smudges.

• Dusting cloth is specially treated, reusable, washable cotton cloth that picks up and tightly holds dust and other dry soils.

• Polishing cloth is reusable, washable cotton cloth used for application of wood cleaner and polish.

Acrylic, Textured Melamine & Thermofoil Door Styles

Touch-Up Crayon

TCR

Touch-Up Pen

TUPEN

Touch-Up Kits RKPG

• Includes Touch-Up Pen, Touch-Up Crayon and Plastic Scraper.

• Included with sink base and vanity sink base cabinets for color of that cabinet.

Finish & Touch-Up Items Shipment requests via UPS/FedEx may incur additional Hazardous Material Handling charges, which will be included on your invoice.

Wood and Premium Veneer Door Styles

Varnish Top Coat■ BOM

• Comes in aerosol can.

• Satin (silk matte) or semi-gloss (silk gloss) will be shipped based on wood species/finish chosen; see finish charts in Section 200.

Touch-Up Kits RK Standard Stain Finishes RKPG Paint, Paint/Glaze, Stain/Glaze and Specialty FInishes

• Includes Touch-Up Pen, Touch-Up Crayon and Plastic Scraper.

• Touch-up crayon not available in glaze finishes; available in base finish colors only.

• Included with sink base and vanity sink base cabinets for finish/species combination of that cabinet.

Spray Finish SPRAYFINISH

• 13 oz aerosol spray can of fast drying finish material to be used for small touch-ups.

• Approximate coverage: – Stains: 43 square feet – Paints: 21.5 square feet

• NOTE: Spray material is base stain or paint color only. Refer to touch up kit supplied in your sink base for glaze pen on applicable finishes.

• Finish availability is limited, contact Customer Care to confirm your finish is available.

Touch-Up Crayon

TCR

• Not available in glaze finishes; available in base finish colors only.

Touch-Up Pen

TUPEN

Acrylic Door Styles

ACPOLISH

• Includes 250 ml bottle of polish, applicator pad, microfiber cloth and directions.

• High gloss surfaces become more scratch resistant over the first few days after the protective film is removed.

• For best results use ACPOLISH immediately after removal of protective film. This removes any residue left behind from the protective film, seals the surface, improves scratch resistance properties and reduces static build up which minimizes appearance of dust, fingerprints and minor blemishes.

• ACPOLISH is highly concentrated and should be used sparingly.

• Apply polish in a thin layer with light pressure using the applicator. Buff off immediately with a clean microfiber cloth using vertical movements.

• In order to maintain long lasting surface protection, reapply annually.

Quart of Finish Material QTFM

• Finish material is commercial grade and requires knowledge of professional finishing techniques.

• Many of our finishes require multiple components to achieve desired look. Individual components are packaged in separate containers; material provided will be equivalent to one quart of finish.

• Top coat not included; see BOM (Varnish top coat) for top coat material or to achieve Natural finish color.

1200.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS Touch-up Items, Replacement Parts

Replacement Microwave/Oven Items• Constructed from 3⁄4" thick furniture board,

PLYBOX modification available.

• Replacement square edge appliance overlay panel; matches door material/finish, edge banded all four edges.

• Panel is pre-drilled for post of cam cleat system; cam cleat is not included.

Wall Microwave Panels

For BMLS For BMD Cabinets Cabinets 207⁄8" High 201⁄16" High Width

■ RWMLSOP24 ■ RWMDOP24 237⁄8"■ RWMLSOP27 ■ RWMDOP27 267⁄8"■ RWMLSOP30 ■ RWMDOP30 297⁄8"■ RWMLSOP33 ■ RWMDOP33 327⁄8"■ RWMLSOP36 ■ RWMDOP36 357⁄8"

Base Microwave/Oven Panels

For BW_SD For BW_MD For BW_LD For BOC Cabinets Cabinets Cabinets Cabinets 231⁄4" High 193⁄4" High 183⁄16" High 297⁄8" High Width

■ RBMOP24S ■ RBMOP24M ■ RBMOP24L ■ RBMOP24 237⁄8"■ RBMOP27S ■ RBMOP27M ■ RBMOP27L ■ RBMOP27 267⁄8"■ RBMOP30S ■ RBMOP30M ■ RBMOP30L ■ RBMOP30 297⁄8"■ RBMOP33S ■ RBMOP33M ■ RBMOP33L ■ RBMOP33 327⁄8"■ RBMOP36S ■ RBMOP36M ■ RBMOP36L ■ RBMOP36 357⁄8"

Tall Oven Panels

For OCA For OCC For OCK For OCJ Cabinets Cabinets Cabinets Cabinets 403⁄8" High 573⁄4" High 213⁄4" High 531⁄4" High Width

■ RUAMOP24 ■ RUCMOP24 ■ RUKMOP24 ■ RUJMOP24 237⁄8"■ RUAMOP27 ■ RUCMOP27 ■ RUKMOP27 ■ RUJMOP27 267⁄8"■ RUAMOP30 ■ RUCMOP30 ■ RUKMOP30 ■ RUJMOP30 297⁄8"■ RUAMOP33 ■ RUCMOP33 ■ RUKMOP33 ■ RUJMOP33 327⁄8"■ RUAMOP36 ■ RUCMOP36 ■ RUKMOP36 ■ RUJMOP36 357⁄8"

Installation Hardware for Oven Panels■ CAMPOST Cam Post• Pack of 1.

■ CAM Cam• Pack of 1.

PSA Skins/Sheet StockWidth Height

■ PSA648 6" 48"■ PSA696 6" 96"■ PSA4848 48" 48"■ PSA4896 48" 96"

• Pressure sensitive adhesive backed sheet stock; front coordinates with orders in acrylic, premium veneer, textured melamine, thermofoil and wood door styles.

• To use, remove paper backing and apply pressure.

• For orders in foil-woodgrain, premium veneer or wood door styles, grain direction follows height.

• PSA4848 and PSA4896 can be reduced in size at no charge; specify width and height. PSA will be oversized by 1⁄2" on modified dimension to allow field trimming.

Edge BandingSKU Description Width Length

■ FEBND10 Acrylic, Textured Melamine or Thermofoil 15⁄16" 10’■ EEBND10 Premium Veneer 15⁄16" 10’■ EEBND8L Premium Veneer 21⁄4" 8’■ EBND10* Wood Veneer 15⁄16" 10’

• Order SPRAY 90 separately.

*If ordered with Highlights, this item does not receive highlight detail.

Adhesive ■ SPRAYADH (was SPRAY90) • 24 oz. Can Spray Adhesive

• To be used in field application of edge banding.

■ BOND • 2 oz. Can of Adhesive + 12 oz. Can of Activator

• To be used to hold miter joints together.

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

1200.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

Sink Base Apron Overlay Panel• Replacement overlay panel for SBA cabinets

located in Section 400.

1115⁄16" High Width

■ SBAOP30 297⁄8"■ SBAOP33 327⁄8"■ SBAOP36 357⁄8"■ SBAOP39 387⁄8"■ SBAOP42 417⁄8"

Replacement Fillers & Overlay Fillers for Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out Replacement Fillers

For Wall Cabinets (WSR/WSRF) Width Height

■ REPFLRWSR630 57⁄8" 30"■ REPFLRWSR633 57⁄8" 33"■ REPFLRWSR636 57⁄8" 36"■ REPFLRWSR639 57⁄8" 39"■ REPFLRWSR642 57⁄8" 42"

For Base Cabinets (BSR/BSRF) Width Height

■ REPFLRBSR06 57⁄8" 30"

Replacement Overlay Fillers

For Wall Cabinets (WSR) For Wall Cabinets (WSRF) Plain Fluted Width Height

■ REPFLROVLWSR630 ■ REPFLROVLWSRF630 57⁄8" 297⁄8"■ REPFLROVLWSR633 ■ REPFLROVLWSRF633 57⁄8" 327⁄8"■ REPFLROVLWSR636 ■ REPFLROVLWSRF636 57⁄8" 357⁄8"■ REPFLROVLWSR639 ■ REPFLROVLWSRF639 57⁄8" 387⁄8"■ REPFLROVLWSR642 ■ REPFLROVLWSRF642 57⁄8" 427⁄8"

For Base Cabinets (BSR) For Base Cabinets (BSRF) Plain Fluted Width Height

■ REPFLROVLBSR630 ■ REPFLROVLBSRF630 57⁄8" 297⁄8"

• Replacement fillers and overlay fillers for 6" wide wall and base pull-out spice racks.

• See Sections 300 and 400 for complete wall and base pull-out spice rack (WSR, WSRF, BSR, BSRF) and Section 900 for kit SKUs (KIT-WSR & KIT-BSR).

Overlay Filler

Filler Fluted Overlay Filler

Filler

Replacement Parts

Toe Kick Drawer Hardware■ CGLIDE• Glide used on bottom of toe kick drawer

front (TKD modification).

• Two glides required per drawer.

• Pack of 4.

■ BTIPON• Guide mechanism allows drawer

to open when pushed.

• Mechanism works with Full Extension guides only.

• Pack of 2.

Leg Levelers• Constructed of black plastic.

• See toe space leg leveler modification (TSLLV) in Section 1100.

Leg

■ LEGLEVEL • 92.5mm – 150 mm high.

• Pack of 1.

Leg Top

■ LEGTOP • 15mm knock-in.

• Pack of 1.

Toe Kick Clip

■ LEGCLIP• Pack of 1.

Profile for the following door styles:

Bahamas • Brookhill • Caledon • Devonshire • Eaton Fenwick • Hudson Falls • Lincoln • Loxley • Mission Park Place • Potter’s Mill • Providence • Sonoma Valencia • Victoria • Wakefield • Wattsburg Windwood

Madison • Venice • Winterberry

Calistoga

Bella • Gibson • Pike’s Peak

Dana Pointe

Leighton

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

1200.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Replacement Parts

Bulldog Clip

■ BULLDOG• Clip used for removable wood

hoods and bin storage system.

• Pack of 4.

ClipsShelf Clips

■ CLIP12S • Silver.

• Pack of 12.

■ CLIPGLS • Shelf clip for glass shelves.

• Padded metal shelf clips provide scratch free stability.

• Pack of 12.

■ CLIPDW • Shelf clip for angle cabinets (BAC, BFH_COA,

BTA, DBC, DUC, DWC, W_COA, WAC).

• Use 5⁄8" flathead wood screws to attach shelf clip to shelf (screws not included).

• Pack of 5.

Glass Door Clips

■ GDC6• Specify glass style.• Pack of 6.

Bumper Pads ■ BP-FR• Push-in/drill-in clear bumper.

• Pack of 12.

Drill Template ■ DRILLTEMP• Universal drill template can be used to drill holes

for shallow shelves or roll-out trays, etc.

Installation Strip for DBSCB Cabinets ■ DBSCBIS• Installation strip for square corner drawer

cabinets.

• Strips included with square corner drawer cabinets; this SKU is for replacement purposes.

• Includes one installation strip; two required per cabinet.

Installation Strip

Bolts■ BOLTS Nickel Plated• To connect cabinets together in installation.

• Includes 75 connector bolts and 75 connector 3⁄4" screws.

Magnetic Latch/Catch■ MAGNETSET-SILVER • Magnetic catch and latch with four screws.

• Silver finish.

• Pack of 1.

13⁄8"

9⁄16"

1200.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Replacement Parts

Chopping Block■ CHOBLOK18■ CHOBLOK21■ CHOBLOK24

• 11⁄4" thick solid wood chopping block with rubber bumpers installed on bottom to protect counter surfaces.

• Last two numbers in code indicate coordinating cabinet width.

• Replacement chopping block for RBCB cabinets located in Section 400.

• Quantity of 1.

Bread Board■ BB15

• Replacement bread board for 3DB15BB cabinet located in Section 400.

• Features 3⁄4" thick solid wood with finished front cap.

• Specify species and color for front cap. Species substitutions: Oak for Hickory and QS Oak; Maple for Cherry and Knotty Alder.

• Quantity of 1.

Guides are separate from breadboard, order as:

■ MBBG

3⁄4"

Waste Basket

SKU Size

■ BSK-WB28QT 28 quart■ BSK-WB35QT 35 quart■ BSK-WB50QT 50 quart

• Replacement waste baskets for B_WB and BFH_WB cabinets located in Section 400, V_WB cabinets located in Section 600 and D_WB cabinets located in Section 700.

• Waste basket size indicated in last four digits of SKU.

• Quantity of 1.

Wicker Basket

■ BSK-B15WI■ BSK-B18WI

• Replacement wicker basket for B_WI cabinet located in Section 400.

• Baskets are in natural finish.

• Quantity of 1.

Mirror/HardwareBi-View

■ BVMC24M Mirror, Quantity 1■ BVMCHDW Hardware, Specify Polished Brass (POB) or Chrome (CH)

• Replacement mirror and hardware for BV2430 cabinet located in Section 600.

Tri-View

■ TVMC24M Mirror, Quantity 1■ TVMC30M Mirror, Quantity 1■ TVMC36M Mirror, Quantity 1■ TVMC48M Mirror, Quantity 1■ TVMCHDW Hardware, Specify Polished Brass (POB) or Chrome (CH)

• Replacement mirror and hardware for TV_30 cabinets located in Section 600.

Ironing Board Cover■ IB18COVER

• Replacement cover for B18IB cabinet.

• White/gray striped ironing board cover features elastic band, natural cotton material and foam backing.

• Quantity of 1.

Recycling Center Replacement Parts

BSK-25QRC Triangular Bin CANVAS-RC Canvas Bag (not shown)

• Replacement triangular bin and canvas bag for BRC24 cabinet located in Section 400.

• Quantity of 1.

Automated Drive KitAutomated Drive mechanism allows pull-out waste basket cabinets to open with a light touch of your hand, hip, knee or foot.

• Electrical information: – Electrical outlet required. – Includes Automated Drive unit, transformer and connector. – Low power consumption, approximately 3.5 kWh per year. – Drawer can be opened manually during power outages.

• Automated Drive features: – Electrical drive triggers opening signal. – Dampening function ensures pull-out closes securely regardless of force used. – Leaning protection feature prevents unintentional opening. – Auto open feature interrupted if resistance is encountered. – Integrated dripping water protection if water gets in cabinet. – Replacement mechanism for B_WBS and BFH_WBS located in Section 400. – Requires 13⁄4" space behind drawer box.

AUTODRV (was SERVOWB)

1200.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Pull-Out Work Surface for OCK

KIT-OCK24 KIT-OCK27 KIT-OCK30 KIT-OCK33 KIT-OCK36

• Includes pull-out work surface, slab drawer front and drawer guide locking devices.

• Guides not included; order separately.

• Pull-out work surface is 3⁄4" thick solid maple construction with 11⁄2" edge molding in natural finish; not intended as cutting surface.

• Numbers in code indicate coordinating cabinet width.

Break-Off Screws HSCR832

• Screws are 13⁄4" long and breakable in 1⁄4" increments to minimum of 3⁄4".

• For use with decorative hardware located in Section 900.

• 8-32 standard breakable hardware screws.

• Pack of 25.

Fast Caps CAPM Tan Plastic, Push-In, Pack of 8 CAPW White Plastic, Push-In, Pack of 8 CAPU Maple Veneer, Finished to Match Order, Peel & Stick, Pack of 26

• Caps are used to cover installation screws or exposed screws in factory applications such as matching ends.

Push-In Peel & Stick

Tambour Door and Guides• For wood doors styles only.

Straight Appliance Garage

TMBDR15 TMBDR18 TMBDR21 TMBDR24 TMBDR27 TMBDR30 TMBDR33 TMBDR36

• Replacement tambour door and guides for undercounter tambour cabinets.

• Last two digits in code represent cabinet width.

• Modify width available; minimum 12", maximum 36". Specify cabinet width.

Corner/Diagonal Appliance Garage

TMBDRDAG

• Replacement tambour door and guides for undercounter diagonal tambour cabinets.

• Modifications not available.

Square Corner Drawer Base Drawer Replacements• Includes complete drawer box and drawer

front.

Optional Modifications:

DFO - drawer front only modification – Drawer box omitted.

BOXO - drawer box only modification – Drawer fronts omitted.

Two Drawer Base

36" x 36" 39" x 39" Drawer Location

2DBSCB36DW1 2DBSCB39DW1 Top 2DBSCB36DW2 2DBSCB39DW2 Bottom

Three Drawer Base

36" x 36" 39" x 39" Drawer Location

3DBSCB36DW1 3DBSCB39DW1 Top 3DBSCB36DW2 3DBSCB39DW2 Middle 3DBSCB36DW3 3DBSCB39DW3 Bottom

Four Drawer Base

36" x 36" 39" x 39" Drawer Location

4DBSCB36DW1 4DBSCB39DW1 Top 4DBSCB36DW2 4DBSCB39DW2 Second 4DBSCB36DW3 4DBSCB39DW3 Third 4DBSCB36DW4 4DBSCB39DW4 Bottom

Replacement Parts, Specialty Door/Drawer Replacements

1200.92015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Bi-fold Hinge Kit HNG-BIFOLD

• Applicable to WBFL cabinets in Section 300.

Kits without Automated Drive

Vertical Lift HNG-WVL

• Applicable to WVL cabinets in Section 300.

KIT-WVLDAG • Applicable to WVLDAG cabinets

in Section 300.

Lift and Stay HNG-WLS

• Applicable to WLS cabinets in Section 300.

HNG-WLS-S• Applicable to BMLS cabinets in

Section 300.

Bi-fold Hinge Kit KIT-WBFLS

• Applicable to WBFLS cabinets in Section 300.

Power Supply for Automated Drive POWER

• Supplies power for up to eight Automated Drive cabinets.

• Includes power supply, wall mount bracket, three prong power cord, cable connector, three cable end protectors, ten cable clips, 19" universal cable and technical information.

Specialty Lift Hinges• Specify door width and height, wood species, door style and decorative door options.

• Includes complete hinge assembly for one door.

Specialty Hinge Restrictor Clips

RESTCLIPWLS For WLS and WLSS cabinets RESTCLIPBMLS For BMLS cabinets

• Reduces opening of wall lift and stay cabinet to 75° or 100°.

• Pack of 4 (two 75°, two 100°).

RESTCLIPWBFL For WBFL and WBFLS cabinets

• Reduces opening of wall bi-fold door cabinet to 83° or 104°.

• Pack of 4 (two 83°, two 104°).

Hinges/Hardware

Hinge Restrictor Clips RESTCLIPFL

• Reduces opening angle of hinges to 86°.

• Applicable to 110° Quiet Close hinges only.

• Not applicable to angle, blind corner, square corner and lift door cabinets.

• Made of black nylon.

• It is recommended to use one restrictor for each hinge on door.

• Approximately 1mm x 1.2mm.

• Use when cabinets are against wall or another cabinet greater in depth.

• NOTE: Restrictors not recommended for use on cabinets with internal accessories; full hinge opening may be required for proper functioning of accessory.

• Pack of 10.

Lift and Stay KIT-WLSS

• Applicable to WLSS cabinets in Section 300.

Vertical Lift KIT-WVLS

• Applicable to WVLS cabinets in Section 300.

Restrictor Clip Examples

Kits including Automated Drive

• Power supply sold separately, see POWER SKU above.

• Intended for professional installation only.

• Includes drive unit, 60" universal cable, cable connector and two cable end protectors.

1200.10 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

Hinges/Hardware

For single door and butt door cabinets:• Straight arm, clip-top, press-in hinge.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAP.

■ HNG-FR-110 Includes Quiet Close■ HNG-FR-107 Non-Quiet Close

For doors hinged on partition: • Half crank, clip-top, press-in hinge.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAPTW.

• Both hinges this section are 110 degrees.

■ HNG-FR-110TW Includes Quiet Close■ HNG-FR-107TW Non-Quiet Close

For square corner cabinets: ■ HNG-FR-170 Non-Quiet Close

• Straight arm, clip-top, press-in hinge.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAP170.

• Door to cabinet hinge.

■ HNG-FR-60 Non-Quiet Close

• Bi-fold strap, clip-top, screw-on hinge.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAP.

• Door to door hinge.

For blind corner cabinets: • Clip-top, press-in hinge.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAP.

■ HNG-FR-95 Includes Quiet Close

For diagonal and transitional cabinets:• Clip-top hinge for 135° angles.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAPANG.

■ HNG-FR-110DW-SC Includes Quiet Close■ HNG-FR-110DWSCA* Includes Quiet Close

• Features tool free hinge to door attachment.

*For use with aluminum doors.

■ HNG-FR-110DW Non-Quiet Close

• Press-in hinge.

Replacement Hinge Caps• Pack of 1.

• See Hinges/Hardware section above to determine appropriate hinge cap.

Hinges/Hardware• Includes one complete hinge assembly with hinge cap.

• Clip-top hinges feature tool free attachment of door to cabinet.

• Hinges with integrated Quiet Close feature deactivation switch for small/light doors.

• Quiet Close mechanism available for hinges that do not include integrated Quiet Close, see HNG-FR-SFT below.

• Opening angle for each hinge indicated in SKU. Example: HNG-FR-110 has 110 degree opening angle. EXCEPTION: HNG-FR-107TW has 110 degree opening angle.

For diagonal and transitional cabinets:• Clip-top hinge for 45° angles.

• Features tool free hinge to door attachment.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAPANG.

■ HNG-FR-110BTA-SC Includes Quiet Close■ HNG-FR-110BTASCA* Includes Quiet Close■ HNG-FR-110BTA Non-Quiet Close*For use with aluminum doors.

For double angle cabinets:• Clip-top hinge for 671⁄2° angles.

• Replacement hinge cap: HNG-FR-CAPANG.

■ HNG-FR-110BAC-SC Includes Quiet Close■ HNG-FR-110BACSCA* Includes Quiet Close

• Features tool free hinge to door attachment.

*For use with aluminum doors.

■ HNG-FR-110BAC Non-Quiet Close

• Screw-on hinge.

HNG-FR-110

HNG-FR-107

Quiet Close Mechanism• Quiet Close 970 quiet close mechanism; for

use with Non-Quiet Close hinges.

• Pack of 1.

■ HNG-FR-SFT

Replacement Hinge Dowels■ FRDWL

• Round plastic dowel for insertion into doors.

• Applicable to press-in hinges.

• Pack of 12.

White Plastic

■ HNG-FR-CAP

Steel

■ HNG-FR-CAP170■ HNG-FR-CAPTW■ HNG-FR-CAPANG

1200.112015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTSIN THIS SECTION

Drawer Guides/Parts

Full Extension Guides

Full Extension guide system consists of ball-bearing mechanics and installs to bottom of drawer in an undermount concealed fashion. Also has ‘positive’ close feature – when closing drawer, guide system stops drawer from ‘bouncing’ back open. An easy-release mechanism provides quick removal of drawer.

• 75 lb weight capacity.

• Not available for 12" or 13" deep cabinets.

• Downgrade guide option for drawers and roll-out trays.

■ UXDSL15PI For 15" deep cabinet■ UXDSL18PI For 18" deep cabinet■ UXDSL21PI For 21" deep cabinet■ UXDSL24PI For 24" deep cabinet

Heavy Duty Quiet Close Guides

Inclusive of features of Quiet Close with additional upgrade to 135 lb. weight capacity.

• Upgrade guide option for drawers and roll-out trays.

■ USMR21HDKIT For 21" deep cabinet■ USMR24HDKIT For 24" deep cabinet

Quiet Close Guides

Inclusive of features of Full Extension system, Quiet Close hardware includes an additional mechanism which controls drawer closure in a smooth, uniform manner – drawer will not slam. This quiet-close operation takes affect approximately 2" from cabinet front when closing drawer.

• 90 lb weight capacity.

• Standard guide for drawers and roll-out trays.

■ USMR12KIT For 12" or 13" deep cabinet■ USMR15KIT For 15" deep cabinet■ USMR18KIT For 18" deep cabinet■ USMR21KIT For 21" deep cabinet■ USMR24KIT For 24" deep cabinet

Locking Clips for Guide Systems• Replacement clip for guide system; clips located on bottom of drawer boxes or roll-out trays.

• Confirm replacement clip SKU by color of existing clip.

• Choose clip for left or right guide, not interchangeable.

• Applicable to Full Extension, Quiet Close and Heavy Duty Quiet Close.

• Pack of one.

Full Extension Left Guide Right guide Adjustable (Yes/No) Clip Color Cabinet Size Drawers Roll-Outs

LKOGRYNL LKOGRYNR No Orange and Gray 9" Wide Yes NoLKOGRYL LKOGRYR No Orange and Gray 91⁄4" Wide & Greater Yes Yes

Quiet Close (Standard and Heavy Duty) Left Guide Right guide Adjustable (Yes/No) Clip Color Cabinet Size Drawers Roll-Outs

LKGRYNL LKGRYNR No Gray 9" Wide Yes NoLKOBLKL LKOBLKR No Orange and Black 91⁄4" Wide & Greater Yes YesLKOBLK4WL LKOBLK4WR Yes - 4 way Orange and Black 91⁄4" Wide & Greater Yes No

Standard DrawerNarrow Drawer

Locking Clip Examples

Drawer and Roll-Out Tray Guides

1200.12 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

1200REPLACEMENT PARTS

Spacer for Roll-Out Trays ■ SPACERSM Pack of 2, 3⁄8" ■ SPACERLG Pack of 2, 1"

Intivo Drawer/Roll-Out Tray Cover Cap■ INTCOVERW White■ INTCOVERG Gray

• White or gray cover for Intivo drawer/roll-out trays to hide adjustment hardware.

• 3" wide x 11⁄4" high.

• Pack of 1.Front

Back

Cover Cap

Drawer Guides/Parts

TABLE OF CONTENTS IN THIS SECTION

2015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.1TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 200

Straight-grain Figured ANIGRE veneer is "A" grade with quartersawn and figured face and anigre edge banding. Color ranges from cream to tan with a pinkish tinge. Features a lustrous texture with straight and often fiddleback to mottle figured grain.

Straight-grain BLACK WALNUT veneer is "A" grade heartwood with quartersawn face and black walnut edge banding. Color varies from light gray-brown to rich chocolate brown with a straight interlocked grain and medium to coarse texture.

BIRDSEYE MAPLE veneer is "A" grade sapwood with medium-heavy birdseye maple face and birdseye maple edge banding. Color is creamy white with a fine texture.

American RED GUM veneer is "A" grade on face with cherry edge banding. Color is a pinkish-brown with dark and creamy white streaks and features an irregular grain pattern.

Reconstituted ZEBRAWOOD veneer features a lustrous, straight grain and has a reconstituted face and zebrawood edge banding. Color is light golden-yellow with dark brown to almost black veins.

Premium Veneers FinishesPinot Noir Duotone Finish

Applicable to wood door styles.

ACRYLIC

COLOR MELAMINE BACKGIBSON DOOR

STYLE

Antique Ivory Ivory

Discontinued Products

DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOIL – GLOSS

COLORMELAMINE

BACK*

DOOR STYLES

BENNINGTON CALEDON CHANDLER EATON FENWICK LAWRENCE LEIGHTON LINCOLN RIDGECREST VISTA WATTSBURG WINTERBERRY

Agave Gray

Carob Black

FOIL – MATTE WITH ACCENT

COLORMELAMINE

BACK*

DOOR STYLES

BENNINGTON CALEDON CHANDLER EATON FENWICK LAWRENCE LEIGHTON LINCOLN RIDGECREST VISTA WATTSBURG WINTERBERRY

Dune with Carob Accent

Matching

Dune with Cinnamon Accent

Matching

Polar with Charcoal Accent

Matching

FOIL – WOODGRAIN / WOODGRAIN WITH ACCENT

COLORMELAMINE

BACK*

DOOR STYLES

BENNINGTON CALEDON CHANDLER EATON FENWICK LAWRENCE LEIGHTON LINCOLN RIDGECREST VISTA WATTSBURG WINTERBERRY

Blaze Applewood Matching

Blaze Applewood with Carob Accent

Matching

Buttercup Maple Matching

Golden Applewood with Carob Accent

Matching

Honeysuckle Cherry with Carob Accent

Matching

Sunset Cherry Matching

SECTION 200

Thermofoil Colors

Discontinued Products

2015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.3TABLE OF CONTENTS

Bennington (Thermofoil)

Foil – Matte with Accent 10

Material Price Group

SECTION 200

Chandler (Thermofoil)

Foil – Matte with Accent 7

Material Price Group

Havana (Premium Veneer)

Anigre 13

Bamboo 12

Beech 12

Birdseye Maple 13

Black Walnut 13

Straight-Grain Cherry 7

Straight-Grain Maple 6

Red Gum 13

Straight-Grain Red Oak 6

Rosewood 12

Sycamore 13

Wenge 13

Zebrawood 13

Material Price Group

Lawrence (Thermofoil)

Foil–Woodgrain with Accent 9

Material Price Group

Ridgecrest (Thermofoil)

Foil–Woodgrain with Accent 10

Material Price Group

Traditional Mullion (MUL)Eaton and Leighton not available with MUL in Thermofoil Gloss.

Bella not available with MUL.

From 24" to 3015⁄16" high

Discontinued Products

DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pull-Out Spice Rack, 6" Wide, 13" Deep6" Plain Front

30" High (3) X

WSRC0630 271⁄2"

6" Fluted Front

33" High (3) X

WSRC0633 301⁄2"

42" High (3) X

WSRC0642 391⁄2"

30" High (3) X

WSRCF0630 271⁄2"

36" High (3) X

WSRCF0636 331⁄2"

42" High (3) X

WSRCF0642 391⁄2"

36" High (3) X

WSRC0636 331⁄2"

39" High (3) X

WSRC0639 361⁄2"

33" High (3) X

WSRCF0633 301⁄2"

39" High (3) X

WSRCF0639 361⁄2"

315⁄16"

10 3⁄4"

X

315⁄16"

10 3⁄4"

X

SECTION 300

Base Cabinet with Pull-Out Ironing Board, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" High

B18IB

SECTION 400

Pull-Out Spice Rack, 6" Wide, 24" Deep, 341⁄2" HighPlain Front

BSCR06

Fluted FrontBSCRF06

NEW: 6" Spice Rack Filler Pull-Outs available. See BSR and BSRF in Section 400.

315⁄16"

271⁄2"

221⁄4"

Square Corner Drawer Base Cabinet, 341⁄2" High

Four Drawers

4DBSCB36 4DBSCB39

7⁄8"

NEW: 6" Spice Rack Filler Pull-Outs available. See WSR and WSRF in Section 300.

Discontinued Products

NEW: 6" Spice Rack Filler Pull-Outs available. See WSR and WSRF in Section 300.

NEW: 6" Spice Rack Filler Pull-Outs available. See BSR and BSRF in Section 400.

2015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.5TABLE OF CONTENTS

Keystone Appliqué KAL

Vanity Base Cabinet

Four Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition18" Deep

341⁄2" High (2)

18AHVB48F

32" High (2)

18VB48F

Butt Doors, One Drawer, Center Partition18" Deep

341⁄2" High (2)

18AHVB39B 18AHVB42B 18AHVB45B

32" High (2)

18VB39B 18VB42B 18VB45B

SECTION 600 SECTION 800

These cabinets are available in 21" depths, see Section 600.

Grocery Bag Storage Kit HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT SKU X Min Max

■ GBSK18 9" 115⁄8" 161⁄2"■ GBSK21 12" 145⁄8" 191⁄2"

X

185⁄8"

Cutting Board Door Rack Kit HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT SKU X Min Max

■ DMCBK15 101⁄2" 115⁄8" 161⁄2"■ DMCBK18 131⁄2" 145⁄8" 191⁄2"

X

167⁄8"

SECTION 900

Discontinued Products

DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 900

Ironing Board Kit KIT-B18IB

113⁄4"

371⁄2"

Pull-Out Spice Rack Kit, 6" Wide

Wall13" Deep X

KIT-WSRC0630 271⁄2" KIT-WSRC0633 301⁄2" KIT-WSRC0636 331⁄2" KIT-WSRC0639 361⁄2" KIT-WSRC0642 391⁄2"

Base24" Deep

KIT-BSCR06

315⁄16"

10 3⁄4"

X

315⁄16"

271⁄2" for all heights

22 1⁄4"

Ballina Aluminum Door (Clear Glass Standard)

Front Side of CabinetAluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

ADB1 SDB1 BDB1 1 ADB2 SDB2 BDB2 2 ADB3 SDB3 BDB3 3

Peninsula Side of CabinetAluminum Brushed Stainless Oil Rubbed Finish Steel Finish Bronze Finish Level

PADB1 PSDB1 PBDB1 1 PADB2 PSDB2 PBDB2 2

NEW: 6" Spice Rack Filler Pull-Outs available, see KIT-WSR and KIT-BSR in Section 900.

SECTION 1100

Deco Mullion Door — Thermofoil Doors

DECO MULLION DOOR EXAMPLESDoor Heights Up to 613⁄8"

Four outside corner lites remain 3" x 3"

Front Side of Cabinet Peninsula Side of Cabinet Level

DMUL1 PDMUL1 1 DMUL2 PDMUL2 2 DMUL3 3

Discontinued Products

2015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.7TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1100

Roll-Out Tray Modification

__DSOS 31⁄2" High

Roll-out trays are now 31⁄2" high standard.

Intivo Internal Organizer Kit

KIT-WDOTR

KIT-WDOTQ

cross dividerslateral dividers

inside dividers

bottle tray

Traditional Mullion (MUL)Eaton and Leighton not available with MUL in Thermofoil Gloss.

Bella not available with MUL.

From 24" to 3015⁄16" high

Discontinued Products

DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

DISCDISCONTINUED PRODUCT

DISC.8 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Installed Grocery Bag Storage Unit Installed Cutting Board Door Rack Unit

Doors open beyond actual hinge allowance to show

interior details.

Doors open beyond actual hinge allowance to show

interior details.

For Butt Door Cabinets

GBSML Left DoorGBSMR Right Door

For Single Door Cabinets

GBSM

For Butt Door Cabinets

DMCBML Left DoorDMCBMR Right Door

For Single Door Cabinets

DMCBM

SECTION 1100

Discontinued Products

IN.12015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

AACB Asymmetrical Corner Base w/Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24ACBHM Base Hutch Molding, Arts & Crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23ACCLV Under Cabinet Molding, Arts & Crafts Concave Light Valance. . 800.19ACPOLISH Acrylic Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3ACSTPCRN Crown Molding, Arts & Crafts Small Stepped . . . . . . . . . . 800.15ACSTPLV Under Cabinet Molding, Arts & Crafts Stepped Cove Light Valance . . 800.19ACTRM Trim Molding, Arts & Crafts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22ACW Asymmetrical Corner Wall Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20ADA Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Front, Aluminum Finish . . 1100.13ADB Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Front, Aluminum Finish. . DISC.6ADC Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Front, Aluminum Finish. . 1100.14ADD Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Front, Aluminum Finish. . 1100.15ADE Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Front, Aluminum Finish . . 1100.16AG Appliance Garage, Tambour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.13AHCVSB Vanity Sink Combination, Single, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . 600.10AHFVSB Vanity Sink Base, FH Door(s), Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.6AHV_WB Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Adult Height . . . . 600.5AHV_WBS Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Adult Height, Automated Drive . . 600.5AHVAC Double Angle Vanity Base w/FH Doors, Adult Height . . . . . 600.11AHVB Vanity Base, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.4, DISC.5AHVDB Vanity Drawer Base, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5AHVDCB Diagonal Vanity Base, Adult Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.11AHVSB Vanity Sink Base, Adult Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.7AHVSDB Vanity Sink Combination, Single, Adult Height . . . . . . . . 600.8-9AIRF Floor Mod, Add Intermediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.31AOCMD Trim Molding, Angled Outside Corner Molding . . . . . . . . . 800.22ASHF Shelf Mod, Add-A-Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.46ASSCB Asymmetrical Corner Base w/Super Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24AST Insert Molding, Astragal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16ASTBHM Base Hutch Molding, Astragal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23ASTLV Under Cabinet Molding, Astragal Light Valance. . . . . . . . . 800.19ASTLVS Under Cabinet Molding, Astragal Light Valance, Small. . . . 800.19AUTODRV Automated Drive Kit for Waste Basket Cabinets . . . . . . . . 1200.7AVAL Valance, Arch, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30AVALMLD Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Arch . .800.12,25AZTC Insert Molding, Aztec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16

BB Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.4B_HSOS Base w/Tiered Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9B_IB Base w/Pull-Out Ironing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.4B_POT Base w/Pull-Out Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11B_PP Base w/Pots & Pans Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9B_SMART Smart Storage Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.10B_TCD Base w/Tiered Cutlery Divider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.10B_TCDPP Base w/Tiered Cutlery Divider, Pots & Pans Storage . . . . . . . 400.9B_WB Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.23B_WBS Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s), Automated Drive. . . . 400.23B_WI Base w/Wicker Baskets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11BAC Double Angle Base w/FH Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.31BACFI Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7BACFO Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7BAF Filler, 45° Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.5BAMB Insert Molding, Bambusa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16BAT Trim Molding, Batten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22BATV Trim Molding, Premium Veneer, Batten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6BB Automated Drive Kit for Waste Basket Cabinets . . . . . . . . 1200.7BBC Blind Corner Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.27BBCPO Blind Corner Base w/Pull-Out Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.29BBCPORESTRICT Blind Corner Base Pull-Out Storage Restrictor Unit . . 400.29, 900.8BBI Bread Box Accessory, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42BCWS Wine Storage, Crossmate, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.13BD Drawer Base w/Glass Front Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.17BDA Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.13BDB Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish. . DISC.6BDC Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.14

BDD Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.15BDE Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Front, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.16BDW Dishwasher Base Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.20BEV Decorative Door Insert Option, Clear Beveled Glass, Front . . 1100.10BF Filler, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3BFA Overlay Filler, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4BFF Filler, Fluted, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3BFFA Overlay Filler, Fluted, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4BFH Base, FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.6BFH_CIA Angle Base, 135° Corner Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.32BFH_COA Angle Base, 135° Corner Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.32BFH_H2SOS Base w/Tiered Storage, FH Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9BFH_MX Base w/Mixer Shelf, FH Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11BFH_PP Base w/Tiered Storage, Pots & Pans Storage, FH Door(s) . . . 400.9BFH_WB Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s), FH Door . . . . . . . . . . 400.23BFH_WBS Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container(s), FH Door, Automated Drive . . 400.23BFHBBC Blind Corner Base, FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.27BFHBC Blind Corner Base w/Full Access Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.28BFHBCPO Blind Corner Base w/Pull-Out Storage, FH Door . . . . . . . . . 400.29BFHKPS Base w/Pull-Out Pantry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12BHM Base Hutch Molding, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23BIE Island End Shelf Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.35BIN Bin Replacement Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.39BIN_LID Bin Lids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.39BK Bookcase/Open Cabinet, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.10BKF Bookcase/Open Cabinet w/Frame, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.12BLFLW Insert Molding, Bellflower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17BMD Microwave, Built-In Counter Wall w/Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . 300.18BMLS Microwave, Built-In Wall w/Lift and Stay Door . . . . . . . . . . 300.18BOC Base Oven Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.21BOD Bookcase/Open Cabinet, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.11BODF Bookcase/Open Cabinet w/Frame, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.13BOLTS Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6BOM Varnish Top Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3BOND Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4BOP Blind Overlay Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.14-15 ,400.27,30BOXO Box Only Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.35BPC Base w/Pantry, FH Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.11BP-FR Bumper Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6BPS Base w/Pull-Out Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12BRC Base w/Pull-Out Recycling Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.23BRD Decorative Door Insert Option, Broad Stripe Glass, Front . . 1100.11BSCR Pull-Out Spice Rack, Plain/Fluted, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.4BSDC Spice Drawer Cabinet, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.13BSK-25QRC Recycling Center Triangular Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7BSK-B_WI Wicker Basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7BSK-WB_QT Waste Basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7BSQC Columns, Empire Square, Base, Thermofoil, Plain. . . . . . . . 800.13BSQC Columns, Empire Square, Base, Wood, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . 800.33BSQC Columns, Empire Square, Base, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . 800.4BSQC Columns, Empire Square, Base, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . 800.8BSR Base Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12BT Base w/Roll-Out Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.8BTA Transition Angle Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.31BTIPON Toe Kick Drawer Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5BTK Roll-Out Tray Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.18BTOP Butcher Block Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.36BTPEC Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Base . . . . . . . . . 1000.16BTPEC2 Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Base. . 1000.17BULLDOG Bulldog Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6BUMP Bumper Pads Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23BV Mirror/Medicine Cabinet, Bi-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13BVMC Mirror/Hardware, Bi-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7BW_D Microwave Base w/Drawer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.21BWC Wine Cubes, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.13BWDF Box Only w/Drawer Fronts Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.35BWN Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33

IN.2 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

BWN_ST Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33BZF Filler, 0° Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.5

CCAIR Crown Specialty Molding, Cairo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.18CAM Oven Panel Installation Hardware, Cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4CAMPOST Oven Panel Installation Hardware, Cam Post . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4CANE Insert Molding, Cane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17CANVAS-RC Recycling Center Canvas Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7CAP Fast Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8CAPSPL Capital w/Spool Assembly, Plain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26CBF Filler, Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CBFA Overlay Filler, Corner, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CBHM Base Hutch Molding, Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23CBL-__ Corbels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.31-32CBL_I Corbels for Wood Hoods, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.38-43CCK Cabinet Care Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3CCM Crown Molding, Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15CCV Crown Molding, Premium Veneer, Cove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6CD_D Drawer, Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.14CDCM Crown Molding, Classic, Decorative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16CDF Filler, Corner, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CDFA Overlay Filler, Corner, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CFP Appliance Panel, Plain, Compactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20CGLIDE Toe Kick Drawer Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5CHOBLOK Chopping Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7CLCM Crown Molding, Classic Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15CLIP Shelf Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6CLMHOOD_ Wood Hood Deluxe w/Columns & Corbels, Styles A-F . . 300.36-43CLMHOOD_MT Metal Trim Kit for Wood Hood, Deluxe w/Columns & Corbels . . 300.38-43CMD Trim Molding, Outside Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22CMUL Mullion Door, Eclipse, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.21CON Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.13CONHOLDER Container Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.13COV Trim Molding, Inside Cove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22CPTLESTS Capital, Estate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26CRESCRN Crown Molding, Crescent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15CRNMTS Crown Molding Mounting Strip, Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17CRNMTSUF Crown Molding Mounting Strip, Unfinished . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17CRS Decorative Door Insert Option, Cross Reeded Glass, Front . . 1100.11CRV Onlays, Carved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.27CRV_I Onlays, Carved, Installed on Plain Mantels . . . . . . . . . . .300.47,52CSBHM Base Hutch Molding, Coliseum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23CTS Counter Support Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.32CUF Filler, Corner, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CUFA Overlay Filler, Corner, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CUT Cutlery Divider Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.11CV__ Valance Mod, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.30CVF Filler, Corner, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CVFA Overlay Filler, Corner, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CVSB Vanity Sink Combination, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.10CW Counter Wall w/FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.10CWF Filler, Corner, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6CWFA Overlay Filler, Corner, Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.6

DD_WB Desk Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.7D_WBS Desk Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Automated Drive . . 700.7DACFI FIller, Inside Corner Angle, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7DACFO Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7DAG Appliance Garage, Diagonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.17DAVF Valance, Deluxe Arch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.29DB Drawer Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.14-17, 700.5DB_BB Drawer Base, Three Drawers w/Bread Board . . . . . . . . . . . 400.16DB_IG Drawer Base, Three Drawers w/Glass Front Display . . . . . . 400.17DB_PEG Drawer Base, Two Drawers w/Pegboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.15DB_TCD Drawer Base, Three Drawers w/Tiered Cutlery Divider . . . . 400.16

DB_TCD Drawer Base, Four Drawers w/Tiered Cutlery Divider . . . . . 400.17DBC Angle Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.31DBFH Diagonal Front Corner Base, FH Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26DBP Deluxe Panel, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.18DBSCB Square Corner Drawer Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.25, DISC.4DBSCB_DW Square Corner Drawer Base, Drawer Replacement. . . . . . . 1200.8DBSCBIS Square Corner Drawer Base Installation Strip . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6DBT Drawer Base w/Tiered Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9DCB Diagonal Front Corner Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26DCFP Appliance Panel, Decorative, Compactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20DCM_P Crown Molding, Pillowed, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16DCVM Crown Molding, Cove, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16DD Desk Drawer, Pencil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.6DDFP Appliance Panel, Decorative, Dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20DDFPSD Appliance Panel, Decorative, Dish Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20DDOB Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.6DDRB Desk Drawer Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.5DDSOS Roll-Out Tray, 61⁄2" Height Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.37DE Insert Molding, Dentil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17DECO Insert Molding, Deco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17DEP End Panel, 3⁄4" Thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.11DF Filler, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3DFA Overlay Filler, Desk Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4DFDB File Drawer Base, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.8DFF Filler, Fluted, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3DFFA Overlay Filler, Fluted, Desk Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4DFP Appliance Panel, Plain, Dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20DG Decorative Door Option, Clear Glass, Front . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.12DL Desk Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.9DLV Under Cabinet Molding, Decorative Light Valance . . . . . . . 800.19DLV_P Under Cabinet Molding, Pillowed Decorative Light Valance . . 800.19DMCBK Cutting Board Door Rack Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.5DMCBM Cutting Board Door Rack, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.8DMUL Mullion Door, Deco, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6DOBCUT Drawer Organizer, Cutlery Divider Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14DOCM Appliance Cut-Out Mod, Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.47DOOR Door, Square Foot Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23DORF Range Front, Drop-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.21DOSK Oven Shelf Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.10DOT Drawer Organizer Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.12-13DOU Wall Organizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.4DPOT Desk Base w/Pull-Out Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.7DRAWERFRONT Drawer Front, Square Foot Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23DRFP Appliance Panel, Decorative, Refrigerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.21DRILLTEMP Drill Template, Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6DRWFXD Drawer Downgrade to Full Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6DRWHD Drawer Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close FX . . . . . . . . . 1100.6DSB Diagonal Front Sink Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.26DSF Diagonal Sink Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.25DSOS Roll-Out Tray, 31⁄2" Height Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.7DSP Side Panel, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.10DSQC Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Thermofoil, Plain . . . 800.13DSQC Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Wood, Plain/Fluted . . 800.33DSQC Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . 800.4DSQC Columns, Empire Square, Desk Base, Premium Veneer, Plain . . 800.8DTP Deluxe Panel, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.19DTPEC Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Desk Base. . . . . 1000.16DTPEC2 Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Desk Base . . 1000.17DUC Angle Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.12DW Diagonal Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.16DWAG Diagonal Corner Counter Wall w/Tambour Garage . . . . . . 300.17DWC Angle Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.28DWP Deluxe Panel, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.18DWST Diagonal Corner Stacked Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.16DXCRN Crown Molding, Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15DXEGD Insert Molding, Deluxe Egg & Dart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17

IN.32015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

EEBND Edge Banding Material, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4EC Box Column Filler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.14ECM Edge Cap Moldings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.20EEBND Edge Banding Material, Premium Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4EGD Insert Molding, Egg & Dart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16EP End Panel w/Filler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.12EPB Extend End Panel Back Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.28EPC Decorative Door Insert Option, Epic Mirror, Front . . 600.14, 1100.11EPD Extend End Panel Down Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.29

FFBAT Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Batten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10FBHM Base Hutch Molding, Thermofoil, Small & Large . . . . . . . . 800.10FBM Under Cabinet Molding, Flush Bottom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19FCB Finished Bottom Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26FCCM Crown Molding, Thermofoil, Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9FCMD Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Outside Corner. . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10FCOV Crown Specialty Molding, Thermofoil, Inside Cove . . . . . . . 800.9FCT Finished Top Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26FDSB Diagonal Front Corner Base, FH Door, Fixed Shelf . . . . . . . 400.26FE End Treatment, Finished End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26FEBND Edge Banding Material, Acrylic/Thermofoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4FEC Box Column Filler, Fluted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.15FEP End Panel w/Fluted Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.13FFB Finished Back Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26FFD Frame & Door Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36FHME End Treatment, Matching End Mod, FH Door . . . . . . . . . 1100.27FHTM Counter Wall w/Full-Height Metal Tambour. . . . . . . . . . . . 300.13FI Matching Finished Interior Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.26FLCM Crown Molding, Thermofoil, Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9FLTS Shelves, Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.31, 900.15FMLD Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Scribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10FRDW Hinge Dowels, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.10FRS Decorative Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Front . . . . . 1100.11FSFM Crown Specialty Molding, Thermofoil, Soffit . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9FSM Trim Molding, Thermofoil, Shoe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10FSMCRN Crown Molding, Thermofoil, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9FT Feet, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.38FVSB Vanity Sink Base, FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.6

GGBSK Grocery Bag Storage Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.5GBSM Grocery Bag Storage Unit, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.8GDC Glass Door Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6GLR Decorative Door Insert Option, Glacier Glass, Front . . . . . 1100.11GNM Decorative Door Insert Option, Gunmetal Mirror, Front . . 600.14, 1100.11

HHAML Frieze Molding, Hamlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17HEAT Heat Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.10HNG-BIFOLD Hinge Kit, Bi-fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9HNG-FR-_ Hinges/Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.10HNG-FR-CAP Hinge Caps, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.10HNG-FR-SFT Quiet Close Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.10HNGNSC Hinge Downgrade Mod, Non-Quiet Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.5HNG-WLS Hinge Kit, Lift and Stay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9HNG-WVL Hinge Kit, Vertical Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9HRZ Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Horizontal Glass, Front. . 1100.11HSCR Break-Off Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8HW Feet, Aluminum, Decorative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.3HW-__ Hardware, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.19-26

II__DD Drawer Divider System, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.41IB_COVER Ironing Board Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7IBIN Bin Storage in Drawers, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.38

IBINDDSOS Bin Storage in Roll-Out Trays, Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.38ICADDY Sink Caddy, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.44ICRV Onlay Applied to Solid Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.28IDO Drawer Organizer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.40IDOD Roll-Out Tray Organizer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.40IDORG Base Door Organizer, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.44IGS Shelf Mod, Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.46IMT_ Metal Trim Kits, Installed . . . . . . . . 300.34-35,38-43,47-48,52-53INTCOVERW Intivo Drawer/Roll-Out Tray Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.12INTDRWHD Intivo Drawer Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close. . . . . . . 1100.6INTDRWW Intivo Drawer Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.7INTSOS Intivo Roll-Out Tray Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.7INTSOSHD Intivo Roll-Out Tray Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close . . 1100.6IPEG Peg Board Drawer Organization Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.41ISOS Roll-Out Tray, Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.37ISST Tilt-Down Tray, Stainless Steel, Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42ITCD Tiered Cutlery Divider, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.43

KKAL Appliqué, Keystone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.5KDI Knife Drawer Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.12KIT-__POT Pull-Out Table Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8KIT-__PP Pots & Pans Storage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.7KIT-__WB Waste Basket Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.7KIT-__WPS Pull-Out Kit, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9KIT-B__IB Ironing Board Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6KIT-BBCPO Blind Corner Base Pull-Out Storage Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8KIT-BFH__MX Mixer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.7KIT-BPS Pull-Out Kit, Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9KIT-BRC Recycling Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.7KIT-BROOMHLDR Broom Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.4KIT-BSCR Pull-Out Spice Rack Kit, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6KIT-BSR Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out Kit, Base, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . . . . . 900.9KIT-CADDY Sink Caddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6KIT-DORG Base Door Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.5KIT-HAMP__TH Hamper Kit, Tilt-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8KIT-LEGAL File Drawer Hardware, Legal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14KIT-LETTER File Drawer Hardware, Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14KIT-OCK Pull-Out Work Surface for OCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8KIT-SST Tilt-Down Tray Kit, Stainless Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6KIT-SUP Pull-Out Storage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6KIT-TCD Tiered Cutlery Divider Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.11KIT-TDW Tray Divider Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.10KIT-TDWPART Partition Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.10KIT-UPS Pull-Out Kit, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.9KIT-WBFLS Hinge Kit, Bi-fold, Automated Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9KIT-WDOT Intivo Internal Organizer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.7KIT-WLSS Hinge Kit, Lift and Stay, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9KIT-WSR Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out Kit, Wall, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . . . . . 900.9KIT-WSRC Pull-Out Spice Rack Kit, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6KIT-WVLDAG Hinge Kit, Vertical Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9KIT-WVLS Hinge Kit, Vertical Lift, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9

LLDCB Diagonal Front Corner Base w/Lazy Susan, FH Door. . . . . . 400.26LDWAGW Diagonal Corner Counter Wall w/Tambour Garage & Adj Lazy Susan . . 300.17LE Decorative Door Insert Option, Art Glass, Front . . . . . . . . 1100.10LEGCLIP Leg Leveler, Toe Kick Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5LEGLEVEL Leg Leveler, Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5LEGTOP Leg Leveler, Leg Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5LKO__ Locking Clips for Guide Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.11LLAN Insert Molding, Lillian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17LPREP Hinge Bore/Prep, Left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23LSDWW Diagonal Corner Wall w/Adjustable Lazy Susan . . . . . . . . . 300.17LVM Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Wood. . . . . . . . . . 800.19LVM Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Acrylic & Textured Melamine . . 800.4LVM Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Premium Veneer. . . 800.6

IN.4 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LVM Under Cabinet Molding, Light Valance, Thermofoil . . . . . . . 800.9LVP Light Valance Prep Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.30

MMAC Mullion Door, Prairie, Expanded Profile, Front . . . . . . . . . 1100.19MAGNETSET-SILVER Magnetic Latch/Catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.6MAVAL Valance, Mission Arch, Thermofoil/Wood. . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30MAVALMLD Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Mission . .800.12,25MBBG Bread Board Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7MCB Mullion Door, Canterbury, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.23MCO Message Center Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.45MD Modify Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.4MH Modify Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.4MIRF Floor Mod, Move Intermediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.31MK Mullion Door, Mission, Glass Lower Panel, Front . . . . . . . 1100.20MLD Trim Molding, Scribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22MP Mullion Door, Prairie, Std Profile, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.19MPOL Mullion Door, Polaris, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.24MRQCRN Crown Molding, Marquis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15MS Mullion Door, Mission, Wood Lower Panel, Front . . . . . . 1100.20MTSM Mullion Door, Transom Light, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.25MTX Decorative Door Insert Option, Matrix Glass, Front. . . . . . 1100.11MUL Mullion Door, Traditional, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.18MW Modify Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.4

NNH Hinge Bore/Prep, None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23NHR Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Horizontal Reeded Glass, Front . . 1100.11NOBUMP Bumper Pads Not Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23NON Decorative Door Insert Option, Prepared for Glass, Front . 1100.10NSH Omit Shelf Hole Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.34NVR Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Vertical Reeded Glass, Front . . 1100.11

OOC Oven/Appliance, 641⁄2" High & Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.10-11OCM Appliance Cut-Out Mod, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.47

PPADA Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish. . 1100.13PADB Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . DISC.6PADC Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . 1100.14PADD Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . 1100.15PADE Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Peninsula, Aluminum Finish . . 1100.16PALL Crown Specialty Molding, Palladian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.18PB Peninsula Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.5PBBC Peninsula Base Blind Corner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.30PBDA Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.13PBDB Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . DISC.6PBDC Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.14PBDD Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.15PBDE Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Peninsula, Oil Rubbed Bronze Finish . . 1100.16PBEV Decorative Door Insert Option, Clear Beveled Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.10PBFH Peninsula Base w/FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.7PBFHBBC Peninsula Base Blind Corner, FH Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.30PBIC Island Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.36PBRD Decorative Door Insert Option, Broad Stripe Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.11PBWN Peninsula End Shelf Unit, Radius Top, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33PBWN_ST Peninsula End Shelf Unit, Square Top, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.33PC Tall w/Pantry Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.8PCM Pipe Chase Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.35PCMUL Mullion Door, Eclipse, Peninsula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.21PCRS Decorative Door Insert Option, Cross Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.11PDEP End Panel, Peninsula, 3⁄4" Thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.11PDG Decorative Door Option, Clear Glass, Peninsula . . . . . . . . 1100.12PDMUL Mullion Door, Deco, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.6PDW Peninsula Diagonal Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.16PEGFOOT Pegboard, Rubber Peg Feet/Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14

PEGKIT Pegboard Drawer Organizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14PEGPOSTKIT Pegboard, Replacement Post Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.14PEN Universal Shelving Peninsula Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15PEPC Decorative Door Insert Option, Epic Mirror, Peninsula . . . 1100.11PERG Frieze Molding, Pergola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17PERS Crown Specialty Molding, Persia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.18PFRS Decorative Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Peninsula. . 1100.11PGLR Decorative Door Insert Option, Glacier Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.11PGNM Decorative Door Insert Option, Gunmetal Mirror, Peninsula . . 1100.11PHRZ Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Horizontal Glass, Peninsula . .1100.11PLE Decorative Door Insert Option, Art Glass, Peninsula . . . . . 1100.10PLYBOX Plywood Construction Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.5PMAC Mullion Door, Prairie, Expanded Profile, Peninsula . . . . . . 1100.19PMCB Mullion Door, Canterbury, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.23PMK Mullion Door, Mission, Glass Lower Panel, Peninsula . . . . 1100.20PMP Mullion Door, Prairie, Std Profile, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.19PMPOL Mullion Door, Polaris, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.24PMS Microwave Shelf Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.19PMS Mullion Door, Mission, Wood Lower Panel, Peninsula . . . 1100.20PMTSM Mullion Door, Transom Light, Peninsula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.25PMTX Decorative Door Insert Option, Matrix Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.11PMUL Mullion Door, Traditional, Peninsula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.18PMW Microwave Shelf, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.19PNHR Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Horizontal Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.11PNL Panels, Veneered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.8-9PNLE Wood Tops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.24PNON Decorative Door Insert Option, Prepared for Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.10PNVR Decorative Door Insert Option, Narrow Vertical Reeded Glass, Peninsula. . 1100.11POWER Power Supply, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 300.21-23 ,1200.9PPTN Decorative Door Insert Option, Patina Mirror, Peninsula. . 1100.11PRH Range Hood, Vent-A-Hood® Stainless Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.60PRHC Peninsula Chimney Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.50PRHCWC Peninsula Chimney Component, Wainscot. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.50PRHDAVF Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . . . . 300.53PRHDAVFMT Metal Trim Kit for Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . 300.53PRHM Peninsula Mantel Component, Plain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.52PRHMDX Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.52PRHMDXMT Metal Trim Kit for Peninsula Mantel Component, Deluxe. . 300.52PRHMMT Metal Trim Kit for Peninsula Mantel Component, Plain . . . 300.52PRHSDX Peninsula Chimney Component, Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.50PRHTDX Peninsula Transition Component, Straight Deluxe . . . . . . . 300.51PRHTDXAF Peninsula Transition Component, Angled Deluxe . . . . . . . . 300.51PRHTR Peninsula Transition Component, Angled Plain . . . . . . . . . 300.51PRHTWC Peninsula Transition Component, Angled Wainscot . . . . . . 300.51PRIN Decorative Door Insert Option, Rain Glass, Peninsula . . . . 1100.11PRVVAL Valance, Provincial, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30PRVVALMLD Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Provincial . .800.12,25PSA PSA Skins/Sheet Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4PSCW Peninsula Square Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20PSDA Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.13PSDB Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . DISC.6PSDC Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.14PSDD Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.15PSDE Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Peninsula, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.16PSDY Decorative Door Insert Option, Seedy Glass, Peninsula. . . 1100.11PSKF Shelf Kit, Peninsula, Matching Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.17PSKS Shelf Kit, Peninsula, Melamine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.16PSS Profile Solid Stock Moldings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.21PSS_MLD Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Profile Solid Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.24PSTD Decorative Door Insert Option, Standard Mirror, Peninsula . . 1100.11PTDC Base w/Pull-Out Tray Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12PTFRS Aluminum Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Peninsula. . 1100.13-15PTHRZ Aluminum Door Insert Option, Horizontal Reeded Glass, Peninsula. . 1100.13-15PTN Decorative Door Insert Option, Patina Mirror, Front . . 600.14, 1100.11PTVRT Aluminum Door Insert Option, Vertical Reeded Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.13-15PVRT Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Vertical Glass, Peninsula . . 1100.11PW Peninsula Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.6PWBC Peninsula Blind Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.15PWN Peninsula Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.31PWN_ST Peninsula Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.31

IN.52015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PWTR Decorative Door Insert Option, Water Glass, Peninsula. . . 1100.11PXMUL Mullion Door, Chi, Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.22

QQTFM Finish Material, Quart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3

RRAVAL Valance, Roman, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30RAVALMLD Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Roman. . .800.12,25RB Cooktop Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.22RBCB Base w/Pull-Out Chopping Block & Roll-Out Trays . . . . . . . 400.22RBHM Base Hutch Molding, Rook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23RBMOP Microwave/Oven Panels, Replacement, Base . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4RCFP Appliance Panel, Raised, Compactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20RCRN Crown Molding, Renaissance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15RDFP Appliance Panel, Raised, Dishwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20REPFLR Replacement Fillers & Overlay Fillers for Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out . . 1200.5RESTCLIP Hinge Restrictor Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.9RFP Appliance Panel, Plain, Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20RHAMPBAG Hamper Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8RHBVE Vent-A-Hood® Back Venting Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.62RHC Chimney Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.45RHCWC Chimney Component, Wainscot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.45RHDAVF Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.48RHDAVFMT Metal Trim Kit for Mantel Component, Deluxe Arch Valance . . 300.48RHDX_ Wood Hood, Deluxe, Style A or B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.32-35RHDX_MT Metal Trim Kit for Wood Hood, Deluxe, Style A or B . . 300.34-35RHLNR Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.57-58RHLNRP Vent-A-Hood® Blower/Liner Units, Island/Peninsula . . . . . . 300.59RHM Mantel Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.47RHMDX Mantel Component, Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.47RHMDXMT Metal Trim Kit for Mantel Component, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . 300.47RHMMT Metal Trim Kit for Mantel Component, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . 300.47RHRJ Vent-A-Hood® Roof Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.62RHSDX Chimney Component, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.45RHTDX Transition Component, Straight Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46RHTDXAF Transition Component, Angled Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46RHTR Transition Component, Angled Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46RHTRANS Vent-A-Hood® Combination Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.61RHTWC Transition Component, Angled Wainscot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.46RHWL Vent-A-Hood® Wall Louver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.62RIN Decorative Door Insert Option, Rain Glass, Front . . . . . . . 1100.11RK Touch-Up Kit, Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3RKPG Touch-Up Kit, Specialty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3RND Under Cabinet Molding, Round Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.19ROS Rosettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.28ROSSQ Appliqué, Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.28RP Insert Molding, Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.16RPREP Hinge Bore/Prep, Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.23RRFP Appliance Panel, Raised, Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.20RTS Toe Space Added to Side or Back Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.33RU Oven Panels, Replacement, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4RWM Microwave Panels, Replacement, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4

SSB Sink Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.18SB_SM Sink Base w/Sink Mat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.18SB_SMDORG Sink Base w/Sink Mat & Door Organizers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.18SB_TDT Sink Base w/Tilt-Down Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.19SBA Sink Base, Apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.20SBAOP Sink Base Apron Overlay Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.5SBD Sink Base, Functional Bottom Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.19SBD_PP Base w/Pots & Pans Storage, Bottom Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.9SBDO Sink Base or Base Door Organizer Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.5SBDOM Sink Base or Base Door Organizer, Installed . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.44SBFH Sink Base w/FH Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.19SBHM Base Hutch Molding, Santorini. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23

SCB Square Corner Base w/Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24SCSF Square Corner Sink Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.25SCW Square Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20SDA Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Bellagio, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.13SDB Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Ballina, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . DISC.6SDC Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Carlton, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.14SDD Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Catania, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.15SDE Decorative Door Option, Aluminum, Brava, Front, Brushed Stainless Steel Finish . . 1100.16SDH Spice Drawers, Horizontal, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.26SDI Spice Drawer Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.11SDV Spice Drawers, Vertical, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.26SDY Decorative Door Insert Option, Seedy Glass, Front . . . . . . 1100.11*SERVOWB Automated Kit for Waste Basket Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7SF Sink Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.20SHDWR Shallow Top Drawer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36SHELF-__ Universal Shelving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15SHF Shelf Edge Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.46SHKM Crown Molding, Shaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15SHKV Crown Molding, Premium Veneer, Straight/Shaker . . . . . . . 800.6SINKMAT Sink Mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6SKDWTG Shelf Kit, Glass, Diagonal Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15SKF Shelf Kit, Matching Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.17SKS Shelf Kit, Melamine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.16SKWTG Shelf Kit, Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.15SLAB Slab Drawer Front Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36SM Trim Molding, Shoe, Large. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22SMCRN Crown Molding, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15SOSFXD Roll-Out Tray Downgrade to Full Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.6SOSHD Roll-Out Tray Upgrade to Heavy Duty Quiet Close . . . . . . . 1100.6SPACER Roll-Out Tray Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.12SPOOL Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26*SPRAY Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4SPRAYADH Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.4SPRAYFINISH Spray Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3SRK Spice Rack Kit, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.5SSCB Square Corner Base w/Super Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.24SSHPCG Range Hood by Broan, Stainless Steel, Ceiling Mount . . . . 300.63SSHSV Range Hood by Broan, Stainless Steel, Wall Mount . . . . . . 300.63SSM Trim Molding, Shoe, Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22STARTMLD Starter Molding, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.18STARTMLD Starter Molding, Acrylic & Textured Melamine . . . . . . . . . . . 800.4STARTMLD Starter Molding, Premium Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.6STARTMLD Starter Molding, Thermofoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.9STD Decorative Door Insert Option, Standard Mirror, Front. . . 1100.11STPCRN Crown Molding, Stepped Cove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15SUPPORT Sink/Granite Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.6SVAL Valance, Straight, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30SZ Sub-Zero Refrigerator Appliance Panels . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.22-23

TTB Base w/Tray Divider, FH Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12TCR Touch-Up Crayon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3TDC Base w/Tray Dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400.12TDFB File Drawer Base, Double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.8TDW Tray Divider Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42TDWPART Partition Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.42TFRS Aluminum Door Insert Option, Frosted Glass, Front . . 1100.13-15THRZ Aluminum Door Insert Option, Horizontal Reeded Glass, Front . . 1100.13-15TK Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23TKC Toe Kick Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23TKD Toe Kick Drawer Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.33TKF Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Thermofoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10TKF Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Acrylic & Textured Melamine . . 800.4TKHC Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Wood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.23 TKHCF Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Thermofoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.10TKHCF Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Acrylic & Textured Melamine . . 800.4TKHCSS Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Stainless Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.3

IN.6 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TKHCV Toe Kick Material, 9" High, Premium Veneer. . . . . . . . . . . . 800.7TKL Toe Kick Shipped Loose Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32TKSS Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Stainless Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.3TKV Toe Kick Material, 41⁄2" High, Premium Veneer . . . . . . . . . . 800.7TMBDR Tambour Door and Guides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.8TOCM Appliance Cut-Out Mod, Triple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.47TOEMLD Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Thermofoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.11TOEMLD Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.24TOEMLD Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Acrylic & Textured Melamine . . . . 800.5TOEMLD Toe Kick Molding, Flush, Premium Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.7TPB Capital, Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26TPM Split Post Molding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.26TRM Trim Molding, Decorative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.22TRNLEG Leg, Decorative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.34-37TSA Toe Space Added Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32TSLLV Toe Space Leg Leveler System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32TSR Toe Space Removed Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.32TT Vanity Wall w/Open Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13TTK Roll-Out Tray Kit, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.18TUPEN Touch-Up Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.3TV Mirror/Medicine Cabinet, Tri-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13TVMC Mirror/Hardware, Tri-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.7TVRT Aluminum Door Insert Option, Vertical Reeded Glass, Front . . 1100.13-15

UUA9 Univeral Access Toe Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.33UACFI Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7UACFO Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7UC_DB Tall w/Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.6UCCSM Charging Station Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.45UCL Lighting Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.3UCS Tall w/Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.5UF Filler, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3UFA Overlay Filler, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4UFF Filler, Fluted, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3UFFA Overlay Filler, Fluted, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4UFH 641⁄2" High, Utility, FH Door(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.4UINV Invert Face of Tall Cabinet Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36UPS Pull-Out Storage Cabinet, 641⁄2" High & Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.9US Bookcase/Open Cabinet, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.11USF Bookcase/Open Cabinet w/Frame, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.13USMR_HDKIT Guide Kit, Heavy Duty Quiet Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.11USMR_KIT Guide Kit, Quiet Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.11USQC Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Thermofoil, Plain . . . . . . . . 800.13USQC Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Wood, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . . 800.33USQC Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . 800.4USQC Columns, Empire Square, Tall, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . . 800.8UT Tall w/Roll-Out Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.7UTPEC Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Tall . . . . . . . . . . 1000.16UTPEC2 Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Tall. . 1000.17UWN Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.13UWN_ST Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Tall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500.13UXDSL_PI Guide Kit, Full Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.11

VV_WB Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5V_WBS Vanity Base w/Pull-Out Waste Container, Automated Drive . . 600.5VAC Double Angle Vanity Base w/FH Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.11VACFI Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7VACFO Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7VAL Valance, Scallop, Thermofoil/Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800.14,30VALMLD Toe Kick Molding, Decorative, Thermofoil/Wood, Scallop . .800.12,25VB Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.4, DISC.5VBPNL Wainscot Plywood Panel, Beaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.9VDB Vanity Drawer Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.5VDCB Diagonal Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.11VF Filler, Vanity Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3

VFA Overlay Filler, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4VFF Filler, Fluted, Vanity Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3VFFA Overlay Filler, Fluted, Vanity Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4VLCD Vanity Linen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.12VLCDTH Vanity Linen w/Hamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.12VRT Decorative Door Insert Option, Reeded Vertical Glass, Front . . 1100.11VSB Vanity Sink Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.7VSDB Vanity Sink Combination, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.8-9VSQC Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Thermofoil, Plain . . 800.13VSQC Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Wood, Plain/Fluted . . 800.33VSQC Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain . . 800.4VSQC Columns, Empire Square, Vanity Base, Premium Veneer, Plain . . 800.8VTPEC Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Vanity Base. . . . 1000.16VTPEC2 Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Vanity Base. . 1000.17VWC Vanity Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600.13VWCM Vanity Wall w/Standard Mirror, Specialty Mirror Options . . 600.14

WW Wall, 13" & 24" Deep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.4-5,7W_CIA Angle Wall, 135° Corner Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.29W_COA Angle Wall, 135° Corner Outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.29W2D Counter Wall w/Two Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.11WAC13 Double Angle Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.28WAC24 Angle Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.28WACFI Filler, Inside Corner Angle, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7WACFO Filler, Outside Corner Angle, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.7WAG Counter Wall w/Tambour Appliance Garage . . . . . . . . . . . 300.13WBC Blind Corner Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.14WBFL Wall w/Bi-Fold Lift Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.23WBFLS Wall w/Bi-Fold Lift Doors, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.23WCI Wainscot Interior Back of Cabinet Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.34WCRN_P Crown Molding, Pillowed Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15WCVM Crown Molding, Wide Cove Large. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.15WCWS Wine Storage, Crossmate, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.25WDC Counter Wall w/One Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.10WDG Counter Wall w/Three Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.11WDO Wall w/Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700.4WDSR Spice Door Rack, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.26WF Filler, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3WFA Overlay Filler, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4WFF Filler, Fluted, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.3WFFA Overlay Filler, Fluted, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.4WGH Wine Glass Holder, Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.4WHTCS White Melamine Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.5WISTR Frieze Molding, Wisteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800.17WLS Wall w/Lift and Stay Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.22WLSS Wall w/Lift and Stay Door, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 300.22WMC Message Center Wall Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.8WMCKEY Key Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.4WN Shelf End Unit, Radius Top, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.30WN_ST Shelf End Unit, Square Top, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.30WN_STB Shelf End Unit, Square Top & Bottom, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.30 WODSCW Square Corner Wall, Open Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.20WOODLSK Lazy Susan Kit, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900.8WPR Wall w/Plate Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.8WPS Wall w/Pull-Out Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.27WSQC Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Thermofoil, Plain. . . . . . . . 800.13WSQC Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Wood, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . 800.33WSQC Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Acrylic & Textured Melamine, Plain. . . 800.4WSQC Columns, Empire Square, Wall, Premium Veneer, Plain . . . . 800.8WSR Wall Spice Rack Filler Pull-Out, Plain/Fluted . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.27WSRC Pull-Out Spice Rack, Plain/Fluted, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC.4WST Stacked Wall Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.9WTC Wood Tops, Clipped Corner Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.24WTD Two Drawer/Drawer Front Mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.36WTPEC Box Column Filler w/Split Post, 3" Wide, Wall . . . . . . . . . 1000.16WTPEC2 Box Column Filler w/Split Post & Capital/Spool, 2" Wide, Wall . . 1000.17

IN.72015–16 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LD072015

WTR Decorative Door Insert Option, Water Glass, Front. . . . . . 1100.11WVL Wall w/Vertical Lift Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.21WVLDAG Counter Wall w/Vertical Lift Door Appliance Garage . . . . . 300.12WVLS Wall w/Vertical Lift Door, Automated Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.21WWC Wine Cubes, Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.24

XXMUL Mullion Door, Chi, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.22

IN.8 DESIGN-CRAFT SPECIF ICATION GUIDE 2015–16

ININDEX BY PRODUCT CODE

Great design.Greater capacity.

Design-Craft® cabinets by Elkay® have more space

inside, for everything. It’s the look you want, with

the space your family needs.

AMERICAN PRIDE. A LIFETIME TRADITION.

Like your family, the Elkay family has values and traditions

that endure. For almost a century, Elkay has been an American,

family-owned and operated company, providing thousands

of jobs that support our families and communities.

© 2015 Elkay Manufacturing Company LITCSPC-DC (06 15) 3.5K

FRONT COVER

Pike’s Peak | textured melamine | Cobblestone

Gibson | acrylic | Gardenia

Get more at:

DesignCraftCabinets.com

10501 10th Street | Waconia, MN 55387

Telephone: 800-779-0391

Fax: 630-645-4434

Design-Craft manufactured by

Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association

Environmental Stewardship ProgramAll products impact the environment.

For ESP program criteria, visit greencabinetsource.org